JP2020089511A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of simplifying a game control.SOLUTION: A game machine includes game control means for controlling the progress of a game. The game control means includes calculation means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game, and the program includes various instructions for performing a predetermined operation and necessary data for executing the instructions. The various instructions include specific process execution instructions for executing a specific process among processes defined by the program. The calculation means prohibits interruptions when executing the specific process by the specific process execution instruction, and cancels prohibition of the interruptions when the specific process is completed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachi-slot machine”).

In recent game machines, complicated game control is required. Along with this, there is a concern that the program may become complicated, and the process has been simplified (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-185203, A

In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, the lottery table and the lottery process are simplified by devising the extraction range of the random numbers, but it is necessary to deal with each process, and it is not possible to simplify the entire game control. It was difficult.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of simplifying a game control program by simplifying a frequently used procedure.

A gaming machine comprising game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
The game control means comprises a computing means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
The program is configured to include various instructions for performing a predetermined operation and data necessary for executing the instructions,
The various instructions include a specific process execution instruction for executing a specific process among the processes defined by the program,
The arithmetic means automatically disables interrupts when executing the specific processing by the specific processing execution instruction, maintains an interrupt disabled state from the start to the end of the specific processing, and ends the specific processing at the end of the specific processing. A game machine characterized by automatically returning to a state before execution of an execution instruction.

In the above configuration, interrupts are automatically disabled when a specific process is executed, the interrupts are disabled while the specific process is being executed, and after the specific process is executed, the interrupt status before the process is automatically executed is automatically set. The specific processing execution instruction (INVI instruction) that enables the automatic return is provided. As a result, when the specific processing is executed by the specific processing execution instruction in the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the interrupt disabled can be released without explicitly executing the interrupt disabled release instruction. In this way, since it is not necessary to execute the interrupt prohibition instruction and the interrupt prohibition cancellation instruction, the game control can be simplified and the program capacity can be compressed (see FIG. 391, paragraph [3696] and the like).

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that solves the above problems and can simplify a game control program.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is the front view which cut the front component in the game board and the front unit in the center of the front and back direction inside the game territory. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of a serial communication circuit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. 22 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 21. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a character ratio calculation/display process. 25 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the accessory ratio calculation/display process of FIG. 24. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning of the program (code) and data stored in ROM and RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the structure of an accessory ratio indicator. It is a figure which shows the structure of a driver circuit. FIG. 6 is a timing chart of data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio indicator. It is a figure which shows a load register selection table. It is a figure which shows a character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the accessory ratio. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of a prize ball, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area|region for base calculation. It is a front view showing another example of a game board. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2. It is a flow chart which shows another example of timer interruption processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4. It is a flow chart which shows an example of base display processing. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation processing 4. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base display processing. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection of a discharge ball sensor and a main control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a main control I/O port. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a main control I/O port. It is a timing diagram in the example of a structure of the main control I/O port shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the change of the state (section) concerning calculation of a base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 101. It is a figure which shows the structure of the area|region for base calculation. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of base display data generation processing. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows the calculation of the base when a game state switches. It is a figure which shows the structure regarding a storage area among the internal structures of the main control MPU1311. It is a figure showing an example of a program of timer interruption processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure showing an example of a program of timer interruption processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning of the program (code) and data stored in ROM and RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history recorded in the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an error screen. It is a figure which shows the example of an error signal. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure showing an example of a game history. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a peripheral control board and its periphery. It is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back in the opened state. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 from the back in the closed state. It is a figure which shows the setting part of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a setting part. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown in FIG. 135 from back. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of special design and special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of special symbol fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of special symbol change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of fluctuation pattern selection judging processing. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a normal state and the result of the special lottery is out. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production|presentation performed in the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29 in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. 150A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is a short-time state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. FIG. 151 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A′ in FIG. 151(B). It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. It is a timing diagram of a security signal. It is a flow chart which shows another example of initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a setting confirmation process. It is another example of the fluctuation pattern table. It is an example of a final reserved color table. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retention color is determined by the final retention color table of FIG. 161, a table showing the appearance rate of each final retention color for each variation pattern of setting 1 is displayed. This is an example. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retention color is determined by the final retention color table of FIG. 161, a table showing the appearance rate of each final retention color for each variation pattern of setting 3 is displayed. This is an example. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retention color is determined by the final retention color table of FIG. 161, a table showing the appearance rate of each final retention color for each variation pattern of setting 5 is displayed. This is an example. It is an example of a notice production table. It is an example of a dialogue production table. It is another example of the notice production table. It is an example of a setting suggestion effect table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the setting suggestion production as a prefetching production. (A) is an example of a setting confirmation mode effect restriction table, and (B) is an example of an error occurrence effect restriction table. It is an example of a new start winning effect restriction table. It is an example of a processing table 1. It is an example of a processing table 2. It is an example of a processing table 3. It is an example of a processing table 4. It is an example of a processing table 5. It is an example of a processing table 6. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 8 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the other example 1. 8 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the other example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a performance display process of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the alerting|reporting aspect of example 1 of another. It is a figure which shows the alerting priority of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a RAM abnormal time initialization process of another example 1. 8 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the other example 1. 8 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the other example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a setting process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a setting display process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on setting process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a random number update process 2 of another example 1. 8 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the other example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a switch input process 1 of another example 1. FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. is there. 199(A) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 199(B) is another configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a setting change/confirmation process of another example 1. FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2 of another example 1, and FIG. 201(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of another example 1. 202(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 1, FIG. 202(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on return destination command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value command of another example 1. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a transmission order of commands of another example 1. 9 is a diagram showing a state transition of a setting state management area of another example 1. FIG. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold value table of example 1 of another. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold value table of example 1 of another. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold value table of example 1 of another. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process according to another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process according to another example 2. 13 is a flowchart of a setting value confirmation process of another example 2. It is a flow chart of RAM confirmation processing outside the game area at power-on of another example 2. It is a flow chart of RAM out-of-game area processing of another example 2. 13 is a flowchart of a non-use area RWM initialization process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on setting process of another example 2. FIG. 220(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting state management area of another example 2, and FIG. 220(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 2. 220(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side of the second example. 9 is a flowchart of a power-off process according to the second example. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a setting process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a setting display process of another example 2. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 3. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 3. 13 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side of the third example. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for setting change process of another example 3. It is a flow chart of a timer interruption process for base games of another example 3. 13 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side of another example 4. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for setting change process of another example 4. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center accessory of the front unit of the game board and the front production unit, and was seen from the front. It is a front view showing a state in which the first design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit. It is a front view showing a state in which a second design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that the picture seen by plane is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that the picture seen by plane is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that a pattern which is stereoscopically viewed is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that a pattern which is stereoscopically viewed is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a circuit diagram around a synchronous serial interface of the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection of a serial/parallel conversion circuit and LED. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning on the main control board of the main control MPU and a peripheral component. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of the port in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the output of data by a synchronous serial signal, and the timing of acquisition. It is a figure which shows another arrangement|positioning of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a figure which shows another arrangement|positioning of the main control board in a main control board box. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the slot machine. FIG. 38 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member opened. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing a configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members and the like included in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the memory area provided by ROM, RAM, etc. in this embodiment, and the detail of a ROM area. It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area of this embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset activation process executed when the slot machine is reset. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of regular processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of information signal N output processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a game board. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of a character accessory. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of a snowman accessory, (A) is a figure seen from the front and (B) is seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a character accessory. It is the figure which looked at the cover member of a character role product from the back side. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory board of a character accessory. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board in the cover member of a character accessory, and shows the back surface side of a character accessory board. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the light-emitting body and the transmissive part and non-transmissive part of a cover member in a character accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the light guide member which diffuses the light from the light emission body in a character accessory. It is a figure which shows the front surface side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of the modification 1. It is a figure showing the state where the character accessory board was stored in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 1, and is a figure showing the back side of the character accessory board. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the light-emitting body and the transmissive part and non-transmissive part of a cover member in the character accessory of a modification. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character role product board|substrate of the character role thing of the modification 2, and shows the state in which the character role product board and the light guide member have overlapped. It is a figure showing the state where a character accessory board was stored in a cover member of a character accessory board of modification 2, and is a figure showing the back side of a character accessory board. It is a figure which shows the state which attached the character accessory of the modification 2 to the game board. It is a figure which shows the cross section of a snowman character. It is a figure which shows the front side cover member of a snowman character. It is a figure which shows the back side cover member of a snowman character. It is a figure which shows the front side of the snowman board|substrate of a snowman character. It is a figure which shows the back side of the snowman board|substrate of a snowman character. It is the figure which looked at the horizontal cross section of a snowman character from above. It is the figure which looked at the cross section in the horizontal direction of the snowman character object in a modification from the top. It is the functional block diagram which explains the constitution and outline of the function in order to execute production control. It is a figure showing an example of production block data, scheduler data, and production device drive data, (A) shows production block data, (B) shows scheduler data, and (C) shows production device drive data. It is a diagram showing an example of a module configuration in a peripheral control unit of the gaming machine. It is the explanation drawing which shows the basic concept of production control in the game machine. It is the figure which explains the constitution until the data which is necessary for production control of the game machine is acquired. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of a step-up notice. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of scheduler data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of a sound module. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of a lamp module. It is a figure showing an example of a function of sequence control in production control of a game machine. It is the figure which shows one example of the function of the lamp and the sound in the production control of the game machine. It is the figure which shows one example of the function such as sound and motor in the production control of the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a scheduler definition. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement of the accessory which is controlled using scheduler data. It is the figure which shows the execution timing of the notice production which is executed in the series of fluctuation display from the fluctuation start of the special design until it stops, shows one example of the scheduler and the scheduler data which are used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which performs lighting/blinking control of the lamp in advance notice of step-up. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls the lamp in a button cut-in advance notice. It is a figure explaining the whole flow in a starry thing notice, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls a left starry thing. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls the right star role thing in a star role thing notice. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls a middle star role thing in a star role thing notice. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs motor control in a logo accessory fall notice. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data performed when the power supply of a game machine is turned on. It is a figure explaining the structure for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the gaming machine, and the relationship between these structures. It is a figure explaining the process of performing scheduler data at the time of power-on. It is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of variable display from the start of variation of the special symbol to the stop, (A) is the effect executed from the start of variation to the end and scheduler data for executing the effect And (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the board member in the trailer for the board member falling notice. It is a figure explaining the content of the button data first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which performs the motor control in the first half notice of the hook product fall notice. It is a figure explaining the first half of the Kakuyoke late fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the Kakuyoke late fall notice which is the latter half of the Kakuyoke fall notice. It is a figure explaining the latter half of the Kakuyoke latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the latter half notice of the Kakuyoke falling notice. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal production block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by variation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal production block data corresponding to a variation pattern command. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal pattern block data corresponding to a fluctuation pattern command. It is a figure explaining the sub production block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by change pattern which stores the combination of the sub production block data corresponding to a change pattern command. It is a figure explaining an outline of production control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of fluctuation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of sub production block data control start processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of sub production block data control starting processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of sub production block data control renewal processing. It is a figure explaining the procedure which performs notice production in the change display corresponding to change pattern "10H03H", (A) the timing which performs notice production, and the execution time of the notice production concerned, (B) executes notice production. The scheduler data driven by each scheduler in order to do so is shown. It is the figure which explains the relationship between the liquid crystal production block data classified by fluctuation pattern and the liquid crystal design block data classified by fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the image which creates the data file for drawing of the step-up advance notice for liquid crystal displays by a step-up production unit (step-up 1 production-4 production) with a video synthesis/motion creation graphic tool. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect block data of step-up notice, (A) shows the structure of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of step-up notice sub effect block data. It is a figure explaining an example of production control based on production block data of a modification, (A) is an example of production block data, and (B) is a figure explaining the execution timing of each scheduler data. It is a figure showing an example of a scheduler function for liquid crystal production. It is a figure showing an example of a parameter for a liquid crystal production scheduler function. It is a figure showing an example of a parameter for a liquid crystal production scheduler function. 13 is a flowchart of initialization processing of another example 5. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the initialization process of Modification 5 of FIG. 339. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of another example 5. It is a figure explaining an example of the winning information transmitted from the main control board to the ball information control board. It is a figure explaining an example of the table which defines the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning opening. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of including a prize ball number in winning information, (A) totals the number of winnings for every general winning a prize, (B) aggregates general winning a prize, and totals the number of winnings. This is the case. It is a figure which shows the example which memorize|stored winning information in winning order. It is a figure showing an example of game information transmitted from a main control board to a sphere information control board, (A) is an example of winning information, and (B) is an example of main control recognition information. It is a figure which shows another example of the game information transmitted from a main control board to a ball information control board. It is a diagram illustrating communication between the main control board and the ball information control board when the gaming machine is activated. It is a figure which shows the case where there is no response from the sphere information control board to the notification from the main control board in the communication between the main control board and the sphere information control board. It is a figure which shows another example when there is no response from the sphere information control board to the notification from the main control board in the communication between the main control board and the sphere information control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory area allocated to main control built-in RAM in game control. It is a figure which shows an example of the data area contained in an input information storage area, (A) shows input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), (B) shows a prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of switch input processing which acquires information detected by a sensor etc. with which a game machine was provided. It is a flow chart explaining the procedure of special winning opening opening processing. It is a timing chart explaining processing of each composition when a game ball wins a big winning opening. It is a timing chart explaining the process of each component when a game ball wins the second starting opening. It is a timing chart explaining the process of each structure when a game ball wins a probability variation area (V-AT area). It is a figure explaining the outline of a bit transfer procedure. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the instruction code for performing a bit transfer instruction. It is a figure which shows an example of the kind of bit transfer instruction. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the process which uses the bit transfer instruction "RBT". FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a program corresponding to the flowchart (FIG. 361) of the process using the bit transfer instruction “RBT”. It is an example of a flowchart in which the index creation process is made into a subroutine, (A) is a process of a caller of the index creation process, and (B) is a subroutined index creation process. It is a figure explaining an example of a table structure. It is a figure explaining the detailed procedure of a bit transfer instruction, and is a figure explaining the case where independent data is read from the table to refer. It is a figure explaining the detailed procedure of a bit transfer instruction, and is a figure explaining the case where data is read continuously from the table to refer. It is a figure explaining the bit transfer instruction|indication with respect to the data whose size is larger than 1 byte, (A) is a figure which shows the table referred, (B) is a figure explaining a procedure. It is a figure explaining the example of application of a bit transfer instruction, (A) is a figure explaining the relation of the range corresponding to a fluctuation pattern, (B) is a program code which shows a fluctuation pattern table, (C) is in (B). It is a figure explaining an example of the structure of the table before compression and the table after compression about a corresponding fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure which selects a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the program which selects a fluctuation pattern. It is a diagram showing an example of an address map showing a configuration of a storage area of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the program implementation example of the process address table in which the address of the process (subroutine) was stored. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the index which identifies the process stored in the address stored in the process address table. It is a figure explaining operation|movement at the time of INVD command execution. It is a figure explaining the procedure which specifies the process called by the INVD command. It is a figure which shows the example of a program of a port reading process (PORT_RD). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of data setting processing (DAT_SET). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of 2-byte data search processing (LD_HLA_HL). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of the big hit information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET), the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and the command storing process (COM_SET). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of output determination common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of output determination common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of an output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of fluctuation information number search processing (TI_SRCH). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of an injustice notification setting process (ILG_OUTSET). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of a data search process (HLA_SRCH). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of a multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL). It is a figure which shows the example of a program of multiplication value addition address acquisition processing SPI2 byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA). It is the figure which extracted a part of program which calls the process by INVS command, (A) is the program which extracted the part which calls a solenoid drive process and a motor drive process, (B) is a program example of a solenoid drive process (one Parts) and (C) show a program example (a part) of the motor drive processing. It is a figure explaining the procedure of an INVI command. It is a figure which shows an example of PSW, (A) is a structure of PSW, (B) is description of each structure. It is a figure which shows the example of a program explaining the arrangement|positioning of the process called by the INVI command, (A) shows the example of a program of the area|region from which a process is read, (B) shows the example of a program of the substance of a process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing using various call instructions. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing at the time of game stop in timer interruption processing. It is an example of a program code of the game stop process in the timer interrupt process.

A pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the body frame and the body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the door frame 3, the game board 5, It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled into the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 and was seen from back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other, and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the curtain plate member 50. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back, and a game attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to a left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 which is attached to the lower right part of the front face of the door frame base unit 100 by penetrating the plate unit 200. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the game board 5 into the game area, and a dish unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and receives a game ball that has been hit into the game area. The foul cover unit 520 for discharging to the lower tray 202, the ball feeding unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 for feeding the game balls of the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 680, and the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the glass unit 560 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front view left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a body frame 4 mounted on the right side surface of the body frame base in front view. , And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and pays out the game ball to the player side. The character-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game played on the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with a character ratio display 1317. The character ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided on the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300.

Further, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 may display the accessory ratio without separately providing a display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the character ratio is always displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, the character ratio can be notified to the player, and the player can check the condition of the pachinko machine.

The character ratio can be calculated by multiplying the number of character acquisition balls by the total number of acquired balls, as will be described later. For example, a pachinko machine with a high numerical value of the character ratio (for example, 90%) will receive many prize balls depending on the big hit. Since it has been obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low number of accessory ratios (for example, 10%) has few jackpot games and few prize balls in the jackpot, so it can be said that it is in poor condition. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the character ratio.

As a mode of notifying the player of the character ratio, the numerical value of the character ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the character ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and when it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in green. To do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a mode that is not mistaken for a decorative design. For example, it may be displayed in such a manner that it is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative pattern when it does not change, or that the size of the number indicating the accessory ratio is smaller than the decorative pattern. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the aspect of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be changed according to the numerical value of the accessory ratio to notify the player of the accessory ratio. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the decorative design is displayed in red, and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and if 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. Or flashes. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, it may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-described display mode may be changed, and not only the accessory ratio but also other information may be displayed. The other information includes the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called number of consecutive chan), the number of balls held, the remaining balance, and the like.

Further, not only the character ratio but also the continuous character ratio, the base value, and the like, which will be described later, may be displayed in different modes as described above. The character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the base value may be displayed differently.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320, which is sealed so that it cannot be opened without being destroyed once it is closed. The removed parts can be seen from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control unit 1300 can be used for the pachinko machine. It can be seen from the back side of machine 1. By enclosing the character ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the character ratio indicator 1317 for making the pachinko machine 1 look less gambling, and to improve the accuracy of the pachinko machine 1. You can display gambling.

When the back cover 980 is made of an opaque resin, a hole is formed in the back cover 980 at the position of the character ratio display 1317, or the position of the character ratio display 1317 is made transparent so that the pachinko machine can be used. The character ratio display 1317 may be viewed from the back side of the machine 1.

Even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, it is possible to flatten the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or to make the back cover 980 thin so that the accessory The ratio indicator 1317 may be made easier to see from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

Below the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided an outlet for collecting game balls that have flowed out from the game area 5a via the outlet 1111 and the winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006 and the like, and discharging the balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 that detects a game ball discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It is advisable to display (print, stamp, seal, etc.) that the switch is a switch for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320. Although the display switch 1318 is preferably provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, other boards (for example, the production control board 4700) may be used if the operation is easy, even if the display is not the main control unit 1300. Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. It may be provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 or the relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, the power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also serve as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it by mistake.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball-shaped tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. Based on the payout device 830 for paying out one by one, and guiding the game balls, which are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, and paid out by the payout device 830, and at the same time, store the game balls in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. Depending on, the upper full tank ball route unit 850 which discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port, and the normal discharge port of the upper full tank ball route unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 Guide the discharged game ball forward and guide it from the front end to the through-ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and guide the game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port forward to the front end of the door frame 3 A lower full tank ball path unit 860 having a full tank guide path for guiding to the full tank receiving port 530.

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the body unit base 910, which is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the front view left side of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in a front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a speaker unit 920 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of game balls are housed inside. And a payout control board unit 950.

As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven and places the game ball emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part on the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate 1310 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 and a table unit (not shown) having a plurality of winning openings attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving the game balls hit in the game area 5a. ) And a back unit 3000 mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the substrate holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launching device 680 causes the game to be played with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the received winning holes. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. 11 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the left front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. Also, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view in which the front component member and the front unit in the game board are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and the rear end of the game region 5a. A partitioning plate-shaped game panel 1100, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 are driven by driving the game balls into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) for controlling the contents of the game. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is inside the game area 5a (not shown).

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions within the gaming area 5a. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary draw, and a first special that is selected by accepting the game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. It is provided with a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006, in which the game balls can be accepted according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second special winning opening 2006 is composed of two big winning openings, a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower special winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which game balls flow (FIG. 16).

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a first special winning port 2005, and starting. The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and is attached above the left end of the side unit lower 2200 when viewed from the front. Frame-shaped having a side unit upper 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006, which are attached at approximately the center in the game area 5a. The center accessory 2500 is provided.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120, has a box shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the bookmark table unit 2000, and a lock attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020, and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in front view inside the back box 3010 for discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, The lower right ball passage unit for discharging the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500, which is attached near the front end of the lower right corner in the front case inside the back box 3010. 3035.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 that covers the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rotatably attached rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay board cover 3045 covering the rear side.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 that is attached upward from the vertical center on the left side in front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A lower back rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 attached to the front view left side above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box. A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper attached to the front center right side in the left-right direction above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back movable effect unit 3500 mounted below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are provided.

[2-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front constituent member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to a diagonally upper left in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 in a right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends forward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

On the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007), a launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball hit in the game area 5a is provided. For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and flowed into the game area 5a. The launch ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position where the game ball always passes within the game area. By fixing the position of the firing ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, the specifications can be shared among a plurality of models, and the inspection at the manufacturing site and the inspection after installation in the hall become easy.

The launch ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a, such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002, detects an out ball before the winning opening sensor detects a winning of the gaming ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of the out balls and the prize balls, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting the prize balls caused by the game balls that are not counted as the out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the front unit 1000 is attached on the rear side and the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, an out port 1111 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes formed on its rear surface.

In the state where the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding portion 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled on the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 14) can be discharged downward.

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 is provided with a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a state indicator consisting of one LED for displaying a game state, and two LEDs based on the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Ordinary symbol display for displaying these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the ordinary lottery result after the variable symbol is displayed by flickering control, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition for change display has not yet been established, and the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 2002 (start prize) After the first special symbol is variably displayed by flickering and controlling the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result selected by (generation), these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the first special lottery result. With the first special symbol display device, the number of holdings which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been established among the variable displays of the first special symbol relating to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002, A first special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display, and eight LEDs to blink based on the result of the second special lottery selected by receiving the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 (start prize). A second special symbol display device for displaying these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is variably displayed by controlling, and the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004. A second special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the second special symbols pertaining to When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, a round indicator including two LEDs for displaying the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening and closing patterns of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And is mainly equipped. In addition, a part of the display unit of the function display unit 1400 (for example, the first special symbol display unit) may be configured by a 7-segment LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the effect presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17), and the peripheral control board containing the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emitting effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main LCD device]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is removably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center thereof. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1601 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. 1602, and. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward in two fixing grooves 3010c that are open to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 described later. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to.

[2-8. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. And the panel plate 1110 projects rearward from the rear surface. In the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the gaming area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball at different positions, the gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is the gate The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is selected by passing through the section 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, either the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006, which allows the game balls to be accepted, is provided.

Three (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially right below the hitting portion 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 in the front view. The general winning opening 2001, which is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a among the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged above the first special winning opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting opening 2002 in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second special winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 is a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower big winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game balls flow. It is composed by. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged such that the second upper special winning opening 2006a is located near the lower right of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is viewed from the front of the second upper special winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a first special winning port 2005, and starting. The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and is attached above the left end of the side unit lower 2200 when viewed from the front. Frame-shaped having a side unit upper 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006, which are attached at approximately the center in the game area 5a. The center accessory 2500 is provided.

[2-8a. Starter unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged right above the out opening 1111 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 and a first special winning opening 2005.

The starting opening unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first special winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape that extends leftward and rightward and penetrates forward and backward. A ball receiving portion 2102 that protrudes forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction above the special winning opening 2005 and forms a first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guide portion 2103 for guiding the game ball received in 2002 downward, a first start port sensor 2104 attached to the ball guide portion 2103 for detecting the game ball received in the first start port 2002, and A first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the one big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first special winning opening 2005 from the rear side, and the front end is open to the front with substantially the same size as the first special winning opening 2005. Box-shaped unit case 2111 and a horizontally-long rectangular flat plate-shaped first big winning opening door whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first big winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 for opening and closing the first special winning opening door member 2112, and a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 and received in the first large winning opening 2005. A first special winning opening sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball, a first starting opening sensor 2104 attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111, a first attacker solenoid, and a first special winning opening sensor 2114 and a main control board 1310. A starter unit relay board 2115 for relaying the connection with the starter unit decoration board 2115 and a starter unit decoration board (not shown) mounted on the lower part of the unit case 2111 for illuminating and decorating the first special winning opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. The first special winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is open toward the front in a size capable of receiving a plurality of (for example, 4 to 6) game balls at a time.

In the starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 is opened upward, and the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is united by the ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided to the rear side of 2101, the first starting port sensor 2104 can detect and then the first attacker unit 2110 can be penetrated and discharged downward. In this embodiment, two first starting opening sensors 2104 are provided, and in the main control board 1310, when the two first starting opening sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting opening is detected. In 2002, it is determined that the game ball has been accepted. Accordingly, it is possible to detect an illegal act by inserting an illegal tool into the first starting opening 2002.

In the starting opening unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened in the unit base 2101. It is inserted from the rear into the mouth 2005 to close the first special winning opening 2005. The first special winning opening door member 2112 is rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the lower side by the unit case 2111 in an upright state where the first special winning opening 2005 is closed, and the upper side is forward and By rotating so as to move downward, the first special winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

The first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is upright in a normal state (the first attacker solenoid 2113 is in a non-energized state) and closes the first special winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first special winning opening door member 2112 is rotated so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be located. That is, the first special winning opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so that the height increases from the lower side of the first special winning opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game sphere flows down in front of the first big winning opening 2005 and comes into contact with the first big winning opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game sphere is from below due to the inclination of the first big winning opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first special winning opening 2005 to enter the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first special winning opening 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first special winning hole sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in the figure, composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various production devices in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the display device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of game balls and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 1311 that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and an input/output device (I /O device) as a main control I/O port 1314, a main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and a main control A RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311. The main control MPU 1311 has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 has a first starting opening sensor 2104 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 and a second starting opening sensor for detecting the game ball received in the second starting opening 2004. 2551, a general winning hole sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a gaming ball received in the first big winning hole 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening 2006a as the second big winning opening 2006, and the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting the game ball received in the second lower big winning opening 2006b. The detection signals from the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557, the discharge ball sensor 3060, the launch ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor for detecting the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are respectively passed through the main control I/O port 1314. Is entered.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the starting opening solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, and the first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I/O port 1314. The drive signal is output to the display device, the second special symbol memory display device, the normal symbol display device, the normal symbol memory display device, the game status display device, the round display device, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 2557, whereas a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3015. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 2104 and the second starting opening sensor 2551 are provided. And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (“big hit” game, etc.) occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the game ball is frequently played. In order to enter the ball, the detection of the game ball by the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning opening sensor 2557 also use proximity switches having high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game balls do not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3015.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various kinds of information (game information) regarding games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands relating to the control of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. It is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. When the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power board in the power board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. This stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I/O port 1314 and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

On the main control board 1310, an accessory ratio display 1317 is attached at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The character ratio display 1317 displays the character ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

A display switch 1318 is provided on the main control board 1310. The display switch 1318 may be a push-button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317. The character ratio display 1317 may always display the character ratio, and the display contents may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311, CPU 13111, RAM 1312, ROM 1313, random number generation circuit 13112, parallel input port 13113, serial communication circuit 13114, timer circuit 13115, interrupt controller 13116, external bus interface 13117, clock circuit 13118, matching block 13119, unique. It has information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122.

The CPU 13111 executes the program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data necessary for executing the program.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery result of the result of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect contents of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation unit that outputs a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is used for a lottery for winning a special symbol, a lottery for a winning symbol of a special symbol variable display game, and a lottery for hitting a normal symbol.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to/from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. In addition, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various kinds of information (game information) related to a game, various commands related to the payout of gaming balls, and the like to the payout control board 951 via the main control I/O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the character ratio to the character ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupt and various time control. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMI that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the processing address table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the processing address table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. From the external bus interface 13117, I/O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0-A15), and 8-bit data (D0-D7) can be input/output.

The clock circuit 13118 generates the internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by the set number and outputs it from the CLKO terminal to the outside. For example, a clock signal to be supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The collation block 13119 is a functional block that collates using a predetermined code whether the ROM 1313 has been tampered with. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311, and is written in a non-rewritable manner at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The reset circuit 13122 has an undesignated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address outside the predetermined range of the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit estimates that the access is due to an unauthorized program, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a time-out signal when a predetermined timer time has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by the reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program with respect to an arithmetic result, and includes a multiplication circuit 132111 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a product of 32 bits, and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product by a multiplication function. Functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result obtained by multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing the values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the calculation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 causes the multiplication input register 131212. , 1311213, the multiplication result can be acquired by referring to the multiplication result register 131214 after a predetermined number of clocks has elapsed.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a quotient of 32 bits and a remainder of 32 bits. It functions as a conversion circuit that outputs an input value (divisor, dividend) by performing quotient and remainder conversion by a function.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores the dividend of 32 bits or less in the division input register A 131216, and stores the divisor of 32 bits or less in the division input register B 131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that a value is stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, it reads the stored value at a predetermined timing and divides the dividend by the divisor. The division result register A131218 is stored, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B131212. When the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, the division circuit 131215 may erase the read values and clear the registers. Further, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and store the division result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 at the timing when the start command is input. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not have to be erased at the read timing. Further, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may have values already stored therein (without clearing the stored values), or may be capable of overwriting values.

The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131212. The process from writing a value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the calculation result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks). The values can be stored in the registers 131216 and 131217, and after a predetermined number of clocks has elapsed, the quotient and the remainder can be acquired by referring to the division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, a division process is required to calculate the base value, and since the division in which the CPU 13111 executes the program is executed by a plurality of multiplications and subtractions, a considerable time is required. It is something like this. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 75 and 80). .. In addition, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division processing from the writing of the values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the calculation result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. The base calculation process during the timer interrupt process can be efficiently executed.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmitting/receiving circuits, and each data transmitting/receiving circuit transmits/receives data for one channel to/from a predetermined device. In FIG. 20, only the data transmission circuit is shown, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is mounted) is omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the serial communication circuit 13114 has the channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio, as described above. Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148 and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

The data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission status.

The communication setting register 3146 stores a command for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data in which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 causes an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores the baud rate setting for defining the data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, whether or not to use the FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, 1××1010B meaning even parity In the channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, and 1×××1000B meaning parity unused are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set the parity when transmitting data at a high speed outside the main control board 1310.

Since the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise as compared with communication with another board via an electric wire for communication. Also, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and the need to use parity is scarce. In addition, along a pattern for transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, left and right and/or a thickness direction of a signal line provided on a surface or an inner layer of a printed circuit board). A ground pattern is provided on a layer adjacent to the above), and the noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shield effect of the ground pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 defines the data amount at which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 causes an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 has a vacancy, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

It should be noted that the relevant bit of the status register can be used to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if data is not written in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the bit of the status register is not set, there is no vacancy in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed after it is determined that data has not been transmitted from the FIFO.

The baud rate register 3148 defines the data transmission rate. For example, the channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 sets 19200 bps, the channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 sets 1200 bps, and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317. The channel 2 used for communication with is set to 1200 bps.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed depending on the data transmitted on each channel. This is because the game ball is rolling inside the game machine, and the electronic circuit of the game machine is in an environment susceptible to noise. For this reason, data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the payout, which is directly related to the profit given to the player, is surely transmitted. On the other hand, since the peripheral control board 1510 has a large amount of data to be transmitted and is not related to a ball being thrown, it transmits data at a high rate. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it is determined to be abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command Request re-transmission. Then, when it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. Therefore, the communication with the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit data at a high rate. Further, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the starting opening to the start of the fluctuation of the symbols, which may reduce the interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or a low rate (1200 bps, which is a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). Good. Further, the communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 has a high rate (19200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). Rates between and may be adopted. This is because if the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistors of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if the transmitted data is abnormal due to noise, the same data is retransmitted for each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the content displayed on the character ratio display 1317 is displayed. This is because there is no need to set the transmission rate to an extremely low value, since is returned to the normal state.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission state, and each bit is defined as follows, for example.
Bit 7: SnTC is a flag indicating completion of transmission, where 0 indicates transmission and 1 indicates transmission completion. Bit 6: SnTDBE In normal mode (communication mode not using FIFO), it is a flag indicating transmission data empty, where 0 indicates not transferred to the transmission shift register and 1 indicates transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, when the data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 3142, it is set.

In the SnTFT FIFO mode, it is a flag indicating the transmission FIFO trigger level, where 0 indicates that the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is equal to or higher than the trigger level and 1 indicates that it is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. The amount of transmitted data is below the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, the data is written in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5-2: Unused (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL transmission buffer, a bit for clearing break code transmission, emptying transmission data, or setting a transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written from the outside. For example, when the contents of the buffer are forcibly cleared, 1 is set in the relevant bit. More specifically, it is used when a command is written in the FIFO, but the transmission of the written command is stopped due to some circumstances (for example, an abnormality has occurred). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of asynchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal (not shown) for synchronous communication. In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114, not the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission/reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a start/stop synchronization serial communication circuit and a synchronous communication serial communication circuit may be separately provided.

Although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating a data fetch timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Discharge control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. Although not shown in detail, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc., performs a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, and a firing control by a firing solenoid 682, and a ball by the ball feed solenoid 551. A firing control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that releases an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a game ball in the payout device 830 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and a ball removing switch for starting a ball removing operation is provided.

[3-2a. Dispensing control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 951 has a built-in micro, such as a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands and a RAM that temporarily stores data. Issue control MPU which is a processor, issue control I/O port as an I/O device, external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the issue control MPU is operating normally, and issue A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has not only built-in ROM and RAM but also a function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various types of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various types of commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch being input from the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. It

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU through the payout control I/O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port. The external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1. Among the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signal generated by the main control board 1310 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED display is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means "ball ball" (specifically, blades). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout vane and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830 and the payout vane is difficult to rotate, and the number "3" is displayed. If it is, the fact that there is a “count switch error” (specifically, there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is displayed, and the number “5” is displayed. "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value) is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, "full retry" is displayed. Is displayed (specifically, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number "7" is displayed. If it is, "CR is not connected" is notified (the electric connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Occasionally, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, that the number of game balls not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial system, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. To be done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. Entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Firing controller]
Although not shown in detail, a firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball forwarding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551, although not shown in detail, is a firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, and this firing reference pulse And a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to a ball-sending solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of a game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

Based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the launch solenoid drive circuit inputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504, as a launch reference pulse. When triggered, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 triggered by the input of the ball feed reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to send the accepted game ball to the ball launcher 680 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 is provided with a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off processing even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. , And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to the production drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the frame 3, and the color provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side drive emission data composed of a door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to an LED or the like is transmitted from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port to the door frame 3 side. Or to send control data (display command) indicating a screen displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I/O port. In addition, the control signal (sound command) for extracting the sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 and the production button pressing sensor 258 of the production operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Watching for activity.

The sound source IC extracts the sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and uses the speaker 921 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or sound signal) as sound information are output to the plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By sending a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has a built-in WDT and an external WDT. Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, a plurality of initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command, display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the performance drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box The serial input/output port is set to 250 kbps as the bit rate in this embodiment.

This effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives the game board side lighting blink command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

In addition, the production drive board 3043 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Or output to.

[3-3b. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs peripheral controller power-on processing, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control command reception interrupt processing described later, a command or pachinko related to control of game effect output from the main control board 1310. It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying the year/month/day and time information for specifying the hour/minute/second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and the calendar information storage unit stores the current calendar information in the peripheral control RAM. And the current time information in the time information storage unit.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0 respectively. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V blank signal which will be described later and is executed in response to the input of the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is first set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing is being executed and a value of 0 when the peripheral control steady processing is completed.

Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated and the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN to count the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to perform continuous transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the operation button 220C is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220. Based on the acquired various information, whether or not the operation button 220C is operated is monitored, and whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game effect is appropriately determined.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, one screen (one frame) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP in the display data creation process described later is displayed on the game board side decorative board 3053 and door frame side by the sound source built-in VDP. Output to the decorative substrate 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the speaker 921 sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation processing to be described later, and informs in addition to the music and sound effects. The sound data of the sound or the notification sound is output to the speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which number of screen data from the first screen data to output to the sound source built-in VDP among the time-sequentially arranged screen data forming the screen generation schedule data, Update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data to be the light emission mode of various LEDs , Update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound of the sound command data instructing the sound data of music, sound effect, etc. The pointer is updated to instruct which sound command data is output from the command data to the VDP with built-in sound source.

Further, in the scheduler update processing, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data to the output target is set. Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, the production control program is information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command Receiving means) analyzes various commands received (command analyzing means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, the production control program further notifies various abnormalities. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral controller 1511 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormalities are automatically notified. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing information that one abnormal condition has occurred after another abnormal condition has occurred and before that abnormal condition is resolved. You can

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is various commands classified into status display, for example, In the case of an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device), the door frame side A decorative substrate 233 (rendering device) and a lamp (rendering device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to auditorily warn the outside (error notifying means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 despite the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game can be suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information and the time information storage unit stored in the calendar information storage unit, which is acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the pointer is instructed by the pointer in the emission control program in which the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and the emission data is arranged in time series to form the emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is performed. Created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511 and setting in the peripheral control RAM, and lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. From the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and a game board side decorative board 3053. And drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. The sound data such as music and sound effect is incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the production control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM externally attached to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backs up the contents. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied and backed up in the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the in-steady-processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit stationary processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is set to a value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

The peripheral control unit steady process starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG on the assumption that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. .., and step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral controller steady processing. Set to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the V blank signal which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted from the sound source built-in VDP. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to about 30 fps for a second, and thus the V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed by the following will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 60 will be described. .. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting in the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to about 30 fps for a second, and thus the V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

In step S1100, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, this routine is finished as it is. When the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V in this embodiment. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer is selected from the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order which form the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. Drives electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids according to the drive data instructed by, updates the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and executes the motor and solenoid drive processing every time. Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, it is possible to obtain the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 are input, so that history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation The operation history information of the button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition processing, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decoration board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When judged, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact.

After step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied and backed up in the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are backed up. 1 area and backup 2nd area are respectively copied and backed up.

As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 60, various processes related to the effect of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt process is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the sound source built-in VDP are mounted. Even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. LCD display controller]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the peripheral control board 1510, although not shown in detail in the drawing, serves as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM that stores various data of screens displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied. And are equipped with.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. If the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs the interrupt process when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command). The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. As the non-resident area transfer data, the screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data is stored in advance in various non-resident areas of the image RAM from the image ROM. The order of data transfer is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the top screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM on the basis of the input screen data to extract the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Further, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. To do. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and this line buffer is stored in this line buffer. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

The image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display device cannot be ignored. This affects the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, houses, mountains, roads, and the like that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set to have a vertical position (hereinafter, referred to as “order of sprite superposition”) when the sprites are arranged on the screen or when the sprites overlap each other, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are main scans for sequentially setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel from left to right when viewed from the front. And sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction intersecting the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs main scanning, When the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are viewed from the front, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right to pixels for one line. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, drawing data for the next line is input. Then, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are sequentially scanned one line from the left to the right as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. Output to each minute pixel.

[4. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 10, FIG. 16 and FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, That is, it is possible to hit a game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the downflow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) While coming into contact with, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500, the center character object passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500 through the guide path 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 on the left and right thereof. Is released backward from either of the. When the game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so the game released from the central guiding portion 2531. The ball has a high probability of being received in the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged from the side guiding portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the first big winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300 brings it to the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, or the like. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500 that is higher than the highest part. ), and enters into the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. Although not shown in the figure, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right circulation space 2541, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails and are circulated while changing the downward direction thereof variously. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at an upper portion, a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 normally closed by a second starting opening door member 2549 are provided.

The game ball flowing down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the downstream right circulation passage 2542. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second upper prize hole 2006a and the second lower prize hole 2006b that are lined up on the left and right as the second prize hole 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and is lowered from the left end of the discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side in front view into the game area 5a. Is released. The downstream end (discharging plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball goes to the first special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first special winning opening 2005 is open. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted by the first special winning opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game balls that circulate in the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 flow down while the increase in the circulation speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right distribution space 2543, the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a may enter, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 through the second outlet 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, an ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310. One ordinary random number is obtained from the above, and the obtained ordinary random number is collated with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table to perform an ordinary lottery. When the result of this normal lottery is “normal hit” when the time saving control to be described later is not executed, the second starting opening door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second starting opening is opened. 2004 is opened, it is possible to receive the game ball into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time saving control is being executed, the ordinary lottery is performed to select whether the "normal win" is "first normal win", "second normal win", or "third normal win". When the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is “first ordinary hit”, “second ordinary hit”, or “third ordinary hit” when the time saving control is executed, the second starting door member 2549 is Front view After turning in the counterclockwise direction and opening the second starting port 2004, the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then the front view Opening and closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 to make it impossible to receive the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 by turning in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting opening 2004). Repeat) times. In addition, when the result of the ordinary lottery of the ordinary lottery is "first ordinary hit", "0.3 seconds" is set as the period of each of five times when the second starting opening 2004 is in a state in which the game balls can be accepted. , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "second ordinary winning" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period of each of the five times when the second starting opening 2004 is set in a state in which the game balls can be received. , "0.3 seconds", and the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "third ordinary hit", the second starting opening 2004 is set to a state in which a game ball can be received. The period is set to "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", and "second normal hit" and "third normal" The "hit" is a hit that is more advantageous to the player than the "first ordinary hit" (it is easy to receive the game ball into the second starting opening 2004). Further, when the game balls are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

In the present embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbol performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is changed after the variable symbol display of the normal symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is made (normal suggestion of a lottery result) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal variation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. It should be noted that during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, control is performed such that the normal fluctuation time is shortened compared to normal (a state in which time saving control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting opening door member 2549 to open the second starting opening 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state, for example, the time saving control is executed. When there is no time saving control, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, a new game ball is displayed on the gate unit until the game symbol passes through the gate unit 2003 and the ordinary symbol that is variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display is stopped (until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested). When passing through 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device, so the variable display start of the ordinary symbol is ended until the variable display of the previous ordinary symbol is finished (ordinary lottery result I try to put it on hold until the suggestion ends. Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the variable display of the normal symbol can be started. Until the start of variable display of ordinary symbols is suspended. It should be noted that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 has an upper limit of four, and if the number is more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being retained. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 is updated within a predetermined numerical range. By obtaining one first special random number from one special random number and matching the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit") , "Small hit", etc.) is drawn. Then, based on the first special lottery result selected by lottery, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display device are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result. The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode according to (displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result after the first special symbol is variably displayed). In addition, in the first special lottery result which is drawn by the game balls being received in the first starting opening 2002, "defeat", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" Yes, by comparing the obtained first special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which one of them, and after the jackpot game is normal (low probability state: with a probability of about 1/395 in this example). Probability improvement control (high-probability state (also called probability variation state): in this example, winning the big jackpot with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) Whether or not to execute (whether or not it is a probability big hit) and whether or not to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time more than usual when at least the first special lottery result is out (whether it is a time saving big hit or not) Or) and the period for executing the time saving control (the number of times saving time: special symbol (the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change)) are also determined. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

In addition, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310. Of the second special random number of, and by comparing the obtained second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. The second special lottery result is generated. Then, based on the selected second special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode according to (displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is variably displayed). In addition, in the second special lottery result that is drawn by the game balls being received in the second starting opening 2004, "outfall", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", and it is determined which one of them by collating the obtained second special random number with the jackpot determination table, and further after the jackpot game, the normal ( Low-probability state: In this example, the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) is higher than the probability of winning the jackpot with a probability of approximately 1/395). Probability improvement control (high-probability state (also called probability variation state): this example) With a probability of about 1/44 to win the big hit) (whether it is a probability big hit or not) and at least the second special lottery result is a time saving control that shortens the fluctuation time more than usual when the result is out of sync. Whether or not (time saving state) is executed (whether or not it is a time saving big hit) and the period for executing time saving control (time saving number: special symbol (the number of changes of the first special design symbol and the second special symbol)), it is also determined. It is supposed to be done.

In the case where the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. , After the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, display 8 LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first big winning opening Any of 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 becomes a state in which a game ball can be received in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 while the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A predetermined number from the payout device 830 (for example, 11 when the game balls are received in the first special winning opening 2005, or 15 when the game balls are received in the second special winning opening 2006). The game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 to receive the game balls when the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 can receive the game balls, many games can be played. The balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first special winning opening 2005 plays the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The open/close pattern of closing after opening to a receivable state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", "1R jackpot" A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or is predetermined to the first special winning opening 2005. When either one of the number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted into the second special winning opening 2006, the condition is satisfied. The opening/closing pattern (a single opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game ball into an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of "4R jackpot", 4 rounds, in the case of "5R jackpot", 5 rounds, in the case of "16R jackpot", 16 rounds are repeated, and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. In addition, when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit”, the opening/closing pattern (first big winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds)) Meanwhile, it is difficult to practically enter the game ball into the first special winning opening 2005 in an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is closed after being opened so that it can be received. On the other hand, the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “4R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “6R jackpot”, “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “10R jackpot”, “16R jackpot” (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big winning opening 2005. Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is received or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is received in the second special winning opening 2006. If that condition is satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in an open/close pattern in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state. If the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the above first jackpot After a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the mouth 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game balls can be received, or the predetermined first winning opening 2005 is determined. Either the number of existing game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) is received in the second special winning opening 2006, whichever condition is satisfied. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening/closing pattern that puts the game ball into the unacceptable closed state is executed may be the actual special lottery result, and the number determined in advance in the first special winning opening 2005 as the special lottery result (for example, , 7) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted into the second special winning opening 2006, the game ball is satisfied. Opening and closing patterns that make the unacceptable closed state and opening and closing patterns that are executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (first big winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds). (Between 0.6 seconds) and an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is closed after being in an open state in which the game ball can be received). For example, as a result of the special lottery, "8R jackpot which is substantially 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted in the first big winning hole 2005, or the second big winning hole. If a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted in 2006, or if any one of the conditions is satisfied, after repeating the opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is in the unacceptable closed state four times, When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the opening/closing pattern (first special winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds)), You may make it repeat 4 times the opening and closing pattern which closes after it becomes the open state which can accept the game ball.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower big winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second big winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of “big hit”, for example, in the first round (1R), the second upper special winning opening 2006a is opened to allow the game ball to be accepted, and the game ball is closed by satisfying the condition of being unacceptable, and then allowed to be accepted next. Until (during the interval), the second round special winning opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2R) in which the game balls can be accepted, and when the second lower special winning opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has elapsed in the meantime, the second upper special winning opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds have been exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the "big hit", one of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is in a state in which the game ball can be received, so this state When you hit the right button to distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will always be accepted in the second prize hole 2006, and you can enjoy the player by eliminating the missed game ball. You can

In addition, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned plurality of big hits, whether or not the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished is different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. For example, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game in the non-time saving state (when the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal big hit in the time saving state (when the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. If the second special lottery result in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed) is the 2R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is the 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (when the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Also, in the low probability non-time saving state (state in which neither probability improving control nor time saving control is executed: also called normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute probability improving control after the big hit game. If it is a 2R probability variation big hit, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improving control is being executed or the time saving control is being executed, that is, in the state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improving control after the big hit game. When it is a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002, and the receiving of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the two special symbol display devices is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the stop display of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 (until the result of the first special lottery is suggested) and (2) Until the stop display of the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the receipt of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 (until the result of the second special lottery is suggested), the first start When a new game ball is received in the mouth 2002 or the second starting mouth 2004, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is newly started on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device. Because it is not possible, start the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery It is put on hold until the result and the suggestion of the second special lottery result are completed. Specifically, the first starting random number sensor 2551 and the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104. By the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004, and stored, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) The variable display start of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbols) can be started. The number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, respectively. For more than four, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are played. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without holding it. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are designed to preferentially digest the second special random number. That is, if the second special random number is stored and the variable display start of the second special symbol is suspended regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the symbol.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the LEDs that are lit during this stop.

On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, based on a control signal (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and a special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of a series of decorative symbol patterns composed of a plurality of different symbols is displayed in a plurality of columns (for example, three columns of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the decorative pattern row is started, and after that, it is sequentially stopped and displayed (in this example, the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → the middle decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in this order), and finally all the decorative pattern rows are stopped. When displayed, the result of lottery of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, a plurality of decorative symbol rows fluctuate according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start winning occurs. After the display, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is displayed. The decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are better than the first special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the final image is confirmed). (The time until is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500 and the left side of the back are displayed in accordance with the lottery special lottery result. A middle decoration unit 3050, a back lower back movable effect unit 3100, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back middle movable effect unit 3400, a back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Specifically, the system/user reset process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the timer interrupt process executed in a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by the timer activated in the system/user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization process of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, and sets the RAM 1312 to be writable (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating the mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and further "03H" indicating the activation of the watchdog timer is written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Then, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the time from when the power is turned on to when it reaches the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure warning signal is input from. In the wait processing, a predetermined monitoring weight value is set, and the watchdog timer is activated, and the processing waits for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds).

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time required to activate the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). .. When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for calculating the character ratio (area for character ratio calculation 13128) out of the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased (step S30). ), and proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off through normal processing such as a power failure (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the character product ratio calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the previous power-off and the checksum calculated in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( Parts other than the character ratio calculation area 13128 are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

Then, it is determined using the check code whether the work area for character product ratio calculation (area 13128 for character product ratio calculation) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the character product ratio calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the character product ratio calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

If one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 It is preferable that the data in the backup area, which is first determined to be normal, be copied to the main area after being determined in the order of 2, and N. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

In the character ratio calculation area, the data in the character ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined time, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. In addition, a predetermined amount of operation (for example, a predetermined number of shot balls, a predetermined number of prize balls, a predetermined number of special symbol variation display game, a predetermined number of special symbol variation display game jackpot, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each data type (the game control data 13132 and the role ratio calculation/display data 13136). Erase on condition. That is, by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased. If the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased, and the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the staff at the game arcade. It is possible to prevent concealment of a state in which the accessory ratio is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the gaming machine that has been modified to have a high accessory ratio or a low accessory ratio.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the initial setting for setting to the various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization processing is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) is initialized and interrupts are permitted. Further, the serial communication port and the test signal output port are initialized. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 is started, the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 is initialized.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation processing, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. To generate a power-on command, a power-on state reference command is set as reference command data, and command addition data corresponding to the generated command is added.

The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol/electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command for notifying the gaming state at the time of return after power-off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric auditors. On the other hand, the special symbol/electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure notification signal (step S36) and determines whether the power failure notification signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure notice signal is not ON (result of step S38 is “No”), that is, the random number updating process is executed (step S40). In the random number updating process of step S46, a random number other than the random number for making a winning decision is mainly updated in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. The random number updating process for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery is executed by a timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure notice signal is detected, and these processes are the main processes on the main control side (normal means after initialization).

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-off time process (power-off time setting means). In the power-off process, a process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, for example, the output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption in the time until the main board side power-off processing is completed, and to reliably complete the main board side power-off processing.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Then, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the work ratio calculating work area (the work ratio calculating area 13128) (step S50). If the check code has a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. The check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, not in the main board power-off process.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Then, the data of the main area of the work for character role ratio calculation (area 13128 for character role ratio calculation) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also copied. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) by the accessory ratio calculation/display process, instead of the main board power-off process.

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the character ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the character ratio is retained even when the power is cut off. , It is possible to calculate the ratio of role goods in long-term operation.

Further, a value indicating that the backup is normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as the power failure flag (step S56). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, by outputting "01H" indicating the write prohibition to the RAM protect register, the writing of the RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S58), and the process waits until the power failure is restored (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the main control program to first set RBS (register bank selection flag) in the program status word to 1 and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 in the present embodiment has banks 0 and 1 and is switched and used each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect a game ball that has entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet, and a winning ball control processing. The payer ACK signal or the like from the payout control board 951 which informs that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in (4) is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Then, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer updating process (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time when the special symbol display 1185 lights according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, the normal symbol and the ordinary electric auditors product control process are normally determined. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up in accordance with the pattern variation display pattern, a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the signal is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the random number update process 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number and the small hit, which are updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S40 in the system/user reset process (main control side main process) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a self-check for creating a prize ball command for paying out game balls and for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 sends the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the region corresponding to the current game state, and the role ratio calculation region 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312. (See FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information that informs the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and transmits it as the transmission information described above. Store in the information storage area. Further, in the prize ball discharge processing, the number of discharged prize balls is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 27) defined by the game state of the character ratio calculation area 13128.

The character product ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the character product ratio calculation/display process (step S89). .

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a fraudulent activity detection process (step S84). In the fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the game ball is detected in the special winning opening 2005, 2006 by the count switch when the jackpot is not in the gaming state, the main control program is executed. Creates a winning anomaly display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the big hit symbol random number value. Then, if the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, then the probability variation state is shifted to, while if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state is changed to a state other than the probability variation state. Here, the "probability variation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether to open/close the second starting opening door member 2549 according to the result of the lottery in the ordinary lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), and the starting opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous for the player. Shift to the state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated. If the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio calculation/display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is called, and the accessory ratio is calculated. The prize ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the character ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the character ratio, the character ratio (the gambling property of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

Note that, regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, if the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio may be displayed. . Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the character product ratio is displayed on the character product ratio display 1317. Good. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, when the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, if the character ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division or subtraction for calculating the character ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. A specific example of the method of displaying the character ratio will be described later. When the display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the value is displayed every time the display switch 1318 is operated. You may calculate only the value that Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated.

Even if the pachinko machine 1 detects an injustice and stops the game, it executes the character ratio calculating area updating process (step S81) and the character ratio calculating/displaying process (step S89). Regardless of whether or not a fraud is detected, by executing these processes, it is possible to confirm the role ratio even during the fraud notification.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands are normally received from the payout control board 951 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in the state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that performs the opening/closing operation of the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as signals, time saving information output information, starting mouth winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the payout control board 951.

In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

In the output data setting process, the test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as a command and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created by the timer interrupt processing of this routine. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data is a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). The watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be clear by setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 controls the character ratio and the continuous character. You may perform the calculation process of an object ratio. In this case, the main control board 1310 may send a command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio to the peripheral controller 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout controller 952 to the peripheral controller 1511. A command for displaying the character ratio or the continuous character ratio may be transmitted.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation/display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. The main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. When the peripheral controller 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within the predetermined range (or outside the range), the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the character ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the notice effect may be changed to give a notice effect that is more interesting than the normal notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the character role ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code corresponds to the check code stored in the character rate ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the main area is normal, so character product ratio calculation processing is executed, and character data is calculated from the data in the main area. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the character ratio is calculated by multiplying the number of character acquired balls/the total number of acquired balls, and the number of continuous character acquired balls/the total number of acquired balls is calculated. It is recommended to round off or round off the fractional part (the value below the decimal point) of the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, the updated value may be copied to the backup area every time the accessory ratio and/or the continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

When the number of bits for storing the number of acquired balls is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311, is insufficient, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted in the calculation of the character ratio, and the character ratio is calculated. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit arithmetic, the lower 16 bits from the most significant bit with a value of 1 out of the acquired number of spheres stored in 32 bits are extracted and operated. It is advisable to store in a special register (16 bits) for division. When the number of acquired balls is equal to or smaller than the maximum value of the number of bits that can be used for calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be extracted and used for calculation.

Further, if the total number of balls acquired is divided by 100 (rounding down the decimal point) and used as the dividend (divided number) to calculate the character ratio, it is possible to avoid calculation with a decimal.

Alternatively, the upper limit of the character ratio may be set to 99, and may be set to 99 when the calculated result of the character ratio is 100 or more.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character role ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal. Therefore, the character rate ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 1. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the character part ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character part ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148). ), the character ratio calculation process is executed, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated from the data of the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character role ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, and the character rate ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the character ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined (step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154). ), the character ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, similarly, it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the work area for calculating the character ratio (area for character ratio calculation 13128) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculating area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing by the RAM 1312 in the initialization processing because the power failure flag and the checksum are not calculated when the reset code is reset in the middle of the main board side power-off processing. The backed up data is initialized, but if a check code is periodically calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation/display processing, even if the pachinko machine is turned on again, the character ratio calculation work area This is because the data in the character role ratio calculation area 13128 can be left without being erased.

Then, 1 is added to the backup area allocation counter value to update it (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area allocation counter value is odd, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area allocation counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). It is possible to prevent the abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas by allocating the copy destination of the data in the main area by the backup area allocation counter value and writing the data in only a part of the backup areas.

When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup areas to which the data are written may be allocated according to the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

Next, the calculated character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory character ratio and the calculated value, a conversion table (not shown) is referred to, and data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory character ratio indicator 1317 is acquired. The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the accessory ratio is the accessory ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the upper two digits, and if the calculated accessory ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

Although the character ratio calculation process (step S156) of the character ratio calculation/display process reads the data of the number of acquired balls from the character ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the character ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processes of steps S156 and S172 are configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data in the storage area related to the acquired number of balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128. Data can be written in the storage area of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

As described above, since the data for calculating the character ratio in the character ratio calculation/display processing is copied to the backup area, if the normal power-off processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset, etc. , The data for calculating the accessory ratio can be protected.

Note that the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, and thus may be configured by one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the processing for determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the method of checking and backing up data differs depending on the model. However, if the method of checking and backing up data is shared between the models, it may be arranged in the common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of an arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

In the ROM 1313, a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a character ratio calculation/display code 13135, and a character ratio calculation/display. An area for storing the usage data 13136 is included. In the ROM 1313 of the present embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1, such as a game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And a character ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating a character ratio, such as a character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and character ratio calculation/display data 13136. Has been assigned.

A free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the last address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the character ratio calculation/display code 13135. When displayed in the dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. It should be noted that the value stored in the empty area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game area or the debug area or a value having a low frequency. The value stored in the empty area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

In addition, even if the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area are not separated, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 are stored in a part of the debug area. Good. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the character ratio calculation area (character ratio calculation/display code 13135 or character) that is a process not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. The ratio calculation/display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that a defect (bug or the like) in the character product ratio calculation/display code 13135 affects the game control.

In the debug (inspection function) area, programs and data for purposes not directly related to the game are stored. For example, various functions other than game control of the pachinko machine 1 are used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. The debug (inspection function) code 13133 is a program for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal. Further, in the character ratio calculation area, a program for calculating the character ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored.

The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read from and written to the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and it is configured such that writing to the area cannot be performed. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area accessible only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed. However, from the debug (inspection function) code 13131 to the game control code 13131. Is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change in the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The character ratio calculated by the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the character ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the character ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the inspection of the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. The inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the labor of inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. In addition, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing the details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The role ratio calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the result of the role ratio calculation is stored. .. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, and the power-down process on the main control side (Fig. 22 may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the power-down process on the main control side (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as the power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set for the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

If it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the power-off process on the main control side, the value in the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). In addition, in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing, each time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digit of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data of the number of balls to be acquired in the character ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) when the main control MPU 1311 times, and the character ratio calculation process (step of FIG. 24) of the character ratio calculation/display process. It is read in S156). In this way, the character ratio calculation/display processing reads the acquired sphere number data from the character ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) stores the acquired sphere number data in the character ratio calculation area 13128. By writing, it is possible to completely separate the game control program and the program for executing the character ratio calculation/display processing, and to share the program for the character ratio calculation/display processing even with game machines having different specifications. ..

In the character ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the character ratio calculation/display process, the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio are calculated as the character ratio and the continuous character in the character ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. The data of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are read in the accessory ratio display processing (step S170 of FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area for the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the character ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27A shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27A, the number of accessory acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, the total number of acquisition balls, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio are stored. The number of winning accessory balls is the number of winning balls due to winning an active winning object (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 being opened, the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is opening). is there. The number of consecutive winning role balls is the number of winning balls for winning a winning role during which the winning role is continuously moving (for example, the winning opening is open in a series of big hits). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The character ratio can be calculated by the number of character acquisition balls/total number of acquisition balls. The continuous character ratio can be calculated by the number of continuous character acquisition balls/total number of acquired balls. The number of character acquisition balls, the number of continuous character acquisition balls, and the total number of acquired balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing. Is stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of accessory acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls and the total number of acquisition balls correspond to the total cumulative total of FIG. It is a 4-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 429496295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are 1-byte storage areas and can store up to 255 decimal numbers.

FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of accessory acquisition balls, the number of other acquisition balls, the number of continuous character acquisition balls, the total number of acquired balls, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are stored. In addition, the storage area of each data is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n=10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total winning balls is obtained. When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers for all the data move and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after a predetermined number of prize balls worth of data are stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (number of character acquisition balls, number of shot balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of jackpots of special symbol variation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number, The write pointer may be moved.

The write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all the data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for every predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the accessory ratio is calculated using the latest data of 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer completes one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the accumulated value of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated from the total value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Therefore, even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data by going through the ring buffer once, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27B, the number of accessory acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27A. The number of other acquired balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize other than a winning accessory (a prize opening that does not open and close, for example, a general prize opening 2001). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and the write pointer moves when this value reaches a predetermined number. As for the number of character acquisition balls, the number of other acquisition balls, the number of continuous character acquisition balls, and the total number of acquired balls, the data of the storage area having the write pointer is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the character ratio and the continuous character combination are acquired. The material ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. With the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27(B) can be acquired, and the number of balls for ordinary electric auditors, the number of balls for special electric auditors, and the number of balls for starting opening acquisition are obtained. , Other winning prize winning ball number, continuous winning character number, total winning ball number, character ratio and continuous character ratio are stored. The storage area of each data is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after a predetermined number of prize balls worth of data are stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of acquired balls (special electric accessory acquisition number of balls, number of launched balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of jackpots of special symbol variation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number Alternatively, the write pointer may be moved.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer completes one cycle and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes round and round. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIGS. 27B and 27C, the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of balls, and the ordinary electric winning ball Each of the number, the number of balls for special electric accessory acquisition, the number of balls for starting mouth, and the number of balls for winning prize holes is a 2-byte storage area, and a decimal number up to 65535 can be stored. Number of balls acquired, number of balls acquired other, number of balls acquired consecutively, total number of balls acquired, number of balls normally electric winning, number of balls special electric winnings, number of balls starting winning opening and other winning balls The cumulative number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store up to 16777215 decimal numbers. Since the total is the total of data for 6000 prize balls×n (60,000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of balls acquired, number of other balls acquired, number of balls acquired continuously, total number of balls acquired, ratio of characters, ratio of continuous characters, number of balls acquired of ordinary electric characters, number of balls acquired of special electric characters, starting opening The total cumulative total of the number of acquired balls and the number of other winning prize winning balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and a numerical value up to 16777215 or 429496295 can be stored in decimal. Since the total sum is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The cumulative total and total cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store up to 255 decimal values.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27C, the total number of acquired balls, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27B. The number of other balls acquired is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize other than a prize (a prize opening that does not open and close). The number of balls for ordinary electric accessory winning is a prize ball obtained by winning a prize for an ordinary electric auditors product (the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open) based on the result of the lottery based on the ordinary symbols. Is a number. The number of special electric accessory winning balls is the number of prize balls due to winning the special electric winning object that is in operation (for example, the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 being opened) according to the result of the lottery based on the special symbol. The number of balls acquired in the starting opening is the number of prize balls acquired by winning the winning in the starting opening (first starting opening 2002). The number of other winning prize holes is the number of winning balls that are won by winning the winning prize (general winning prize 2001) that is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger the special symbol lottery. The number of ordinary electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of special electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of starting mouth acquisition balls, the number of other winning prize winning balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, and the total number of acquired balls are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area in which the write pointer is located is updated, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27A, when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. The data is not deleted at the trigger. Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, or January). Similarly, the total sum shown in FIGS. 25B and 25C may be deleted every predetermined period.

In addition, the data of the character ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated character ratio are abnormal values (for example, the character ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculated result of the character ratio greatly changes from the previous calculated value. , Number of balls acquired> total number of balls acquired), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but all the data in the character ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. In addition, when the data of the character product ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated character product ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that it is abnormal. Alternatively, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, the normal backup area data may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Structure of character ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The character ratio display 1317 includes a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 is composed of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed as one unit in one package, but both may be housed in another package.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data displayed on the character ratio display 1317 and a signal for setting the operating state of the character ratio display 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating a data acquisition timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit a signal for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit a control signal indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signal transmitted on the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp is. The direction of the signal (current) shown in the drawing differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is the anode common type or the cathode common type, but the example of the anode common type is shown.

To the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171, a resistor 13174 that determines the value of current flowing through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 is connected. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the emission brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, an 8×4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2×8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, a driver 3179, and It has a latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, a Digit-Limit controller 3181, a duty ratio controller 3182, a data selector controller 3183, a standby mode controller 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16-bit data, and sends it as parallel data to the 16-bit data latch 3172. The four bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode (see FIG. 35) of the driver circuit 13171, and the four bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are data of the detailed setting.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and controls D15 to D8 in each control unit (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). Unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184) and sends D7 to D0 to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173A to D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 captures the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). Further, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 among the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects the 8-bit data latch 3173 which stores display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), when D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 determines that the data register 0, that is, 8-bit Digit-A. A signal for selecting the 8-bit data latch 3173 is sent so that the data latch 3173A stores the data.

The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided by the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, fetches the data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED, Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The 8×4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3D at a predetermined display timing of each digit and sends it to the decoder 3175 and the 2×8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 converts the input data into a character to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, using the character generator decoding table (see FIG. 34), and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2×8 data selector 3176.

The 2×8 data selector 3176 selects the data from the decoder 3175 when the mode is set to use the decoder with reference to the decoding setting, and the 8× when the mode is set to not use the decoder. 4 Select data from the data selector 3174. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

The constant current driver 3178 outputs a current signal for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp using the data from the 2×8 data selector 3176. The current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal, as described above.

The driver 3179 receives the sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 controls which of the 7-segment LEDs (digits) is displayed by controlling the current sink timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be turned on to 1 to 4 digits by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXXXX11B, a setting is made to use all four digits in the digit register (DIGIREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. Note that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio controller 3182 controls the duty ratio when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by an external setting, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio controller 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, a duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has a 16-step duty of 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the setting of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 according to an external setting. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001×××B, the setting for using the decoder is written in the decode register, and D7 to D0 is set to 0000××. By inputting the data as XXB, the setting of NO DECODER without using the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select the data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and the 2×8 data selector 3176 when the decoder is not set to 2 The x8 data selector 3176 controls to select the data from the 8x4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the standby mode setting and the data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by an external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are 0100B and D3 to D0 are 0000B. In the standby mode, the current setting is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Further, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all the data held inside by the setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all the data held in the register or the latch is cleared and initialized.

The oscillator 3185 generates a clock used in the driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31A shows the main control board box 1320 of the first mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner so that the main control board box 1320 cannot be opened without breaking once closed. (Seal sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) or opening seal is stuck. The opening seal is a seal for recording the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31B shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. In the mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320 and constitutes a main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that improper modification has not been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that inappropriate modification has not been performed by not arranging parts around the main control MPU 1311.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 or the model number 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it is preferable that the accessory ratio display 1317, the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 are mounted in the same direction. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same as the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310. The accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 may be mounted as described above. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a portrait orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. The accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that they face each other.

Further, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for pulling out the signal line from the main control board 1310 are aligned in the longitudinal direction with the accessory ratio display 1317, and are end portions along the long side of the main control board 1310 (the upper length in the figure). Although it is the upper end along the side, it may be mounted on the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, it is desirable that the wirings (harnesses) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlap the accessory ratio display 1317, and that the connectors CN1 and CN2 be arranged at positions where the visibility of the accessory ratio display 1317 is not hindered. ..

Furthermore, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the unsealing sticker attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached to a position where neither the main control MPU nor the accessory ratio display 1317 overlaps.

By mounting the accessory ratio display 1317 in this manner, the model number display of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct direction, and the visibility of these is improved, and the manufacturing process and the game hall are improved. Even in the inspection after the installation, it is possible to confirm the ratio of the accessory and the presence or absence of the modification of the main control MPU 1311 without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31C, the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numeral display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 are mounted. The orientation of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the orientation of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numeral display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping with the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting for unauthorized modification, and therefore the meanings of arranging them on the main control board 1310 in the same direction are small.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be unstable due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close to each other as possible.

For example, as illustrated, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). It is arranged so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

In addition, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311, in order to easily confirm from the outside that improper modification has not been made, as indicated by the dotted line. Therefore, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or another package, and in any case, they are mounted so that L1 is larger than L2.

32B is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32C is the same as the implementation example shown in FIG. 32B. It is sectional drawing of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32B, ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 having no signal pattern is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13101. It is preferable to provide a ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

Explaining the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 that supplies a clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 are It is placed so that it does not intersect. Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through to the back surface or the inner layer by the through hole 13105. Also in this case, the signal line 13104 is arranged so as to avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not intersect).

The main control board 1310 is generally a two-layer board having patterns on the front and back surfaces and no inner layer from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification. It can also be applied to a multi-layer substrate having inner layers (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register that stores the data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty ratio and is written in the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence or absence of decoding and the number of display digits are set. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence/absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits, and the data of the data selector control unit 3183 It is written in the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3D, and the data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for lighting the 7-segment LED and is written in the data register in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

The duty ratio, the presence/absence of decoding, and the number of display digits, which are set in the register described above, do not have to be set each time the character product ratio is displayed, and may be set once. Therefore, in step S28 of FIG. Is set as. If the initial setting is performed only once, the setting may be changed by the influence of noise or the like after the initial setting. Therefore, a predetermined condition (for example, every time the opening of the main body frame 4 is detected, the switch button is It may be reset each time is pressed. As a result, even if the setting is switched due to noise, correct display can always be performed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Further, when numbers are displayed, D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, and therefore the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 without conversion and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the character ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 according to the present embodiment has five states, namely, an initial state, a data input state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). Is being prepared.

In order to control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, all lighting, and standby mode setting commands. The blank instruction cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after the completion of each setting. When the normal operation command is input without setting the display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of digits used, the duty ratio, the decoder used or not used, and the display data input. A register in which data is written is selected with D11 to D8, and contents to be set in the register are input with D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side to light all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby instruction includes a standby instruction that is divided into two depending on the parameter and transits to the standby state, and a clear instruction that transits to the initial state. The standby command maintains the setting at that time, stops the operations of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. In addition, the clear instruction clears and initializes all the data held in the registers and latches, and turns off the display.

Since the blank command is also a kind of display command, in the present specification, “display” includes all the states of the 7-segment LED, some of the segments are lit, and all the segments are all lit.

A display example in each state described above will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the power of the game machine is turned on, the driver circuit 13171 has not been initialized or the display data has not been set, and therefore the game machine is in the initial state (ALL BLANK), and the 7-segment LED 13172 is displayed as shown in FIG. All segments are turned off and become in a non-illuminated state. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed and the game can be performed, the character ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is preferable to set the standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine.

Then, when the display data is input after the control data is set in various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and the initial setting is completed, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays a predetermined display. In this predetermined display, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit. This predetermined display may allow the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 to be confirmed.

Further, when the body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is turned on (lighting corresponding to the input data). Specifically, the character ratio display state is entered, a code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and a numerical value of the character ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(C), “y175” is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, when the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display so that it can be identified. For example, all digits (or numbers) are displayed by blinking, or the decimal point is turned on or blinked.

When the display switch 1318 is further operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, another type of accessory ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. Also in this case, similarly to the above, it is preferable to display such that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the character ratio indicator 1317 is displayed (FIG. 36(E)), and after the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is preferable to turn off the light and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. The state of non-display of the accessory ratio is the same as that after completion of the initial setting, but may be a different mode as long as it is distinguishable from the display of the accessory ratio.

FIG. 36(E) is a display example when the character ratio display 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 is abnormal and the character ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be illuminated or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. The abnormal display may be different from that shown in the figure, and may be any form that can be distinguished from the normal accessory ratio display to indicate that the accessory ratio cannot be displayed.

Further, in any state, when the all-lighting command is input, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lighted. When a blank command or a standby command is input in any state, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are extinguished while holding the data. When a data clear command is input in any state, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned on, and the state returns to the initial state.

[8. Display of character ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be described.

As described above, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the character ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display device, displays the numerical value of the character ratio in the lower two digits, and the type of the numerical value in the upper two digits. Is displayed.

Further, the accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be configured by a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value may be alternately displayed.

The display mode of the numerical value of the character ratio may be displayed differently depending on the result of comparison between the character ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, red when the standard is exceeded, etc.) and displayed. By changing the display mode according to the result of comparison with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may be composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the character ratio display 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the result of comparison between the character ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in a different manner. For example, when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Further, when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is turned on, and when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold, it is displayed by blinking.

When the character ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, one LED lamp is set to 10% to display the character ratio. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, it may be displayed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display content (proportion of character role or ratio of continuous character product, display of latest data or display of medium-term data, etc.)

If the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of prize ball data may be short and the value of the accessory ratio may not have converged. Therefore, display in different display modes (display color, blinking, etc.) You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the reference value.

The character ratio display 1317 may switch and display the latest data display, the medium-term data display, and the long-term data display. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. The medium-term data display is the ratio of the accessory character calculated by using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated by using the total sum in the ring counter shown in FIGS.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may also be used as the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, it is preferable that the progress of the game is continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the accessory ratio display to the game state display. For example, when the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variable display game, the accessory ratio is displayed, but when the main frame 4 is closed before the change time elapses, the variable display for the remaining time may be performed. it can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variable display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, the player can be configured so as not to feel uncomfortable.

The character ratio display 1317 may display a character other than the character ratio. For example, the number of prizes or the number of prize balls paid out for each type of prize hole per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched between 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, 10 hours, etc. by operating the display switch 1318.

The character ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the ball payout rate in normal times excluding special prizes (big hits), and can be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls. The number of shot balls (the number of out balls) is detected by the shot ball sensor 1020. As described above, the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exits (backflow prevention members 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game balls from the ball launch device to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). The number of out balls may be detected by the discharged ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, the number of game balls detected by the out-passage ball sensor 1021 is provided by providing an out-passage ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) for detecting a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the bottom of the game area 5a. The number of out balls may be detected by the total of the number of game balls detected by the starting port sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. Further, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball supplied to the ball launching device 680, and a game ball that was launched from the ball launching device 680 but did not reach the game area 5a (so-called foul ball). With a foul ball sensor (not shown) for detecting the number of foul balls subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor, the number of out balls (the number of launched balls) is calculated. It may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient to provide either the discharged ball sensor 3060 or the projected ball sensor 1020 among the illustrated sensors.

The number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls paid out. In addition, the base may be defined as a payout rate for each game state (during normal game, during electric support, during probability change, during time reduction), and calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each game state. .. By displaying the base on the character ratio display 1317, it is possible to confirm the deviation from the design value of the pitching performance during operation for each gaming machine on the spot. Further, since the exit performance can be confirmed without using the hall controller, the inspection for each gaming machine becomes easy at the time of the on-site inspection of the gaming hall.

The character ratio display 1317 is for information on other base prizes and prize balls (the number of prizes to the general prize hole 2001, the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes at the starting hole 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, The number of winnings to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls by the winnings, and the like) may be displayed.

The character ratio display 1317 may always display the character ratio, or may display the character ratio by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318 which is a push button switch is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio is started, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, even if the character product ratio is displayed on the character product ratio display 1317. Good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated when the main body frame is not open, the character ratio display 1317 does not display the character ratio.

Further, the display content may be changed every time the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the character ratio (cumulative), is displayed in the upper two digits, and the character object for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls. Display the ratio in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the upper two digits is switched to A6 which means the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the ratio of the continuous character for a predetermined number (for example, 60000) of prize balls is lowered to the lower two. It may be displayed in digits (FIG. 37(B)). Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the character ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the upper two digits, and the character ratio based on the latest data is displayed in the lower two digits (the latest data display). (FIG. 37(C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the upper two digits is changed to y6 which means the character ratio (total), and the character ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is reduced to the lower two digits. It may be displayed (medium-term data display) (FIG. 37(D)).

The display switch 1318 does not have to be provided as an independent switch, but may be used also as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a display switch 1318 when operated while the pachinko machine 1 is operating. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, the number of switches operated by the staff in the game hall is one, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the gaming machine in operation, and to confirm the gambling property of the gaming machine in operation.

Further, since the data of the number of prize balls is accumulated as the character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 and the character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is erased when the check code is abnormal, an incorrect character product ratio display. Can be avoided.

Also, since the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the condition for deleting the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the accurate prize ball number data is held. , You can calculate the exact character ratio.

Further, since the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be prevented from being accidentally deleted by the operation of the attendant at the game hall. Since the object ratio calculation/display data is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by the erroneous operation of the staff at the game arcade. Further, since the game hall cannot intentionally delete the character ratio calculation/display data, the reliability of the character ratio displayed can be increased, and concealment of a state where the character ratio is high can be prevented.

[9. Show base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
Up to this point, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays the accessory ratio has been described. Next, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value is described exclusively, but the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball is won in the starting opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004), random number lottery is performed and a special symbol variable display game is executed. .. The variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation display game is a variation pattern of a relatively short time (a regular variation pattern of about 10 seconds, a shortened variation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easy to be selected when the number of holdings is large) Alternatively, there is a relatively long time variation pattern (variation pattern such as super reach exceeding 1 minute). When the base value is calculated by the pachinko machine, since the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of the error, it can be notified at the timing when the special symbol variable display game is switched to the next variable display game. However, when the variable display time is long, when a predetermined condition is satisfied without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (the number of paid balls)). It is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display when the number) changes). Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, during the special symbol variation display game) (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (the number of paid balls)). ) Changes), calculate and display the base value. Next, a specific configuration of the pachinko machine that performs such an operation will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 for calculating and displaying the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration indicated by reference numeral 1317 is a base display rather than a character ratio display. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may use a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 28, for example, and may have a different number of digits (eg, 2 digits). A 7 segment LED may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment acquires data of the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the accessory character ratio calculation area updating process (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89), the base value is calculated and displayed. Note that, in the following description, the "role portion ratio calculation area update process" in step S81 of FIG. 23 is read as "base calculation area update processing", and the "role portion ratio calculation/display processing" in step S89 is referred to as "base". Calculation/display processing" will be replaced with the description. Further, the “characteristics ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is replaced with the “base calculation area 13128”, and the “characters ratio calculation/display code 13135” is replaced with the “base calculation/display code 13135”. The description will be made by replacing "accompaniment ratio calculation/display data 13136" with "base calculation/display data 13136".

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls paid out as a game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 is updated. To do. In particular, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls is calculated using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle. Is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The state of the game being in the special state means that the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can obtain many prize balls, but even if the opening and ending times of the big hit game are included. Good. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed in one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the right-handing instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include a time saving period, a positive change (during ST), and a power support. Furthermore, during a time saving period, during a probable change (during ST), and in a game state other than during electric power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting opening 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball winning the starting opening is detected as an out ball). Up to the required few seconds) may be included in the prize.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special prize regarding the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize, normal winning (so-called big hit) to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during special prize (low probability or non-time saving) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electric actuated auctions (big prize holes 2005 and 2006) are used for calculating the base value based on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls regardless of the gaming state (whether the prize is being won or not). The other accessory (starting opening 2004) is not used, and whether the winning ball number and the winning ball number are used for calculating the base value or not is switched according to the gaming state (whether the prize is being won or not). It will be. Not to use the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value means that the paid prize balls are not counted in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value). Even if a winning signal is input, it also includes not creating edge information for paying out a prize ball by the winning signal.

Further, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during shortened working hours, and since it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize because it is opened for a short time, it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated during a period other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be released only during a time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and winning balls to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits other than during the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of small hits other than during the prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value, and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the prize ball number or the out ball number. On the other hand, if the game state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of award balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of award balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls may correspond to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the receipt confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Further, the main control board 1310 may send a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the number of award balls (paid award ball number) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of payout may be used. This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped. Further, although the game balls are won in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the upper limit value is the hold, and the prize balls are paid out even when the winning in the starting port is not held, so that the total number of prize balls is updated. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the prize is not generated, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total prize ball number is recorded in a total prize ball number storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, every time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, etc., and the switch input processing of step S74 reads the detection signals of these sensors, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, the out ball number is output. The number of balls=1 is acquired. The total out ball count is recorded in the total out ball count storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total out-ball count is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40). Therefore, the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is generated. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the base value calculation process. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 from the payout control section 952. May be sent.

Further, in one timer interruption process, even if the information of both winning and out balls to the winning opening is acquired, the number of prize balls is changed to the total number of prize balls (or a prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). Then, the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (or an out ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). Further, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of winning a prize to a plurality of winning openings is acquired, the total number of award balls due to a plurality of winning awards is the total award ball number (or, in the embodiment described later, an award ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when winning is detected for a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of five winning balls and a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of three winning balls, a total of eight winning balls are totaled. (Or the prize ball number buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning, which is detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020, may be added to the total prize ball number (or prize ball number buffer). Further, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (further, the launching control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops the operation. It is also possible to add only the number of prize balls relating to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) to the total prize ball count or the prize ball count buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) when the player operates the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls relating to winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the palm or the finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting the prize ball in a state where the game ball is not fired or an illegal act, and to prevent an incorrect display of the base value. Further, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, the base is calculated by excluding the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the special prize, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the general winning opening and the starting opening is counted even in the special prize. The base value may be calculated by counting the number of out balls excluding the number of balls that have won the big winning opening.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Furthermore, when an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs and a base value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated), the base value is not calculated. Good. When the base value is expressed as a percentage, the total prize ball count/total out ball count is multiplied by 100 to calculate the base value. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number multiplied by the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated to the nearest hundredths, and the base value is not calculated below the decimal point. Also, if this predetermined number is 10,000, the base value is calculated to a decimal two digits with a percentage of 100. In other words, if the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit is divided by 100, the base value of 100 fraction with two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. In the wait time of 32 clocks from the writing of data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to the reading of the data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 does not perform any processing but waits for other processing. You may go. For example, a random number for determining a big hit may be updated between the writing of data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and the reading of data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or the signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time Also the hard random number is updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. The other process related to the game includes at least a process of updating the random number for determining the winning or losing. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random number that affects the result of the game is updated once or more.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 causes an error, and therefore it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify the abnormality of the base value. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges.

There are various methods of reporting the base, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. may notify the value of the base constantly or at a predetermined timing. Notifying the player of the base value may allow the player to check the condition of the pachinko machine. In that case, you may apply the display mode demonstrated by the accessory ratio to a base value. When notifying the value of the base, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage on the above-mentioned display device or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. For a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the first decimal place is displayed and more detailed display is performed. May be.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates the display data set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as the base notification command. More specifically, the main control MPU 1311, as shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, designates a digit for displaying a numerical value in D15 to D8 by “data n setting”, and designates a display content in D7 to D0. Is generated and written in the shift register 3171.

Further, when displaying a base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) is provided for the base value, and when the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. .. For example, it is displayed by blinking a numerical value or changing the color (normally green, when the standard is exceeded, red, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It is also possible to divide the display into a plurality of stages and change the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage for display. Also, at each stage, a self-deprecating comment may be displayed when the base value is low, such as "I feel good," "I'm feeling down," "I'm not terrible," "It's amazing in some sense." If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is behaving differently than expected, and it is possible that fraud has occurred. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a mode showing a warning such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, “similar” means that at least one of display, lamp, and sound is the same.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like. In addition, when the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for displaying the base notification not possible on the liquid crystal display device may be generated. By sending a notification command to the generated sub-board, the production device controlled by the sub-board can notify the state of the base, so a wider variety of notifications can be made than the notification on the main board, and the load on the main board can be reduced. Can be reduced. Further, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to separate the failure of the base display 1317 from the absence of the base value to be displayed. Further, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to know the abnormality of the base value without looking at the back surface side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, it is advisable to use a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 for constant notification. Further, it may be notified at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variable display game is not being executed, the timing of ending the special symbol variable display game).

The base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game arcade. In this case, as in the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, etc.) described later, when the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls). Good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary (high, low) signal indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold value. Further, a signal having a length showing an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, a pulse of 30 milliseconds when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%). Further, the number of continuous pulses that indicates the outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, 3 continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

The base notification command may be generated even when the base value is not updated, and the base notification command may not be generated when the base value is not updated. Even if the base notification command is not generated, the display of the base value is continued.

Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 56 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, and a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value is generated to notify the player or hall employee of the base abnormality. You may notify.

Further, whether to inform the player of the base may be determined according to the game state (game state). This is because if the player is informed of the base value at all times, the player's attention may be neglected regarding the effect of the special symbol variable display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Is.

Further, the effect of the special symbol variable display game which is being executed or will be executed in the future may be changed based on the calculated base value. For example, a plurality of display selection tables may be prepared, and effects may be selected from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) depending on the base value.

Further, during the special symbol variable display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%). Therefore, the effect of the special symbol variable display game may be changed when the threshold value is exceeded or dropped during the special symbol variable display game. The effect may be changed in the same manner or may be changed in a different manner when the base value rises and falls below a predetermined threshold.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area update process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation/display process in step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base. The prize ball count buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). After that, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, it sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. The number of unpaid prize balls out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. Absent. On the other hand, when backing up the number of unpaid prize balls in the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout, but a payout command reception confirmation is transmitted to the main control board 1310. No need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, the abnormality of the gaming machine can be detected early. For example, when it is determined that the base is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variable display game, and the base value is abnormal across the predetermined threshold. Even if it is determined that, the base value calculation process is continuously executed without stopping the game regardless of the abnormality determination. For example, in the special symbol variable display game, there are short time ones such as normal variation and long time ones such as reach variation, and the base value is calculated between the start and end of one special symbol variable display game. When the condition to be satisfied is satisfied multiple times, the base value may be calculated each time, and the base value may be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variable display game is limited (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variable display), the base value may change depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the time may not be noticed, the information necessary for operating the hall may not be output at an appropriate timing, and the hall may be annoying.

In addition, if the game ball that has been launched does not win the starting opening or the general winning opening, the base value decreases. In this state, the player is losing, so, for example, an additional effect is added to the effect that is being performed on the liquid crystal (for example, an effect related to a win not related to a change in the base value, or an effect that appears with a change in the base value). A special effect to be added) or a notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit (a notice effect that is not related to a change in the base value, a notice effect with a high expectation such as the next notice effect, or a change in the base value. A notice effect having a high degree of expectation (for example, the base value is displayed in a rainbow display) may be performed among the specific effects that appear. As a result, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the start opening and the general winning opening, and can be motivated to continue the game.

On the other hand, if most of the game balls that have been shot win the starting opening or the general winning opening (if more than the average value of the number of past winnings), the base value rises. In this state, even if the result of the big hit lottery is out, the player is provided with more game balls than usual, so that the player's disappointment is reduced. The effect of the variable display game may be changed to an effect with low expectations.

[9-2. Variations on the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42 to FIG. 44, variations of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described. The outline of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figure 41: Calculation of number of prize balls → Update of number of prize balls → Calculation of base value → Transmission of payout command ・Figure 42: Calculation of number of prize balls → Update of number of prize balls → Transmission of payout command → Calculation of base value ・Figure 43: Calculation of number of prize balls → Sending payout command → Updating the number of prize balls → Base value calculation ・Fig. 44: Counting prize balls → Sending payout command → Confirming command reception → Updating number of prize balls → Base value calculation ・ Fig. 45: Calculation of number of prize balls → Sending payout command →Payout completion notification→Award number update→Base value calculation The variations of FIGS. 41 to 44 are not limited to the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. It is applicable to any of the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation/display processing.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) is executed at the illustrated position, and the base ratio calculation is performed after the output data setting processing (step S90). The display process (step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. After that, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, it sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. As described above, depending on which of the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the unpaid prize ball number among the prize ball numbers calculated in the prize ball control processing (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after the output data setting processing (step S90), the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89). To execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs the output data setting process. In step S90, a payout command is sent to the payout control board 951. After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in an embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command to calculate the base ratio. The base value is updated in the display process (step S89). The prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted), instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, it sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. As described above, depending on which of the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the unpaid prize ball number among the prize ball numbers calculated in the prize ball control processing (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

The timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation or the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830. The order of the step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs the output data setting process. In step S90, a payout command is sent to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, it sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update processing (step S81), the total number of prize balls is calculated as the number of award balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation is received. Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the award ball count buffer is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, since the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, the payout control board 951 backs up the data of the number of unpaid prize balls. Therefore, although it is necessary to confirm the command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after the ball payout completion notice is received from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs the output data setting process. In step S90, a payout command is sent to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, it sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update processing (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or in the embodiment described later, the number of prize balls that have been paid out). The prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, so the main control board 1310 backs up the data of the number of unpaid prize balls. For this reason, although the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310 is necessary, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used in the calculation of the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the processing shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the number of prize balls is updated when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input processing (step S74). Further, in the processing shown in FIG. 43, when the payout command is transmitted, the number of prize balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the receipt of the payout command is confirmed. In the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls in the prize cannot be accurately counted due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the gaming state is in the prize and the update timing of the prize ball. In particular, the problem becomes serious when the time from the winning of the prize hole to the updating of the number of prize balls is long. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning in the special prize, and the flag is inherited to the number of prize balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification by the prize. Then, by using the flag, it is determined whether or not the prize ball is in the special prize at each stage. In this way, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated even if it takes a long time from the winning of the prize to the update of the number of prize balls.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these occasions, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known from the gaming machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the gaming machine can be manufactured efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out prize balls, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning port sensor detects the winning of the gaming ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port in which the winning is detected is not determined. Add to the number of payout balls. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, the prize ball number buffer for calculating the base value or the total prize ball number may be updated. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning hole sensor detects the winning of the gaming ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole in which the winning is detected. Is sent to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out the prize balls, the payout command is transmitted, and the number of unpaid balls is held in the payout control board 951. In this case, each time the payout command is transmitted, the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value may be updated.

Further, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In addition, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold value Th1, each time a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winnings or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As described above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings. However, when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay, and the base indicator 1317 is updated in real time. May be displayed, or the base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every one minute).

[9-3. Timing of update of prize balls and calculation of base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・FIG. 39 and FIG. 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle. ・FIG. 46 and FIG. 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls. ・FIG. 48 and FIG. 49: The base value for each predetermined number of out balls. Calculation-Figures 50 and 51: Base value is updated when one of the number of prize balls and the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies the predetermined condition (step S813). Note that, in FIG. 46, the same portions as those in the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 39) described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the prize ball number or the out ball number. On the other hand, if the game state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether or not there are prize balls, that is, whether or not the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). It should be noted that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, and the number of prize balls described later becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). For example, the abnormal number of prize balls means that many prize balls are present at a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, in consideration of the number of prize balls of a general winning opening or a starting opening, a prize corresponding to 10 or more winnings per minute). Sphere) is obtained. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide an allowable range of a plurality of stages and judge the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls. When the number of prize balls is abnormal, the acquired number of prize balls does not have to be added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813, and the number of prize balls added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813 is subtracted. Good.

As a result, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player or the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods of reporting the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sounds, and the like may be used to notify the number of prize balls. Further, the abnormality of the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall. Further, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, prize balls may be paid out to the player. Further, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and is notified by the notifying means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display device, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.) described above, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal is determined. It may be used to calculate the base value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and all the data in the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, in the initial state, the game is started from the operation confirmation. As another method of stopping the game, the game is once stopped (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped), and then the error notification is stopped and then returned to the original state to restart the game. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a power failure detection signal even if it does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. Then, after the error notification is completed, the data in the main control internal RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area and the game is restarted. At this time, since the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 in the same state, the suspended game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, since 100 game balls (that is, out balls) may be launched into the game area 5a and all the game balls may enter the general winning opening or the starting opening, the number of winning balls is reported to be abnormal. It is desirable that the mode to be performed is a mode in which the degree of urgency is lower than that of a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error) and that the mode of operation is gentle (for example, a lower volume and a lower light amount than a normal error notification). Further, the display time may be the same as a normal error or may be a short time. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 second and notification may not be performed.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822).

Then, it is determined whether or not the award ball abnormality notification timer started in step S817 has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the notification end is determined so that the prize ball abnormality is notified by the predetermined number of shot balls. May be. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, it is determined in step S985 whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal. However, after the number of out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is abnormal in comparison with the number of out balls. Whether (that is, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, when the number of award balls exceeding the number of out balls is counted in a predetermined time, or considering the number of award balls of a general winning opening or a starting mouth, the number of out balls is high (for example, 50% or more). Such as when.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same parts as those in the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 40) described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). In addition, the determination result obtained by comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 is recorded in a flag in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 47), the prize ball number buffer value is changed by the flag. May be determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1.

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). That is, in a gaming situation in which the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the prize ball number is set. Remaining (fractional number Th1 subtracted from the prize ball number buffer is left in the prize ball number buffer), other parts are stored in the memory (total threshold number Th1 is added to the threshold Th1), and used to calculate the base value. Execute the process. Specifically, when the threshold value Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and when five prize balls are generated by winning the general winning opening, the prize ball number buffer value is 104. However, 100 pieces are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for the calculation of the base value, and the remaining four pieces are left in the prize ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four award balls left in the award ball number buffer is used for calculating the base value when the award ball number buffer value becomes equal to or more than the threshold Th1 next time. Further, although the threshold value Th1=100 pieces has been described, other values such as 1000 pieces may be used. However, if a large threshold value Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a big hit is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed, so the threshold value Th1 is equal to or less than the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit (a plurality of types). If there is a big jackpot (for example, a big jackpot in 4 rounds and 8 rounds), it is preferable to set it to the minimum value or less of the number of award balls. Further, from the viewpoint of early detection of fraud, it is preferable to update the base value frequently. For example, the threshold value Th1 is preferably 10 instead of 100, because the base value is frequently updated.

Note that steps S891 and S892 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1. Furthermore, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311, or may be measured by the output of RTC (real time clock).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated. Therefore, the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error (or indefinite), so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

In addition to the case where the total number of out balls is 0, or when the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the base value may not be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated. For example, when the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value is 100% or more, and the number of prize balls equal to or more than the number of shot balls (out balls) is obtained, and the game is normally performed. Since it is not in the state of being present, it is not necessary to store a numerical value in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and to calculate the base value. When the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with 1500% as the threshold value. The maximum value of the theoretical base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls of 15 per prize hole is 1500%, so a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. Also in this case, the base value may not be calculated, or the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining the abnormality of the base value may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in the normal operation of the pachinko machine is set, and if it is outside the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is set to the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value without updating.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, the abnormal base value may be displayed even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same as the total number of balls since the pachinko machine 1 started operating, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. It may be initialized at a timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls or every predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is acquired, and thus fraud can be detected early. This is because in a normal game, a high probability that a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of shot balls) will not win the general winning opening 2001 and the starting openings 2002 and 2004. Therefore, an abnormality in the winning of the winning opening (general winning opening 2001 or starting openings 2002, 2004) that is always open is determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the example shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the calculation amount required for calculating the base value (for example, when calculating the base value for each prize ball) (for example, The load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated to notify the new base value, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. To be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 48, the out-ball number is recorded in the out-ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the out-ball number satisfies the predetermined condition (step S819). Note that, in FIG. 48, the same step numbers are given to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there are prize balls, the number of acquired prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 48, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

Then, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired out-ball count is added to the out-ball count buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. Therefore, for example, when a game ball is won in the starting opening and it is determined to generate the prefetching effect, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (flashing display, red hold, etc.), The player expects that the special symbol variable display game corresponding to the prefetched hold will be a big hit, but if the special symbol variable display game is lost, the player is discouraged. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned discouragement of the player can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the prize ball generation timing, and the base value increased by the prize ball due to winning the start opening is notified. That is, even when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed at the time of winning at the starting opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning at the starting opening is added, the above-described predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1=100) is obtained. If not reached, the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should rise (only the lower number changes due to the number of digits displayed, and the display may not change). Therefore, even if the look-ahead effect described above is off, the player thinks that the base value will increase later (that is, the condition is good), and can suppress a decrease in interest. In other words, even if it is determined that the prefetch effect is executed, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1). Further, when it is determined that the prefetch effect is executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. ..

The player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate without delay. For example, at the start of the game, it can be selected by the operation button 220C. Further, the timing of calculating the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is decided to perform the prefetching effect, it is preferable to execute an effect capable of notifying the delay of the calculation of the base value. It should be noted that if the reserved storage of the special symbol variable display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery is not executed even if the winning is achieved at the starting opening. Even in this case, since the prize balls are paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening, the number of the prize balls is counted and used for the calculation of the base value. In addition, when a specific error is made, even if the winning opening is won or the general winning opening is won, it is treated that there is no winning, and if the winning balls are not paid out, the number of winning balls is not counted, and depending on the winning, the base value Is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that, in FIG. 49, the same parts as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out balls may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the storage area for the number of out balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of out balls is composed of 8 bits. , If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, the determination result obtained by comparing the number of out balls with the threshold Th2 is recorded in a flag in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48), and the number of out balls is predetermined by the flag in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 49). It may be determined whether or not the threshold Th2 is equal to or more than the threshold Th2.

If the out-sphere count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900). Note that steps S899 and S900 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out-ball-count buffer value with the threshold Th2.

Then, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate a base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operating, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize). Initialization may be performed for each number of balls or for each predetermined number of out balls.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. The base notification command may be one that simply notifies the base value, one that notifies the base value with a specific effect, or one that notifies the abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed each time the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which fun is pursued.

Further, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls each time a prize ball (detection of prize, transmission of payout command, arrival of payout command, completion of payout of prize balls, etc.). This is because the base value may not be calculated correctly if it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied when adding the number of prize balls (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball). For example, even if the shooting is not carried out for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the ball-hanging (vine) state caused by the game ball catching on the nail arranged in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because there are cases where a prize is won. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of whether or not there are out balls.

When both the out-ball number and the out-ball number buffer value are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the out-ball number buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the out-ball number buffer value may be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, so that the base value is calculated more than the case where the base value is calculated every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculation (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated to notify the new base value, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. To be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 50, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , Record the number of out balls in the out ball count buffer. Note that, in FIG. 50, the same portions as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same parts as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are designated by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify the abnormality of the base value. The base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, or the base value may be calculated or the base notification command may not be generated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls of the base calculation area 13128 is the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 39, FIG. 46, FIG. 47, FIG. 48) executed by the main control MPU 1311. 49, 51, etc.) and read by the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 40, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Further, the data of the prize ball count buffer and the out ball count buffer of the base calculation area 13128 is written in the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. -Read by display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and the base calculation/display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program), and a game ratio calculation/display process program is shared by game machines with different specifications. it can.

FIG. 52A shows an example of a work area structure of the simplest method. The structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52A stores a prize ball number buffer, a total prize ball number, an out ball number buffer, a prize ball number buffer, a specific prize ball number buffer, a total out ball number, and a base. The prize ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and is based on the condition that the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls). Used to calculate The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid to the player other than during the special prize. The out-ball number buffer is the number of game balls that the player has shot during a period other than during the prize, and is used to calculate the base when the out-ball number meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out-balls). Be done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls winning the general winning opening and the starting opening. The specific winning sphere number buffer temporarily stores the number of spheres won in a particular general winning opening or starting opening. The winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is counted by the number of balls passing through the outlet (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls shot by the player other than during the special prize. The base is calculated by total prize balls/total out balls×100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation/display processing.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total accumulation of FIG. 52(B) described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It is possible to store numerical values up to 16777215 or 429496295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of the base of FIG. 52(B) described later, and can store up to 255 decimal numbers. It should be noted that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded with a decimal number may be allocated.

FIG. 52B shows another example of the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), a prize ball number buffer, a total prize ball number, an out ball number buffer, a prize ball number buffer, a specific prize ball number buffer, a total out ball number and a base are stored. Each data item is the same as the description in FIG. 52(A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls, for each predetermined time) (for example, for every 6000 prize balls). It is configured by a ring buffer having (n=10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers for all the data are moved to change the storage area where the data is updated. .. Then, after a predetermined number of prize balls worth of data are stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. The writing pointer may be moved when the data other than the number of prize balls (the number of out balls, the predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

The write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all the data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for every predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The total number of total prize balls and total number of out balls is the total value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the value of the base total is the total number of total prize balls and total number of out balls. It is a value calculated from the value, and when the ring buffer goes round and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the data in the cleared area is excluded and the cumulative value is Recalculated. The total sum of each data is the total value of all the data collected in the past, the value of the base total sum calculated from the total value is the value calculated from the total total value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data in one cycle, the total cumulative value including the original data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are each a storage area of 2 bytes, and a numerical value up to 65535 in decimal can be stored. Since the total is the total of data for 6000 prize balls×n (60,000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is prepared. The total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and a decimal number of 16777215 or 429496295 can be stored. Since the total sum is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The base total and the total total are each 1-byte storage areas, and can store up to 255 decimal numbers. It should be noted that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded with a decimal number may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52A, the stored data is not erased, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, or January). Good. Similarly, the total sum shown in FIG. 52B may be deleted every predetermined period.

If the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value, but all data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, the data in the normal backup area may be copied to the main area, and then the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Display base value]
The base value calculated as described above may be continuously displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base display 1317 is visually recognized. Since it is not possible, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. Naturally, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation/display process (step S89) are executed even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off.

The base display 1317 may always display the base value or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318 which is a push button switch is pressed, the display of the base value is started, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. The base value may be displayed on the base display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, a predetermined display may be provided on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is displayed (FIG. 36(E)), and the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. , It is good to reduce the power consumption of the game machine. This base non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36(B)), but may be a different mode as long as it can be distinguished from the displayed base value.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, it is possible to quickly switch from the base display to the display of the game state when the main body frame 4 is closed. For example, when the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variable display game, the base value is displayed, but when the main frame 4 is closed before the elapse of the variable time, the variable display for the remaining time can be performed. .. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variable display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, the player can be configured not to feel uncomfortable.

Further, even when the body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the character ratio) may be displayed on the base display (character ratio display) 1317. In this way, the base value (characteristics ratio) can be confirmed without opening the main body frame 4, so that the reduction in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the body frame 4 is open. Further, in the island facility in which the pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back side of the pachinko machines installed on the other side can be seen. In such a gaming machine, by opening the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, it is possible to check the bases (proportion of character parts) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back. When the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form that can be recognized by the player (for example, on a display device that displays the effect of the special symbol variable display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer showing the condition of a pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the payout control board 951 calculates the base value, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Moreover, you may transmit the signal for displaying a base value via a relay substrate.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 does not change even when shifting to the energy saving mode. This is because if the light amount of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value by the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening time.

Specifically, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is in a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the game balls have not won in any of the winning openings and the pending storage of the special symbol variable display game has been exhausted. .. In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs the BGM that is output in so-called normal fluctuation. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the demo state is entered. In the demo state, a video showing the motif of the game machine is played, and the game machine is explained. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, in order to suppress power consumption, the light amount of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is necessary to reduce the light amount of these display devices. Good. Further, if the light quantity of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who is going to play on an empty table can easily visually recognize the result of the last lottery.

Also, even if the game ball does not win at the starting opening or general winning opening, if the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. There is a nature. If the number of prize balls does not increase even if the number of out balls increases when the game balls are fired, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will be in revenge.

By informing such a player of the state of the game on the function display unit 1400 that also serves as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even if the player shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the display mode of the display unit that displays the base value maintains the light amount before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or raises the light amount, and It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

In this way, we explained the maintenance or increase of the light quantity of the display unit that displays the base value, but with an emphasis on the reduction of energy consumption, even if the light quantity of the display unit that displays the base value is decreased or turned off. Good. For example, a predetermined operation during the energy saving mode (a firing stop button that forcibly stops the firing, an operation button that changes the rendered effect, a RAM clear button that clears the contents of RAM, a power supply to the gaming machine It is preferable to reduce the light amount of the display device on which the base value is displayed, when the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine, such as the supply adjustment button for switching the presence or absence of) is detected. Furthermore, not only during the energy saving mode, but by performing the above-mentioned predetermined operation, the light amount of both the lamps that reduce power consumption and the display that displays the base value is reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. Good.

When reducing or turning off the light intensity of both the lamp and the display unit that displays the base value, reduce the light intensity of the lamp that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode before the display unit that displays the base value. It may be turned on or off. In this case, the light amount of a lamp or the like which consumes a large amount of power is first reduced, and the power consumption is greatly reduced. In addition, the display unit that displays the base value may be turned off or turned off before the lamp, etc., and the light intensity of the display unit that displays the base value may be turned off. Produce an effect. In addition, the lamps that reduce power consumption and the indicator that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time during the energy saving mode. In this case, the amount of power consumption can be reduced and the energy saving effect is high. .. In addition, before and after the time (meaning “previously” and “simultaneously”) in these descriptions includes the order of internal processing timings and the order of appearances from the player.

Further, the display mode of the base value may be set in a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. The indicator for displaying the base value may be configured by multi-color LEDs, and the emission color may be changed to white, blue, or yellow at each stage. In addition, the display that displays the base value is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the base value is low at each stage, such as "I feel good", "I'm feeling down", "It's not bad", "It's amazing in some sense" Occasionally you may display self-deprecating comments. Further, the effect of adding a comment as described above may be executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 on which the decorative pattern is displayed, without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the exit]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the processing described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated by using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out mouth, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
54 and FIG. 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt period. FIG. 55 and FIG. 56: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 54 to FIG.

If the out-ball passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out-port 1111 detects the out-ball, there is a problem that the accurate out-ball number cannot be counted. This means that the game ball shot toward the game area 5a flows out from the game area 5a via the general winning opening 2001, the starting opening 2002, and the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in addition to the out opening 1111. Therefore, the out-passage ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls shot toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out mouth, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has a structure similar to that of the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the bottom of the game area 5a and passes through the out port 1111 to flow out from the game area 5a (out. An out-passage ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of passage balls) is provided. The out-passage ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111. By placing the out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111, it can be made aware that the out-balls are being counted, that is, the base is being calculated.

Further, the out-passage ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a collecting gutter in which game balls flowing down from the game area 5a through the out-port 1111 are aligned. If the player is installed at a position that cannot be visually recognized, it is not necessary for the player to be aware of counting out balls. Further, by providing the out-passage ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out-port 1111 it is possible to secure a sufficient place for arranging the liquid crystal display device and the accessory (movable body), and improve the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5. it can. In addition, in order to prevent double counting of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the out-passage ball sensor 1021 is rolled so that the game ball that has passed through the out-passage ball sensor 1021 does not bounce back. It is better to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the number of prize balls, the number of out-pass balls, and the number of prize-winning balls are acquired in order to calculate the base value using the number of out-pass balls at each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are given to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped.

After that, the number of out-passing balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of out-out passage balls and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , The number of out-passing balls is recorded in the out-ball number buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball number buffer. Note that, in FIG. 55, the same step numbers are assigned to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out-out passage balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out-out passage balls is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the winning ball buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of out-pass balls and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. Then, the acquired number of out-pass balls and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out-ball number buffer, winning-ball number buffer). As described above, the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

Further, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired out-passage ball count and winning prize count are recorded in different storage areas, the out-ball count increases by 1 when the winning prize is won. The counting of the number of spheres passing through the outlet and the counting of the number of winning spheres are executed simultaneously (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the out-number-of-balls buffer and the winning sphere-number buffer. At that time, if both the out ball count buffer and the winning ball count buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, the number of balls passing through the out mouth is given priority, or the winning ball count is given priority. It is better not to be decided by lottery, but to be decided in advance. At that time, if the process related to the prize ball is prioritized over the other processes, the prize ball payout process can be executed promptly, but it may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same parts as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are designated by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of out-out passage balls stored in the out-ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896). ). The sum of the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the award ball number buffer value is added to the total award ball number (step S897), and the award ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted (step S901). .. Note that steps S896 to S901 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (out ball number buffer value+winning ball number buffer value) with the threshold Th2.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of winning balls is added to the number of out-passing balls to calculate the number of out balls, so the number of out balls is accurately counted, and the base value is accurately calculated. it can. Further, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process or the inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317 and the process for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Notification of abnormalities in the base]
The process described above is for generating a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process for determining an abnormality in the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
-FIG. 57: A base value is calculated every time a timer interrupt cycle is performed.-FIG. 58: A base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. A pattern for calculating a base value for each predetermined number of prize balls, a predetermined pattern. The description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each out-ball number is omitted, but it can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG. 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or the hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display processing ends. The method of notifying the abnormality of the base can be the same as the method of notifying the base described above.

For example, one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. By notifying the player of the abnormality in the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display device or display device to notify the abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. For a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the first decimal place is displayed and more detailed display is performed. May be.

Further, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, it is displayed by blinking a numerical value or changing the color (normally green, abnormal red, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It is also possible to divide the display into a plurality of stages and change the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage for display.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like. The function display unit 1400 may notify the abnormality of the base value. Further, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall.

Note that the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57 is performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, when the total number of award balls and the total number of out balls are determined at a timing when the number of award balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update processing to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are designated by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or the hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display processing ends.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, for example, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are directly updated using the acquired number of prize balls and the number of out balls. It is preferable to use it in combination with the base calculation area updating process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine, and the hall employee can It is possible to know the possibility of illegal operation on the gaming machine. Further, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of the gaming machine which cannot be detected by the conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of change in base]
Next, an example of the gaming machine for notifying the change of the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by a pachinko machine naturally goes up and down. Since the base value represents the condition of the gaming machine, the player who is playing the game cares about the change of the base value in addition to the base value itself. Therefore, it is desired to inform the player of the change in the base value. When a display that serves as a guide for the upper and lower sides of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 59, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the history of the present base value with the history of the past base value. In FIG. 59, the same steps as those of the base calculation/display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the base value management timer has timed out (step S904). If the base value management timer has not expired, it is not the time to store the base value in the base history, and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer is up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used for recording the base value at every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer times out. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128 or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be formed in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, a predetermined time×10 base values. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time×n number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are stored, The base value may be calculated if necessary.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral controller power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral controller 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. It is determined whether or not (step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is referred to, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the decrease of the base value. (Step S10302). Then, if the predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table in which the base is decreasing is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table in which the lowering of the base continues is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than (equal to or larger than) the current base value, the base decrease duration measuring timer is reset (step S10305), and the display selection table during base rising is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, it is determined in step S10301 whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value. However, the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether they are large, equal, or small. You may. Since the base value is obtained by division, it is generally a decimal value. Therefore, it is preferable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are diagrams showing an example of the display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select the effect of the special symbol variable display game by the random number selected with the winning of the winning opening as a trigger (or before the start of the special symbol variable display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or the base value is not changed, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are used when the base value is decreasing. To be selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

Each display selection table includes each item of effect number, effect content, change time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The effect content is the name of the effect. The fluctuation time is the time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the effect to the end thereof. The remarks are information that describes the outline of the effect so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (out) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is out and the base value is increasing or there is no change, and the display selection table 1 (out of 1) shown in FIG. Is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is a normal big hit that does not lead to a probability variation state, and the base value is increasing or there is no change. The display selection table 1 (2 per win) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is a positive variation big hit that derives a positive variation state and the base value is increasing or there is no change.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2 that are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the effect is determined.

If the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease, the display selection table 3 is used to select an effect, and the selected effect is selected. You may switch.

Further, whether to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value may be determined according to the game state (game state). This is because if the player is constantly informed of the change in the base value, the player's attention will be neglected for the special symbol variable display game that is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is.

For example, during the execution of the special symbol variable display game (game situation where the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the effect of the special symbol variable display game is preferentially executed, and when it is not changing, the base value rises. It is advisable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guide for the change in the base value) at the time of descending or descending.

The specific effect may be displayed at a timing when the time when the special symbol variable display game is not executed continues for a predetermined time. This is because, if the particular effect is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game ends, the player's sense of tension continues and fatigue is accumulated. When the game ball wins the starting opening while the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variable display game is executed. This is because the jackpot lottery is performed upon the winning of the winning opening, and the special symbol variable display game is started. Therefore, it is better to let the player pay attention to the special symbol variable display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1) or the number of out balls has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but may be executed without fail if the same condition is satisfied.

Further, it is preferable that the particular effect is not displayed when the base value rises but is displayed only when the base value falls. This is because if the player is informed of the increase in the base value, the player's expectation rises, and if the base value does not rise to the extent expected by the player, the player may be discouraged due to the gap with the expectation. is there. On the other hand, if the player is informed of the decrease in the base value, some players will increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display selection table is changed while the base value is decreasing and other times (increasing and steady), but the display is divided into three states of the base value decreasing, steady and rising. A selection table may be defined to inform the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is in a steady state (whether the base history value is equal to the current base value) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

Further, the particular effect may be displayed during the special symbol variable display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when displayed during a special symbol variable display game than when displayed during the special symbol variable display game.

In the state where the game ball does not win the starting opening and the special symbol variable display game is not executed, the base value is normally lowered. If the special symbol variable display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demo screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69(A) is a display example of normal reach, in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. FIG. 69(B) is a display example of the special reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7 and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing a game of rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 69(C) is a display example of the special reach 2. The left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing a match, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the match.

FIG. 69D is a display example of the freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative design is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative design (for example, the lower right part of the screen). Is displayed in a recognizable manner. FIG. 69(E) is a display example of the freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative design is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower part of the screen) that does not disturb the recognition of the decorative design. Display the continuation recognizable. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. For example, a display that pops up in the center of the display screen may be used.

The example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, but the lighting mode of the decoration lamp may be changed. Also, instead of the tendency of the base value to rise and fall, the change in the base value may be displayed numerically.

The change in the displayed base value is the total sum of the base values calculated before the predetermined time even in the comparison result of the base value calculated during the time interval before the predetermined time and the base value calculated during the current time interval. May be the result of comparison between the latest total base value and the total.

[9-8. Calculation based on specific winning a prize mouth]
Next, a process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of the winning of a specific general winning opening will be described.

In a pachinko machine, a player aims at a specific winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 2005, 2006 that is in an open state) in which a gaming ball is easy to win during a big hit, and the player can play the game ball. Adjust the firing strength. Even during a big hit, a game ball is shot at the same spot as a so-called normal hit to aim at the big winning opening 2005, or the strength of the shooting is strengthened to the maximum, so-called right hitting is aimed at the big winning opening 2006 There are variations. In such variations, a game board may be designed so that a starting opening or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the special winning opening and a ball spilled from the big winning opening is picked up.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of the pachinko machine that is hit to the right during a big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player makes a right-handed hit in order to put the game ball into the open big winning opening. Most of the game balls shot toward the game area enter the open special winning opening 2006. As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 16, the general winning opening 2001 is provided on the right side of the big winning opening 2005, and the game ball that has been hit to the right is open. When no prize is won in the big prize hole 2006, the general prize hole 2001 is won. In other words, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the special winning opening 2005 is won only when the right-handed game ball does not enter the opening large winning opening 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out when the 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a, that is, the number of prize balls paid out by the winning in the starting opening and the general winning opening (that is, 100 out balls are paid. To show the ratio of the number of prize balls that have been put out), the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win at the starting opening and general winning opening (high probability of winning at the large winning opening) It is assumed that when calculated as (out sphere number), it deviates from the actual base value when calculated as the base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the special winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the particular general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning opening is as follows.
-Figures 70 and 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt period-Figures 71 and 72: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls Note that the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls The description of the pattern for calculating and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, but it can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, in order to calculate the base value by using the out ball count corrected by the winning ball count to a specific general winning opening for each timer interrupt cycle, Get the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. Note that, in FIG. 70, the same portions as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 70, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls (specific winning ball number) to a specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, a value obtained by subtracting the specific winning ball count from the out ball count is added to the total out ball count (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71 records the number of award balls in the award ball count buffer and calculates the number of award balls in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of award balls and the number of out balls satisfy predetermined conditions. Record the number in the Out Ball Buffer. Note that, in FIG. 71, the same step numbers are given to the same portions as the above-described base calculation area update processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether or not the winning opening for the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning opening, and the number of winning balls to the specific winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls for the specific winning a prize hole is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific winning ball number recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same steps as those of the base calculation/display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the sum of the number of out-out passage balls stored in the out-ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). ). The sum of the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the award ball number buffer value is added to the total award ball number (step S897), and the award ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific winning ball count is subtracted from the total out ball count, the threshold Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball count buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or the hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display processing ends.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value remains the same value, and if the number of total prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, The base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both of them are updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated by excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting opening and the general winning opening, the deviation from the actual base value Can accurately calculate small base values.

Also, the case has been described in which the general winning hole 2001 is located downstream of the special winning opening 2006 in a pachinko machine that hits right during a big hit, but the invention according to the present embodiment aims for the large winning opening 2005 by a normal hit during a big hit. It can be applied to a pachinko machine or a gaming machine in which a start opening or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the special winning opening 2005.

Further, the game area 5a is provided with special winning openings 2005 and 2006 that normally do not accept game balls but can accept the game balls according to the result of the jackpot. The prize balls due to winning in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball wins the starting openings 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variable display game starts, and after the special symbol is fixed, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (big hit opening), the big winning opening The detected out-balls are excluded from the out-ball counts as the special prize during the period from the closing of 2005 and 2006 until the start of the next special symbol variable display game (big hit ending). In this way, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the special prize can be counted without determining in step S810 of FIG. 39 or the like whether or not the special prize is being awarded. In addition, when the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed with one big hit, the time between the closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 (closing interval) may be included in the prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the right-handing instruction. Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include a time saving period, a positive change (during ST), and a power support. Furthermore, during a time saving period, during a probable change (during ST), and in a game state other than during electric power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting opening 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball winning the starting opening is detected as an out ball). Up to the required few seconds) may be included in the prize.

Further, in the game area 5a, a second starting opening 2004 is arranged which normally does not accept a game ball, but can accept the game ball according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize balls due to winning in the second starting opening 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 to perform a lottery of ordinary symbols, the ordinary symbol variable display game starts, and after the regular symbol is fixed until it is opened (opening), the second starting opening 2004 The detected out-ball is excluded from the out-ball count as a special prize during the period from the closing of the game until the start of the next normal symbol variable display game (ending). In addition, when the second starting opening 2004 repeats opening and closing according to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time between the closing of the second starting opening 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the prize. In this way, all winnings to the second starting opening 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value, not only during the time saving.

As described above, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize (big hit, shortened time, etc.) can be accurately counted without determining in step S810 in FIG.

By doing so, the number of out balls and the number of prize balls can be accurately excluded while the player is hitting right, and the base value can be accurately calculated.

In addition, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game by left-handing in a state where it is neither big hit nor shortening (so-called normal state), and playing it right-handed during a big hit or shortening. In such a gaming machine, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, which wins when hitting left, a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004, which wins when hitting right, are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings from the left side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when left-handed) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when right-handed) and The winning rate at each winning opening differs depending on the arrangement and the arrangement position of the nails. In other words, the base value when left-handed and the base value when right-handed are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player hits left in a normal state. However, as described above, when the base value is different between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the base value for right-handed in a normal state is designed to be lower than that for left-handed) In the normal state, when the player hits right, a low base value is calculated.

Hall judges that the pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or judges that it is a gaming machine with poor payout performance. Even in a pachinko machine that is judged to have poor payout performance (lower than the expected base), the hall determines that the player is left-handed, so there is a starting opening that acts on the base when left-handed. Make adjustments to increase the winning rate at the general winning openings. Then, adjust the nail with the abnormality to increase the base value. If you hit the left with the game machine adjusted in this way, you can get a lot of prize balls even in the normal state. In other words, you can win a lot of lots for a small amount. In other words, even if the base when left-handed is the same as what the hole assumed, the hole is misunderstood and adjustments are made to increase the entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that are won when left-handed. Since there is a possibility that the hole will be disadvantaged by such a player's bad faith, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when left-handed and the base value when right-handed.

By the way, a pachinko machine that makes a right hit during a time saving, a second start opening 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state, and a gate section 2003 for performing a normal symbol lottery for opening the second start opening 2004, when making a right hit. It is arranged in the area where the game balls roll. Further, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 by hitting the right in the normal state, even if the normal symbols are drawn, the probability of winning the universal symbol is extremely low so that the second starting opening 2004 does not open, Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened, and it is difficult to win the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in the right-handed state in the normal state, the rate of entry into the second starting opening 2004 is increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the rate of entry into the second starting port 2004 puts pressure on the profit of the hall. Therefore, it is advisable to calculate the base value corrected using the number of passing balls of the gate unit 2003 when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as the specific winning ball number. A high base calculated value can be obtained by reducing the number of out balls. For example, when a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate unit 2003, an extremely high base value is calculated. Note that the degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls passes through the gate portion 2003 without winning the starting opening) (A condition may be added), and the number of out-balls counted in a predetermined time after passing through the gate unit 2003 (or before and after) or in a predetermined number of shots need not be used for calculating the base value. By doing so, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate unit 2003 is detected, a display or voice such as “please return to left-handing” may be output without actively notifying the player that it is not reflected in the calculation result of the base value. In addition, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, it may be notified to the hall that the player is right-handed. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, a lighting mode may be changed, or a right-hand hit may be output from an external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in a game arcade.

As described above, by excluding the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game balls roll when hitting right) from the number of out balls, hitting right in a normal state The base value at time can be corrected to a large value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation of the calculated value of the base depending on the game style of the player.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value of confirming the operation status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be held for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation/display data 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the condition for deleting the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, it is possible to hold accurate data of the number of prize balls and calculate an accurate accessory ratio.

Specifically, the base calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation), but the backup power supplied to the main control MPU 1311 is shut off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is changed. By the second operation of shutting off, all the data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. The second operation may be provided with one switch for realizing this operation, or the employee of the game shop may remove the connector of the power supply line for backup supplied to the main control board 1310, and the pachinko machine 1 The power of may be shut off.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, and only the data related to the progress of the game is erased in the first operation, but the calculated base value in the second operation. Erase all data including data related to game progress.

With such a configuration, the base calculation/display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation of an attendant in the amusement arcade, so that the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved and the concealment of a state where the accessory ratio is high can be prevented. ..

[9-10. Calculation based on the consideration of winning anomalies]
FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update processing in consideration of the winning abnormality.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, an abnormality in winning may be detected. For example, when a winning is detected other than during the opening of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 due to the jackpot being derived in the special symbol variable display game, or the starting opening 2004 due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol varying display game. If a winning is detected during the period other than when the game is open, the winning is abnormal. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly a case where many prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, the prize winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a case where a winning in a state where winning is impossible or a large number of winnings in a predetermined time are detected.

Since the winning ball related to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and accurately calculate the base. For this reason, in the base calculation area update processing in consideration of the prize abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of prize balls related to the detected prize abnormality.

It should be noted that, usually, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 are won only during the special prize, so the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, There is no need to consider abnormalities.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls paid out as a game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 is updated. To do. In particular, the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 73 is similar to the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, in order to calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle, the prize ball control processing (step S80). The total number of prize balls is directly updated using the number of prize balls calculated in (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822). Note that, in FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded.

If the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the prize ball number or the out ball number. On the other hand, if the game state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of award balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of award balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls may correspond to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the receipt confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Further, the main control board 1310 may send a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the number of award balls (paid award ball number) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of payout may be used. This variation has already been described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped. Further, although the game balls are won in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the upper limit value is the hold, and the prize balls are paid out even when the winning in the starting port is not held, so that the total number of prize balls is updated. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the prize is not generated, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total prize ball number is recorded in a total prize ball number storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, every time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

Then, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether or not a winning anomaly is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when the winning of the special winning opening 2005, 2006 is detected in addition to the special prize (during the operation of the condition device) which is caused by the jackpot being derived in the special symbol variable display game, , If the winning in the starting opening 2004 is detected even though it is not open due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol variable display game, it is determined that the winning is abnormal.

It may be determined that the winning is abnormal when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or the winning abnormality is detected when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, if a predetermined number of consecutive winning prize balls are detected, it may be determined as a winning prize, or if a predetermined number of winning balls are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined as a winning prize. You may.

Then, the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out-balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, etc., and the detection signals of these sensors are read and acquired in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls for abnormal prize winning from the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, or after adding the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls The number of abnormally awarded balls may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total out ball count is recorded in the total out ball count storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total out-ball count is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40). Therefore, the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is generated. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the base value calculation process. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 from the payout control section 952. May be sent.

Further, in one timer interruption process, even if the information of both winning and out balls to the winning opening is acquired, the number of prize balls is changed to the total number of prize balls (or a prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). Then, the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (or an out ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). Further, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of winning a prize to a plurality of winning openings is acquired, the total number of award balls due to a plurality of winning awards is the total award ball number (or, in the embodiment described later, an award ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when winning is detected for a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of five winning balls and a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of three winning balls, a total of eight winning balls are totaled. (Or the prize ball number buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning, which is detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020, may be added to the total prize ball number (or prize ball number buffer). Further, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (further, the launching control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops the operation. It is also possible to add only the number of prize balls relating to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) to the total prize ball count or the prize ball count buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the player operates the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is detected to be touched by a hand or finger is calculated as the total prize ball number ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting the prize ball in a state where the game ball is not fired or an illegal act, and to prevent an incorrect display of the base value. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 74, the out-ball number is recorded in the out-ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the out-ball number satisfies the predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same step numbers are assigned to the same portions as the above-described base calculation area update processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is not abnormal, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). .. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time the number of prize balls is calculated.

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

Then, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired out-ball count is added to the out-ball count buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether or not a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

In the base calculation region update processing shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected by the number of all winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out balls are corrected for the winning balls related to the particular type of winning abnormality and It is not necessary to correct the out ball in the winning ball related to the particular type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of prize ball related to the prize abnormality, the prize ball may or may not be paid out for the prize ball. Whether or not the prize balls are to be paid out with respect to this prize abnormality may be determined for each prize hole. In this case, with respect to the winning abnormality in which the winning balls are not paid out, the winning balls are not counted as the total out balls and should not be used for the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, in regard to the winning abnormality in which the prize balls are paid out, it is preferable that the prize balls are counted as total out balls, and the prize balls to be paid out are also counted as the total prize balls number, and are used for the calculation of the base value. It should be noted that even if the prize balls are paid out abnormally, the prize balls may not be counted as the total out balls, the prize balls to be paid out may not be counted as the total number of prize balls, and may not be used for the calculation of the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance of a game machine failure (clearing a ball clogging, etc.), a hall employee may insert a game ball into the starting port by hand to compensate for the exit ball so as not to damage the player. In this case, prize balls are paid out for winning the prize at the starting opening. The winning in the starting opening is detected as an abnormal prize, but the prize ball is paid out. When the prize balls are paid out in this way, they should be reflected in the base value, and therefore it is not necessary to determine that the prize is abnormal. In this case, the prize balls are paid out at the winning openings (starting openings 2002, 2004) reflected in the calculation of the base value, no abnormality in the winning is determined, and the prize balls are not paid at the other winning openings (large winning openings 2005, 2006). It is advisable to determine the prize winning abnormality without paying out. The number of prize balls to be determined for abnormality of the prize is smaller than that of the prize hole for which abnormality of the prize is not determined (3 prize balls for the starting prize, 15 prize balls for the major prize). For this reason, although the winning a prize is judged to be abnormal at the special winning opening, even if the abnormal winning is not judged at the starting opening, it is not a large security hole from the viewpoint of protection against fraudulent acts. In this way, by determining the prize winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent the inconsistency between the out ball and the number of prize balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls relating to a winning prize that does not generate a winning ball, it is possible to match the number of winning balls with the out ball that causes the winning ball.

As described above, the winning abnormality can be determined by various winning openings, but a specific example of mounting on a pachinko machine will be described.

First, the prize winning abnormality may not be determined at the general winning opening 2001, and the prize winning may be determined at a winning opening other than the general winning opening 2001 (large winning openings 2005, 2006, starting openings 2002, 2004). Since it is difficult to simultaneously win a plurality of game balls at the general winning a prize, it is possible to improve the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activity, and to open and close the large winning a prizes 2005 and 2006 and the starting prize 2002 ( The player can be compensated for the exit by entering the general winning openings 2001 (4 in total), which are provided more than the total of 3). Further, since the general winning hole 2001 can be easily identified by an employee of the hall, the operation for maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and compensation for a ball can be easily performed. The reason why the employees of the hall can easily identify the general winning opening 2001 is that the general winning openings 2001 are often arranged in a game area (in a divided area), and the electric prize (the large winning opening is large). This is because the decoration members (appearance) are different from those of 2005, 2006, the starting ports 2002 and 2004). In addition, when the number of prize balls for one prize in the general winning opening is small, there is an effect that the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraud is improved. It should be noted that the abnormality determination may not be determined only for a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), and the abnormality determination may be determined for another general winning opening.

In addition, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 having a large number of prize balls do not determine a prize winning abnormality, and the prize winning openings other than the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 (general winning openings 2001, starting openings 2002 and 2004 having a small number of prize balls) are won. You may judge abnormality. Since there are a large number of prize balls for one prize in the special winning opening, the base value changes greatly even with a small number of prize balls. Therefore, it is convenient that the change of the base value can be easily inspected when inspecting the pachinko machine. It should be noted that the abnormality determination may not be made only by using a particular special winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 that allows easy entry of game balls), and the abnormality may be determined by another large winning opening (eg, 2006). ..

Further, the winning opening may not be determined at the starting openings 2002 and 2004, and the winning abnormality may be determined at winning openings (general winning opening 2001, big winning openings 2005 and 2006) other than the starting openings 2002 and 2004. Since the number of prize balls for winning one ball is smaller than that of the large winning port, the starting port can improve the security resistance of the gaming machine against the goto and can compensate the player for the ball. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific starting opening (for example, the starting opening 2002 provided at the center of the game board is easy to understand the position), and the other starting openings 2004 may be determined by the winning abnormality.

Furthermore, at the special winning opening and the starting opening, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is in a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the winning opening is determined by the winning opening where employees in the hall can easily operate the opening/closing member. Otherwise, the prize opening/closing member may be in a position where it cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the prize opening in which the employee of the hall has difficulty in operating the opening/closing member may determine the prize winning abnormality. For example, an opening/closing member that is vertically positioned in a closed state is inclined to an oblique position, so that an employee of the hall can easily operate the winning opening (so-called electric tulip) in which the opening/closing member picks up a game ball. On the other hand, in the closed state, the prize hole is closed by the plate member, and when the plate member is retracted inward, the hole of the prize hole (so-called belochu) has a structure that opens the entrance to the prize hole. Is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only to the winning holes used to compensate the player for a ball, so that the employee of the hall can easily understand the security level of the gaming machine.

Further, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method of notifying the prize winning abnormality may be the same as the method of notifying the prize ball number abnormality described above (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a game board or a frame). It is advisable that the notification of the prize abnormality is looser than the notification of other abnormalities, such as lighting or blinking of the decoration lamp, output of sound, sound effect, and warning sound. Specifically, the abnormality notification time is short, the characters that notify the abnormality are small, the lamp does not light up when the abnormality is notified, and the abnormality notification sound is smaller than the volume of the notification sound of other abnormalities (suppressed). ) Good.

In addition, in the notification of the prize abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the prize abnormality is detected, and even if the prize abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the predetermined time is set without extending the predetermined time. The notification may be terminated or the notification mode may be changed in a predetermined time. In this way, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is maintaining the gaming machine, not the illegal act by the player. For this reason, if the winning abnormality is notified only for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued thereafter, it is possible to improve work efficiency without hindering the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall. Further, it can be seen that by changing the notification mode after a predetermined time, the maintenance work of the gaming machine is not disturbed and the work is correctly continued. Specifically, the notification by the display device or the lamp is continued, but the notification by sound may be stopped (or the volume may be decreased).

In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correcting means divides the plurality of winning openings into a plurality of types (starting opening, large winning opening). However, for the first type of winning port, the number of out balls is corrected based on the winning ball detected when the predetermined condition is not established (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning port, the predetermined type The number of out-balls is not corrected based on the winning ball detected when the condition is not established (during special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent the deviation of the out-ball number when compensating the player due to the maintenance of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the out-ball number. Further, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as an adjustment (maintenance). This allows an accurate base value to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, the abnormal prize detection and the exceptional handling of the abnormal prize detection (when not detected) have been described. However, the gaming ball determined to be abnormal prize is not the prize ball acquired in the game, but the pachinko machine's Since there is a high possibility that it will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning ball for which a winning abnormality has been determined is not reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used for calculating the base value.

Further, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the injustice detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, a prize abnormality display command is created with the prize abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the winning abnormality may be performed when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. In addition, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the prize abnormality are continuously detected, the prize abnormality may be notified, or if a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, the prize abnormality is detected. You may notify.

Further, the notification of the prize winning abnormality may be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be ended when the prize opening is subsequently opened (the condition device is activated).

In addition, it is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of arithmetic circuits]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division processing for calculating the base value, so that the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processing than the CPU 13111 executing the division by the program. The base calculation process described so far does not make the best use of this characteristic.

That is, in the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) related to the calculation of the base value, in the switch input processing (step S74), the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the discharge ball sensor 1020 are read to determine the number of out balls. Is calculated, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S98), the number of award balls and the number of out balls of the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

After that, in the base calculation/display process (step S89), the base value is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Since the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined time, the predetermined process must be completed for each timer interrupt, so in a slow division process by a program, a time-consuming process is included in the timer interrupt process. That is, it was difficult to include the base calculation process of multiple times in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated plural times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division processing from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the operation result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and the divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and the divisor are different from the output timing of the quotient, the degree of freedom of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing that makes use of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation processing (steps S97 and S98), and therefore the description of the same processing is omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is read by reading a detection signal from a sensor that detects a winning ball, a detection signal from a switch that detects fraudulent activity, a detection signal from a discharge ball sensor 3060, or a launch ball sensor 1020. Is counted.

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 1 (step S97). In the base calculation process 1, the total number of out balls is updated by using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer updating process (step S76) and a random number updating process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 2 (step S98). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79.

Subsequently, the main control MPU1311 is a frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric auditors product The control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). The watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be clear by setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a prize, it is an out ball not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the total out ball number. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). After a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9709).

Then, similarly to step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710) to notify the player or the hall employee of the base (base value or abnormality of the base value). The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244) or the speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Or sound output command. Further, when notifying by the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs or LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED element. It is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, the drive signal including the character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. When the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is a prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). When the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of prize balls is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Further, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814) to notify the player and the hall employee of the base.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process at every predetermined time (for example, one minute of a longer period than the timer interrupt process). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the calculation amount (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) required for calculating the base value can be reduced as compared with the case of calculating the base value for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the base value is calculated for each predetermined out ball number and each predetermined prize ball number.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a prize, it is an out ball not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the out ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball-count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the out-ball-count storage area (specifically, the out-ball-count storage area is 8-bit). If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out ball count is updated so that the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S9705), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9706).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). After a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9709).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9710) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is in the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control processing (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805). If the number of prize balls is not abnormal, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods of reporting the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

Abnormality in the number of prize balls means, for example, that there are many prize balls at a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, in consideration of the number of prize balls at a general winning opening or a starting opening, there are 10 or more winnings per minute). Sphere) is obtained. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide an allowable range of a plurality of stages and judge the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball count is updated so that the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S9809), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9810).

It should be noted that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, and the number of prize balls described later becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814) to notify the player and the hall employee of the base.

Then, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 has timed out (step S9815). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the notification end is determined so that the prize ball abnormality is notified by the predetermined number of shot balls. May be. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23, FIG. 75) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S93 and S94) and the base display process (step S95), and therefore the same process will be described. Is omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer updating process (step S76) and a random number updating process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and a parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 85.

Subsequently, the main control MPU1311 is a frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric auditors product The control process (step S88) is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base display process of reading out the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generating a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). The watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be clear by setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing the steps after S9709 from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a prize, it is an out ball not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the total out ball number. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). When the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 3 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing the steps after step S9813 from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is in the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). When the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of prize balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Note that, in step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, but in step S9812 of FIG. 82, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is input to the division input register A131216. , And the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) from the division result register A131218 and sets it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902) to notify the player and the hall employee of the base.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process for each predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 85. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 84 is the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 78 with steps S9709 and subsequent steps removed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a prize, it is an out ball not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the out ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9703). When the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball-count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the out-ball-count storage area (specifically, the out-ball-count storage area is 8-bit). If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out ball count is updated so that the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S9705), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9706).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is in the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control processing (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805). If the number of prize balls is not abnormal, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods of reporting the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

Abnormality in the number of prize balls means, for example, that a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls at a general winning opening or a starting opening) are obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. Such as when. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide an allowable range of a plurality of stages and judge the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball count is updated so that the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S9809), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9810).

It should be noted that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, and the number of prize balls described later becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

It should be noted that, in step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, but in step S9812 of FIG. 85, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is input to the division input register A131216. , And the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) from the division result register A131218 and sets it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902) to notify the player and the hall employee of the base.

Then, it is determined whether or not the award ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 of the base calculation process 4 has timed up (step S8903). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the notification end is determined so that the prize ball abnormality is notified by the predetermined number of shot balls. Good. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and the next timer interrupt processing starts), the arithmetic circuit The input value (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is written at the timing when the division result can be read from 13121. Specifically, the write timing of the input value (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121, the first half of the timer interrupt process, before the random number update process (step S78), the special symbol or the normal symbol It is better before the control processing (steps S86 and S88).

Further, the presence or absence of execution of the process of calculating the base value may be determined by the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening, whether to use the number of prize balls or the number of out balls for the calculation of the base value may be switched. For example, the prize ball of the winning opening that gives the maximum prize ball to one prize ball does not have to be used for the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) given when a game medium defined for each winning opening provided in the game area is won is 3 In the case of three types of individual and five, the maximum five award balls and the corresponding out balls may not be used for the calculation of the base value. This is because when a prize with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value becomes large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value are rounded by the processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). Even if it is displayed, the displayed value may change frequently. This is because, in such a case, it becomes difficult to judge by the hole whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether it is in accordance with the set payout rate).

Further, it is not necessary to use the minimum one prize ball number and the corresponding out ball number for the calculation of the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the one prize ball is not used in the calculation of the base value, the lower digit of the base value calculated by the processing means is rounded. This is because the base value to be displayed may not change when it is displayed (rounded up, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), and therefore processing that does not contribute to the change in display may be omitted.

Moreover, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the case where the number is the minimum is described, the intermediate number of prize balls between the maximum and the minimum need not be used for the calculation of the base value. In this case, the maximum and minimum award numbers are used to calculate the base value, so the maximum and minimum awards are averaged to show the award number and out-number of balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine. A base value can be indicated.

Although the pattern of the number of prize balls is three, the number of prize balls is not limited to three, and may be another type such as five or seven.

Furthermore, if the winnings of the number of prize balls of a specific type (one of the above-mentioned minimum value, three of the intermediate value, five of the maximum value, etc.) are not used in the calculation of the base value, the prize is won. All winnings in the gaming state when detected need not be used for calculating the base value. For example, when the winning of the winning opening that gives five prize balls is not used for the calculation of the base value, in the gaming state in which the winning of the winning opening is detected, the winning of the winning is completed until the end of the gaming state. Do not use mouth or other winnings to calculate the base value. Further, even after the start of the gaming state, the winning of the winning hole and the other winning holes are not retroactively used for calculating the base value.

In addition, when the gaming state when the winning is detected occurs again, the winning does not have to be used for the calculation of the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected changes to another gaming state. The winnings up to need not be used to calculate the base value. This is whether the pachinko machine is normal by not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the gaming state where the calculated base value changes greatly for the calculation of the base value (for example, whether it is according to the set payout rate). This is to eliminate the possibility of delaying the determination of.

In addition, when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the maximum (or minimum, intermediate) prize balls with respect to one winning ball may not be used for the calculation of the base value.

Next, a specific process in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in the calculation of the base value depending on the number of game media (prize balls) described above will be described.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether to use the winning for calculating the base value. .. For prizes that are determined not to be used for calculating the base value, the total prize balls and total out balls for calculating the base value are not updated, or the base value calculation process is not executed. To do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0, and the base ball is excluded from the number of out balls to calculate the base. In the process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. If all the detected winnings are not used in the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) of FIG. 75 may not be executed.

Further, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In, the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. If all the detected winnings are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the base calculation process 4 (step S94) and the base display process (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. May be.

As a method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls, a method similar to the method of correcting the out ball due to the abnormal winning described in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning balls whether or not the detected winning is used for calculating the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the base calculation process 2 (step S98), and the base calculation process 3 ( In step S93) and the base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether the prize is being won.

In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls for a given winning from the calculation of the base value, the process is executed without skipping, so it is easy to check whether the process is being executed accurately especially in the development stage. Can be confirmed. Further, by not performing the process of calculating the base value and updating the base value, the process of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and the other processes (lottery process, process of determining variation pattern, etc.) are accurately executed. it can.

In other words, even if there are multiple awards with different degrees of advantage, even if the maximum award is given to the player, it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the base value is displayed without being changed by the award of the prize. It Further, the calculated base value is displayed without change until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize is awarded is completed.

[9-12. Different configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17, as the discharge ball sensor 3060, the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is provided on the game board 5, and the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is the main frame. 4 is provided. Note that either one of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both of them may be provided.

As described above, the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is the out-passage ball sensor 1021 that detects a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower portion of the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of gaming balls detected by the out-passage ball sensor 1021, the number of gaming balls detected by the starting port sensors 2104, 2551, and the number of gaming balls detected by the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. The sum of the number and the number of out balls.

As described above, the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and a connector that connects the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B are provided, the count result of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the count result of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B are compared to obtain two count results. The error may be notified when a difference of a predetermined value or more occurs. Further, when the difference between the two counting results within the predetermined time exceeds a predetermined value, an error may be notified.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an indispensable component, and the display contents (provisional section display and fixed section display) of the base display 1317 can be switched at predetermined time intervals as described later ( The base value may be displayed or the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318 (see FIG. 99).

The configuration other than the above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

88 and 89 are views showing the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which the out balls are aligned in one line in the ball passage 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board, and one frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B counts the out balls. .. The game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the outlet 1111, the general winning opening 2001, and the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball passage 960 that allows the discharged game balls to flow down to the right side in front view and is aligned in one line. The frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls arranged in one line.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which the out balls aligned in the ball passage 960 provided on the back surface of the game board are caused to flow down by two rows and counted by the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. The game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the starting openings 2002 and 2004, and the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball passage 960 that allows the discharged game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and is aligned in two lines. Each of the two frame side discharge ball sensors 3060B provided counts the game balls arranged in each line.

The frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, but it may be configured as a unit together with the ball flow path 960 and detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a connection example of the discharge ball sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected to the connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the output signal of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected to the connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected is the main control board 1310. It is good to be provided under.

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected are provided separately. The output line of 3060A and the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

The output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the relay board. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4 You may.

Further, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensors 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of a sensor that detects a prize in each of the various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006 (the position of a star in the figure). It is provided in. The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5 and partially overlaps.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the outlet 1111. This is to prevent an incorrect calculation of the base value. That is, when the player brings the magnet close to the out port 1111 and operates the discharge ball sensor 3060, the number of out balls is counted more than it actually is, and the base value decreases. For this reason, a game shop may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 so as to restore the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine that has undergone maintenance work based on a base value different from the actual base value, the number of balls in the normal state will increase, allowing the player to play in a more advantageous state than usual and obtain many balls. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the outlet 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent the illegal payout of the ball. In addition to the vicinity of the outlet 1111, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 may be provided at a position where the discharge ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided in the vicinity of the outlet 1111 preferably has a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030, as illustrated. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060 detect an out ball, the magnetism is detected within a sufficient range capable of covering the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided in the vicinity of the outlet 1111 may include another winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 provided above the outlet 1111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the structure of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes a discharge ball sensor 3060 and a winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening). The output signals of the sensor 2554, the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557, etc.) and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 performs level conversion and shaping (for example, chattering removal) of signals input from various sensors and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to any one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, the level-converted and shaped signals of the interface circuit 1331 are output from the terminals Y1 to Y8, and are buffered. The signal is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. As a result, the detection result of each sensor is captured by the main control MPU 1311.

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the inputs of the terminals A1 to A8, and the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 4V) or a predetermined threshold value (for example, power supply voltage- 0.1V), the disconnection of the connection line to the switch or the short circuit of the switch is detected, and when the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold value, the abnormal signal E And outputs a signal of a level at which each sensor is OFF, from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals from the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 12V-20%) and the power supply abnormality is detected, the abnormality signal E is output. At the same time, irrespective of the input signals of the terminals A1 to A8, the signals of the level in which each sensor is OFF are output from the terminals Y1 to Y8. That is, even if an ON-level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit for that input becomes the OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalid). As a result, the main control MPU 1311 does not need to determine whether or not to process the input signal depending on whether or not the power supply of the switch has dropped, and the processing load can be reduced and the output signals of Y1 to Y8 can be reduced. Regardless of the states of the input signals A1 to A8, a signal of a level at which each sensor is turned off can be output.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, the main control MPU 1311 does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives a signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value (number of discharged balls, number of prize balls) and a signal from a sensor not used for calculating the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.). .. The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in the sensor that is not related to the base calculation, the base calculation is not executed and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for the calculation of the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for the calculation of the base value, and when either signal becomes abnormal, An abnormal signal is output to stop the calculation of the base.

93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing mounting examples of the main control board 1310. 93A shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93B shows that the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are one. An example of connection to the driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement on the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. FIG. 95(A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95(B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95(C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Then, the display data is output from the different driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333. Then, the display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and the clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line for outputting the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 from the main control MPU 1311 and the signal line for the reset signal or the clock signal do not intersect.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected, and is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310. To the connector 13101, not only the output line from the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A, but also the other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104, etc., and the output line from the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are connected. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided below the main control board 1310. The signal from the discharge ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a printed circuit board that constitutes the main control board 1310 from the back surface side. Solid lines are patterns on the back surface side, broken lines are patterns on the component surface side, and dotted lines are components mounted on the component surface of the printed circuit board. Indicates. The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333) and passed through the driver 2 (1334) to the cathode side segment of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to the terminal.

In addition, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 is input to the latch 1 (1333) and passes through the driver 1 (1334) to each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to the common terminal on the anode side of.

A chip select signal for controlling the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is a timing when the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, the data for controlling the blinking of each segment is fetched from the data lines (D1 to D8). The latch circuit 1 (1333) fetches data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

The reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and the clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333. The latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect the signal lines for the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

This is because in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, so that a pulse signal is transmitted through the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 is connected. The level of the data line between the base display 1317 and the base display 1317 changes frequently. In particular, a large current required to drive the LED element flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (particularly, between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) becomes a cause of noise. When the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal intersect, noise is placed on the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, and the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions. there's a possibility that. The intersection of the signal lines may occur at the intersection of the wiring patterns on the front surface and the back surface of the printed circuit board or at the intersection of the wiring patterns of the inner layer and the surface layer (front surface, back surface).

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that should never occur, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, and the game may be stopped or the game state may be erased. .. If the game state is erased at a timing that should never occur, the normal power-off process is not executed and is reset. Therefore, the data stored in the RAM 1312 is cleared, the jackpot is ended, and the fluctuation display is displayed. The game ends midway, or the special symbol variable display game or the normal symbol variable display game is deleted.

The main control board box 1320 is partially low in height and high in other portions depending on the height of the components attached to the main control board 1310 and the interference with other members when assembled. Is becoming For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the height of the main control MPU 1311 is high, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high at the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of the main control board box 1320, the height of the main control board box 1320 is increased, and components such as a relatively tall electrolytic capacitor are mounted. On the other hand, in the area on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low, and a component such as a short IC is mounted (a tall component cannot be arranged). The area where the main control board box 1320 is high and in which high-height components can be mounted is indicated by hatching. Further, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height that is equal to or lower than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted and removed (preferably the same height as the board surface). It is recommended that the cable (connector) to be connected to the board of (2) is not hindered from being inserted or removed.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 according to the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the goto action of mounting an unauthorized component (circuit) on the main control board. it can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged in the upper right part of the main control board 1310. However, even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for the sake of maintenance, it is difficult for the player to see the display contents at the base. A display 1317 may be provided. For example, when the player can visually check the display contents of the base display 1317 when the main body frame 4 is opened at a predetermined angle for maintenance during operation (check whether or not there is a game ball in the supply tank). Often does not understand how to read the display on the base display 1317 correctly, the player may be required to explain the display contents on the base display 1317, and in order to prevent such complications. In addition, the base display 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display contents. Further, by arranging the base display 1317 in this way, it is possible to suppress inquiries from the player. That is, the base display 1317 displays the base value of 52,000 working balls at the maximum, but it is different from the base value in the short-time game played by the player, so that a claim about the ball-out rate may occur. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this way, complaints from the player can be suppressed. The above is the same with the character ratio display 1317 described above, and the character ratio display 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display content.

As shown in the figure, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317 has a low height, and thus is mounted in a region where the height of the main control board box 1320 is low.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93A, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are composed of light emitting diodes (LEDs) will be described, but they may be composed of lamps (light bulbs) or other light emitting elements. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. To do.

As described above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 takes in the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds the data until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs the data. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistor according to the input signal, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12 V) input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 fetches the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK and outputs the bus data to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the signals input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LED that constitutes the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to turn on the 7-segment LED (7seg1) in the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D8 captured by the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). The driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched by the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the first-digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317 is changed. Driven.

Further, in order to turn on the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 fetched by the latch 3 (1333) are transferred to the segment data (when turned on LOW, at the rising timing of CS2). ) Is output. The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched by the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven) at the rising timing of CS3. Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 is of the common anode type, a current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 through the 7-segment LED. Therefore, when the segment is turned on, the outputs of the drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12V), and the outputs of the drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals as they are, but the latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and have a data bus. A signal may be output from any one of the terminals Q1 to Q8 in accordance with the binary data acquired from.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93A and FIG. 96, signal output timings when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. In addition, segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 via different signal lines, both the display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are It is output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (group of LEDs) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are generated by another process in the timer interrupt process and output at another timing in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area to generate and output the display data to the base display 1317. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game control code 13131 in the game control area to generate and output display data to the function display unit 1400. These data are generated by another program (code) and output at different timing.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 is executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be executed subsequently.

The process of outputting a signal to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131, base calculation/display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same processing is performed. In order to prevent the common signal from being transmitted at the timing, it is preferable to use control data common to the two codes so that the common signal transmission timings do not overlap. For example, a common counter commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 is provided. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400 and the common counter is used. Is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in one subroutine. Each of the game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the base calculation/display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 are provided. It is preferable to call the subroutine at a timing determined by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 or the base display 1317. In this case, the output of the data sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of the data sent to the base display 1317 are not performed in the same timer interrupt process. The game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, but the subroutine is called by different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, a display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310. Even if noise is mixed in, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93(B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. 3 is a circuit diagram of an example of FIG. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. To do.

As described above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334. The configuration of the circuit included in the main control I/O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, and therefore the difference from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for turning on the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 96, but the common of the function display unit 1400 is the common signal with the base display 1317. It is common.

Since the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on, the bus data D1 to D8 fetched by the latch 3 (1333) is set as the segment data (LOW is turned on) by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched by the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share the driver circuit, so that the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate is reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily downsized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (a printed circuit board having three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board having a pattern only on the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, even if components can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 composed of a two-layer board, an area for routing the wiring pattern cannot be secured, and the board must be larger than a multilayer board having three or more layers. Therefore, downsizing by reducing the number of parts is important.

FIG. 98 is a timing chart in the configuration example of the main control I/O port 1314 shown in FIG. In FIG. 98, a dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates a break in timer interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing start timing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. The latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 fetches D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and the driver 1 (1334) selects the common data (when driven) corresponding to the digit designated by D1 to D4. Outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment turned on in the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 fetches D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) receives the segment data (low is lit) designated by D1 to D8. Then, the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment turned on by the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 fetches D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW is lit) designated by D1 to D8. Then, the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is turned on.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1, and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, and repeats the above-described processing to output the digit selection data and the display data. In this way, the base display unit 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share a common driver circuit, time-divisionally output segment data, and use common common data to function as the base display unit 1317. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be turned on.

As shown in FIGS. 93B and 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, the circuit size of the main control board 1310 can be reduced and high-density mounting (for example, It is possible to easily mount components on the main control substrate 1310, which does not allow the use of a multilayer substrate or the close placement of components.

Further, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 with common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display can be controlled during the period when the common data is being output. The segment data is output at a timing different from that of 1317. Therefore, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled by a common common data line while the display of both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled within one timer interrupt process. ..

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1) and erased at the rising timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, when the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display unit 1317. It will be longer. This lengthens the lighting time in one cycle of the LED of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 and increases the brightness, thereby reducing the visibility due to being directly illuminated by the illumination of the hall. This is to prevent it. Further, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side that is darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even if the LED emits light with low brightness, the visibility of the base display 1317 is small. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission brightness of the first LED is higher than the emission brightness of the second LED.

Contrary to the above, the display data of the base display 1317 is output first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display time of the base display 1317 is displayed by the function display unit 1400. May be longer than time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in the state (section) for calculating the base value.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the provisional section display and the confirmed section display are switched and displayed at intervals of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, "bA." is displayed in the upper two digits to indicate that the base value A is being displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the lower two digits as a two-digit percentage. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that whether the base value A is 0% or 100% can be understood.

In addition, in the provisional section display, when the low probability/non-time saving out ball number is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the upper two digits (or all four digits) are blinked and displayed (for example, a cycle of 0.6 seconds). Then, the lighting for 0.3 seconds and the turning off for 0.3 seconds are repeated), indicating that an accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability/non-time saving out balls is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the upper two digits are lit and displayed to indicate that the accurate base value can be measured.

In the confirmed section display, the base value of the immediately preceding section is displayed. Specifically, it indicates that “bb.” is lit up in the upper two digits to display the base value B, and the lower two digits indicate the base value of the immediately preceding section (below the previous period. The base value B), which is the final two-digit value, is lit and displayed with a two-digit percentage. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value B is 99, “99” is displayed, when it is 100 or more, “99.” is displayed, and when it is 0, “00” is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that whether the base value B is 0% or 100% can be understood.

In the first section, the previous section is a test section, so the base value is not measured. Therefore, in the confirmed section display, "bb." is blinkingly displayed in the upper two digits and "---" is blinkingly displayed in the lower two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base value is not calculated as a predetermined number (for example, 256) of which the number of out balls is less than 500 after the first power-on, as a test section. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on for the first time and a predetermined number of shots are launched, the balls may fluctuate within the probability distribution range, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. .. For this reason, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317 and the base value is indefinite. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." is displayed in the first two digits, "--" is displayed in the last one digit, and "bb." is displayed in the first two digits in the final section display. , "---" is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, all the digits of the base display 1317 are blinked to indicate that the accurate base value cannot be measured. The base value may be calculated in the test section, and the calculated base value may not be displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value may be indefinite.

Here, when the power is turned on for the first time, the power is turned on for the first time after completion of the pachinko machine 1 or immediately after the initialization of the work area for base calculation (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108) is executed. It is in a state. In addition, the power-on state generally used in this specification is a power-on state other than the first power-on period.

Further, all the LEDs of all the digits of the base display 1317 may be blinked at a predetermined time after the power is turned on or at a predetermined time after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). ..

In the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, when an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is erased, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls reaches 52000 in all game states (big hit, normal game, short-time medium, non-time-short medium, high probability medium, low probability medium, etc.), the next zone Switch to and measure a new base value. Note that the number of out balls in one section is not 52,000, but may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the operating time of the pachinko machine 1 per day is 10 hours, 60000, which is the operating time per day (the number of out balls), may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. It is also possible to adopt 50,000 or 100,000, which are sharp numbers.

The number of out balls in one section may be changed as appropriate. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, or the like) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls in one section may be set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or another board connected to the main control board 1310. Further, when the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 is initialized and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section, or even if restarted from the beginning of the current section. Good. Since pachinko machines are often operated immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and when the business period elapses, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting means capable of setting the operation that determines the length of the section that is the unit of calculation of the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, based on the operation set by the setting means. The length of one section is set.

Note that, as the confirmed section display, an example in which the section immediately before the provisional section currently being measured is displayed will be described. However, the base values of a plurality of confirmed sections (for example, sections 1 to 3 sections before) are switched and displayed. You may. At this time, even if the display is switched by changing the provisional section → the confirmed section 1 → the confirmed section 2 → the confirmed section 3 every predetermined time, the provisional section → the confirmed section 1 → the confirmed section 2 → by the operation of the display changeover switch which is separately provided. The confirmed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

In this case, the first two digits of the base display 1317 in the fixed section display are not “bb.” but “b1”, “b2”, and “b3” so that the displayed section can be understood in each fixed section. Different display is recommended.

In this way, the base display 1317 switches and displays the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding section or sections at predetermined time intervals. Further, a display capable of distinguishing the display contents is displayed on a part of the base display 1317, and the measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a multi-digit (for example, four-digit) 7-segment LED, and displays a number or a character by lighting or blinking the segment of each digit. Numbers 0 to 9 can be displayed, and letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and-signs can also be displayed. Furthermore, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. The case where the numeral 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and the case where the numeral 9 is displayed are illustrated.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of initialization processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is different from the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, and the check code calculation process (step S50) and the check code storage process (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the calculation of the check code of the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. The same steps as those in the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, and sets the RAM 1312 to be writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. The determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data (other than the base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area is erased (step S30). , And proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the previous power-off and the checksum calculated in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( The areas other than the base calculation area 13128 are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

Then, it is determined whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18) and the power failure flag abnormality (step S20) in which the power failure flag is not set are detected. , The RAM checksums do not match, the RAM abnormality (step S22), and the base calculation work abnormality (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (the game work area and the game stack area are However, the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of the base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128. The entire RAM area including may be cleared. If all RAM areas are cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, if the memory configuration is such that the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed, the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation Only initialize it. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

When providing one or a plurality of backup areas in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and when it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N in this order, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased under different conditions (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128) for each data type. To do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. When the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased, the base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the staff at the game arcade, and the abnormal base value is hidden. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the gaming machine that has been modified to have a high or low base value.

The main control MPU 1311 performs an initial setting process (step S28) for setting various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed, the peripheral control board. A power-on command setting process for transmitting to 1510 (step S32) is executed, and execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure notification signal (step S36) and determines whether the power failure notification signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure notice signal is not ON (result of step S38 is “No”), random number update processing is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-off time process (power-off time setting means). In the power-off processing, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output port is cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46), and the checksum calculation result is checked in the RAM 1312. It is stored in the thumb area (step S48).

Then, the data of the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also copied. The backup may be appropriately executed (for example, each time data is updated) by the base calculation process instead of the main board-side power-off process. In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for the base calculation and the calculated base value even when the power is cut off. Can be held and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in a modified example described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value indicating that backup is normally performed is stored in the backup flag area (step S56), and "01H" indicating write prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to the RAM 1312 (step S56). S58), waits until the power is restored (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26(A) is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is configured by a partial area of the RAM 1312, and as described above, is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area).

The base calculation area 13128 includes a storage area for the base value A, the base value B, the section counter, the total out ball count, the low-probability/non-time saving short out ball count, and the low probability/non-time saving short prize ball count.

The storage area of the base value A is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area of the base value B is composed of 1 byte, and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter is made up of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section where the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated each time the section is switched, and is used to control display contents that differ depending on the section. The section counter may be controlled so that it does not exceed 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Specifically, the section counter=0 in the test section, the section counter=1 in the first section, and the section counter=2 after the second section. Further, the section counter may be controlled so as to have a value of 0 to 255 so as not to be larger than 255, and the section counter=2 or more after the second section.

The storage area for the total number of out balls is composed of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out balls (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine) regardless of the gaming state. The total out ball count is used to determine the switching of intervals, which is the base unit of measure. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with one day of operation as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the total number of out balls. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting all the number of out balls that do not depend on the gaming state for each section, and the total number of out balls in the above-described embodiment (the number of out balls in the prize) Value of the pachinko machine 1 since the start of operation).

The storage area for low probability non-time saving out balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the out balls for calculating the base value (out balls in a game state other than during the prize) Store. The storage area for the low-probability/non-time saving award balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and stores the number of awards balls (the number of awards balls in a game state other than during special prize) for calculating the base value. Store. It should be noted that the storage area for the low-probability/non-time saving out ball count and the storage area for the low-probability/non-time saving award ball count need only be 2 bytes or more. It is better to do.

The storage capacity (the number of bytes) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

When the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 are provided, a storage area having the same configuration is provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is different from the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23 in that a base calculation process (step S801) is provided in place of the accessory ratio calculation area update process of step S81, and the role of step S89 is provided. The material ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. The same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIG. 23 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the main control program to first set RBS (register bank selection flag) in the program status word to 1 and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74), a timer update process (step S76), a random number update process 1 (step S78), and a prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a game value to the region corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation region 13128 (of the main control internal RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103), and the base value is calculated (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but in order to surely execute each timer interruption, it is preferable to execute the base calculation process in an earlier order. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU1311 is a frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process ( Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt process, so that the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of the base calculation process.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called by the timer interrupt process and is executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first big winning opening sensor 2114, second upper big winning opening sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower prize hole sensor 2557) or the discharge ball sensor (board side discharge ball sensor 3060A, frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B), the base signal is accurately calculated by the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be made. Also, if it is determined that a fraudulent activity is being performed (for example, the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, the radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value is accurate. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be calculated. When it is determined that there is this error, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error associated with a game stop (for example, magnetism, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error not accompanied by a game stop (for example, prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) Failures that are not directly related to the calculation of the base or the base (such as out-of-supply, full tank error) may be determined not to be an error (NO). That is, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if some of the plural kinds of abnormal states have an abnormality, and not to execute the base calculation process if there is another abnormality.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, etc., and the switch input processing of step S74 reads the detection signals of these sensors, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, the out ball number is output. The number of balls=1 is acquired. When the out-balls are detected by the plurality of discharged-ball sensors 3060, the total value of the numbers detected by the sensors is acquired as the out-ball number. That is, a plurality of out-balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process of step S80 is acquired. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls may correspond to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the receipt confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Further, the main control board 1310 may send a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the number of award balls (paid award ball number) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of payout may be used. This variation is as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not an out ball is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If the out ball is not detected, the process relating to the out ball is not executed and the process proceeds to step S8022. On the other hand, if the out ball is detected, the detected out ball number is added to the total out ball number stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is 0, which is the initial value. Is becoming Therefore, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined that the section is a test section. Since it is not necessary to calculate the base value in the test section, the process advances to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test section, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8019). The determination as to whether or not the prize is being awarded can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. The state of the game is in the special prize means that the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big hit, and the player can get a lot of prize balls, including the opening time and the ending time of the big hit game. May be. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed in one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the right-handing instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include a time saving period, a positive change (during ST), and a power support. Furthermore, during a time saving period, during a probable change (during ST), and in a game state other than during electric power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting opening 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball winning the starting opening is detected as an out ball). Up to the required few seconds) may be included in the prize. It should be noted that the so-called "hidden game state", which is a high-probability game state but does not become short-time (electric power support), is not included in the special prize, and is the same as the normal state (low-probability/non-time-saving state). The base value may be calculated using the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal game state and the latent game state, and the base value may be displayed so that it can be discriminated whether or not the base value is displayed.

Even if the latent game state is a high probability, it is a game state that does not let the player recognize that it is a high probability state, but if the latent game state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, if the frame is opened during business In some cases, the player may look at the base display 1317 and recognize that the player is in a latent game state (that is, a high probability). That is, in the state where the frame is open, when the employee of the hall grooms the ball in the winning opening or throws the ball in the outlet, the player can know the playing status depending on whether the base display changes. By calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the latent game state, such a problem can be avoided.

On the other hand, when operating a hole, it may be necessary to manage the base value in a low-probability/non-time saving state, and if the base value is calculated including the latent game state, it may not be possible to manage it according to the operating mode of the hole. .. Such a problem can be avoided by excluding the latent game state and calculating the base value. The same problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state. That is, since the normal game state and the latent game state are different from each other in the first place, it may be desirable to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each game state depending on the business mode of the hall. ..

When the base value is calculated by dividing the normal game state and the latent game state, even if the base value is calculated using a dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using a common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using the common calculation process, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special prize regarding the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize, normal winning (so-called big hit) to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during special prize (low probability or non-time saving) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electric actuated auctions (big prize holes 2005 and 2006) are used for calculating the base value based on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls regardless of the gaming state (whether the prize is being won or not). The other accessory (starting opening 2004) is not used, and whether the winning ball number and the winning ball number are used for calculating the base value or not is switched according to the gaming state (whether the prize is being won or not). It will be.

Further, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during shortened working hours, and since it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize because it is opened for a short time, it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated during a period other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be released only during a time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and winning balls to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits other than during the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of small hits other than during the prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value, and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the gaming state is a prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low probability/non-time saving out ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 is to be used for the base calculation, so the number of low probability/non-time saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 is detected. The calculated number of out balls is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than the prize is detected each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If no prize ball is detected, the process relating to the prize ball is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S8026. On the other hand, if a prize ball is detected, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether or not a special prize is being held may be the same as in step S8019.

If the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low-probability/non-time saving prize ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 is to be used for the base calculation, so the number of low probability/non-time saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 is detected. The number of prize balls thus obtained is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). If the update flag is 1, an out ball or a prize ball other than the special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), so the low-probability/non-time saving award ball is a low probability/non-time saving out ball. The base value is calculated by dividing by the number and stored in the storage area for the base value A in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, when the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is the test section, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the section counter indicates that it is a test section. If the total number of out balls is equal to or more than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is the timing to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, in order to continue the test section, the base calculation area 13128 is not updated and the process proceeds to step S8034. On the other hand, if the timing is in the test section and the test section ends, the test section shifts to the first section, and the process advances to step S8032. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The section counter changes from 0 representing the test section to 1 representing the first section. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low probability/non-time saving short out balls, and the number of low probability/non time saving award balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). By this processing, the test section is finished and the first section is started.

On the other hand, when the section counter value is not 0 in step S8028 and it is determined that the test section is not in progress, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total out-ball number is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out balls is less than 52000, the process proceeds to step S8034 to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is 52000 or more, the section is ended, and the processing for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area in the base calculation area 13128 and writes it in the base value B storage area (step S8031). After that, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the section counter is controlled so as not to become a value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, larger than 2. Therefore, when the section counter value is 2, even if 1 is added to the section counter. The section counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low probability/non-time saving short balls, and the number of low probability/non time saving award balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch and display the provisional section display and the confirmed section display described in FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is a cycle of blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 of FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability/non-time saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. It is better to set the time sufficiently longer. This is because if the blinking and the display switching are at the same cycle, it becomes difficult to understand the blinking display (that is, whether the low-probability/non-time saving out ball count is less than 6000). This is to make it easier to understand whether it is a switch.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). As the calculation method of the check code, the same calculation method as the processing of calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization processing (FIG. 22) is used. In addition, when the check code is set to a fixed value without being calculated, it may be a value of a plurality of bytes in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, in the case of 2 bytes, A55AH (1010010101011010B)). To). Further, instead of setting a fixed value in continuous areas, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored at the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code has a fixed value, it is preferable that the check code is configured with a larger number of bytes than the check data calculated to improve the possibility of determining the RAM abnormality.

As described above, according to the base calculation process of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so that the base value is not delayed at each timing of occurrence of prize balls and occurrence of out balls. It can be displayed (in real time) and can judge whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay. Since the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small compared to the capacity of the game control area 13126, a check code is issued at the end of each base calculation process. Even if it is calculated, the influence on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

Also, for the prize balls, when the base value is calculated and displayed using the expected number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing when the base value is calculated and displayed and the timing when the prize balls are paid out Is different. In other words, the payout device is abnormal and the prize balls are not paid out (the supply device is out of supply due to a supply replenishment, the upper plate being full, a failure of the payout number sensor provided in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.). The base value will be calculated and displayed even if (such as stop).

In the base calculation process described above, the base value is calculated each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process by using the number of out balls detected in the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning hole sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called a plurality of times, and the base value is calculated a plurality of times. This makes it possible to distinguish which of the preceding and following sections the base value should be calculated in, even if the timing of the above-mentioned section switching (52,000 out balls) arrives in one base calculation process. , Can display accurate base value in real time.

Further, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is generated. May be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display data generation process.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499, so the processing in steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is 0 to 1249, and the display switching counter is in the range 1250 to 2499. Executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." in the upper two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not the test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." in the upper two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether it is currently the test section or the first section (step S8047). Since the base value has not been measured in the past fixed section in the test section or the first section, data for displaying "---" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest definite section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the low probability/non-time saving out ball number is smaller than 6000 (step S8050). ). If the low probability/non-time saving out ball count is less than 6000, the base value may not be stable because the operating number (out ball count) after starting the base value measurement is small in the section. The display on the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low probability/non-time saving out balls is 6000 or more, control is performed so that the display of the base display 1317 is turned on without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized and the process proceeds to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition is completed, and the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Lastly, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and the lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are designated (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt process (base calculation process) executed at predetermined time intervals, the display contents on the base display 1317 are switched by using the display switching counter which is updated regularly, so that The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the fixed section can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, since blinking is displayed in the range where the base value is not stable in each section, it is possible to easily confirm whether the base value is in the stable range or in the unstable range by the display of the base display 1317.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the base calculation process. The modification shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105, except that a check process for the base calculation work (steps S8012 and S8013) is added. In FIG. 108, the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) of the base calculation process will be described, but the processes of steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those of FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

When providing one or a plurality of backup areas in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and when it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N in this order, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). It may be determined whether 13128 is normal (step S8012), and after performing necessary processing based on the determination result, whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

Subsequent processing (from step S8014) is the same as that in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In the base calculation processing shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal for each timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds). It is possible to suppress the display of various base values.

Next, a method of determining an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described. The value used for the calculation of the base value and the calculated base value are the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the internal RAM 1312 (the “role ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is the “base calculation area 13128”). It is stored as (reread) and determines whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations in which processing (timing) the normal/abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization process).
106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and judged when the power is turned on)
First, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 106.

When the initialization process is as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the base calculation area 13128 is obtained in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106). A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the above data.

In step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined using the check code whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value is started from the test period.

When providing one or a plurality of backup areas in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and when it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

In this case, the check code is determined less frequently, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining the check code calculated when the power is turned off when the power is turned on (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization processing is as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation processing is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off processing of the initialization processing (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined using the check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of check code calculation and determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case in which the check code is calculated and determined by timer interrupt processing)
Next, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 108.

When the base calculation process is as shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106).

In step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined using the check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization processing is as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the steps of determining whether the base calculation work area is normal in steps S24 and S26 may be omitted.

In this case, the abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

When a fixed value is used for the check code instead of the checksum, the check code setting and determination timing may be the same as the checksum calculation and determination timing. Alternatively, both the checksum and the fixed value may be used as the check code for the determination.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the calculation of the base value when the game state is switched.

One game ball was won while the starting opening 2004 (electric tulip) was open, and then the variable display game for a predetermined number of times ended, the time saving state ended and the normal state was returned. After that, in the normal state, it is further assumed that a game ball wins the opening opening 2004 that is open.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device according to the winning of the start opening 2004. That is, the variable display game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in relation to any winning in the starting opening 2004 is performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting opening 2004 is not added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number, The second winning ball is added to the low probability non-time saving out ball number.

In the above description, the end of the time saving state is described, but the same applies to the end of the probability change by ST.

In addition to the end of the time saving state described above, the same phenomenon occurs when a big hit occurs in the special symbol variable display game. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins during opening of the starting port 2004 (electric tulip), a big hit state starts after that, and a game ball wins at the opening port 2004 that is still open.

Also in this case, the variable display game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in association with the winning in any of the starting openings 2004 is executed. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball at the starting opening 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball is low probability.・It is not added to the number of non-time saving out balls.

Furthermore, the same phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while opening the starting opening 2004 (electric tulip), a specific error occurs after that, and a game ball wins the starting opening 2004 that is still open. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error in which the base value cannot be accurately calculated due to the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the out Do not use the sphere for the base calculation.

Also in this case, the variable display game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in association with the winning in any of the starting openings 2004 is executed. On the other hand, since the out ball during the occurrence of a specific error is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball at the starting opening 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball. Is not added to the low probability non-time saving out ball count.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls won during the operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (at the end of time saving, at the time of a big hit of the special symbol variation display game, at the time of occurrence of a specific error, etc.). Regarding, there are cases where it is used for calculating the base value and cases where it is not used for calculating the base value, and the variation of the special figure can be started in any winning.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the look-ahead effect of the special symbol variable display game that is being held, the first prize won in the starting port 2004 in the time saving state is not the target of the look-ahead effect and is in the normal state. The second prize that has won may be the target of the look-ahead effect. On the contrary, the first prize that is won in the time saving state at the starting opening 2004 may be the target of the look-ahead effect, and the second prize that is won in the normal state may not be the target of the look-ahead effect.

Although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the positive change state (ST) or the power support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing) will be described.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration relating to a storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 is configured as a whole as shown in FIG. 18, but FIG. 110 shows the configuration regarding the storage area in detail.

A RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 are provided in the main control MPU 1311 as storage areas for storing data. The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily stores exclusively data when the program is executed by the CPU 13111 (for example, a flag indicating a state of a calculation result, a program execution state, data input to and output from the CPU 13111). The CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily stores, for example, a random number value updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) or an intermediate value in the random number update operation. Also, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the address of the jump destination are temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the processor core 13141 executes the process corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, a value input to a port from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, a value in the middle of creating edge information of a signal input from the switch or a detection result of edge information) is temporarily stored. To store.

Further, when a random number is acquired and stored in the hold storage area at the time of winning the start mouth, the random number value is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random value is stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 1312. Remember. Further, when a random number at the time of winning the starting opening is obtained and pre-reading determination (judgment determination at the time of winning the starting opening) is performed based on the value of the random number, the random number temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU is used. The pre-reading determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the random number value stored in the reserved storage area may be (re)read to any storage area of the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU to perform the pre-reading determination.

The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 is provided separately from the memory space configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313 and specified by an address, and is specified by the name (for example, Area0) of each storage area included in the in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. .. The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C.

The auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C are composed of a plurality of storage areas (Area0 to 6) having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and a group is formed for each storage area of a predetermined number (7 in the figure). Each group is configured to be accessible from the processor core 13141. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can access only the auxiliary storage area 13145A and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and C.

As will be described later, the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 can collectively switch a plurality of storage areas for each group by one CHANGE command. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of the group 0, and the auxiliary storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 is switched to the group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but may be any number as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The storage areas (Area0 to 5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are storage areas provided separately from the RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data during program execution, and even one (1 byte=8 bits) can be used. Therefore, it is possible to use a plurality of sets (for example, 2 bytes=16 bits in which Area0 and Area1 are combined). For this reason, 8-bit data or 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without causing an excessive capacity in the storage area. Further, the storage area (Area 6) is set as a storage area used with a capacity of an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of other storage areas, and cannot be used by being divided into 1-byte storage areas. In this way, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured by the storage areas having a plurality of capacities, and the storage area that can be used in any combination is provided. Therefore, the storage area is properly used according to the application (for example, data length) in the arithmetic processing. be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, the address can be specified by one (or a set of combined storage areas). Therefore, the argument of the instruction can be reduced and the instruction can be executed with a small number of clocks.

The switching unit 13143 switches the group of storage areas that the processor core 13141 can access according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

The switching register 13144 is a storage area for storing data for determining the accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area accessible by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. The switching register 13144 has, for example, data for identifying the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be selected (for example, 2-bit data for switching four areas), and an abnormality flag indicating that switching has not been normally performed. (If the abnormality flag is set, the switching instruction will be executed again), and the unauthorized access flag that is set when the abnormality that the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 has changed is stored. It is good.

Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag (for example, a carry flag, a parity/overflow flag, a zero flag, a sign flag, etc.) indicating the state of the operation result.

In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 may be provided regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. For example, a program counter indicating the address where the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program of the timer interrupt process and the base calculation process, and shows a specific example of a part that calls the base calculation process from the timer interrupt process and returns from the base calculation process.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is prohibited by the DI instruction before the base calculation process is started. The base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing from the DI instruction to the EI instruction due to an interrupt.

After that, the PUSH instruction saves the data in the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is used in the base calculation process of the callee from the group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller by the CHANGE command. Switch to group 1. In this way, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE command, and a plurality of storage areas can be collectively switched by one command (that is, a small number of steps).

The LD instruction writes the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312 and saves the stack pointer value. After that, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer by the LD instruction to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation processing is completed, the processing is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the LD pointer restores the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312. After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 1 used in the call-destination base calculation processing to the group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt processing, and then the RET instruction switches to the caller's timer interrupt processing. Return. Generally, the instruction for switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the instruction for restoring the data saved in the stack have different roles, but in the present embodiment, after returning from the base calculation processing to the timer interrupt processing, The auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched by returning the data saved in the stack to the switching register 13144. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary storage area 13145 does not have to be switched to the group 0 by the CHANGE command after the base calculation processing is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be surely switched by the CHANGE command.

As described above, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP command. It should be noted that for saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD and the exchange instruction EX) may be used without using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

After that, the interrupt is permitted by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main process on the main control side (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

The DI instruction may be used to prohibit the interrupt at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and the EI instruction may be allowed to be enabled at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, the interrupt may be prohibited when the timer interrupt processing is started by directly operating the interrupt enable flag regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, and the interrupt may be permitted at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state where the interrupt is prohibited, it is not necessary to further disable the interrupt or enable the interrupt in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interruption prohibition by the DI command is to set the interruption-prohibited state to the interruption-prohibited state for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the example described above, the saving of the switching register 13144 is executed by the timer interrupt processing of the calling source, and the switching of the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the stack area are executed by the base calculation processing of the calling destination. One process may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves to the outside of the game control region and when the process returns to the game control region. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the timer interrupt processing of the calling source will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of the program of the timer interrupt process and the base calculation process, and shows a specific example of a part for calling the base calculation process from the timer interrupt process and returning from the base calculation process.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is prohibited by the DI instruction before the base calculation process is started. By the interruption between the DI instruction and the EI instruction, the base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing during the interruption.

After that, the PUSH instruction saves the data in the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the call source to the group 1 used in the base calculation process of the call destination. In this way, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE command, and a plurality of storage areas can be collectively switched by one command (that is, a small number of steps).

After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation processing, before starting the processing shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt processing is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is written. To evacuate. After that, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer by the LD instruction to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation processing is completed, the processing is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the LD pointer restores the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the CHANGE command switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 1 used in the base calculation process of the callee to the group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller, and the game is played by the POP command. The data in the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored in the switching register 13144. It should be noted that for saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD and the exchange instruction EX) may be used without using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

As described above, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before calling the base calculation process by the restoration of the switching register 13144, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the CHANGE command. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be surely switched by the CHANGE command.

After that, the interrupt is permitted by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main process on the main control side (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

Note that, similarly to the above, the interrupt may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and the interrupt may be permitted by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, the interrupt may be prohibited when the timer interrupt processing is started by directly operating the interrupt enable flag regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, and the interrupt may be permitted at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state where the interrupt is prohibited, it is not necessary to further disable the interrupt or enable the interrupt in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interruption prohibition by the DI command is to set the interruption-prohibited state to the interruption-prohibited state for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

Although the example in which the timer interrupt process, the base calculation process, and the auxiliary storage region 13145 are switched has been described with reference to FIG. 111, the auxiliary storage region 13145 may be switched in the inspection process executed by the debug (inspection function) code 13133. In this case, it is preferable to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing at the head of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 by the CHANGE command. Further, an initialization process (step S10 of FIG. 21 to step S34 of FIG. 22), a main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 of FIG. 21), and a power-off process (steps S42 to S58 of FIG. 21), The auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched depending on the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23, FIG. 75, FIG. 80, etc.) and a different auxiliary storage area 13145 may be used for each processing.

Furthermore, when only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processing executed in the game control area (for example, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and outside the game control area (for example, debug ( Inspection function) area, base calculation area, etc.) (for example, debug processing, base calculation processing, etc.) to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145, and use different auxiliary storage areas 13145 inside and outside the game control area. Good.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 is used for the main control side main process and the timer interrupt process, but since the main control side main process being executed is interrupted and the timer interrupt process is started, the timer interrupt process is executed. The value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 at the start of processing (for example, at the beginning of timer interrupt processing), and at the end of timer interrupt processing (for example, at the end of timer interrupt processing). The value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 may be returned to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality (bytes) of storage areas, saving one unit (byte or word) in the stack area increases the number of instructions for saving. Similarly, the number of instructions for recovering data from the stack area increases. Further, in this case, if the processing order is mistaken for saving data to the stack area and restoring data from the stack area, different data may be read from the stack area, and the subsequent processing may not be performed correctly. .. Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and to collectively restore all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area, The above problems can be solved.

Furthermore, if all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved in the stack area, the stack area may overflow and the data outside the area planned as the stack area (such as the stack area for other purposes) may be rewritten. is there. Therefore, in addition to an instruction to collectively store all storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area, an instruction to collectively save a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area It is also possible to provide an instruction to collectively restore to a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas of the auxiliary storage areas 13145 saved in the stack area and execute the instructions.

In this way, when moving to the processing outside the game control area, it is switched to another auxiliary storage area 13145, and when moving to the processing inside the game control area, it is switched to the original auxiliary storage area 13145, so it is stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145. The processing can proceed without saving the created data in the RAM 1312 (eg, stack area).

In addition, since the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area) when moving to the processing outside the game control area, and the switching register 13144 is recovered from the RAM 1312 when moving to the processing inside the game control area. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to the processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be recovered without being recovered from the RAM 1312.

Also, when moving to processing outside the game control area, it switches to another stack area, and when moving to processing inside the game control area, it switches to the original stack area, so the stack area used for processing inside the game control area is , The processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely divided without being updated in the processing outside the game control area.

In addition, the value stored in the switching register 13144 when shifting to processing outside the game control area is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area), and the value saved when shifting to processing inside the game control area is used for switching Since the register 13144 is restored, the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area is not updated in the processing outside the game control area, and the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. In the arrangement on the memory shown in FIG. 113, the stack area omitted in the arrangement on the memory described above with reference to FIG. 26 is illustrated in the RAM 1312, but the RAM 1312 shown in FIG. 26 also has the stack area.

In the ROM 1313, a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a base calculation/display code 13135, and a base calculation/display data 13136. Contains the storage area. In the ROM 1313 of this embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1, such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing a program or data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And a base calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for the purpose of calculating the base value, such as the base calculation/display code 13135 and the base calculation/display data 13136.

A free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the last address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation/display code 13135. When the predetermined length is 16 bytes or more, it is desirable that the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in the dump list format, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. It should be noted that the value stored in the empty area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game control area and the debug area or a value with low frequency. The value stored in the empty area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the base calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without dividing the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, a debug area (code for debug (inspection function), data for debug (inspection function)) that is a process not directly related to control of the progress of the game. ) And a base calculation area (base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area, and a defect (bug, etc.) in the base calculation/display code 13135 is caused in the game control. Avoids the risk of affecting.

In the debug (inspection function) area, programs and data for the purpose not directly related to the game are stored. For example, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 other than the game control of the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. The debug (inspection function) code 13133 is a program for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal. The base calculation area stores a program for calculating a base value that is not directly related to the progress of the game.

The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Also, the game control code 13131 can be read from and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code 13133. Is configured to be executable, and writing to the relevant area cannot be performed. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area accessible only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed during execution of the game control code 13131, but the game control code 13131 is changed from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change in the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

The base calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the base calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 can be inspected. This can be performed separately, and the labor of inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the base calculation/display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is an area for storing data used by the game control code 13131, and can be read and written from the game control area 13126. In the game control area 13126, data cannot be written from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but read access is possible, and the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and base calculation are possible. -The display code 13135 can refer to the data stored in the game control area 13126.

The debug area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debug area is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but only the reading of data is permitted and the writing of data is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation/display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the debug (inspection function) code 13133, but only the reading of data is permitted and the writing of data is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area in which data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is exclusively used to temporarily save the data stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. The stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

FIG. 113B is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the base calculation result is stored. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation/display process, and the main control side power off process (see FIG. 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the power-down process on the main control side (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as the power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set for the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

If it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the power-off process on the main control side, the value in the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the base calculation/display processing, the value of the main area may be copied to the backup area at the end of the base calculation/display processing. It suffices if the entire main area or only the area having the updated value is copied to the backup area when at least a part of the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digit of the address.

[11. Record of game history]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine for recording gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines from the prepared effects a plurality of effects suitable for the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and displays the determined effects on the main liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 1600. At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 decides to present a specific effect (for example, two kinds of specific effects out of three types of super reach) out of a plurality of prepared effects, the switching of the game state is started. As to how many times the special symbol variable display game is played, the specific effect is displayed (in other words, at what rotation the effect appears), the main liquid crystal display device 1600 together with the progress status of the game. To display.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appears at 34:10:25, and the result of the special symbol variable display game is lost. At 127:10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, the result of the special symbol variable display game was lost, Super Reach 2 appeared at 428th rotation at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol variable display game was a sudden change jackpot. Is displayed.

The jackpot history display (for example, the jackpot on the 15th rotation and the jackpot on the 50th rotation) can be confirmed on the data display provided in the hall, but the specific effect that has appeared before the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players can judge whether the pachinko machine 1 is in good condition or out of order from the appearance of a specific effect (for example, if the super reach 2 appears within 50 revolutions after the end of the big hit, it is considered that the big hit is won in a short time). In order to meet such a player's expectation, the degree of appearance of the effect is visually displayed. Also, when the player is confirming the degree of appearance of the effect, the player does not shoot the game ball, so if a display that shows the degree of appearance of all the prepared effects is displayed, the player It takes time to confirm the degree of appearance, and the operation of the gaming table may decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (a reach effect with a high expectation for a big hit) of the reach effects. Further, the appearance history for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C or the like).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 stores information on the number of variations and the effect produced. Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the information on the number of fluctuations and the effect that has been shown, based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C or the like) is operated, not all the produced effects but the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect is displayed is added and displayed. It suffices to perform processing.

In addition, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 in business, the pachinko machine 1 outputs error information to notify the employee of the hall. The form of this notification is such that the error screen shown in FIG. 115(A) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 115(B) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the cause of the error is displayed. Is output, an alarm sound is output, and the error signal shown in FIG. 116 is output from the external terminal board 784. In addition, typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 include those shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. The error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is notified outside the pachinko machine 1 so that the employee in the hall can know the cause. For example, a code defined for each error type may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, if the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, “0” is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED on the right side of the door is displayed. Lights blue.

However, the error occurs due to various causes such as a minor malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnection of the connector), a serious malfunction requiring replacement of parts, and a malfunction.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must search for the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate. It takes time and cost to search the cause of the error, and the suspension of the operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error causes a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know the detailed information of the error that occurred, the error can be resolved early and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

More specifically, the hall determines the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on a signal output from the external terminal board 784 using a hall computer. However, in order to search for the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, preferably, "the number of winnings of the general winning opening", "the number of winnings of the large winning opening", "the number of passing gates", and "variation of the normal symbol" Game history information such as "number" is required. If the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions, it will be solved by repairing or replacing parts, so there is no big problem, but if a game ball is acquired by cheating, the chances that a normal player will profit will decrease, May interfere with the business of the company, and eventually the hall may become difficult to manage.

When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of terminals of the connector used for the external terminal board 784 increases and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. In addition, events such as "general winning award", "big award winning", "gate passing", and "normal symbol changes" occur frequently, so when you output all the data from the pachinko machine 1, the data A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the data, which increases the burden on the hall.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment stores the data, which is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748, inside the pachinko machine 1 so that the stored data can be referred to later. This made it possible to check the details of the process leading up to the error.

In addition, the time of occurrence of events (number of winnings for general winning a prize, number of winnings for a large winning a prize, number of passing gates, number of normal symbols, etc.) that occur during the course of these errors is recorded, so how much time does it take? You can understand how many events have occurred. For example, an abnormality such as the number of winnings at the general winning opening being 50 per minute can be seen.

Note that if the date and time of occurrence is recorded for each event, the amount of data used to search for the cause of error increases, and it takes time to search for the cause of error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events occur within a predetermined time (for example, one minute), the error information may be output and notified.

For example, in any game state, you can win the general prize hole, so if you receive more than a predetermined number of prizes in a predetermined time, you may output error information and notify, but the big prize hole is won only during the jackpot game Therefore, it is advisable to set a predetermined time from the start of the big hit game to the end, and output error information when a predetermined number or more of special winning openings have been won in a predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs it as data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing according to this embodiment. The peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 120 has a game history recording process (step S1023) added to the peripheral control unit power-on process described above with reference to FIG.

In the game history recording process, based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory when the received command is a predetermined command. The game history is recorded as the date and time of event occurrence, for example, in the format shown in FIG. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but in consideration of retaining the stored contents even when the power is cut off, it is preferable to record in a SRAM which does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power.

The game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the peripheral control unit steady process, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped midway and some effects are not executed. That is, even if some of the effects are not executed (even if all the effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed on the main control board 1310 does not change, and the privilege given to the player also changes. Since there is none, the game history is recorded prior to the production. Further, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process relating to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared by a plurality of pachinko machines.

Next, the process when the memory capacity of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit will be described. When the data amount of the recorded game history has reached the upper limit of the capacity of the memory, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not have to be updated. That is, the information recorded in the memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can be used every time. The processing of can be reduced.

Further, when the memory capacity of the recorded game history has reached the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to erase the oldest game history and record the latest game history. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the empty state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 every time can be reduced.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the useless process from being executed. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs another process (effect control, lamp). Control and sound control can be executed reliably, and new processing (for example, processing executed over a plurality of peripheral control unit steady processing due to lack of processing time) by utilizing the available processing time Alternatively, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) that is executed once in the peripheral control unit steady process may be executed because it does not need to be executed every time.

The received command may be analyzed (step S1022) immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

The game history recording condition setting table registers the type of command recorded as a game history among the commands received by the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310, that is, the event recorded as a game history.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the generation condition of the command and the purpose of recording as a game history are as follows.

For example, the start opening 1 winning command and the start opening 2 winning command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral controller 1511 when the winning of the game ball into the starting opening 2002 and the starting opening 2004 is detected, respectively, and the surrounding area. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each starting opening. Further, the special symbol 1 symbol type command, the special symbol 2 symbol type command, respectively, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of variation of the special symbol, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the special symbols 1 and 2. The number of fluctuations can be counted.

The power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire a ram clear operation or the like. The variation start state command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310 at the start of variation of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of variation of the special symbol. There are four states that can be distinguished by the change start state command: low probability/time saving, low probability/non-time saving, high probability/time saving, and high probability/non-time saving. The number of fluctuations made can be counted. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that the jackpot is derived in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is the jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game. Is a state in which the probability of being derived is higher than usual. Time saving, the probability that the above-mentioned second starting door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) has a higher probability than non-time saving, or the time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol until it is determined. For example, when the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), the frequency of opening (or expanding) is higher than in the non-time saving state. Along with this, the probability that an effect with a short time of one special symbol variable display game is selected is increased.

The special winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are transferred from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins the big winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively. The command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each special winning opening.

The special winning opening 1 winning command (below the specified winning prize) and the big winning entrance 2 winning command (below the specified winning prize) are won at the special winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively, until the end of the round. If not performed, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time has passed from the time of closing each special winning opening (for example, after one second and before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 You can get the winning status in one round for each big winning hole. The special winning opening 1 winning command (greater than the specified winning prize) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (greater than the specified winning prize) are rounded when the number of game balls exceeds the specified number at the special winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively. When is finished, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each special winning opening (for example, after one second and before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 is You can get the status of winning in one round to each prize hole. It should be noted that this command is transmitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, when the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls defined in one round is detected and the big winning opening is detected. This is because there is a possibility that an undetected game ball will be present in the big winning opening when the game is closed, and the situation of the winning is accurately grasped even when such an over-winning.

The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral controller 1511 when the jackpot is generated (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuously operating device is activated), and the peripheral controller 1511 acquires a change to the jackpot state. Yes, you can count the number of jackpots. The transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, and the termination of the jackpot state and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the situation after the jackpot.

The small hit OP command is for opening the special winning opening in a relatively short time (for example, the opening time of one time is 1.8 seconds or the total opening time of multiple times is less than 1.8 seconds). Therefore, when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small hit), a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small hits.

The normal symbol stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the stop symbol of the normal symbol and can count the number of variations of the normal symbol. The general-purpose gate passage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls passing through the gate unit 2003.

Even if the special symbol or the normal symbol is not selected by lottery even if the player wins the starting mouth or passes through the gate (such as when there is no overflow or memory), the main control board 1310 causes the peripheral control unit 1511 to win the starting mouth 1. The hour command, the start opening 2 winning command and the universal figure gate passing command are transmitted. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls entering the starting port and the number of balls passing through the gate unit.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the error occurrence timing and count the error occurrence number.

The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball wins each general winning opening 2001, and the surrounding area. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening 2001. It should be noted that the general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of the general winning openings 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the case where three general winning openings 2001 are provided has been exemplified above. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 16, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with four general winning a prizes 2001. Therefore, four types of general winning a prize winnings, from the general winning a prize 1 winning command to the general winning a prize 4 winning command The command is defined.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in order of the event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time, and the time when the main control board 1310 detects the event occurrence is notified to the peripheral control unit 1511. Then, the peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the date and time of event occurrence is recorded with granularity up to the minute, but may be recorded up to the second.

By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know the details of the event that has occurred in association with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 (for example, the change in the game state, the result of the variable display game, etc.). .. For example, the power-on command of history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, RAM was cleared from the contents of the command, and the game started with a low probability/non-time saving state. I understand. That is, the hall starts business at 15:30, turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and the player starts striking after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette) and wins the general winning opening 2001. I understand. Further, the special figure 1 variation start event of history number 4 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, from the content of the special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol) received, special symbol variation You can see the result of the display game. The special figure 1 fluctuation start event of history number 6 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, from the content of the special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol) received, the special symbol variation display game You can see the result of. In addition, although the result of the special symbol variable display game is not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol variable display game is represented by a numerical value indicating the result of the variable display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of variation of the special symbol. The result of the variable display game (miss, normal 4 rounds, high probability 4 rounds, high probability 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as the game history.

Next, a method in which the hole refers to the information (game history) recorded in the memory will be described.

First, a history output interface 1590 for outputting the information recorded in the memory from the peripheral controller 1511 is provided. Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

In addition, when the data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral output unit 1590 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be composed of a history output terminal provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 or may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal may be held by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range wireless (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

The command that becomes a trigger for the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history is a command that is not transmitted during a normal game after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, even with a history reference command dedicated to the game history output (Fig. 121). A command when a special condition (operation) is performed with a command not defined in the above may be used as the history reference command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, even with a command transmitted during a normal game, the history reference command may be transmitted under the condition of an event that cannot occur (or is unlikely to occur). For example, this is the case when 50 prizes are won in the starting opening or the general winning opening in one minute. In addition, the game history may be output when the commands used for game control are received in a special order which is not normally possible.

The operation history may be displayed by providing an operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display device) on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (a place invisible to the player).

FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its periphery.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and transmits the performance display drive board 4450 and control information and various information (various data) via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. A liquid crystal display that performs drawing control of the peripheral control unit 1511 that communicates with the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and that controls sound such as music and sound effects that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a control unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies a date, and time information that specifies an hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the production control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs for controlling performance operations to be executed, various data, various control data and various schedule data, and V blank from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (eg, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and various light emitting modes of LEDs, etc.) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a signal is input. A peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data and the like, and various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of a jackpot gaming state and a special effect flag) Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing) and peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally Have) and.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when power is cut off for a long time (when power is cut off for a long time), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. When the backup power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”), the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. You can't do it and lose its contents.

Further, power is supplied to a part of the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d by a backup power supply 1513 different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. A game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which power is supplied by the backup power supply 1513, and the stored contents can be retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium-ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capacity capable of holding data in at least a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to one month.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the package of the peripheral control CPU together with the peripheral control MPU.

FIG. 124(A) shows a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in which a package different from the peripheral control CPU constitutes an area for storing a game history. As shown in the figure, the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. Be done.

When the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (production control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage outside the peripheral control CPU) The data in the work area) 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 124(B) shows a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d which constitutes an area for storing a game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124B, when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (production control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control is performed. The data in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. Therefore, the effect control area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d and the game history storage area are preferably physically separated.

Note that, in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured by a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which power is not supplied, without providing the backup power supply 1513.

In either of FIGS. 124A and 124B, the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be any method other than the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. Good. For example, if a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. May be turned into.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from the normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control board 1310 continues to send power-on commands to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is being operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives power-on commands a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. When it does, or when the power-on command is continuously received, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By thus providing the means for initializing the data in the game history storage area, for example, even if the gaming machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and therefore is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The lighting data of the game board for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is output from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) to the lamp. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serial for the motor drive board. Door side motor drive data for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 is a frame decoration drive The signal is sent from the amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, or to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal is driven from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the frame decoration drive. Send it to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, which are provided in the effect operation unit 220. Detection signal is serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized production operation unit detection data is output from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, to the serial operation I/O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180, which is not shown in the figure. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control circuit board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the event that occurred during the game is recorded as the game history in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so the event occurs during the game. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the opening of the hall), and the performance or failure of the gaming machine can be grasped. Further, the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM to which the backup power source is input), so that the game history can be confirmed even after the gaming machine is restarted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc., various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence. Further, for example, in the case of winning the starting opening 1, (1) the fact that the winning opening 1 was won, (2) the time when the winning opening 1 was won, and (3) the event that occurred before winning the starting opening 1. As described above, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. 116 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1. This is because the minimum necessary information (information indicating the fact that the (1) winning in the starting mouth described above) is output from the external terminal board 784 in the case of winning in the starting mouth, etc. This is because the information stored in the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed when the information is investigated. This is because, if all of the information stored inside when winning the prize at the starting opening is output from the external terminal board 784, the output amount of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 may increase, which may burden the hall. Is. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is pachinko machine via the external terminal board 784. 1 so that the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed in a special case.

[11-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine that records and outputs the game history will be described. It should be noted that some of the modified examples described below are a modification of a part of the above-described embodiment and form a part of the embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, the event (command type) that occurred and the date and time when the event occurred are recorded for a predetermined command that is predetermined from among the commands that are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d that records the game history is finite, and it is difficult to record all of a huge amount of events that occur during the game for a long time. For this reason, in the modified example 1 (compact plan 1), the change in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in the state are recorded.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification.

In the game history recording condition setting table of the modified example 1, the commands recorded as the game history are defined separately for counting commands and commands that trigger state changes, and commands for which both attributes are set. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the obtainable state change column are provided for convenience of explanation, and when the game history recording condition setting table is installed in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is required. ..

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the command in which the counting attribute is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the command issuance as a result of the command analysis. In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is received, as a result of command analysis, the state of the game history recorded in the memory is renewed, and a record for counting the number of events. To add.

For example, a power-on command, a fluctuation start state command, a big hit OP command, a big hit operation end transition destination command, and an error display command are commands issued by a state change, respectively, power on, special symbol fluctuation display start, It can be grasped as the switching of the state of big hit state start, big hit state end, and error state occurrence.

The count command is used to count the number of events that triggered the issuance of the count command. Specifically, the start opening 1 winning command and the start opening 2 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each starting opening. Special symbol 1 symbol type command, special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of fluctuations of each special symbol. With the big winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning), the number of winning balls to each big winning opening can be counted. With the special winning opening 1 winning command (below the specified winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (below the specified winning), it is possible to count the number of rounds that have ended below the specified winning number. With the big winning opening 1 winning command (greater than the specified winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (greater than the specified winning), it is possible to count the number of rounds that have exceeded the specified winning number (that is, over winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal symbol stop command can normally count the number of fluctuations of the symbol. The universal figure gate passage command can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate portion. The error display command can count the number of errors that have occurred. The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the first modification.

The game history of the modified example 1 is the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurs, and the state from a predetermined starting point. And the cumulative number of count events detected until the end of (up to the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time of initialization of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The states where the counting events are recorded separately are assumed to be 5 states of low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. The state may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in the first modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, as a counting event, the number of winning openings 1 wins, the number of winning openings 2 wins, the number of changes in one special symbol, the number of changes in two special prizes, the number of winning one general winning holes, the number of winning two winning general prizes, The number of general winning openings 3 winning, the number of major winning openings 1 winning, the number of winning two major winning openings, the number of passing gates, and the number of normal symbol variations are recorded. The number of events other than those shown in the figure may be counted.

A storage area for the cumulative number of each counting event of 2 bytes is sufficient. In particular, data that is not derived very often and whose cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of general winning awards) may be 1 byte, and other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, 1-byte data and 2-byte data may be arranged in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or 1 byte and 2 bytes) without being mixed.

When a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, the date and time when the event occurred are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

The count result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. Although a new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, a new record may be created at the start of the period in which counting events are counted. In this case, data may not be stored in the created new record while counting events are counted, but 0 may be stored as an initial value. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period in which counting events are counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of the counting event of the period is stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and recorded in the work area. Numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of count events detected during the state (from the last state change event to the state change event) is recorded as a game history, the count value of the count event is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

That is, every time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. , It will be initialized by the normal ram clear operation. Specifically, for example, in the low probability/non-time saving state, the game history information in which the number of winnings to the starting opening 1 is 50 is recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of the first modification. In 1, the game state is changed and then recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, when the power is cut off and the ram clear operation is performed in the low-probability/non-time saving state, the winning number of the 50 prizes is initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a count event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Further, even when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process may be executed. In this case, in the current state, the recording of the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is continuously executed, and the accumulated number of counting events may not be stored from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Alternatively, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral controller 1511 is reduced each time. it can. Also, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the latest game history can be confirmed.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent unnecessary process execution and reduce the process of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As described above, in the first modification, the state switching of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (each winning number, the number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state during the switching is recorded, so that the game of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification is also characterized in that more information is internally recorded than the information output from the external terminal board 784.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, it is stored in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Information (game history) is not written. In other words, if fraud is performed in a state in which a new record cannot be created in the game history storage area (while the same gaming state continues), it may be difficult to find fraud. As described above, the hall can confirm the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1. Unless the game state changes, the information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the current state information (game history) cannot be confirmed. Even in such a case, a check function may be provided to detect fraud early.

Specifically, the first record (the latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the game history of the latest state is recorded and the second record (the record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the game history of the current state is recorded. An error may be notified when the result of comparison with the above satisfies a predetermined condition.

For example, in a high probability/time saving state or a jackpot gaming state, in a pachinko machine 1 that shoots a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a, so-called right hitting, transitions from a high probability/time saving state to a jackpot gaming state. However, if the state changes to a high probability/time saving state after the jackpot game state has ended, even if the state is switched, it is usually right-handed, so there is a possibility of winning the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent high probability/time saving state, and when a difference is detected, an error may be notified. The permissible value of the difference in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening between the states is set to 1, and an error may be notified when a difference of 2 or more occurs. This is because when the hand is released from the firing handle, the firing force may be uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. Since the early fraud detection check function described above detects an error by predicting a game from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, since it is a high-probability/time-saving state, it will hit the right), an unskilled player may There is a possibility that an error will be detected if you make an unexpected hit. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error and only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a location away from the pachinko machine 1 without the player being aware of it, and prevent troubles with the player.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact plan 2]
In Modification 1 described above, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event is recorded as the state change of the pachinko machine 1, and the number of counting events in each state during the change is recorded. Was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of state that occurs repeatedly is sufficient. Therefore, in the second modification (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of the modified example 2 is composed of a history of state events and the cumulative number of count events for each state. The history of state events includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states of low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. It The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 2 includes a start opening 1 winning number (starting opening 1 winning command), a starting opening 2 winning number (starting opening 2 winning command), special Symbol 1 fluctuation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 fluctuation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning a prize 1 winning number (general winning a prize 1 winning command), general winning a prize 2 winning number (general) Prize hole 2 prize command), general prize mouth 3 prize number (general prize mouth 3 prize command), big prize mouth 1 prize number (large prize mouth 1 prize command), big prize mouth 2 prize number (large prize mouth 2 prize command) ), the number of passing gates (general figure gate passing command), the number of normal symbol variations (normal symbol stop command).

The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time when the event occurred are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by the state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the non-volatile memory, and the counting event described above is corresponding to the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

Note that the counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out to the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is initialized by a normal ram clear operation, although the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but it is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event for each type of state (each winning number, the number of fluctuations, etc.) is recorded. Therefore, the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. It is possible to record a long game history without increasing the capacity of.

[11-4. Compact plan 3]
In Modification 2 described above, of the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded at the state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing at which the state is switched may not be important in some cases, and may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of state is known. For this reason, in the modified example 3 (compact plan 3), the switching of the states of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In the modified example 3, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the modified example 1.

In Modified Example 3, the same event as the event recorded in Modified Example 1 is recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of Modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of Modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Furthermore, the game history of modification 3 includes the accumulated time of each state. The cumulative time is included so that the hall can estimate the number of times an event has occurred (for example, the number of jackpots) from the cumulative time. The states in which the counting events are recorded separately are 5 states of a low probability/non-time saving state, a low probability/time saving state, a high probability/non-time saving state, a high probability/time saving state, and a jackpot state. Counting events may be recorded.

The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 3 includes a starting opening 1 winning number (starting opening 1 winning command), a starting opening 2 winning number (starting opening 2 winning command), special Symbol 1 fluctuation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 fluctuation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning a prize 1 winning number (general winning a prize 1 winning command), general winning a prize 2 winning number (general) Prize hole 2 prize command), general prize mouth 3 prize number (general prize mouth 3 prize command), big prize mouth 1 prize number (large prize mouth 1 prize command), big prize mouth 2 prize number (large prize mouth 2 prize command) ), the number of passing gates (general figure gate passing command), the number of normal symbol variations (normal symbol stop command). The number of counting events other than the above may be counted.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of counting events described above is recorded corresponding to the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

Note that the counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out to the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is initialized by a normal ram clear operation, although the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but it is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event for each type of state (each winning number, the number of fluctuations, etc.) is recorded. Therefore, the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. It is possible to record a long game history without increasing the capacity of.

As described above, in the modified examples 1 to 3, when the event is recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) when the event occurs by the game history recording process, and the condition for writing in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is satisfied. First, the data of the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in a normal ram clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Here is a brief description of the hall's operations. In many cases, the business hours of the hall are set, for example, the opening time is 10:00 and the closing time is 23:00. Therefore, in a time zone with many players, such as a time zone just after the opening of the store or a time zone in the evening, it may be difficult for a clerk to monitor whether the game player is playing an illegal game. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players also decreases, and if there is a high probability/shortening time pachinko machine near the closing time, the high probability/shortening time pachinko machine is initialized for the next day's business, and low probability/ May be in an untimely state. In this case, since the number of game players is small, it is possible to monitor a pachinko machine with a high probability and a short working time, and it is possible to know whether the latest game is illegal. In other words, in consideration of the situation that some pachinko machines do not require the latest game history, it is possible to provide an efficient game machine by allowing the clerk to select whether to leave the latest information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by the ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for the event that occurred after the most recent event is deleted, and the game history is stored for the event that occurred before the most recent event. The game history stored in the area is left. That is, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, information that is recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and information that is recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all the events recorded in the work area, the clerk may cause the state change of the pachinko machine, and if you want to delete the event record recorded in the work area, The clerk may perform a ram clear operation. By clearing all the game history by ram clear operation, it was decided to delete only the game history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the most recent event, as described above, before the most recent event. This is because the clerk has not seen the events that have occurred up to this point (it cannot be seen because there are many gamers).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the recording of the information that the winning opening is won, but also the winning of the general winning opening unrelated to the lottery is temporarily recorded in the work area, so the special symbol ( In the symbol that starts changing by winning the start opening, even if the symbol indicating the winning lottery result is shown in the stopped state of this symbol) does not change, while the game ball is being launched in the game area 5a, the game is played. It is characterized by collecting history. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed when the winning lottery is triggered, but a process that may be always executed while power is supplied to the pachinko machine.

Further, in the low probability/non-time saving state, the game ball is shot so that the game ball wins the starting opening 2002 like a so-called left hitting or a slight hit. In such a case, the player should appropriately win the starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001. However, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 2001 (or very few), but there are many gaming balls winning in the starting opening 2002, or conversely, there is no winning in the starting opening 2002 (or very few). However, if a large number of game balls are won in the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility that fraud is being made. Therefore, the first winning opening and the second winning opening in which the game balls win at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning opening is a predetermined multiplication factor of the number of winnings in the second winning opening. You may be notified of an error when it exceeds.

Further, instead of the error notification, the security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. The above-mentioned detection method may detect an error when an unfamiliar player makes an unexpected hit. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error and only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a location away from the pachinko machine 1 without the player being aware of it, and prevent troubles with the player.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated in a plurality of games is collected as a game history. Since there is an upper limit to the amount of play history data that can be recorded, if one game (one variation) is recorded, many games (long time) cannot be recorded. There is.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has a setting function of changing the operating ratio of the condition device, for example, as the game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine having the setting unit, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having the setting unit as seen from the back side in the open state. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 as seen from the back side in a closed state, and FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a setting unit of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display unit 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 132(A), a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode is provided on the setting board 970, and a setting for changing a set value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that receives an operation for changing settings.

In the present embodiment, operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are fetched by the payout controller 952. Further, the setting display unit 974 is controlled by the payout control unit 952. The confirmed setting is transmitted from the payout controller 952 to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 may control the components on the setting board 970, as described later.

The setting key 971 is for inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion portion) and maintaining the short-circuited or open state of the contact by the operation of turning the key to the setting position to change to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers. The setting key 971 may not be provided, and other switches may also be used. In this case, by operating the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode may be ended by long pressing.

The setting change mode may be started or ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing (long-pressing) the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more. Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing the RAM clear switch 954 for a long time during the setting change mode.

By doing so, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, the operation may be detected at the fall of the setting change switch 972.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select set values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is increased by 1, and when the setting change switch 972 is operated when the setting value=6, the setting value=1. The setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. It should be noted that the set value is not limited to 6 levels, but may be less (for example, 2 levels) or higher (for example, 8 levels).

Further, the setting key 971 may serve as the setting change switch 972 without providing the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three steps, and the key can be inserted/removed at the neutral position (normal position). When turned to the left, it becomes an operation for starting the setting change mode, and when turned to the right, the setting to be set. This is an operation for selecting a value (when it is turned to the right, it functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation capable of holding the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

The set value is for changing the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the special symbol hit probability). The set value=1 has a low hit probability, and the set value=6 has a high hit probability. Also, depending on the set value, the ratio of probability variation big hits, the ratio of time saving (ST) after big hits, the number of time saving, the number of rounds and counts of big hits, the probability of hitting a general figure, the general winning opening, the starting opening and the big winning opening. Various parameters relating to the game such as the number of prize balls may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary type switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that the switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a momentary type toggle switch.

The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. In addition, the selected set value may be set in response to the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, operation of the operation button 220C, ball lending button. The selected setting may be confirmed by the operation of, the operation of the return button, the detection of the winning of the game ball to the starting openings 2002 and 2004, or the like. The operation unit that substitutes the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is provided with three switches (including setting keys) in order to set the game performance in the pachinko machine 1, but the setting board 970 has one or two switches. It is enough if you provide it.

Further, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may not be provided, and the setting change operation may be performed only by the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing (long-pressing) the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more. Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, a setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the setting change mode. Instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, a RAM clear switch is provided. The set value can be confirmed by operating (long-pressing) 954 for a predetermined time or longer. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting indicator 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key 971). .. It should be noted that the setting indicator 974 may be configured with LEDs having a settable value instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value is turned on to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type indicator by a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error. The error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 are also used. The selected set value and the current set value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off in displaying the error type, and the dot may be turned on in displaying the set value. Further, the display of the error type may be a lighting display (not blinking), and the display of the set value may be a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may be connected to a power supply board (not shown) in the power supply board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 together with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 that are operated when changing the settings are arranged in the vicinity, and the operability of the setting change is improved. Can be improved.

Further, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

As yet another form, the setting board 970 may not be an independent board but may be configured as a part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on any of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface of the lower portion of the main body frame 4 (that is, not the game board 5 but the frame side) of the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 131. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the interval between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, and thus it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. As described above, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971, prevents the key from being inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971, and makes it difficult to change the setting that makes it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting changing operation unit). Functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the setting key 971 as the at least part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, it is advisable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. Thus, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting is performed while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). This makes it difficult to operate the board 970 and suppress an illegal act by the player changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (setting change obfuscation means) facing the setting board 970 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but other members may be used. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in association with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 is provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The setting change obfuscation unit configured by a member provided so as to face the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970. In this case, it is advisable to cover the setting key 971 that triggers the setting change mode with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in the setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover for preventing an inadvertent operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (for example, a door-like lid that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, the outer frame 2 is provided with a second cover body that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310. The second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being started by an inadvertent operation, and it is possible to prevent an illegal player from changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Is less than the length.

The setting board 970 may be arranged in the vicinity of the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 that are operated when changing the settings are arranged in the vicinity. With this configuration, the operability when the setting change mode is activated can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1 is provided in the power board box 930, and the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 is initialized in the payout control board unit 950. A RAM clear switch 954 for changing to a memory is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are provided at positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 suppresses an illegal act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game by hiding the setting key 971 so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, it is desirable that the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player because it is important information for the selection of the player's table. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 131, like the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 and a state where the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player cannot know the set value. Is desirable. As described above, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility-improving unit that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting status display unit).

FIG. 132(B) is a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other, and the setting key 971 moves. The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not positioned in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. It is difficult to confirm the current set values for the pachinko machine.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting board 970.

Also in this modification, similarly to the above-described example, the setting board 970 is provided with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974. However, in this modified example, the setting key 971 is arranged laterally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of the present modification is installed not on the side surface side of the main body frame 4 but on the rear surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. Then, as shown in FIG. 133B, when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is the right frame member 40 with the main body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2. , The head of the key 975 inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the key 975 cannot be inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971.

In the modification shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and even if the difficulty of the board arrangement is reduced, the setting board 970 is operated during the operation of the pachinko machine 1, It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine having the setting unit will be described. In this modification, the setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4 and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of the present modified example, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 136 is shown in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown from the back.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be that shown in FIG. 132A or FIG. 133A.

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and the main control MPU 1311. Controls the display of the setting display 974.

The function and configuration of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as those in the above-described embodiments, and common description will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used together and the selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. On the base display 1317, the base value of the provisional section (section currently being measured) and the base value of the final section (straight section) are normally switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in the setting change mode, the selected (next set) set value is displayed, and while the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 152), the current set value is displayed.

In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the base value is displayed using four digits, but the set value is displayed using only a predetermined one digit (for example, the rightmost digit), and “−” may be displayed. Digits that are not used for displaying the set value may be displayed with other numbers, letters, or symbols instead of "-" as long as they are not used for displaying the base value. Further, when the set value is displayed, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the set value is displayed in 6 steps of alphabets A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the setting value is blinked while the setting value is being selected, and the confirmed setting value is lit. Further, the current set value may be displayed in a lighted state. Also, in the base display, the upper two digits indicate the type of display data, and no number is displayed. Therefore, the highest digit may be used to display the set value. When the base display 1317 is also used as the setting display 974, the setting value is preferentially displayed during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation, so the base value is displayed, but the base value is displayed. Not done. After that, when the confirmation of the setting change mode and the set value is completed, the base display 1317 restarts the display of the base value.

When the base display 1317 is also used as the setting display 974, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area to display the display content on the base display 1317. The output process is executed by the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation/display code 13135 (for example, a process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided in the game control area. By making the processing common, the capacity of the program can be reduced and the memory can be saved.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display unit 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control region, and the process of outputting the display content to the base display unit 1317 is for the base calculation/display outside the game control region. By executing the code 13135, the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, and the security can be improved.

Further, the processing of changing the setting and confirming the setting may be executed outside the game control area.

That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is also used as the base display 1317, both cases are included in the scope of the invention described in this specification. In this way, while confirming the setting change mode and the setting value, by displaying the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 so as not to be confusing, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of changing the setting and an erroneous recognition of the setting value.

Even when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not combined, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or all the lights may be turned on while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the confirmation of the setting change mode and the set value is completed, the base display 1317 restarts the display of the base value. By not displaying a plurality of displays on the main control board box 1320 while confirming the setting change mode and the set value, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of changing the setting and an erroneous recognition of the set value.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed on a part of the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes or notches for operating the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. Is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening/closing direction differs depending on the direction of the key hole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted vertically from the front side of the board into the board, the main control board box 1320 is separated vertically into the setting board 970 by the front surface and the back surface of the setting board 970 or the front side box body ( Alternatively, the cover) and the back side box body may be configured to be openable and closable with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted from the side in the direction in which the board extends, the main control board box 1320 includes the front side box body (or cover) of the setting board 970 and the back side box body in the extending direction of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure in which it is slid in the (key 975 insertion direction) and separated.

In this modification, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are fetched by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display unit 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface (left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. 136, the game board 5 is attached. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the interval between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is small. Therefore, in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 and It is difficult to operate the switch. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the setting key 971 as the at least part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, it is advisable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. Thus, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting is performed while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By operating the board 970, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (setting change obfuscation means) facing the setting board 970 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but other members may be used. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in association with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 is provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Is less than the length.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136, a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1 is provided in the power board box 930, and the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 is initialized in the payout control board unit 950. A RAM clear switch 954 for changing to a memory is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are provided at positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 suppresses an illegal act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game by hiding the setting key 971 so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, it is desirable that the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player because it is important information for the selection of the player's table. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, like the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 and a state where the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player cannot know the set value. Is desirable. As described above, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility-improving unit that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting status display unit).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIG. 132(B) and FIG. 133(B). .. In this state, since the setting board 970 and the keyhole of the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. The current settings of the pachinko machine cannot be confirmed.

Next, processing related to setting change will be described.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is different from the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 21 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key is operated (steps S17 and S30) and the CPU initialization process (steps). The difference is that the setting change process is performed in S28). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization processing described above with reference to FIG.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, and sets the RAM 1312 to be writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. The determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, the data of the set value among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the reserved storage of the special symbol or the normal symbol, the prize ball) Information) and other data are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data (other than the base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area is erased (step S30). , And proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the previous power-off and the checksum calculated in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( The areas other than the base calculation area 13128 are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

Then, it is determined whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag error that has not been performed (step S20), a RAM error where the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and an error in the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) (For example, probability change state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information regarding prize balls), data other than that is cleared, and area 13128 for base calculation (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared to calculate the base. The area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of the base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128. The entire RAM area including may be cleared. If all RAM areas are cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, if the memory configuration is such that the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed, the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation Only initialize it. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data), for base calculation. Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value for each RAM clear operation, and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the setting value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

As the processing after step S28, either of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence/absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is shut off.

138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of the setting change process and the setting display process. In FIG. 138, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 (or is configured integrally with the payout control board 951. 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

First, the setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(A) cooperate with each other will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When the setting key 971 is operated to be on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permissible state generating means. As conditions for starting the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit (prepaid card) It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) or a balance inserted in the cash sand. Further, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects some possibility of fraud (for example, a magnetic error). The determination of these conditions may be performed by the main control MPU 1311 instead of the payout control unit 952 after receiving the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is attempting to perform the setting change operation. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(2) When the setting change mode starts, the payout control unit 952 sends a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clearing process before the setting change. The RAM clear process before changing the setting is a game control area 13126 (including a game work area and a game stack area), in which a game state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a special symbol or a normal symbol reserve storage) , Information about prize balls), the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. The set value does not have to be cleared in this step because it is set to the initial value later in step (6).

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification during the setting change mode is to perform an initial operation of the accessory or to perform a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or state of setting change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden. This is because it disturbs the change work.

The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the firing permission signal, stops the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functions as the firing disabling means to notify the setting change mode. Good. When the shooting of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the shooting of the game ball during the shooting stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value=0 is not set, and the setting change mode cannot be ended at the setting value=0, and the game (game ball Shooting, fluctuation display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout controller 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is also determined in the procedure (1) described above, it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permissible state generation unit that determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is confirmed.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) When the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value and confirms the setting value. Is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the set value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed set value by blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended, and thus the payout control unit 952 sends a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. By this setting change end command, the confirmed set value is notified to the main control MPU 1311.

(13) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification of the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

It should be noted that the notification (including the game stop and the firing stop) may be released immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be released after a lapse of a predetermined time. If the notification given in step (5) is considered as a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification given in the procedure (5) is caught from the viewpoint of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after a lapse of a predetermined time after the setting change mode ends. This is because when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to detect that an unauthorized player changed the setting during business hours. is there.

When stopping the firing of the game ball in a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period is regarded as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game state (for example, probability change state, time saving state, special symbol or normal symbol) Data of the reserved storage of, and information about prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clearing process after the setting change, unlike the RAM clearing process before the setting change, the set value is not initialized.

Then, the setting change mode ends.

In this way, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the payout control board 951). The main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other to execute the setting change process.

In the process described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a pulse having a predetermined frequency is transmitted a predetermined number of times), or a power supply voltage is transmitted. However, a signal of an intermediate potential other than the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent an illegal act of short-circuiting the terminal of the setting key 971 and activating the setting change mode, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 is output from the main control unit 952 by a signal that cannot occur when the terminal is short-circuited. This is because it is preferable to transmit to the substrate 1310.

Next, a setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(B) cooperate with each other will be described.

When the setting key 971 is operated while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout controller 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and sends a setting value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout controller 952 displays the set value notified by the set value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

In the above description, the set value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) is displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the set value and stores it in the payout control unit 952. The set value may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, the setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139A will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as setting change permissible state generating means. Whether the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch. The detection signal of the main frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may send a main frame opening detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch. Further, the payout control board 951 may directly output the received detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch to the main control board 1310. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When the setting key 971 is operated to be on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. As conditions for starting the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit (prepaid card) It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) or a balance inserted in the cash sand. Further, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects some possibility of fraud (for example, a magnetic error). In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is attempting to perform the setting change operation. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952 and executes the RAM clearing process before the setting change. The RAM clear process before changing the setting is a game control area 13126 (including a game work area and a game stack area), in which a game state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a special symbol or a normal symbol reserve storage) , Information about prize balls), the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. The set value does not have to be cleared in this step because it is set to the initial value later in step (6).

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification during the setting change mode is to perform an initial operation of the accessory or to perform a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or state of setting change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden. This is because it disturbs the change work.

The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the firing permission signal, stops the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functions as the firing disabling means to notify the setting change mode. Good. When the shooting of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the shooting of the game ball during the shooting stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value=0 is not set, and the setting change mode cannot be ended at the setting value=0, and the game (game ball Shooting, fluctuation display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is also determined in the procedure (1) described above, it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this way, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the conditions for setting change are satisfied before the setting change is confirmed (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951). It functions as an allowable state generating means.

(9) Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) The main control MPU 1311, if the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value has been confirmed. It is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the set value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed set value by blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is operated to OFF, the setting change mode is ended, so the main control MPU 1311 sends a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification of the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

It should be noted that the notification (including the game stop and the firing stop) may be released immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be released after a lapse of a predetermined time. If the notification given in step (5) is considered as a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification given in the procedure (5) is caught from the viewpoint of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after a lapse of a predetermined time after the setting change mode ends. This is because when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to detect that an unauthorized player changed the setting during business hours. is there.

When stopping the firing of the game ball in a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period is regarded as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game state (for example, probability change state, time saving state, special symbol or normal symbol) Data of the reserved storage of, and information about prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clearing process after the setting change, unlike the RAM clearing process before the setting change, the set value is not initialized.

Then, the setting change mode ends.

In this way, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the main control board 1310). Since the main control board 1310 obtains the detection signal of the main frame opening switch from the payout control board 951, the setting change process cannot be executed only by the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other. The setting change process is being executed.

Next, a setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 139(B) cooperate with each other will be described.

When the setting key 971 is operated while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error in the setting change mode in the setting change process described with reference to FIGS. 138(A) and 139(A), the setting change mode may be invalidated and the setting change mode may be temporarily stopped. Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again to restart the stopped setting change mode. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage at which the setting is stopped due to the error detection, or from the beginning of the setting change mode (the setting value=0 in the state where no setting value is selected).

The setting value may be changed by recording the history a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting is fixed and the fixed setting value are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511. When the history of set values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. Further, the recorded change history of the set value can be output. For example, the history of changes in the recorded set values may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

The base value measurement section may be changed when the set value is changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total out-ball number of the section whose base value is currently being measured is less than 52000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the game performance of the gaming machine is changed by the set value, by changing the section by changing the set value, it is possible to calculate a base value that does not mix different game performances, and grasp the transition of the base value due to the change of the set value. ..

Further, when the set value is changed, the section for measuring the base value may be continued without changing the section for measuring the base value. Although the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, it is also possible to design the base value so that it does not change significantly by changing the set value. This is because, in such a case, it is not necessary to change the base value calculation section by changing the set value.

If both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. With regard to the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971, it is less likely that the operation of the setting key 971 is erroneously performed in view of the operation method and the arrangement of the operating means, so the setting change mode is activated. Is considered to be the operator's intention. Further, in the setting change mode, since the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting change mode even if the RAM clear is desired. ..

On the other hand, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM clear may be performed without starting the setting change mode. This is because it is considered that the operator desires at least the RAM clear when both are operated. Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may not be activated and the RAM may not be cleared. This is because, from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the operator's intention is not clear.

In the RAM clear of the procedure (3) or (15) described above, the data of the game state is maintained, but the reserved storage of the special symbol may be erased. Where the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the determination result of the random number in the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved storage of the special symbol and newly perform the lottery.

On the other hand, the special symbol lottery (extraction of the random number per hit) is performed when the game ball is won at the starting opening, but the determination of the lottery result is performed at the start of the variable display game, so the condition after changing the set value It is only necessary to judge the random number value stored and stored. Therefore, you may maintain the reserved storage of special symbols.

Further, in the RAM clear of the procedure (3) or (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clear process in the setting change mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased (the game state data is also erased), and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, setting changes are made between the time the hall is closed and the next day it is opened, so erase the game state data (probability change state, time saving state, reserved storage of special and normal symbols, information about prize balls, etc.) This is because there is no need to maintain it without doing so.

[12-2. Production on a pachinko machine with a setting function]
[12-2-1. Special symbol and special electric accessory control processing]
Hereinafter, the details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described. First, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing. The special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed in the processing of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt processing. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 will be collectively referred to as a starting port. Further, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are collectively referred to simply as big winning openings. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, acceptance of the game ball into the starting opening, that is, with the start winning as an opportunity (start condition satisfied), a big hit for each start memory information (start information) where this start condition is satisfied A random number for determination is acquired, and it is determined whether or not this random number for large-scale determination coincides with the large-scale determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM (lottery means). Then, based on the result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state, and when the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (the predetermined winning condition is satisfied), it is normal. It shifts from the gaming state to the big hit gaming state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 140.

When the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won the special winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B is won in the special winning opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the game ball has won in the starting opening (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening is determined by the switch input processing (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt processing based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 or the second starting opening sensor 2511. It is performed based on the input information that is read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1311, when the game ball wins the starting opening (the result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting opening winning time process (step S116). In the starting mouth winning process, the starting mouth winning command transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting mouth is set, the random number for jackpot determination etc. is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, a special symbol The process for executing the prefetching effect is executed.

Then, the main control MPU1311 executes the corresponding process based on the special symbol/electric accessory operation number which is the game progress state variable in which the type of the branch process executed according to the progress of the game is designated (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control RAM and is updated in each branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branching process designated based on the value of the game progressing state variable stored in the game progressing state storage area, and the special branching and the special electric auditors product control are performed when the transitioning branching process is finished. The process ends. The value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, and thus is backed up in the main control side power-off process.

In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as a branch process, a special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), a special symbol variation process (step S132), a special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), Special symbol disengagement stop process (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop process (step S138), special winning opening before opening interval processing (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step) S144) or the special winning opening opening end interval processing (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the game ball B entering the starting opening, the process of starting the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device is performed.

In the special symbol changing process (step S132), the process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), based on the game ball entering the starting opening, it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been fixedly stopped causes the big hit game state.

In the special symbol disengagement stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and the process of notifying that effect is performed. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when the big hit game state is generated, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and the process of notifying that effect is performed.

In the special winning opening pre-opening interval process (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed. In the special winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it easy for a game ball to enter each special winning opening by opening the special winning opening is performed.

In the process for closing the special winning opening (step S144), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter each special winning opening by changing the state from the open state to the closed state is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is finished, a process of notifying the fact is performed.

[12-2-2. Special symbol fluctuation waiting processing]
Next, details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol variation waiting processing. In the special symbol variation waiting process, the variation display of the special symbol is executed in a state where it is not executed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparation for starting the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

The main control MPU1311 first determines whether or not the variation of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether the number of special symbol operation holding balls is not 0. Note that the number of special symbol operation holding balls is stored for each starting opening when a plurality of starting openings are provided. If the variation of the special symbol is not held (the result of step S420 is "no"), the variation display of the special symbol is not started, and this process is ended.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 sets a reserved ball number designating command as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol/flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed on the basis of a random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning at the starting opening.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as the lower order command data (step S458). Further, by acquiring the fluctuation type classification value from the fluctuation type classification area (step S460) and adding the fluctuation type classification value to the command value set in the process of step S452, the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation type Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the fluctuation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, the variable state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designating command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmitting process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol variation pattern setting processing.

The main control MPU1311 first acquires the special symbol operation holding ball number (step S530). The special symbol operation holding sphere number is stored in the special symbol operation holding sphere number buffer. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets a big hit flag from the big hit flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process of selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol operation holding ball number and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination processing (step S544). Then, the special symbol variation time data is searched for data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value (step S546).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The fluctuation type classification value acquired by the fluctuation type determination processing is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the variation time addition value data for a variation time addition value corresponding to the variation type type value (step S552). The variable time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo-repetitions. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the variation time addition value retrieved in the process of step S552 to the reference variation time value retrieved in the process of step S546 to obtain the final variation time (step S554). .. Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process ends.

[12-2-4. Variation pattern selection judgment processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The fluctuation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) the fluctuation information source table from the fluctuation information source address table. The fluctuation information source table, according to the game state, etc., hit (hit fluctuation selection information status table), out (defect fluctuation selection information status table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability) Table) and variation type (variation type determination data table) are table data for storing table information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the big hit has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the big hit value (step S350). When the big hit is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variable information number search process based on the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hitting variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the big hit variation selection information type table based on the obtained variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 has not won the big hit or the small hit (the result of step S350 is “no”), it is determined whether or not the reach is generated in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step). S372).

When the reach is not generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the deviation fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved balls (step). S376).

On the other hand, when the reach is generated in the variation display (the result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the reach variation selection information state table based on the state flag. (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the variation information number search process based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the process of step S360, step S378, or step S382 (step S388). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the fluctuation information number search process, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is acquired from the fluctuation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two stages by two types of random numbers, the variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, S378) and the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as XX system reach) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1. Further, from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally varied and displayed is selected. The method of lottery is not limited to two stages, and a method of lottery in three or more stages may be used, or a variation pattern may be directly selected by one variation pattern random number.

[12-3. Explanation of production in pachinko machine with setting function]
Hereinafter, the effect in the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described. Specifically, a setting suggesting effect that suggests the current setting will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the larger the number of game balls to be paid out with respect to the number of special lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability in the uncertain variation state (for example, setting 1:1/300, setting 2:1/290, setting 3:1/280, setting 4:1/270. , Setting 5: 1/250, setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play a game with the pachinko machine 1 set as high as possible, the desire to play the game is enhanced by the setting suggesting effect being installed.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a fluctuation pattern with one fluctuation pattern random number in the fluctuation pattern selection determination processing of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 executes the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311, the current gaming state (whether in a time saving state (a state in which time saving control is being executed) or a normal state other than the time saving state), and the result of the special lottery (winning the big hit Yes or No) and a variation pattern table according to When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a variation pattern random number, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number and distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, A fluctuation pattern is selected from the selected fluctuation pattern table. Further, if the result of the special lottery is out, further determine the reach occurrence, to obtain the random number for the fluctuation pattern, the random number for the fluctuation pattern acquired, and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table, Based on the above, the variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table.

FIG. 144(A) is an example of the variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out. FIG. 144(B) is an example of the variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. The fluctuation pattern table includes, for example, a fluctuation pattern type field, a fluctuation time field, a corresponding effect content field, and a fluctuation pattern determination random number allocation field. The fluctuation pattern type column stores information for specifying the type for identifying the fluctuation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information that specifies the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information specifying the effect content executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for fluctuation pattern determination stores the distribution for which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected for each setting. The distribution random number column for fluctuation pattern determination in the fluctuation pattern table (that is, the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144A and FIG. 149A described later) selected when the special lottery result is out of order is the time when the reach occurs. For each of the above and when the reach is not generated, the distribution in which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion production executed after temporary display of special lottery results]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A) will be described. First, the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 144 as well.

FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In the variation of the deviation variation pattern 20, after a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed after the SP reach 1 is executed is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the special lottery result is subsequently removed. A confirmation display indicating that is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the variation of the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, after displaying the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out after the SP reach 1 is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, A setting suggestion effect is executed, and thereafter, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

As described above, in the variation patterns 25 to 29, even if the temporary display is performed by performing the setting suggestion effect after performing the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order. The player can expect the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect after that and maintain the expectation. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is generated due to the deviation, even if the special lottery result is missed, it is possible to suppress the player's discouragement due to the result of the special lottery, and to enhance the uplifting feeling.

In the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 24, a temporary indication indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed after the SP reach 1 is executed is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Although the gasse effect that suggests the execution is executed, the confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing the setting suggestion effect itself.

The SP reach is a reach effect in which a high proportion is selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and a low proportion is selected when the result of the special lottery is out. In other words, there is a high expectation of a big hit for fluctuations in executing SP reach.

The effects that are executed in the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29 will be specifically described below. In addition to the contents described below, in each effect, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and/or display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are simultaneously executed. May be.

In the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29, the pre-reach effect is first executed. In the pre-reach effect, all the decorative patterns on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 change. Subsequently, in the out-of-range variation patterns 20 and 24-29, the normal reach effect is developed. In the normal reach effect, the decorative pattern in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in the reach state. Specifically, for example, among the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a changing state.

Then, in the deviation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, the SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half effect of the SP reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a rock-paper-scissors game is played. In the first half effect of the SP reach 1 in the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29, an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It should be noted that during SP reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed at a position smaller and closer to the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, as compared with the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

Then, in the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29, it develops to the latter half production of SP reach 1. In the second half effect of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called revival effect is executed, and at the start of the second half effect, for example, a voice of the main character such as "Still still!" is output from various speakers. On the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect in which the main character and the enemy character play a rock-paper-scissors game again is executed. In the latter half effect of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character again in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Then, the temporary display in which the special lottery result is out is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one combination of the decorative symbols in the detached state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are the same as the symbol stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is (A different pattern from the same symbol) is displayed in a manner that it is shaking with a small width.

Subsequently, after the provisional display in the deviation variation pattern 20, a finalized display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without any other effect. In the deviation variation pattern 24, the setting suggestion gadget effect is executed after the temporary display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the tentative display, and thereafter, the final liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the final display indicating that the special lottery result is out. In the final display, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the same combination of decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped state. In the provisional display and the confirmation display, the decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the central portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting suggestion gase effect in the deviation pattern 24, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect in which one main character discovers two enemy characters and follows the enemy character but cannot catch the enemy character is executed. Like the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 24 in FIG. 144(A), it is desirable that the distribution of variation patterns in which the setting suggestive gaze effect is executed is equal or approximately equal in all settings. This is because, if the distribution is not uniform, the setting suggestion gasse effect suggests the setting.

In addition, it is desirable that the proportion of the outlying variation pattern 24 in the total variation distribution executed by the SP reach 1 is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion gase effect frequently occurs when the SP reach 1 is developed, which may reduce the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 25 to 29, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one protagonist character finds two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy characters, and then three people play a rock-paper-scissors game. The effect is performed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 25, an effect in which all three players go out and become Aiko in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people is executed. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is set so as to be distributed only in the low setting (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 25 is an effect in which the low setting is confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 144(A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 has the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is When it occurs, the player may stop the game early. Therefore, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of other setting confirmation effects in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern. 25 itself may not be present.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 26, an effect in which all three of the scissors scramble to make Aiko in the rock-paper-scissors game is executed. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is set so as to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 26 is an effect in which the high setting is confirmed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 27, an effect in which all three play a par and become Aiko in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people is executed. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is determined so as to be distributed only in the even setting (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 27 is an effect in which the even setting is confirmed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 28, the effect that all three people put out different hands in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people is executed. In addition, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is determined so as to be distributed only in odd-numbered settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 28 is an effect in which the odd number setting is fixed.

In addition, for example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect by installing the above-described odd number setting fixed effect or even number setting fixed effect. ..

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest) in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 and settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, Probability change jackpot proportion of jackpot winning is high in the order of 2 (5 is the highest and 2 is the lowest), and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are set in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and the probability variation ratio in each setting are set so that the ratio of the total payout amount of the game balls to the winning number of the game balls to is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, the even number setting is higher than the odd number setting in that the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is high, but the probability of probability change is low, that is, although the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be small, The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in a single condominium from the first hit tends to be small. On the other hand, compared to the even setting, the odd number setting has a lower probability of winning the big hit in the normal state, but has a higher probability of probability change, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first hit tends to increase, but the first hit The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in a single condominium from is likely to increase. In such a case, a situation may occur in which one player prefers the odd-set payout tendency and another player prefers the odd-set payout tendency. The player's interest in the production increases. Further, the even-numbered setting may have a feature that the jackpot with a smaller number of rounds is more likely to be selected, instead of the jackpot winning probability in the normal state being higher than the odd-numbered setting.

In the deviation patterns 25 to 29 described above, the effects up to the start of the setting suggestion effect are the same, but the contents of the setting suggestion effect are different (the results of the rock-paper-scissors game with three players are different). In addition, it is desirable that the three-player rock-paper-scissors game production be used only in the deviation pattern 25 to 29. As a result, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion effect has started at the time when the three-player rock-paper-scissor game effect has started, and the feeling of uplifting can be further enhanced.

Note that, for example, the deviation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect for confirming the high setting is executed, but may be a variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the high setting is likely is executed. Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern 25 is distributed even in the low setting and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the effect in the deviation pattern 25 is produced. Is not an effect in which a high setting is determined, but an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect in which the high setting is confirmed is executed, a variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high as described above is executed may be set. The above is the same for the low setting final effect, the odd setting final effect, the even setting final effect, the highest setting final effect, and the like.

In addition, according to the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(B) (variation pattern table at the time of normal and jackpot winning), when the special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, except the hit variation pattern 34 in which the maximum setting is confirmed. The setting suggestion effect of is not executed. Further, the distribution of the variation patterns in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than that in the case where the special lottery result is out of alignment. As a result, the setting suggestion effect is an effect mainly executed when the special lottery result is off, and the player can obtain an expectation even when the special lottery result is off.

[12-5. Setting suggestion production using shortened variation]
The deviation pattern 30 will be described below with reference to FIG. 146 as well. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A).

In the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the shortening variation is executed. The shortened variation is, for example, a variation in which the variation time is shorter than other variation patterns, and after the variation of the decorative pattern is started on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, all the decorations are not developed into the reach state. It is a fluctuation that the design stops. In the normal variation, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbols stop in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortening variation, all the decorative symbols may be stopped at the same time.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, after performing a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is missed is performed. The description of the temporary display and the confirmation display is the same as the above description, and thus will be omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time that is different from the variation times of all the other variation patterns in which the shortened variation such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 is executed. In the example of FIG. 144(A), the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. .. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is defined so as to be distributed only in the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation pattern 30 is executed, the highest setting is confirmed.

The distribution of the out-of-range fluctuation pattern 30, which is a fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed and suggests the setting, is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns in which the shortened fluctuation is executed (for example, the other fluctuation pattern). Is less than or equal to 10% of the minimum distribution). Further, in each fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed, it is desirable that the execution time of the temporary display and the fixed display are the same and only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which other shortened fluctuations are executed is recognizable to the player (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). ..

As a result, at the time when the shortened fluctuation is executed, the player assumes the fluctuation time such as the deviation fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 that are often distributed, but when the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is executed, the fluctuation time is equal to the assumed fluctuation time. You can recognize that they are different, and enjoy the performance in which the highest setting is finalized. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144(A), since the variation pattern including the shortening variation is selected only when there is no reach, the player loses his/her expectation when the shortening variation is executed, and is interested in the shortening variation. I can't have it anymore. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortening variation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortening variation that is selected only when there is no reach, and suppresses the decline in interest. can do.

Further, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the contents displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are the same, but only the shortening variation time is different. This allows the player to concentrate on the effect so as not to miss the highest setting confirmation effect.

The deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the highest setting is determined and the shortening variation is executed. However, for each setting other than the highest setting, the variation is determined and the shortening variation is executed. There may be patterns. In this case, for example, the variation time of each variation pattern is preferably different from the variation time of another deviation variation pattern in which the shortened variation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion production executed before temporary display of special lottery results]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are set so that they are distributed only in the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 flows in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time when the variation starts. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

In the deviation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed is displayed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is missed is displayed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the special movie 1 is finished, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed.

The deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are different from the deviation variation patterns 25 to 30 and the like, and the setting suggestion effect is started before the tentative display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the variation starts). As a result, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling waiting for the notification of the big hit lottery result in the state where the highest setting is confirmed. Further, particularly when the display time of the special movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and thus the player. Can feel a sense of superiority to the other player, and it becomes easier for the hall to appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[12-7. Setting suggestion production that jackpot winning or high setting is confirmed]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is set to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation pattern 32 is executed, the highest setting is confirmed.

In the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 flows in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time when the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that is generated only by the deviation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

In the deviation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is displayed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed. In the winning variation pattern 35, after the special movie 2 is finished, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed.

Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, one of the high setting or the big hit in the fluctuation is determined. In other words, if the special lottery result is missed after the occurrence of the special movie 2, the high setting is confirmed, so that the player can suppress the disappointment that the special lottery result is missed, and eventually the high setting. A feeling of elation can be obtained by confirming that.

In addition, particularly when the display time of the special movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel superiority to other players, and the special movie 2 is further generated. If the result of the special lottery is off, it becomes easier for the hole to appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[12-8. Setting suggestion production in time saving state]
Hereinafter, the variation pattern selected when the gaming state is in the shortened state will be described. FIG. 149(A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. FIG. 149(B) is an example of the variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 2 at the time of deviation without reach. The fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 2 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the variation patterns are the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a shorter time, The number of payouts of game balls may increase, which may lead to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the more the variation patterns having a long variation time are distributed. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the number of payouts of game balls by the big hit per unit time in each setting. it can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the outlying variation pattern 3 having a long variation time among the variation patterns including the shortened variation. Therefore, the outlying variation pattern 3 also functions as a variation pattern suggesting a high setting. You can

Similarly, even when the reach-out occurs, the higher the setting, the greater the distribution of the out-of-range variation pattern 11 having a long variation time and the smaller the distribution of the out-of-range variation pattern 12 having a short variation time. Further, also at the time of winning the big hit, similarly, the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the hit variation pattern 2 having a long fluctuation time and the smaller the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 3 having a short fluctuation time.

As described above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the variation patterns are the same in all the settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the more game balls are shot before the jackpot is won. For example, if the lower the setting, the greater the distribution of fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times, and the smaller the selection rate of fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times, the more each player will be to stop the firing of game balls during fluctuation. It is possible to equalize the number of game balls fired per unit time in the setting.

Note that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing at which the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated to be executed only during the setting suggestion effect. Further, particularly in the setting suggesting effect in which the high setting or the highest setting is determined, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output or a predetermined light emitting effect, which is executed only by the setting suggesting effect, be executed.

In addition, it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the high setting or the maximum setting is fixed or the effect suggesting that the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of the other variation patterns. If the variation pattern is highly distributed, the player loses his/her expectation unless the high setting suggestion effect or the highest setting suggestion effect is executed, even though the player is playing for a short game time. This is because there is a risk of canceling.

Further, it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the effect that suggests that the low setting or the minimum setting is confirmed or is highly likely to be executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of the other variation patterns. This is because if the variation patterns are highly distributed, the low setting suggestion effect and the minimum setting suggestion effect are frequently executed, and the player may lose his/her expectation and eventually stop the game early.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting group such as the high setting, the low setting, the highest setting, the odd number setting, and the even setting has been described, the setting group in the setting suggesting effect is not limited to these. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for an arbitrary group of one or more settings. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be set as low settings, settings 3 and 4 may be set as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 may be set as high settings, or a group including only settings 5 may be present.

[12-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 obtains the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974, but in the following description, The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

FIG. 150A shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner such that it cannot be opened without being destroyed once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 150B shows a state in which the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 150A accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. In the example shown in FIG. 150B, a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310 in addition to the main control MPU 1311 and a driver circuit (not shown). The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310 but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the hole 954A is not provided in the main control board box 1320.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954, setting key 971) that trigger RAM clearing are provided in the main control board box 1320. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 in which the data is erased differs when the RAM clear switch 954 alone is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

The setting board 970 is provided in the vicinity of the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected to each other directly with a connector or with an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of various switches 971, 972, 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the port of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting indicator 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, the authentication code for each manufacturer of the pachinko machine is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out and verifies the authentication code set on the setting board 970. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 cannot start the game. That is, although the game ball can be shot toward the game area 5a, the prize ball is not paid out even if the prize is won, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine model, or may be set for each pachinko machine serial number. The authentication code can be set by, for example, setting the authentication code by a DIP switch, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, a pattern short-circuit provided on the setting board 970 or a logic circuit (for example, a logic circuit in which the authentication code is set). A small capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, the setting control board 970 and the dummy board 979 output different signals to the main control board 1310 so that the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. To do. Specifically, the setting substrate 970 outputs +5V, and the dummy substrate 979 outputs 0V (ground level). The signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines which board is connected by the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (each model), it is possible to prevent the setting board 970 from being erroneously mounted on the main control board box 1320. Further, by setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, it is possible to prevent unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970.

FIG. 150C shows a state where the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG.

As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a game performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine related to prize balls that the player obtains such as the big hit probability in the special symbol variable display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, conventional pachinko machines that do not have a setting function are sufficient, and some halls do not require a setting function. Therefore, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine needs to design and produce both the pachinko machine that does not have the setting function and the pachinko machine that has the setting function. It is required to efficiently design and produce pachinko machines.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 having no setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the setting board 970 is mounted. To Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between the pachinko machine having no setting function and the pachinko machine having the setting function.

Although the dummy substrate 979 does not have devices such as the setting key 971 and the setting display 974 mounted on the setting substrate 970 mounted thereon, it may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, the pattern for mounting the device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, but the device is not mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 does not have to be a printed board, but may be a member (for example, a unit formed of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970.

Further, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is not open or ground in the dummy board 979, but is terminated by the dummy resistor. Good. This can prevent the driver circuit from being damaged due to overcurrent. When the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the hole 971A is not provided in the main control board box 1320. A small door that can move so as to close the hole 971A is provided in the main control board box 1320 so that it can be operated from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and cannot be operated from the outside. The main control board box 1320 may be shared by the non-pachinko machine, the pachinko machine having a setting function, and the pachinko machine 1320.

An authentication code for authentication by the main control board 1310 may be set on the dummy board 979 described later. Further, the dummy board 979 does not need to be authenticated by the main control board 1310, and the authentication code may not be set. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With the setting change switch 972 and with the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and is rotated to the setting position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed). Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without the setting change switch 972 and with the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

(4) Without the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

151 and 152 are diagrams showing another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

The mounting examples shown in FIGS. 151 and 152 differ from the mounting example shown in FIG. 150 in that a small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320.

FIG. 151A shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner so that the main control board box 1320 cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, as described above. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. Holes 976A are provided for operating 976.

The hole 976A is normally covered with the small door 1321. The small door 1321 is provided with a key unit 1322. By inserting a key 975 into the key hole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed. The mode switch 976 can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 152A, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the bar 1323 is at the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, the bar 1323 is inserted into the seat 1324, and the bar 1323 and the seat 1324 are inserted. Engage with and the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152(B), when the key 975 is inserted into the key hole and is rotated, the bar 1323 retracts from the maximum protruding position, and the engagement between the bar 1323 and the seat 1324 is released. With the hinge 1325 as an axis, the small door 1321 can be opened. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152(B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing still another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on a back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, the back cover 980 is opened from the main body frame base 600 by inserting and operating the key 975 in the keyhole of the key unit 1322, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It will be possible.

That is, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is accommodated in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back surface side. The setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151(C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner such that it cannot be opened without being destroyed once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A is provided for operating the. The main control board box 1320 accommodates a main control board 1310 and a setting board 970. On the main control board 1310, a main control MPU, a driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted. The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310 but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the hole 954A is not provided in the main control board box 1320.

The setting board 970 is provided in the vicinity of the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected to each other directly with a connector or with an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. Details of setting change process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 differs from the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (steps S17 and S30). The same steps as those in the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 101 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, and sets the RAM 1312 to be writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. The determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

The RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, it is a normal RAM clear operation, so the process proceeds to step S30 to initialize a predetermined area of the internal RAM 1312. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the setting change mode is entered. That is, since it is necessary to operate the two switches and the power switch to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of accidentally starting the setting change mode.

In the setting change mode, first, the set value is displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data to be displayed on the setting display 974. Then, the security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 in the setting change mode during a game, and fraudulent acts are possible. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the setting change mode is entered during business hours.

The security signal is output from the start of the setting change mode to the predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, regardless of whether the security signal is output for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode or between the start and the end of the setting change mode. You may output. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period in which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation is performed depending on whether or not the setting change switch 972 is operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes the setting value in the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured by a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the setting value is changed by one step. When the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned to the right once, the set value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed set value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

Then, it is determined whether to end the setting change mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is ended and the process proceeds to step S30. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by an operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

In the above-described process, after the setting change mode ends, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22), the power failure flag is not set, and the check is performed. If the thumbs do not match, a predetermined area of the internal RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, the data of the set value among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312, the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128), the game state (for example, the probability change state, Time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on prize balls) is left, and other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24. The data on the gaming state may be erased without remaining. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation is the same as the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if the operation of ending the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62, and the setting change operation is further detected.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected in step S17, the set value data and the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) are backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 in step S30. ), the other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 and determines whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). ..

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data (other than the base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area. Then (step S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and uses the checksum calculated at the previous power-off to calculate the check calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312. The sum and the checksum stored in step S48 are compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 backs up to the work area. The stored data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are power failure flag abnormalities that have not been set (step S20), RAM abnormalities where the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and abnormalities in the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) (For example, probability change state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information regarding prize balls), data other than that is cleared, and area 13128 for base calculation (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack) (Including the area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of the base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128. The entire RAM area including may be cleared. If all RAM areas are cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, if the memory configuration is such that the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed, the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation Only initialize it. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data), for base calculation. Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value for each RAM clear operation, and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the setting value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

As the processing after step S28, either of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence/absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is shut off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, but is executed in the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (FIGS. 155 and 156). However, the setting confirmation process is executed in the initialization process. You may execute. By executing the setting confirmation processing in the initialization processing, the setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and the setting value confirmation by the careless operation during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

In this case, an operation unit (for example, a push button switch) for confirming the setting is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the operation unit for confirming the setting), and when the power is turned on. When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, data for reading the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and displaying it on the setting display unit 974 is generated, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 974. Good to do. Also in this case, it is preferable to output the security signal along with the display of the set value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear processing even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process and executes the RAM clearing process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (end of the setting change mode). It can be said that during the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 is controlled to store the execution of the RAM clear processing. On the other hand, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described above in detail. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may be cleared together with this. Further, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 does not have to be cleared. Further, whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit may be switched by an operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout controller 952 are cleared, and the setting key 971 is turned on, When the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout controller 952 is not cleared. In this way, by changing the operation method, it is possible to execute a process in which a part of the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared.

When clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952, the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 differs from the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. May occur. That is, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power with the setting key 971 being turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, it immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the condition (operation), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

Further, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, but also in the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while changing the set value. The RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared when the power is turned on. That is, the payout control unit 952 does not clear the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, but the payout control unit 952 detects the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 operates. It is determined whether or not it is operated, and whether or not the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared is determined. Providing a RAM clear switch on the payout control board 951 has the effect of supporting various models without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. Details of setting confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is compared with the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23, and a base calculation process (step S801) is provided in place of the accessory ratio calculation area update process of step S81, and the role of step S89 is provided. The material ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. Further, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating ratio of the condition device) is added. The same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 23 and 104 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the main control program to first set RBS (register bank selection flag) in the program status word to 1 and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74), a timer update process (step S76), a random number update process 1 (step S78), and a prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a game value to the region corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation region 13128 (of the main control internal RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) to calculate the base value (step S801, see FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but in order to surely execute each timer interruption, it is preferable to execute the base calculation process in an earlier order. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU1311 is a frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process ( Step S88) is executed.

Then, the setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying the set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation processing, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 974 by the employee of the hall performing a predetermined operation. Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Subsequently, an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

In the setting confirmation processing, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting confirmation operation is being performed (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated. When the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers the transition to the setting change mode (step S17 in FIG. 154), and when it is operated, it becomes a setting confirmation operation and the current setting can be displayed.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, since the setting key 971 has been returned to the normal position, data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062).

As the setting display condition, it is determined whether the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 by the output of the frame opening switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even when the outer frame 2 is closed, it is estimated that some abnormality (failure or cheating) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the setting is performed. It is better not to display. Further, since the setting indicator 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting indicator 974 cannot be viewed unless the outer frame 2 is open, and it is not necessary to display the setting.

The set value may be displayed at any time during operation of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, a setting display condition that allows display at a specific time may be provided. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time from power-on (or CPU initial setting in step S28) and display the set value until the timer expires.

In addition, setting display conditions may be provided that enable setting values to be displayed in a specific game state. For example, the setting display condition cannot be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game. That is, the setting display condition is set so that the set value can be displayed during the period other than during the special symbol variation and the big hit. Note that the set value may not be displayed in a game state other than the above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game, the set value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the set display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to confirm the setting during the game, which is a forerunner of fraudulent activity. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours.

The security signal may be output for a predetermined time after the start of displaying the set value, during the time between the start and the end of displaying the set value, or during the predetermined period after the start of displaying the set value for the predetermined period. Good. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the display of the set value, the period in which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

In the illustrated setting confirmation processing, the security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied, but even when the setting display condition is not satisfied, the security signal is transmitted when the setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected. Good.

Then, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data to be displayed on the setting display 974.

If the setting display conditions are not met, the conditions are checked until the setting display conditions are met, but it may not be possible to get out of the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be terminated. For example, after it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, when the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display ends. And the set value is displayed. If the setting condition is not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be immediately ended without repeating the confirmation of the setting condition.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, the new special symbol variation display is not started during the display of the set value, and the new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, the set value can be confirmed without disturbing other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are both used, the setting value is preferentially displayed during setting confirmation, so the base value is calculated but the base value is not displayed. In a game state in which a large number of prize balls are paid out in a short time, it may be desired to confirm the change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without disturbing the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Security signal output for setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 157 is a timing diagram of the security signal output in accordance with the setting change and the setting confirmation.

As described above, the security signal is output during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation (S61 of FIG. 154, S8063 of FIG. 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than or equal to the time that the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or may be several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output during the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode.

Also, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(B), the security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clearing process executed in accordance with the setting change mode.

At the time of confirming the setting, as shown in FIG. 157(C), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of confirming the setting. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than or equal to the time that the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or may be several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output during the period from the start to the end of the setting confirmation (the period during which the set value is displayed), instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation.

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 157(D), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) from the error detection. When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157(E), the security signal is output for a predetermined time after the error is detected. That is, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation and the security signal caused by the error detection are continuously output for more than the predetermined time (T seconds) (the predetermined time from the error detection). Even if an error is detected during the setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal does not have to be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during the output of the security signal, the security signal resulting from the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error in the setting change mode, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation does not overlap with the security signal caused by the error detection. That is, even if an error occurs in the setting change mode, the security signal output time does not extend, but if an error occurs during setting confirmation, the security signal output time extends.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another example of the setting confirmation process will be described. In the above description, the example in which the setting confirmation process is performed in the timer interrupt process in the peripheral control unit steady process has been mainly described, but in the following, the setting confirmation process is performed in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. An example will be described.

Specifically, for example, if the setting key is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process. The details of the process will be described below. Note that the timer interrupt process executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is assumed to be the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt process that does not include the setting confirmation process in step S802).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing another example of the initialization process. Differences from FIG. 154 will be described. When determining in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S18). S29).

When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to the setting confirmation processing in step S807, and then proceeds to step S20. The setting confirmation process in step S807 will be described later. When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S29: No), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to step S20.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation processing in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be described. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting display condition is satisfied without performing the process of step S8061 (step S8062). When determining that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the setting value (step S8064). When determining that the setting display condition is not satisfied (step S8062: No), the main control MPU 1311 executes the process of step S8062 again.

Following the processing of step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is off (step S8071). When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S8071: No), the main control MPU 1311 executes the determination of step S8071 again after a predetermined time elapses. When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 hides the setting value (step S8075), and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation, the number of pending memories managed by the main control board 1310 and the remaining variation time in the special symbol are stored as they are. After that, when the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 being in the ON state), after the setting confirmation process is completed (the setting is performed without turning the power off). After returning the key 971 to the initial position), the special symbol variation restarts. At this time, for example, the effect (effect using the display device, effect using the lamp, sound effect using the speaker, effect using the movable body, etc.) that has been executed together with the special symbol change is the special symbol. No change will take place after the change resumes.

Moreover, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is restarted after the setting confirmation process, the special symbol change is performed. The presentation that was being executed may be restarted. For example, the suspended effect using the display device, the lamp, and the speaker is restarted. Further, regarding the effect using the movable body, for example, after the movable body is returned to the initial position when the special symbol variation is restarted or when the power is turned on, the movable body is operated in the effect pattern of the effect. If so, the movable body is operated according to the effect pattern.

In other words, when the movable body moves to the setting confirmation state when it is not in the initial position, it is returned to the initial position once when the power is turned on or when the setting confirmation processing is completed, and then based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. If the determined effect includes an effect of moving (moving) the movable body, the movable body may be moved (moved). If the movable body moves (moves) to the setting confirmation state, the operation pattern of the movement (movement) may not be executed, or the movable body may be returned to the initial position once. The movable body may be operated as long as the pattern can be operated even from the bottom.

Moreover, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is restarted after the setting confirmation process, the special symbol change is performed. Among the effects that were being executed together with the effect using the display device, the effect using the lamp, and the sound effect using the speaker are restarted, the movable body is moved to the initial position after the restart of the special symbol fluctuation or when the power is turned on. It is not necessary to perform the returning and the effect using the movable body.

Moreover, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is restarted after the setting confirmation process is finished, the main liquid crystal display device. The variation of the decorative pattern displayed in 1600 may be restarted (the effect originally planned to be resumed), or until the symbol is fixed in the variation of the decorative symbol (or until the swing fluctuation immediately before the symbol is fixed). ) The decorative pattern may be made to be transparent at high speed, or the decorative pattern may be hidden until the symbol is determined (or until the swing fluctuation immediately before the symbol is determined). Further, at the time of design determination, for example, a combination of decorative designs planned before the power is turned off is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, in this case, at the end of the special symbol fluctuation after resumption, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols, a combination of decorative symbols displayed at the initial power-on, or a special decorative symbol not displayed during normal special symbol fluctuation The combination (for example, “XXX” or the like) may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the change of the special symbol, the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, and when the setting confirmation process ends and returns to the normal state, the setting key 971 is in the off state. The same initial operation (for example, a predetermined operation of the movable body, an operation of confirming a predetermined light emission of the LED, or the like) similar to that when the power is turned on (that is, when the power is normally started) may be performed. (You may make it restart the above-mentioned production etc. after performing this initial operation).

Further, when the pre-reading effect is being performed during the change of the special symbol, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and when the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is finished. When resuming the symbol variation, the prefetch effect, and the prefetch effect for the special symbol variation that was held immediately before turning off the power is not executed (specifically, for example, it is performed before turning off the power source). The special zone that was displayed during the change of the special symbol that was being displayed (for example, a special stage that shows the player that the expectation of a big hit is high across multiple changes, from rival horse production to horse racing production described later. Evolving zone (a special zone where the horse racing performance is set to have a high degree of expectation (for example, a relatively high expectation compared to the dialogue production described later)) Waiting display and the special zone The display effect in the zone is erased, or if the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, it is returned to normal white). However, the pre-reading effect may be executed for the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning after the setting confirmation process is completed.

Further, when the pre-reading effect is being performed during the change of the special symbol, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and when the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is finished. At the time of resumption of the symbol change, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol change is stopped (specifically, for example, the special zone displayed during the change of the special symbol that was performed before the power was turned off). The display on standby or the display effect in the special zone is erased, or if the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, it is returned to normal white). The look-ahead effect may be restarted from the special symbol change (the erased display may be returned to the original, or if the effect pattern is to promote the look-ahead effect at the start of the change, it may be restored in the display mode after promotion. Good). In this case, the pre-reading effect executed from the next special symbol variation is restarted as if the pre-reading effect during the special symbol variation was not stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the pre-reading effect that was scheduled to be executed after the next special symbol change is executed. Further, a new look-ahead effect pattern may be set, and the effect of the new look-ahead pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion production]
Hereinafter, an example of processing in which execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described. In the following description, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of the settings 1 to 6 in the normal state are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively. It is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of setting 1 to setting 6 at time are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. In addition, it is assumed that the probability change rate at the time of jackpot winning is 50%.

[12-14-1. Variation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the fluctuation pattern table. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. In the description of FIG. 142 and the like, the example in which the variation pattern table exists for each winning type of the special lottery result has been described, but in the example of FIG. 160, the variation pattern for each winning type of the special lottery result in one variation pattern table. Is defined. Also, in the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common variation pattern table is used in all settings.

The variation pattern table of FIG. 160 shows correspondences between the winning type of the special lottery result, the variation pattern identifier, the outline of the effect of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, information on the variation pattern of each special lottery result is stored in one variation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the variation pattern corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the variation pattern table. Note that, as in the example of FIG. 144, the variation time of each variation pattern may be defined in the variation pattern table.

In addition, the movie reach described in the summary column is a reach production that is highly selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and extremely low when the result of the special lottery is out. Is. In other words, there is a high expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation that movie reach is executed. Also, when a movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In addition, in the summary column, when the winning type is “out”, the “+1 symbol” means that the decorative symbol that has changed to the end after the decorative symbol stops in the reach state is in the reach state. It shows that it stops after passing one decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, after the reach state is reached with the decorative pattern “7”, the decorative pattern that has been changed to the end stops at “8”. When the winning type is "big hit", "+1 symbol" means that the decorative symbol stops in the reach state, and then the decorative symbol that fluctuates to the end passes once through the decorative symbol in the reach state and then temporarily stops. After the appearance, the decoration pattern is stopped as the same as the reach state decoration pattern. Specifically, for example, after the reach is reached with the decorative design "7", it seems that the decorative design that has fluctuated to the end is temporarily stopped at "8", and then the decorative design is stopped at "7". And notify the big hit.

In the summary column in the example of FIG. 161, “+1 symbol” is selected only when the winning type is “big hit (non-probable change)” of the big hits, but when “big hit (probable change)” Only may be selected, or may be selected in the case of "big hit (non-probable change)" and "big hit (probable change)". Further, the “+1 symbol” may be selected only when the winning type is “out”.

Further, “+pseudo 1” and “+pseudo 2” described in the outline column indicate that two consecutive pseudo continuous effects and three consecutive pseudo continuous effects are respectively executed. Pseudo continuous effect is an effect to perform the operation of changing the decorative design and ending the variation of the decorative design multiple times during one fluctuation of the first special design display or the second special design display. .. “Ending the variation of the decorative design” means, for example, a mode in which a part or the whole of the decorative design is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation of the decorative design is once finished, and the decorative design. Partly, the pseudo-relational pattern (the pattern in which the pseudo-relation is determined if this symbol is stopped) is stopped, and the like. In addition, a pseudo continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N continuous pseudo continuous effects, and the M-th variation of the decorative pattern in the N continuous pseudo continuous effects (M is 1 or more N The following natural number) is referred to as the M-th consecutive pseudo continuous effect. In addition, while the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is changing once, while actually suggesting to the player that the action may be performed again, the action is actually performed again. The effect that is not performed is called “pseudo-gase effect”. Further, hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect is also simply referred to as “pseudo continuous effect”.

Pseudo continuous production occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative design and ending the variation of the decorative design is performed again during one change of the first special design display or the second special design display. When it is determined that the peripheral control MPU, at least one of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design may stop the pseudo continuous design. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops a character such as "continue!" in the middle decorative pattern as a pseudo continuous pattern. Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd numbers or even numbers and no reach is generated) may be used as the pseudo continuous symbol. The pseudo gasse effect may be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is “normal fluctuation” or the like. Further, for example, even in a variation pattern in which “+pseudo 1” is executed, a pseudo gasse effect that suggests the occurrence of a third pseudo-pseudo in “+pseudo 2” may be executed.

[12-14-2. Final reserved color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored in the peripheral main control ROM, for example. The final hold color table is, for example, the display color of the hold display at the end of the change for each change pattern (the winning type of the special lottery result, the change pattern identifier, and the outline of the effect of the change pattern) (hereinafter, the final hold color. (Also referred to as the selection rate).

It should be noted that the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes a reservation display area that indicates the number of the first special random numbers and the second special random numbers that are being held. In the startup mouth winning time process of step S116 of FIG. 142, a reservation number designation command for designating the number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU displays, in the hold display area, the hold number indicated by the hold number designation command.

Specifically, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (the starting condition is satisfied), the number of holdings (holding storage number) specified by the holding number designation command is increased. , And displays one additional hold display in the hold display area. On the other hand, when the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold number (hold storage number) specified by the hold number designation command decreases. , The hold display in the hold display area is erased.

Note that there may be a plurality of display modes in the hold display. For example, as the plurality of display modes, there is a display mode of pending display in a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow). Hereinafter, it is assumed that the expected jackpots of the special lottery results corresponding to the pending display become higher in the order of the pending display colors of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow. Particularly in the example of FIG. 161, the iridescent hold display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. In addition, the peripheral control MPU responds to the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display during the display period from displaying the hold display in the hold display area to deleting the hold display, for example. It is possible to execute a pending announcement effect that suggests a big hit expectation degree for a variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special symbols).

Further, in the present embodiment, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute the hold change effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes. In addition, the hold change effect and the hold notice effect during the display period of the hold display and before the start of the variation corresponding to the hold is also referred to as a hold prefetch effect.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a pending notice table (not shown) that defines the timing of changing the display mode of the pending display. Specifically, for example, the pending notice table defines, for each final pending color, the timing of changing the displaying mode of the pending display and the displaying mode (display color) of the pending display at the time of winning and at each changing timing. The start time, the change time, and the end time of the special symbol change after the winning prize and before the special symbol change corresponding to the prize are examples of the change timing.

The display mode of the hold display at each change timing is preferably a hold color having a jackpot expectation degree equal to or lower than the jackpot expectation degree of the final hold color. Further, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the hold display is not demoted at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue hold display does not change to the white hold display). There may be a different pending notice table for each number of pending memories at the time of winning.

Note that, for example, at the start of the special symbol fluctuation that was suspended before the pending display, it is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the pending display described above. Also, for example, during the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the pending display. The timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

The prefetch effect including the hold prefetch effect is executed based on the predetermination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the predetermination process performed in the starting mouth winning time process of step S116 of FIG. 142. It

Hereinafter, the preliminary determination process in the starting mouth winning process for the first special symbol will be described. Since the same applies to the preliminary determination process in the starting mouth winning process for the second special symbol, only the first special symbol will be described here. In the pre-determination process, the main control MPU 1311 compares the pre-determination table (not shown) with the special random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number to determine whether or not to be a big hit. The type of big hit, if not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified.

Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, whether the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Depending on the type of the game effect to be executed), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the value of the reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the predetermination command. For example, in the production pre-judgment process for the first special symbol, set the first special symbol pre-judgment command according to the specified pre-judgment information, the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first reserved memory number. ..

Then, by sending a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the starting opening in which the start winning is generated, a special symbol based on the generated starting winning. Whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or is executed. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the pre-determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be performed before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final retained color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retained color is determined by the final retained color table of FIG. 161. Is an example of a table showing FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 in the same case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 in the same case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the higher-ranked jackpot expectation hold display. In addition, the higher the expectation of jackpot of each color, the higher the setting. Note that these appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probability of each setting described above, and regarding the final reserved color table, the final reserved color table of FIG. 161 is used in all settings. It is supposed to be.

The peripheral control ROM may hold a final reserved color table that is different for each setting. In this case, for example, in the display mode of the same hold display, the selection ratio of the last hold color table of the last hold color is set such that the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. As a result, for example, when a big hit is won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red reserved display, the degree of expectation for the higher setting is also increased, so that the player can obtain a feeling of uplifting.

In addition, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white that is selected most, for the display mode of the same hold display, the final hold color of the final hold color table is set so that the lower the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation degree becomes. A selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation in the case where the hold display mode is red is 50% in the setting 1 with the low setting, and 30 in the setting 6 with the high setting. Set to be%). As a result, for example, even if you do not win the big hit in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red hold display, the expectation for the high setting is high, so you can suppress the discouragement of the player and continue the game. Can be promoted.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than the white color that is most selected, for the display mode of the same hold display, the final hold color of the final hold color table is set so that the jackpot expectation is almost common in all settings. The selection rate may be set. Thereby, for example, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting from the combination of the final holding color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the expectation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the hold display. Further, for example, in the case where the big symbol is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the display mode of red, it is possible to prevent the possibility that the low setting is increased from occurring.

[12-14-3. Notice production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of the notice production table. The notice production table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example. The notice production table holds, for example, the selection rate of notice production for each variation pattern (specified by the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the outline of the production of the variation pattern).

In the example of FIG. 165, the notice effect includes a dialogue effect, a weather change effect, and a rival horse effect. The dialogue production is, for example, a dialogue in which a predetermined character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the variation and says a dialogue. The weather change effect is, for example, an effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes in the change. The rival horse effect is an effect in which a rival horse of a horse brought up by the main character appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the variation.

It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect using the notice effect, and the notice effect table stores the selection rate of each notice effect depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 165, “without set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and “with set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the advance notice effect to be executed based on the variation pattern and the selection rate of the advance notice effect table.

In each notice production in each variation pattern of the notice production table, it is desirable that the selection rate without the setting suggestion is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with the setting suggestion. If the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion effect frequently occurs. This is because, if the frequency of occurrence of the setting suggesting effect that suggests the high setting is low in this state, the player is likely to stop the game in a short time. In other words, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 which is set to a low level is significantly reduced, which may impose an excessive burden on the hall. On the contrary, for example, when the frequency of the setting suggesting effect suggesting the high setting is high, the number of players who speculate that the setting of the other pachinko machines 1 in the hall is low increases and the other pachinko machines 1 operate. There is a risk that the rate will drop and the hall will be overloaded.

Note that the selection rate of the variation patterns in the variation pattern table is determined so that the jackpot expectation degree increases as the number of pseudo consecutive times increases, but, for example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestive effect does not change substantially depending on the number of pseudo consecutive times. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table is determined. That is, for example, with respect to the variation patterns whose outlines are “SP reach”, “SP reach+pseudo 1”, and “SP reach+pseudo 2”, the pseudo setting suggestion effect is set so that the appearance rates of the setting suggestion effect are substantially the same. The selection rate of whether or not to execute is determined. As a result, for a variation pattern with a small number of pseudo-repetitions, although the jackpot expectation is low, the occurrence rate of the setting suggestive effect is not low compared to a variation pattern with a large number of pseudo-repetitions, so that the player has a small number of pseudo-repetitions. It is possible to be interested in the fluctuation of a small fluctuation pattern.

Further, the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher as the number of pseudo repetitions increases, or as the number of pseudo repetitions decreases, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is high. In addition, when the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo-repetitions is decreased, the above-described problem may occur. Also, it is preferable to set the numerical values to be substantially equal (specifically, for example, if there is a dialogue effect set when the variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of leaving, 15/256, and if there is a dialogue effect set when the variation pattern 6 is selected, 16/256, etc.).

Also, a variation pattern with a high jackpot expectation degree (or an effect that is not a variation pattern with a high jackpot expectation degree, but has a relatively high expectation degree of the produced effect (for example, an effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is a predetermined value or more) ), the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be determined in the notice effect table so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher. Specifically, for example, in order of “normal fluctuation”, fluctuation including “normal reach”, fluctuation including “SP reach”, and fluctuation including “movie reach”, the appearance rate of the setting suggestive effect becomes high, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined.

Also, in the example of FIG. 165, setting suggestive effect may occur in all the notice effects (speech effect, weather change effect, and rival horse effect). May exist.

Further, if the outline of the variation pattern is the same, if the special lottery result is a big hit without a certainty change, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than if the special lottery result is a big hit with a certainty change, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined. As a result, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased when the big hit without probability change is won, and it is possible to reduce the player's discouragement that the probability change is not given. In the above example, the three types of notice effects, that is, the line effect, the weather change effect, and the rival horse effect have been described, but needless to say, the number is not limited to three.

[12-14-4. Dialogue production]
Hereinafter, of the notice productions, the details of the dialogue productions will be described. If the peripheral control MPU selects the line effect without the setting suggestion effect as the notice effect, the character A appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the change. , "What day is it today?" is displayed as the dialogue of character A. Then, the peripheral control MPU causes the character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the display of the character A's dialogue, and the character B's dialogue is "Come...". Is displayed. Note that, for example, the dialogues of the character A and the character B may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit of the variation.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU selects the dialogue of the character B (the dialogue suggesting the setting) from the dialogue production table described later when the dialogue production with the setting suggestion production is selected as the notice production. The peripheral control MPU causes the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to display, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change (for example, after 2 seconds, that is, the same timing as the timing when the character A appears in the case without the above setting suggestive effect). The character A appears and the dialogue of the character A is displayed as "what day is it today?" For example, the peripheral control MPU causes the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to display the character B after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the display of the character A's words, and displays the selected character B's words. In addition, the dialogue of the character A may be a dialogue that directly expresses a set value such as "Do you know the setting of this stand today?"

FIG. 166 is an example of a dialogue production table. The speech production table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example. The dialogue production table holds the production type of dialogue production and the selection rate of the dialogue contents of character B for each setting. In addition, the effect type includes “a pattern that is halfway together” and “a pattern that suddenly branches”, and there is a “Kamonane” dialogue and a “determined dialogue” for each of the two patterns. ..

Each of the dialogues belonging to the "halfway together pattern" includes the same dialogue halfway and then branches to a different dialogue. In the example of FIG. 166, all the dialogues that belong to the “halfway together pattern” start with “Cha...” and then branch to different dialogues. On the other hand, dialogues that belong to the "suddenly branched pattern" branch to different dialogues from the beginning. In addition, it is desirable that the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the “halfway together pattern” is higher than the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the “suddenly branched pattern”. This is to pull expectations.

The dialogue belonging to "Kamone" is a dialogue that suggests the current setting but does not announce the setting definitely. For example, “But it feels like it was an even number of days...” is a line of “Kamone system” that suggests an even number setting. "But I feel like it was an even number of days..." is a dialogue in the "Kamone" series, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even in odd settings. However, the selection rate of the dialogue in the odd setting is sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the dialogue in the even setting. Similarly, with respect to the dialogues of other "Kanene", the selection rate of the dialogue in the setting suggested by the dialogue is sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the dialogue in the other setting.

On the other hand, the dialogue belonging to the "determined system" is the dialogue that definitely announces the setting. For example, “Ah! I remembered! Even days!” is a line of “determined system” that definitely announces even-numbered settings. Therefore, the selectivity of the dialogue in the odd setting is 0, and the selectivity exceeds 0 only in the even setting.

In addition, it is preferable that the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the "Kamone system" is higher than the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the "determined system". If the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "determined system" is high, there is a sufficient possibility that the player will be definitely notified of the high setting within a short time after the game starts. This is because there are a certain number of players who presume that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is not good, which may reduce the operation of other game machines.

In addition, in the dialogue production when performing a specific reach presentation such as SP reach or movie reach, or in the dialogue presentation when performing pseudo-relation, the dialogue for suggesting the setting of the character B is written in red (in the big hit expectation suggestion presentation etc. The dialogue of the normal production may be displayed in white letters. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish the expected suggestion dialogue from the setting suggestion dialogue, so that two types of presentations (setting suggestion production and expectation suggestion production) coexist without making the player feel unnatural. Can be made The expectation suggestion effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation degree in the special symbol variation is a predetermined value, and specifically, a notice effect that suggests the expectation for the jackpot within one variation, or a plurality of notice effects. Includes look-ahead production that suggests expectations for jackpots across fluctuations in.

Although not shown, the peripheral control MPU may determine the setting suggestion effect by a lottery table similar to the speech effect table, although not shown for the weather change effect and the rival horse effect. For example, in the setting suggestion effect in the weather change effect, a thundercloud is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a number such as "246?" is displayed due to a thunderlight (an effect of "Kamonane system" that suggests even setting). In the setting suggestion production in the rival horse production, a combined horse production by the horse raised by the main character and the rival horse is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and for example, a number such as “135?” is displayed on the number of the rival horse. Yes (the production of "Kamone system" that suggests odd settings).

In the above-mentioned example, "What day is it today?" was displayed as the dialogue of the character A in the dialogue production. In addition to this dialogue, the character A also asked "What was the test last week?", Character B is like “66 points! (“Confirmed system” that confirms setting 6)” and “I think it was 55 points (“Kamonane system” that suggests setting 5)” You may make it provide several variation with respect to production (for example, dialogue production). In this case, the B effect (for example, the effect of listening to the score of the test) may be more reliable than the A effect (for example, the effect of listening to the date) with respect to the setting suggestion. Specifically, for example, although the expectation level which is setting 6 when "I feel like it was a day with 6 ... (Kamone system)" in A production is only 30%, in B production " When I was told that I had 66 points... (Kamone system), the setting 6 is 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of notice production table]
FIG. 167 shows another example of the notice production table. In the example of FIG. 167, the notice effect table 173 holds the notice effect selection rate for each variation pattern. Unlike the example of FIG. 165, the notice production table of FIG. 167 does not hold information on whether or not the setting suggestion production is executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of the notice effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern of the notice effect table of FIG. 167.

Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute the setting suggestion effect, based on the variation pattern and the type of the selected notice effect. FIG. 168(A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing distribution of setting suggestion effect execution in the case where the outline of the change pattern is “normal change” and “speech effect” is selected as the notice effect. is there. FIG. 168(B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing distribution of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the outline of the variation pattern is “normal reach+1 symbol” and “speech effect” is selected as the notice effect. Is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of variation patterns and notice effects as shown in FIG. 168 is stored in the peripheral control ROM in advance.

In the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestive effect after determining the content of the noticeable effect, but determines the content of the noticeable effect after determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestive effect. You may. By using such a method, although the amount of data is larger than that in the table shown in FIG. 165, the appearance rate and reliability of the effect can be set in detail. Also, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this another example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific example of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect. 169 (A), (B), (C) in the order of production, the setting suggestion in the case where "4, 5 or 6 is the day to add!" is selected as the dialogue of character B in the dialogue production It is an outline of the production.

In FIG. 169(A), the special symbol variation starts. In FIG. 169(B), after the start of the special symbol variation, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the character B's dialogue “It is a day with 4 or 5 or 6!”. In FIG. 169(C), the dialogue is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol variation.

169 (A), (D), (E) in the order of the production is the outline of the setting suggestion production in the case where "the day with 6!" is selected as the dialogue of character B in the dialogue production. is there. 169 (A), (D), in the production proceeding in the order of (E), while the setting suggestion production starts from the start of the special symbol variation, the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production is during the end of the special symbol variation. has been changed. Specifically, in FIG. 169(D), after the start of the special symbol change, the main character liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the character B's dialogue “4, 5 or 6 is the day!”. In FIG. 169(E), at the end of the special symbol variation, the character B's dialogue “It's a day with 6!” is displayed. That is, the setting suggested by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Specifically, for example, for each dialogue in the dialogue production table (the dialogue finally displayed), one or more scenarios indicating the dialogue change timing and the dialogue at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set. It may be defined for each. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing of the dialogue change according to the selected scenario.

In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue production table does not hold a scenario in which the suggested setting may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the dialogue production table may not hold a scenario in which the dialogue "It's an even number of days!" is displayed after the dialogue "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" desirable.

Further, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggesting effect is performed in the special symbol variation, but other effects (for example, an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation degree) may be executed in parallel. Although the example in which the dialogue of the character B is promoted at the end of the special symbol change is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be promoted before the end of the special symbol change. Although character A appears before the character B's dialogue, character A speaks to character B, but this is omitted in the drawing.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect. In FIG. 170(A), the game ball B is won in the first starting opening 2002 during the special symbol variation in the state where the special symbol variation is not reserved. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(B), immediately after the game ball B is won into the first starting opening 2002, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays the character B's dialogue “4, 5 or 6 is the day!”. To be done. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already changed is indefinite, the character B may be displayed immediately without displaying the character A, or the character B may be displayed after a predetermined time has passed from the winning. Alternatively, the character A may be displayed first and then the character B may be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 170(B), the number of holdings indicated by the display in the holding display area is increased by one.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(C), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation is ended. Also, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 still displays the character B's dialogue "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!". Subsequently, in FIG. 170(D), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is started. Further, at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation, the dialogue of character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to “the day when 5 or 6 is attached!”. That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(E), all the decorative symbols are stopped and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is finished. At the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the winning, the dialogue of the character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to “It is a day with 6!”. That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Note that, for example, the peripheral control ROM holds a dialogue pre-reading effect table (not shown) that defines the dialogue of the character B and the change timing of the dialogue. Specifically, for example, the dialogue prefetch production table defines the dialogue change timing of character B and the dialogue of character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start time, the change time, and the end time of the special symbol change after the winning prize and before the special symbol change corresponding to the prize are examples of the change timing. It is desirable that the setting suggested by the dialogue should not be demoted at each change timing. It should be noted that a different dialogue prefetching effect table may exist depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the prefetching effect based on the pre-determination command, the peripheral control MPU executes the prefetching effect by referring to the prefetching effect table at a predetermined ratio, for example. In addition, in the case of promotion, in FIG. 170, it is promoted by one step at a time ("4 or 5 or 6 is the date attached!", "5 or 6 is the date attached!" !" in that order) may be promoted in multiple stages at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the dialogue (E) may be displayed without displaying the dialogue (D).

The setting suggestion effect may be executed under a specific situation other than the above. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the condition of the continuous reservation is satisfied. The holding sequence means that the next big hit is realized by a special random number that is held until the end of the big hit game. In this case, for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the holding is performed and before the jackpot game is finished. Further, for example, when the specific variation pattern continues for a predetermined number of times, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the predetermined number of special symbol variations.

[12-15. Limitation of setting suggestion production]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the setting suggestive effect under a specific condition will be described.

[12-15-1. Limitation of setting suggestion production after special state]
First, the limitation of the setting suggestive effect after the special state will be described. Hereinafter, both the setting confirmation mode and the error occurrence are examples of special states. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying the setting value, which is started when it is determined in the setting confirmation process that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

FIG. 171(A) is an example of a setting confirmation mode effect restriction table. FIG. 171(B) is an example of an error occurrence effect restriction table. The effect confirmation table in the setting confirmation mode and the effect restriction table in the event of an error are stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example.

[12-15-1-1. Limitation of setting suggestion production after setting confirmation mode]
First, the effect confirmation table in the setting confirmation mode will be described. In the setting confirmation mode effect restriction table, when the setting confirmation mode is started while the change (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion change) determined to execute the setting suggestion effect is being executed or is on hold, A restriction flag indicating whether or not to limit the setting suggestion effect is stored.

In the setting confirmation mode production restriction table, the setting confirmation mode before the start of the setting suggestion production (that is, when the production related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) although it is determined that the setting suggestion production is performed) A record 1701 that stores a restriction flag in the case where is started, and after the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion change (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is determined to be performed (displayed)) A record 1702 that stores a restriction flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

When the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode. .. Accordingly, the setting confirmation mode effect restriction table stores a column 1703 for storing a restriction flag when the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode starts, and a restriction flag for a case where the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. And a column 1704.

Further, if the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended by the game ball winning the starting opening during the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the column 1704 includes a column 1705 which stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion change corresponding to winning at the starting opening in the setting confirmation mode. In addition, each restriction flag in the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode indicates, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured or in a hall or the like, an operation medium provided on the pachinko machine 1 (even if the player cannot operate the operation medium, the operation medium cannot be operated by the player). It can be set depending on the operation medium that can be operated). In addition, during the setting confirmation mode, when a game ball enters the starting opening, the lottery information may not be acquired and the prize ball may not be executed for the entered ball. However, even in such a case, in the special symbol fluctuation that is already held, it is executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode ends.

When the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, one of the fields 1706 and 1707 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, the fields 1708 to 1711 have a value of 0, and the fields 1712 and 1713 One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of the fields 1714 to 1717 are 0.

Further, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the value of the field 1706 and the field 1707 is 0, the value of one of the field 1708 and the field 1709 is 1 and the value of the other one is 0, and the field 1710. And one of the values of the field 1711 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of the fields 1712 and 1713 are 0, one of the fields 1714 and 1715 is 1 and the other is 0, One value of the field 1716 or the field 1717 is 1 and the other value is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion effect in accordance with the restriction flag in each state defined in the setting restriction mode start effect restriction table and the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) About the case where the setting confirmation mode is started before the setting suggesting effect is started, and the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode is started.

(1-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1706 is 1 and the value of the field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change processing is executed, and a sense of security that the game result is not affected Can be given.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1706 is 0 and the value of the field 1707 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a voice or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the setting confirmation mode. However, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the setting confirmation mode is started before the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1708 is 1 and the value of the field 1709 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not lost. When the sound and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sound and image are given priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. .. In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were performed. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1708 is 0 and the value of the field 1709 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggesting effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as "is it a high setting?" If the suggested effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggested effect.

(2') New setting suggestion fluctuation corresponding to winning at the starting mouth in the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is started before the start of the setting suggestion production and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode About setting suggestion production.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1710 is 1 and the value of the field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1710 is 0 and the value of the field 1711 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because the hall is in doubt, the setting value may be changed thereafter. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, the setting confirmation effect is changed to a different setting while the even number setting is displayed. There is a possibility that an odd number setting will be confirmed in the subsequent setting suggestion effect), so a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid such a situation.

It should be noted that it is preferable that the image, sound, light, and the like indicating the setting confirmation state described above be displayed regardless of the value of the field described above. In addition, since it may be possible to activate a new winning even when the game is stopped after shifting to the setting confirmation state, in that case, the same process as the process of advancing the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the setting suggestion effect is displayed). And, about the case where the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(3-1) After the game is restarted, the setting suggestion effect is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 1 and the value of the field 1713 is 0). When the setting suggestion effect that has already started is stopped, the player may feel distrust that the setting has been changed, and by restarting the setting suggestion effect after restarting the game, Occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 0 and the value of the field 1713 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a voice or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the setting confirmation mode. However, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect is finished). And, regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1714 is 1 and the value of the field 1715 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not lost. When the sound and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sound and image are given priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. (The image related to the setting suggestion effect does not overlap with the image indicating the setting confirmation mode, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect does not overlap with the character indicating the setting confirmation mode such as “during setting confirmation mode”. ). Note that this display and the like can be performed in the same manner even when an error described later occurs. The term "does not overlap" as used herein means that the images are not actually set in the RAM, and the appearances of the player do not overlap.

In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were performed. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(4-2) The setting suggestion effect is stopped (the value of the field 1714 is 0 and the value of the field 1715 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggesting effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as "is it a high setting?" If the suggested effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggested effect.

(4') New in response to winning at the starting mouth during the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is started during the setting suggestion variation and after the setting suggestion production is started, and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. About setting suggestion production of various setting suggestion fluctuations.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1716 is 1 and the value of the field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1716 is 0 and the value of the field 1717 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because the hall is in doubt, the setting value may be changed thereafter. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, the setting confirmation effect is changed to a different setting while the even number setting is displayed. Since a display for confirming the odd number setting is displayed in the setting suggestion effect later), a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid such a situation.

In the case where the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, when the setting confirmation mode spans a plurality of fluctuations, for example, the peripheral control MPU, for example, based on the notification from the main control MPU 1311, after the setting confirmation mode is started. When the first symbol is determined or the next variation starts, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode. When it is determined that the mode is the setting confirmation mode, the peripheral control MPU performs the setting suggestion effect along with the change corresponding to the hold if the newly won hold is the setting suggestion change. By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change processing is executed, and a sense of security that the game result is not affected Can be given.

Further, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggesting effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, it suggests a high setting such as "is it a high setting?" If an effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In this way, when the setting suggestive effect is performed and when the setting suggestive effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of the business style of.

[12-15-1-2. Limitation of setting suggestion performance when an error occurs]
Next, the effect occurrence effect restriction table will be described with reference to FIG. 171(B). When an error occurs during execution or suspension of a change (hereinafter referred to as “setting suggestion change” in this chapter) determined to execute the setting suggestion effect, the error limit effect limit table is used to suggest the setting suggestion effect. A restriction flag indicating whether or not to store is stored.

The error occurrence performance restriction table includes a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs before the start of setting suggestion production, and an error occurs during the setting suggestion variation and after the setting suggestion production starts during the setting suggestion variation. And a record 1802 that stores a restriction flag in the case of doing so.

The error includes a strong error that is reported by stopping the game and a weak error that is reported while the game is in progress. The error that detects the illegal magnetism in the firing ball sensor 1020 and the game area 5a is an example of a strong error. The full tank error (an error indicating that the gaming ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

Therefore, an error production effect restriction table, a column 1803 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error notified when the game is stopped, and a column 1804 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error notified while the game is in progress. ,including.

Further, when the game progresses even while the error is occurring, a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended by the game ball winning the starting opening while the error is occurring. Therefore, the column 1804 includes a column 1805 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion change corresponding to winning in the starting opening during an error.

The restriction flag in the error occurrence effect restriction table is, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (a player can operate an operation medium that cannot be operated by the player. It may be an operation medium).

In the error occurrence effect restriction table, one of the fields 1806 and 1807 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, and one of the fields 1808 and 1809 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0. One of the fields 1810 and 1811 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, one of the fields 1812 and 1813 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, and one of fields 1814 and 1815 has a value of The value of 1 and the other is 0, and the value of one of the fields 1816 and 1817 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion effect according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the effect occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) Regarding the case where an error starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game is stopped when the error occurs (strong error).

(1-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 1 and the value of the field 1807 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has not been changed when the error is canceled by the hall clerk, and give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. it can.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 0 and the value of the field 1807 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed may be disadvantageous for the player, and thus the player can proceed with the game so as not to cause an error. Can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses even after the occurrence of the error (weak error).

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1808 is 1 and the value of the field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved. When the voice and the image indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these voice and the image are output with priority over the voice and the image in the setting suggestion effect. To do. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were performed. An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1808 is 0 and the value of the field 1809 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed may be disadvantageous for the player, and thus the player can proceed with the game so as not to cause an error. Can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(2') Setting suggestion If an error occurs before the start of production, and the game progresses even while the error is occurring (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to winning at the starting mouth during the error occurring About setting suggestion production of fluctuation.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1810 is 1 and the value of the field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1810 is 0 and the value of the field 1811 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning during the error, so that the player cancels the launch of the game ball and releases the error early.

(3) About the case where an error occurs during the setting suggesting fluctuation and after the start of the setting suggesting effect, and the game is stopped when the error occurs (strong error).

(3-1) The setting suggestion effect is restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 1 and the value of the field 1813 is 0). When the setting suggestion effect that has already started is stopped, the player may feel distrust that the setting has been changed, and by restarting the setting suggestion effect after restarting the game, Occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 0 and the value of the field 1813 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is stopped may occur. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game without causing an error, and Can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses (weak error) even while the error occurs.

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1814 is 1 and the value of the field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved. When the voice and the image indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these voice and the image are output with priority over the voice and the image in the setting suggestion effect. To do. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "when the setting suggestion effect indicating the high setting was displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects should be hidden. Then, an image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

(4-2) The setting suggestion effect is stopped (the value of the field 1814 is 0 and the value of the field 1815 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation may occur in which the setting suggestion effect is stopped, which is a disadvantage for the player. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game is It is possible to proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4') New in response to winning in the starting mouth during error occurrence when the error occurs after the setting suggestion variation and the start of the setting suggestion production, and the game progresses during the error occurrence (weak error) About setting suggestion production of various setting suggestion fluctuations.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1816 is 1 and the value of the field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1816 is 0 and the value of the field 1817 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning during the error, so that the player cancels the launch of the game ball and releases the error early.

In this way, when the setting suggestive effect is performed and when the setting suggestive effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of the business style of.

[12-15-2. Limitation of production in new starting prize]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning in the state where the special symbol variation and the new variation can be held will be described. FIG. 172 is an example of a new start winning effect restriction table. The new start winning effect control table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example.

The new start winning effect restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by an assumption about the effect of the previous change and an effect restriction on the effect in the new start winning based on the assumption. The pre-variation in this chapter is the variation just before the variation corresponding to the new starting prize. As the condition of the effect of the previous change, there are a case where only the expected suggestion effect that the special lottery result corresponding to the change is a big hit is performed, and a case where the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed.

In addition, as the effect restriction of the prefetch effect in the new start winning, only the setting suggestion effect in the prefetch effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not executed), and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect in the prefetch effect are restricted (that is, the setting). There is no suggestion effect and expected suggestion effect), and neither setting suggestion effect nor expectation suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, setting suggestion effect and look-ahead effect are executed).

The reference processing table column stores the identifier of the processing table, which is included in the corresponding conditions and is referred to when executing the prefetching effect restriction in the new start winning. The flag column stores a flag indicating which condition is to be executed and which process table is used to determine the process for the prefetch effect in the new start winning.

Note that 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 1 to 3. Further, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start winning effect control table is, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (an operation medium that cannot be operated by the player or an operation medium that can be operated by the player). It doesn't matter).

Peripheral control MPU, when there is a new start winning in the state of being able to hold the new fluctuation during the special symbol change, and if it is determined that only the expected suggestion effect will be executed in the previous change, the new start winning effect limit table The condition indicated by the condition column corresponding to the flag column in which the value in the “Previous change effect” column is a flag column corresponding to “expectation suggestion only” and storing 1 as a value is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag column to determine the content of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU, if there is a new starting prize in the state of being able to hold the new fluctuation during the special symbol fluctuation, and the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous fluctuation, the new start prize. The value in the “previous change effect” column of the effect restriction table is a flag field corresponding to “expectation suggestion+setting suggestion”, and a flag field storing 1 as a value The content of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to a different starting winning is determined.

Hereinafter, each condition shown in the condition column will be described. The first condition (condition for selecting the processing table 1) is to limit only the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning when the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation. Is to be done. Under the first condition, the expectation suggestive effect is performed in the previous change, so that the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. When the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning in such a state, the player's consciousness is directed also to the setting suggestion effect, so that in the effect of the previous change. The uplifting feeling may be reduced. In addition, the player may confuse the setting suggestion effect with the expectation suggesting effect, and may make the player happiness. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the first condition.

Further, in the first condition, the expected suggestion effect is performed in the previous change, but in this state, when the setting suggestion effect is further executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the player Even if it is assumed that there is a deviation in the previous variation, the variation corresponding to the new start winning can still be expected, so that the player can be provided with a sense of security.

For example, when selecting an effect based on the notice effect table of FIG. 165, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the effect is determined by the table, and whether or not the flag in the condition column indicating that the setting suggestion effect is restricted is 1 thereafter. Whether or not it is restricted is determined, and if 1 (restricted), the setting suggestion effect is restricted by performing processing such that even if set is selected, it is rewritten and displayed without set. To do. That is, the peripheral control MPU can limit the setting suggestion effect by using the advance notice effect table shown in FIG. 165 by performing the determination process after determining the effect. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold the effect table for each effect restriction type, the amount of data can be reduced. Similarly to the expected suggestive effect described later, when the peripheral control MPU uses the final pending color table in FIG. 161 and selects a read-ahead pending display other than white, when the expected suggestive effect is limited, The selected hold display is rewritten to white and displayed.

The second condition (condition for selecting the processing table 2) is a setting suggestion effect and an expectation suggestion as a look-ahead effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect alone is executed in the previous change. It is to limit both the production. Under the second condition, the anticipation suggestive effect is performed in the previous change, so that the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. When the setting suggestion effect and the term attitude suggestion effect are executed as the look-ahead effect of the variation corresponding to the new start prize in such a state, the player's consciousness is directed toward these effects as well, There is a risk that the uplifting feeling in the production of the pre-variation may be reduced. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the second condition.

The third condition (condition for selecting the processing table 3) is a setting suggestion effect and an expectation suggestion as a look-ahead effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect alone is executed in the previous change. It is not to limit any of the production. Under the third condition, since the expectation suggestive effect is performed in the previous change, the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, so that in addition to the feeling of uplifting the jackpot, the feeling of uplifting the setting suggesting effect (in particular, the high setting confirmation suggestion effect). Alternatively, a case where a high setting confirmation effect or the like is executed) can be given to the player.

The fourth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 4) is a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to a new start winning when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. Only is to be limited. In the fourth condition, the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, so that the player may be able to win the jackpot due to the previous change, and (especially the high setting suggestion effect or the high setting confirmation effect). I feel a sense of elation due to the setting suggestion). When the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new starting winning in such a state, there is a possibility that the feeling of uplifting to the expectation for the big hit in the hold of the previous change may decrease. ..

Specifically, for example, when setting 4 or more is set in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change and setting 5 or more is set in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new starting winning, The setting suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (although it is originally set to 5 or more, setting 4 is also suggested). In such a case, the player infers that a large amount of inaccurate information is included not only in the setting suggestion effect in the previous change but also in the expectation suggesting effect (specifically, for example, the display mode is red. There is a possibility that the big hit expectation is not high even for the hold, which means that the uplifting feeling for the expectation suggestive effect may be reduced. Execution of the fourth condition can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The fifth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 5) is a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to a new start winning when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. It is also to limit both the expectation suggestion production. In the fifth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, when the setting suggestion effect is performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning, the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times in a short period of time. There is a possibility that the player will infer the set value with high accuracy (for example, if odd number setting suggestion effect and high setting suggestion effect are performed, it is likely to be setting 5). In such a state, if the player determines that the setting is low, the pachinko machine 1 may stop the game, and if it is determined that the setting is high, another pachinko machine in the hall may be stopped. The operation of the machine 1 may be reduced. Execution of the fifth condition can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Also, especially, if the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, and the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed as the look-ahead effect even in the change corresponding to the new start winning, many effects occur in a short period of time. However, the player may be confused. Execution of the fifth condition can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The sixth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 6) is a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to a new start winning when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. Also, neither of the expectations suggestive effects is limited. Under the sixth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, the player assumes the expectation degree of the expectation suggestion effect in the setting suggested by the setting suggestion effect. In this state, the setting suggestive effect and the expected suggestive effect are performed in the change corresponding to the new start winning, so that the degree of expectation due to these two expected suggestive effects may be raised.

Specifically, for example, when the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting 4 or more in the previous variation is executed and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting 5 or more is executed as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning, the player Expectation at setting 4 or higher is assumed for the expectation suggestion effect in the previous change. However, after that, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize suggests the setting degree of 5 or higher, so that the expectation degree of the expected suggestion effect is assumed to be the setting degree of 5 or higher. The feeling of uplifting increases.

In this way, since the effect is exhibited for each prefetching effect restriction content corresponding to the new start winning, by making it possible for the hall etc. to set such prefetching effect restriction content, the needs of the business style of the hall etc. It is possible to provide a game machine adapted to.

Hereinafter, each processing table and the prefetch effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described. Each processing table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example.

FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, common contents of each processing table will be described. Each processing table stores the winning type in the special lottery result of the previous change, the processing content related to the new starting winning corresponding to the winning classification, and the processing number that is the identifier of the processing content.

It should be noted that the processing content held in each processing table defines the processing content regarding the prefetch effect that is not a restriction target. Specifically, for example, as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the processing content of the processing table 1 which is a table referred to when restricting only the setting suggestion effect includes the expected suggestion effect. The processing content is defined. Similarly, the processing content of the processing table 3, which is a table referred to when limiting both the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect, as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, is the expected suggestion effect and The processing content for the setting suggestion effect is defined.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the look-ahead effect to be restricted in the new start prize and the processing table to be referenced based on the flag of the new start winning effect restriction table, and is not the restriction object based on the processing table. The processing for the prefetching effect is determined.

It should be noted that processing tables 3 and 6 to be described later store flags for selecting the processing content related to the new start winning from a plurality of processing content. The flag in the processing table may be, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured or in a hall or the like (an operation medium that the player cannot operate or an operation medium that the player can operate). ), it is possible to set.

Hereinafter, the processing contents related to the new start winning defined by the processing table 1 will be described. The processing table 1 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation and only the setting suggestion effect is limited as the look-ahead effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Hereinafter, an example in which the hold prefetching is performed as the prefetching effect for performing the expectation suggestion will be described.

The process of process number 1 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with a time reduction. In the process of process number 1, when the peripheral control MPU has a specific mode in which the new starting winning hold display is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, blue, green, red, or the like hold display mode), , At the start of the big hit opening screen that was won in the previous variation, the mode of the new starting winning hold display is returned to the default (white display mode in the final hold color table of FIG. 161). However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the big hit opening screen, the hold display of the particular mode is deleted like other hold displays. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the new start winning pending display to the specific display mode (that is, the default display) at the time saving transition after the jackpot. Note that the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the new start winning pending display to the specific display mode even when the new winning is not held at the end of the time saving (that is, Keep the default display).

The process of process number 2 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. In the processing of processing number 2, when the mode of the new starting winning hold display is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation degree, for example, at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation, The mode of the new start winning hold display is returned to the default. However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the big hit opening screen, the hold display of the particular mode is deleted like other hold displays. Further, even when the normal state transition is controlled after the jackpot game is over, the mode of the new starting winning pending display is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display is left as it is).

The process of process number 3 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-change winning type is a small hit. In the process of the process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the new start winning hold display (that is, the hold display is continued, specifically, for example, if the blue hold display mode is blue, The hold display mode of is continuously displayed). Further, the peripheral control MPU may restore the default display mode of the new starting winning hold display at the start of the opening screen for the small hit that was won in the previous variation. However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small hit opening screen, the hold display of the particular mode is deleted like other hold displays.

The process of process number 4 is a process related to a new starting winning when the winning type of the previous change is out of the range. In the process of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the new starting winning hold display (that is, the hold display is continued, specifically, for example, if the blue hold display mode is blue, The hold display mode of is continuously displayed).

FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. The processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change and both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is there. Since the processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when limiting both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the jackpot type of the previous fluctuation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. The processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expected suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is there.

The processes of process numbers 5 to 6 are processes related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with a time reduction. One of the processes of process numbers 5 to 6 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 5 to 6, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 1.

In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is being held, etc. By the processing of the process number 5, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation or the like, the player can not forget that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. It should be noted that, since the jackpot with the time saving is won in the previous change, the change corresponding to the new winning is likely to start after the end of the time saving (the game ball is in the second starting opening 2004 during the time saving). If you win with a high frequency, and there is a suspension of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation is executed in priority to the first special symbol fluctuation). Therefore, by the processing of the processing number 6, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the end of the time saving, so that the player's discouragement due to the end of the time saving can be reduced.

The processes of process numbers 7 to 8 are processes related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. One of the processes of process numbers 7 to 8 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 7 to 8, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 2.

In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. “Before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during a big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he has won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion production starts at the latest during the jackpot game by the processing of processing number 7, the player will be discouraged. You can enjoy a big hit game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 8, the setting suggestion effect is started immediately after the jackpot is finished, so that the player's disappointment with respect to not being given the time saving can be reduced.

The processes of process numbers 9 to 10 are processes related to a new starting winning prize when the winning type of the previous change is the small hit. One of the processes with process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 9 to 10, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The “before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won in the previous change, or during the small hit. In the case of a small hit, the player may be discouraged because only a small privilege is given to the player. However, the processing of the processing number 9 causes the setting suggestion effect to start at an early timing, and thus is discouraged. Can be reduced.

In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion time for small hits is shorter than the series of digestion times for big hits, if the player recognizes that the setting suggestion production has started before the start of the previous change, etc. Players may feel distrusted if they do not. By the processing of the processing number 10, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling such distrust.

The processes of process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new start winning when the pre-variation winning type is out of order. One of the processes of process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 11 to 13, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 4.

In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning.

In the process of process number 12, the peripheral control MPU only performs the new start when the mode of the hold display in the hold prefetching effect of the previous change is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, green or red). During the change corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect as the look-ahead effect in the new starting winning is executed. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a dialogue suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds), or may be advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) from the normal timing. By the processing of the processing number 12, it is possible to reduce such discouragement for a player who feels discouraged from the fact that a hold display mode with a high jackpot expectation appears in the previous change, but that is out of order. it can. 175 and the later-described FIG. 178, the old hold is a hold corresponding to the previous fluctuation, and the new hold is a hold corresponding to the new start winning.

In the process of process number 13, when the mode of the hold display is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation level (for example, green or red), the peripheral control MPU suggests setting as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning. Do not execute the performance. By the processing of the processing number 13, although the mode of the hold display in which the big hit expectation degree is high appears in the previous change, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect does not appear even in the change corresponding to the new start winning. , It is possible to prevent the player from being absorbed in the game.

FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. The processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change and only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. ..

The process of the process number 14 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with time reduction. In the process of the process number 14, the process of the expected suggestive effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 1.

The process of the process number 15 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. In the process of process number 15, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

The process of the process number 16 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-change winning type is a small hit. In the process of process number 16, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

The process of the process number 17 is a process related to a new start winning when the pre-variation winning type is out of order. In the process of the process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 4.

Since the processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when limiting only the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning, a new start regardless of the jackpot type of the previous change. It is defined that no special process is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to the winning.

FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. The processing table 5 is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, and both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. It is a table that is played. The processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when restricting both the setting suggestive effect and the expected suggestive effect as the look-ahead effect restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous fluctuation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. The processing table 6 is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expected suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Table.

The processes of process numbers 18 to 21 are processes related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with a time reduction. One of the processes of process numbers 18 to 21 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 18 to 21, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 1.

In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is being held, etc. By the process of the process number 18, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation, etc., the player can not forget that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

In the process of the process number 19, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggesting effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Is better (specifically, for example, it is informed that the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, and the setting as the prefetch effect is performed before the variation corresponding to the new start winning is started. Only when it is informed that the setting 5 or more is settled in the suggestion effect), the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the change corresponding to the new start winning is started. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is being held, etc.

By the processing of the processing number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion effect at the latest during the big hit with time saving, so that a double uplifting feeling due to the big hit with time saving and the high setting indication can be obtained. In addition, for example, it is notified that the setting 5 or more is settled in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and the setting 4 or more is settled in the setting suggestion effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. If it is notified, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is a useless effect that does not provide new information to the player before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, By the processing of number 19, such a useless effect can be omitted. On the contrary, for example, when it is informed that the setting 4 or more is settled in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is set 5 before the change corresponding to the new start winning is started. Even if the player is not notified that the above is settled, there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect is likely to be an unnecessary effect, and the process of the process number 19 causes such an unnecessary effect. The presentation can be omitted.

In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the process of process number 20, since the setting suggestion effect often starts immediately after the end of the time saving, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment with respect to the end of the time saving state.

In the process of process number 21, the peripheral control MPU is set in the setting suggesting effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect described in the processing of the processing number 19 or reduce the player's disappointment with respect to the end of the time saving state.

The processes of process numbers 22 to 25 are processes related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. One of the processes of process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 22 to 25, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. “Before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during a big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he has won the big jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion production starts at the latest during the jackpot game by the processing of processing number 22, the player will be discouraged. You can enjoy a big hit game in a reduced state.

In the process of the process number 23, the peripheral control MPU is set in the setting suggesting effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is executed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. “Before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during a big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. By the processing of the process number 23, if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the big hit game, the big hit game can be enjoyed with the discouragement reduced.

In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 24, the setting suggestion effect starts immediately after the big hit ends, so that the player's disappointment for not having entered in a short time can be reduced.

In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggesting effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19 or reduce the player's disappointment for not having entered in a short time. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production as the look-ahead production is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production of the previous variation, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, If the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the change corresponding to the new start winning is executed, the player who is disappointed not to rush in a short time will show the useless setting suggestion effect. There is a risk that the person will be stroked in reverse.

The processes of process numbers 26 to 29 are processes relating to a new starting winning prize when the winning type of the previous change is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 26 to 29 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 26 to 29, the process regarding the expected suggestive effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 3.

In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The “before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won in the previous change, or during the small hit. In a small hit, the player may be discouraged because only a small privilege is given to the player, but by the processing of the processing number 26, the setting suggestion production is started at an early timing, and the player is discouraged. Can be reduced.

In the process of the process number 27, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested production as the look-ahead production before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is executed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The “before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won in the previous change, or during the small hit. By the processing of the processing number 27, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, or reduce the discouragement of the player due to the small merit given to the small hit.

In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion time for small hits is shorter than the series of digestion times for big hits, if the player recognizes that the setting suggestion production has started before the start of the previous change, etc. Players may feel distrusted if they do not. By the processing of the processing number 28, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling such distrust.

In the process of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU is set in the setting suggesting effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 29, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect described in the processing of the processing number 19 or reduce the player's discouragement that only a small merit is given in the small hit. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production as the look-ahead production is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production of the previous variation, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, If the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the change corresponding to the new start winning is executed, a more useless setting suggestion effect is given to the player who is discouraged that only a small merit is given in the small hit. It will be shown, and the player may be stroked backwards.

The processes of process numbers 30 to 34 are processes related to a new starting winning prize when the winning type of the previous variation is out. One of the processes of process numbers 30 to 34 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 30 to 34, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of processing number 30, it is possible to reduce the player's discouragement due to the deviation from the previous variation.

In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU only performs the new start when the mode of the hold display in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, green or red). During the change corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect as the look-ahead effect in the new starting winning is executed. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a dialogue suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds), or may be advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) from the normal timing. By the processing of the processing number 31, it is possible to reduce such discouragement for a player who feels disappointing that he/she deviates from the appearance of the pending display mode in which the jackpot expectation is high in the previous change. it can.

In the process of the process number 32, the peripheral control MPU sets the previous fluctuation when the mode of the hold display in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, green or red). If the setting suggested as a look-ahead production is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion production before the change corresponding to the new start winning is started, the new start prize is given only if During the change corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect in the new starting winning is executed. By the processing of the processing number 32, the player's discouragement that the previous fluctuation, which was the mode of the hold display with a high jackpot expectation degree, is off, can be alleviated by the setting suggestion effect.

In the process of process number 33, the peripheral control MPU only applies to the new start winning prize when the mode of the hold display in the pre-change pending hold look-ahead effect is not a particular mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, green or red). During the change corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect in the new starting winning is executed. By the processing of the processing number 33, such a discouragement can be reduced by the setting suggestion production for the player who has been disappointed because the expectation for the big hit cannot be obtained in the pre-variation hold look-ahead production.

In the process of the process number 34, the peripheral control MPU is the case where the mode of the hold display is not the specific mode with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, green or red), and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Therefore, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is better before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize, only when the change corresponding to the new start prize is changed, A setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect in the new starting winning. By the processing of the processing number 34, a situation in which the player's irritation that the mode of the pending display of the previous change has a low expectation and suggests a low setting in the setting suggestion effect in the change corresponding to the new start winning is amplified. Can be suppressed.

In the above-described process, even if the setting suggestion effect is not limited as a look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU will indicate the setting suggestion. It is not necessary to execute the production. For example, when the new start winning is performed during the big hit, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because immediately after the big hit game, the player is likely to continue the game without giving an incentive by the setting suggestion effect.

As in the example of the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, the effect can be exerted in each processing related to the new starting winning prize defined by each processing number, so that the hole etc. can set the processing related to the new starting winning prize. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the needs of a business style such as a hall.

Also, for example, the new start winning is just before the end of the ST state (probably changing state that continues until a big jackpot is won or a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed) (specifically, for example, until the ST state ends. The number of remaining fluctuations of the symbol is 4 or less, which is the maximum number of reserved special symbols, or the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, etc.) In the case of being omitted, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the ST state ends, the player's greatest concern is whether or not to win the jackpot in the ST. When the setting suggestion effect starts as a look-ahead effect related to a new start winning in such a state, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as an effect with a high expectation for a big hit, and a situation occurs in which the player is delighted. May occur. The above-mentioned processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Further, for example, after the ST state ends and shifts to the normal state, a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations (specifically, for example, four special symbol fluctuations, which is the maximum number of special symbols reserved, or from the ST state There may be a case where the second starting port 2004 is opened immediately after the transition to the normal state, and in consideration of it, a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) a special symbol variation) is performed before the new start. When the start winning is performed, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not to win the jackpot immediately. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high possibility that a variation corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol which is easy to win the big hit of the type having a great advantage for the player is executed. When the setting suggestion effect starts as a look-ahead effect related to a new start winning in such a state, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as an effect with a high expectation for a big hit, and a situation occurs in which the player is delighted. May occur. The above-mentioned processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In addition, when it is determined that a setting suggestion effect that is completed independently for each of a plurality of holds is executed, one setting suggestion effect that spans the changes corresponding to the plurality of holds is executed. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the original function of the RAM clear switch 954 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 and In order to distinguish between the setting change function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

179 and 180 are flowcharts of the power-on process executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on. The power-on process shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of step S10 of FIG. 21 to step S34 of FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 fetches the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the signal level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the fetched level data in the register (step S201). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely activated. Therefore, if an employee of the hall mistakenly interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to be activated, the RAM of the hall is cleared in an unintended state. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the start of the power-on process, and after the peripheral control board 1510 ends the standby state. By determining the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a temporary storage means such as a register, even if an employee of the hall mistakenly interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the power is turned on. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the closing operation is surely detected.

The ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be different. For example, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be switched between positive and negative logic so that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON at the high level and the setting key 971 is ON at the low level. The RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may change the voltage determined to be ON. By doing so, it is possible to change the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with a radio wave and make it difficult to carry out a fraudulent act of activating the setting change mode. Further, as described later, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to monitor the signal level of the sensor for fraud detection.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that can be selected in the stages of setting 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the set value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the set state management area and the initialization by the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is awaited (step S203). Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, the abnormal set value is not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, processing relating to a normal game such as a special drawing or a general drawing is not executed.

In addition, the set value is not only determined when the power is turned on, but also when winning at the starting opening, when starting the variable display game, and when the game state is switched (from normal state to jackpot state, from low probability state to high probability state) , Non-time saving state to time saving state). This prevents the lottery from being performed based on the incorrect set value, even if the set value accidentally becomes an abnormal value.

If it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is turned on again, or until the set value is changed, the state of the set value abnormality (RAM abnormality) is maintained. .. When it is determined that the set value is abnormal, a predetermined value may be set. As the predetermined value, a value corresponding to the setting 6 indicating the highest setting or a value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the lowest setting may be used to update the setting value storage area.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated only through the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated only by turning the power on again. This is because the RAM abnormality may occur not only due to a defect but also due to fraud, and if the RAM abnormality caused by fraud can be resolved by a power-on operation, the RAM abnormality can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated without going through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated unless the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since the setting key 971 which can be operated only by the employee having the key is operated, the security performance against fraud can be improved.

In addition, in order to deal with the illegal act of illegally changing the set value to an indefinite value, if the set value is determined to be abnormal, if the value is updated to the value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the minimum setting, the security of the gaming machine is improved. It is effective because it can improve the sex.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, a normal game state (game startable state), setting confirmation mode, setting change mode , The abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is awaited (step S204).

Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the previous power-off time and the checksum calculated at the previous power-off and stored in step S48 are compared (verified). Note that a check code having a fixed value may be used instead of the checksum. Further, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power has been normally backed up is stored in the backup flag area, the data in the RAM is normally backed up when the power failure occurs (step S205).

If either the checksum or the value of the backup flag area is abnormal as a result of the determination, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 (setting The area including the value is also initialized) (step S207), and the process proceeds to step S216. Although erasing the data stored in the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 or in a predetermined area is called “initialization”, “RAM clear” is also used in the same meaning.

On the other hand, if the values of the checksum and the backup flag area are normal, the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 is ON, setting key 971 is ON) is performed based on the value (content) of the setting key stored in the register. It is determined. If the operation is not a setting change operation (both the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 or both are OFF), the setting state management area is set to determine whether the state is being changed before the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating the change is recorded (step S208).

As a result, if it is stored in the register that the setting change operation is performed, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are set to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. It can be determined that the state. If a value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power is turned on after a power failure during the setting changing operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 that should be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

In step S208, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, a value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. At this time, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the setting is changed to the setting state management area. It is not necessary to record the value (02H) indicating the state.

On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether or not the state is RAM abnormality, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before power-on is RAM abnormal (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the state before the power is turned on is not in the RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), so the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register. It is determined whether it has been done (step S212).

As a result, if the register stores the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954, the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON when the power is turned on, so the RAM in the game control area excluding the setting value and the setting state management area. In order to initialize the area (clear area when RAM is normal), the process proceeds to step S210.

On the other hand, if the register does not store the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, so the power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the gaming state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

Then, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 has been operated when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation operation should be started. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode is indicated in the setting state management area. The value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

After that, the device built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S216), and a power-on operation command for notifying the operation of each unit at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to the state when the power is turned on (step S218).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S219). If a value indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process proceeds to step S220, and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so the initial setting is completed and the process proceeds to step S224.

In step S220, initial setting at the time of starting a game or initial setting at the time of power failure recovery is performed. After that, the power-on state command for notifying the state of each part when the power is turned on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, the power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol when the power is restored is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. The various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in the timer interrupt process.

Further, the set value command for notifying the set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), the interrupt is permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to the normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

181 and 182 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. Unlike the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 executes setting change processing within the timer interrupt processing.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, the digit to be displayed. In the present embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are combined is described, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, LED common counters may be provided as many as the number of displays.

Then, the switch input process is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 in FIG.

Next, it is determined whether or not an initial value (value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If the initial value (the value indicating the game startable state) is recorded in the setting status management area, it is not necessary to execute the setting change/confirmation processing (after step S234) in the timer interrupt processing, and thus the normal timer interrupt processing (For example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt process of step S233, a performance display process (FIG. 183) described later is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (value indicating the game startable state) is not recorded in the setting status management area, the normal game processing is not executed by the timer interrupt processing, and the setting change/confirmation processing is executed.

In the setting change/confirmation processing, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears to be mixed To prevent the flickering of the LED.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing/checking the setting value. On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether or not the operation of changing/checking the setting value is performed (steps S236 and S237). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

If the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the set value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the result of adding the set values exceeds the upper limit, it is returned to the initial value. On the other hand, if the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (the value indicating the setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether the OFF edge of the output level of 971 is detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been operated to the normal position, the setting change/confirmation mode end processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change/confirmation mode is not ended and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change/confirmation mode end processing, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and initial setting at the time of game start or power failure recovery In order to send to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command for notifying the state of each part at the time of power-on (low probability/high probability, gaming state such as time saving/non-time saving etc.) To the buffer (step S242). Then, the power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of return after the power failure is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating a processing state relating to a special symbol/special electric auditors product (a state of each process relating to a special symbol/special electric auditors product (standby, changing, determination, big hit, etc.)) is transmitted as a command. .. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the game state related to the special symbol and the operation state of the special electric accessory when the power is restored. Then, the set value command for notifying the set value is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

It should be noted that the command for notifying the set value may be transmitted not only in the setting change/confirmation mode ending process when the power is turned on, but also when the fluctuation starts or when the game state is switched. At that time, the command of the set value transmitted when the power is turned on and the command transmitted during the normal game at the start of fluctuation may be the same command or different commands (for example, the value of the upper byte is different).

When the set value command is made different at the time of turning on the power and at the time of the normal game, the peripheral control board 1510 issues a series of commands (change pattern command, pattern command, etc.) including the set value at the start of the special symbol variable display game. When received, it is determined whether the command is missing. By changing the content of the command at the timing when the command is transmitted (when the power is turned on, during a normal game, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 has a value other than the set value that is correctly received when the power is turned on, or other than the set value when the fluctuation starts. It is possible to determine whether the variation pattern command or the pattern command is missing.

In step S245, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting status management area, the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) is set to display an error (step S246). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting for displaying the current setting value on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) is performed (step S247).

After that, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by the segment signal output according to the setting in step S246 or S247 (step S248). As described above, after the timer interrupt process is started, the set value changing operation is determined (step S237), and thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt to display the set value (display of the set value). Switch). The setting value will be displayed without setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, the setting change/confirmation process is being executed by not performing the process related to the setting change/confirmation as the process when the power is turned on, but by performing it in the same timer interrupt process as when the normal game is started. Even if the power is restored to the original state after the setting key 971 is returned to the original state even if the setting key 971 and the setting change switch 972 are not operated at the same position as when the power failure occurs, the setting when the power failure occurs It is possible to return to the state of change/confirmation processing. Further, in the setting change/confirmation processing, it is possible to make common the processing executed in the normal game processing, such as command transmission processing and control of dynamic lighting of LEDs.

Then, the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt processing ends. That is, in step S249, the command stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244, etc. is actually output from the main control board 1310 as serial data.

In the timer interrupt process described above, the process is branched depending on whether the normal game is executed or the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S232 of FIG. 181), but a plurality of timer interrupt processes May be provided to start different timer interrupt processing depending on the normal game state and the setting change mode and/or setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include a common process in part (for example, a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or all of them may be configured by different routines. That is, the timer interrupt process 1 (for setting change/confirmation) is called in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the timer interrupt 2 (for normal game) is called in the normal game state, which is common to these two timer interrupt processes. It has a process (module) to be executed and a dedicated process (module) to be executed only by one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process for capturing the output of various detection switches such as a winning opening sensor and a peripheral board command process for transmitting a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the register bank may be shared by the process executed in the normal game and the process executed in the setting change mode. When bank 0 is used for main processing on the main control side, bank 1 is used for both timer interrupt processing. Since two timer interrupt processes do not start at the same time, one register bank can be shared. That is, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched depending on the bank, and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed and the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed. 1 (during normal game) and timer interrupt processing 2 (setting change mode) that is periodically executed, and is common to at least two of the main processing on the main control side, timer interrupt processing 1 and timer interrupt processing 2. Use the bank registers.

The timer interrupt processing executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode may have the same execution cycle, but may execute in different cycles. The sampling of the switch in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, so that the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing in the normal gaming state is 4 ms. The execution cycle of the timer interrupt process may be early (for example, 2 ms) or late (for example, 8 ms). If the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED that displays the set value will be delayed, and the display mode of the set value will differ from the base display during the normal game. become. If there are 8 LED commons and the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 8 ms, the display cycle is 64 ms (display ON is 8 ms, OFF is 56 ms), and the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 4 ms. The cycle is 32 ms (display ON is 4 ms, OFF is 20 ms), the OFF time becomes long in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing, and the LED flickering becomes large, and the display mode with the base display during the normal game is displayed. And can be recognized differently.

Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started at the time of starting the power supply, the timer interruption processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is permitted, and the timer interruption processing 2 for normal game is prohibited. On the other hand, when the power is started in the normal game state (when the setting change/confirmation mode is not entered), the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal game is permitted. Then, at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the timer interruption processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interruption processing 2 for normal game is permitted.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the performance display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance (eg, base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

The performance display process is executed in the timer interrupt in the normal gaming state described above. Specifically, it is executed by the normal interrupt processing of step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181 or the base display output processing of step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address in the game control area, sets the stack address outside the game control area (step S260), and saves the register used in the game control area in the register saving buffer (step S260). S261). The save destination of the register used in the game control area in step S261 may be a work area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area. The save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

Then, it is determined whether the initial power-on flag is normal (step S262). The first power-on flag is a flag indicating whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (that is, whether the power is turned on for the first time). When the area outside the game control area is initialized, 5AH is set. To be done. That is, if the value of the first power-on flag is 5AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the time of first power-on is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the parameter used to display the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base display 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the value of the parameter is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is stored in step S264. initialize.

If the power failure flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within the predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized and set to the power failure flag 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within the predetermined range, the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and the discharge ball sensor 3060 are detected, and the base value is calculated ( Step S265).

Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time of the section for calculating the base value (step S266), and if the switching time has come, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, the display is controlled for each section. For example, display control for each section includes display of a test section having less than 500 out balls, blinking display when the number of low-probability/non-time saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000) ( Step S269).

After that, the value of the register is restored from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is restored (step S271), and the performance display process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, a notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal when the power is turned on, or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is notified, the hall employee is notified of the pachinko machine. Notify the state in an easy to understand manner.

The notification mode described below (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) is output in the mode selected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern together with the display setting on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). Specifically, the setting display process of step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 190 is executed. A dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to execute the processing.

First, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). It should be noted that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is given priority over the notification of other abnormalities and states.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off, or all LEDs blink at the same cycle at high speed Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Sound of "RAM error" is displayed (sound effect) RAM error notification sound is output (RAM error notification sound is changed (It may be the same as the notification sound other than the mode and setting confirmation mode)
Sound (sound) Outputs the sound of "RAM error" Volume Volume maximum volume decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player LED specified frame lamp (top lamp is installed on the door frame 3 Including, ball out and excluding stock notification LED) blinks in red Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Release condition to re-notify output By changing settings on main control board 1310 RAM cleared or power was reapplied to the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, the setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights up, or all LEDs blink at the same speed at a medium speed Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Displaying the character "setting is being changed" (sound effect) Outputing a notification sound in the setting change mode (voice) " The sound "Setting is being changed" is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. A predetermined frame lamp provided on the door frame 3 ( Blinking white, including top lamp, excluding bulbs and stock notification LED) Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Release condition to re-notify output Peripheral control board 1510 "A001H" was received as the power-on operation command.

Next, the setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights up, or all LEDs blink at the same cycle at low speed Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Displaying the character "setting confirmation" (sound effect) Setting confirmation mode notification sound (setting confirmation mode notification) The sound may be the same as the notification sound in the setting change mode)
Sound (sound) The sound of "setting confirmation" is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). Volume is set to the maximum volume frame decoration LED door frame 3 that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. Predetermined frame lamp (including top lamp, excluding bulb burnout and stock notification LED) blinks in white Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Output re-notification cancellation condition The peripheral control board 1510 receives "A001H" as a power-on operation command, and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed.

Regarding the notification of the three states described above, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, and the notification is given with priority in the order of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. More specifically, the priority may be set in the order shown in FIG. Priority 1 has a high notification priority, and priority 9 has a low notification priority. That is, when a plurality of notifications should be given, notifications with a high priority (small numbers) are given. In addition, if the notifications of the same priority are satisfied and the notifications conflict with each other, even if the notifications are switched by switching between the conflicting notifications, the notification that is satisfied first is performed, and after the notification is released. If the competing notification satisfies the condition, the competing notification may be performed. Specifically, in priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so the notifications do not conflict. In the priority 4, the excess ball abnormality notification and the normal electric auditors prize winning abnormality notification may occur at the same time, and the two notifications may conflict with each other.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM abnormality is detected Priority 2: Setting change notification priority in setting change mode 3: RAM clear when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch 954 Notification (except RAM clear by setting change)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification priority in the setting confirmation mode 4: Excessive prize ball abnormality notification when prize balls are paid out by a predetermined number or more Priority 4: Normal electric auditors when a predetermined number or more are continuously inactive Normal electric auditors product prize abnormality notification priority 5 when a winning prize is detected or when a predetermined or more prizes are detected during one operation of the ordinary electric baking products: The difference between the winning number and the ejecting number of the special winning opening Of the discharge abnormality when the number of times exceeds a predetermined number 6: Priority of vibration sensor abnormality notification when vibration is detected 7: Door opening abnormality notification priority when opening of the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: When a predetermined number or more of consecutive winnings are detected when the special winning opening is not operated, or when a single big hit hits a predetermined winning or more Large prize winning prize notification when detected

Next, details of the above-described power-on process (FIGS. 179 and 180) will be described. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of the power-on process executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the processing of the start address 8000 of the program code. Disable protection and disable area of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to release the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. It should be noted that the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is validated, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set to the watchdog timer (step S2001) and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). By once setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then turning it OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated, the hall control board 1510 waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated. If the employee of the above mistakes the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 by mistake, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the process at power-on, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed. Even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the register or the like which is a temporary storage means is determined later. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation is surely detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2006). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and therefore the process waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2006.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within the predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that can be selected in the stages of setting 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the set value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), the value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2024), and the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is set. Wait for initialization by. Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, even if the set value is an abnormal value, it is not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the set value is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not activated. In the hall where the pachinko machine is installed, you want to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, clear latency probability variation (high probability non-time saving) and return to normal state with low probability time saving) In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the setting value is initialized by the RAM clear operation during business, the setting value is reset and the power is cut off to continue the business, the setting change mode is started, and the original setting value is reset. There is a need. In order to prevent such trouble, the RAM clear operation maintains the set value without clearing it.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the sub-start waiting timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires. Waits for activation (step S2008). The waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time after the power is turned on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, not after the setting value is determined.

After that, it is determined again whether or not the power failure notice signal indicates that there is a power failure (step S2009). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and thus the process waits in step S2009.

Also, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in the register (step S2010). Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from the data (excluding the data saved in the stack) used as the game control area in the area backed up in the internal RAM 1312 at the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power is normally backed up (the processing at the time of power failure was normally executed) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data of the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality because the power-off processing has not been normally performed.

If there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). ..

Then, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded are masked (step S2013). Then, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 has been operated to ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON when the power was turned on (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that the setting change operation is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode was set when the power failure occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting status management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be performed using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting status management area is a value indicating RAM abnormality (08H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2036 in FIG. 187. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to the normal state. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the values of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2016 and S2019 to step S2031 are different, so that both programs can be made common, The size can be reduced.

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2019). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON, it is determined that the RAM clear operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 08H is maintained until the power is shut off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off and then the setting is changed to turn on the power, the RAM abnormality can be cleared. That is, when it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from a value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) to a value indicating setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is always via the setting change. In other words, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation is performed before it is determined whether the state at the time of the power failure is the RAM abnormality. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, in order to recover the state before the occurrence of the power failure, the information on the game state at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer (step S2020).

After that, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2021). If the setting key 971 has been operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022). It proceeds to step S2036. That is, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated) regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is in the setting confirmation mode, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Since steps S2018 to S2022 are processing executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S2019) and the setting key 971. Any of the operation determination (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2019), and the operation of the setting key 971 is determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on process (FIG. 186), will be described.

If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, in step S2032, the determination can be performed based on the determination result stored in the register.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2033), and by the RAM abnormality initialization processing, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. The RAM (work area and stack area) used outside is initialized (step S2034). Details of the initialization processing at the time of RAM abnormality will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2035).

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2036), and the hardware random number (for example, winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2037). Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2039), and the process proceeds to the main processing on the main control side (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main processing on the main control side is executed after step S2039 of the power-on processing (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2040). If the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number updating process 2 is executed (step 2041). Details of the random number update process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. In the random number update process 2, a random number other than the random number for making the winning determination in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery is mainly updated.

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is detected, the power-off time processing (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power-off process, a process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2042). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, data writing to the main control internal RAM 1312 is prohibited, and rewriting of game information is protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, and stores the checksum in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2045). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Lastly, RAM protection valid (write prohibited) and invalid area invalid are written in the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2046), and wait until recovery from power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to release the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid to enable access to all areas of the main control RAM 1312. It should be noted that the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is validated, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormal time initialization process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM abnormality initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the game control area outside stack pointer value in the stack pointer (step S2051), and registers all registers. The value is stored in the register save buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

After that, it is determined whether initialization is performed at the first power-on based on the value of the first power-on flag at power-on (step S2053). The first power-on means the power-on as a pachinko machine for the first time, and the power-on after the backup power supply is cut off and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 is erased. For example, when the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed in the main body frame 4) is disconnected, the backup power supply to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off and the data in the main control RAM 1312 cannot be held.

If the initialization is performed when the power is first turned on, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the initialization is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined whether the base calculation target discharge ball is outside a predetermined range (step S2054). If the base calculation target discharge ball is outside the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the discharge ball of the base calculation target is within the predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range (step S2055). Then, if the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range, the RAM abnormal initialization process is terminated and the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is out of the normal range, 00H is written and initialized in all work areas outside the use area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2056), and 00H is written in all stack areas outside the use area. Is written and initialized (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set to the initialization flag at power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the calling source.

190 and 191 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1 for performing bank switching. Without being configured, the registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt, and the RET Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to its original state. When the configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. When the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2062 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 described later is a process related to input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interruption process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since it is determined as NO in step S2604, the winning is detected, but the fraud is not detected. Even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize balls, the variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered preferable that the injustice is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the injustice is not detected.

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input processing 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which the person who intends to commit a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by radiating a radio wave or the like.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, in order to change the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random numbers and the small hit symbol determining random numbers updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 188, respectively. Update the random number for initial value determination.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears to be mixed To prevent the flickering of the LED.

After that, the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and the test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, it is preferable to turn on only the game state error signal and turn off the other signals.

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2068). The details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the value stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

Next, FIG. 191 will be described. When it is determined in step S2064 of FIG. 190 that a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 detects the state of the sensor (switch) for fraud detection. Is executed (step S2080). Specifically, when a detection signal or the like from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is read and a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information storage area is displayed. Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input process 2, it is determined whether or not fraud is detected in the fraud detection process of step S2084. In addition, in the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to the fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, a prize winning abnormality such as a special winning opening or an excessive winning of ordinary electric auditors' prizes is also determined.

After that, the timer updating process is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time when the special symbol display 1185 lights according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process, the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation determined by the normal electric auditors product control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, the payer ACK signal that indicates that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is input. When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set, the time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, a prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a self-check for creating a prize ball command for paying out game balls and for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 sends the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data.

Subsequently, a frame command reception process is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information to inform the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and the above-mentioned transmission information storage area Remember. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to make a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 conforms to the system of commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is directly output from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, a fraudulent activity detection process is executed (step S2084). In the fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state (magnetism, vibration, prize winning abnormality, etc.) related to fraud is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when it is not in the jackpot gaming state, it is detected by the count switch that the game balls have entered the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the main control program Creates an award-winning abnormality display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Then, a switch passing command output process of creating a command corresponding to passage detection of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting opening switch and setting it in the transmission information storage area is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and the base display output process is executed (step S2087). Unlike other processing, the base display output processing is processing that is executed using the second area outside the game control area, and is common processing that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, before and after the execution of the base display output processing, the predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area, and the base display is executed. It is not updated in the output process. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Then, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, and the probability variation state is set based on the big hit symbol random value. It is determined whether or not to move. When the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this determination, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) so that the game balls can be received in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. As a result, the game state shifts to an advantage for the player. If the probability variation transition condition is established, then the probability variation state is entered, while if the probability variation transition condition is not established, the game state other than the probability variation state is entered. Here, the "probability variation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Then, the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether to open/close the second starting opening door member 2549 according to the result of the lottery in the ordinary lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), and the starting opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous for the player. Transition to the state.

Then, the output data setting process is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or the big hit game. In the state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), as information output to the hall computer, information output signal during probability change, special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals, ordinary symbol display information output signals, time saving information output information, starting mouth winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Then, it progresses to step S2070 of FIG.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interruption process when the setting state management area does not have the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and mainly executes the process of changing the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process returns to the calling process without executing the setting process.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be performed at all. This RAM abnormality is set to the setting change state by operating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power supply is cut off and the power failure process is executed. And the RAM abnormality is eliminated. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to the original position, the setting change mode ends and the normal game can be started.

When the power is turned on again, if the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated other than to activate the setting change mode, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained, RAM abnormal condition continues, normal game cannot be started. In other words, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and enter the normal gaming state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode without fail.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it is detected whether an edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed after the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting process is executed. (Step S2104), the process returns to the calling process.

When the operation for ending the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is ended by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. Set up. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt processing), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, when the power is restored and hot start is performed in the normal game state, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM clear switch is operated to clear the RAM. Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM abnormality, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 and the output of the security signal is stopped.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation occurs.

When the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even after the power is restored, so that the security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. In case of hot start, the security signal is output only for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time for starting the peripheral control board 1510). The output of the security signal restarts after the transition. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, a period during which the security signal output is stopped is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during security signal output due to RAM abnormality, power is restored and RAM abnormality continues. When: ・The power supply recovers after a power failure occurs while outputting the security signal in the setting change mode, and the setting change mode continues.・The power supply recovers after a power failure occurs while outputting the security signal in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, the security signal output is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored, so that the security signal is generated on the hall computer side. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or the state associated with the output of the security signal is canceled.

In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends. The output of the security signal is stopped after a lapse of time. In addition, the same processing as the setting confirmation mode may be performed in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether it has been done (step S2106). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1. When the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Instead, the process returns to the calling process.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is turned on. In this way, when the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even when the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored, the setting change switch 972 It can be prevented that the setting can be changed by the operation.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the setting display process. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting status management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

After that, the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2113), and the driver is driven to output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). , Return to the processing of the calling source.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). The power-on operation command is, as shown in FIG. 202(A), a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 which is the initial value. It should be noted that other bits may be set to 0 (step S2121). The bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2122). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode or the RAM abnormality, so the power-on setting process is terminated and the calling source is called. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area is determined according to whether the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. The area is initialized (step S2123).

After that, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). As shown in FIG. 202(B), the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not the normal game startable state is based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). The power-on return destination command is, as shown in FIG. 202(C), a command for notifying the gaming state regarding the special symbol.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The set value command is a command for notifying the set value, as shown in FIG.

It should be noted that a power-on state command, a power-on return destination command, and a set value command are transmitted together with a special symbol holding number command indicating the holding number of the special symbol variation display game, and the function display unit 1400 and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are transmitted. In, the hold number display may be restored to the state before the power failure. In addition, the special symbol hold number command is sent in the order of sending the power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the set value command, before sending these commands, and during sending these commands. May be.

After that, the process returns to the calling process.

The power-on setting process is executed when the power is restored and is not in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. , Power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and set value command) are transmitted at the time of a power failure recovery that is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode ends, or the setting confirmation mode ends.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interruption prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interruption permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number updating process 1 of step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt is prohibited before the initial value random number updating process so that the initial value random number updating process is not interrupted by the timer interrupt process. Interrupts are enabled after the initial value random number update process. Initial value random number is a big hit determination random number for lottery of special symbols, a random number for lottery of ordinary symbols, a type of symbol at the time of special symbol big hit (low probability/high probability/time saving/non-time saving etc.) ) Is a random number for changing the initial value for each cycle such as a random number that determines ).

After that, the random numbers other than the winning random number (except the initial value random number) are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In another example 1 described below, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the setting confirmation mode as in the setting change mode. In this modified example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 954 is set to the setting change mode or the setting change mode. It does not switch the confirmation mode, but has only a function as an operation for changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), and executes the switch input processing 3 (step S2141). Details of the switch input processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 197. To do. Note that in step S2141, the switch input process 1 of S2062 may be applied instead of the switch input process 3 described in FIG.

Then, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063), and the setting change/confirmation process is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change/confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the switch input process 2 is executed (step S2080), the timer updating process is executed (step S2081), and the prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2083), the injustice detection process is executed (step S2084), and the switch passing command output process is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), the base display output process is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2086). S2088). Subsequently, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2089), the normal symbol and ordinary electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2090), and output data setting processing is executed (step S2091). Further, the peripheral board command transmission process is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), and the register bank is switched (step S2072) by the return command (for example, RETI) to return to the process before the interruption. To do.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart of the switch input process 3. The switch input processing 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt processing, reads various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates ON edges, and inputs the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and acquires the number of times the process is repeated from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of times the process is repeated is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address designated by the switch winning information data is obtained (step S2162), and the input level data area address designated by the switch winning information data is obtained (step S2163). Further, the input information is read from the acquired input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected using the logical correction value specified by the switch winning information data (step S2165).

Then, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area (step S2166). If it is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, it is possible to acquire the bits of the input port used during the normal game.

On the other hand, if the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked by the mask value during the setting change/confirmation designated in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits used in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode of the input port can be acquired.

After that, input level data is generated from the bits acquired by the mask processing, and the input level data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, the edge data of the change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

After that, it is set in the next block as the switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether the processing of all the switch input ports is completed (step S2172). If it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports is not completed, the process returns to step S2162 to process the next input port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports is completed, the switch input processing 3 is ended and the processing before the interruption is returned to.

FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198(A) is divided into n blocks (n is the number of times the process is repeated), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, and a normal game mask. The value, the mask value during setting change/confirmation, and the address of the input level data area are included.

FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area.

The switch input level/edge data area includes n sets of the address of the input level data area and the address of the input edge data area.

Since the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area as shown in the figure, it is not designated in the switch winning information data. When the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged consecutively, the address of the input edge data area is set in the same table together with the input level data area. Although the address of the input level data area and the input edge data area is a 16-bit (2 byte) value, it is set as the address of the input level data area and the input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be a lower 8 bits (1 byte) value. That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change with the value of the input level data area or the input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the RAM area address, and only the lower byte needs to be set. Can be reduced.

199 is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table, FIG. 199 (A) shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, FIG. 199 (B) Shows an example of the configuration of the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199 is divided into n blocks (n is the number of times the process is repeated), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, And the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include ports having different logical correction values and mask values. That is, in the switch prize information data table shown in FIG. 198(A), the mask value is set to be different between the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal game state, but the switch prize information data table shown in FIG. 199. In, in the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal game state, different switch winning information data tables are used, and different switch winning information data can be acquired.

In order to deal with such a configuration, the switch input processing 3 (FIG. 197) is changed as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) or the normal gaming state, and the start address of the switch winning information data corresponding to the determination result is set. Then, in step S2166, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data in step S2167 without determining whether it is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the setting change/confirmation process. The setting change/confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change/confirmation processing shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting status management area, the setting change/confirmation processing is ended and the processing before interruption is returned to. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and the test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is composed of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, in bit 7, a reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 is detected at level 1. In bit 6, the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected at level 0. In bit 5, the signal level becomes 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. In bit 4, when the setting key 971 is turned on, the signal level becomes 0. In bit 3, when the door opening sensor detects the opening of the door frame 3, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 2, the level becomes 0 when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism. Bits 1 and 0 are unused.

FIG. 201(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting status management area.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting state management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are defined. Not not. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H is recorded if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, the setting change mode is updated from 08H to 02H, and when the setting change mode is ended, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

FIG. 202A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting status management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte is the recorded content of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting status management area. This is because the value of the setting status management area is 00H during normal play, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error with an output of 0. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is created at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, it is created once in the case of hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and twice in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, that is, processing at power-on and completion of setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 gives a notification in the above-described manner according to the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality state (see FIG. 184).

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the game command during the normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game command during the normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, a symbol operation, a lamp, a movable body, a voice, etc., is an effect corresponding to the received command. Then, the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that the game state is inconsistent. Further, it may be notified with a small volume that the mismatch of the game state occurs. This is a player who does not understand that the game state is inconsistent without performing any effect until the predetermined condition is reached, and the special symbol variable display game does not start even if the player wins the starting opening. This is to prevent such a trouble of the pachinko machine 1 that may occur in the hall. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, so that the function display unit 1400 normally displays the function display such as the special symbol or the normal symbol. To be done.

FIG. 202(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not it is in the normal game startable state based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, which indicates that the normal game can be started. The low-order byte of the power-on status command may be used to notify the series code of each pachinko machine model. For example, bits 6-4 can be used to identify eight different series. The power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. 220(C). By using the power-on state command shown in FIG. 220(C), the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the information (game state before power failure) recorded in the power-on buffer.

FIG. 202(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on return destination command. The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the game state regarding the special symbol, for example, the power-on return destination command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, the lower byte indicates the game state regarding the special symbol. Show. The power-on return destination command notifies the state of the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory when a power failure occurs. The power-on return destination command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

FIG. 202(D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting value command. The set value command is a command for notifying the set value. For example, the set value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A1H, and the lower byte is the set value. The set value command is transmitted when the power is restored and the setting change mode ends or the setting check mode ends, which is neither the setting change mode nor the setting check mode. In addition, when the special symbol fluctuation starts, or when the game state changes (big hit, probability change, start and end such as shortening), it is transmitted. Thereby, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the set value command transmitted when the power is turned on, in the subsequent game (for example, the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol), the setting value is changed to the correct set value, so that the wrong setting is made. The production is not performed based on the value. The effect based on the set value is an effect that suggests the set value using an effect device such as a display, a lamp, a sound, and a movable body, and with a predetermined probability, an effect mode that is difficult to occur (or does not occur) in normal times. The generated value indicates the set value. This set value suggestion effect may include effects in other forms of the effects exemplified below, and may include a gaze. As the set value suggesting effect, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which is an example of a display device, displays an effect such as a notice corresponding to the setting value, or changes the variation mode of the symbol from the normal time (for example, variation of the left and right middle symbols). The timing of start and confirmation will be different from normal timing (normally each symbol will start fluctuating at the same time, in the case of high setting, it will start fluctuating in the order of left, middle, right)) If you use, the notification sound corresponding to the set value will be generated with a certain probability at the time of winning the start mouth, or the sound during production will be different from the normal sound (male voice in normal time, female voice in high setting Voice, etc.), etc.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating a processing state relating to a special symbol/special electric accessory, and m is a value according to a set value.

As shown in the figure, in the hot start in which the normal game state is activated, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on state command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (310nH) → set value command (A10mH) Sent in order.

When the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, a power-on operation command (A001H)→a power-on state command (3001H)→a power-on return destination command (3101H)→a set value command ( A10 mH).

Further, in the setting change mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted, the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation is performed. The command (A001H)->power-on state command (3001H)->power-on return destination command (3101H)->set value command (A10mH) is transmitted in this order.

In the setting confirmation mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A002H) is transmitted, the set value is confirmed, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation command (A001H). -> Power-on status command (3001H) -> Power-on return destination command (310nH) -> Set value command (A10mH).

When the RAM is abnormal, first, the power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted, and the setting change mode is activated by the setting change operation (setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is cut off. The power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, a power-on operation command (A001H)→a power-on state command (3001H)→a power-on return destination command (3101H)→a set value command (A10mH) in this order. Sent.

When the RAM is abnormal, first, the power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted, and if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored after the power is shut off, the RAM abnormal condition continues and the power-on operation command (A009H) continues. ) Is sent. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, a power-on operation command (A001H)→a power-on state command (3001H)→a power-on return destination command (3101H)→a set value command (A10mH) in this order. Sent.

As described above, when the main control board 1310 is activated in the normal gaming state, a command group (combination of a plurality of commands in a predetermined order) in which a plurality of commands indicate the return of the power supply is peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is transmitted to the control board 1510. Therefore, it is determined that the normal game state can be started after all the series of commands A001H to A10mH are received, and when some commands of the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It is determined that the normal game state cannot be started, and the fact that the normal game state cannot be started is notified.

That is, similar to the effect in the state where the game command is invalidated, of the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, a symbol operation, a lamp, a movable body, a voice, etc. are received. May be performed), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that the game state is inconsistent.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the set value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game compensates for the set value command missed at power-on to start the normal game. You may.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command with the predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the set value when the peripheral control board 1510 is powered on. You may update to the setting value corresponding to a command.

The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously. All you have to do is send it to the board.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a state transition of values set after the power is restored from the state before the power is shut off in the setting state management area.

The operation of the pachinko machine having the setting function at the time of power-on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated or the setting key 971 is operated. There are several patterns for convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204(A) when the power is cut off immediately before is in the normal game state (VALID_PLAY=00H) and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 has a game control including a whole area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated to be ON when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. The base display 1317 also displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is a game control area including all areas stack areas other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power failure. In addition, even if all the stored contents in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not maintained, at least an area in which information for returning to the game state before the power outage is stored (memory in which information regarding a game is stored Area (special pattern, area for normal symbol, area for prize ball, random number generated by program (fluctuation pattern random number, initial value random number, etc.)) should be maintained, and is necessary to return to the game state before power failure The area in which the non-information is stored may be in a state different from that before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. The same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on.

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204(B), in the operation example 1 in the setting change mode at the time of immediately before power-off, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of power failure recovery, in the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power-on. Regardless of whether or not the setting key 971 is operated, the main control RAM 1312 initializes an area used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

Initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in the pattern 2-1 may be performed by initializing an area used as a game control area including a stack area in addition to the storage area initialized by the initialization processing already executed when the power failure occurs. Good. For example, if the power supply is cut off during the initialization processing of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage area for which the initialization processing has not been completed may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization processing at the time of power failure, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

When a power failure occurs during the initialization processing, an area (for example, a RAM clear processing flag) for storing whether the main control RAM 1312 is in the initialization processing is provided, and while the RAM clear processing flag is set, It is advisable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area that is the target of the initialization process.

Further, the process of monitoring a power failure in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be repeatedly executed. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), for example, a timer interruption may be used to monitor the power failure notice signal.

The power failure monitoring process and the process when the power is cut off are performed in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the normal game state, whether in the common process or in separate processes. It may be executed by a common process in the mode, and may be executed by another process in the normal game state. That is, the power failure monitoring process and the power-off process may be common to at least two of the three or more states (operation modes) in the operation of the pachinko machine.

As described above, in the pattern 2-1 when the power is shut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the setting is always performed regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change work in the hall, the setting change mode may be activated even when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954 for activating the setting change mode when the power is restored may not be operated. Therefore, by controlling as in pattern 2-1, it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated when the power is restored (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting confirmation mode is started instead of the setting change mode, or only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. When the setting key 971 is not operated, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal gaming state is activated, and when neither switch is operated, the normal gaming state is activated. However, if control is performed as in pattern 2-1, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the control is always started in the setting change mode.

<Pattern 2-2>
When the setting change mode is set at the time of the last power-off and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of power failure recovery, unlike the pattern 2-1, even if the operation is performed by another pattern shown in FIG. 204(C). Good. When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Area is initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of power-on is other than the above, at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated at the time of power-on (OFF), the main control RAM 1312. The memory content of does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the game stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H indicating the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312. The base display 1317 also displays an error (for example, an error code). The game stopped state may be a game stopped by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311, or a game stopped by not executing the normal game process.

That is, in pattern 2-1, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are unconditionally switched to the setting change mode after the power is restored, but in pattern 2-2, the setting is performed when the power is restored. When the operation to activate the setting change mode by the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the setting change mode is activated, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM abnormality) And That is, in the pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power recovery is operated, the normal game is not started as the RAM abnormal state and the normal operation is performed after the setting change mode. Start the game. Therefore, when the operation to activate the setting change mode is not performed, the normal game is not executed in a state different from the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode such as a RAM abnormality, and the game stop state is notified to notify the hall. The employee may be prompted to operate the setting change mode.

When the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are not initialized until the next setting change operation is performed. Stand by with the game stopped. The game stopped state may be a game stopped by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311, or a game stopped by not executing the normal game process. After that, the power is once shut off, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are operated to the setting change mode, and the power is turned on, so that the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is changed. Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Patterns 3-1 and 3-2>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204(D) in the case of the setting confirmation mode at the time of immediately before power-off and the main control RAM 1312 being normal at the time of power failure recovery will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 serves as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the stored content of the main control RAM 1312 does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 also displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be set. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored content of the main control RAM 1312 does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on. In this case, as in the pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 204(E), the main control MPU 1311 may be activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H (the original value). The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the above), and the base display 1317 may display the current set value for confirming the setting.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204(F), an operation example when the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality at the time of power failure recovery will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 has a game control including a whole area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area becomes 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a display for changing the setting.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, that is, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main operation is performed. The content stored in the control RAM 1312 does not change. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the game stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. The same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 also displays an error (for example, an error code).

If there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is cut off immediately before, if the main control RAM 1312 is initialized before the power is cut off, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized again when the power is restored, and Initialize the devices built in the main control MPU 1311. (2) Restart the hardware random number. (3) The main loop may be executed after at least one of setting the interrupt permission is executed.

Even if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 immediately before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined before it is judged whether the state before the power failure is the RAM abnormality (step S211 in FIG. 179). The presence or absence of the operation of is determined. When the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is started, but even when the setting change operation is not performed when the power is turned on (the setting confirmation mode is In any of the case where the operation for starting is performed, the case where only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, and the case where neither is operated), the state of the RAM abnormality is maintained. That is, normally, when the setting change mode is started and the setting check mode is started, the setting change mode process and the setting check mode process are executed in the timer interrupt process, but the power is turned off and then turned on again from the RAM abnormal state. If so, different processing is executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned off and on again to recover from the RAM abnormal state, when starting in the setting change mode, the processing of the setting change mode is executed in the timer interrupt processing as usual, but it is started in the setting confirmation mode. When this is done, a process different from normal is executed within the timer interrupt process.

In this way, when the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is not necessary to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be described using a time chart. The outline of the time chart described below is as follows.
・Time chart for normal setting changes (Fig. 205)
・Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Fig. 206)
-Time chart when the setting key 971 is OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored in the setting change mode at the time of power failure, and the setting change mode is entered (Fig. 207).
-Time chart when the setting key 971 is ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored in the setting change mode at the time of a power failure, and the setting change mode is entered (Fig. 208).
-Time chart for transition to the setting confirmation mode when the setting key 971 is OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored in the setting confirmation mode during a power failure (Fig. 209)

FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Change to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in FIG. 184 above.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 described above according to the received power-on command.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6). Further, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N+1 to N+2, and updates the base display 1317. The subsequent set value N+2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, the set value is changed in the range of 1 to 6 each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and is updated to 1 when the set value exceeds 6. It

The employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal game state. Yes (T8). The generated power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the main control MPU 1311 finishes all lighting of the function display unit 1400 and starts display in the normal gaming state. Further, the base display 1317 blinks all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. In this way, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined mode at the start of the normal gaming state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly understood, and operation mistakes at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command becomes 01H. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. 202(D). Both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on status command (3001H) are for notifying the normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously. Just send it to.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that it is in the normal game startable state by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect of the normal game state, and the setting of the decoration lamp is being changed. The notification effect of is continued. In addition, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if the normal game state is restored. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a delay of a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot know the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum output time of the security signal is This is to ensure.

FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, the normal game state or the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is turned on. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and records 01H in the setting state management area for setting. Switch to confirmation mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the shift to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the confirmation of the setting value is completed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T6). By setting the value of the setting state management area to 00H, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. 202(D). In the setting confirmation mode, since the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in principle, the state before the power failure is transmitted as the lower byte of the power-on return destination command.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that it is in the normal game startable state by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect of the normal game state, and the setting of the decoration lamp is being changed. The notification effect of is continued. In addition, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if the normal game state is restored. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode because it is in the setting change mode when the power supply was cut off immediately before. Note that, as shown in FIG. 204(B), in the setting change mode at the time of immediately before power-off, the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at power-on. It shows the case of starting.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Change to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, and therefore receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes the power-off processing (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, it is possible to reduce power consumption during the power-off processing, and to prevent resetting due to the power supply (5 V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. The output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening/closing of the special winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc. may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes the security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , Waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting status management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is set at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Move to. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again as in the case of shifting to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power failure processing is executed thereafter, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power-off processing, so the mode is the setting change mode at the time of power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM clear process may be executed when the power is restored and the game control area may not be initialized. After the initialization is performed again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts the output of the security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets the operation state to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, and therefore receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value, and then sets the updated set value as a base. It is displayed on the display 1317.

The employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. 202(D).

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that it is in the normal game startable state by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect of the normal game state, and the setting of the decoration lamp is being changed. The notification effect of is continued. In addition, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if the normal game state is restored. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) has been delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because when the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a different operation mode depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on even in the setting change mode immediately before the power is turned off.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Change to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, and therefore receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes the power-off processing (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, it is possible to reduce power consumption during the power-off processing, and to prevent resetting due to the power supply (5 V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. The output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening/closing of the special winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc. may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes the security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , Waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operation mode is changed depending on the level of the signal 954. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so as to be in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on again, but the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates the setting change (02H), the main control MPU 1311 is restarted in the setting change mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. To be done. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again as in the case of shifting to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power failure processing is executed thereafter, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power-off processing, so the mode is the setting change mode at the time of power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM clear process may be executed when the power is restored and the game control area may not be initialized. For example, in the above-described FIG. 186, if the state before the power failure is the setting change, YES is obtained in step S2015, the process branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187) and the RAM abnormal time initialization process (step S2034) is executed. However, if the process branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before power-off is continued without executing the RAM abnormality initialization process step S2034. After the initialization is performed again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts the output of the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, in the setting change mode, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are activated by turning on the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on. The setting change mode can be started even if it is not ON.

Note that when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned off when the power is turned on again, the setting state management area differs from the time chart shown in FIG. 00H may be recorded and restarted in a state where the normal game cannot be executed (for example, RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. That is, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode at the time of power failure, if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored, the system is restarted in the state of the RAM abnormality. In other words, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally terminated at some point.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, and therefore receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value, and then sets the updated set value as a base. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

The employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command becomes 01H. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. 202(D). The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously. All you have to do is send it to the board.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that it is in the normal game startable state by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect of the normal game state, and the setting of the decoration lamp is being changed. The notification effect of is continued. In addition, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if the normal game state is restored. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) has been delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because when the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, in the setting confirmation mode at the time of the last power-off, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of power-on.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Change to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the shift to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power failure and executes the power-off processing, and the main control MPU 1311 stops the operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, it is possible to reduce power consumption during the power-off processing, and to prevent resetting due to the power supply (5 V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. The output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening/closing of the special winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc. may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes the security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , Waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting status management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so as to be in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates the setting confirmation (01H), the peripheral control board is restarted in the setting confirmation mode at the timing T13 when the activation waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is activated when the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is turned on. It is also possible to activate the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the shift to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

In the setting confirmation mode, even if the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated and the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, the set value is not updated and the set value is displayed on the base display. It is continuously displayed at 1317.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the confirmation of the setting value is completed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 starts an effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect) after a lapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started. May be. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the predetermined delay time elapses after it is known that the normal game start is possible by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect of the normal game state, and the setting of the decoration lamp is being changed. The notification effect of is continued. In addition, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if the normal game state is restored. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because when the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

210 to 212 are diagrams showing a configuration example of the jackpot determination threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold value table stores a hit determination threshold value of a jackpot determination random number value for randomly selecting a jackpot for a special symbol.

The jackpot threshold judgment table shown in FIG. 210 includes a set value table selection address table and a set value judgment threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 210 is an example of determining a jackpot when the jackpot determination random number value is larger than the threshold value defined in the table.

In the set value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold value table selected for each set value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte has a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold value table for each set value stores a threshold value at a low probability (normal state) and a threshold value at a high probability (probability change state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and this value is used as an offset to select the threshold value determination table for the current setting value. Then, using the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, the threshold for jackpot determination is acquired from the selected threshold determination table. Then, the jackpot determination random number value obtained at the time of winning at the starting opening is determined to be a jackpot when it is equal to or greater than the obtained threshold value, and is determined to be a deviation when it is less than the threshold value.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 includes a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 211 is an example in which a jackpot determination random number value is determined as a jackpot when the value is in the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

In the set value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold value table selected for each set value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte has a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold table for each set value includes a lower threshold at a low probability (normal state), an upper threshold at a low probability (normal state), a lower threshold at a high probability (probability change state), and a high probability (probability change state). Stores the upper threshold.

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and this value is used as an offset to select the threshold value determination table for the current setting value. Then, the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) is used as an offset to determine whether the selected threshold judgment table is a low probability block or a high probability block, and the lower limit threshold and upper limit for jackpot judgment are determined. Get the threshold. Then, the jackpot determination random number value obtained at the time of winning at the starting opening is determined to be a jackpot when the obtained lower limit threshold value or more and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold value, and is determined to be a deviation when it is outside the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value.

The big hit determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 212 is a low probability setting value table selecting address table, a low probability setting value determining threshold table, a high probability setting value table selecting address table, and a high probability setting. It is composed of a judgment threshold table for values. The big hit determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 211 is configured integrally with a low probability table and a high probability table, but the big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table. It is configured separately.

The low-probability set value table selection address table defines the pointer address of the determination threshold table that is selected for each low-probability (normal state) setting value. Defines the pointer address of the determination threshold value table selected at each set value of high probability (probability change state). The data defined in each setting value table selection address table may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte has a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold value table for each set value for low probability stores a lower limit threshold value at a low probability (normal state) and an upper limit threshold value at a low probability (normal state). The determination threshold value table for each set value for high probability stores the lower limit threshold value at high probability (normal state) and the upper limit threshold value at high probability (normal state).

At the time of jackpot determination, it is determined by the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) whether the address table is for selecting the low probability setting value table or the high probability setting value table. The setting value is acquired as an offset from the address table for selecting the setting value table, and the determination threshold value table corresponding to the current setting value is selected by the acquired offset. Then, the jackpot determination random number value obtained at the time of winning at the starting opening is determined to be a jackpot when the obtained lower limit threshold value or more and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold value, and is determined to be a deviation when it is outside the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value.

[12-17. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 2]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the original function of the RAM clear switch 954 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 and In order to distinguish between the setting change function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

First, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the processing of the start address 8000 of the program code. The protect invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to release the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that all areas of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. It should be noted that the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is validated, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set to the watchdog timer (step S2201) and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). By once setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then turning it OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). As the register, any one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information related to calculation in processing calculation) provided in the main control MPU 1311 may be used. The general-purpose registers are divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and the register of bank 0 is used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312 and is erased without holding information at the time of power failure, and is different from the RAM area where information is backed up at the time of power failure. Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated, the hall control board 1510 waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated. If the employee of the above mistakes the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 by mistake, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the process at power-on, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed. Even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the register or the like which is a temporary storage means is determined later. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation is surely detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2206). If the power failure advance notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the process waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2206.

After that, a sub-start waiting timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is started (step S2207). The waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from power-on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

Then, it is determined again whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2208). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and thus the process waits in step S2208.

After that, a set value confirmation process is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range and whether the value of the setting state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the setting value confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2210). This is because in order to ensure independence between the processing outside the game control area and the processing inside the game control area, the information used in one processing does not affect the other processing. After that, when the power is turned on, the RAM confirmation processing outside the game area is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). Details of the RAM confirmation processing outside the game area at power-on will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2212).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is provisionally set in the B register (step S2214). The B and C registers used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. Note that the general-purpose register of bank 0 is used in the process when the power is turned on.

The value set in the setting status management area in the second modification is different from that shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 as shown in FIG. 220(A). 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the second example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H is recorded if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode is ended, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the determination result is stored in the C register (steps S2215 and S2216), and the process proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from the data (excluding the data saved in the stack) used as the game control area in the area backed up in the internal RAM 1312 at the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power is normally backed up (the processing at the time of power failure was normally executed) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data of the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality because the power-off processing has not been normally performed.

If there is no abnormality inside or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2217), and the information of the setting state management area is set in the B register. (Step S2218), and the process proceeds to step 2219.

Then, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

Then, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded are masked (step S2220). As the register for storing the value of the PF port, a general register different from the register temporarily set in S2213 and S2214 is used. After that, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2221). Then, if the setting key 971 is operated ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated ON, it is determined that the setting change operation is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is in effect when a power failure occurs (step S2222). For example, when the value in the setting status management area is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, the abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination results stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality both inside the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value of the saved setting status management area is a value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

When it is determined that the power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to the normal state. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the values of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2226 and step S2231 to step S2235 are different. In this way, since the values of the setting state management area are different between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process associated with the setting changing process, the callers can be distinguished even if the programs for both RAM clearing processes are common. , It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2226). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON, the process proceeds to step S2235.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off and then the setting is changed to turn on the power, the RAM abnormality can be cleared. That is, when it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting status management area changes from a value indicating RAM abnormality (03H) to a value indicating setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is always via the setting change. In other words, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation is performed before it is determined whether or not the state at the time of the power failure is the RAM abnormality. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, in order to recover the state before the occurrence of the power outage, the information on the game state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer (step S2227).

Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2228). If the setting key 971 has been operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. .. That is, even if the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal game state is set. In addition, when the power failure occurs in the setting confirmation mode and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the state may not be the normal game state, but the same power failure confirmation mode as before the power failure may occur.

Since steps S2225 to S2229 are processing executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S2226) and the setting key 971. Any of the operation determination (step S2228) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2226), or the operation of the setting key 971 is determined (step S2228). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

If YES is determined in step S2221 or step S2222, the value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, the abnormality outside the game control area can be determined based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2266 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2235.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, RAM clear processing outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2232), and the game area outside RAM abnormal time processing is executed (step S2233). The details of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

Then, the setting values in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, areas other than the setting state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). That is, the RAM clear processing outside the game control area will not be executed unless the setting is changed. When the RAM is out of the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, as in the case of the RAM in the game control area, and the game is stopped. Therefore, the RAM is returned from the abnormal state unless the setting is changed. I can't. However, while the RAM clear condition outside the game control area is only setting change, the RAM clear condition inside the game control area is setting change and RAM clear switch 954 operation (when the RAM abnormality does not occur. When the RAM is forcibly cleared by the employee's operation).

In the RAM clearing process in the game area in step S2235, the setting value and the setting state management area are excluded. If the setting value becomes high due to an illegal RAM clearing operation by the player, the hole side is damaged. This is because if a problem (RAM abnormality) occurs during the game with the high setting and the game is stopped, the RAM clear operation changes the high setting to the low setting, which causes damage to the player.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This is because when the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the power is cut off while the command is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, the power is cut off during transmission of the variation command, so that the symbol command is transmitted, but the following variation pattern command may not be transmitted. If only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, when an untransmitted command in the process related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command is transmitted during the setting process after the power is restored, and the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command. There is a possibility that the game state will be set and malfunction will occur. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately, but the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, it is recommended to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2237), and the hardware random number (for example, winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2238). By activating the hardware random number in step S2238, the hardware random number is also updated in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. However, the hardware random number is activated at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. May be. Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (step S2240), and the process proceeds to the main process on the main control side (FIG. 221).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart of the set value confirmation process. The set value confirmation process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (FIG. 213), and it is determined whether the set value of the set state management area is within the normal range and whether the value of the set state management area is within the normal range. To do. The setting value confirmation process may be executed when the power supply is turned on, when the setting change mode ends, or when the setting confirmation mode ends. Further, it may be executed at the time of starting the special symbol change or at the time of changing the game state (at the start and end of a big hit, a certain change, a time saving, etc.)

In the set value confirmation processing, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value other than the value originally recorded in the set state management area is set (step S2250). As shown in FIG. 220(A), 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area. Therefore, if a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal and the process advances to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting status management area, it is determined whether the setting value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that can be selected in the stages of setting 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the set value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined to be outside the predetermined range.

If the set value is out of the predetermined range, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the set state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on process. .. On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on process.

Regarding the value recorded in the setting state management area and the setting value, whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is determined even during the progress of the game (every change start, when switching the game state, etc.). For this reason, a condition that is determined to be a RAM abnormality regarding the setting state management area and the setting value during the game, a RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (a work area in the game area excluding the setting state management area and the setting value, and outside the game area) The two conditions, that is, the condition determined as (work RAM abnormality) are different. The two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be partially the same. For example, when it is determined whether the setting state management area and the setting value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that some of the two determination conditions are the same.

In this way, the RAM abnormality determination conditions are different. If the RAM abnormality determination regarding the set value is performed only when the power is turned on, if the set value is changed due to misbehavior, noise, or the like, a hall or a game is played. This is because it is disadvantageous to the person, and it is desirable to detect the abnormality early and shorten the period in which the disadvantage occurs.

In addition, by subrouting the RAM abnormality determination processing relating to the setting state management area and the set value during the game, the same program is determined by calling the subroutine as needed during the progress of the game and determining the RAM abnormality. The size of the program can be reduced without providing it in a place.

Further, although the setting state management area is excluded from the RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, it may be treated as the RAM abnormality determination target in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By setting the setting status management area as the RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, in the setting change mode before the power failure, and when the RAM abnormality is determined when the power is restored, the RAM abnormality is prioritized. Therefore, if the value in the setting state management area is abnormal (that is, RAM abnormality), it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area in the main control RAM 1312 in which the set value is stored may be the RAM abnormality determination target at power-on or may not be the RAM abnormality determination target.

The priority in the determination at power-on is that the RAM abnormality has the highest priority, and the normal game state has the lowest priority. Further, the setting change mode has a higher priority than the setting confirmation mode and the RAM clear processing is executed by the RAM clear operation. In this way, by executing the determination process in the order of the priority of the derived states, it is possible to accurately derive the state of high priority even when a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the game area outside RAM confirmation processing when the power is turned on. The power-on game area outside RAM confirmation processing is executed in step S2211 of the power-on processing (FIG. 213), and an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is determined.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the game area value to the stack pointer (step S2261). , All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2262). The stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all the registers in the processing executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized by turning on the power for the first time (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5 AH, it can be determined that the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by the first power-on or the like.

If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized by turning on the power for the first time or the like, the process proceeds to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by turning on the power for the first time, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and the calculated checksum is normal. Is determined (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process advances to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, the RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. It should be noted that the RAM abnormality outside the game control area is determined in S2231 based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in S2266.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the checksum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2267), and the LED blinking cycle timer sets the blinking cycle value (600 (Milliseconds) is set (step S2268), and the mode switching time (5 seconds) is set in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking and displaying the upper two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and one blinking cycle is set by the expiration of the LED blinking cycle timer. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling mode switching in the base display 1317, and when the mode switching time timer times out, the mode is switched to the base display mode.

After that, 0 is set in the performance display monitor display management area for initialization (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

After that, the power-down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2272), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to the power-on process.

FIG. 217 is a flow chart of the out-of-game area RAM abnormal time process. The out-of-game area RAM abnormal time process is executed in step S2233 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), and sets the outside game area stack pointer value to the stack pointer (step S2281). All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2282). The stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all the registers in the processing executed outside the game control area.

Then, the outside-use-area RWM initialization processing is executed to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the outside-use-area RWM initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 218.

After that, the RAM normality discriminating value (00H) is set in the RAM abnormality discriminating area (EX_RWMERERROR) outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2284, it is determined in step S2231 whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal at the next power-on.

Then, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2285), the blink cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set to the LED blink cycle timer (step S2286), and the mode switching time timer is set to the mode. The switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base display 1317.

Then, all register values saved in the register save buffer outside the game area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). , The stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored (step S2289), and the process returns to the power-on process of the calling source.

FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the outside-use-area RWM initialization processing. The outside-use-area RWM initialization processing is executed in step S2283 of the outside-game-area RAM abnormality processing, and the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized.

First, the main control MPU 1311 writes 00H to the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for initialization (step S2290). Then, 00H is written and initialized in the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2291). Then, the process returns to the out-of-game area RAM process.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to execute the power-on initialization.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 220(B), the power-on operation command is a command composed of 2 bytes that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The upper byte is A0H and the lower byte is the setting state management. It is a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 which is the initial value. In addition, 0 may be set to the other bits (step S2301). The bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2303). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode or the RAM abnormality, so the power-on setting process is terminated and the calling source is called. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area is determined according to whether the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. The area is initialized (step S2304).

After that, a power-on state command is created and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220(C), the power-on state command is a command composed of 2 bytes, where the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is the state before the power failure.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in FIG. 202(C), the power-on return destination command is a command composed of 2 bytes that notifies the gaming state regarding the special symbol, and the upper byte is 31H and the lower byte is special when a power failure occurs. The state of the symbol and the operation state of the special electric accessory are shown. The power-on return destination command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in FIG. 202(D), the set value command is a 2-byte command for notifying the set value. The upper byte indicates A1H and the lower byte indicates the set value.

In addition, a power-on state command, a power-on return destination command, and a set value command are transmitted together with a special symbol hold number command indicating the hold number of the special symbol variable display game, and the hold number is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The state before the power failure may be restored. The transmission order of the special symbol hold number command is as follows: after sending the power-on state command, power-on return destination command and setting value command, before sending these commands, or during sending these commands. May be.

After that, the process returns to the calling process.

The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of the setting change mode. The power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when the setting key 971 is turned off and the setting change/confirmation process ends. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all the processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

When the setting change/confirmation process is executed, the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process, so the power-on operation command is transmitted twice. On the other hand, when the setting change/confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only by the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is transmitted for the peripheral control board 1510 to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.). By receiving the command, the peripheral control board 1510 gives a notification corresponding to the state such as the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the RAM abnormality.

In the setting/confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, the volume and brightness adjustment by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and the adjustment by the employee of the hall (peripheral board box 1520). (Adjustment of volume and brightness by the volume provided in the above) may be effective. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

Further, in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the entire screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be used to display the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM abnormal state. .. In this case, a voice message indicating the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be output. Furthermore, you may notify using some or all lamps (a lamp provided in the door frame 3 may be included).

FIG. 220(B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting status management area, and the value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting status management area. Unlike that shown in FIG. 202(A), in another example 2, the lower byte becomes 04H when a RAM abnormality occurs.

Specifically, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte is the recorded content of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting status management area. This is because the value of the setting status management area is 00H during normal play, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error with an output of 0. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is created at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, the command of A001H or A004H is created once in response to hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality. In the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the command of A002H or A003H is created in the power-on process. After that, it is created twice as a command of A001H at the time of ending the setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, the above-described operations are performed according to the normal game startable state (A001H), the setting confirmation mode (A002H), the setting change mode (A003H), and the RAM abnormality state (A004H). The notification is performed in this manner (see FIG. 184). The notification of the normal game startable state is not shown in FIG. 184, but a demonstration screen is displayed or a standby state effect for explaining game contents is performed.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the game command during the normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game command during the normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, a symbol operation, a lamp, a movable body, a voice, etc., is an effect corresponding to the received command. Then, the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that the game state is inconsistent. Further, it may be notified with a small volume that the mismatch of the game state occurs. This is a player who does not understand that the game state is inconsistent without performing any effect until the predetermined condition is reached, and the special symbol variable display game does not start even if the player wins the starting opening. This is to prevent such a trouble of the pachinko machine 1 that may occur in the hall. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, so that the function display unit 1400 normally displays the function display such as the special symbol or the normal symbol. To be done.

FIG. 220C is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on state command. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202(B) in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of the second example defines four states 01H, 02H, 03H, 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether the normal game startable state is based on the recorded contents of the power-on state buffer, and further notifying the state before the power failure. For example, if the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify the RAM clear. If the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the low probability/non-time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game startable state. If the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the high probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. If the lower byte is 04H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the low probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started.

Also, the power-on state buffer is a storage area that stores information on the game state at the time of the power outage in order to restore the state before the power outage as described above. The value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer is stored. For example, in the low probability non-time saving, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 2 obtained by adding 1 to this value is stored in the power-on state command. When the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, the power-on state buffer is 0, so 1 is stored in the power-on state command, and it can be notified that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main processing on the main control side is executed after step S2240 of the power-on processing (FIG. 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2310). In another example 2, the power failure is monitored in the main processing, but the power failure processing may be executed when the power failure is detected by monitoring the power failure by the timer interrupt processing. For example, at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON, and the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that there is a power outage.

If the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number updating process 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates the random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power-off process, a process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2312). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2314), the power-off processing is executed, and necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off (step S2315). Details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2316).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, as the power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2318). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, RAM protection valid (write prohibited) and invalid area invalidity are written to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2319), and wait until recovery from power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. Therefore, by disabling the prohibited area of the RAM protect register, the reset function by the access to the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (not reset), and the entire area can be accessed. It should be noted that the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is validated, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of the power-off process. The power-off process is executed in step S2315 of the main process on the main control side (FIG. 221), and a necessary process is executed before the power is cut off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), and sets the outside game area stack pointer value to the stack pointer (step S2321). All register values are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2322).

Subsequently, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the outside checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). After that, 5 AH is set in the power down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). When 5 AH is recorded in the power down check area, the power failure process is normally executed. In this sense, the power-down check area and the backup flag of the RAM in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power outage process is normally executed, it is already determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, and as a result, if the power down check area is set to 5AH, the main control Initialization of the area outside the game control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power outage process has been normally executed are provided inside the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. .. This is for double determination in the game control area and outside the game control area, and because one storage area is not shared between the game control area and outside the game control area, independently. This is because processing is desirable. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that the power outage process has been normally executed, 5AH is erroneously set in the flag, and if the power is restored without performing the power outage process, it is erroneously determined that the power outage process was successfully executed. Will be judged. By thus making a double determination, the possibility of erroneous determination is reduced.

Further, the two flags should be provided in separate areas (for example, areas in which the lower byte (**00H to **FFH) or the upper byte (00**H or 01**H) of the address do not overlap). By this, even if the data is rewritten due to a noise or the like, it can be correctly restored.

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2325), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326), and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1 for performing bank switching. Without being configured, the registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt and the RET Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to its original state. When the configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2331).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2332). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2332 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 in FIG. 191 is a process related to input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since NO is determined in step S2335, the winning detection is performed, but the injustice by the injustice detection sensor is not detected. Even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize balls, the variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered preferable that the injustice is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the injustice is not detected. For example, since the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed with the door open, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member are easily shaken. Vibration may be erroneously detected. Therefore, such false notification can be prevented by stopping the fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In addition, the employee in the hall possesses a magnet for collecting the ball falling on the floor, and it is possible to prevent an erroneous notification of the magnet held by the employee during the operation of changing the setting or confirming the setting. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has means for invalidating (or limiting, restricting, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after shifting to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at power-on). After the end of), fraud detection is enabled, and fraud detection is invalidated (or restricted, regulated, suppressed, etc.) by the means in a specific game state (for example, during setting processing).

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input processing 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which the person who intends to commit a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by radiating a radio wave or the like.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, in order to change the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random numbers and the small hit symbol determining random numbers updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when the setting process for changing the set value is executed. This is because the hardware random number that determines the win or loss is updated regardless of whether the setting change or setting confirmation process is in progress, so the random number generated by software is also updated at the same timing as the activation of the hardware random number, that is, By updating even during processing of setting change and setting confirmation, inconsistency between hardware random number and software random number is unlikely to occur, expected value of production in game and design value of expected value that jackpot is derived at specific production The deviation from can be suppressed.

Then, the set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). Note that the set value confirmation process is executed periodically in the timer interrupt process, but even if the set value confirmation process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of switching the game state (for example, the jackpot probability It is advisable to carry out the establishment of a specific condition such as switching, at the start or end of a big hit game, at the start or end of a time saving state, or at the time of fraud detection (for example, when the door is open or when magnetic detection is made). The resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed if the determination is made when the specific condition is satisfied, even if the determination is not made periodically in a short cycle such as when the timer interrupt process is executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By confirming the value of the setting state management area after the setting value confirmation process (step S2334, FIG. 215), when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value of the setting state management area immediately after is confirmed (S2335). It is controlled so that the normal game processing is not executed. If the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears to be mixed To prevent the flickering of the LED.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved in the game area stack area (step S2338). Then, the test signal output process is executed to output the test signal (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2340). Before and after the execution of the processing for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and the register are saved as in the other out-of-game-area processing, and the processing is restored after the processing is completed. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as processing outside the game control area. The test signal processing may be executed as the processing in the game control area as long as it does not affect the game even if it is executed as the processing in the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as the processing in the game control area, it is not necessary to save and restore the flag register (steps S2337 and S2340) before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339).

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area of a multi-byte FIFO format. The command generated each time a command is generated is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The generated command may be directly stored in the transmission information storage area in the FIFO format of the serial communication circuit each time the command is generated.

Then, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2345), and the process before the interrupt is returned to.

The process after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area is the same as the process described above with reference to FIG. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process advances to step S2343 in FIG. 223.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not have the value (00H) indicating the normal game state, and mainly the process of changing the set value is performed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the calling source.

Thus, in the case of a RAM abnormality, a power-on operation command (A004H) indicating the RAM abnormality is transmitted for each timer interrupt until the RAM abnormality is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating a RAM abnormality is sent only once, the peripheral abnormality control board 1510 cannot know the state of the gaming machine because the RAM abnormality re-notification is not sent when the command is missing. Is. Further, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the state of the gaming machine, the abnormality notification is not performed, so that the state of the gaming machine cannot be confirmed from the outside. Further, when the RAM is abnormal, a game other than the power-on operation command is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 because the game is not played. Therefore, as long as the RAM abnormal state continues, the power-on operation command is repeatedly transmitted. is doing.

That is, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, a command of the same system (for example, a power-on operation command) is triggered by the execution of a periodic process (timer interrupt process) that is executed at every predetermined cycle, and a predetermined number of times (for example, A small number of times such as one time, two times, three times, etc.), and a second case in which the pachinko machine is in operation, and the number of times is not limited and the transmission is repeated every predetermined period. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly transmitted regardless of whether or not the peripheral control board 1510 correctly receives, and other game-related commands are not transmitted when the normal game is stopped. But the command is sent.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command relating to the RAM abnormality, it notifies the RAM abnormality. Even if the same command is received again during the RAM abnormality notification, the received command relating to the RAM abnormality may be invalidated and the current notification may be continued. By invalidating the subsequent command, for example, it is possible to prevent the voice notification from being repeated from the beginning, and normal notification can be performed.

The command relating to the RAM abnormality may always be the same, but may be different depending on the timing of transmission. The command consistency may be determined by changing the command relating to the RAM abnormality according to the timing of transmission. For example, by using the power-on operation command (A004H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at power-on and the power-on operation command (A005H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at normal timer interrupt, When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A004H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at power-on continues. On the other hand, if the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), the set value and the setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored (for example, during the normal game) It can be determined that has become abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be made different in each of the two determined states. For example, it is possible to notify the RAM abnormality when the RAM abnormality at the time of power-on continues, and to notify the setting value abnormality when the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored.

It should be noted that during the RAM abnormality notification, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) may be stopped. This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be performed at all. This RAM abnormality is set to the setting change state by operating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power supply is cut off and the power failure process is executed. And the RAM abnormality is eliminated. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to the original position, the setting change mode ends and the normal game can be started.

Further, when the power is turned on again, if the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated other than to activate the setting change mode, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained, RAM abnormal condition continues, normal game cannot be started. In other words, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and enter the normal gaming state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode without fail.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it is detected whether an edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed after the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (determination of setting change or setting confirmation completion), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), and the setting state management area is initialized (step S2353). (S2354), the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2355), and the process returns to the calling process.

When the operation for ending the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is ended by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. Set up. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt processing), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, when the power is restored and hot start is performed in the normal game state, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM clear switch is operated to clear the RAM. Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, and the output of the security signal accompanying the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is started.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation occurs.

When the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even after the power is restored, so that the security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and a power failure occurs before the delay time elapses, or a hot start is performed after the power is restored, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time for starting the peripheral control board 1510). The output of the security signal restarts after the transition. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, a period during which the security signal output is stopped is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during security signal output due to RAM abnormality, power is restored and RAM abnormality continues. When: ・The power supply recovers after a power failure occurs while outputting the security signal in the setting change mode, and the setting change mode continues.・The power supply recovers after a power failure occurs while outputting the security signal in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, the security signal output is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored, so that the security signal is generated on the hall computer side. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or the state associated with the output of the security signal is canceled.

In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends. The output of the security signal is stopped after a lapse of time. In addition, the same processing as the setting confirmation mode may be performed in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether or not a value (02H) indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356), and the setting change is performed. When it is determined that the mode is set, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 is operated (step S2357). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, the value is set to 0 (steps S2359 and S2360). After that, the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Instead, the process returns to the calling process.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is turned on. In this way, when the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even when the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored, the setting change switch 972 It can be prevented that the setting can be changed by the operation.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The setting display processing is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 223) when the setting status management area does not have the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming status, and the processing of displaying the setting value is executed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment port (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

After that, the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2374), and the driver is driven to output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). , Return to the processing of the calling source.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 3]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In another example 3 described below, the point that the timer interrupt process for the setting change process is provided separately from the timer interrupt process for the normal game is the main difference from the another example 2 described above. The processes other than those described below are the same as those in the second example described above.

Note that, as in the second modification, in the third modification, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, but the main control RAM 1312 of the original RAM clear switch 954 is selected. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

226 and 227 are flowcharts of the power-on process executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts the process from the start address 8000 of the program code when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protect invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In the third modified example, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. It should be noted that the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is validated, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksums do not match, or if the backup flag is not set normally, the setting change operation is not performed after the function of the gaming machine is stopped as a RAM error and the game is disabled. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is controlled so that it is not initialized and the game is not executed.

Therefore, when the prohibited area of the RAM protect register is set to be valid, a reset occurs due to an erroneous access to the prohibited area of the RAM due to malfunction or failure, and when the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-on process, Since the power failure process is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is judged that the RAM is abnormal, not only the game is initialized by the RAM clear processing, but also the game cannot be resumed unless the employee in the hall releases the RAM error (setting change operation), so the RAM protect register is prohibited. It is desirable to set the area to "invalid".

The prohibited area may be set to be valid. When the prohibited area is set to be valid, if the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 is accessed due to fraud or the like, the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs the RAM abnormal operation (setting change operation). Therefore, resistance to fraud can be improved.

Next, the simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set to the watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure notice signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (not a power failure).

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read out from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated, the hall control board 1510 waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated. If the employee of the above mistakes the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 by mistake, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the process at power-on, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed. Even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the register or the like which is a temporary storage means is determined later. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation is surely detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2406). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and thus the process waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2406. Since the watchdog timer is not cleared in the loop of step S2406, the watchdog timer resets unless the power failure is released. In the reset by the watchdog timer, the program is immediately started from the start address without executing the security check like the system reset, and the power-on process is executed. Therefore, unless the power failure notice signal is released in the loop of step S2406, the loop does not exit.

In this way, the power failure determination processing for detecting the power failure notification signal is the first in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, and the second in step S2450 of main processing main processing during normal game. Running in place. In the latter (step S2450), the power outage process after step S2462 is executed by detecting the power outage, but in the former (steps S2406 and 2408), the power outage process is not executed even if the power outage is detected. Since the checksum value and the backup flag value are maintained during the loop period, it is possible to correctly return to the state at the time of the power failure without executing the power failure process.

The reset in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a system reset generated by a reset circuit and a user reset generated by an access outside the designated area of the watchdog timer or the game control RAM 1312. In the system reset, the program is started after a security check of several hundred milliseconds is executed, but in the user reset, the program is started immediately without executing the security check when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer during normal game processing, power failure processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. It When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game state is initialized by the RAM clearing process, and the game cannot be restarted unless the clerk in the hall performs the RAM abnormality canceling operation (setting changing operation). On the other hand, in steps S2406 and S2408 during the power-on process, even if the watchdog timer causes a reset, the hall clerk does not perform the RAM abnormality clearing operation (setting change operation), and the state at the time of the power failure occurs correctly. I can return.

As described above, with respect to the reset generated by the watchdog timer, the case where the setting change operation for canceling the RAM abnormality to restart the pachinko machine 1 is necessary and the case where it is not necessary are usually set. Occurrence of reset by the watchdog timer during the time game is when a software failure occurs, the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and the contents different from the game state at the time of the power failure is stored. It is highly possible that the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. On the other hand, the occurrence of the reset by the watchdog timer in the power-on process is when a hardware failure occurs, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is unlikely to be destroyed. Therefore, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. This is because there is little need to convert it into a product.

Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, the same processing is performed for other types of user resets other than the reset generated by the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of reset factors, and the above-described processing can be executed by a reset (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer) that occurs with one of the reset factors.

After that, a sub-start wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is started (step S2407). The waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time after the power is turned on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, not after the setting value is determined.

Then, it is determined again whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2408). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and thus the process waits in step S2408. It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure may be made in either step S2406 or S2408, or in either one.

Then, the set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2409).

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2410), the game area outside RAM confirmation processing at power-on shown in FIG. 216 is executed, and an abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is determined. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2412).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2414).

The value set in the setting status management area in the third example is different from that shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 as shown in FIG. 220(A). 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the third example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H is recorded if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode is ended, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Further, it is determined whether the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal (steps S2415 and S2416). Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from the data (excluding the data saved in the stack) used as the game control area in the area backed up in the internal RAM 1312 at the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power is normally backed up (the processing at the time of power failure was normally executed) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data of the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality because the power-off processing has not been normally performed.

Then, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality both inside the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2417), and the information of the setting state management area is registered in the B register. (Step S2418) and the process proceeds to step 2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register, and thus the RAM abnormality is determined as the determination of "RAM abnormality" and "game state before power interruption" in the subsequent processing. The size of the program can be reduced because it is not necessary to re-execute the process (the process of determining whether the checksum and the backup flag match).

Further, the value of the setting state management area at the time of a power failure or the determination result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power restoration is set in the B register, and the RAM abnormal value is temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419. By setting, unnecessary processing can be deleted and the size of the program can be reduced. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area when YES is determined in each of the determinations in steps S2423 and S2424, and step S2436 is performed. Need to execute a JUMP instruction to. However, since the RAM abnormal value has already been provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by specifying S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, as shown in the source code example below, JUMP Orders can be reduced.

Example of source code when RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H; S2421 (when bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR Z,$111;
$000:
LD W,03H ;S2419 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436; Jump instruction to S2436
$111:
CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,$000;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

Example of source code for temporarily setting RAM abnormal value in step S2419
LD W,03H ;S2419
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR NZ,S2436;

CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,S2436;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

After that, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is provisionally recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Then, among the register values in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). After that, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether or not the setting key 971 has been operated to ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON when the power was turned on (step S2421). If the setting key 971 has been operated to ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the flow proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode was in effect when a power failure occurred (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, the abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality both inside the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting status management area in step S2425, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting status management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as a temporary setting value. By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the values of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2426 and step S2431 to step S2435 are different. Therefore, since the value of the setting state management area is different between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process associated with the setting change process, even if the programs for both RAM clearing processes are common, the caller can be distinguished. It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

As shown in the source code example below, at the timing of step S2425, it is not determined whether 01H or 00H is recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting state management area at the time of determination, but if this is done, 00H is set in the setting state management area after the RAM clear processing when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON. A recording process is required. Therefore, since the processing contents are different between the power-on processing and the RAM clear processing when the settings are changed, a dedicated processing is required for each portion other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312. Therefore, in order to make the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312 common when the setting is changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, 00H is provisionally set at step S2425.

Source code example when 00H is not provisionally set in the setting status management area in step S2425
CP A,10H ;S2426 (PF register information is stored in A register)
JR NZ,$000 ;(bit5: setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR NZ,$111;

LD W,01H ;S2429
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;

$000:
XOR W,W ;S2425 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2435 ;Increase

$111:
XOR W,W; increment
LD (VALID_PALY),W; increment
JR S2436 ;Increase

S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
...
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Example of source code for temporarily setting 00H in the setting status management area in step S2425
XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

CP A,10H ;S2426
JR NZ,S2435;

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR Z,S2436;

LD W,01H;
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
...
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2426). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON, the process advances to step S2435.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off and then the setting is changed to turn on the power, the RAM abnormality can be cleared. That is, when it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is always via the setting change. In other words, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation is performed before it is determined whether or not the state at the time of the power failure is the RAM abnormality. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, even if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it can automatically return to the normal game state.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, after the power is shut off, when it is determined that the work areas of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are normal when the power is restored, The game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. By doing this, it is possible to return to the normal gaming state by the ON/OFF operation of the power switch.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is turned off, it is determined that the work areas of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are normal when the power is restored, and the RAM is cleared. When the switch is operated, the game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. By doing this, it is possible to return to the normal game state by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is cut off.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is shut off, and when the power is restored, it is determined that the work areas of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are normal, and set. When the key 971 is operated, the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized to start the game processing. By doing this, it is possible to return to the normal game state by operating the setting key 971 after the power is cut off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, in order to recover the game state before the power outage, the game state information at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer (step S2427). In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 side, each game state (for example, a low probability state or a high probability state, a time saving state or a non-time saving state) corresponding production (background, decorative pattern mode (low probability time) And using a decorative pattern of a different mode between the high probability and the high probability) is prepared.In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, the power-on operation command Used in creating.

After that, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2428). If the setting key 971 is operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the process proceeds to step S2436. .. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure occurrence is the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (when the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting confirmation mode is entered.

Since steps S2425 to S2429 are processing executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S2426) and the setting key 971. Any of the operation determination (step S2428) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

If YES is determined in step S2421 or step S2422, the value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above, an abnormality outside the game control area can be determined. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2432) and the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing shown in FIG. 217 is executed (S2433). After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

Then, the work area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). The unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may be initialized together.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because when the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the power is cut off while the command is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, the power is cut off during transmission of the variation command, so that the symbol command is transmitted, but the following variation pattern command may not be transmitted. If only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, when an untransmitted command in the process related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command is transmitted during the setting process after the power is restored, and the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command. There is a possibility that the game state will be set and malfunction will occur. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately, but in the setting confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is recommended to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2437). Specifically, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC0 for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to enable interrupts. The time of CTC1 for controlling the timer interrupt process in the normal game state is not set, and the interrupt of CTC1 for normal game remains set to be prohibited.

Then, the hardware random number (for example, the winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438), the update of the hard random number is started, and the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2440), and the process proceeds to the main process on the main control side (FIG. 228).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main processing on the main control side is executed after step S2440 of the power-on processing (FIG. 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting change process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2450). In the third example, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure process may be executed when the power failure is detected by monitoring the power failure with the timer interrupt process. For example, at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON, and the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that there is a power outage. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power interruption may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processes, and by both timer interrupt processes. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupt is set to be prohibited (step S2451), and whether a value (00H) indicating a game start is recorded in the setting state management area is checked. A determination is made (step S2452). If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt is set to allow (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. ..

When it is determined in step S2452 that the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt timer is switched to the normal game, and then the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). To execute. Before executing the second main loop processing, first, a timer interrupt cycle time is set in the CTC1 for normal game (step S2454), the CTC0 interrupt (timer interrupt for setting processing) is stopped, and the CTC1 interrupt ( A timer interrupt for normal game processing) is activated (step S2455), and interrupt permission is set (step S2456).

Then, the power failure notice signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2457). When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates the random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. After that, returning to step S2457, the second main loop process for normal game is repeatedly executed.

When a power failure advance notice signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the main processing on the main control side shown in FIG. 228,
In the power-off process, a process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

After that, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power-off processing is executed, and the processing necessary before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area is executed (step S2465). ). The details of the power-off process are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, The data is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the RAM protect valid (write prohibited) and the set value for invalidating the prohibited area are written to the RAM protect register to prohibit the writing of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and wait until the recovery from the power failure ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is released to allow access to all areas. When an access is detected in the designated prohibited area by designating an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area in the RAM protect register as valid, the main control MPU 1311 is It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing of clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468) is executed in this order. However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated order, and may be another order.

In addition, in the third example, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt processing, and the power failure processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power failure signal at least at the start and at the end, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of power failure.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the timer interrupt for normal game, and always for setting change processing once. There is an opportunity to execute the timer interrupt processing of. In addition, at this execution timing, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, in the case of branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process of calculating the base value is executed in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing), and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. The processing for calculating the base value can be switched so as not to execute the processing. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power interruption may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processes, and by both timer interrupt processes. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for the setting process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). Note that the main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the banks can be switched. According to the configuration, either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing for setting processing or normal game. Therefore, the instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt and the RET Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If the configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute the bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing and return to the bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to a winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since NO is determined in step S2473, winning detection is performed. , No fraud is detected. Even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize balls, the variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered preferable that the injustice is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the injustice is not detected.

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input processing 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which the person who intends to commit a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by radiating a radio wave or the like. For example, while an employee in the hall is performing a setting change or a setting confirmation operation, the door is open, and the sensor attached to the door is positioned so as to approach the adjacent pachinko machine. Therefore, while performing the setting change operation or the setting confirmation, it is possible to detect the goto action by the radio wave or the like in the adjacent pachinko machine.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interruption process for the setting change process, the value of the game state management area is normally other than 00H (01H to 03H), so the value (00H) indicating the game start in the setting state management area. It is not necessary to determine whether or not is recorded, but in order to prevent a fraudulent action such as illegally shifting to the setting change mode during a normal game, a determination is made intentionally.

If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the processing relating to the change of the setting value and the setting display (steps S2474 to S2478) is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2479. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , A special winning opening, a solenoid signal such as an electric chute, and a response signal (ACK) to the payout control board 951 when the command is received. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears to be mixed To prevent the flickering of the LED.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2477). After that, the setting display processing shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer of a FIFO format of a plurality of bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit has a finite capacity, untransmitted commands remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is full or full. If it is close to, it may be controlled whether or not the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit according to the free state of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is determined whether the free space in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. If the free space is larger, the command is issued. It may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, each time the command transmission processing to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed, a predetermined upper limit is set for the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is stored. If the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds the predetermined upper limit without judging the free space, all commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission processing executed in the next timer interrupt processing, the remaining commands may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

The upper limit number may be set to be equal to or smaller than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, when the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, about 80 bits of serial communication can be performed in one timer interrupt cycle. When one command is composed of 20 bits, 80/20=4, so it is preferable to set 4 commands as the upper limit. Note that, in effect, one more command may be set as the upper limit. This is because the maximum length of the command is assumed to be 20 bits, but there are many commands shorter than the maximum length.

Note that the transmission information storage area is stored in the transmission information storage area so that the transmission information storage area does not become full regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the data amount of the command stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process. The capacity of the storage area in which the previous command is stored may be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

Then, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

Unlike other timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing shown in FIG. 229 does not execute the random number update processing (R_ART_K). However, since the hard random number has already been activated in S2438, Similar to the random number, the random number update process may be executed in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process.

In addition, in another example 3, even if the test signal output process is executed by the timer interrupt process for the normal game (for example, output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230), it is called within the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. Good.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart of the normal game timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the banks can be switched. Is configured so that either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the setting processing or the timer interrupt processing for the normal game. Therefore, the instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt and the RET Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If the configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute the bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing and return to the bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2491).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2492). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, in order to change the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random numbers and the small hit symbol determining random numbers updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination.

After that, the switch input special processing is executed (step S2494).

After that, the timer updating process is executed (step S2495). In the timer update process, for example, the time when the special symbol display 1185 lights according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process, the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation determined by the normal electric auditors product control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, the payer ACK signal that indicates that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is input. When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set, the time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, a prize ball control process is executed (step S2496). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a self-check for creating a prize ball command for paying out game balls and for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 sends the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a serial communication circuit for two-channel output, and sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 on one channel and a command to the payout control board 951 on another channel. The transfer rate (baud rate) of serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, as the transfer rate, the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 side may be set lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510 side. This is because the prize balls controlled by the payout control board 951 are accompanied by a game value, and are therefore less likely to be affected by noise or the like, and are transferred at a low speed so as not to become an abnormal prize ball command due to garbled commands or missing commands. On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, a command for performance without a game value is transmitted, so it is sufficient that the performance is restored by the next command. Furthermore, a large number of commands are transmitted, the performance is performed well, and the game is played. It is desirable that the command be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 early so that the person does not feel uncomfortable. In addition, the response of the effect is bad (for example, even if the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts to change, the decorative symbol does not start to change in the main liquid crystal display device 1600). This is because the player feels anxiety that it may be out of order.

Subsequently, a frame command reception process is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information to inform the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and the above-mentioned transmission information storage area Remember. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to make a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 conforms to the system of commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is directly output from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit. The main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, a fraudulent activity detection process is executed (step S2498). In the fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state (magnetism, vibration, prize winning abnormality, etc.) related to fraud is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when it is not in the jackpot gaming state, it is detected by the count switch that the game balls have entered the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the main control program Creates an award-winning abnormality display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Then, a switch passing command output process of creating a command corresponding to the passage detection of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting opening switch and setting it in the transmission information storage area is executed (step S2499).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and the base display output process is executed (step S2501). Unlike other processing, the base display output processing is processing that is executed using the second area outside the game control area, and is common processing that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output process, before and after the execution of the base display output process, the predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area, and the base display device is saved. It is not updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Subsequently, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, and the probability variation state is set based on the big hit symbol random value. It is determined whether or not to move. When the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this determination, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) so that the game balls can be received in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. As a result, the game state shifts to an advantage for the player. If the probability variation transition condition is established, then the probability variation state is entered, while if the probability variation transition condition is not established, the game state other than the probability variation state is entered. Here, the "probability variation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Then, the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether to open/close the second starting opening door member 2549 according to the result of the lottery in the ordinary lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), and the starting opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous for the player. Transition to the state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or the big hit game. In the state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), as information output to the hall computer, information output signal during probability change, special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals, ordinary symbol display information output signals, time saving information output information, starting mouth winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784. In the output data setting process, the test signal output process may be executed to output the test signal.

In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer of a FIFO format of a plurality of bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2508), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 4]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In another example 4 described below, the process related to the setting change is executed by the main process on the main control side instead of the timer interrupt process. The processes other than those described below are the same as those in the third example described above.

In addition, in the modified example 4, as in the modified example 2, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the main control RAM 1312 which is the original function of the RAM clear switch 954 is selected. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main processing on the main control side is executed after step S2440 of the power-on processing (FIG. 227). The main control side main process of the other example 4 executes steps S2481 to S2484 instead of step S2452 of the main control side main process of the other example 3 (FIG. 228). In the main control side main processing, the setting change and the setting confirmation processing are executed not only when the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided as in the other example 4, It is also applicable to the other examples 1 and 2. For example, the main control main processing shown in FIG. 231 includes a first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453) and a second main loop processing for normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). Also in the main loop process, one timer interrupt process (FIG. 196 of another example 1 and FIG. 223 of another example 2) is executed. The setting process (step 2068 of FIG. 190, step S2341 of FIG. 223) in the timer interrupt process. ) And normal game processing are executed. In this case, since only one timer interrupt process is executed in the main loop, it is not necessary to switch the CTCs in steps S2454 and S2455 described later.

In the main control-side main processing shown in FIG. 231, the same processing as the main control-side main processing (FIG. 228) of the third example is denoted by the same reference numeral.

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2450). In the other example 4, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure process may be executed when the power failure is detected by monitoring the power failure with the timer interrupt process. For example, at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON, and the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that there is a power outage. In the other example 4, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processes, and by both timer interrupt processes. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so that the interrupt is set to be prohibited (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change/setting confirmation processing is completed depending on whether the setting key 971 is returned to the OFF position (step S2484). Specifically, it is detected whether an edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed after the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF. If the operation for ending the setting change/setting confirmation processing is performed, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change/setting confirmation processing is not completed, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). By clearing the edge information, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed a plurality of times by one operation. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process that detects the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is executed once, so the setting was changed once. This is to prevent the setting from being changed by using the same edge information as the last time in the first main loop processing executed later. Note that only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared without clearing the edge information of the setting key 971. After that, the interrupt is set to permit (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. The reason why the interrupts are set to be disabled in the processing from S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing from being interrupted by the timer interrupt.

In the first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453), the RAM clear switch 954 and the edge information of the setting key 971 are continuously cleared, and when the normal game is started (execution of the second main loop processing). In the middle), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not referred to.

If it is determined in step S2484 that the setting change/setting confirmation process has been completed, the second main loop process for normal games (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop processing, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in the CTC1 for normal game (step S2454), the CTC0 interrupt is stopped, and the CTC1 interrupt is activated (step S2455). CTC1 is set to interrupt enable (step S2456).

Then, the power failure notice signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2457). When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates the random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. After that, returning to step S2457, the second main loop process for normal game is repeatedly executed. In addition, when it is detected that the setting key 971 is turned ON during the normal game (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command to that effect, and the peripheral control The board 1510 may give a notification effect to the display device. Since this notification effect is performed during the normal game, it is desirable that the mode does not disturb the progress of the normal game. For example, only a specific LED is lit and displayed, or in a narrow area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Characters or specific symbols may be displayed, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is turned ON may be displayed in accordance with the progress of the game.

When a power failure advance notice signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

In the power-off process, a process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

After that, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power-off processing is executed, and the processing necessary before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area is executed (step S2465). ). The details of the power-off process are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, The data is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the RAM protect valid (write prohibited) and the set value for invalidating the prohibited area are written to the RAM protect register to prohibit the writing of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and wait until the recovery from the power failure ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is released to allow access to all areas. When an access is detected in the designated prohibited area by designating an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area in the RAM protect register as valid, the main control MPU 1311 is It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing of clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468) is executed in this order. However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated order, and may be another order.

In addition, in the other example 4, the main processing on the main control side monitors the occurrence of the power outage, but the timer interrupt processing may monitor the occurrence of the power outage and execute the power outage processing based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power failure signal at least at the start and at the end, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of power failure. In the other example 4, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processes, and by both timer interrupt processes. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing and the timer interrupt for the normal game, and always for the setting change processing once. There is an opportunity to execute the timer interrupt processing of. In addition, at this execution timing, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, in the case of branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process of calculating the base value is executed in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing), and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. The process of calculating the base value can be switched so as not to execute the process.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In another example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting process. Therefore, in the timer interrupt process for setting change processing in the other example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process (steps S2477 to S2478) of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process in another example 3 (FIG. 229) is deleted. It is a thing.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1 for performing bank switching. Without being configured, the registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt and the RET Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to its original state. When the configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 of step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize ball, the special symbol, the normal The process related to the progress of the game such as the variable display of the symbols is not executed. In addition, although winning detection regarding the progress of the game is performed, detection regarding fraud such as magnets and impact (vibration) is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees in the hall. In the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, fraud such as magnets and shocks (vibration) is not performed, and fraud caused by magnetism or vibration is prevented. This is because it is considered preferable not to detect.

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input processing 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which the person who intends to commit a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by radiating a radio wave or the like.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interruption process for the setting change process, it is not necessary to determine the value of the game state management area. This is to deal with fraudulent acts that illegally shift to the setting change process. Further, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area before the switch input processing 1 (step S2472), and the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area. If so, the process may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the processing for changing and displaying the setting value (steps S2474 to S2476) is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2479. When a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command for notifying that abnormal timer interrupt processing is being executed may be generated. This is because when the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interruption process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 232 is not executed and some abnormality has occurred. The mode of this abnormality notification may be a notification using a liquid crystal, a lamp, or a sound such as a notification of a magnet, radio waves, vibration, etc., or a security signal may be output from the external terminal board 784. One or more of these notification modes may be adopted to notify by one or in combination.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , A special winning opening, a solenoid signal such as an electric chute, and a response signal (ACK) to the payout control board 951 when the command is received. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears to be mixed To prevent the flickering of the LED.

Then, the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476). Note that the processing of outputting the security signal may be executed in the main loop for the setting change processing of the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231 as in the case of the setting change/setting confirmation processing.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer of a FIFO format of a plurality of bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral board command transmission process may be executed after the end of the process of S2480 or S2481 of the main process, instead of the timer interrupt process.

Then, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

Unlike the other timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing shown in FIG. 232 does not execute the random number update processing (R_ART_K). This is because it is not necessary to update the random number generated by software when the RAM is abnormal, but the random number update process may be executed.

[13. Pachinko machine equipped with light guide plate]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine equipped with a light guide plate will be described. Recent pachinko machines are equipped with a light guide plate that emits light by illumination on the front surface side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and perform a special symbol variable display game together with the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this kind of pachinko machine, a complicated effect can be achieved by using a liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate to superimpose images, for example. Further, since the light guide plate is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, the light guide plate displays a stereoscopic effect together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate that allows stereoscopic viewing using the parallax of the left and right eyes, and an effect with a greater stereoscopic effect is displayed.

However, the production using the light guide plate has become rustic, and it is necessary to improve the enjoyment by new light production. Further, there is a light guide plate capable of displaying a plurality of patterns with one sheet, and it is desired to display more diverse patterns and to have a highly entertaining effect.

[13-1. Construction]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory 2500 and the front production unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 5, which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the first design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the second design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit.

The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, and a first design substrate 2611 and a second design substrate that are attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. 2612 and. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of irradiating light to the right side surface of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611, and the second pattern substrate 2612 includes light on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged vertically to the light guide plate 2610 so that the side surface of the light guide plate 2610 can be irradiated with light. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the side faces of the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 can be seen, and the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 can be seen from the player side. It is getting hot and the appearance in the game area 5a is improved.

Although the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 is described in this embodiment, another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the liquid crystal display device 1600.

The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by an innumerable first concave and convex portion that reflects light from the upward direction to the front side, and light from the lateral direction to the front side. And a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by an innumerable second reflective portion having an uneven shape. In other words, when the front light production unit 2600 causes the light guide plate LEDs of the first pattern substrate 2611 to emit light 2613, the first pattern 2621 can be emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and the light guide plate LEDs 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 are displayed. When the light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 are preferably full-color LEDs, and have a strong directivity for emitting light in a narrow range (LED with lens). Is desirable. By using the full-color LED, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be transferred onto the light guide plate 2610 in any single color or plural colors (for example, 7 rainbow colors).

On the light guide plate 2610, irregularities forming a plurality of first reflecting portions for reflecting the first pattern 2621 and irregularities constituting a plurality of second reflecting portions for reflecting the second pattern 2622 are minutely formed. In a state where the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 are not emitting light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light and is arranged on the rear side. The various ornaments of the unit 3000 and the effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well. In the light guide plate 2610, even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, a transparent region where the liquid crystal display device 1600 provided on the back side can be seen and the light irradiated to the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected but polished. The glass-shaped matted region, the lame region in which a reflection pattern that reflects transmitted light is formed regardless of the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610, and the light emitting portion of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( That is, a moving area in which a reflection pattern is formed so that whether light is emitted changes depending on the light traveling direction in the light guide plate 2610 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 234, the first symbol 2621 becomes a part of the effect of the special symbol variable display game together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described later. The first pattern 2621 is composed of moving areas 2621a and 2621c, glitter areas 2621b and 2621d, and a mat area 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transparent area 2621f. In the moving areas 2621a and 2621c, a part of the LED 2613 for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the lighting area is switched so that the moving area 2621a emits light or the moving area 2621c emits light. Therefore, by blinking the LED 2613 for the light guide plate, the size of the first pattern 2621 can be changed.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the glitter area are arranged repeatedly twice, but they may be repeated any number of times. By forming the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving region and the glitter region a plurality of times, the first pattern 2621 can represent a complicated movement. Further, in the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the glitter area are alternately repeated, but the characteristics (that is, the moving area emits light without sandwiching the glitter area between the moving areas). The moving areas having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the light guide plate LED 2613 to emit light such that the light emission color of the light guide plate LED 2613 changes, it is possible to change the color of each moving region 2621a to emit light. Then, the light emission color of the LED 2613 for the light guide plate is sequentially changed (for example, red→orange→yellow→green→blue→indigo→purple→red), so that the pattern moves as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of light streaks extend obliquely downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed such that the obliquely extending lines of light correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. That is, when one light guide plate LED 2614 is caused to emit light, a streak of light that extends obliquely downward in the light guide plate 2610 is emitted from the upper side of the light guide plate 2610 as a starting point.

The second pattern 2622 becomes farther from the light guide plate LED 2614 as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the brightness of the streak of light becomes darker as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610. As a result, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (player side), as the light guide plate 2610 is directed downward, the streaks of light appear to extend backward, and light is radiated in three dimensions. Thus, it is possible to enjoy the light emission effect by the light guide plate 2610.

Further, it is preferable to arrange the reflecting portion so that stereoscopic viewing due to parallax between the left and right eyes is possible. For example, paying attention to one light streak constituting the second pattern 2622, the second reflecting portion that emits light for forming the streak of light on the retina of the player is different between the left and right eyes of the light guide plate 2610. By arranging in the position, the parallax of the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern having a depth can be shown.

As shown in FIG. 234, in the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 that is projected by irradiation of light from one direction is reflected by the mat area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light and the traveling direction of the light. Instead, it is composed of lame areas 2621b and 2621d where reflection patterns for reflecting transmitted light are formed and moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a where reflection patterns for reflecting light in a specific traveling direction are formed. , A moving picture area that appears to move (dynamic picture) and a still picture area that appears to be stationary (static picture) can be configured.

In addition, one light guide plate 2610 can project the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234 and the second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 depending on the difference in the illumination direction. For this reason, light of a single color (for example, red of a single wavelength or white in which lights of a plurality of wavelengths are mixed) is emitted from the lateral direction, and light of multiple colors is emitted from the upper direction (for example, adjacent LED groups). (2614 emits light at different wavelengths), a single light guide plate 2610 can produce an effect by a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single-color pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, by moving light from the lateral direction, a stationary pattern in the mat area 2621e and the lame areas 2621b and 2621d of the first pattern 2621 and a moving pattern that appears to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a. Is reflected. In other words, the light guide plate production by both the still picture and the moving picture is performed by the first picture 2621 by irradiation of light from the lateral direction. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture by the first picture 2621 are displayed at the same time.

Unlike the above, the first design 2621 may be configured by the matte region and the glitter region, and the first design 2621 may not include the moving design. In this case, the light guide plate production is performed by the still picture by the first picture 2621 by the light irradiation from the lateral direction and the second picture 2622 by the light irradiation from the upper direction. In this case, the still picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be displayed at different timings. That is, the moving picture may be shown after the still picture is shown, or the still picture may be shown after showing the moving picture. In this way, various effects can be performed by displaying the still picture and the moving picture at different timings. Particularly, by displaying a specific character with a still picture after displaying the rainbow picture as a moving picture, it is possible to perform an effect such that the character comes down. On the other hand, by displaying the background with the still picture and then displaying the character with the moving picture, it is possible to perform an effect that the character moves at a specific place.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. When the light is emitted from the lateral direction and the upward direction, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are mixedly provided in the area where the two patterns overlap each other on the light guide plate 2610, so that the two patterns can be recognized together. .. However, when the first pattern 2621 is a two-dimensional pattern and the second pattern 2622 is a three-dimensional pattern, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where two patterns are mixed. The reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided, and the transmissive area 2621f where the back side (the liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen through is provided, and when the pattern of the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is played. It is possible for a person to easily see a stereoscopic image.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in different areas without overlapping. When the first pattern 2621 is a two-dimensional pattern and the second pattern 2622 is a three-dimensional pattern, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where two patterns are mixed. When the area where the reflection pattern of the pattern 2621 is provided and the area where the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is provided are projected and the pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern can be easily three-dimensionalized for the player. Can be seen.

[13-2. Light guide plate configuration]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflecting section will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (particularly, the arrangement of the reflecting portion).

As described above, in the light guide plate 2610, the transmissive area 2621f where the rear surface side (the liquid crystal display device 1600) appears to be transmitted, the mat area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, and the light traveling direction, Glitter areas 2621b and 2621d having reflection patterns for reflecting transmitted light and moving areas 2621a, 2621c, 2622a having reflection patterns for reflecting light in a specific traveling direction are provided.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing a structure of the reflection section.

The reflection portion is formed by a recess provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 by the reflection of light at the boundary surface (reflection surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light, and the player visually recognizes the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, light incident from the light guide plate LEDs 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain spread (for example, ±30 degrees). The light streaks forming the second pattern 2622 are visible when the light traveling in the direction of the light streaks is reflected by the reflecting section 2650 described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving area 2622a shown in FIG. 237(A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along the streaks of light. The size of the reflecting portion 2650 is preferably several hundreds of micrometers to several millimeters, which is much smaller than the streak of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown in a large size in the figure.

The reflecting portion 2650 includes a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflecting surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and the perpendicular of the reflecting surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are about 45 degrees. Therefore, the light that travels inside the light guide plate 2610 and strikes the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650 is reflected to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 as illustrated in FIG. 237B.

In addition, light traveling in a direction perpendicular to the streak of light appearing in the moving region 2622a, that is, light traveling in parallel with the reflecting surface 2651 along the reflecting surface 2651 does not hit the reflecting surface 2651, but is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 and reflected by the light guide plate 2610. Does not emerge from the surface. Similarly, the amount of light traveling in a direction having an angle (particularly, an acute angle) with the light streaks appearing in the moving region 2622a hits the reflecting surface 2651, and the reflecting portion 2650 reflects only a small amount of light. Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. For this reason, light with a large reaching wavelength is visible to the player's eyes, and a pattern can be shown in the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

At this time, the emitting direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted to the left or right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 by slightly inclining the reflecting surface 2651. Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment emits light having a strong directivity, the reflected light from the reflector 2650 also reaches the player as a beam of light having a directivity. Therefore, parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern with a depth can be shown. That is, since the reflection portion 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the right eye and the reflection portion 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the left eye are at different positions, there is a difference between the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye. There is no virtual intersection on the light guide plate 2610. That is, if the virtual intersection of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears to be in a deep position, and the light reaching the right eye and the left eye are reached. If the virtual intersection with the light to be emitted is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern can be seen in the front position.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflection surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 similarly to the reflection surface 2651, or light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 may be provided. May be formed on the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 at an angle that does not reflect (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by the light coming from other than the specific direction without strongly reflecting the light incident from one direction.

The reflection portions 2660 of the glitter areas 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 238 are formed by spherical concave portions provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and travel in the light guide plate 2610, and from a plurality of directions (that is, The light arriving at the reflection part 2660 is reflected by a plurality of paths and is emitted to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Since the reflection section 2660 in the glitter area reflects light from the plurality of LEDs 2614 for the light guide plate, when each of the LEDs 2614 for the light guide board blinks at different timings, the glitter area 2621b becomes glitter. When the LED 2614 for the light guide plate emits light of different colors, the glitter area 2621b is mixed with a plurality of colors and shines. Further, when the LED 2614 for the light guide plate blinks in a different color, the glitter area 2621b is mixed with a plurality of colors and glitters.

It should be noted that the mat area 2621e is not provided with a reflection portion and is processed into irregular irregularities in a frosted glass shape and does not reflect the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 to the front side.

Up to this point, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described. Next, an embodiment of the light guide plate representing different patterns will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED and the reflection section in the light guide plate that constitutes the patterns shown in FIGS. 240 to 242.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on the back surface thereof, reflects the light incident from any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 on the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670 that operate. The plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 are for introducing light so that the light travels in the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. Although the plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 are illustrated as the first specific light incident portion 2630a, the second specific light incident portion 2630b, the third specific light incident portion 2630c, and the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, The specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion are provided. This is to repeatedly provide seven specific light incident portions 2630 (LED group 2614) for a rainbow effect in which the light guide plate emits light in seven colors, and the number of the specific light incident portions may be determined depending on the type of emission color. The first specific light input portion 2630a to the seventh specific light input portion (not shown) are sequentially repeated on the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in the drawing) from left to right (seventh specific light input portion). After that, they are arranged in the order of returning to the beginning and becoming the first specific light incident portion 2630a).

The reflecting portion 2670 extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connecting the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light incident portion 2630 travels inside the light guide plate 2610) and guides the light. It has a boundary surface that is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610. The reflection portion 2670 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflecting portion 2670 reflects the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Further, the reflecting portion 2670 reflects the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific light input portion 2630 is reflected by the reflection portion 2670 toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 (in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). However, the reflective portion 2670 is seen to emit light from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate 2610, and the pachinko machine 1 From the player seated in front of, it appears that the reflecting portion 2670 does not emit light.

In the present embodiment, the reflecting portion 2670 has a shape in which it is recessed in a triangle and extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light entering portion 2630. However, the shape is not limited to the above, and any shape may be used as long as it extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630.

The plurality of reflecting sections 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light entering sections 2630, and the plurality of first reflecting sections 2670a and the second specific light entering section 2630b corresponding to the first specific light entering section 2630a. Corresponding to the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, the third specific light entering portion 2630c corresponding to the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d corresponding to the plurality of fourth reflecting portions. The unit 2670d and the like are included.

Further, the light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of patterns 2623 capable of emitting and displaying in different modes by causing a specific reflection portion 2670 of the plurality of reflection portions 2670 to reflect light forward. The plurality of patterns 2623 include a pattern 2623a including a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b including a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c including a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflecting portions. A pattern 2623d including the portion 2670d is included.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the patterns are arranged so as to sequentially and circulate from the center to the outside.

The second pattern substrate 2612 is in the form of a strip plate extending to the left and right, and the LEDs 2614 are mounted at positions corresponding to the specific light incident portions 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 includes a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light entering section 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light entering section 2630b, and a third specific light entering section 2630c. The third LED group 2614c corresponding to, the fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light entering section 2630d, and the fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light entering section (not shown). (Not shown), a sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light entering section (not shown), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light entering section (not shown). (Not shown). Note that in FIG. 239, the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d are illustrated, and the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group are omitted. In each LED group, a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the drawing) on the second pattern substrate 2612 are divided in the left and right direction of the second pattern substrate 2612, and the LEDs are sequentially arranged from left to right. Repeatedly (in the order of returning to the beginning after the seventh LED group and becoming the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614.

Next, the light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident from the first specific light entering portion 2630a into the light guide plate 2610, and is reflected by the first reflecting portion 2670a toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610, Since the other second reflection portion 2670b, the third reflection portion 2670c, the fourth reflection portion 2670d, etc. reflect to other than the front, only the first reflection portion 2670a appears to be shining to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that it is possible to cause the pattern composed of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a to emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the inside of the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light entrance part 2630b, and reflected on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 at the second reflection part 2670b. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect to other than the front, only the second reflecting portion 2670b appears to be shining to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that the pattern composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b can emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident from the third specific light entering portion 2630c into the light guide plate 2610, and reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect to other than the front, only the third reflecting portion 2670c appears to be visible to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that the pattern composed of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the inside of the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d, and is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, etc. reflect to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting portion 2670d appears to be shining to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that the pattern composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d can be made to emit light.

Similarly, in the fifth to seventh LED groups 2614, when each LED group is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630, and the corresponding reflection portion 2670 causes the light guide plate 2610 to move. It reflects to the front and reflects to other than the front at the other reflectors 2670, and only the corresponding reflector 2670 appears to be shining to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, and is configured from the corresponding reflector 2670. It is possible to make the picture that is displayed emit light.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plurality of patterns 2623 can be made to emit light by switching the LED groups to make them emit light, and the plurality of patterns can be made to emit light in sequence to create a moving animation. Such a luminous effect can be performed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in the light guide plate 2610 on which similar patterns are superimposed, a moving effect of causing the patterns to emit light like an animation in which there is a movement that spreads from the center to the outside or contracts from the center to the outside. You can

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in the moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, the moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed by switching the position of the LED group that emits light over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and from the first LED group 2614a corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. Note that, in FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the reference numeral.

As shown in FIG. 240(A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light is incident from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f and the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 is irradiated. The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflection portion 2670f and the seventh reflection portion 2670g, and the pattern in which the sixth reflection portion 2670f and the seventh reflection portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light is incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e and the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is changed to the fifth reflection portion. 2670e and the 6th reflection part 2670f reflect, the pattern in which the 5th reflection part 2670e and the 6th reflection part 2670f were arrange|positioned light-emit, and a player can recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240(B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light is incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d and the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and light is incident from the third specific light incident portion 2630c and the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflection portion. 2670c and the 4th reflection part 2670d reflect, the pattern in which the 3rd reflection part 2670cd and the 4th reflection part 2670d were arrange|positioned light-emit, and a player can recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240(C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light is incident from the second specific light entering section 2630b and the third specific light entering section 2630c, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern on which the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the position without changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, it is possible to change the size of the pattern and to make a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so as to move from the center to the outside. At this time, the LED groups may emit light of a single color or may emit light of different colors in each group (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 241, the moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed by changing the number of LED groups that emit light with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and from the first LED group 2614a corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. Note that in FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light incident part is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the second specific light entering section 2630b to the seventh specific light entering section 2630g is reflected by the second reflecting section 2670b. -The 7th reflection part 2670g reflects, the pattern in which the 2nd reflection part 2670b-the 7th reflection part 2670g is arrange|positioned light-emits, and a player can recognize.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light entering section 2630c to the seventh specific light entering section 2630g is reflected by the third reflecting section 2670c to the seventh reflecting section 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light incident section 2630d to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is subjected to the fourth reflection. The portion 2670d to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light entering section 2630e to the seventh specific light entering section 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflecting section 2670e to the seventh reflecting section 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241C, the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is subjected to sixth reflection. The portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, it is possible to change the size of the pattern (light emission range) and move the pattern so that the pattern emits light. At this time, the LED groups may emit light of a single color or may emit light of different colors in each group (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, the moving effect in which the color of the design changes is performed by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and from the first LED group 2614a corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. Note that, in FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 242(A), the first LED group 2614a is turned on in red, the red light incident from the first specific light entering section 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting section 2670a, and the first reflecting section 2670a is arranged. The displayed pattern emits red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is lit in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light entering part 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting part 2670b to emit light in orange. Further, the third LED group 2614c is turned on in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light entering section 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting section 2670c to emit a yellow pattern. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection portion 2670d to emit a green pattern. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entrance section 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflection section 2670e, so that the design emits blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f is turned on in indigo, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light entrance section 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflection section 2670f and the design is emitted in indigo. In addition, the seventh LED group 2614g is turned on in purple, and the purple light incident from the seventh specific light entering portion 2630g is reflected by the seventh reflecting portion 2670g to emit a purple design.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242(B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes. When time further passes, as shown in FIG. 242(C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in indigo color, purple color, red color, orange color, yellow color, green color, and blue color, respectively. The color changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eyes pay attention to the pattern that emits light of the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so that it moves inward.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED groups 2614.

In the present embodiment, the plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to the reflecting portion 2670 forming one picture, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one picture. Specifically, it is controlled so that the light emitting pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light entering portion 2630) is repeated using seven LED groups as a repeating unit. In addition, the LED emits light with directivity and is configured to illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

That is, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LEDs that emit light in the same pattern (that is, the light source of the light that constitutes one pattern) is the range shown by the fan shape in the figure, and the second pattern substrate 2612 has In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

Therefore, the pattern is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the end of the light guide plate 2610 where the light is incident. For example, when the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full angle at half maximum θ=±30 degrees), the range where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern The pattern is provided so as to be separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length of 0.87 times the interval (emission LED) α.

As a generalization, letting the length α of the repeating unit of the LED group, the illumination angle of the LED be θ, and the distance separating the pattern from the end of the light guide plate 2610 be L, the following relationships are established.
L=tan θ×α/2

In this way, when the moving pattern that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving pattern must be arranged at a position separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a predetermined distance. That is, the moving picture area in which the moving picture appears is smaller than the still picture area in which the still picture appears. When the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, a moving effect by the light guide plate 2610 can be performed in an area smaller than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. Therefore, in the production of the variable display game, it is possible to make the player recognize the progress of the variable display game without hindering the visual recognition of the special symbol normally displayed near the end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. .. In addition, by performing the moving effect in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 1600 that the player gazes at, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the player's excitement due to the moving effect.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the center accessory 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the front unit 2000 is attached has been described, but in this case, the inner frame of the center accessory 2500 (from the player located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1) In the visible window portion), a region within the predetermined distance from the end of the light guide plate 2610 in which the moving effect is impossible is formed, and the region in which the moving effect is impossible can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the area in which the moving effect can be performed is narrowed and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center accessory 2500, the area where the moving effect cannot be performed is hidden by the center accessory 2500, and the area where the moving effect cannot be performed is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is arranged on the outer side of, and the moving effect is possible in all (or most of) the inner frame of the center accessory 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located outside the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500.

Since the back unit 3000 includes various ornaments (decoration unit 3050, movable effect units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 should be positioned behind these ornaments. By disposing the light guide plate 2610, the light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the ornament. As a result, the substrate serving as the light source can be arranged at a position where the player cannot see, and the decorativeness can be secured.

Further, the LEDs for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613 and 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LEDs for causing the decorative body to emit light may be mounted on one substrate.

As described above, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be made an area where a moving effect can be produced, and the player can be made aware of the unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. You can avoid it.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, the moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED corresponding to each specific light incident portion. Group 2614g is located. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light incident part is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the reference numeral.

As shown in the figure, the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the red light incident from the first specific light entrance part 2630a is reflected by the first reflection part 2670a, and the pattern in which the first reflection part 2670a is arranged is red. The player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is lit in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light entrance part 2630b is reflected by the second reflection part 2670b to emit light in orange color. Further, the third LED group 2614c is turned on in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident section 2630c is reflected by the third reflection section 2670c, so that the pattern emits yellow. In addition, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection portion 2670d, so that the pattern emits green light. In addition, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entrance part 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflection part 2670e, so that the design emits blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f is turned on in indigo, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light entrance part 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflection part 2670f so that the design emits indigo. In addition, the seventh LED group 2614g is turned on in purple, and the purple light incident from the seventh specific light entering portion 2630g is reflected by the seventh reflecting portion 2670g to emit a purple design.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. When the time further passes, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eyes pay attention to the pattern that emits light of the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so that the lines of light of the seven colors flow.

Although detailed description is omitted, even in the light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 235 having a pattern in which two light streaks intersect, by changing the emission color of each LED group 2614 in the same manner as described in FIG. 244, The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and it is possible to create a moving effect in which the light is emitted so that the seven streaks of light flow. Further, by using the left and right parallaxes, the streak of light can be seen deeper or closer to the front side as the distance from the light source increases, so that a stereoscopic pattern can be displayed.

Next, the stereoscopic pattern and the planar pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a pattern viewed in a plan view is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 245(B), since the reflecting surface of the reflecting portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is a curved surface, light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. , Reaches the right eye 10R and the left eye 10L of the player. In addition, the reflecting section 2660 travels in the light guide plate 2610, reflects the light reaching the reflecting section 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, in a plurality of paths), and emits the light to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245(A), a parallax between the left and right eyes does not occur in the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portion 2660, so that the player places the pattern 2621 in the planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610. Will be seen as.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern viewed in a plan view is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 246(B), the reflection portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the left eye 10L of the player, and the reflection portion 2650R is The light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected toward the right eye 10R of the player. However, since the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less), as shown in FIG. 246(A), the left and right sides of the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R. It can be said that the parallax of the eye is small, and the left-eye pattern formed by the reflecting portion 2650L and the right-eye pattern formed by the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 247 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a stereoscopically visible pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 247(B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle for reflecting the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L. The reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650R is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the right eye 10R of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R, and the player can see the left and right eyes. A right-eye image and a left-eye image having parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R of the player intersect at a point 2621C on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern at the rear position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating a manner in which a stereoscopically visible pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 248(B), the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L. The reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650R is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the right eye 10R of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflective portions 2650L and 2650R, and the player can see the left and right eyes. A right-eye image and a left-eye image having parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R of the player intersect at a point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610.

As described above, according to the front production unit 2600, a plurality of different patterns can be made to emit light by one light guide plate 2610. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to perform animation display and the like. In addition, the front-back direction unit 2600 can be made as thin as possible in the front-rear direction. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be located as close as possible to the player side, and it is easy to secure a large space behind the light guide plate 2610. it can. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610. With this, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and in addition to the production by the luminous display of the pattern 2623, the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, and By performing the movable effect by the upper front movable effect unit 3300 or the like, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player and entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, by disposing the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the ornament, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of semi-transparent patterns due to the light emission of the plurality of reflecting portions 2670 emerge to show a luminous decoration that moves like an animation. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is familiar with the light emitting effect using the conventional light guide plate, and to amaze and entertain the player, and to do something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since only the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emitting display of the picture by the light guide plate 2610 well, the light emitting display of the picture 2623 is displayed from other players who are far from the front. Is difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the performance using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention. The player can play the game without hesitation, entertaining the game, and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614 so as to emit light. Also, the pattern displayed in light emission does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, which makes it difficult to see the game. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to enjoy the game in a good state.

Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 2610 (the first pattern substrate) can be obtained by aligning the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. 2611, the second pattern substrate 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light guide plate 2610 is present when the pattern is light-emitted and displayed. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who does not think it is surprising, and it is possible to entertain the luminous display of a plurality of patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying effect images is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the effects can be shown to the player, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and also to entertain the player by the effects of the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 is different from the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to display effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2623 that are light-emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and give the pattern 2623 that is light-emitted and displayed a sense of depth and stereoscopic effect. It is possible to show the player an effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting interest, which can entertain the player and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be single color LEDs or full color LEDs. Moreover, the number of the specific light entering portions, the reflecting portions, and the LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of the patterns.

[13-3. Example of production]
Next, an example of effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variable display game will be described. 249 to 254 are diagrams showing examples of effects using the light guide plate.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the liquid crystal display device 1600 displays a moving effect of causing the light guide plate 2610 to emit light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610 and moving the image toward the predetermined image. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variable display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or notice effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249A, nothing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and the entire screen is blackened (blacked out). This blackout causes the player to gaze at the liquid crystal display device 1600.

Then, as shown in FIG. 249(B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. This causes the player to gaze at the first pattern 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 249C, a moving effect is displayed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249(D), in the moving effect, the image 1611 may be moved from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. The image 1611 displayed by moving to the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same color as the first picture 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 displayed by moving to the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621 as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape as shown in FIG. 250. Further, the image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 that are moved and displayed have the same character image (the pose and face may be the same or different) or the same character (for example, the name of the character) and have different fonts and colors. It may be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 249(D), the back of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610. Also, an image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as illustrated in FIG. 249E, in the moving effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the proportion of the moving image 1611 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 are elapsed. It may be changed according to.

The mode of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. The color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

Further, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. In this case, it is advisable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use other light guide plates to project a pattern having a different size. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, a direction different from the irradiation direction (lateral direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 having an initial size (for example, , The first pattern 2621 having a different size (large or small) may be projected by irradiation with light from an oblique direction.

After performing the moving effect for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 249(F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is erased from the light guide plate 2610. Further, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen is blackened (blacked out). By this blackout, the player is gazing at the liquid crystal display device 1600, and a space for improving the expectation for the next effect is created.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249(G), an image 1612 (for example, a character with high reliability in hitting) different from the first pattern 2621 or the image displayed by movement is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249(H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, when the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the player's expectation of hitting is increased, but when the size of the character image 1612 is decreased, the expectation of the player's hitting is decreased. The color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Further, the character image 1612 may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the first pattern 2621. Further, together with the display of the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be illuminated from above to display a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

The character image may be displayed on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. Therefore, the irradiation direction (horizontal direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 is different from the direction (for example, an oblique direction). A character image may be displayed by irradiating light from the direction). In addition, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided, and the character image may be displayed on another light guide plate. When a character image having a different size or expression is projected by a light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, it is possible to display an effect with a sense of depth unlike the planar liquid crystal display device 1600.

In the above-described movement effect of moving the image toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is displayed, but the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves. After starting, the first pattern 2621 may be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after the blackout (FIG. 253(A)), as shown in FIG. 253(B), before the first pattern 2621 is projected, the first pattern 2621 is A moving effect of displaying an image moving toward the displayed position on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 253(C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. After that, as shown in FIG. 253(D), the moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

In this way, the time when the first pattern 2621 is displayed (time for the light guide plate effect) and the effect time when the image 1611 is moved (time when the moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600) are the first pattern 2621. The light guide plate effect in which is displayed may start before or after the effect in which the image 1611 moves. Further, the time for the light guide plate effect in which the first pattern 2621 is displayed may be longer or shorter than the effect time in which the image 1611 moves.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254, the effect of the variable display game may be performed by switching between a moving picture in which the picture where the images are gathered appear to move and a still picture in which the picture does not appear to move.

In the light guide plate production shown in FIG. 254, when the moving picture appears, the expectation for the big hit is high, and when only the still picture appears, the expectation for the big hit is low. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254(A), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 254(B), the displayed still picture is displayed. A moving effect is displayed in which the image 1611 moving toward 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, the still picture 2621 is switched to the moving picture as shown in FIG. 254(C). Further, as shown in FIG. 254(D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254(E), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 254(F), the still picture 2621 is displayed. A moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. In addition, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 254(G), a moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the design 1613 may be performed. Good. After that, as shown in FIG. 254(H), the variable display game ends with a loss without switching the still picture 2621 to the moving picture.

In the effect shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific reach effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a specific prefetch effect) is selected in the special symbol variable display game, it is displayed in the specific display effect. The specific image 1611 performs an effect integrally with the moving effect by the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the moving effect may not be applied to the first pattern.

Thus, in the effect of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, since the still picture and the moving picture are selectively displayed by the light guide plate 2610, the player has a sense of expectation for the development of the variable display game. , It is possible to suppress a decline in the entertainment interest.

Next, an example of the effect in which the effect by the moving body is added to the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variable display game will be described.

255 and 256 are diagrams showing an example of an effect using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

In the effect shown in FIG. 255, one picture is composed of the picture displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255A, a part of the movable body 3601 appears or disappears from the upper portion of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 in a short cycle in accordance with the progress of the variable display game. Repeatedly, the player's expectation for a big hit is raised. Then, as shown in FIG. 255(B), the entire movable body 3601 appears on the front surface of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 255C, a moving effect is displayed in which a pattern 2621 to be superimposed on the movable body is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate 2610 and an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. To do. In addition, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 255(D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image is moved from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the design 2621. ..

The movable body 3601 may be caused to emit light at the timing when the movement effect starts or during the movement effect. The light emitting mode (light emitting color or light emitting timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emitting mode of the light guide plate 2610.

By selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 249 does not appear or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 255 appears, the player's expectation for the development of the variable display game can be expected. The pachinko machine can be enhanced and has a high interest.

In the above-mentioned example, the movable body 3601 appears instead of the pattern where the images are collected, but one character may be composed of the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, when the movable body 3601 represents the body and the light guide plate 2610 represents the face, the facial expression can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. In this way, in addition to the effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600, various effects by the light guide plate 2610 can be realized.

In the effect shown in FIG. 256, the light guide plate 2610 is used as an effect that suggests the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256(A), as the variable display game progresses, the pattern 2621 is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610, and as shown in FIG. 256(B), the light guide plate 2610 is used. A moving effect is displayed in which the image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256(C), a moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 is performed. May be. After that, as illustrated in FIG. 256D, the movable body 3601 appears from the upper portion of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and stops at a position overlapping with the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256(E), the pattern 1613 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256(F), the pattern 1613 is displayed toward the displayed pattern 1613. A moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 256(G), a moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the design 1613 is performed as the variable display game progresses. Good. Then, as shown in FIG. 256(H), the movable display does not appear and the variable display game ends with a loss.

As described above, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, the effect suggesting that the movable body comes out can be performed using the light guide plate.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to the conventional communication function by an 8-bit parallel bus.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port in which one signal is transmitted by one signal line or an 8-bit bus. In some cases, data output from the main control MPU 1311 is read or an illegal signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 to perform an illegal act. For this reason, it is required that the input/output signal of the main control MPU 1311 is difficult to be detected from the outside, and if the serial communication function of continuously transmitting data at a predetermined timing with one signal line is used, the serial communication function is concerned. It is difficult to read data or input data at the timing of the line.

Further, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring a signal when an inspection agency inspects a pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of a special electric accessory, a signal (for example, 5V on/off) input to a driver (transistor) for driving a solenoid is monitored in order to monitor an output signal of a solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory. Signal) was branched and used as a signal for inspection. When the serial signal transmitted in the main control board 1310 described above is output as the inspection signal, the inspection engine needs a device for analyzing the serial signal, and thus it is difficult to use the serial signal as the inspection signal. Is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that transmits a signal by serial communication in the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise the output of the inspection signal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, by inputting one serial signal to the two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, the inspection signal for changing the level at the same timing as the solenoid driving signal. Shall be generated. If the output transistor open collector (or open drain) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used, the voltage level is changed by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to the two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of steps of the program for detecting the input by serial communication to reduce the software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit and a part of the signal is directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise whether to accept the input signal. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after power is turned on may be directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 instead of being input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 can be detected even before the interrupt processing is executed, and thus the signal level can be detected other than the timer interrupt processing immediately after the power is turned on.

Particularly, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use the expansion I/O using the chip select, and the expansion I/O is input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is possible to capture the signal level for each clock in bit units and detect the signal level in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

FIG. 257 is a block diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial/parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 259 is a main control MPU 1311 and the peripheral. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning on the main control board 1310 of components. Note that in FIGS. 257, 258, and 259, thick lines indicate parallel signal transmission lines and thin lines indicate serial signal transmission lines.

The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment includes an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951, etc.), and main control board 1310. Synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit, control signals of other devices (solenoid, etc.) are output, and are output from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensor and magnetic detection sensor. It has a general-purpose port to which signals are input.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission/reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission/reception port is selected by the chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

The transmission/reception port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), chip select output terminals (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). The transmission port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission/reception port. The number of parallel/serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission/reception port is not limited to that shown in the figure.

Note that more serial/parallel conversion circuits may be connected by making a connection like the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmission/reception port takes in the parallel data input when CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) is at 0 level, and after CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, a predetermined clock The data is output from the serial port at the timing. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 inputs signals such as a game ball detection switch (starting winning opening, big winning opening count switch, ordinary winning opening, specific area switch, ordinary pattern gate switch, game board discharging switch) and a photo sensor. The game balls flowing down the game area 5a are mainly detected. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 has a 16-bit input port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit input port may be connected in parallel to have a 16-bit configuration.

Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is 0 level. The input output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, the serial port outputs serial data according to the level of the game ball detection switch at a predetermined clock timing. In this way, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 captures the output signal of the game ball detection switch by using the SERTX signal as a trigger, so that the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Further, both the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission/reception port output a signal for turning on the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). The data transmission destination is selected by the chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in the serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and output the signal from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. To do. The output level from the parallel port is latched in the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and is maintained until the next timing when the chip select signal rises to 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 is connected to the LED segment side, and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the LED common side. The serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal at a predetermined timing, thereby dynamically lighting the LED. Each of the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 has a 16-bit output port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit output port may be connected in parallel to have a 16-bit configuration.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). The segment signal is output at a timing to turn on the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED in which the anode side of the LED is the common terminal is used for the base display 1317, and when the LED is turned on, a drive current is applied from the anode side common terminal to the cathode side segment terminal. Flowing. However, since the integrated circuit having the same configuration is used for the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each conversion circuit 1342, 1343 (the output transistor of the driver circuit Polarity) will be the same. For this reason, a driver circuit 1344 is provided at the subsequent stage of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a drive current for lighting the LED, and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of absorbing the drive current for lighting the LED.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 may be an integrated circuit having only a parallel/serial conversion function or an integrated circuit having only a serial/parallel conversion function, respectively. Further, the parallel/serial conversion function and the serial/parallel conversion function may be switched and used by an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting a serial signal and a parallel signal.

Further, two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346, like the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 described above, fetch the serial data input when the chip select (CS) is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and the CS is 1 It is output from the parallel port at the timing of rising. The output of the parallel port is provided with a driver transistor, and switches the voltage applied to the driver transistor to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

An external terminal board 784 is connected to the output port (PA0 to PA7) of the channel A of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and a signal output from the external terminal board 784 (for example, a security signal or a ball payout signal). Is output. Further, various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals of various solenoids are output. A test terminal 1348 is connected to the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the test terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric auditors opening signal, Ordinary electric accessory release signal) is output. Nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346.

The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can control only one channel (16 bits), and the same signal branched including the chip select is input to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output to the parallel side. Therefore, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. That is, the solenoid drive signal output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the inspection port output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. The signal changes at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the inspection terminal 1348. It should be noted that +12V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid at 12V, and +5V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5V inspection signal. Thus, by using the two serial-parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, it is possible to generate synchronized signals having different voltage levels.

Among the outputs from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is made thick, and the pattern on the output side of the inspection signal through which a relatively small current flows The pattern may be thin. It is sufficient to reduce the resistance of the pattern without making the pattern thick, and to form a pattern on both the front and back sides to increase the substantial cross-sectional area or to form an inner layer pattern to reduce the substantial cross-sectional area. May increase.

Further, since the two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load of one conversion circuit increases, the waveform of the output signal of the other conversion circuit is not disturbed and the output signal is affected. Does not occur. That is, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output an inspection signal having the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate inspection. ..

Next, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 259.

As shown in FIG. 259, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around it. An inspection circuit arrangement area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area. Circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area (serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) are mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by an inspection agency, and are generally commercially available pachinko machines. 1 is not mounted (a pattern for mounting components is provided). That is, although a connector for relaying a signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally commercially available, the inspection signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 is provided. The relay inspection terminal 1348 is not mounted. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available has a configuration in which the inspection signal is not detected by a fraudulent person and used for fraudulent activity.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 on the market, the print circuit (for example, the data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided although no component is mounted in the inspection circuit arrangement area. Therefore, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause a malfunction. Therefore, the wiring (print pattern) in the inspection circuit layout area is pulled up to the power supply (+5V) via a resistor (or to GND). Pull down) to reduce the effect of noise.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, surface mount components are not used in the pachinko machine 1 on the market, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 on the market. Surface mount components can be used. Therefore, the components of the inspection circuit can be downsized, the inspection circuit arrangement area can be reduced, and the main control board 1310 can be downsized. Similarly, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, no components are mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310 in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, but the circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are commercially available pachinko machines. No components are mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, so components can be mounted on the back side.

Of the components of the inspection circuit, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on another board arranged near the main control board 1310. This separate board is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 that is inspected by an inspection agency, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally commercially available. Also in this case, the inspection signal is not output from the pachinko machine 1 which is generally commercially available.

In this way, by collectively arranging the circuit components used for the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 in the inspection circuit arrangement area, it is easy to find the missing parts in the pachinko machine 1 for commercial use and Easy to find mounting. Further, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the inspection terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 having high noise resistance can be configured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 259, the circuit component arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area has a different orientation (for example, 180 degrees as shown in the drawing) from the same type of circuit component arranged in another place of the main control board 1310. It should be placed in the direction of rotation. In this way, by arranging the circuit components in different directions in the inspection circuit arrangement area and other places of the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish the components used for the normal game from the inspection components. In the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting in which components are erroneously placed in the inspection circuit placement area.

Further, although the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit components are displayed on the main control board 1310 by silk printing, for example, the symbols of the circuit components arranged in the inspection circuit layout area and The numbers may be put together with the symbols or numbers following the symbols or numbers of the circuit parts used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are given the symbols after IC12. By doing this, it is possible to attach symbols or numbers that do not skip to the game control circuit components mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available, and to easily check after mounting the circuit components on the main control board 1310. it can.

Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the terminals for inspection are set to be different from the symbols and numbers of the connectors that are connected to the game control parts, the connectors and inspection terminals that are connected to the game control parts can be easily installed. It is possible to distinguish between them and prevent incorrect wiring when connecting the cables by mistake. In particular, if the symbol or number of the inspection terminal is made the same as the symbol or number of the connection destination of the other inspection device, it is convenient for connecting the cable at the time of inspection, and the connection mistake can be reduced.

Further, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused free ports, and the free ports may be arranged so as to be aggregated with the adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are continuous, it is preferable that the terminals of the empty ports are arranged at the aggregated position. By arranging the vacant terminals collectively, the area on the main control board 1310 where the print pattern is not provided is collected, and it is easy to find missing parts, and it is possible to find attachment of additional parts for fraud. It's getting easier.

Further, the terminal of the vacant port is arranged at a position close to the connector in which a relatively large current flows (for example, a solenoid is connected) in the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting and outputting a game control signal are arranged on the left and right sides (upper and lower sides in the figure) on the side where the terminals of the vacant ports are located. Therefore, when an additional function is added to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without drawing a long pattern.

As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission in the main control board 1310, the wiring of the data bus can be reduced, and it becomes easy to find the attachment of the additional component for fraud. In other words, a large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits are eliminated, and some signal lines including control lines are replaced by wirings in which circuit patterns of a large number of data buses are arranged in a complicated manner. Therefore, it becomes a clean circuit pattern. In addition, the main control board 1310 that is resistant to noise can be configured by reducing the routing distance of the data line.

Further, since the number of data lines is reduced, the circuits can be arranged without being influenced by the routing of the data lines, so that the I/O IC (parallel interface circuit, serial interface circuit) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

Further, by reducing the circuit patterns, the number of ground patterns can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 that is more resistant to noise can be configured.

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel output port of the address D2 (chip select SERS0) is the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of the channel A are the common side of the function display unit 1400 (the anode terminal of the LED). And the output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side of the base display 1317 (anode terminal of 7-segment LED). The output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

Further, the parallel output port of the address D3 (chip select SERS1) is the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA7 of the channel A are on the segment side (LED cathode) of the function display unit 1400. The output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B are connected to the segment side of the base display 1317 (cathode terminal of 7-segment LED).

The common side of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED) switches the output port to be turned on at a constant cycle (for example, an interrupt every 4 ms). When paying attention to the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned on in the timer interrupt process, only PA1 is turned on in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms),..., PA7 only in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms). ON is repeated at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). That is, when switching 8 ports repeatedly, each port is turned on every 32 ms. Alternatively, when the output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 of channel A are grouped respectively and the output port of channel A is focused, only PA0 and PA4 are turned on by the timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms). Only PA1 and PA5 may be turned on,..., And in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms), only PA3 and PA7 may be turned on at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). By making the operation of this fixed cycle serial communication, it is difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the parallel input port of the address D5 is a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and a switch (ball detection sensor) for detecting a game ball is connected to the inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. The outputs of these sphere detection sensors are input as serial signals to the main control MPU 1311 and read as signals at address D5.

Furthermore, the operation information of the setting key 971, the operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, the power failure notice signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the detection signal of the frame opening detection switch are input to the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311. ing. Since these signals need to be monitored in real time (at the time the program requests them) or need to be monitored outside the timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after power is turned on), main control is performed without going through the parallel/serial conversion circuit. It is directly input to the MPU 1311.

Further, the general-purpose input/output ports (also used for input/output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311, are provided with a detection signal of a radio wave detection sensor, a detection signal of a vibration detection sensor, a detection signal of a magnetic detection switch, and a detection signal of a proximity error switch. It has been entered. These signals are signals that are output when the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal (such as fraudulent behavior or failure), and it is necessary to monitor in real time (at the time when the program requests). It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without intervention. In addition, the detection signals from these sensors and switches inform the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and sound of abnormality. By this abnormality notification, the employee of the hall comes to check the state of the pachinko machine, so that the game is substantially stopped. If this abnormality notification is an erroneous notification, it causes the player to feel uncomfortable, and it is necessary to suppress erroneous detection. Therefore, it is advisable to input these signals to the general-purpose input/output port and detect them a plurality of times in a short time (so-called double reading) to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise.

In this double reading process, in one timer interrupt process, read commands are continuously executed to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, Execute multiple read commands with several commands in between to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose I/O port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or read with multiple clocks in between. This is performed by executing an instruction and determining the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. For this reason, when the level of the port is continuously determined through the parallel/serial conversion circuit, the level can be detected only at intervals of several tens of microseconds, whereas when the level of the general-purpose port is continuously determined, it is 1 microsecond. The level can be detected at the following intervals, and the signal level can be detected in a short cycle.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, signals of various switches and sensors that require real-time property are directly input to the general-purpose input port and the general-purpose output port without using the expansion I/O using the chip select. Since it is possible to capture the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input/output port (also used for input/output) in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for reception of the serial signal.

Although the general-purpose input/output ports (also used as input/output) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, a part of the signal input via the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 is used as general-purpose input/output ports (also used as input/output) IOP4 to IOP7. You may enter in.

Although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

If the general-purpose input port is an empty terminal, pull up to 5V via a resistor or pull down to GND to prevent the terminal from reaching an intermediate potential, and to prevent the influence of noise induced on the power supply line. It is better to reduce. Further, when the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be opened, but it is preferable to pull it up to 5 V through a dummy resistor or pull it down to GND so that the level change of the output port does not cause noise.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the inspection signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for game control is output via the serial/parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, the winning ball detection signals are collected and input to one port, which makes it easy to handle in the game control program.

Further, of the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, signals that need to be detected a plurality of times in a short time (so-called double reading) are input to the general-purpose port, and signals that do not need to be read twice are serialized. It is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can confirm the signal level in real time, it is possible to detect the signal level a plurality of times in a short time and eliminate the influence of noise for determination. If the general-purpose input port is vacant, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general-purpose port.

A signal input to the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input port, but a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and a signal output from the main control MPU 1311 are allocated to the general-purpose input/output port (also used as input/output). Since all of them can be assigned, the general-purpose input/output port is highly versatile with respect to changes in specifications. Therefore, a general-purpose input/output port (also used for input/output) is desirable as a port left as a spare for adding a new function, and it is desirable to preferentially allocate the general-purpose input port.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the timing of outputting and fetching data by the synchronous serial signal will be described.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs the common side selection signal of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected from PA7 to PA4. After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected in PA3 to PA0.

Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is originally output at the data fetch timing of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR/LOAD terminal that determines the data capture timing of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( When LOW), data is taken in from PA0 to PB7. Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is taken in from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the data and, after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs the serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. During this period, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) so that new data is not captured.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, since the transmission signal of the vacant output port is used as a trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 and 263.

It is desirable that the main control board 1310 be commonly used by a plurality of models without redesign. However, the input/output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the input/output interface of the main control board 1310, which is different depending on the model, is mounted on another board (the input/output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311 which is common to each model is mounted on the main control board 1310. It is configured to The performance (for example, noise resistance) is evaluated by making the main control board 1310 common to a plurality of models, that is, by making the board size, the circuit design, the artwork of the printed board, the component arrangement, and the like the same. The main control board 1310 having stable quality can be commonly used by a plurality of models without redesign.

Further, when the input/output interface of the main control board 1310 is mounted on another input/output board 1351, there is a problem of where to divide the circuit. One is a method of separating with a serial signal line, and the second is a method of separating with a parallel signal obtained by converting a serial signal. The former case is desirable because it can reduce the number of wirings between the substrates as compared with the latter case. Further, in the serial signal, even if the signal itself is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which the data is transmitted, and it is unclear at what timing which data is transmitted. Further, it is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and this synchronization clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data even if the serial signal is acquired. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 with a serial signal line.

As shown in FIG. 262, an input/output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 are mounted in the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 so that the main control board box 1320 cannot be opened without being destroyed once it is closed. The input/output board 1351 is provided with a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345. The main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311, parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port. Substrates can be connected with a smaller number. The serial signal line may be connected by an electric wire or an inter-board connector.

Further, if the boards are serially communicated with each other, it is difficult to analyze the data even if the signal is acquired. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the content of the transmitted data is known to a fraudulent person. In addition, since the input/output board 1351 for inputting/outputting signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310, and the input/output signal that changes depending on the model is set in the input/output board 1351, the main control board 1310 is modified. The number of models that can be applied without doing so increases, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

Further, by housing the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

Further, when the main control board 1310 is used for another model, the design of the input/output board 1351 may be changed, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model. The main control board 1310 whose design quality is stable and whose design (e.g., noise resistance) is stable and whose design quality is stable can be used. Further, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be used without redesigning the main control board box 1320 unless the size of the input/output board 1351 and the positions of the mounting holes are changed. Further, the countermeasure against noise that changes for each model may be taken by the input/output board 1351 instead of the main control board 1310.

The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 which output the drive signal of the base display 1317 are preferably arranged on the main control board 1310. Note that when the base display 1317 is arranged on the input/output board 1351, the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are arranged on the input/output board 1351, and signals for driving the function display unit 1400 are input/output board. It is good to output from 1351.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the inspection signal may be arranged on the main control board 1310. That is, the inspection circuit arrangement area and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on the main control board 1310. This is because a part of the signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel bus. Therefore, when the inspection terminal 1348 is placed on the input/output board 1351, the input/output with the main control board 1310 is performed. This is because the number of connecting lines with the substrate 1351 increases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263, the main control board 1310 may be housed in the main control board box 1320, and the input/output board 1351 may be attached to the outside of the main control board box 1320.

In the form shown in FIG. 263, since the input/output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes. Further, since the input/output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in different board boxes, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the boards is improved. If the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the input/output board box 1350 that houses the input/output board 1351 are provided separately, each board box becomes smaller and the board installation position becomes free. .. Further, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code and a setting key 971, it is necessary to appear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input/output board 1351 is a pachinko machine. Since it does not need to be visually recognized from the back side of the machine 1, the substrate installation position is free. Thus, the form shown in FIG. 263 can improve the degree of freedom in design.

In the form shown in FIG. 263, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to the serial signal. In the pachinko machine, it is desirable not to output the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 to the outside of the sealed main control board box 1320 so that a fraudster cannot detect the operation of the pachinko machine. .. However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, it is unlikely that a fraudulent person will detect the operating status of the pachinko machine. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311, and the data rate is constant, so that the data rate is easily estimated from the outside, and as a result, the signal transmitted by the data bus is acquired. Sometimes. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and the speed of this synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data even if the serial signal is acquired.

In the above, an example in which the input/output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input/output function of the model-dependent signal is mounted on the input/output board 1351 has been described. It may be mounted on the input/output board 1351 if there is a portion where resistance to fraud and noise does not decrease even if it is arranged. For example, the output of a signal that requires a drive current for a solenoid or a motor attached to the game board 5, the output of a drive signal of the function display unit 1400, and various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) The input of the signal is a function that may be mounted on the input/output board 1351. Further, communication with the payout control board 951, output of a signal output from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), base display The output to 1317 is a function that should be mounted on the main control board 1310.

Further, in the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input/output board 1351, when a dummy signal (0 V or 5 V) is input to the empty input terminal or a dummy resistor is connected to the empty output terminal. Good. This is because if nothing is connected to the empty terminal, noise may be taken in and the circuit may malfunction.

In particular, if some of the multiple signals that a fraudulent person wants to acquire are transmitted through a parallel bus or general-purpose port and other signals are transmitted as serial signals, it is difficult to analyze the serial signals. The fraudulent person needs to acquire signals from a plurality of locations including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351, and the deterrence against fraud can be enhanced.

[15. Slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described, but subsequently, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (spindle type gaming machine) will be described. The outline of the pachinko machine has been described with reference to FIG. 26, but programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[15-1. Construction]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 264 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 265 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

As shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, in the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 4100 having an open front surface, and a front member is provided on the front surface of the housing 4100. 4200 is provided so that it can be opened and closed in a single-opening type. On the upper part of the front member 4200, an image display body 4500 that produces an effect by displaying and information display according to the progress of the game, a speaker that produces an effect by sound, and the like are provided. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. Then, various effect displays and history information displays on the image display body 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 constitutes an effect display unit capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 functions as a display control unit capable of performing display control of the effect display unit. Eggplant

A front panel is provided in the center of the front member 4200 so that the rear cannot be visually recognized, and a design pattern or the like is drawn. The center of the front panel allows the rear to be visually recognized (for example, transparent). ) A symbol display window 4401 is formed. The front panel may be configured by a display device, and the reel 4301 can be visually recognized in a state where an image is not displayed in the symbol display window 4401, and an image that mainly directs a game is displayed around the symbol display window 4401. To do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image that produces a game in the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), the symbols variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 arranged in the housing can be visually recognized. The reel 4301 is configured by a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. On the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a strip-shaped sheet having a plurality of symbols drawn along the longitudinal direction is wound, so that a plurality of symbols are arranged in a predetermined arrangement.

Each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel drive motor 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 266), which is a stepping motor, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are independently driven to rotate and stopped. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c are driving sources of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c increase the drive torque and the static torque by being controlled by the two-phase excitation method similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1 described above. As a result, a small motor can be adopted as the drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

In the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are referred to as the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. Then, the respective reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c corresponding thereto are set as a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motor 4341 corresponding to each reel is a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are changed so as to circulate, for example, from top to bottom (variable display). On the other hand, in a state where the reel 4301 is stopped, for each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of consecutive symbols, that is, 3×3 total 9 symbols are displayed through the symbol display window 4401. It is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game can be visually recognized.

For the 3×3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401, a predetermined validatable line is set. In the present embodiment, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c a line that crosses the middle pattern (middle line), the left reel 4301a lower tier-middle reel 4301b middle tier-right reel 4301c upper tier diagonally traverses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. A line that diagonally traverses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the upper stage of the left reel 4301a-the middle stage of the left reel 4301b-the middle stage of the reel 4301c to the lower stage of the right reel 4301c (downward right line) is a valid line. Then, the validating line is validated by the player inserting a medal or inputting from the credit (hereinafter referred to as "bet operation"), and based on the symbol combination mode (roll result) formed on the valid line. The establishment/non-establishment of a winning (role) is determined.

When the winning is achieved, in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are lined up on the activated line, there are cases where three predetermined symbols are lined up on another line in appearance. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the symbols on the upper stages of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that a line (lower line) that traverses the lower symbols of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c and a front portion (visible portion) facing the symbol display window 4401 of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above should be traversed. The apparent patterns may be arranged on a virtual line located. Below, enable lines (middle row, upward right, downward right line), lines that can be visually aligned when winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) collectively, symbol stop line (symbol alignment) Line).

The upper, middle, lower, upward right and downward right lines are activated lines, and a predetermined activated line is activated according to the number of bets, and a prize is awarded based on the symbol combination mode formed on this activated line ( Role) is established/not established. For example, when the number of bets is 1, the middle line is the effective line, when the number of bets is 2, the upper line and the upper line are the effective lines, and when the bet number 3 is the upper middle lower line, the upward right and downward right lines are the effective lines. And Further, all lines may be valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be dedicated only for three cards.

A payout number display LED 4562 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out by the game is provided around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401. A credit display for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of games remaining in the prize may be provided.

Below the symbol display window 4401, a step portion projecting to the front side is formed, and the upper surface of this step portion is an operation portion 4202 that inclines downward toward the front side. The operation section 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a one-piece insertion button 4205 and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation section for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game can be executed by the player inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performing a betting operation. An insertion sensor 4207b that detects passage of medals is provided on the path along which medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information from the insertion sensor 4207b.

The one-sheet insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet insertion button 4205 can be input one by one from credits by performing a pressing operation once. The max bet button 4206 can be input from the credit to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) by one pressing operation, but when the number of credits is less than the upper limit, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It is like this.

A payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided below the operation unit 4202. The payout button 4209 is paid out by a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, a medal (betting medal) input as the number of bets by the one-piece insertion button 4205, the max bet button 4206, or a winning combination, and is stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the stored medals (stored medals) to the medal tray 4201. In addition, when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay prize (replay prize), or a predetermined number of medals that can be stored as a credit are also used for the medal via the medal selector 4207. It is returned to the saucer 4201.

The starting lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a game of one division. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting an error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used when returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and stuck in the medal selector 4207 to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 includes a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c. The rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is stopped in accordance with the stop operation.

Further, a decorative plate (decorative panel) that constitutes a lower region of the front member 4200 is provided below the portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the bottom of the front member 4200, there are provided a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout opening, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 266) for controlling the entire slot machine 4000 is arranged in the upper part of the housing. A character ratio display 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is formed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as in the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main substrate 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600 but is also used as another display (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display 4500) provided on the front surface of the slot machine 4000, and the payout number display LED 4562 is used. Alternatively, the character product ratio may be displayed on the image display body 4500.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317. It is advisable to display (print, stamp, seal, etc.) that the switch is a switch for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100. The display switch 1318 is preferably provided in the vicinity of the accessory ratio display 1317. However, other than the main control unit 1300, if the operation is easy, another board (for example, the production control board 4700). The power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200 may be provided. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also serve as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it by mistake.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided substantially in the center of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are placed. Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000.

Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged in the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the activated line and the winning is achieved, the prize is won. The corresponding number of medals (payout medals) or medals that exceed the upper limit of credits due to the addition due to the establishment of a prize are paid out to the medal tray 4201. By operating the payout button 4209, the medals for credits are paid out to the medal receiving tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, medals that overflow from the medal payout device 4110 and flow in are stored, and the medals that flow in are stored in the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guiding.

[15-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing a configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for centrally controlling the progress of the game, and a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input/output interface 4604, etc. are mounted on the main board 4600.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with the character ratio display 1317 for displaying the character ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and the display switch 1318 for switching the display of the character ratio display 1317. The display switch 1318 may be a push-button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio may be displayed on the character ratio display 1317.

The one-sheet insertion button 4205, the max bet button 4206, the start lever 4210, the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, the payout button 4209, etc., are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown in the figure. Is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a. , 4211b, 4211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are output to the main board 4600.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main board 4600, and various signals are input to the main board 4600 from these devices. The devices include a symbol variation display device 4300, a medal payout device 4110, and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right). Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is composed of a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can be independently rotated and stopped, and at the time of rotation, plural kinds of symbols are displayed from the top in the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed continuously changing downward.

Further, each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has position sensors 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting a reference position for rotation, and each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has position sensors 4331a, 4331b, 4331c. The reels are provided corresponding to each other (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, stop position information of each reel can be obtained on the main board 4600.

Inside the medal selector 4207, the solenoid 4207a and the insertion sensor 4207b described above are installed. The insertion sensor 4207b detects a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 4203, and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is OFF, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted, and even if the player inserts the medals, the medal selector 4207 is not accepted. The medals flowing through the return trough return to the medal tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is also invalidated at the same time, so that neither betting nor medals are accumulated by inserting medals.

The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e for detecting the paid out medals one by one in the discharge port, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. .. Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a full medal sensor 4111a, and when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the medals have exceeded the predetermined number is output to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display is displayed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, and the like to notify the abnormality of the medal storage, and the player, the hall employee, or the like is notified that the abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. Further, a drive signal is input to the medal payout device 4110 from the main board 4600 according to the type of symbol combination stopped on the activated line, and in response to this, the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110 or there is no medal at all, the detection of the number of coins by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the payout sensor 4110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 4600, and in response to this, the main board 4600 informs that a medal payout abnormality has occurred. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display body 4500, and the like to notify the player, the hall employee, or the like that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 is provided with a production control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600. The production control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, a ROM 4702, a RAM 4703, an input/output interface 4707, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and an AMP (audio amplifier). 4705, a sound source IC 4706 and the like are mounted. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, light extinction, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 in the game hall via the external relay terminal board 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from an AC 24 V (AC24V) power supply supplied from the island facility. For example, three types of power sources are created: direct current +5 V (hereinafter “+5 V”), direct current +12 V (hereinafter “+12 V”), and direct current +24 V (hereinafter “+24 V”). Three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each configuration included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of +5V and +12V are supplied to the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. Is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is provided with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000 and can be operated only when the front member 4200 is opened. The power switch 4112v is for turning on and off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings (for example, the settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. Further, the reset switch 4112u is for releasing an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated together with the setting change key switch 4112t when changing the setting.

A reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605 is provided on the main board 4600. When the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for rotating the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the logic (eg, HI) of the voltage switching signal to set the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Is output to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining the static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal to set the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Is output to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage.

The above is an example of the configuration of the slot machine 4000. In the game by the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 in a state where the number of medals has been determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotate, and thereafter, the player stops the reels 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When is operated, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped and controlled, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the activated line and necessary. Accordingly, the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded.

As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel band on which a design is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination are displayed based on the display content (the combination mode of the symbols displayed on the activated line) displayed in the symbol display window 4401. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned activated line in the symbol display window 4401. In addition, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of activated lines. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, the medals are paid out in the number of payouts corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations.

[15-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, a storage area provided by the ROM 4602, the RAM 4603, etc. provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Although the storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 24, it has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 267 to 270. FIG. 267 is a diagram showing details of the access area in the game control of the slot machine 4000 according to the present embodiment and the ROM area 4910 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602.

The storage area in this embodiment is provided by a medium such as the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from “0000H” to “FFFFH” are given. The access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium providing the access area, and includes a ROM area 4910, a RAM area 4920, an I/O area 4930, and a parameter information setting area 4940. Has been. Note that each area does not necessarily correspond to a medium that provides an access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

By configuring the access area of this embodiment as described above, the CPU 4601 can specify the address to access the program or data without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. Details of the access area will be described below.

[15-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 4910 will be described. The ROM area 4910 corresponds to the storage area provided by the ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains stored contents even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the stored data can be read, but can be updated or deleted. You can't do that. The ROM 4602 may be any non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 4910 may be updated.

Addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH" are assigned to the ROM area 4910. The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 by designating the address “0000H” to “1FFFH”.

The ROM area 4910 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and stores programs for performing game control. In addition, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. The area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

The second control area stores a program and the like for debugging the control program (function inspection). The second data area is an area for storing data for performing debugging (function inspection). The second data area is not always necessary, and the data for debugging may be stored in the second control area. In addition, an area (second control area, second data area) for storing a program or data for performing debugging (function inspection) of the game control program without being used for game control is a debug (inspection function) area ( The second storage area).

The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio. Data for calculating the accessory ratio is also stored in the third control area. A third data area for storing data for calculating the character ratio may be provided. An area (third control area) in which a program or data for calculating the character ratio is stored without being used for game control is defined as a character ratio calculation area (third storage area). In this way, by designing the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the inspection of the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. Can be performed separately, and the labor of inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. In addition, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas for which access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset processing is forcibly executed. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the front and rear areas. For example, the start address of the first isolated area is next to the end address of the first control area. Address ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first isolation area is the address ("0AFFH") immediately before the first data area. Further, the third isolated area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function inspection) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the debug (function inspection) area. May be treated as Similarly, the fourth isolation region is arranged between the debug (functional inspection) region and the accessory ratio calculation region, and is treated as the debug (functional inspection) region in FIG. 267. You may make it handle as an object ratio calculation area.

[15-3-2. RAM area]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM area 4920 will be described. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 4920 in this embodiment. RAM area 4920 corresponds to the storage area provided by RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 4920 temporarily stores the programs and data stored in the ROM area 4910, and stores the data derived by executing the programs. The RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as it can read and write data. Further, when a power failure occurs, the backup power supply can hold the data stored in the RAM 4603 for a predetermined period.

The RAM area 4920 is provided with addresses from “3000H” to “31FFH”. The data stored in the RAM 4603 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 by designating the address “3000H” to “31FFH”.

The RAM area 4920 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolation area. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The work area for game control is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing debug control (second control) of a program. The work area for calculating the character ratio is an area for storing data for calculating the character ratio and the calculated character ratio (character ratio, continuous character ratio, advantageous section character ratio, etc.). It should be noted that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the character ratio do not necessarily need to secure a dedicated work area, and a work control work area may be used, or a game control work area may be used. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating a character ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area is reduced. However, if the program configuration does not use the work area for debug (inspection function) or the work area for character ratio calculation, the work area for debug (inspection function) or work area for character ratio calculation is not necessarily used. Good.

The save area is an area for temporarily storing data used for game control, debug (inspection function) control, or accessory ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various registers (calculation register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) of the CPU are copied to the save area before the predetermined process is executed. After the processing is completed, the copied value is returned to various registers of the CPU. The save area may be commonly used for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation, but like the work area, for game control, debug (inspection function), and accessory ratio. You may divide separately by calculation. Thereby, the game control, the debug (inspection function) control, and the accessory ratio calculation can be more independent.

The isolation area is between the game control work area, the debug (inspection function) work area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area, the debug (inspection function) work area, the save area, and the accessory ratio calculation save area. It is allocated between the areas and is a continuous area with each area (front and back areas). For example, the start address of the isolation area between the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area is the address next to the end address of the game control work area (“3076H”), and the end address is The address ("307FH") immediately before the debug (inspection function) work area is set. The isolated area is an area for which access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute the reset processing when accessed in the processing by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 268 shows the details of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio on the right side thereof. The work area for calculating the character ratio may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the result of the character ratio calculation is stored. .. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the slot machine 4000 is powered on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, or the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when the initialization is determined to be normal or the data is erased, and a fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). Good. The check code may also be used as the power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set for the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Moreover, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 of FIG. 271), it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Further, the value of the main area may be copied to each backup area in the power-off processing executed when the power is cut off.

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digit of the address.

FIG. 269 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the work ratio ratio work area.

FIG. 269(A) shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the percentage of bonuses, the percentage of continuous bonuses, the number of advantageous zone games, the number of non-advantageous zone games, and the advantageous zone. Store the percentage. The bonus payout number is the number of medals paid out while the bonus product is operating (for example, during the regular bonus). The number of consecutive winning prize balls is the number of medals paid out during the operation of the consecutive winning actions (for example, during a big bonus). The total payout number is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The character ratio can be calculated by the number of character payouts/total number of payouts. The continuous character ratio can be calculated by the number of continuous character payments divided by the total number of catches paid out. The number of advantageous zone games is the number of games executed in a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) are hard to decrease), and the number of non-advantageous zone games is , The number of games executed in the game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by the number of advantageous section games/(the number of advantageous section games+the number of non-advantageous section games).

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(A), the number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the total payout number, the number of advantageous zone games and the number of non-advantageous zone games are the total numbers in FIG. 269(B) described later. It corresponds to a cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 429496295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. Further, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

The number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are updated by the area ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 271), and the role rate is calculated. The continuous character ratio and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation/display processing (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

FIG. 269(B) shows a structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), the number of re-plays, the number of winning payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the number of games, the percentage of bonuses, the ratio of continuous bonuses, the number of advantageous zone games, non- The number of advantageous zone games and the advantageous zone ratio are stored. The storage area of each data is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the number of executed games is predetermined. When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointers for all data are moved and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to a storage area that is one behind the write pointer. This is because the character ratio is calculated using the data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer completes one cycle and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes round and round. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), the number of re-plays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, and the number of games in the ring buffer are 2-byte storage areas, Numerical values up to 65535 can be stored. The cumulative total of the number of re-plays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, and the number of games played is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and a numerical value up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. Since the total is the total of data for 400 games×n (6000 games when n=15), a large storage area is prepared. The total sum of the number of re-plays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of prizes paid out, the number of consecutive prizes paid out, and the number of games played is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and a decimal number of 16777215 or 429496295 can be stored. Since the total sum is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The cumulative total and total cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store up to 255 decimal values. Each of the number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games is a storage area of 3 bytes, and a numerical value up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store up to 255 decimal numbers.

In addition, by increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area forming the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same total data of 6000 games can be stored. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269(B), the number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the ratio of role products, the ratio of continuous role products, the number of advantageous zone games, the number of non-advantageous zone games, and the advantage zone ratio are This is the same as the description in FIG. 269(A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The number of winning payouts is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of games executed, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-plays, the number of prize payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are the area update processing for character rate calculation (step S1038 in FIG. 271). ), the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation/display processing (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 269(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the initialization process (step S1020 of FIG. 271) erases the data of the work ratio calculating work area. However, the data will not be erased by other occasions. Therefore, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, or one month). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 269(B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

Further, the data in the work area for calculating the character ratio and the calculated character ratio are abnormal values (for example, the character ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculated result of the character ratio greatly changes from the previous calculated value. , Number of payouts> total number of payouts, etc., the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but all the data in the work area for calculating the character ratio may be deleted. Further, if the data of the work area for calculating the character ratio or the calculated character ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that it is abnormal. Alternatively, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, the normal backup area data may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[15-3-3. Configuration of I/O area]
Next, the I/O area 4930 will be described. An input/output port corresponds to the I/O area 4930, and each input/output port can be accessed by the CPU 4601 accessing the I/O area 4930. The input/output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to input of a switch or the like, a port related to output of a special winning opening solenoid, an LED drive signal, or the like. Input/output port settings (settings regarding use/non-use of input settings, output settings, etc.) are set based on the setting values in the parameter information setting area 4940.

[15-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 4940 will be described. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 4940 of the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 4940 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, various settings include start/end addresses of each control area and data area, as shown in FIG. 270. In FIG. 270, the definition of the start address and the end address of each of the third control area, the work area for character ratio calculation, and the save area for character ratio calculation is omitted, but the third control area start setting is omitted. The third control area end setting is defined similarly to the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work ratio start work area start setting and the accessory ratio calculation work area end setting are the start and end work areas of other work areas. It is defined in the same way as the end setting, and the accessory ratio calculating save area start setting and the accessory ratio calculating save area end setting are defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of other save areas. Areas other than the area set here are unused (unset) areas. As a result, when the CPU 4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Note that although continuous areas are set in FIG. 270, they do not have to be continuous as set areas, and parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals, for example.

Further, in this embodiment, when an area other than the setting area (first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 4910, isolated areas of the RAM 4920) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, it is possible to initialize the program by intentionally accessing the isolated area and causing a reset. Since the slot machine sequentially executes the processing, it is possible to execute the program from the start processing and execute the initial setting again by accessing the isolated area after the last game processing is completed. Thereby, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, it is possible to reset the normal value by executing the initial setting again. Further, in the initial setting process, the RAM clear is determined by the power failure flag, but it is possible to force the RAM clear by accessing the isolated area without setting the power failure flag. Become. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, since the game is played in parallel, if the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue the game, but in the case of the slot machine it becomes unnecessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the RAM information, it is possible to eliminate the processing for initializing the RAM information by accessing the isolated area.

The value set in the parameter information setting area 4940 is not sequentially set by the user program processing such as the initial setting of the CPU 4601, but the address and setting value of the parameter area is set in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. Before the control program is started by the CPU 4601, the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU. As a result, various parameters can be set when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the setting values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user side, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[15-4. Game control]
[15-4-1. System reset start processing]
Next, control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset activation process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset activation process is a process that is executed when the slot machine 4000 is powered on or a power failure occurs, and is a process that is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset start-up process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 4940 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area allocated to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated to the RAM area 4920 as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 268) is regarded as an unused area. Assigned. Further, the work area and the save area are divided into a game control area and a debug (inspection function) area (or other purpose). In the ROM area 4910, similarly to the RAM area 4920, areas for storing programs and data are allocated as used areas, and areas not allocated as used areas are allocated as unused areas.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes security check processing (step S1012). The security check process is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, there is a possibility that the ROM 4602 has been replaced with an illegal ROM, so the activation of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check has passed (step S1014).

Note that the processing from the power-on of the slot machine to the end of the security check (the processing up to step S1014) is not the processing defined by the user program, but the processing configured by the hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. Has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes device initialization setting processing for performing initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting processing, processing such as activation setting of the periodic processing (FIG. 272, timer interrupt processing) that regularly executes a predetermined processing is executed. In the present embodiment, a parameter setting process executes a function that prevents settings related to game lottery, such as random number function settings, from being rewritten by the user program after a security check, and device initialization setting process other than these functions. Running in. By thus dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud in the game is less likely to occur.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 or a hot start for returning to the game with the backed up contents of the RAM 4603.

When performing a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is “Yes”), the CPU 4601 executes initialization processing for initializing the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when a setting change operation of the pachinko machine 1 is performed, an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power interruption flag is not set.

On the other hand, when performing a hot start for returning to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is “No”), the CPU 4601 executes a process for returning the game based on the contents of the backed up RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the restoration processing restores the processing interrupted at the time of power interruption. Specifically, in any of the processing from step S1024 to step S1042 of the system reset activation processing described later or from step S1110 to step S1130 of the regular processing (FIG. 272), the processing interrupted at the time of power interruption is restored.

In the slot machine 4000 according to the present embodiment, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when the recovery process is executed. At this time, only the game control work area excluding the debug (inspection function) work area out of all areas where the checksum calculation target is used as a work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area) May be Calculating the checksum only in the game control work area is because the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process and affects the game result. Since it is a non-process, it is possible that some bugs remain due to insufficient verification. In this case, the debug (inspection function) work area where the information obtained by executing such a process is retained Using the checksum as the calculation target may impair the reliability of normal recovery from power failure. On the other hand, since the game control processing is directly related to the game, if bugs or the like are left in the product, it will cause a great trouble in the market. In some cases, sales may be discontinued and it may be necessary to recover the product.In this case, it is extremely likely to cause enormous damage to the manufacturer and the hall in terms of cost, etc. This is because the game control work area is highly reliable as compared with the debug (inspection function) work area because the verification is carried out dynamically.

When the initialization process ends or a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning the information in the RAM 4603 which is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

When the game initial setting process ends, the CPU 4601 executes an information signal 1 output process for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting the debug (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. The information signal output processing defines the information signal 1 to N output processing, and a required module is called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when outputting a debug (inspection function) signal (information regarding start of rotation of the reel, ON of the start lever, winning combination) accompanying the start of the game in the process at the start of the game, debug regarding stop of each reel within the symbol stop process ( Inspection function) signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, debug (inspection function) signal (fixing function stopped on each reel and payout associated with the winning combination) concerning the winning combination in the winning determination process. When the information about the number of coins, the information about the output signal regarding the number of payouts at the time of payout (the number of payout medals, etc.) is output, the “information signal N output processing” module required for the processing is called and executed as appropriate.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process for performing a process in a previous stage in which the player operates the start lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not a replay (replay) execution instruction has been issued, whether or not a medal has been inserted, whether or not a medal clearing has been performed, and further, Confirmation of the game setting value is performed.

When the start lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes game start processing for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start processing, a random number value for performing a lottery for a game is acquired, a winning combination is determined, and the reel 4301 is started to rotate. After that, the CPU 4601 executes Wait processing for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotation speed (step S1032).

When the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 enables the input of the reel stop button 4211 and executes the symbol stop processing for performing the processing until all the reels 4301 stop (step S1034).

Further, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, the winning combination is determined, and when it is determined that the winning combination is made, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is performed and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current game state, adds the number of award medals paid out as a game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the work area for calculating the character ratio in the RAM area 4920 (FIG. 268 (see FIG. 269) is updated (step S1038). The process of step S1038 can be skipped when there is no prize medal to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Even if the slot machine 4000 detects an injustice and stops the game, it executes the accessory ratio calculation area updating process (step S1038). Regardless of whether or not a fraud has been detected, by executing these processes, it is possible to collect data for calculating the character ratio even during the fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game end process for performing a game end process (step S1042). In the game ending process, a payout process corresponding to a winning combination is executed. If no prize has been won, or if there is no payout, the process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[15-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, a periodic process that is an interrupt process that is activated at a predetermined cycle while the main loop process of the system reset initial activation process is being executed will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the procedure of regular processing.

When the regular processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the data to be saved is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 268. As described above, since the regular process is an interrupt process that is activated while the main loop process is being executed, it is possible to continue the process after returning by saving the CPU register used in the main loop process. Need to

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer incorporated in the CPU (step S1112). This allows the watchdog timer to be periodically cleared.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check processing, processing relating to drive control of a driving body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the origin position detection, and the like are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing for updating various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the regular process is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the regular process x the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether the display switch 1318 is operated. If the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio calculation/display processing is called, and the medal stored in the character ratio calculation work area. Calculate the character ratio by referring to the number of payouts. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The character ratio calculation/display processing is the same as the character ratio calculation/display processing (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. The specific method of calculating the character ratio and the specific method of displaying the character ratio are the same as those described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the character ratio calculation/display processing in the timer interrupt process and calculating the character ratio, the character ratio (the gambling property of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated. You may calculate only the value which is carried out. Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 in response to the operation of the display switch 1318.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes an LED output process for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main board 4600, and is, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. Also, the data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED is output.

The CPU 4601 executes an information output process of outputting a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal board 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes random number update processing for updating the random number used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, the random number to be generated by the software process is updated. Here, in addition to random numbers generated only by software, update processing of soft random numbers built in the CPU is executed. With the software random number built into the CPU, the count itself is executed by hardware, but the trigger for update is determined in this process. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the program processing related to the random number update.

When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, execution of interrupt is permitted (step S1130). Even if a new timer interrupt occurs during the regular processing (timer interrupt processing), the new timer interrupt is pending, and the timer interrupt processing executed immediately before is normally completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, the regular processing (timer interrupt processing) is configured so as not to be executed in a multiple manner.

[15-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Next, the information signal output process executed in the system reset activation process and the like will be described. The information signal output processing is provided according to each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is configured by a plurality of modules. For example, there are "condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)""lottery determination processing (signal output related to lottery)" and the like. Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the description of each flow will be omitted. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the information signal output process of this embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all the registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure that the values will be restored even if they are destroyed), and the values of all registers are saved in the stack area. It is designed to let you. In addition, the stack area used at this time is allocated to the save area for debug (inspection function), and is allocated to a different area separated from the save area for game control.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires, from the RAM 4603, information to be referred to for selecting (ON/OFF) the output information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only the information stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, data is not written in the RAM 4603 in the process, and when writing is necessary, the information is output to the work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processes other than the information signal output process. As a result, even if the program for executing the information signal output processing is arranged in a different place from other game control programs, it is possible to ensure independence from other game control programs without using a common area. ..

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debug (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output by the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed by the number of debug (inspection function) signals to be output. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each function (1 to N) of the output signal. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but a table defining output signals corresponding to the functions is stored in the debug (inspection function) area in the table. The information signal output processing may be made common by preparing in two data areas and selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to the function designated by the calling source.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the program (signal output program) for executing the information signal output processing and the like is stored in an area clearly distinguished from the area (game control area) for storing the game control program. By providing the area (area for debug (inspection function)), a program for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be independently arranged. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, is a process that does not affect the result of the game, and does not impair the fairness of the game. Also, for other purposes (for example, to arrange a program for game control or a general-purpose program to compensate for the lack of capacity in the game control area), the program should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the call destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and protects all registers used in the game control area when called. Also, as described above, when program processing for the game control area is being executed, access to the work area for debug (inspection function) is prohibited, and program processing for the debug (inspection function) area is executed. When it is, only the reference of the game control work area is permitted, and the writing is prohibited. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling of modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the subroutine format, and after the completion of the subroutine, the program is returned immediately after being called by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (the program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area).

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for character ratio calculation) may be the same as steps S18 to S26 of FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the game state backup data is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effect described in the example of the pachinko machine described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the slot machine in operation, and the gambling property of the gaming machine in operation. I can confirm.

Although the present invention has been described in detail above with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various modifications and equivalents within the spirit of the appended claims It includes the configuration.

Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, the following are typical ones from the viewpoint of the invention other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
And an accessory ratio display for displaying information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main controller is
Transmitting data for displaying on the accessory ratio display to the driver circuit by serial communication,
After the power is turned on, for serial communication with the driver circuit, a synchronization method, a communication rate, whether to use a parity, and whether to use a stop bit is set, the game according to the preceding paragraphs, Machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main control device and peripheral control device.

As a result, it is possible to suppress an incorrect display of the accessory ratio due to data corruption during communication.

(2) The main controller is
It has a work RAM that retains data related to the progress of games and data for calculating the character ratio even when the power is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the setting for the serial communication is executed after clearing the work RAM.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of an incorrect accessory ratio by using the RAM data having an incorrect content.

(3) The main controller is
It has a function to transmit the data accumulated in the FIFO buffer by serial communication,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein after the power is turned on, a data storage amount that determines the timing of sending data from the FIFO buffer is set.

This allows data to be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
And an accessory ratio display for displaying information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main controller, the display device, and the driver are arranged so that the length of a signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit is longer than the length of a signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line that connects the main control unit and the driver circuit, it is easy to find unauthorized modifications without arranging parts around the main control unit, and further, the signal line that connects the driver circuit and the display device. Is shorter than the signal line connecting the main control unit and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the accessory ratio can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio indicator are housed in one case.

As a result, it is possible to easily find an unauthorized modification without arranging other parts around the main control device and further reduce the influence of noise.

(6) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

This makes it easy to find an unauthorized modification without disposing other components on the printed circuit board around the main control device, and further to reduce the influence of noise.

(7) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by housing the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Also, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit.

This can reduce the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

Thus, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device to reduce power consumption,
The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main controller sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state where the game machine ratio display is not visible in the installed state of the game machine. Machine.

With this, it is possible to prevent unnecessary power consumption of the gaming machine when the display of the accessory ratio is unnecessary.

(11) A gaming machine which gives a player a prize ball as a game value by winning a game ball launched toward a game area into a predetermined winning opening,
A main controller that controls the progress of the game,
With an accessory ratio indicator that displays information about prize balls,
The winning opening includes a general winning opening in which the shape of the entrance does not change depending on the gaming state, and an electric winning opening in which the opening opens or expands depending on the gaming state,
The main control device, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, at least, the number of first prize balls to be paid out at the opportunity to win the general prize hole, and at the opportunity to win the electric prize hole Separately counting the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display device displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main controller stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
The memory stores a check code for verifying the stored number of prize balls,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main controller erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

This makes it possible to detect an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory, and suppress the display of an incorrect character ratio (ratio between the number of first prize balls and the number of second prize balls).

(13) The main controller is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
Store the game control data in the first backup area,
Data of the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio is stored in the second backup area,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, when at least one of the data for game control and the data for the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio is normal, only the abnormal data can be erased and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main controller is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
Store the game control data in the first backup area,
Data of the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio is stored in the second backup area,
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. A gaming machine according to item.

If the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased, and the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the attendant at the game arcade. It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of the accessory is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the gaming machine that has been modified to have a high character ratio, and prevent concealment of the character with a high character ratio.

(15A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means updates the information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means upon the input/output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state is the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched in the game area, the game discharged from the gaming machine). The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the number by the number of balls, the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet, and the number of winning balls.

(15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a winning detection signal for detecting a prize at a winning opening, a timing for receiving a reception confirmation signal of a prize ball payout command or a prize ball payout completion signal, or a prize ball The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base to be displayed on the display means is updated at the timing of transmitting the prize ball payout command instructing the payout.

(15D) The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when receiving a signal detecting the winning of the game ball to the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Updating the total number of prize balls using the calculated number of prize balls,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) A payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player is provided,
The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of prize balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) A payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player is provided,
The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of prize balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Receiving confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means,
Updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction received the confirmation of receipt,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) A payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player is provided,
The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of prize balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Receiving completion of payout of prize balls according to the instruction from the payout control means,
Updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction that has received the completion of the payout,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal, updates the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means on the updated information on the game value. The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, further comprising: a processing and displaying unit that can process (statistically process) and display a result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 15A to 15H, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(16A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means updates information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means in association with a game situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated at a timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in the buffer,
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total number of prize balls is consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched in the game area). The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of gaming balls ejected from the gaming machine, the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls.

(16D) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, thereby obtaining the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the predetermined number is moved to a number.

(16E) The control means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal, updates the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means on the updated information on the game value. The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, further comprising: a processing and displaying unit that can process (statistically process) and display a result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property under the restriction of the main control device in the rule.

(17A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated in association with the fact that the counted number of consumed balls satisfies a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the information about the gaming value is calculated at a timing when the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means uses the number of game balls hit in the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet and the number of winning balls, and the number of consumed balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that

(17D) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The control means is
Stores the total number of out balls used to calculate the base,
Calculate the number of spheres consumed in the normal gaming state, store in a buffer,
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing, and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of spheres consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out balls, thereby total out balls from the buffer. The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by moving a predetermined number to the number.

(17F) The control means is
With the winning of the winning a prize as a trigger, the special symbol variation display game for deriving the special game state is executed,
When the pending storage of the special symbol variation display game is the upper limit value, the winning ball to the starting winning opening is not stored, and the number of prize balls is counted, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs.

(17G) The control means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal, updates the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means on the updated information on the game value. The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, further comprising: a processing and displaying unit that can process (statistically process) and display a result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property.

(18A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
And a main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is played is detachably attached,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display means displays the information regarding the gaming value even when the main frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to an island facility of a game arcade,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is provided on a back surface side of the gaming machine that is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the body frame,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided in the case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions of 18A to 18C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in hole sales.

(19A)
A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
Information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means in association with satisfying a predetermined condition in the game,
It has a game execution means for playing a special symbol variable display game triggered by winning a prize at the starting prize hole,
Even when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special symbol variable display game is being played by the game executing means, the information regarding the game value is updated, The game machine described.

(19B) The information about the game value is a base,
The control means, as the predetermined condition, at the timing of any one of the detection of the winning of the winning opening, the transmission of the prize ball payout command, the reception of the receipt confirmation of the prize ball payout command and the reception of the prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base to be displayed on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with sufficient countermeasures against fraud even during a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means for controlling the production of the special symbol variable display game which is carried out with the winning of the winning opening as a trigger,
A game value information display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The effect control means,
Control the transition to the low power mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced from the normal mode,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a display mode that reduces power consumption of the game value information display means is not changed during the low power mode.

(20B) The effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variable display game and including liquid crystal display means having a backlight,
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the game value information display means is configured by a light emitting diode and does not reduce the brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) Equipped with effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variable display game,
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the storage of the special symbol variable display game is exhausted,
The game value information display means is characterized by not changing the display mode such that the power consumption is reduced even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the pending storage of the special symbol variable display game is exhausted. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a rich energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
A normal game state and a game state control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states advantageous to the player from the normal game state,
The information about the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state, and is updated. Game machine.

(21B) The control means, by any one of the number of game balls launched in the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

(21C) The control means is
When the special symbol variable display game is a big hit, the advantageous game state is derived, and the player controls to open a winning opening from which many game values can be obtained.
From the jackpot confirmation by the special symbol variable display game to the start of the next special symbol variable display game, the advantageous game state is set, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information on the game value. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(21D) The control means is
In the advantageous game state, the player controls to open the winning opening through which many game values can be obtained.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of gaming balls won in the winning port is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched in the gaming area, and the number of consuming balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions of 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A game machine which gives a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information about the given game balls,
In the game area where the launched game balls roll, there is a starting port that triggers a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and a trigger that derives the open state from the closed state of the starting port. There is at least a passage opening that becomes,
The control means is
It is also possible to control to a special game state where it is easy to derive the open state of the starting opening,
The number of prize balls given to the player is excluded by excluding the number of prize balls given and the number of balls consumed by the player when being controlled to either the special game state or the special game state. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming sphere is calculated and updated by dividing by the number of consuming balls consumed by a person.

(22B) The control means may be one of the number of game balls hit in the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls in the normal state is counted.

(22C) The control means sets the expanded state from the hit determination by the normal symbol variable display game to the start of the next normal symbol variable display game, and the number of prize balls and consumed balls during this period are related to the game ball. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, which is excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means counts the number of consumed balls in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls winning the start opening from the number of game balls launched in the game area. The gaming machine described in each item.

According to the inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A launcher that is operable by a player and that launches a game ball toward a game area,
Prize ball giving means for giving a predetermined number of prize balls when the game balls are detected at a winning opening provided in the game area,
Main control means for executing a lottery as to whether or not to give an advantageous game state advantageous to the player, when the game ball is detected at a predetermined prize hole among the prize holes.
A peripheral control means for determining an effect to be displayed based on the information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means has an information updating means capable of updating the information about the assigned game ball to both increase and decrease,
A first state in which the information about the assigned game ball can be updated by the information updating means, and a first state in which the information about the assigned game ball can be updated by the information updating means. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information about the given game balls is updated to increase is suppressed as compared with the first state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect that indicates that the first state has transitioned to the second state.

(23B) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The main control means,
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with the second state being a timing at which the base is likely to decrease.

(23C) The main control means is
Write information about the game sphere in the storage area at every predetermined time, every predetermined number of prize balls or every predetermined number of consumed balls,
By comparing the information about the game ball written in the storage area with the information about the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing, it is determined whether the information about the game ball has increased or decreased.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase or decrease.

According to the inventions of 23A to 23C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even if the variable display game is continuously discontinued.

(24A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for repeatedly executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
Prize ball number acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls to be acquired by the player at a predetermined timing,
And a consumption ball detection means for detecting consumption balls consumed by the player,
The control means is
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumed ball by the consumed ball number detection means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected consumed ball number within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value information is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state are counted within the same repetition,
The game according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that the information regarding the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Machine.

According to the inventions of 24A to 24B, it is possible to quickly display the information on the number of game media acquired by the player.

(25A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
Out-out detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the out-open provided at the bottom of the game area,
And a winning ball detection means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening,
The control means is
There is a game state control means for controlling to one of the game states among at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
Counting the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet from the output of the outlet detection means,
Counting the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detecting means,
By the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet and the number of winning balls, the number of balls consumed by the player is counted,
It is characterized in that the information regarding the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(25B) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
And a detection means for counting the number of game balls launched in the game area,
The control means is
There is a game state control means for controlling to one of the game states among at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
Counting the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area from the output of the detection means, counting the number of game balls consumed by the player,
It is characterized in that the information regarding the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(25C) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
And a detection means for counting the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine,
The control means is
There is a game state control means for controlling to one of the game states among at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
Counting the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine from the output of the detection means, to count the number of balls consumed by the player,
It is characterized in that the information regarding the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 25A to 25C, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(26A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
Game state control means for controlling to any one of the normal game state and the special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
A prize ball number counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area is won in a winning opening in which a prize can be won,
It has a consumption ball number counting means for counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means updates the information on the gaming value by using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information about the game value is a base,
The number of prize balls in the normal gaming state is counted, excluding the number of prize balls that are awarded when the game balls launched toward the right side of the game area are prize-winning openings that are allowed to win,
Counting the number of consumed balls in the normal game state excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area,
The control means calculates the information regarding the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state, wherein each of the preceding paragraphs is characterized. Game machine.

(26C) The control means, for a predetermined period of time after detecting passage of a game ball of a gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or a winning of a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, which is excluded from the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period of time depending on whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the last detection, a predetermined number of game balls are consumed, or a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs.

(26E) The control means excludes the number of passing balls of a gate portion provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls to a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the number of winning balls and The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls is counted.

According to the inventions of 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a game state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
First data setting means for setting the first data according to the result of the game,
Second data setting means for setting second data that does not depend on the result of the game,
Third data setting means for setting the third data according to the result of the game,
First conversion means for obtaining first converted data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means;
Second conversion means for obtaining second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means;
And a display unit that displays the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display means does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value in a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first conversion data is multiplied by the second data to obtain first conversion data. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain second conversion data. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(27E) The first data is a game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given to the player,
The third data is a game value (for example, the number of out balls) consumed by the player,
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information about a given game value as second conversion data,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display displays information (for example, a base) regarding a gaming value obtained by the second converting means.

According to the inventions of 27A to 27E, the information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the base value required for evaluation of the gaming machine can be accurately displayed in real time. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), it is possible to accurately display the information on the game value (for example, the base value) in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a regular process for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
And a conversion unit that calculates information about the game value,
The control means is
An argument is passed to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and a result converted by the conversion means based on the argument is obtained from the conversion means,
A game machine characterized in that the process of passing the argument and the process of obtaining the result of the conversion can be executed within one regular process.

(28B) The conversion means is
An arithmetic circuit that performs division operation,
A divisor register into which the divisor is input, a dividend register into which the dividend is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation,
The control means is
Write an argument to the divisor register and the dividend register,
After a lapse of a predetermined time from writing the argument, read the quotient from the result register,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the process of writing an argument to the divisor register and the dividend register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) Prize game medium number counting means for counting the game medium given to the player in a predetermined game state,
And a consumed game medium number counting means for counting the game medium consumed by the player in the predetermined game state,
The control means is
A value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game medium number counting means by 100 is written in the dividend register,
Writing the consumption game medium number counted by the consumption game medium number counting means in the divisor register,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein a base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions of 28A to 28C, the information regarding the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed within one iteration process (timer interrupt process), it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated.

(29A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
With a winning opening where game balls can be won,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
A consumed ball counting means for counting the consumed balls consumed by the player,
And a prize ball counting means for counting the prize balls to be given to the player,
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state where game balls are easily won and a closed state where winning is difficult,
The control means is
Based on the counted number of consumed balls and the number of prize balls, update the information about the game value to be displayed on the display means,
When a prize is detected in the specific winning opening even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and when the determination is made, the number of winning balls involved in the winning abnormality. The gaming machine is characterized by updating the information about the gaming value to be displayed on the display means by excluding the number from the number of consumed balls.

(29B) At least one of the winning prize holes is a starting winning prize hole that serves as an opportunity to derive a special game state that facilitates acquisition of a large amount of game balls.
When the winning is detected in the starting winning opening when the starting winning opening is closed, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consuming balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the winning openings is a large winning opening that is opened in a special game state,
The control means, when the winning of the special winning opening is detected in the closed state of the special winning opening, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and the number of winning balls related to the winning is excluded from the number of consuming balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29D) has a consumption ball detecting means for detecting consumption balls consumed by the player,
The consumed ball counting means subtracts the number of winning balls involved in the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls detected by the consumed ball number detecting means, and counts the consumed balls consumed by the player. A gaming machine according to item.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of consumed balls used for calculating the information regarding the game value,
The consumed sphere counting means adds the consumed sphere number detected by the consumed sphere number detecting means to the total consumed sphere number, and subtracts the number of winning spheres involved in the winning abnormality from the total consumed sphere number to calculate the consumed sphere. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which counts.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of consumed balls used for calculating the information regarding the game value,
The consumed sphere counting means adds a value obtained by subtracting the consumed sphere count related to the winning abnormality from the consumed sphere count detected by the consumed sphere count detection means to the total consumed sphere count to count the consumed spheres. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized.

(29G) The winning opening can be switched between an open state where it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state where it is difficult to win a game ball,
The control means, when the winning of the winning opening is detected in the closed state, and the prize balls are not paid out in association with the winning, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and the number of winning balls for the winning is determined. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is excluded from the number of consumed balls and is updated with information on a gaming value to be displayed on the display means.

(29H) When an abnormality in winning at the winning opening is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the control unit excludes the number of winning balls related to the abnormality of winning from the number of consumed balls and displays the number on the display unit. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value for playing is updated.

According to the inventions of 29A to 29H, the information regarding the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, it is possible to accurately display the information regarding the game value (for example, the base value) in real time by excluding the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of out balls.

(30) A gaming machine which gives a player a gaming medium as an award,
A game area with multiple winning openings,
When a game medium is detected in each of the winning openings, a prize giving means for giving a predetermined specific prize out of a plurality of prizes,
Arithmetic processing means for executing a predetermined arithmetic processing using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media awarded as a prize by the award imparting means,
Processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means;
Display means for displaying the result of the arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device,
When a particular prize among the plurality of prizes is generated in the game, the prize giving means gives the particular prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. Amusement machine.

According to the thirty invention, it is possible to accurately and promptly display the information regarding the result of the game. In particular, a prize (for example, a prize ball paid out when a prize is awarded to a prize hole (a general prize hole or a large prize hole with a large number of prize balls, etc.) to which a high-value prize is awarded) accompanying the occurrence of a specific prize. Even if it is given, it can be displayed so that the result of the calculation processing (calculated base value) does not change, and it is easy to determine whether the gaming machine is performing the prescribed performance (for example, whether it is the set payout rate). it can.

(31A) A game provided with main control means including lottery means for executing lottery related to winning when a specific condition is satisfied, and peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. Machine,
The peripheral control means,
Temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
An information storage unit that is updated by the information stored in the temporary storage unit;
By providing at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A game machine characterized in that the history of the game machine can be grasped.

(31B) Provided with a general winning opening through which a game ball launched in the game area can win a prize even in a special game state,
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating a winning in the general winning opening,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winning in the general winning opening to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) When a predetermined condition is satisfied, an external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined condition to an external terminal board,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, an information storage unit that stores more detailed information than the information output toward the external terminal board,
An information presenting means for presenting the information stored by the information storing means, and the gaming machine according to the preceding paragraph.

(31D) A first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine is provided,
The peripheral control means,
Storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
The limited initializing means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storing means even when initialized by the first initializing means, Machine.

(31E) First initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine,
A second initialization unit that initializes the storage contents of the information storage unit;
The information storage means can retain the stored contents even when the power of the gaming machine is cut off,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first initialization means does not initialize the storage content of the information storage means but initializes the storage content of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine according to the preceding item, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of the signal received from the main control means and the time when the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means is a signal regarding a counting event counted according to the progress of the game and a signal regarding a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. Including,
The peripheral control means,
Temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
An information storage unit that is updated by the information stored in the temporary storage unit;
A first information output means for outputting at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The peripheral control means,
Counting the counting event based on the signal received from the main control means, storing the counting result in the temporary storage means,
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in the preceding items, characterized in that.

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal regarding a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal regarding a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
Counting the signal related to the counting event received from the main control means, and storing in the temporary storage means,
When the signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event, the time when the signal is received, and the information storage means are stored, and the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the counting result of (1) is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal regarding a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal regarding a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
Counting the signal related to the counting event received from the main control means, and storing in the temporary storage means,
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 31A to 31I, it is possible to know how the payout has changed. In particular, according to the inventions of 31D and 31E, the information about the game can be properly stored.

(32) A gaming machine which gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value,
Control means for executing a regular process for the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including variable display of symbols,
A second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information on the given game value,
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. Has and
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are connected. Has and
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means,
Although the control unit outputs the selection signal at a timing common to the first terminal and the third terminal, at least one of the first light emitting element groups is in the period in which the selection signal is being output. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting one light emitting element and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group; Are output at different timings to display-control the first light-emitting element group and the second light-emitting element group within one regular process.

According to the thirty-second invention, the circuit for displaying the information on the game value to be given (for example, the base value or the accessory ratio) can be simply configured, and the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine which gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value,
Control means for executing a regular process for the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including variable display of symbols,
A second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information on the given game value,
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. Has and
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are connected. Has and
At least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group corresponding to the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group; A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal The signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group in response to the A process of outputting a selection signal output to one terminal and a signal output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal, and a selection signal output to the third terminal and the selection signal The process of outputting the signal output to the corresponding plurality of fourth terminals is that the signal is output at different timings in the regular process by different processes in the same regular process. ..

According to the thirty-third invention, the circuit for displaying the information regarding the provided game value can be simply configured. Therefore, information about the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A game machine which gives a player a prize game medium as a game value,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
And a calculation result display unit for displaying information on the game value calculated by the calculation unit,
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
Timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device;
Controlled by the control device, at least, an output drive means for outputting a control signal for displaying on the calculation result display means,
In the board on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction as viewed from the control device, and the output drive means and the calculation result display means are arranged in another direction different from the one direction, A game machine characterized by being arranged apart from the timing means.

(34B) The connection line between the control device and the timing means and the connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect with each other. And the gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal that is input to the control device, and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal that is input to the control device,
On the printed circuit board on which the control means is realized, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction as the oscillator circuit from the processor, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged separately from the reset circuit and the oscillator circuit. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that

According to the inventions of 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress the interference between the signal related to the game control and the signal for displaying the information related to the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the influence on the game control and display the information about the game value quickly and accurately.

(35A) A game machine which gives a player a prize game medium as a game value,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
A display unit that is controlled by the control unit and displays information about the game value;
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
A memory which is accessed by the control device at the time of executing the processing and stores at least information about the game value;
The gaming machine is provided with input means for instructing initialization of the memory,
The control means is
A first initialization unit that determines whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal at a predetermined timing, and initializes a predetermined first region of the memory when it is determined to be abnormal. ,
When the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the input unit is operated, and if it is determined that the input unit is operated, a second initialization unit that initializes a predetermined second area of the memory is provided. Have,
The first region initialized by the first initialization unit and the second region initialized by the second initialization unit are the second regions initialized by the first initialization unit. Including overlapping areas that are commonly initialized by
At least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region,
The game machine is characterized in that the information about the game value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) The first area stores data used for calculating the information regarding the game value,
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area,
The control means is
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area is initialized,
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the second area is initialized,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input unit is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) In the first area, data used for calculating the information regarding the game value is stored,
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area,
The control means is
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized,
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input unit is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35D) The control unit determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time the periodical processing repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. Gaming machine described in.

(35E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal every time the information regarding the gaming value is calculated. ..

(35F) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the power of the game machine is turned on.

According to the inventions of 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory that stores the information (base value and accessory ratio) about the game value to be given. Therefore, information about the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A game machine which gives a player a prize game medium as a game value,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
Display means for displaying information on the game value,
An electric accessory operated by the control means,
Under a specific condition, when a plurality of game media wins during the operation of the electric accessory that is triggered by one hit, among some of the game media won, the information about the game value is displayed for some of the game media. A gaming machine, which is used for calculation and is not used for calculating information on the game value for other game media, but can be a trigger for the variable display game for any of the game media.

(36B) The control means is
Run the variable display game when the specified starting conditions are met,
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first game state (time saving, high probability state, big hit, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and a second game state (normal state) that is less advantageous than the first game state And control to either
When a plurality of game media are won during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in the second game state are used to calculate information about the game value, and the first game The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming media won in the state is not used for the calculation of the information regarding the gaming value, but any of the gaming media can trigger the variable display game.

(36C) The control means is
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines,
When a plurality of game media are won during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in a state where the predetermined type of error is detected should be used for calculating the information regarding the game value. However, the game media won in a state where the predetermined type of the error is not detected is used for calculating the information regarding the game value, but any of the game media can be a trigger for the variable display game. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 36A to 36C, it is switched whether to use the game medium for calculating the information on the game value according to the state of the gaming machine, so that the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine provided with an outer frame, a main body frame that is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game. hand,
When the body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, it is difficult to change the setting, which makes it difficult to operate the setting change operation unit, as compared to when the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame. A gaming machine, characterized by having an activating means.

(37B) An outer frame, a main body frame which is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame, and on which a game board is provided, and when the setting change operation for changing the setting state related to the game is performed, the changed setting state is changed. A gaming machine having a setting status display section for displaying,
A gaming machine, comprising: a visibility-hardening unit that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting status display unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting determination operation unit that performs a setting determination operation that determines a setting state related to a game. It was a gaming machine,
A gaming machine having a decision making device that makes it difficult to operate the setting decision operating unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine including an outer frame, a main body frame that is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game. hand,
The setting change operation unit has a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted,
When the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, it is configured so as to prevent insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion portion by a specific portion of the outer frame. A gaming machine.

According to the inventions of 37A to 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for an improper person to illegally change the setting state and improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming profit when performing variable display of symbols based on establishment of a start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A setting information determining section that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of pieces based on an operation on the specific operation section;
The gaming machine, wherein the variation time determining means can determine a specific variation time when the setting information is determined to be the specific information based on an operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when performing variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A probability determining unit that determines the probability that the hit result will be derived to any one of a plurality of probabilities based on an operation on a specific operating unit,
The gaming machine characterized in that the variation time determining means can determine a specific variation time when the probability determined based on an operation on the specific operation section is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine which gives a predetermined gaming profit when performing variable display of symbols based on establishment of the start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A setting information determining section that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of pieces based on an operation on the specific operation section;
The variation time determining means may determine a common variation time regardless of the setting information or a different variation time depending on the setting information.
A probability that different variable times are determined according to the setting information is set lower than a probability that the common variable time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming profit when performing variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A setting information determination unit that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of settings based on an operation on a specific operation unit,
And a production control unit for performing a predetermined production,
The fluctuation time determination means can determine different fluctuation times according to the setting information,
When the specific variation time is determined by the variation time determination means in correspondence with the specific setting information of the setting information, the effect control unit displays the variation display of the symbol within the specific variation time. A game machine characterized by sequentially performing a result suggesting effect that suggests a result and a setting suggesting effect that suggests the content of the setting information determined by the setting information determining unit.

According to the inventions of 37E to 37H, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making the player recognize the setting state in a new mode.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control section for performing game-related control, another control board connected to the main control board, and provided with a control section different from the game control section, and the game control A game machine provided with a setting-related operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game performed by a unit,
The game control unit has a setting change permissible state generating means for permitting an operation relating to the change of the setting state with respect to the setting related operation unit,
A game machine characterized in that the setting change permissible state generation means permits an operation related to the change of the setting state when the information transmitted from the another control board to the main control board is specific information. ..

According to the invention of 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to illegally change the setting state and improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control section for controlling the game and a setting change operation section for changing the setting state for the control executed by the game control section, and the game area is operated by a player operating a predetermined firing operation section. A gaming machine that gives a gaming profit by winning a game ball launched toward a predetermined prize hole,
When the setting change operation unit is operated and the setting state is changed, it has a shooting disabling means that disables the shooting of the game ball by the operation of the shooting operation unit for a predetermined period. Amusement machine.

According to the invention of 37J, the act of illegally changing the setting state can be suppressed.

(38A) A gaming machine provided with a game control section for controlling a game and a setting operation section for changing a setting for a control performed by the game control section,
A game machine characterized in that a game control board constituting the game control section and a setting board constituting the setting operation section are housed in one case.

(38B) In the case, in place of the setting operation unit, a dummy unit that cannot perform an operation for changing a setting can be housed together with the game control unit. Amusement machine.

(38C) The setting operation unit is
A first operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed;
A second operation unit for confirming the setting and ending the setting state;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, further comprising a setting display device that displays the contents of the setting.

(38D) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation unit, the second operation unit, and the setting display unit.

According to the inventions of 38A to 38D, the specifications of the gaming machine having the setting function and the gaming machine not having the setting function can be made common, and the design and production can be efficiently performed.

(39A) A game control unit having a processor for executing a program for controlling a game, and a memory accessed by the processor,
A clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory,
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation section for changing settings relating to control performed by the game control section,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed,
The game control unit,
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit are detected,
A gaming machine, wherein the setting state is started when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is operated.

(39B) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit initializes the first area of the memory after the setting state ends.

(39C) In the second area, which is at least partially different from the first area, when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is not operated, the game control section The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by initializing a memory.

According to the inventions of 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation of setting change.

(40A) A game machine including a game control unit that performs control related to a game, and a setting operation unit that changes settings related to control performed by the game control unit,
The game control unit has a game value display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and a setting display unit for displaying the contents of the setting,
In the setting state, the game control section displays the game value display means and the setting display means so as not to be confused with each other.

(40B) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit and the setting operation unit are housed in a single case.

(40C) The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are constituted by one display.

(40D) The game value display means displays the information about the given game value on the display unit without delay as the game progresses,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means, in the setting state, displays information about the setting on the display, instead of the information about the given game value.

(40E) The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are configured by different displays.

(40F) The game value display means,
In other than the setting state, the information about the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, display any of the characters, numbers, or figures that are not displayed in the setting state,
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means,
In other than the setting state, the information about the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, turn off or all lights,
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

According to the inventions of 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion of a plurality of displays arranged on the substrate.

(41A) A lottery means for performing a lottery on winning based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting opening,
Production determination means for determining any production from a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery,
Production execution means for executing the production determined by the production determination means,
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determination means for determining the predetermined setting information regarding the game to any one of a plurality of,
When an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed, setting information confirmation means for displaying the setting information determined by the setting information determination means on a predetermined display section,
The plurality of effects includes a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect even if the different operation is performed when the effect deciding means decides to perform the setting suggestion effect.

(41B) A lottery means for performing a lottery on winning based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting opening,
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determination means for determining the predetermined setting information regarding the game to any one of a plurality of,
Production determination means for determining any production from a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery,
Production execution means for executing the production determined by the production determination means,
Error detection means for detecting errors,
An error notification unit for notifying an error detected by the error detection unit,
The plurality of effects includes a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
The game machine characterized in that the effect execution means can execute the setting suggestion effect during a period in which the error notification means notifies an error satisfying a predetermined condition.

(41C) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
During the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect is executed, or when the starting condition is newly satisfied while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held, the newly established condition A game machine characterized by limiting the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the special symbol variation corresponding to the starting condition.

(41D) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
During the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect is executed, or when the starting condition is newly satisfied while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held, the newly established condition A gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the starting condition.

(41E) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held. The gaming machine characterized by limiting the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41F) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held. , A gaming machine characterized by limiting the execution of the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41G) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held. The gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

According to the inventions of 41A to 41G, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(42A) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player according to a result of a winning lottery in a game,
The main control means,
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Computing means for performing required computing processing by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
Access permission/prohibition is switched so that either of the first storage unit and the second storage unit can be accessed.
The calculation means is
The first storage means is used when the first program is executed,
A game machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42B) A game machine characterized in that the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched between accessible and non-accessible by one instruction inputted to the arithmetic means.

(42C) An instruction for switching the first storage unit to be accessible and an instruction for switching the second storage unit to be accessible are different in at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand). Amusement machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (in the game control area) for performing a winning lottery in a game,
The second program is a program (outside the game control area) for calculating information about a game value given in a game, and is called and executed from the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player according to a result of a winning lottery in a game,
The main control means,
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Computing means for performing required computing processing by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
Access permission/prohibition is switched so that either of the first storage unit and the second storage unit can be accessed.
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used,
At the start of the second program, the second program is switched to be inaccessible to the first storage means and accessible to the second storage means,
A game machine characterized by using the second storage means when the second program is executed.

(42F) The game machine characterized in that, when the second program ends, in the second program, the arithmetic means switches to inaccessible to the second storage means and accessible to the first storage means.

(42G) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of a winning lottery in a game,
The main control means,
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Computing means for performing required computing processing by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
Access permission/prohibition is switched so that either of the first storage unit and the second storage unit can be accessed.
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used,
When starting the second program, the first program is switched to be inaccessible to the first storage means and accessible to the second storage means,
A game machine characterized by using the second storage means when the second program is executed.

(42H) The computing means, after the second program is finished, switches the second program from the second program so that the second program is inaccessible and the first program is accessible. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the inventions of 42A to 42H, data can be saved at high speed with a simple instruction when processing is transferred between programs, and cautions at the time of creating a program can be reduced.

(43A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a game state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to perform an effect display,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
Controlled by the peripheral control means, from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel, a light emitting device for irradiating light so as to travel in the display panel,
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel toward a front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in a plurality of paths in the display panel. Having a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting portion, a dynamic pattern is displayed on the display panel,
A game machine characterized in that a static pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting section.

(43B) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel,
The peripheral control unit changes the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time so that lights of different colors travel in different paths in the display panel, and the plurality of first reflections The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the colors of the patterns displayed by the plurality of first reflecting sections are changed according to the passage of time by emitting light of different colors from the section.

(43C) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel,
The peripheral control unit switches lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls a path of light in the display panel, and emits light from at least a part of the plurality of first reflection units. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern displayed by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed in accordance with the passage of time.

(43D) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel,
The peripheral control unit switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and controls the plurality of first reflecting units. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern displayed by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the passage of time by emitting light from at least a part.

According to the inventions of 43A to 43D, it is possible to display a moving pattern and a stationary pattern on one light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(44A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a game state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to perform an effect display,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions lateral to the display panel,
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel toward a front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in a plurality of paths in the display panel. Having a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The first reflecting section reflects a plurality of first right-eye reflecting sections that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel in a direction reaching the right eye of the player, and the left eye of the player. And a plurality of first left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction reaching
The plurality of first right-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of first left-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a position different from the right-eye pattern.
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light-emitting device to emit light so that the light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first reflection part for the right eye and the first reflection part for the left eye, the pattern for the right eye and the pattern for the left eye. Is displayed on the display panel to allow the player to recognize a three-dimensional pattern in which parallax between the left and right eyes occurs,
A game machine characterized by displaying a plane pattern in which parallax between left and right eyes does not occur by reflecting light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting unit.

(44B) The second reflector is a front side of the gaming machine, in which light traveling in a plurality of paths in the display panel reaches a player's right eye and a player's left eye. The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by being reflected on the display panel.

(44C) The second reflector includes a plurality of second right-eye reflectors that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel in a direction reaching the player's right eye, and the second reflector for the player. And a plurality of second left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction reaching the left eye,
The plurality of second right-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of second left-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by light reflected by the second reflecting section.

According to the inventions of 44A to 44C, it is possible to display a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern with one light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of amusement of the game.

(45A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a game state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to perform an effect display,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions lateral to the display panel,
The peripheral control means,
It is possible to display a dynamic pattern and a static pattern on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light,
A gaming machine characterized by performing an effect that suggests the result of the winning lottery by combining the display of the dynamic picture and the display of the static picture.

(45B) The display panel has a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel and emit the light toward the front side of the gaming machine, and a plurality of paths in the display panel. And a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect the traveling light and emit to the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of the light traveling in the display panel is changed, and the light reflected by the first reflecting portion is changed, whereby a changing pattern is displayed on the display panel. Displayed on
By displaying the stationary pattern on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting section,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein an effect that suggests a result of the winning lottery is performed by combining the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern.

According to the inventions of 45A to 45B, the moving pattern and the stationary pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, which can prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(46A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a game state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device controlled by the peripheral control means to display a performance image,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions lateral to the display panel,
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light emitting device to emit light, a target pattern is displayed on the display panel,
A game machine characterized by displaying an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device.

(46B) The game machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the picture displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or characters.

(46C) The peripheral control unit displays the target pattern on the display panel, and then displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device. Machine.

(46D) The peripheral control means displays the image moving toward the target pattern on the display device, and then displays the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

According to the inventions of 46A to 46D, it is possible to display a plurality of patterns and patterns of different modes with one light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

(47A) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine comprising: setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
The game control means,
The power-on process executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and the periodic process executed every predetermined cycle,
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, in the power-on process, the setting change capable of changing the set value according to the operation state of the setting operation means Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state where the setting value cannot be changed,
In the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, after the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed, the process corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be executed in the regular process. A gaming machine characterized by:

(47B) The regular process is common to at least two of the processes related to the change of the set value, the process related to confirmation of the set value, the process related to the normal game, and the plurality of processes. The game machine according to each of the preceding items, comprising:

(47C) The regular process is composed of at least a first repetitive process that executes a process related to the normal game and a second repetitive process that executes a process related to the change of the setting.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control means selectively executes the first repeating process and the second repeating process depending on an operation mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording the operating state of the gaming machine in an area where the stored contents are backed up when the power is cut off,
The game control means,
In the setting change mode, as the predetermined condition, the fact that the setting change mode is set in the setting state management area,
In the setting confirmation mode, as a predetermined condition, the fact that the setting confirmation mode is set is set in the setting state management area.

(48) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine comprising: setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
The game control means,
The power-on process executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and the periodic process executed every predetermined cycle,
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, in the power-on process, the setting change capable of changing the set value according to the operation state of the setting operation means Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state where the setting value cannot be changed,
The regular processing makes it possible to execute a normal game processing related to a normal game and a setting processing related to setting change or setting confirmation,
The normal game process is configured by a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be commonly executed by the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means,
Equipped with storage means capable of storing information related to games,
In a power-on process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the output signal of the setting operation means is stored and held in a specific storage means of the storage means,
In the power-on process, when determining whether or not the setting operation means is operated, it is determined based on the information stored and held in the specific storage means without reading the output signal of the setting operation means. Then
The second setting operation means stores the storage means when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on process. A means for initializing
In the power-on process, when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated, when the storage means is initialized, A game machine characterized by not initializing the storage means.

(49B) A peripheral control means for controlling the effect on the display device is provided,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the game control means determines a mode in which the gaming machine is started up by an output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is started up.

(50A) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means,
A storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing information relating to a game and a second storage area different from the first storage area,
The first storage area is an area for storing the setting value,
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used in the game,
The game control means,
When it is determined that the set value is not a normal value, the first storage area and the second storage area are initialized,
If it is determined that the first setting operation means of the setting operation means is not operated and the second setting operation means is operated, the first storage area is not initialized. A gaming machine characterized by initializing the second storage area.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area,
The game control means initializes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when the third condition is satisfied. The game machine described.

(50C) The third storage area is a storage area other than an area for storing various parameters used in a normal game,
When the data backed up in the memory is erased when a power failure occurs, the game control means determines that the third condition is satisfied, and determines the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the storage area of the gaming machine is initialized.

(51A) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means,
Equipped with storage means that can retain information related to games even when the power is cut off,
The power-on process executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and the periodic process executed every predetermined cycle,
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, in the power-on process, the setting change capable of changing the set value according to the operation state of the setting operation means Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state where the setting value cannot be changed,
The storage means has a setting state management area for storing a value set in correspondence with the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in accordance with an operation state of the setting operation means at least in the power-on process. A gaming machine characterized by including.

(51B) A setting operation unit that is operated to start in a setting change mode for changing a setting value related to control performed by the game control unit,
The game control means,
When an operation for starting the game machine in the setting change mode is performed in a state where a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area and stored in the memory. When a predetermined area is initialized and the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed by the setting operation means, the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area, and the game is performed in the normal game state in which a game ball can be shot. Start the machine,
When the game machine is operated to start up in the setting confirmation mode in the state where the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the normal gaming state is not recorded in the setting state management area even if an operation to end the setting confirmation mode is performed by the setting operation means.

(52) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means,
A power-on process executed when the game machine is powered on, a first periodic process executed every predetermined first cycle, and a second periodic process executed every predetermined second cycle are executed. Enable and
In the power-on process, it is determined whether or not an operation associated with the setting operation is performed in the setting operation means,
When it is determined that the setting operation means is performing an operation associated with the setting operation, a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed according to the operation state. Run the settings corresponding to
When it is determined that the setting operation means does not perform an operation associated with the setting operation, a setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. Without, it is possible to execute normal game start processing,
The first periodic process is executed after the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed in the power-on process,
The game machine characterized in that the second regular processing is executed after enabling the normal game start processing in the power-on processing.

(53A) Game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A gaming machine capable of mounting an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspecting a gaming machine,
The inspection signal generation circuit,
A second driver circuit which receives the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit and generates an inspection signal from the control signal;
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The game machine characterized in that the second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal.

(53B) Each of the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit has an output transistor that switches an input power source to generate an output signal,
The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit are input with different voltages, and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

(53C) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted and a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

(53D) The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete part and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface mount part. ..

(53E) Game control means for executing regular processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game,
Of the events relating to the progress of the game, first detection means for detecting an event taken in by the game control means in the regular processing,
A gaming machine comprising: a second detection means for detecting an event taken in by the game control means in a process other than the regular process among the events relating to the progress of the game,
The game control means,
Converting means for converting the signal from the first detecting means into a serial signal;
A serial input port to which a serial signal is input,
A general-purpose input port to which the signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means,
The game machine characterized in that the signal of the second detecting means is inputted to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detection means is a ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has been launched toward the game area,
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53G) An accessory driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The serial input port is a serial input/output port capable of inputting a serial signal and outputting a serial signal,
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input/output port,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) In order to control the progress of the game, a game control means for executing a regular process at every predetermined cycle,
A gaming machine comprising a first detection means and a second detection means for detecting an event relating to the progress of the game,
The game control means,
Converting means for converting the signal from the first detecting means into a serial signal;
A serial input port to which a serial signal is input,
A general-purpose input port to which the signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The first detection means is for determining a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal once in the regular processing once.
The second detection means determines a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal a plurality of times within the one periodic processing,
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means,
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means detects a signal of the second detection means a plurality of times within a single periodic process to determine a signal level.

(53I) The first detection means is a sphere detection means for detecting a game sphere launched toward the game area,
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53J) Game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising: a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory;
The game control means is mounted on the first printed circuit board,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on a second printed circuit board. Cage,
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line for transmitting a serial signal obtained by converting a signal repeated at the predetermined cycle from the first printed circuit board side. Amusement machine.

(53K) It is possible to mount a test signal generation circuit for outputting a test signal used for testing a gaming machine,
The inspection signal generation circuit,
A second driver circuit which receives the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit and generates an inspection signal from the control signal;
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal,
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal, and is mounted on the first printed board. Amusement machine.

(53L) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the first printed board and the second printed board are housed in a single board box.

(53M) The first printed board and the second printed board are housed in different board boxes,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) Each of the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit has an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal,
The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit are input with different voltages, and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

[16. Substrate that is a component of the ornament]
By the way, in recent years, in order to realize a wide variety of effects, the number of accessories (decorative bodies) mounted on the game machine has been increased, or the game machine has been made larger or deformed to improve the enjoyment of the game. However, since the size of the game machine is set to a predetermined size, the game area is limited, and due to factors such as an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, the size and arrangement of the accessory are limited. Therefore, there is a possibility that the attraction of the game is deteriorated due to a monotonous effect. The embodiments to be described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide one means for increasing the size of an accessory and improving the flexibility of arrangement.

The accessory provided in the game machine has a decorative portion rich in decorativeness that is visible to the player or the front side and has a high decorativeness in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game. , Emits light in a mode according to the gaming state and the degree of expectation of variable display. If the light emitter is arranged on the substrate like an LED, the decorative portion includes a transmissive portion capable of transmitting the light output from the light emitter. The transmissive portion may be, for example, a transparent member capable of transmitting light, or may be one in which holes are formed in a mesh shape and light passes through the holes.

On the other hand, by providing the transmissive portion, the player can visually recognize the substrate on which electronic components such as LEDs and resistors are mounted through the transmissive portion. Usually, the board is mounted with electronic components necessary for exerting the effect of presentation, and is not supposed to be visually recognized by the player. However, in a decorative portion having a transparent portion through which light can pass, there is a possibility that the board disposed inside the decorative portion is visually recognized by the player and the decorative effect is reduced. On the other hand, if you make the substrate invisible by reducing the transparency of the transmissive part or using a material that reflects light from the outside on the surface of the transmissive part, you may not be able to obtain the expected effect. is there. Further, if the LED is arranged at a position where the player cannot visually recognize it from the outside of the decoration portion or the transparent portion, the size of the decoration portion may unintentionally increase in size.

Therefore, it is an object of the present embodiment to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a reduction in the decorative effect even when the substrate is visually recognized from the transmissive portion that constitutes the decorative portion.

[16-1. Game board]
FIG. 274 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game board 5 of the game machine in the present embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 274, the effect display device 1600 (on the game board side) is arranged in the center of the game area 5a. Further, although not shown, in the game area 5a, like the game board 5 described above, a plurality of general winning openings and a plurality of general winning openings that are always open so as to accept the hit game balls. The mouth is a starting opening that is always open at a different position in the game area 5a so that it can receive a game ball, a gate unit that detects passage of the game ball, and a game ball to the first starting opening or the second starting opening. The game is provided with a special winning opening or the like that allows the game balls to be accepted depending on the result of the lottery.

Further, in the upper right portion of the game area 5a, a character accessory 9100 having a character shape of "intense heat" is arranged. FIG. 275 is a perspective view showing the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 275, the character accessory 9100 is a plate-shaped accessory that imitates the character shape of “intense heat”. The effect by the character role object 9100 is executed in a mode according to the degree of expectation of the symbol variation. For example, the light may be emitted in a color according to the degree of expectation, or the light emission mode may be changed by repeating lighting and extinguishing in a predetermined pattern. In addition, the so-called gasse effect is performed in which "big" and "heat" are turned on alternately, and when the degree of expectation is high, both characters are turned on to notify the big hit, and finally both characters are turned off. You may do it.

As will be described later, in the character role object 9100, a cover member (cover body) 9110 visually recognized by the player is composed of a transparent portion 9111 and a non-transparent portion 9112, and an aspect corresponding to the progress situation of the game and the contents of the effect. The light-emitting body provided inside allows light to be emitted from the transmissive portion 9111. In this embodiment, the transparent portion (first area) 9111 corresponds to a character, the non-transparent portion (second area) 9112 is an outer edge portion of the character, and the transparent portion 9111 is substantially colorless and transparent. .. The non-transmissive portion 9112 may also be transmissive, and may be colored, for example, with a transmissivity different from that of the transmissive portion 9111. Details of the character accessory 9100 will be described with reference to the drawings starting from FIG. 277.

Further, a part of character role object 9100 overlaps with the upper right portion of effect display device 1600, and the light output from the display area of effect display device 1600 is applied to the back side of character effect object 9100. At this time, it is also possible to execute an effect combined with the effect executed by the effect display device 1600, by making the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 a reflective member. Further, a part of the character role object 9100 may be configured to transmit light, and the effect of allowing the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 to transmit the character role object 9100 may be performed.

In addition, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a on the front surface side, and a snowman character object 9200 simulating the shape of a "snowman" is formed on the lower left front surface side of the effect display device 1600. Are arranged. The snowman role object 9200 is formed in the shape of a three-dimensional doll, and it is possible for the player to visually recognize a part of the side surface and the back surface side of the snowman role object 9200 from the side.

FIG. 276 is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman accessory 9200 according to the present embodiment, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. The snowman role product 9200 is formed of a member having a transparent appearance, and exhibits the effect by transmitting the light of a light emitting body (LED) provided inside to the outside.

The snowman accessory 9200 is externally configured with a hat portion, a head portion, and a body portion. The head portion and the body portion are made of a transparent member, and are visible to the player. The hat portion has a bucket shape and is provided on the upper side of the head. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in this embodiment, light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted. Details of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with reference to the drawings starting from FIG. 289.

The snowman character product 9200 is executed in a mode according to the degree of expectation of symbol variation, like the character character product 9100. For example, it may emit light in a color according to the degree of expectation, or may be repeatedly turned on and off. Further, only the head may be turned on or only the body may be turned on. Further, at the first stage of the notice production, only the hat portion may be turned on to increase the player's expectation, and the head portion to the body portion may be turned on sequentially.

[16-2. Character accessory (heat)
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the character accessory 9100 will be described. FIG. 277 is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. The character role object 9100 is a character member board provided with a cover member (cover body) 9110 arranged on the front side visible to the player and a rear surface side of the cover member 9110 and mounting a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED. 9120, a cover member 9110, and a base member 9130 attached to the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

[16-2-1. Cover member]
The cover member 9110 is formed with a peripheral wall portion 9113 projecting rearward on the outer periphery thereof, and the character accessory substrate 9120 can be accommodated in the space on the back surface side surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113. FIG. 278 is a view of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back surface side. The state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is stored will be described later with reference to FIG. 280. As described above, the cover member 9110 is formed by the transmissive portion 9111 that can transmit light imitating the character of “intense heat” and the non-transmissive portion 9112 that is formed on the periphery of the transmissive portion 9111 and hardly transmits light. ing.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 9113 forming the outer peripheral portion of the character accessory 9100 is formed of a material that does not easily transmit light like the non-transmissive portion 9112, and may be the same member as the non-transmissive portion 9112. When the characters are individually turned on, it is necessary to provide a peripheral wall portion 9113 between the characters in order to distinguish between the characters. At this time, the character accessory substrate 9120 may be prepared for each character, or the substrates may be integrated.

The transmissive portion 9111 is formed of a colorless and transparent material, and the inside of the character accessory 9100 can be visually recognized. At the time of performance execution, the light emitting body 9301 provided inside allows the light to pass through the transmissive portion 9111 and blocks the light by the non-transmissive portion 9112, so that the character of “heat up” is highlighted to enhance the player's expectation. be able to. Further, not only the light from the light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the character accessory substrate 9120 can be transmitted, but also the player can visually recognize the character accessory substrate 9120 itself. ..

In the present embodiment, a light diffusion portion that diffuses light is formed in the non-transmissive portion 9112 on the back surface side of the cover member 9110. Instead of forming the light diffusing portion, a light guide member may be provided between the cover member 9110 and the character accessory substrate 9120, and the diffusing member is provided by guiding the light from the light emitting body 9301 to the transmitting portion 9111. It is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case of Modifications using the light guide member will be described later.

With the above configuration, the light inside the accessory can be efficiently collected with a small number of light emitters, so that the number of light emitters 9301 arranged on the character accessory substrate 9120 can be reduced or the light emission can be reduced. The degree of freedom in arranging the body 9301 can be increased.

Further, the non-transmissive portion 9112 may be formed of a transmissive material having a lower transmissivity than the transmissive portion 9111 without forming the light diffusion portion. For example, by using a colored material having transparency, the character accessory 9100 emits light as a whole, and a rendering effect different from the case where the light diffusing portion is used while highlighting the character portion due to the difference in transparency is achieved. be able to.

[16-2-2. Character board]
FIG. 279 is a diagram showing the front surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. Further, FIG. 280 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment, and is a view showing the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 279 and 280, the character accessory substrate 9120 has a shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110, instead of the general rectangular shape. It has a similar shape. Further, a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) is applied to the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120. Although various information is displayed on the character accessory substrate 9120, it may be displayed by silk printing or the like, or may be displayed by etching characters.

Further, the back side of the character accessory substrate 9120 is blocked by the base member 9130 in a state where the character accessory substrate 9120 is attached to the game board 5, so that the player cannot see it. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the color of the substrate a specific color, but whether the resist should be applied only on the front surface or on both surfaces by comparing the manufacturing cost for different processing of the front surface and the back surface rather than the cost of the material. Just decide.

The character accessory substrate 9120 is visible from the transparent portion 9111 of the cover member 9110 as described above. Therefore, when the color of the substrate does not match the decorative aspect of the accessory, the decorative effect may be reduced, or the electronic component arranged on the substrate may impair the decorative effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the character accessory substrate 9120 itself is used as one of the decorative elements. For example, the character accessory substrate 9120 is not colored in a general green color, but is colored in a color (specific color) according to the decoration mode of the accessory, or the electronic component mounted on the character accessory substrate 9120 has a pattern of the accessory. Arrange it to be eggplant. The color according to the decoration mode of the accessory is, for example, a color associated with the character or theme appearing in the effect of the accessory (game machine). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings.

First, a specific mode for utilizing the shape and color of the substrate provided in a decorative body such as a accessory as a decorative element will be described. As described above, the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment has the transparent portion 9111, so that the character accessory substrate 9120 provided inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, by coloring the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 to a specific color that matches the decorative aspect of the character accessory 9100, the entire color of the character accessory 9100 is configured. For example, when the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120 is blue, the entire accessory becomes blue when the light emitting body 9301 does not emit light, and the emission color of the light emitting body 9301 when emitting light gives a completely different impression. Can be given to someone. Particularly when the area occupied by the transmissive portion 9111 is large in the entire accessory, a greater effect can be obtained.

[16-2-3. Light emitter/electronic component]
A plurality of light emitting bodies (LEDs) 9301 are arranged on the front surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. The light-emitting bodies 9301 may have the same emission color, or a plurality of different emission colors may be prepared. The light emitting body 9301 may be turned on according to the progress of the game, and the lighting place may be changed according to the contents of the effect. When there are different types of emission colors, the colors may be emitted according to the degree of expectation, or different types of emission colors may be turned on at the same time.

In this embodiment, the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored in a specific color as described above. Therefore, the color changes depending on the combination of the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 and the light emission color of the light emitter 9301. Therefore, various effects can be realized by causing the light emitter 9301 to emit light in a plurality of types of colors. It will be possible.

Further, when the light emitter 9301 is turned off, the specific color colored on the character accessory substrate 9120 is recognized. Therefore, even by blinking the light emitter 9301, the character accessory substrate is displayed as one effect expression. The specific color colored in 9120 and the emission color of the light emitter 9301 can be recognized as different colors alternately. For example, as described above, when the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored blue, when the light-emitting body 9301 is slowly blinked in red, bright and dark are alternately given to the red character object and the blue character object. Can be recognized as a character of a completely different color.

Electronic components other than the light emitter 9301 are mounted on the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. Specifically, the resistor 9302, the IC 9303, and the connector 9304. In the present embodiment, since these electronic components cannot be visually recognized by the player, it is sufficient if the arrangement does not cause any technical problem. Further, as shown in FIG. 280, the information about the light emitter 9301 arranged on the front surface side is printed on the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120, and the electronic components arranged on the front surface side even from the back surface side. You can recognize information about. The information indicating the position of the light emitter 9301 is shown by a dotted line to prevent misidentification.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 279, only the light emitting body 9301 is arranged on the front surface side, and information regarding electronic components is not displayed. This is to prevent the decorative effect from being reduced by the player visually recognizing the characters printed on the silk (for example, the part number of the electronic part (“LED1” in FIG. 280, etc.)). The information may be displayed in a color that is difficult for the player to visually recognize if necessary, for example, to improve efficiency. For example, when the color of the character product substrate 9120 is blue as described above, a color that is similar to the light blue, such as light blue, and whose density is adjusted to be distinguishable is adopted as the information display, and the silk screen printing is performed. Good. Alternatively, the information may be formed by etching characters.

Further, in the character role product 9100 according to the present embodiment, the electronic components other than the light emitting body 9301 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate invisible to the player, so that the electronic components such as the resistor 9302 and the IC 9303 are black. .. Further, when the electronic component has to be arranged on the front side, at least a part of the electronic component such as the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 is arranged so as to be difficult for the player to see, or the color or A shaped electronic component may be adopted. For example, electronic components of the same color as the specific color may be arranged on the front side.

On the other hand, as described above, in the present invention, the player can visually recognize the substrate provided inside the accessory. Therefore, an example in which the electronic component arranged on the substrate is used as a decorative element of a accessory is described.

Electronic components are arranged on the front surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120 at a position visible to the player from the transmissive portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. At this time, the electronic components are arranged so as to form the pattern of the character displayed by the character accessory 9100. For example, electronic parts are arranged at regular positions so that the characters can be decorated.

In addition, the arrangement of the light emitter 9301 may prevent the player from recognizing the pattern of the character during light emission. Further, by selecting the light-emitting body 9301 at a position where the electronic component can be recognized even during light emission and the light-emitting body 9301 located at a position where the electronic component cannot be recognized during light emission to emit light, The presence or absence may be switchable.

Further, an electronic component other than black may be arranged on the front surface side to serve as a decorative element. Although the transmissive portion 9111 is colorless and transparent, it may allow light to pass therethrough as a lens member or a diffusing member, while making it difficult for the electronic component to be clearly discerned so that the player can easily recognize the pattern. Note that another specific example will be described with respect to a mode in which the decoration effect is exerted by the arrangement of the electronic components, with the snowman accessory 9200 described later.

It is also possible to use characters printed on the substrate surface side as a pattern. Instead of printing characters in colors that are difficult for the player to recognize in order to prevent the decoration effect from being hindered, it is possible for the player to recognize the characters indicating the information of the electronic parts and the board as decorative elements. You may print in the form (color, shape). Thereby, the pattern of the accessory can be made more complicated, or the color can be changed by printing with a color different from that of the cover member 9110, and the decorative effect can be enhanced. Further, by consolidating the characters to be printed on the substrate, the player can recognize that the cover member 9110 and a region having a different color from the other portions on the substrate are formed on the substrate, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the entire accessory. You may raise it.

[16-2-4. Arrangement of luminous body]
Next, the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 will be described. FIG. 281 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the light emitter 9301 is also arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 and at a position on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Here, the light-emitting body 9301 arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 is a light-emitting body 9301a, and the light-emitting body 9301b is arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112.

For example, when strong light emission is desired, the light emitting body 9301a is arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 so that the light is directly emitted to the outside. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 278, since the light diffusion portion is provided on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112, the light emitter 9301b is disposed on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 to diffuse light and be soft. It becomes possible to emit light.

As described above, the position of the light-emitting body 9301a may be determined in accordance with the type of the accessory, and by selecting the light-emitting body 9301 to emit light, the emission mode can be switched with one accessory. Specifically, when it is desired to make the entire accessory strongly emit light, only the light emitting body 9301a or all the light emitting bodies 9301 may be made to emit light, and when it is desired to make the light emit soft light, only the light emitting body 9301b is made to emit light to diffuse the light. Just do it.

Further, the transmissivity of the transmissive portion 9111 may be adjusted so that the light emitting body 9301a is slightly less visible without being completely colorless and transparent. For example, the transmissive portion 9111 may be made slightly less transparent (colored transparent, for example, light blue) to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside, or the surface of the transmissive portion 9111 may be processed (for example, textured) to diffuse light. In this way, the inside may be made hard to see. With this structure, the light-emitting body itself is hard to see, but it can emit light more strongly than when it is arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112. In addition, since the degree of freedom in the position of the light emitting body 9301 is increased, the degree of freedom in design is increased and the development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the character accessory substrate 9120 itself may not be a direct decorative element but may indirectly enhance the effect. For example, when the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is white, the reflectance can be increased even when the arranged light emitter 9301 is not lit, and when the light emitter 9301 is lit, Of course, by reflecting the light from the outside, it is possible to prevent the inside of the character accessory 9100 from becoming too dark.

In addition, since the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is white, the character color of the character accessory 9100 can be recognized as white as a feature when the light is turned off. In this case, if a full-color LED (R, G, B color LEDs) is used for the light emitter 9301, the character color can be expressed in various colors, but the light from the light emitter 9301 and the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 can be expressed. The light reflected (diffused) from the light diffusing section provided in the above and the light reflected from the substrate surface are overlapped and fused, so that it is possible to perform a fantastic effect that cannot be expressed by a single type of light emitter 9301. it can. At this time, various effects can be realized without using a plurality of types of light emitters 9301, so that the cost can be reduced.

As described above, in the character accessory of the present embodiment, the color of the board and the mounted electronic components are used as the decorative elements so that the player can visually recognize it. Since there is no need to do so, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. In addition, electronic components that are not decorative elements may be arranged on the back surface side of the substrate, and electronic components other than light-emitting bodies such as LEDs may be arranged on the back surface side to use only the color of the substrate as the decoration element.

[16-2-5. Base member]
The base member 9130 has the same shape as the cover member 9110 when viewed from the front when mounted. The peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are brought into contact with each other and fixed by a mounting member (not shown). At this time, the character accessory substrate 9120 may be fixed to the cover member 9110 or the base member 9130, or the character accessory substrate 9120 is not fixed and is accommodated in the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. You may do so. Wiring for transmitting a signal or supplying power to the character accessory substrate 9120 is not shown in the drawing. For example, a wiring hole is formed in the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the base member 9130 or the cover member 9110. It may be formed.

The base member 9130 may be directly attached to the game board 5 by providing the cover member 9110 with an attachment portion without using the base member 9130. In this case, the character accessory substrate 9120 is attached to the cover member 9110.

[16-3. Modified example 1 of character cast]
Subsequently, the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 is not completely similar to the shape of the character accessory substrate 9100, and the outer edge of the character accessory substrate 9120 matches the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. The case of not performing will be described. In this case, since the light emitter 9301 cannot be arranged over the entire character accessory 9100, the light guide member 9140 is disposed between the cover member 9110 and the character accessory substrate 9120 to diffuse the light. The shortage of the light amount of the portion where 9301 is not arranged is compensated. The cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are the same as those in the above-mentioned example.

FIG. 282 is a diagram showing an example of a light guide member 9140 for diffusing light from the light emitting body 9301 in the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment. The light guide member 9140 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 in the same manner as the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 described above in order to diffuse light to the entire back surface side of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100. The shape is similar to the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the outer shape of the space.

FIG. 283 is a diagram illustrating a front surface side of a character accessory substrate 9120 of a character accessory 9100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 284 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the modified example 1 of the present embodiment, and is a view showing the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. The configuration other than the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 is the same as that of the above-described embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 283 and 284, the character accessory substrate 9120 is provided with a cutout portion 9122 in which a part of the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 is lacking. Further, a mounting hole 9121 for fixing to the base member 9130 is formed in the central portion of the character accessory substrate 9120. As shown in FIG. 284, the attachment portion of the cover member 9110 is inserted into the attachment hole 9121 and attached to the base member 9130.

Similarly, the light guide member 9140 is also formed with a mounting hole so that the mounting portion of the base member 9130 can be inserted therethrough. Note that, if the ratio of the cutout portion 9122 is small and the position of the substrate does not shift, the substrate may be fixed by sandwiching it between the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 without providing a mounting structure.

FIG. 285 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 according to the modified example of the present embodiment. In this modification, since the light emitter 9301 cannot be arranged in the notch 9122, the light guide member 9140 guides light to cause the entire character accessory 9100 to emit light. At this time, a light diffusion portion may be provided on the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 to assist the light guide member 9140.

Therefore, the character accessory 9100 of the present modification is provided with a cutout portion 9122 and a portion that is decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 by using the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 or an electronic component as a decorative element. Therefore, the parts that are not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 are mixed. At this time, the light diffusing portion provided on the back surface side of the light guide member 9140 or the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 can maintain the decorative effect by performing light decoration.

As described in the present modification, the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 does not have to be similar to that of the character accessory substrate 9100, and a portion not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 has a light guide member 9140 or a light diffusion portion. It may be possible to suppress the reduction of the decoration effect by providing the light decoration. Further, the color of the base member 9130 may be the same as the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 to suppress the reduction of the decorative effect. As a result, it is possible to make the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 a relatively simple shape without making it complicated, and to increase the degree of freedom in the size of the substrate, which reduces the manufacturing cost of the substrate. The increase can be suppressed.

Further, instead of using the base member 9130, the decorative portion arranged on the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 can emit light through the cutout portion 9122 to produce an effect. Good. For example, when the character role object 9100 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as in the present embodiment, an image is displayed in the upper right part of the screen to display the liquid crystal display device 1600 and the character role. You may make it perform the production|generation which the light emission production by the thing 9100 integrated. Further, the same effect can be executed by using a transparent member for the base member 9130. An example using the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described in more detail in Modification 2.

[16-4. Modified example 2 of character cast]
Although the cutout portion 9122 is formed in a part of the board in the modified example 1, a modified example 2 will describe an example in which the character accessory substrate 9120 has a size of about half of the character accessory 9100. Further, the cover member 9110 is configured to be directly attached to the game board 5 without using the base member 9130, and the character accessory 9100 in the present modification has a cover member 9110, a character accessory substrate 9120, and a light guide. It is constituted by the member 9140.

In this modified example, similarly to the modified example 1, the light guide member 9140 guides light to a portion where the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged to perform light decoration. Further, in this modification, since the base member 9130 is not provided, if the light emitting body is provided on the back surface side of the character accessory 9100, the light of the light emitting body can be transmitted.

FIG. 286 is a diagram showing a front surface side of a character accessory substrate 9120 of a character accessory 9100 of Modification 2 of the present embodiment, showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 and the light guide member 9140 are overlapped with each other. There is. In addition, FIG. 287 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 according to the modified example 2 of the present embodiment, and is a view showing the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 286 and 287, the character accessory substrate 9120 is configured to occupy the upper half of the character accessory 9100. Therefore, when the character accessory 9100 of this modification is attached to the game board 5, the upper half is decorated with the specific color colored on the character accessory substrate 9120, but the lower half is not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120. Becomes On the other hand, since the lower half of the character accessory 9100 can be transmitted through the transmissive portion 9111, a strange color may be suppressed by setting the back side of the character accessory 9100 to a specific color.

Also, different effects may be executed in the upper and lower areas. For example, in the case of a character accessory in which characters are written in two stages, the character accessory substrate 9120 is arranged on the upper side and the light emitter is arranged on the back side of the lower side to perform different effects in the upper and lower stages. Also, if this accessory is movable, it is possible to perform different effects for each stop position by disposing different light emitters for each stop position on the back surface side.

Further, the light emitter is not limited to the LED or the lamp, and may be the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described above. For example, the LED is arranged as the light emitter on the upper part of the game board 5, and the front surface side of the liquid crystal display device 1600. When it is moved downward, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 allows light to be transmitted from the lower part of the accessory to perform the effect.

As the image displayed on the back side of the character role object 9100, regardless of the transparent portion 9111 and the non-transparent portion 9112, the same color (character role) imitating the character role object 9100 including the lower half (the cutout portion in Modification 1) is also used. It is advisable to display an image having the same shape as the specific color for the part where the object substrate 9120 is shown). Because the image is displayed even if the character accessory 9100 has some trouble, the game can be advanced without giving the player any anxiety due to the trouble.

With the above configuration, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of effects with one accessory, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 288, a part of the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized by the player through the character accessory 9100. Therefore, in addition to the light guided by the light guide member 9140, the light of the image (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed from the rear surface side of the character accessory 9100, and the light effect by the character accessory substrate 9120 is produced. Then, the display effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be executed in cooperation with each other. With this configuration, the lower side of the character accessory substrate 9120 serves as a boundary, and can be an element that constitutes the decoration.

FIG. 288 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory 9100 of Modification 2 of the present embodiment is attached to the game board 5. The light guide member 9140 diffuses light from the light-emitting body 9301 mounted on the character accessory substrate 9120 on the upper portion of the character accessory 9100. On the other hand, the lower part of the character accessory 9100 diffuses the light (displayed image) output by the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the light guide member 9140. At this time, the light produced by the light emitting body 9301 and the light produced by the liquid crystal display device 1600 are fused together, so that an effect produced by the character accessory 9100 and an effect produced by the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be performed.

Note that effects other than the character accessory 9100 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be combined. For example, when the game board 5 is made of a transparent member, the luminous effect is arranged on the back surface side, or a sticker or the like is attached to enhance the decorative effect, visually observing through the transparent portion of the accessory to combine them. Can further enhance the decorative effect.

[16-5. Snowman character]
Next, the snowman role product 9200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 276, the snowman role object 9200 is a role (decorative body) imitating a snowman, and a shape in which a spherical head is placed on a spherical body part slightly larger than the head. Has become. Further, a bucket-shaped cap portion is placed on the head in an inclined state. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in this embodiment, light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted.

FIG. 289 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. The snowman accessory 9200 accommodates a board (snowman board 9220) on which electronic components including a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED are mounted inside a cover member 9210 divided into a front cover member 9210a and a back cover member 9210b. To be done.

The snowman role object 9200 is used in an effect executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and for example, an effect such as causing an internal light-emitting body to emit light in accordance with the degree of expectation of symbol variation is executed. Further, since the cover member 9210 is made of a material that allows light to pass therethrough and is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect of transmitting or reflecting the displayed image is executed. Good. Hereinafter, each component of the snowman role product 9200 will be specifically described.

FIG. 290 is a diagram of the front cover member 9210a of the snowman accessory 9200 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the rear surface side. FIG. 291 is a diagram showing the back surface side cover member 9210b of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. FIG. 292 is a diagram showing the front side of the snowman board 9220 of the snowman role object 9200 of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 293 is a view showing the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment.

The cover members 9210 (front-side cover member 9210a, back-side cover member 9210b) of the snowman role object 9200 are substantially colorless and transparent except for some parts and have transparency, and a substrate (snowman substrate 9220) housed inside from the front. ) It is possible to see the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the snowman board 9220 has a shape of a snowman role object 9200, and has a very rich design. Further, the snowman substrate 9220 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color), like the character accessory substrate 9120. In addition, the configuration of the substrate itself is the same as that of the character accessory substrate 9120, and various electronic components are mounted on the front surface side and the back surface side. In addition, about the code|symbol of the electronic component on a board|substrate, the code|symbol common to the character accessory 9100 is used.

In the present embodiment, the shape of the snowman board 9220 occupies the inside of the character so that the back side of the snowman character 9200 cannot be seen from the front. As a result, the entire snowman role object 9200 is recognized as the specific color colored on the snowman substrate 9220, and the color of the entire role object is determined. On the other hand, a cutout portion or a hole may be formed in a part of the snowman board 9220 so that the back surface side of the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized. At this time, an image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 from the rear of the snowman role object 9200, or a decorative body such as a light-emitting body may be arranged to increase the variety of effects.

Further, the snowman role object 9200 has a three-dimensional shape, and the player can visually recognize the side surface of the snowman role object 9200 by slightly tilting the line of sight from the front. Since the cover member 9210 is transparent, the player can see the back surface of the snowman substrate 9220 beyond the side surface. In the character accessory 9100 configured so that the board cannot be viewed from the back side, it is not necessary to set the back side of the board to a specific color, but the snowman board 9220 is also colored to a specific color on the back side. This makes it possible to prevent the decorative effect from decreasing even when the player approaches the liquid crystal display device 1600 and visually recognizes the snowman role object 9200 from the side. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the form of the accessory can be improved, the effect of the effect can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Since the player can see the back surface of the snowman board 9220 beyond the side surfaces, the light emitter 9301 may be arranged on the back surface side of the snowman board 9220 to cause the entire snowman role 9200 to emit light from the back surface side. .. Furthermore, by coloring the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 in a different color from the front surface side, it is possible to give the player a different impression from that when only the front side light-emitting body 9301 emits light. Note that the same effect can be expected by disposing light emitters 9301 having the same emission color and the same color of the snowman substrate 9220. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission mode of the accessory and enhance the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 289, an opening is provided in the hat portion of the snowman role object 9200, and a code for transmitting power or a signal is inserted into the snowman substrate 9220 housed inside the snowman role object 9200. There is. Various effects are executed by causing the light-emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the snowman board 9220 to emit light according to the supplied power and a signal from the effect control device.

Further, as described above, the hat portion of the snowman role object 9200 is colored (for example, red) and has transparency. The transparency of the hat portion is lower than that of the other parts of the snowman role object 9200, and it is difficult to visually recognize the inside. Therefore, a connector 9304 arranged on the snowman board 9220, a cord connected to the connector 9304, and the like are arranged on the hat portion to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize them.

In the cover member 9210 (front cover member 9210a), a transparent portion B9211b having different transmittance is formed at a portion corresponding to the eyes of a snowman when the player sees it from the front. The other transmissive portions except the cap portion are transmissive portions A9211a. In the present embodiment, the transmission part B9211b is configured such that the inside of the snowman role object 9200 can be visually recognized in a blurry state with aberrations remaining, like a soft focus (soft focus) lens. Therefore, the outlines of the electronic components arranged on the snowman board 9220 housed inside the snowman role object 9200 can be blurred and visually recognized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 292, in this embodiment, electronic components (resistors 9302) are collectively arranged on the snowman board 9220 corresponding to the portions corresponding to the eyes of the snowman role object 9200. The resistors 9302 are black electronic components and are densely arranged in a circle. When the player sees the snowman role object 9200 during the game, the outline of the electronic component is blurred by being visually recognized through the transparent portion B9211b. As a result, the electronic components (resistors 9302) that are aggregated and arranged on the substrate are recognized as black eyes of a snowman, and a decorative element can be formed.

Further, regarding the part number of the electronic part (the part number silk-printed such as “R1”), it is made to be distinguishable by silk-printing with the same specific color as white of the resist of the snowman substrate 9220 and yellow of the same system. There is. In the present embodiment, since the resistors are printed densely like the resistor 9302, the resistors are identifiable, and the densely printed portions function to reflect light.

In the present embodiment, the electronic component part number (the part number silk-printed such as “R1”) may be black-silk printed like the resistor. As described above, due to the effect of the lens, both the resistor 9302 and the resistor 9302 can be recognized as eyes of a snowman.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 293, electronic components (IC9303) that do not form a decorative element on the back surface side of the snowman board 9220 and on the outside when the snowman role object 9200 is installed on the game board 5. Etc.) are arranged. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize an electronic component having a low decorative effect or a possibility of reducing the decorative effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to a decrease in the effect of the effect. .. At this time, by directing the snowman board 9220 toward the center of the game machine, it is possible to make the electronic components arranged on the back side more difficult to visually recognize.

Here, the configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described focusing on the cover members 9210 (the front cover member 9210a and the rear cover member 9210b). The front surface side cover member 9210a and the rear surface side cover member 9210b do not have to be evenly divided in the front and rear direction. For example, even if one of the front surface side cover member 9210a is formed rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220. Good. Hereinafter, an example in which one (inner side) of the front cover member 9210a is formed rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 294 is a diagram of a horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment as seen from above. As shown in FIG. 294, when the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a is formed so as to extend rearward beyond the side surface of the snowman board 9220, most of the appearance of the snowman role object 9200 visually recognized by the player is obtained. Is composed of the front surface side cover member 9210a. As a result, the attachment position of the front surface side cover member 9210a to the back surface side cover member 9210b (the joint between the front surface side cover member 9210a and the rear surface side cover member 9210b) is on the rear side of the snowman substrate 9220, and thus the decorativeness is high. It is possible to realize the character.

Further, since the colorless and transparent (or substantially colorless and transparent) front side cover member 9210a extends to the rear of the snowman substrate 9220, the snowman substrate 9220 colored in white (specific color) is not only the front surface but also the back surface of the snowman character 9200. To white. Although it is desirable that both sides are white as in the present embodiment, since the player mainly visually recognizes from the front side, only the front side may be white.

Also, in FIG. 294, only the inner cover member of the front cover member 9210a extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220, but only the outer side may extend rearward of the substrate depending on the decoration used. It is also possible to adopt a mode that extends to the rear side of the substrate both inside and outside.

Further, a configuration for attaching each component of the accessory or attaching the accessory to the game board will be described. In the snowman accessory 9200 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 294, the snowman board 9220 is mounted by the board mounting portion 9213 and the mounting member 9214 formed on the back surface side cover member 9210b. At this time, the board mounting portion 9213 is preferably provided outside the snowman role object 9200, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, the front surface side cover member 9210a is attached to the back surface side cover member 9210b by a cover attaching portion (not shown), but like the board attaching portion 9213, the cover attaching portion is preferably provided outside the snowman accessory 9200. Further, the back surface side cover member 9210b is attached to a structure of the game board 5 (not shown), and like the board attachment portion 9213, the attachment portion to the structure is preferably provided outside the snowman role product 9200. In this way, by arranging the mounting portion of each component of the accessory or the mounting portion of the accessory and the game board 5 on the outside that is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to prevent the decorativeness of the accessory from being impaired. You can

The visibility is not limited to the outside of the accessory, but is also difficult to see by the player (for example, a portion made of a colored member (the cap portion in the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment), a lens cut for decoration, etc.). By providing a mounting portion at a position where the character is lowered, a position where the character shape is bent (a boundary portion between the head and the body in the snowman character object 9200 of the present embodiment), etc. Can be suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 294, the front side cover member 9210a and the back side cover member 9210b constitute the snowman role object 9200, but as shown in FIG. 295, one cover member 9210 forms the shape of a snowman. You may do it. FIG. 295 is a diagram showing a horizontal cross section of a snowman accessory 9200 according to a modification of the present embodiment, as seen from above.

In the modification shown in FIG. 295, the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 are attached to the game board 5 via the base body 9230. Also in this modification, as in the example shown in FIG. 294, it is preferable that both sides of the snowman substrate 9220 are white, but only the front surface side may be white.

In this modification, not only the inner cover member extends rearward beyond the snowman board 9220 but also extends rearward beyond the base body 9230, so that not only the snowman board 9220 but also the base body 9230 are provided to the player. Will be visible from. Therefore, in this modification, the base body 9230 can also be configured as a decoration by using a specific color (for example, white) similar to that of the snowman board 9220. As to the attachment of the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 to the base body 9230, as described above, the attachment portion is provided at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the attachment member or the like is used. It is possible to prevent the decorativeness from being impaired.

In this modification, only the inner side of the cover member 9210 extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 and the base body 9230, but the outer side of the cover member may vary depending on the decoration used. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which it extends rearward of the substrate or base body or a mode in which it extends rearwardly of the substrate or base body both inside and outside.

[16-6. Effect, etc.]
Generally, an electronic circuit board includes a raw plate having a basic size, and the cost greatly depends on how many substrates can be taken from one raw plate based on this raw plate. Although it is designed in a quadrangular shape in a very simple way, the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman character product 9200 of the present embodiment has a very rich design. In other words, it can be said that all the elements that compose the substrate, from the resist and the color of the substrate to the electronic parts, are used as the decorative performance of the accessory.

It should be noted that the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory described above has a substantially rectangular shape. Although it has a shape that fits in a simpler design than the snowman board 9220, it can be said that the cover body that covers the board has more functions for having a design.

As described above, inside the accessory seen in recent years, not only the light-emitting body (LED) but also the substrate on which the electronic circuit including the electronic parts for controlling the light-emitting body is formed is almost in the shape of the accessory. It is equipped together. In the first place, the substrate on which the electronic circuit is formed has a wiring that electrically connects the electronic component forming the electronic circuit and the electronic component, and the surface of the substrate is protected by a protective film ( It is covered with resist).

Therefore, as a color of the accessory, attention is paid to the color of the resist as the protective film, that is, the color of the substrate. However, when the front side is provided with the transmissive portion, the electronic effect mounted on the substrate may be visually recognized from the transmissive portion, which may reduce the decorative effect of the accessory. As illustrated in the object 9100 and the snowman role object 9200, the color of the board is colored, and further, all the elements that compose the board and the mounted electronic components themselves are used as the decoration elements to prevent the reduction of the decoration effect, and thus the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

[17. Production control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by outputting voice, lighting/blinking a lamp, displaying an image, and the like, and in order to enhance the interest of the game, various elaborate effects have been tried. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control device, based on the command output from the main control board 1310, and executes an effect according to the game state of the game. To do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

In order to execute a plurality of types of effects in cooperation with each other, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technique for realizing various effect displays by using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially specified in time series. By preparing a control process for realizing a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols in accordance with this scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. It is also possible to include the designation of BGM in the scenario data. In this case, the sound source IC outputs the designated BGM, so that the sound corresponding to the display screen can be output.

However, game machines require more elaborate presentations. In the above-mentioned conventional technology, it is difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as voice output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, it was not possible to change the BGM while executing the image display according to the scenario data. Further, when outputting a sound effect in response to a user operation during the image display, the image display and the BGM output are stopped and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect ends, the BGM and the image display are restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM is played, and the effect gives a feeling of strangeness. Regarding the lighting and blinking of the lamp, it is controlled by a separate program depending on the game state, regardless of the contents of the image display, and it is difficult to realize a variety of lighting and blinking linked to the image display. there were.

Therefore, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-061147 refers to effect data corresponding to higher order data for realizing integrated control over different kinds of effect devices and scheduler data equivalent to lower order data for controlling each effect device. A technique for controlling a plurality of types of effect devices by hierarchically using types of data is disclosed. This technique has a general-purpose function of analyzing the effect data and the scheduler data and executing the process defined by each data, and is configured not to depend on the effect contents. Therefore, there is an advantage that it can be shared between different types of gaming machines, and various effects can be easily realized by changing the effect data and the scheduler data.

The effect data and the scheduler data are composed of functions and parameters. A function is a function to be executed by the module corresponding to each data, and a parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify parameters may be provided. It should be noted that the effect data is configured by a function for executing each scheduler data at a predetermined timing or controlling the entire flow of a series of effects. Further, the scheduler data is configured by a function for issuing an execution instruction (a liquid crystal command, a voice operation number, a lamp operation number, etc.) to a module (production module, sound module, lamp module, etc.) that controls each effect device.

[17-1. Software configuration of peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes the game effect. In the present embodiment, each component that executes an effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, the configuration and outline of the function for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment will be described, and then the details of each function will be described.

[17-1-1. Configuration and overview of each function]
FIG. 296 is a functional block diagram illustrating the configuration and outline of the function for executing the effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives an input of a main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires the layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines the block control information (effect block number). Explaining the layers, in the present embodiment, a layer is set for each effect division such as a background and a character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are displayed in an overlapping manner to display an image on the liquid crystal display device. Is output. Thus, for example, if only the background is different and the display (motion) of the character is the same, it is possible to share the layer displaying the character. Note that layers are similarly set for other effect devices such as a lamp and a driving device. Further, as layers of these effect devices, corresponding layers are set on the basis of the layer of the liquid crystal display device. For example, when a layer for giving a notice effect (notice layer) is set in the liquid crystal display device, a notice layer is similarly set for an effect device such as a lamp, a driving device, and a sound, and a notice effect is given. The control of the production device is performed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the volume of effect data (scheduler data) and improve the development efficiency. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying the effect for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. Performance block data is information for specifying scheduler data that specifies the control content of each performance device, and for specifying the timing of executing the scheduler data, and defines the configuration of the entire series of performances. Is. With the scheduler data, in order to control the effect in each effect device, a plurality of functions for instructing a predetermined process to be executed among a plurality of processes required by the effect device are stored in the order to be executed. The data. The scheduler data includes drawing scheduler data for displaying a background, characters, identification patterns, etc. on the liquid crystal display device, and sub-effect scheduler data for operating the lamp, sound, and motor effect devices. Production block data, "liquid crystal production block data" for executing the production to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal symbol block data" for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device, sound, There are three types of "sub effect block data" for controlling lamps, accessories, and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes the scheduler control information to the scheduler execution unit 5060. In the scheduler control information, at least a scheduler to be activated and scheduler data to be executed by the scheduler are specified. For example, a scheduler number for identifying the scheduler to be activated (for example, an identifier corresponding to the scheduler on a one-to-one basis), The production number for specifying the scheduler data to be executed by the scheduler (for example, storage destination address information of the scheduler data to be executed or information for identifying it) is included. Note that the scheduler control information may include not only the identification information of the scheduler and the scheduler data but also other information as necessary.

In the present embodiment, the production block control unit 5040 activates the scheduler, but a scheduler activation unit different from the production block control unit 5040 may be provided and the activation of each scheduler may be managed by this scheduler activation unit. ..

The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data designated by the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the functions are called in the order set in the scheduler data, and the processing corresponding to the function is executed. When the function is related to the output module unit 5080 (for example, HPLAY), the parameter information set corresponding to the function is passed to the output module unit 5080 corresponding to the function as effect device control information. The scheduler execution unit 5060, which will be described in detail later, includes a dedicated scheduler execution unit 5060 and a plurality of dedicated scheduler execution units 5060 according to the type of the production device to be controlled (production type, specifically, liquid crystal, sound, lamp, accessory, etc.). A general-purpose scheduler execution unit 5060 that can be used for each effect type is included.

The output module unit 5080 receives the rendering device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits rendering device drive data to each rendering device based on the rendering device control information. Each rendering device executes an operation based on the rendering device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) included in the production control device (peripheral control board 1530) configures the production control unit 5020 by software, and the CPU executes another computer program. Is realized by. It should be noted that the effect control unit 5020 may be configured by a different arithmetic circuit and may be configured as hardware.

The output module unit 5080 will be further described. For example, when the function is HPLAY, information specified in the HPLAY parameter for the lamp output module (lamp module 5600) as the output module unit 5080 (for example, a lamp effect pattern It is information (data table) for specifying, and corresponds to effect device control information. The lamp output module 5600 selects (determines/generates) production device drive data for controlling the lighting of the lamp based on the data table to specify the production pattern, and selects it in the lamp output buffer (lamp data output buffer). The performance device drive data (determined/generated) is stored. When the rendering device drive data is stored in the lamp output buffer, the transmission unit (serial control IC 5150) outputs a drive signal to the decoration board on which the lamp is mounted.

Similarly, in the case of sound output, the parameter (effect device control information) designated by the sound function is passed to the sound output module (sound module 5500). Then, the sound output module selects (determines) sound source drive data (sound number, volume, CH number, pan pot setting, stereo setting information, etc., corresponding to effect device drive data) for controlling sound output. Then, the selected (determined) sound source drive data is set in the sound output buffer (sound data output buffer 5125). When the sound source drive data is stored in the sound output buffer, the sound source drive data is output to the liquid crystal and sound control section (liquid crystal display control section) 1512 by the sound transmitting means. The same applies to the driving device, in which the motor output module (driving device module 5700) determines the driving data (rendering device driving data), and the motor output buffer (motor data output buffer 5140) transmits the data to the transmission unit (serial control). The IC 5150) outputs a drive signal to the motor (drive device).

Here, an outline of a flow from receiving a main command (main board command) from the main control board 1310 to executing an effect will be described with reference to FIG. 296. First, the input command analysis unit 5010 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the input command analysis unit 5010 analyzes the main command.

When performing the production control according to the analysis result of the main command, the production control unit 5020 acquires the layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030, and determines the block control information (production block number) for each layer. Further, the effect block control unit 5040 specifies effect block data from the effect block data storage unit 5050 based on the block control information (effect block number) specified by the effect control unit 5020. Then, scheduler control information capable of specifying the scheduler data specified by the specified effect block data is passed to the corresponding scheduler execution unit 5060, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 is caused to execute the scheduler data.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 receives the scheduler control information from the production block control unit 5040, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function included in the specified scheduler data and transmits the production device control information for controlling the production device to the output module unit 5080. To do. The output module unit 5080 outputs the rendering device drive data to the rendering device based on the function and the designated parameter, and causes each rendering device to execute the designated operation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect block control unit 5040 centrally controls a series of effects based on the effect block data, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 determines the effect based on the scheduler data specified in the effect block data. And controls the execution of individual effects that form a series of effects.

Here, a basic configuration of effect block data, scheduler data, and effect device drive data will be described with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is a schematic diagram for simply showing an example of effect block data, scheduler data, and effect device drive data in the present embodiment. (A) is effect block data, (B) is scheduler data, and (C) is (C). ) Indicates performance device drive data.

As shown in (A), the effect block data specifies scheduler data that specifies the control content of each effect device and a scheduler for executing the scheduler data. Further, the execution timing of the scheduler data is specified by using a NOP function (described later) which waits for a specified period.

In the first line, "LMP_SCH01" is the scheduler to be activated, and "Start 01" is the scheduler data to be executed by "LMP_SCH01". Similarly, the third line indicates that the scheduler "LMP_SCH02" executes the scheduler data "initialization 01", and the fifth line indicates that the scheduler "LMP_SCH03" executes the scheduler data "demo 01".

As shown in (B), the scheduler data stores a function (for example, “KPLAY”) that instructs a predetermined process to be executed in order to control each effect device, in the order of execution. As will be described later, “KPLAY” is a function for controlling the lamp, and turns on the lamp according to the designated gradation parameter “PTA_LMP_INI”. Note that the scheduler data also defines functions other than the functions (KPLAY, COMMAND0, NOP, STOP) described in the schematic view of (B), and other functions will be described later.

(C) shows the data for operating the rendering device, the left column is the timing (output maintenance time) for outputting the rendering device drive data to the rendering device, and the middle column is the rendering device for operating the rendering device. This is drive data, and the right column shows the operation contents of the performance device drive data. The right column is a so-called comment line, which is ignored during execution. The value in the left column corresponds to the switching timing of the corresponding operation, and also corresponds to the output maintaining time of the performance device drive data.

Explaining the above-mentioned “KPLAY” as an example, the lamp module 5600 creates the lamp driving data (lighting pattern) of the operation mode corresponding to the specified gradation parameter “PTA_LMP_INI”, and specifies the lamp driving data at a predetermined timing. Output to the lamp. The rendering device drive data includes data necessary for other operations such as designation of duration in addition to the operation mode. As for the operation mode, in the case of a lamp, there are data on the light emission pattern of various light emitting means provided on the game board or the game frame, and data on the gradation value. Further, in the case of a drive device, when driving a stepping motor, there is an excitation pattern of the stepping motor and an excitation period for each step, and in the case of a solenoid, drive data for turning on/off the solenoid and ON/OFF. There is a drive time of OFF. Further, if it is a sound, the data (sound number, CH number, volume, panpot, stereo/monaural setting) set for the sound source IC corresponding to the sound source data to be output is applicable.

[17-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, details of the configurations of modules and the like that realize the above-described functions will be described. FIG. 298 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of modules and the like in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, but part or all may be configured as hardware.

In the present embodiment, the system module 5100 for driving each effect device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1511. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules related to rendering.

The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a sound data output buffer 5125, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and transfers it to the command analysis module 5200. In the present embodiment, the main command is a 3-byte one-set information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, and a checksum value of the command status and the mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into 3 times by 8 bits. The main command buffer 5110, which is output as follows, receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, discards the received command if the received command is not determined to be correct, and determines that the command is correct. If it is determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200.

The main command includes information indicating the contents related to the production among the game state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, the main command can include the presence/absence of a game ball winning a starting winning opening, the result of the special drawing lottery, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. When the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, sensor outputs such as door opening, operation of a start lever and a stop button, rotation and stop of a reel, success or failure of a role at the time of stop, and the like can be mentioned. The commands given here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the gaming machine and the contents of the effect.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the content of the main command, and determines whether or not the command operates the rendering device. When it is determined that the command is to operate the effect device, the command is passed to the effect control unit 5020. The command for operating the effect device includes, in addition to commands related to the effect of the game itself, a command for outputting an alarm sound or turning on a lamp when an abnormality is detected.

The information transferred from the command analysis module 5200 to the effect control unit 5020 may be the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 as it is (for example, “1001H”), or may correspond to the effect based on the analysis result. The information (value) may be predetermined information such as identification information (for example, number (“10” for variation pattern 1, “500” for magnetic error)) specified by

When the command analysis module 5200 judges the consistency of the received command and determines that the command is abnormal (for example, the command is a non-designated command, a lost design is designated despite the hit variation pattern, or a big hit). If a command related to fluctuation and a command related to fluctuation start are received at the same time), the reception of the command determined to be abnormal is canceled or invalidated, and the occurrence of abnormality without passing the identification information to the performance control unit 5020 is prevented. Have a role to play.

The effect control unit 5020 identifies the layer to be the effect control target from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to the specified layer is acquired (determined), and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit (display device control unit) 5310 and a sub effect block control unit (non-display device control unit) 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lighting/blinking of a lamp, operation of a role object, and the like.

When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 identifies the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number, and executes the process based on the liquid crystal effect block data. The liquid crystal effect block data is effect block data for executing the liquid crystal display effect, and specifies one or a plurality of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification patterns, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) target and executes the drawing scheduler data specified by the block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for liquid crystal display includes a liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as a background and characters, and a liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying an identification symbol. .

The liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed at a frame cycle (1f=approximately 33.334 milliseconds) that is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (scheduler) for liquid crystal display, and the liquid crystal display by the liquid crystal module 5400. Generate a list command. The liquid crystal display list command is passed to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, and the image data generated based on the passed command (display list) is output from the VDP to display the image to be displayed. The data is transferred to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600). In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal scheduler execution unit is divided into the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332. You may comprise as a scheduler execution part.

The sound source built-in VDP 1512a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs it to the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1600). The display data is generated by, for example, a method of expanding the character data designated by the liquid crystal display list command at the designated position on the frame buffer.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub effect block control unit 5320 identifies the sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub effect block data is effect block data for executing each effect of a lamp, a sound, and a motor, and is a scheduler (scheduler execution units 5333, 5334) that executes one or a plurality of sub effect scheduler data and sub effect scheduler data. ) Is specified. By executing the sub effect scheduler data, each effect device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs an operation defined in advance in the sub effect scheduler data. The motor may be any device that drives a movable body, and may be a drive device such as a solenoid.

The sub effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of various effect devices, and executes the sub effect scheduler data specified by the sub effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various effect devices includes a sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the effect device at 1-frame intervals and a sub effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the effect devices at 1-millisecond intervals. included. Thus, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it becomes possible to execute the effect according to the configuration of the gaming machine or the required specifications of the effect device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the drawing update interval, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, the action of the accessory, and the like with the liquid crystal display. Further, if the detection interval of the sensor is 1 ms, it becomes possible to promptly deal with a malfunction of the accessory. The execution cycle of the sub-effect scheduler may be a single kind of cycle (for example, only one frame or one millisecond), and is different from one frame other than one millisecond. May be

The sub effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than liquid crystal display, but in the present embodiment, as an example, three kinds of effect control of sound (sound) output, lighting/blinking of a lamp, and operation of a role object are performed. explain. The effect control by the sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described as being the same except for the execution cycle, without distinction. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of rendering device will be described.

First, a case of performing an effect by outputting a sound will be described. The scheduler data for sound output is specified in the sub effect block data, the scheduler execution unit 5060 for sound output is activated for the specified scheduler data, and the scheduler data is executed. Then, when a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command, such as sound number, volume, CH number, panpot setting, stereo setting information) based on the specified parameters. ) Is generated. A plurality of scheduler execution units 5060 can be activated for each layer. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and effect sound effects by different schedulers, sound source drive data is generated in parallel, and sound is simultaneously generated. Can be output. Therefore, one of the plurality of started scheduler execution units 5060 may be used as a scheduler, and one scheduler may process scheduler data related to both one BGM and effect sound. Further, the scheduler data for BGM and the scheduler data for effect sound effect may be individually processed by the scheduler for BGM and the scheduler for effect sound effect. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a reads out the sound source data designated by the sound source driving data from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM, and outputs it from the speaker 921 by the audio data transmission IC.

Next, a case of performing an effect with a lamp will be described. The lamp control scheduler data specified in the sub effect block data is activated and executed. Then, when a lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameter. Note that it is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers as in the case of sound output, and it is possible to control a plurality of lamps and layers in parallel.

The lamp module 5600 creates lamp driving data for each cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond), and outputs it to the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp driving data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. By making the ramp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously generate and output the ramp data in a single cycle. With this configuration, the ramp data output is changed to the next operation of the ramp data creation in response to the increase in the ramp control processing time due to the increase in the ramp system or the overlap of the ramp layers. By setting the cycle, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of the ramp data is completed within the processing cycle.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously created lamp driving data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output to the serial control IC 5150 from the buffer A, and the lamp drive data previously created is output to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA to turn on/blink each lamp. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling lighting/blinking of the LED is similar to that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

Finally, the case of controlling a drive device (for example, a motor or a solenoid) for operating the accessory is described. The scheduler data for controlling the driving device is designated in the sub effect block data, the scheduler for the driving device (motor scheduler) is started for the designated scheduler data, and the scheduler data is executed. Then, when a drive device control function (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the drive device module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. It is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers as in the case of sound output, and a plurality of drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs it to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, the motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a regardless of the DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each driving device is not the same timing as the timing of outputting from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output in the next cycle of all the motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the completion of the serial transmission of all the motor data, so as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission becomes an overhead, and the overall processing time for each frame cycle becomes longer. Is not enough. In this embodiment, by shifting the timing of the latch signal output corresponding to the motor data serial transmission, the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission is set to 0, but a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted by using the DMA and the latch signal is output by the DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission can be set to 0 in the same manner. At the same time that the motor drive data is output, the effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each performance drive photo information is received by serial communication via the parallel/serial control IC.

[17-2. Data structure]
In this embodiment, the scheduler data can have various structures. For example, a call function for taking in other scheduler data as a part of the scheduler data may be provided. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processing specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, temporarily executes the other scheduler data specified by the call function and then continues the processing of the original scheduler data. Will be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to utilize general-purpose effect contents in various scenes, as in the case of calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect peculiar to a gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the result. Some players can find a subtle difference in the effect contents during the lottery and guess the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the general-purpose effect contents can be utilized in various scenes by the call function, it is possible to eliminate such subtle differences and make it difficult to predict the lottery result and the like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function for switching the effect contents depending on the game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the process defined by the scheduler data, and when executing the conditional branch function, determines the game state based on the main command and executes the effect contents according to the game state. .. By doing so, it becomes possible to deal with a wide variety of branching game states with one scheduler data. The game state used for conditional branching includes, for example, the result of a lottery performed during the game, the presence/absence of a button operation by the player, and the like. The spinning reel type game machine may use the stopped state of the rotating reel, and the pachinko machine may use the winning state to the starting winning port. Further, the condition may be branched depending on whether or not an error occurs during the game.

The effect contents after the conditional branch can be configured in various ways. For example, after the conditional branch, the configuration may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by the conditional branch, it may be configured to return to the process before the branch. According to the latter mode, for example, after executing a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the conventional effect without a sense of discomfort.

As described above, the game machine may include various effect devices, and as an example, may include a display device for displaying an image. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image, such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display, can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that develops a bitmap into an image in accordance with a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM in which a character or the like to be displayed on the screen is prepared as a bitmap can be configured.

[17-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 299 is an explanatory view showing the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, a case where the main effect control is a sub effect that is executed by executing scheduler data including a function will be described, and a sound output will be described as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 is composed of schedulers 5502 of the type and number according to the rendering device when rendering is executed. In the scheduler 5502, one scheduler 5502 processes one scheduler data. The scheduler 5502 acquires the scheduler data specified in the sub effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

The sound functions executed at the time of sound output include "SPLAY" for reproducing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping the phrase being reproduced, "VOL_PH" for setting the volume level during phrase reproduction, and the like. These sound functions are processed by the scheduler 5502, and the control designated by the parameters is executed. When the sound module 5500 receives the execution of the process based on the sound function, the sound module 5500 generates sound source driving data and outputs the sound source driving data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

The function processed by the scheduler 5502 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels will be described as 4 for easy understanding. Further, the sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. Note that the speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of the channels Ch1 to Ch4 and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. Does not mean that

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channels is managed by the channel management works 5507[1] to 5507[4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right of the figure. The work 5507 stores a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether or not stereo output is performed. The output volume is a volume for each channel. The loop attribute is a designation of whether or not to repeat the reproduction. These pieces of information are designated by the sound module 5500 based on the function for sound.

As described above, in FIG. 299, the basic concept of the effect control in the present embodiment has been shown by taking the sound output control as an example. When the scheduler designated by the sub effect block data is activated, the scheduler data is executed on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function for controlling each rendering device is called, and a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, driving device module 5700) corresponding to each rendering device is instructed to perform processing based on the function.

[17-4. Data flow in production control]
The module configuration and the basic concept of control in the effect control of the gaming machine have been described above. Next, the flow of effect control from the reception of the main command to the acquisition of the scheduler data will be described in more detail.

[17-4-1. Acquisition of data required for production control]
FIG. 300 is a diagram illustrating a configuration until data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is acquired. When the production control unit 5020 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 as described in FIG. 298, the command analysis module 5200 analyzes the main command and notifies the production control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

The effect control unit 5020, based on the layer data table, each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the variation pattern), a hold layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the hold effect), a game instruction layer (a game instruction Based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200 for each of the layer to be performed), the communication error layer (the layer that notifies the communication error), the notification layer (the layer that performs various notifications), and the abnormality notification layer (the layer that performs the abnormality notification). , Acquisition and update management of the effect block data number corresponding to each layer. Also, the obtained effect block data number is passed to the effect block control unit 5040. If the production block number is, for example, a variation pattern layer, based on the variation pattern number, a variation pattern-based liquid crystal production block data combination number table, a variation pattern-based liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table, and a variation pattern-based sub production block data It is determined from the combination number table. The liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table for each variation pattern, and the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern define a combination of effect blocks corresponding to each variation pattern. .. Specific examples of the variation pattern-based liquid crystal effect block data combination number table, the variation pattern-based liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table, and the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 324, 325, and 326, respectively. To do.

The unit of division of the effect block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) that are common effects within a series of effects (for example, effects executed from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol). In addition, block data including control information such as effect contents and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the effect for each effect block based on the effect block number, it is possible to synchronize effects by the effect devices. In addition, the arrangement of layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern layer is the backmost and the abnormality notification layer is the frontmost. This is the more important information is displayed on the front. This is a configuration for.

When the production block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (production block number) corresponding to each layer, the block control unit (liquid crystal production block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub production block) corresponding to each layer. The control unit 5320) acquires corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal design block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053). As described above, the scheduler data for executing the effect is specified in each block data.

For example, when the main command is the start winning command, the hold layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing the hold display on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the sound effect at the time of the start winning. 5053 is acquired. Further, at the start of variation of the special symbol, a variation start command or the like is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the variation pattern layer is specified. Further, when an error is generated or a warning is notified, a command related to the error is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and the abnormality detection layer is specified. Further, also when an abnormality detected inside the peripheral control board 1510 (such as an abnormality of a role object) is notified, the abnormality detection layer is specified as in the case where a command relating to the error is received from the main control board 1310. In addition, a plurality of effects can be simultaneously overlapped by performing the effect for each layer.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal effect block data number, the liquid crystal effect block 1503 of the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5331. Start the 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal effect scheduler data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data 5071 on the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to perform the processing of the function defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes a function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and outputs the display list command to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. Then, an image is drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600. The process in the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

Further, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 acquires liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, and activates the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler. , Specify the liquid crystal symbol scheduler data 5072 to be executed. Then, by executing the liquid crystal symbol scheduler data 5072 on the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to perform the function processing defined in the liquid crystal symbol scheduler data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes a function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and outputs the display list command to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. Then, an image is drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600. The process in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

When the sub effect block control unit 5320 acquires the sub effect block data 5053, the sub effect block control unit 5320 specifies the execution cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub effect block data 5053. If the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler of the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 is activated, or if the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1ms sub-effect 1ms of the scheduler execution unit 5334 is executed. Start the scheduler.

Further, the activated sub-effect 1f scheduler or sub-effect 1ms scheduler acquires and executes the sub-effect scheduler data 5073. The sub-effect scheduler data 5073 has no difference depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the scheduler of all execution cycles. As a result, it is possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers having different execution cycles, and the data capacity is reduced. In addition, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the rendering device. In addition, the same scheduler data can be executed by different schedulers at the same time, which enables sharing of scheduler data, prevents the same type of failure from occurring at multiple locations, and also reduces the data capacity. it can.

Here, a specific example in which the same scheduler data is simultaneously executed by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 301 is a diagram for explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. For the step-up notice, four kinds of step-up notices 1 to 4 can be executed. By executing the production in which the production contents are developed in stages, the player can expect the variation display result of the symbols. Suggest a degree.

In step-up notice 1, when the step-up 1 effect is executed, the notice effect ends. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and the notice effect ends after the step-up 2 effect ends. The effects are similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and after the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are finished, the notice effect is ended.

In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also execute the step-up notice production in accordance with the liquid crystal production. Since different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up production in the sound production, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each progress state (stage) of the production. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

In addition, when the step-up notice liquid crystal production progresses to the next stage, the next step-up notice is started just before the end of the step-up notice at the current stage, so multiple step-up productions can be performed simultaneously at the same time. There is a period to be seen. As described above, in the lamp effect, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data even for the subsequent step-up effect. However, in the present embodiment, a plurality of schedulers can execute the same scheduler data at the same time. Is becoming Therefore, when the same effect is executed at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the effect execution periods overlap.

Specifically, when the step up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up is performed when the step-up 2 effect is started immediately before the end of the step-up 1 effect. The advance notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously (overlapping) without defining the same scheduler data in duplicate. It has been realized to execute.

The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled and is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data 5073. To process the specified function. Each module executes a process corresponding to the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the drive data to the rendering device.

[17-4-2. Overview of scheduler data execution]
FIG. 302 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines effect contents based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and controls various effect devices by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700. Generates control data for controlling. FIG. 302 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 that is referenced to set this command.

In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number included in the scheduler control information designated by the effect block control unit 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM. As will be described later, the effect number is information that can identify the scheduler data 5401, and in the present embodiment, it is an address of an effect management pointer that manages the substance of the scheduler data 5401.

The correspondence relationship between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect number is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer indicating the storage address of the scheduler data. Although there are as many effect management pointers as the number corresponding to effect numbers, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number. In the example of FIG. 302, effect numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent storage addresses of effect management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. The production number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may have a configuration in which effect numbers and effect management pointers are associated with each other, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for effect management pointers using the effect number as a key, and then stores the scheduler data. Processing may be performed. Further, if the address value of the performance management pointer is used as the performance number, the amount of data in the performance management table can be reduced, and the above-described search is unnecessary, so that the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 302, each command forming the scheduler data 5401 is basically composed of a function and a parameter. As described above, the function is a command for controlling the rendering device, and includes, for example, a command for instructing each module to operate the rendering device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify parameters may be provided.

The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamp, sound, motor (driving device), and user. The sequence control is a basic function for performing effect control, and the lamp, the sound, and the motor are functions for controlling each effect device. Users are functions that do not belong to these groups. Specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 305 to 307.

In the example shown in FIG. 302, the "call" function is specified at address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and then sets the address designated by the parameter to the effect management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily return to the address designated by the parameter and process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous process based on the pointer value saved as described above.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function next to the address A2. The accessory command is set at the address A31, the voice operation number is set at A32, the lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3n. When the production command ends these processes, it returns to the address "A2" in which "call" is designated, and shifts to the process of the next address "A3".

As described above, by utilizing the "call" function, the contents of the series of blocks BL3 designated by the addresses A31 to A3n can be incorporated into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced and the creation load thereof can be reduced. In game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the result. Some players can find a subtle difference in the effect contents during the lottery and guess the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the general-purpose effect contents can be utilized in various scenes by calling, it is possible to eliminate such subtle differences and make it difficult to predict the lottery result and the like. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being spoiled.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function as described above, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the instruction contents to other schedulers such as “accessory action number set”, “voice action number set”, and “lamp action number set”. This is because the scheduler execution unit 5060 merely specifically instructs a very limited function that can be realized.

In the example shown in FIG. 302, NOP (wait) is next executed at address A3. The "NOP" function waits for the specified number of frames and continues processing the scheduler data. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is awaited until the time designated by the parameter Prm[031] has elapsed. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, in the “NOP” function, the scheduler execution unit 5060 once ends the processing of the scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing unless the value of the timer in which the parameter Prm[031] is specified is 0, and this value If is 0, processing for shifting to the function of the next address is performed.

In the present embodiment, the voice operation number and the like are specified using the work area. The work area used by the system event and the work area used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in the work areas according to the designation of the scheduler data. Also, the layer specified by the effect control unit 5020 is provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 300). Also in the work area for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be designated in parallel from these layers.

Similarly, after the address A11 of the conditional branch, the scheduler data is defined by the function and the parameter. In the example shown in FIG. 302, no conditional branch is provided from the address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, the accessory command (address A22), the voice action number (address A21), and the like can be designated without considering the conflict with the block BL1. .. Instead of these settings, the block BL3 or the like may be fetched by the "call" function.

In the scheduler data, the conditional branch and the "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the effect contents may be generated and a different address may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 302, if the condition of “random number value≦Th1?” is added to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n will be executed when this condition is satisfied. If the address A41 (not shown) is called with the condition “Th1<random number value≦Th2?” next to the address A2 (address A2+1), the address A31 and the subsequent addresses are determined according to the value of the random number. Different performances are executed. In this way, if different addresses are called by conditional branching according to the random number, the contents of the effect can be switched randomly by the random number, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching the effect contents in this manner is referred to as “effect lottery” in the present specification.

In the production lottery, all of the display, sound, lamp, and drive device may be switched, or only some of them may be switched. When switching all, it is sufficient to specify all the contents of display, sound and lamp in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. To switch only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

Further, in the scheduler data, conditional branching and a "call" function may be used to define that different scheduler data is called according to the random number for the effect lottery. In this case, as a result of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device performing the effect lottery independently, the effect modes realized by the combination become extremely diverse, and there is an advantage that it can be more interesting.

However, regardless of the result of the display lottery of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device, it is preferable that these productions be finished at the same time in order to realize a production without any discomfort. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data that is the selection target of the effect lottery has the content that the effect ends at the same time. In addition, it is not an essential requirement that the presentation is finished at the same time, and the presentation times may not be the same.

The effect lottery using the scheduler data has various advantages in that the effect contents can be varied and the lottery mode can be switched according to the output status of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the driving device. For example, when the drive device is performing an 8-shaped distribution operation at the time when the production lottery is instructed and other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the production lottery related to the drive device. You may. Similarly, regarding the display, the sound, and the lamp, the effect lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the effect lottery is instructed. In the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, the effect lottery is to switch the effect contents by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the production lottery in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of productions than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and to further enhance the interest.

[17-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls the output of sound will be described. FIG. 303 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and outputs the sound. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for voice. A work 5507 for operation management is prepared for each scheduler 5502. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

When the scheduler operation unit 5060 identifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and identifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice action number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with voice action numbers. In this embodiment, the voice action number corresponds to the storage address of the voice action number table. Any identification information can be used as the voice action number, but as with the case of the above-mentioned production number, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the volume of the voice action number table and the processing load when referencing the table Has the advantage that

The sound pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In this embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. Functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307.

In the example shown in FIG. 303, the "call" function is defined at the address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown) and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase reproduction is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H designated by the parameter and reproduces it.

Also, an example of the structure of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. 303. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In this embodiment, arbitrary identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

The channel is the output channel designated when the phrase is reproduced. The left and right pan pots and the upper and lower pan pots are the left/right/upper/left output balance of each speaker included in the gaming machine. Volume is the output volume. The song number is an identification number of a sound to be reproduced. When the tune number with built-in sound source is notified to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source reads sound source data corresponding to the tune number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM, and reproduces sound. The loop is a designation of whether or not the sound is repeatedly reproduced. Stereo is a designation of whether or not to perform stereo output.

A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the drawing. The operating state indicates whether or not each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is an address of scheduler data 5505 executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 303, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3 as the process progresses. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is designated by the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially subtracted with the passage of time. The sound module 5500 executes the following function when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops which are multiply designated by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is called by the "call" function (second call) in the processing after the address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of the address SA2, call nesting is performed. The number is 2. When the second call ends and the first call returns, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The loop is similar. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[17-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 304 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the lamp module 5600 of this embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing based on the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lamp lighting/flashing control. Similarly to the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also accept requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 forming the scheduler execution unit 5060 is provided in association with a ramp layer for a lamp. A work 5603 for operation management is prepared for each scheduler 5602. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

When the lamp operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, the lamp operation number table is referenced to specify the scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with lamp operation numbers. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although any identification information can be used as the lamp operation number, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the lamp operation number table and the processing load when referring to the table by using the storage address, as in the case of the above-mentioned production number. There is an advantage that it is possible.

The ramp pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In this embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the ramp pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505, like the effect data (FIG. 302), is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG. 306.

In the example shown in FIG. 304, the "call" function is defined at the address LA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown) and then processes the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

At address LA3, gradation pattern setting is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored in the address LA11 designated by the parameter. A gradation scheduler 5604 is provided in association with each of the lamp schedulers 5602. The lamp is turned on with the specified gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value has elapsed, the lamp is replaced with the gradation data 2. Light up. Here, an example in which two kinds of gradation data are specified is shown, but even when three or more kinds of gradation data are specified, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings for the addresses LA12 and later, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between the gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. The gradation scheduler 5604 finishes the lighting of the lamp after executing the series of processes of the addresses LA11 to LA1n. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the process of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and executes the process of the next address until it is stopped (address LAn).

A work 5603 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5602. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the drawing. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified by the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The ramp executes the next function when this value becomes zero. The gradation data timer represents a waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 304, when the gradation data defined in the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 shifts to the gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 is ended and the processing shifts to the processing of the address LA12.

The ramp pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5601 executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 304, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3 as the process progresses. The gradation data pointer is an address of the gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example in the drawing, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12 as the process progresses. The loop count is the number of times the loop is repeated, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be nested.

[17-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Next, the function of the drive device module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive device will be described. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. The control is similar to that of the lamp module 5600, and therefore the illustration is omitted. The drive device module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process designated by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the drive device. The drive module 5700 can also accept requests from a plurality of schedulers and perform processing.

The control items of the drive device include, for example, a movement amount (rotational step angle of the stepping motor), a movement time, a movement speed (motor rotation speed), an excitation method, a trapezoidal drive, a rotation direction, and the like. In addition, instructions to perform a return operation to return to the origin position and mechanical end stop (in the case where the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited, stop while energizing to the limit position of the movable range) are given. included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed stepwise when starting and stopping the rotation.

The scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drive will be described later in FIG.

[17-5. function]
Heretofore, an example of using a function in a module used for effect control has been described. Here, other functions will be described. 305 to 307 are diagrams showing an example of the function in the effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are grouped into sequence control, lamp, sound, motor and user groups. The functions belonging to each group will be described below.

[17-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of production. FIG. 305 shows an example of a function of sequence control. The outline of each function will be described below.

“STOP” is a function that represents the end of scheduler data. “NOP” is a weighting function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions depends on the processing cycle for executing the “NOP” function. If the frame is executed in one frame, one frame is about 33.334 milliseconds in the present embodiment. If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is to be executed at a cycle of 1 ms, if the number of executions is also specified as 30, it will wait for about 30 ms. “NOP_F_VALUE” has the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value as parameters, and when the condition based on the scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value is satisfied, the “NOP_F_VALUE” function is terminated and the condition is If not satisfied, this is a conditional wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

“MEMW” is a function that writes the specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area using the target scheduler work number and value as parameters. “LOOPST” is a function for performing repetitive processing (loop), specifies the beginning of the loop, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. In addition, if the number of loops is set to "0", the loop becomes an infinite loop. “LOOP” is a function for designating the end of the repeating process (loop).

“RET” is a function for returning processing to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the production management table. "CALL" is the above-mentioned "call" function, which executes a process from a specified address (block), and has information such as an address value and a label for specifying a callee, which is set as a parameter. In “CALL”, the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the process of the call destination, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

"SUBC" selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number specified in the parameter and the branch table, and executes the selected process. That is, the "call" function is executed based on the specified condition. A specific example using “SUBC” will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of the callee is completed by the "SUBC" function, the process returns to the process of the caller (the process following the "SUBC" function).

“SUBJ” selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number and the table specified in the parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the “JUMP” function described later is executed based on the specified condition. A specific example using "SUBJ" will be described later with reference to FIG. The process of the callee is continued as it is without returning to the process of the caller that executed the “SUBJ” function. "JUMP" sets the address designated by the parameter to the effect management pointer, and continues the process from the designated address or label.

“REQ” is a function for starting another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using “REQ” will be described later with reference to FIG. 313. Like "REQ", "REQF" is a function for starting another scheduler specified by a parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. It is prohibited to start up. In "REQ", control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REQF" makes it possible to independently execute the processing of the scheduler data to be executed for a specified period. For example, in the case of initialization of the accessory, another scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It can be prevented from being disabled.

[17-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The function belonging to the lamp group is a function for controlling the flow of lamp production. FIG. 306 shows an example of functions related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

“HPLAY” is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for turning on the lamp based on the gradation data designated by the parameter. In "HPPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the lamp is reset and the lamp reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

Similar to “HPPLAY”, “KPLAY” is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproducing process for lighting the lamp based on the gradation data designated by the parameter. In "KPLAY", if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the lamp being reproduced is continued without being reset.

“HPPLAY2” is a function for executing the ramp gradation data reproduction process by specifying a layer in addition to the gradation data with a parameter. The processing is similar to that of “HPPLAY”. Similar to “HPPLAY2”, “KPLAY2” is a function that specifies a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter and executes a ramp gradation data reproduction process. The processing is similar to that of "KPLAY".

"HPPLAY" and "KPLAY" execute designated lamp gradation data reproduction processing for reproducing the lamp gradation data designated by the parameter. When the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted during the reproduction by “HPPLAY” and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning, and the lamp gradation data is reproduced during the reproduction by “KPLAY”. Playback continues without interruption. That is, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed using "KPLAY" while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular process is executed.

In addition to the function of "HPPLAY" described above, "HPPLAY2" is the same as "HPPLAY" in processing except that the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

In addition to the function of "KPLAY" described above, "KPLAY2" is the same as "KPLAY" except that the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is designated by the parameter and the layer is designated by the parameter.

When "HPPLAY" is used, the player can clearly recognize that the effect has started, while when "KPLAY" is used, the player recognizes that a series of effects is continuing. Can be made Further, if it is attempted to realize control equivalent to that of the other function by using only one function, there may be a case where the newly required processing increases. For example, if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data as in “KPLAY” with only “HPPLAY”, if the lamp being reproduced is continued without being reset, the lamp with the same gradation data is reproduced. A new process for determining whether or not is being reproduced is required. By defining similar functions in this way, it is possible to suppress complication of processing and improve development efficiency. Such a combination of similar functions is not limited to only “HPPLAY” and “KPLAY”, and for example, “HPPLAY2” and “KPLAY2”, “SPPLAY” and “SXPLAY”, “SCPLAY” and “SXCPLAY”, and the like. The same applies to combinations. Note that similar functions are defined for other effect devices such as sounds and motors (driving devices) as well, which similarly suppresses complication of processing.

[17-5-3. Function details (sound)]
The function belonging to the sound group is a function for controlling the sound output. FIG. 306 and FIG. 307 list examples of functions related to sound control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process of outputting a sound based on a phrase number designated by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, it is reset and the reproduction of the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. "SXPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process for outputting a sound based on a phrase number designated by a parameter, like "SPPLAY". In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, the sound reproduction is continued without resetting. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing phrase stop processing for stopping the reproduction of the sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter.

"PAN_PH" is the end of the panpot, using the transition time and the panpot end coordinate position, which are also specified by the parameter, from the voice output coordinate position when the "PAN_PH" function is started, for the phrase being played specified by the parameter. This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position to the coordinate position at the designated transition time. In addition to the function of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" can also specify the panpot start coordinate position by a parameter, and like the "PAN_PH" function, the voice output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of the function execution. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position whose position is designated by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position at the designated transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" specifies the phrase being played specified by the parameter from the volume value at the start of execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameters. It is a function to increase or decrease the volume value in the transition time. In addition to the function of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, "VOL_FADE_PH2" can also specify the fade start volume value as a parameter. As with the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase at the start of function execution is a parameter. This is a function for increasing/decreasing the volume value at the transition time designated from the fade start volume value designated in step 1 to the fade end volume value.

“VOL_PH” is a function for increasing/decreasing the volume value of the phrase being played specified by the parameter with the volume value specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” is a function for muting the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function for canceling the mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

“SCPLAY” and “SXCPPLAY” execute a designated channel music reproduction process for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. When the same phrase has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted to reproduce the same phrase from the beginning when the reproduction is performed by "SCPLAY", and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption during the reproduction by "SXCPPLAY". In other words, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPPLAY" while the phrase is being reproduced, no particular process is executed.

"PAN_CH" performs a panpot targeting a phrase by "PAN_PH" described above, while performing a panpot targeting a ch (channel), ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". As for “PAN_CH2”, the above-mentioned “PAN_PH2” performs the panpot targeting the phrase, whereas the “PAN_PH2” performs the panpot targeting the ch. The processing remains the same.

“VOL_FADE_CH” performs the fade targeting the phrase while “VOL_FADE_PH” described above performs the fade targeting the ch. The ch is designated as a parameter and the phrase is changed to the ch Processing does not change. As for “VOL_FADE_CH2”, the above-mentioned “VOL_FADE_PH2” performs the fade targeting the phrase, whereas the fade targeting the ch target is performed. Processing does not change.

"VOL_CH" increases/decreases the volume value for the phrase described above while "VOL_PH" increases/decreases the volume value for the ch. ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". As for “VOL_MUTE_ON_CH”, the above-mentioned “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” mutes the target phrase (mute), while muting the target ch (ch) is specified by the parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". As for “VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH”, the above-mentioned “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” cancels the mute for the phrase, whereas the mute cancels for the ch. The ch is specified by the parameter. The process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that is changed to ch.

[17-5-4. Function details (motor)]
The function belonging to the motor group is a function for controlling the output of the motor or the solenoid. FIG. 307 shows an example of functions related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

“MPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to regenerate an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor designated by the parameter to regenerate the operation based on the motor data number designated by the parameter. “SOL_ON” executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to perform an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_OFF” executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[17-5-5. Function details (user)]
The function belonging to the user's group is a function for executing the control not belonging to the group described above. An example of these functions is given in FIG. 307, and an outline of each function will be described.

“MBUF_SET” executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process for setting a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. "COMMAND" and "COMMAND0" are processes for issuing commands from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. For example, a command to start drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200, and the same operation as the main command is performed. “MEMC” executes a scheduler memory copy process for copying the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[17-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler used for executing scheduler data, which is a data string in which the functions necessary for executing a series of processes are defined in the execution order, will be described. One or more schedulers are provided for each management purpose, but all the schedulers can execute all the functions, and the schedulers for sound can execute the functions related to the lamp and the schedulers for character products. You can execute the function for sound with. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) among the schedulers provided for each application, and it is possible to execute all the functions in a mixed manner. There is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and a plurality of registered schedulers can be executed simultaneously.

FIG. 308 is a diagram illustrating an example of the scheduler according to the present embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified by the state transition and the device (effect type) to be controlled. The outline of typical types of schedulers will be described below.

First, an example of a scheduler related to state transition will be described. There is a special figure state scheduler (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data that controls the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the game state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

Further, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls the transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transitions when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and transitions to another state when, for example, the player operates a production button, wins an execution lottery for production, or when a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation. To do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

To the scheduler targeted for sound, the background for controlling the output of the sound that is output along with the background display and the variable display of the symbols, the scheduler for executing the symbol sound scheduler data (SND_SCH01), and the output when the notice production is executed There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of the sound to be played, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound when the advance notice is executed by the accessory.

In addition, the schedulers (SND_SCH01 to 04) that target these sounds are schedulers that limit the effect mode for the effect control of the background display and the variable display of symbols and the effect control when the notice effect is executed. At this time, if you try to execute another production in parallel while executing the scheduler data with these schedulers to control the production, it is possible that the new production cannot be executed because the scheduler is being used. There is. Therefore, a common scheduler that enables sound output in common for other notices and uses without limiting the effect mode is separately prepared (SND_SCH05). In the example shown in FIG. 308, only SND_SCH05 is the common scheduler, but a plurality of common schedulers may be prepared. By preparing a plurality of common schedulers, it is possible to flexibly cope with a wider variety of presentation modes. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

As described above, by providing the scheduler capable of controlling the sound output without limiting the effect mode, for example, the notice effect included in the notice group 1 and the notice effect included in the notice group 2 are executed in parallel. Even if the sub-effects are to be overlapped and executed during the same time, it is possible to diversify the effect variations by using the common scheduler. The common scheduler may be activated when the scheduler with the limited production mode cannot be executed, or may be for executing the scheduler data which is not executed with the scheduler with the limited production mode. In addition, since scheduler data is executed frequently or continuously in the scheduler that limits the effect mode, the starting state may be maintained even after the power of the game machine is turned on. In the common scheduler, the execution frequency of the scheduler data is If the number is small, the scheduler may be started when the scheduler data is executed, and the scheduler may be terminated after the processing is completed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load at the time of starting the scheduler and to suppress the consumption of resources such as the arithmetic unit and the storage device of the effect control device that are consumed by starting a large number of schedulers.

In the scheduler for lamps, similarly to the scheduler for sound, a background for controlling lighting/blinking of lamps associated with background display and variable display of symbols, a scheduler for executing symbol lamp scheduler data (LMP_SCH01 ), a scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) that controls the lighting/blinking of the lamp when the notice production is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) that controls the lighting/blinking of the lamp when the notice is executed by an accessory. Further, similar to the sound-targeted scheduler, there is a common scheduler (LMP_SCH05) that enables common lamp control for other notices and applications without limiting the manner of presentation. The processing cycle of the ramp target scheduler is 1f (frame).

Further, although the scheduler described up to this point is a scheduler having one type of control target (effect type), it is possible to control both output of sound and lighting/blinking of a lamp, and to correspond to a plurality of effect types. There is also a sound/lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01 to 05) that can be used universally. Sound can be output simultaneously for the number of channels of the sound source (the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 1512), but in the present embodiment, there are four types of schedulers (SND_SCH01 to 04) for outputting the sound, while the number of channels is 32. ), the number is smaller than the number of channels even if the schedulers capable of outputting the notification sound are combined. Therefore, even if you try to output the number of types of sounds that exceed the number of sound output schedulers at the same time, the corresponding scheduler data cannot be executed, and there is a possibility that no sound can be output even when the channel is idle. ..

Therefore, by preparing a general-purpose scheduler that can support a plurality of effect types, it is possible to temporarily increase the effect devices to be controlled. For example, when two types of preview effects of the preview group 1 are executed in duplicate, the scheduler data corresponding to the preview effects to be executed later may be executed by the general-purpose scheduler. In addition, when it is previously known that the notice production will be repeatedly executed, a general-purpose scheduler may be designated as the scheduler that executes the scheduler data in the production block data.

In a normal game, it is rare to use all channels regardless of the number of schedulers, but even if the number of sound output schedulers is smaller than the number of sound source channels, unexpected production is performed. There is a possibility that there will be a shortage of schedulers due to duplication, and even if more schedulers than the number of channels are prepared, the number of channels will be insufficient and as a result sound may not be output. Therefore, it is desirable that the maximum number of sound output schedulers is the same as the number of channels, and that the number of schedulers is smaller than the number of channels. Even in the case where the effects are excessively duplicated, a general-purpose scheduler may be used. Since two channels are used for stereo output, the number of sound output schedulers may be set according to the number of channels for stereo output.

Prepare a scheduler that is frequently used in this way as a dedicated scheduler in advance, and activate the general-purpose scheduler when it is necessary to execute scheduler data temporarily or exceptionally in excess of the number of dedicated schedulers prepared in advance. Thus, it is possible to easily manage the scheduler without increasing the number of dedicated schedulers more than necessary.

Although the sound/lamp general-purpose scheduler is exemplified here, the motor (driving device) may also be the target effect type. The processing cycle of the sound/lamp general-purpose scheduler is 1f (frame). However, when the motor is targeted, the processing cycle of the scheduler may be set to 1 ms, and schedulers of a plurality of types of processing cycles may be prepared as the general-purpose scheduler. Good. In the present embodiment, a general-purpose scheduler (FREE_SCH01 to 03) corresponding to an arbitrary effect type is defined. A scheduler having a processing cycle of 1f (frame) and a scheduler having a processing cycle of 1 ms are prepared.

In this way, by providing the general-purpose scheduler, it is possible to flexibly cope with a change in the configuration of the effect device provided in the gaming machine without significantly modifying the program or the data structure. As a result, the development efficiency of the gaming machine is improved, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to changes in the specifications of the gaming machine.

The motor-targeted scheduler includes a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing system operation, a scheduler for executing motor ram clear scheduler data for performing settings when RAM is cleared ( MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler for executing the motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the placement of the accessory (MOTINI_SCH), for executing a motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH), and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the action of the accessory by the effect or the like.

The scheduler for executing the action of the character effect according to the production or the like is a common scheduler (MIT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the action of the specific character effect or a common scheduler used regardless of the type of character effect. MOT_SCH 06-10).

The processing cycle of the scheduler for the motor is 1 ms (millisecond), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler for the game state management, sound and lamp (this embodiment 1f=about 33.334 ms). Has become. Further, even a scheduler for a motor does not need to limit the processing cycle to 1 ms, and may be a 1f cycle like a scheduler for a lamp or the like. Even if the scheduler for the motor operates in 1f, if the motor module side executes the processing in 1ms, it becomes possible to control the stepping motor in a cycle shorter than 1f, and it is better to set all the schedulers in 1f cycle. Since it is not necessary to distinguish the time, there is an advantage that management such as activation of the scheduler becomes easy.

In addition, in an accessory including a plurality of movable parts, a specific scheduler may be activated for each movable part. For example, there is an accessory that is provided with a movable body in each of the parts of the head, arms, and legs, and imitates a character in which each part can move independently. In controlling such an accessory, by starting a specific scheduler (specific scheduler) corresponding to the movable body provided in each part and executing scheduler data for controlling the operation of each part in parallel, It is possible to control the operation of the parts independently and concurrently at the same time, and it is possible to realize a complicated and detailed operation mode.

Further, there is an accessory in which not only the effect by the movable body but also the light emission effect by the light emitting body such as the LED provided in each part of the accessory is executed. For example, a light-emitting body is arranged in each part of the aforementioned accessory, and the light-emission effect is performed in conjunction with the operation of each part. At this time, a scheduler corresponding to the light emitters provided in the respective parts may be activated and scheduler data for controlling the light emission mode of the light emitters of the respective parts may be executed in parallel. Thereby, it becomes possible to control the light emission effect in each part independently and in parallel, and a complicated and detailed light emission mode can be realized. As described above, the light-emitting body such as the LED can control the light emission by using the scheduler and the scheduler data as in the case of the lamp.

Moreover, you may make it start the specific scheduler corresponding to each site|part. The specific scheduler corresponding to the part executes scheduler data for controlling the rendering device (here, the movable body and the light emitting body) corresponding to the region, regardless of the type of the rendering device. Specifically, in the example of the aforementioned accessory, the scheduler data for controlling the movable body that moves the head and controlling the light emitter provided in the head is executed by the specific scheduler corresponding to the head. As a result, it becomes possible to closely cooperate the motion effect and the light emission effect executed in each part. In addition, when a specific sound is output according to the operation of the accessory, the scheduler data executed by the specific scheduler corresponding to the part may be configured to include the output control of the sound. A specific scheduler corresponding to the part if the sound is related to the part, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound at the time of advance notice execution by the part if the sound common to the part is output. It may be configured to process.

On the other hand, since sound can be output simultaneously from multiple channels in parallel, it is possible to activate a dedicated scheduler and control it to output in the same manner as a movable body, but the output sound is Since there are a huge number of types, it is not realistic to activate the dedicated scheduler individually. In the present embodiment, as described above, the categories are classified according to the timing of outputting the sound and the like (background display, variable display of symbols, advance notice effect execution, advance notice execution by accessory). If it is a background display, the scheduler (SND_SCH01) that controls the output of BGM is activated, and at the time of advance notice execution by a role object, a scheduler (SND_SCH04) different from the scheduler that controls the output of BGM is activated, and each scheduler operates in parallel. The sound output is controlled. In addition, although four types of schedulers (SND_SCH01 to 04) are illustrated in the present embodiment, the categories may be further subdivided so that more schedulers can be activated in parallel. Further, the channel and the scheduler may be associated with each other by associating the category with the category (fixed, AUTO group) in the sound control by the above-mentioned automatic channel system.

As described above, the scheduler includes a "dedicated scheduler" used for a predetermined use/purpose for each rendering device, and a general purpose without limiting the use/purpose for each rendering device (with a single rendering type). A "common scheduler" that is used for a specific purpose and a "general-purpose scheduler" that is used to control a plurality of types (different performance types) of rendering devices are included. In addition, the scheduler for controlling the rendering device of a single rendering type is referred to as a "single scheduler" as opposed to a "general-purpose scheduler".

In addition, sound/lamp notification layer scheduler data for each layer that outputs sound and turns on/blinks the lamps is used to notify the outside of alarms such as out-of-balls and ball-clogging, and abnormalities detected by magnetic sensors. There are notification schedulers (INF_SCH01 to 03) to execute. The processing cycle of the notification scheduler is 1f (frame).

Notification targets by the notification scheduler include magnet abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, winning abnormality notification, vibration abnormality notification, accessory (movable body) abnormality notification, RAM clear abnormality notification, setting abnormality notification, RAM value abnormality notification, random number built-in CPU Abnormality notification and the like are included, and further notifications other than the occurrence of abnormality such as when the door is opened or when the setting is changed (setting notification) are included. The notification by the notification scheduler has a mode that does not depend on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, the notice effect is different for each model of the game machine. Therefore, the abnormality notification in this embodiment can be realized with a common configuration regardless of the model of the game machine.

The notification scheduler executes scheduler data for interlocking control of sounds and lamps, and one scheduler corresponds to a plurality of effect devices (effect types). In the example shown in FIG. 308, the control of the sound and the lamp is targeted, but a drive device such as a motor may be targeted. For example, when a character (movable body) abnormality is notified, the notification scheduler executes the scheduler data for abnormality notification to notify the abnormality with a sound and a lamp, and controls to initialize the position of the character (movable body). You may. In such notification, since the control contents are simple without performing complicated control like game production, by defining scheduler data for collectively controlling a plurality of production devices (production types), when an abnormality occurs Can be easily managed, and the game machine can be configured to be independent of the model.

The notification mode by the notification scheduler may be performed individually depending on the type of notification, or some of the effect devices may be common. For example, as the notification mode of the magnet abnormality notification and the radio wave abnormality notification, the lighting mode of the lamp is the same, and regarding the sound, each abnormality content (“magnet abnormality” and “radio wave abnormality”) is output by voice along with the output of an error sound. At this time, the error sounds may be common or different.

Similarly, in the case of "setting notification" for setting the jackpot probability of the gaming machine, the lamp is turned on in a predetermined manner, and a sound indicating that the setting is being changed is output together with the output of the notification sound. At this time, since the abnormality does not always occur, a notification sound different from that at the time of the abnormality may be generated. Further, in the case where the occurrence of an abnormality such as opening of the door is different, a common alarm sound may be used. Thereby, it can be distinguished from the occurrence of abnormality.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the setting such as the jackpot probability only when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the RAM clear is also executed in accordance with the setting change. Therefore, if a setting change is detected during the game, a setting abnormality notification will be given. Also, when the set value is set to a value outside the predetermined range, the setting abnormality is similarly notified. The setting may be changed other than when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and may be changed during the game only when confirming the setting.

Further, as in the case of executing the abnormality notification, the abnormal state notification signal indicating that the setting is being changed is output from the gaming machine to the outside at the time of executing the setting notification. At this time, the abnormal condition notification signal may be output regardless of the notification by the notification scheduler, or the abnormal condition notification signal may be output as a series of processes together with the notification by the notification scheduler. The abnormal state notification signal may be output continuously until the setting change is completed, or may be output for a predetermined period at the start of the setting change. In addition, by making the notification of the game machine main unit and the signal output to the outside independent, even if it is not possible to notify the outside due to a failure of the speaker of the game machine, it is possible to confirm that the setting change operation has been performed. It will be possible. Furthermore, it is also possible to output a signal from the gaming machine to notify the outside, or to notify by a test lamp or the like arranged inside the gaming machine so that the player does not recognize it.

Further, as described above, regardless of the type of production device (production type), a general-purpose scheduler that can be used for any target such as production and notification is also defined, and the number of schedulers for which notification targets are prepared is defined. When an abnormality occurs beyond the limit, it is possible to notify by using a general-purpose scheduler. As a result, it is possible to notify the generated abnormality as comprehensively as possible. Further, since the abnormality notification is not frequently performed, the general-purpose scheduler may perform the abnormality notification without providing the notification scheduler in advance. In this case, more general-purpose schedulers may be provided than in the case where the notification scheduler is provided, and a general-purpose scheduler that is rarely used may be used as the notification scheduler. In addition, an effect type for outputting an abnormal condition notification signal is provided so that scheduler data for outputting an abnormal condition notification signal can be executed only by a general-purpose scheduler, and when an abnormality occurs, the general-purpose scheduler is activated to output the abnormal condition notification signal. You may do it.

The number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, but the number of schedulers may be controlled to dynamically increase or decrease according to the gaming state or the advance notice. As a result, it becomes possible to activate each scheduler without depending on the number of prizes or the like provided in the gaming machine and the number of effects, and it is possible to reduce restrictions for executing effects.

[17-7. Application example of scheduler data (production 1)]
The outline of the types and functions of the scheduler used to perform a series of controls by combining the functions used in production control and these functions has been described above, but below, with reference to the drawings, specific application examples of scheduler data and functions explain.

[17-7-1. Performance overview]
FIG. 309 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a winning accessory controlled by using the scheduler data of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 309, on the game board 5 of the present embodiment, a logo character object 5001, a star character object 5002 (a left star character object 5002a, a middle star character object 5002b, a right star character object 5002c) and a board member 5003. Are placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged on the upper left side of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it drops (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the production is completed. Furthermore, the logo work 5001 can be moved vertically and can be vibrated vertically and horizontally before and after the movement.

The star role object 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star role object 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star role object 5002b is arranged on the center, and the right star role object 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star role object 5002 can be operated independently, and one or a plurality of star role objects 5002 operate at a predetermined timing according to the effect contents.

The left star role object 5002a moves to the lower left, and can move to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. Further, the middle starry product 5002b moves downward and can be moved to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c moves to the lower right, and can move to a position slightly lower right of the center of the game area. Each star role object 5002 may be stopped before moving to the final reaching position, or may be stopped after returning to the final reaching position to an intermediate position.

The board member 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The hook member 5003 can be dropped (moved) from an initial position (upper position) to an intermediate position and a lower position. Depending on the operation of the production button by the player or the lottery result of the hooked goods notice production, etc., it moves from the initial position to the intermediate position and temporarily stops, then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. The operation mode is set. Similar to the logo accessory 5001 as well as the logo accessory 5001, it is possible to perform an effect of vibrating vertically and horizontally before and after the movement.

Next, the flow of the notice effect executed by one symbol change will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 310, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star role product notice and a button (BTN) logo feature product fall notice will be described. It should be noted that the flow of the notice effect including the hook notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 320.

FIG. 310 shows an example of the execution timing of the notice effect executed in the series of variable display from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating the scheduler and the scheduler data used at this time. is there. In the series of variable displays shown in FIG. 310, the step-up notice and the button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the change. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the change, a group notice, a star role notice, and a button (BTN) logo feature drop notice are executed. The effect block data is defined corresponding to each notice effect, and the scheduler data for controlling the lighting of the lamp, the output of sound, the image output, the operation of the accessory, etc., which are performed in each notice effect, are specified in the effect block data respectively. To be done.

Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each of the notice effects will be extracted, and the control and the function configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” (FIG. 311) for controlling the lamp in the step-up notice will be described. In addition, in the production block data corresponding to the step-up notice, in addition to the scheduler data for controlling the lamp, scheduler data for controlling other output devices such as scheduler data for controlling the output of sound are also specified, It is executed in parallel when the performance is executed. Similarly, the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” (FIG. 312) that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” (FIGS. 313 to 315) that controls the operation of the star role object 5002 in the star role object advance notice, The motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (FIG. 316) for controlling the operation of the logo logo product 5001 in the advance notice of the button logo logo product will be described.

[17-7-2. Lamp control during step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed so that the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp changes stepwise according to the degree of expectation (step-up notice lottery result value). The step-up notice lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” belongs to the notice group 01, and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) “LMP_SCH02” as shown in FIG. 308.

FIG. 311 is a diagram illustrating the content of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that controls the lighting/blinking of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” is started, first, the function “SUBC:YKK_STP:TBL_LMP_STP” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up notification branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” and identifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the content of the step-up notification work area “YKK_STP”. The step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”.

The step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the addresses of the scheduler data are stored. It should be noted that SUBC_NON is an address for dummy call indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing an address for dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the notice is not won. .. SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the step-up notice corresponding to the step-up number (1 to 4).

In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” executes ramp tone data reproduction processing (KPLAY) by designating ramp tone pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step up, and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. The wait process of is executed. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinks in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH02”.

After that, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the next process of the calling source (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

The step-up notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will be described. Firstly, the scheduler data for the lottery results can be called with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the work memory contents (preliminary lottery result values in this embodiment) that are dynamically rewritten. is there. Depending on the contents of the notice, there are some cases where the range of the lottery result value will be several hundreds, and in a two-branch like the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and it becomes too complicated to manage corrections etc. Become. On the other hand, "SUBC" easily solves the above problem by using the work memory contents as an index. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of work memories and the number of call address tables for branching are one, but it is also possible to process complicated conditional branching by one action by making them both. Secondly, after executing the scheduler data called by "SUBC", it returns to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source, so that it becomes possible to execute the common scheduler data after the execution of the "SUBC" function. It is not necessary to describe scheduler data for the number of branches, and by describing only one scheduler data, the same processing can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements of the call address table for branching, the branching process may not be performed and the "SUBC" function may be ended.

That is, the function "SUBC" can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and call the selected scheduler data. In a simple conditional branch, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data for each branch destination, but with the function "SUBC", branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. , It is possible to easily add/change the production contents and improve the development efficiency.

[17-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in advance notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the change, and the advance notice is executed to the end by receiving the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similar to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) “LMP_SCH03” as shown in FIG. 310. Since it belongs to a notice group different from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, the notice can be executed in parallel.

FIG. 312 is a diagram illustrating the content of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is started, first, the function “KPLAY:LMP_SCH03:PTA_CUT_STA” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP:30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated lamp lights up (blinks) for 1 second based on the gradation pattern data “PTA_CUT_STA”. At this time, the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03” is used.

Then, in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of loops of the parameter set to 90 times. Since one frame corresponds to one frame, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the functions from "LOOPST" indicating the start of the loop to the function "LOOP" indicating the end of the loop are executed a maximum number of times. Therefore, the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB” is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. Button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operating state of the effect button, "0: button OFF" when the effect button is not operated, "1: button ON" when the effect button is operated. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. Further, the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” are rewritten by a program for button processing outside the scheduler data.

Button ON_OFF While “0: Button OFF” is set in the work area “YKK_BTN”, the button scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. It The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB” (function “LOOP”) of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” of the calling source. Therefore, when the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is ended.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" when the button cut-in notification button is ON in the button cut-in notification branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” is the function “SUBJ:YKK_CUT:TBL_LMP_CUT”, and the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” is the target scheduler work number “YKK_CUT” and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_CMP”. Is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in advance notice branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_CUT” stores the address of the button cut-in advance notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. It should be noted that SUBJ_NON is an address for dummy call indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing an address for dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the notice is not won. .. SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are scheduler data addresses for executing the lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area “YKK_CUT” stores the lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed. In the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4”, first, the lamp is turned on in red (the gradation data pattern “PTA_CUT_RED”) by the lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then the wait processing of 150 frames is performed to continue for 5 seconds. Let At this time, the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03” is used to drive the scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH03”.

Since the call of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is JUMP instead of CALL, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function "STOP", and the scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT" of the calling source returns. do not do. Therefore, the end of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is terminated when the "STOP" function included in the "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed and when the "STOP" function included in the schedulers "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1" to "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed 2 There is.

The button cut-in advance notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. Firstly, the scheduler data for the lottery results can be called with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the work memory contents (preliminary lottery result values in this embodiment) that are dynamically rewritten. Depending on the contents of the notice, there are some cases where the range of the lottery result value will be several hundreds, and in a two-branch like the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and it becomes too complicated to manage corrections etc. .. In "SUBJ", the above problem is easily solved by using the contents of the work memory as an index. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of work memories and the number of call address tables for branching are one, but it is also possible to process complicated conditional branching by one action by making them both. Secondly, since it has the format of "JUMP", different processing can be executed for each branched scheduler data after execution of the "SUBJ" function. Similarly to "SUBC", if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements of the call address table for branching, the branching process is not performed and the "SUBC" function is ended, in order to cope with the problem of the program. You may do it.

That is, like the function “SUBC”, the function “SUBJ” selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and selects the selected scheduler data. The processing can be transited to, and the same effect as that of the function "SUBC" can be obtained.

Also, the function "SUBJ" is different from the function "SUBC" in that it continuously executes the processing of the scheduler data of the call destination and does not return to the processing of the call source, so it is suitable for executing the processing alternatively. ing. For example, by using the function "SUBJ" when the contents of the effect to be executed differ depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to prevent the effect from being redundantly executed. On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the processing by the scheduler data of the calling source, it is possible to perform the common post-processing after the processing of the calling destination, and the processing can be simplified.

Therefore, by using the function "SUBC" and the function "SUBJ", it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and flexibly cope with the processing branch. Furthermore, since it becomes easy to add/change by simply changing the branch destination of the table format, it is possible to improve the development efficiency and to easily change the specification of the gaming machine.

[17-7-4. Motor control in the starry goods notice]
Subsequently, the control of the starry product notice executed in the latter half of the change in the present embodiment will be described. Reach occurs in the variable display of the special symbol, and when it shifts to the latter half of the variation, a group notice is generated and the star role notice is executed independently of the group notice. As for the star role notice, a plurality of types of star role products 5002 (three types of a left star role product 5002a, a middle star role product 5002b, and a right star role product 5002c) which can be operated by a driving body (motor) are provided. By operating, the degree of expectation of symbol variation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of the star role objects 5002 that appear, the higher the degree of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 310, the starry role notice of this embodiment is executed by driving the starry feature notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH02” (scheduler for left star role scheduler data). To be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the starry object 5002 is provided in advance, but it is also possible to use a common scheduler (MOT_SCH06 to 10).

313 to 315 are views for explaining the contents of scheduler data for performing motor control in the starry product notice of this embodiment. FIG. 313 shows the overall flow and scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” for controlling the left star role object 5002a, FIG. 314 shows scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” for controlling the right star role object 5002c, and FIG. 315 shows a scheduler for controlling the middle star role object 5002b. It is a figure explaining the data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3."

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is started, first, the function “SUBC:YKK_HYA:TBL_MOT_HYA” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star role notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified starry product notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA” and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the starry product notice work area “YKK_HYA”. .. In the starry product notice work area “YKK_HYA”, the lottery result value of the starry product notice is stored, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the starry product notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”.

The starry product notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" stores the address of the starry product appearance scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the addresses of scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for dummy call that indicates that no processing is performed. By preparing an address for dummy call, it is possible to disable the accessory when the notice is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the star star announcement, specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is only the left star star 5002a, and SUBC_MOT_c2a star star is a left star star, and SUBC_MOT_c2a star star is a star star. SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star role objects 5002.

In the present embodiment, a lottery result value indicating that a star role product notice for causing a left star role product 5002a, a middle star role product 5002b, and a right star role product 5002c to appear in the star role product preview work area "YKK_HYA" is displayed. "3" is stored, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when only the left star role product 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star role product notice is "1", and when the left star role product 5002a and the right star role product 5002c are operated, the star role product notice lottery is selected. “2” is set as the result value.

The scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_HYA3” first executes the function “MPLAY” corresponding to the motor regeneration process by designating the parameter “PTA_HYA_LEF” indicating the pattern of the appearance operation of the left star role object 5002a. At this time, the function “MPLAY” is executed by the motor scheduler “MOT_SHC02” in which the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is executed.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star role object 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” by the function “REQ”. The function "REQ" is a function for executing the scheduler data designated by the parameter by the scheduler also designated by the parameter. Here, the right star role object 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star role object 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03". Similarly, the function "REQ" is used to execute the middle star role object 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" using the middle star role object 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04". In the present embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function “MPLAY”) for operating the right star symbol 5002c and the middle star symbol 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star symbol 5002a. ing. As described above, the star data 5002 can be controlled in parallel by executing the scheduler data for operating the star parts 5002 by different schedulers.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a wait process “NOP:300” for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this waiting time, the left star role object 5002a operates in the designated manner. After the end of the wait process, the function “RET” is executed, the calling star star trailer motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is returned to, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is completed by the function “stop”.

Next, the control of the right star accessory 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. 314. The right star role object 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star role object 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is started, as shown in FIG. 314, the parameter “PTA_HYA_RGT” indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star role object 5002c is designated and the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed. .. Then, the weight process “NOP:300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time becomes the operation time of the right starry prize 5002c. After the wait processing is completed, the processing is ended by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

Finally, with reference to FIG. 315, the control of the middle star accessory 5002b will be described. The middle star role object 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the middle star role object 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04" specified at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is started, as shown in FIG. 315, the parameter “PTA_HYA_MID” indicating the appearance operation pattern (pattern) of the intermediate star character 5002b is designated and the motor regeneration processing “MPLAY” is executed. .. Then, the weight process “NOP:300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operation time of the middle star role product 5002b. After the wait processing is completed, the processing is ended by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the calling source.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star role object 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star role object 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star role object 5002b are set to the function "REQ". It becomes possible to operate each accessory in parallel by executing using. That is, the operation of each character can be executed in parallel without performing special control by executing individually defined scheduler data as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that, first of all, a single accessory operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when one scheduler performs multiple operations corresponding to the advance notice pattern, the number of combinations becomes enormous, and the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel with each other, it is possible to easily control by creating and calling the minimum number of scheduler data. In addition, in the present embodiment, an example in which three types of character objects are operated in parallel has been described, but if the operation of the character objects is not hindered, it is possible to execute more character objects in parallel. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessories in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects.

[17-7-5. Motor control in the case of logo accessory fall notice]
Next, the control of the logo accessory fall notice executed in the latter half of the change in the present embodiment will be described. The notice of the fall of the logo character is executed independently of the notice of the group and the star. The logo accessory fall notice is a notice effect in which a logo accessory 5001 imitating a game machine logo operates so as to vertically drop in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of a big hit being higher than usual. Is high.

As shown in FIG. 310, the logo character fall notice of the present embodiment is performed by driving the logo character fall notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” by a motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” (logo character scheduler scheduler data scheduler). Executed. It is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 with the common scheduler (MOT_SCH06 to 10).

FIG. 316 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” for performing motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of this embodiment.

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is started, first, the function “MPLAY:PTA_LGO_GAT” is executed, and then the weight process “NOP:30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_LGO_GAT”. Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used.

Then, in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of loops of the parameter set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO” is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo bonus product fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. It

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo bonus product fall notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, and based on the contents of the button logo bonus product notice work area “YKK_LGO”, determines the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify. The result of the execution lottery of the button logo bonus fall notice is stored in the button logo bonus notice work area "YKK_LGO", and "0: not executed" if the button logo bonus fall notice execution lottery is missed, the button Execution of the notice of the fall of the logo material When the lottery is won, "1: Execution of notice of the fall of the logo" is set. The result of the execution lottery of the button logo bonus fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo bonus fall notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”.

While "0: Not executed" is set in the button logo bonus notice work area "YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler when the logo bonus fall notice is not executed in the button logo feature drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" The data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO” (function “LOOP”) of the scheduler “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that is the calling source. Therefore, when the button logo bonus fall notice is missed, the loop process is executed 90 times, the function "STOP" is exited from the loop process, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. ..

On the other hand, when "1: Logo drop notice execution" is set in the button logo bonus notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the button logo bonus drop announcement execution lottery is won, the button logo bonus drop is performed. In the notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" at the time of executing the logo accessory fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo post drop button branch call address table. It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo bonus fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”, and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, and when the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF”, the effect button is operated. If it does, "1: Button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo bonus fall notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”.

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", the button logo character drop notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" is set to the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" when the logo character drop notice button is OFF. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_BGN:TBL_MOT_LGO” (function “RET”) of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” of the calling source. As a result, the process further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, even if the player wins the button logo bonus fall notice execution lottery, if no effect button input is detected during the 90 loop processes, the process exits from the loop process and the function "STOP" is executed. Execution is performed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” ends.

On the other hand, if "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button logo bonus drop notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" will be displayed when the logo bonus drop notice button is ON. The data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” first execute the function “COMMAND:COM_LGO_ON”. The function “COMMAND” is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command “COM_LGO_ON” is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the logo accessory 5001 falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_LGO_DOWN” in the same frame as when the command “COM_LGO_ON” is issued. The parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Furthermore, the function “NOP:120” executes a wait process for 120 frames (about 4 seconds). At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs the dropping operation for 3 seconds, and stops at the dropping position for the remaining 1 second.

Further, by executing the function “MPLAY:PTA_LGO_INI”, the logo accessory 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Then, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:90”, and the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position in the meantime. After the weight process is completed, the execution of the logo accessory drop operation is completed, so the function "MEMW:YKK_LGO:0" is executed, the button logo accessory notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", and the scheduler of the calling source is executed. The process returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN". As a result, the process further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". It returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO", but since the result of the button logo bonus notice lottery is rewritten to "0: Not executed", the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" that drops the button logo bonus is executed. However, the remaining loop number processing is performed, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is completed by the function “STOP”.

As described above, by internally issuing a command when dropping the logo role object 5001, it is possible to display an effect on the liquid crystal only when the logo role object 5001 is dropped and at the timing when the logo role object 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function “COMMAND”, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effect devices in cooperation with each other at an appropriate timing as needed, and to perform a more interesting effect. ..

In the present embodiment, the function “COMMAND” is used to display the effect on the liquid crystal in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. However, by processing the command issued by the function “COMMAND” on the program side, control is transferred from the scheduler to the program. By returning once, performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result in the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, processing that cannot be controlled by the function command can be performed. Further, the advantage of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that the command issuing timing is the processing timing as it is, so that time management and execution determination by the program are not necessary. Further, it becomes possible to interactively process an external input (button, jog dial, touch pad) by the user which is not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation and issue a command using the function “COMMAND” to perform the processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the function “COMMAND” has a function of transmitting a command having a fixed value. However, instead of a fixed value, a work area is designated and the contents of the work area are transmitted as a command. May be.

[17-8. Example of applying scheduler data (at power-on)]
Next, the scheduler data executed in the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variable display will be described.

[17-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 317 is a diagram illustrating scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, the main control board 1310 outputs a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Upon receiving the power-on command, the scheduler execution unit 5060 drives the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” with the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”.

When the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed, the sub internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub gaming state (sub internal state) is activated. Along with the progress of the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON”, a screen corresponding to the sub internal state is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc., as shown in FIG. 317. To be done. At this time, the main game state is a standby state. When the standby state ends, the game is started, and when the game ball wins the start winning port, the main game state and the sub internal state transition to the changing state.

[17-8-2. Power-on control]
Next, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 318 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing a command and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment, and a relationship between these configurations.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine is activated or when a predetermined event occurs in the game control in the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. It As described with reference to FIG. 298, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100 and analyzed by the main command analysis processing in the command analysis module. The command analysis module identifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process. Then, the effect control unit 5020 acquires the layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines the block control information (effect block number). Furthermore, the production block control unit 5040 acquires production block data corresponding to the block control information (production block number) determined by the production control unit 5020 from the production block data storage unit 5050. Further, the scheduler specified by the acquired effect block data is activated, and the scheduler data specified by the acquired effect block data is executed.

Also, when the function “COMMAND0” (FIG. 307) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110, and is analyzed by the main command analysis processing, similarly to the main command. To be done.

When a main command or a command output by the function “COMMAND0” is received, a command for executing control by the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis processing. The generated commands include a command to activate the scheduler and a command to control various effect devices (sub internal output command).

In the command for activating the scheduler, for example, the scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change of the game state in the main control board 1310 and the change of the sub internal state due to the progress of control in the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board such as the start prize Scheduler data for executing effects corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, in addition to directly starting the scheduler from the command, it is possible to start another scheduler by the function "REQ" included in the scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the effect device (sub internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the effect device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where it is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. The command for controlling the effect device is temporarily stored in the sub internal output command buffer, and processed in the order stored from the beginning of the buffer.

When the command for controlling the rendering device (command for sub internal output) is fetched from the command buffer for sub internal output, a module (a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600) that creates output data to the corresponding rendering device. , Driver module 5700). The created output data is stored in the corresponding buffers (liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, lamp data output buffer 5130, motor data output buffer 5140) as necessary, and is stored by being passed to each performance device. Drive data for each effect device is generated (selected) based on the value, and each effect device is drive-controlled.

Further, the sub internal output command buffer is provided in an amount corresponding to the required capacity corresponding to each module. For example, when issuing a command to a sound module, the value of the sound number is set in the sound command designation area in the area assigned to the sound module. Specifically, "COMMAND:SOUND_NO:PAT01" is set, and the sound command (PAT01) is set as a parameter in the sound number designation area (SOUND_NO) by the function "COMMAND". As a result, the sound module 5500 uses the value specified in SOUND_NO as a sound command, selects setting data corresponding to the sound command, and outputs the setting data to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1512.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of schedulers can be hierarchically combined and executed by receiving one main command by further activating another scheduler from the scheduler. As a result, various controls in the peripheral control board 1510 can be made into parts in units of scheduler data, and by combining schedulers, a plurality of types of effects can be mounted in parallel while realizing various effects controls. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine, such as improving the efficiency of debugging work.

Further, in the present embodiment, the command analysis processing can be made common by the command output by the function “COMMAND0”. This makes it possible to share the scheduler data selection logic and the function parameter determination logic by command analysis, resulting in the problem that a huge number of scheduler data combinations must be managed in a table. Can be suppressed.

Next, the startup of the scheduler and the execution of the scheduler data when the power-on command is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 319 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data at power-on according to the present embodiment.

As described in FIG. 318, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the main-command analysis processing analyzes the power-on command, and the scheduler The sub-state scheduler is activated by the activation process, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. In executing each scheduler data, a function "COMMAND0" is executed and a command is issued to create a sub internal state, and further, a lamp or a sound corresponding to the sub internal state is output if necessary.

To describe the scheduler to be executed in detail, first, the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH". In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO", and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_TAKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Then, when the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” is executed by using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” in the standby state. After that, the function “NOP:900” is executed to enter the standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO", and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_MDEMO” is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the maker demonstration state. After that, the function “NOP:300” is executed to enter the standby state for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO", and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_KDEMO” is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demonstration state. After that, the function “NOP:900” is executed to enter the standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" to transit to the next internal state, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_GOTO” is executed. Accordingly, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data “PTA_LAMP_GOTO” in the got prevention state. Further, by executing the function "SPLAY:PTA_SND_GOTO", reproduction of the sound is started based on the sound data "PTA_SND_GOTO" in the goto prevention state. After that, the function “NOP:450” is executed to enter the standby state for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO" and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_TAKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed. The gaming machine becomes in a playable state at this stage, and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI", state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO", state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO", state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" are sequentially It executes in a loop, and when the game ball wins and the fluctuation of the symbol is started, the loop is interrupted and the scheduler data for the fluctuation start is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 can be set only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND0" can control the main control board 1310 as if it issued a command. For example, the initialization command when the power is turned on may have a fixed parameter, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function "COMMAND0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. As a result, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[17-9. Application example of scheduler data (production 2)]
Next, an example will be described in which, instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo notice of fall of the accessory, the notice of drop of the kakuyaku is executed. Hakuyaku fall notice is divided into the first half and the latter half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, a control different from the control described so far is performed in that control is performed such that the parameters used for the first half notice are handed over to the second half notice.

[17-9-1. Performance overview]
FIG. 320 is a diagram showing an example of the notice effect in a series of variable displays from the start to the change of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and (A) is the effect executed from the change start to the end and The scheduler data for executing the effect and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the hook member 5003 in the hook member falling notice.

In the series of variable displays shown in FIG. 320(A), a step-up notice and a button (BTN) first half notice of a hook-shaped object drop notice are executed in the first half of the change. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the change, the group notice, the notice of the fall of the half-finished goods and the fall of the half-finished goods, which is continued from the first half, are executed. Scheduler data for controlling lighting of lamps, output of sounds, image output, operation of character parts, and the like is executed for each notice effect. The content of the step-up notice is as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320(B), the content of the notice for dropping the hook-shaped object will be described. As described above, the notice of the drop of the kakuyakumono is composed of the notice of the first half drop of the button (BTN) kakuyakumono and the notice of the latter half drop of the kakuyakumono.

In the first half of the button-crate accessory drop notice, which is the first half, the notice effect is advanced by operating the effect button. For this reason, even if the player has won the execution draw for the first half drop notice of the button-knife combination, unless the effect button is operated, the drop-effect of the knife-like product 5003 is not executed. On the other hand, in the latter half of the trailing hook notice drop notice, the effect is executed based on the result of the execution lottery of the second half notice notice of the knife strike, regardless of the operation of the effect button.

If the player wins an execution lottery for the button-cage accessory first half fall notice and operates the effect button at a predetermined timing, the knife-actuator 5003 falls to the middle position. Further, when the execution prize for the latter half drop notice of the board member is won in a state where the board member 5003 has dropped to the middle position, the board member 5003 drops to the lower position. That is, the hook-shaped object 5003 drops from the upper part (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the hooked product falling notice, and drops to the lower part (lower position) in the latter half. Incidentally, when the execution lottery for the notice of the latter half drop of the board member is won, the board will drop to the lower portion regardless of the position of the board member 5003. Further, when the notice of the drop of the hook member ends, the hook member 5003 returns to the upper portion (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 320(B), the effect of dropping the hooked product is executed in six types of patterns. More specifically, when the result of the execution drawing of the button-halting officer first-half fall notice is non-winning, it does not depend on the operation of the production button, and therefore, when the leading-knife officer half-fall notice is non-winning (Pattern 1). And there is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, since the notice of the first half drop of the button-knife accessory and the notice of the latter half drop of the knife-like product are non-wins, the kakuyomi 5003 is not dropped and is maintained without moving from the upper portion. In the case of pattern 2, in the trailing notice of the hook member, the hook member 5003 is located at the upper part without dropping, while in the trailing notice of the latter half of the hook member, since the winning lottery is won, the hook member 5003 is moved from the upper portion to the lower portion. It falls at a stretch.

When winning the execution draw of the button-cage auditors product first-half fall notice, the presentation mode of the button-cutter accessory first-half fall notice differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated. Therefore, four patterns of staging modes can be executed for the notice of dropping the hook-shaped object depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button and the result of the execution lottery of the notice for the latter half drop of the hook-shaped object.

If you win the execution draw of the button hook first half notice, you do not operate the production button, and if the result of the execution lottery of the hook second half notice is non-win, the hook 5003 will not drop. Remain on top (Pattern 3). If the result of the execution lottery for the button-halt auditors product second half fall notice is won and the result of the execution lottery for the latter half-fall notices is non-win, when the director button is operated, the hook symbol object 5003 Falls from the upper part to the middle, and remains in the middle until the end of the notice of the drop of the hook-shaped object (Pattern 4).

If you win the execution draw of the button half-effects first-half drop notice and do not operate the production button, and if you win the execution lottery of the half-game products second-half fall notice, you will not be operating the production button. The board member 5003 does not drop until the latter half notice of the fall of the object is started, and is positioned at the upper part, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the latter half notice of the latter part drop (pattern 5). If the player wins the execution draw of the button hook first half notice, operates the production button, and if the player wins the execution lottery of the hook second half notice, when the production button is operated, the hook product 5003 starts from the top. It drops to the middle, and further falls from the upper part to the lower part in the latter half notice of the hook-shaped object (pattern 6).

As described above, six patterns of effect forms can appear in the hook product drop notice of the present embodiment, and the scheduler data for controlling the operation of the hook product 5003 in the hook product drop notice will be described below. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 320(A), the button-coupling object first-half drop notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that controls the operation of the board-coupling object 5003 in the button-coupling object first-half fall notice and the latter half The second half fall notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for controlling the operation of the half prize object 5003 in the fall notice will be described.

[17-9-2. Various controls for the notice of the drop of a hooked object]
FIG. 321 is a view for explaining the contents of the button-knife-member first-half-fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that performs motor control in the button-knife-member first-half fall notice, which is the first half of the hook-and-mate object fall notice of the present embodiment. .. As described above, when the player wins the execution draw lottery for the first half fall notice of the button-knife accessory, the function "LOOP" accepts the operation of the effect button for 3 seconds, and when the effect button is operated, the hook-and-yarn object 5003 is operated. Execute the effect. When the execution lottery of the button-halt accessory first half fall notice is non-winning, and when the effect button is not operated even if the player wins, the hook-shaped auditorium product 5003 ends without operating. The motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used to execute the button-halves auditors first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”.

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is started, first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA1_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect when the game board side effect display device 1600 rattles the board 5003. After that, the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_GAT” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP:30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_NTA_GAT”. Specifically, the hook member 5003 rattles and vibrates.

Then, in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of loops of the parameter set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1” is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function “SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” uses the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA1” and the button hook member first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” as parameters. Executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the first half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" of the button-coupling material, and based on the contents of the first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1" of the button-coupling material, scheduler data to be a branch destination. Specify the start address of. In the work area "YKK_NTA1" for the first-half notice of the drop of the button-couplings, the result of the execution lottery for the first-half notice of the fall of the button-couplings is stored. If the player wins the "non-winning" button hook first half drop notice execution lottery, "1: hook half first half drop notice execution" is set. The result of the execution lottery of the advance notice of the button-coupling materials first half fall corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button-coupling thing first-half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”.

If "0: Non-win" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1" for the first half fall notice of the button-couplings, the button-coupling substance is selected in the call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" for the lottery result for the first-half fall notice of the button-coupling products. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” when the first half fall notice is not executed is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” are only for the function “STOP”, and the result of the button hook component first half fall notice lottery is “non-win”, so the scheduler data is not executed without executing the button hook component first half fall notice. Terminates the execution of.

On the other hand, in the case where "1: Hakama Yakumono first half fall warning execution" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1" for button Hakaku Yakumono early fall notice, that is, when the player has won the execution draw of the first half drop notice In the first half drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" of the button-knife combination, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" at the time of execution of the hook-shaped product drop notice is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" are the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button hook first half fall notice button branch call address. The table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" is used as a parameter.

The scheduler executing unit 5060 refers to the button-cage auditors first half fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be a branch destination based on the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. .. As in the case of the button cut-in notice or the button logo bonus notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and "0: Button OFF" when the effect button is not operated. When the effect button is operated, "1: button ON" is set. The operating state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button-crate auditors first half fall notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”.

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", the button scheduler has the first half fall notice button branch in the call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1". The data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1” (function “RET”) of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” of the calling source. As a result, the process further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if the player has won the execution draw of the button-cage auditors first half fall notice, if no input of the effect button is detected during the 90 loop processing, the process exits from the loop processing and the function "STOP" is exited. Is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” ends.

On the other hand, if "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button hook member first half fall warning button ON in the button hook member first half fall warning button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" Hour motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” first execute the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA_STA-MID” and issue the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID”. The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the board member falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-MID” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID”. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-MID” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the hook member 5003 to the intermediate position. Further, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:120”, and during this period, the hook member 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function "MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:1", "1" is written in the scheduler's blade position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", and the fact that the blade member 5003 has moved to the intermediate position is recorded. After that, the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is ended by the function “STOP”.

The first half of the notice of the drop of the kakuyakumono When the notice of the fall of the first half of the kakuyakumono is announced, the latter half of the notice of the kakuyakumono is started. FIG. 322 and FIG. 323 are views for explaining the contents of the Hakuyoke latter half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for performing motor control in the second half notice of the Hakuyoke fall notice, which is the second half of the notice of the Hakuyoke fall of this embodiment. is there. The motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used to execute the second half drop notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, similar to the button half first half drop notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”.

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is started, first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA2_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect indicating whether or not the board member 5003 is dropped on the game board side effect display device 1600. .. After that, the weighting process “NOP:90” for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of a big hit becomes large when the board member 5003 drops, the effect drawing is performed for 3 seconds to increase the player's expectation.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2”. In the function “SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed with the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA2” and the board late-fall drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” as parameters. .

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the second half of the hooked goods drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”, and based on the contents of the second half of the hooked goods advance notice work area “YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler data of the branch destination. Specify the start address. "YKK_NTA2" is the work area for the fall notice of the latter half of the kakuyakumono. The result of the execution lottery for the notice of the latter half fall of the kakuyakumono is stored in the work area. If the player wins the second half fall notice execution of the kakuyakumono, "1: Kakeyakumono second half fall notice execution" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the notice of the latter half of the Kakuyaku-mono is corresponding to the index (address) of each record of the result of the Katemono-yu late notice of lottery drawing branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2".

If "0: Non-win" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2" for the second half of the kakuyakumono, the second half of the kakuyakumono will be dropped in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" for the second half of the kakuyakumonoyu The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON” when the notice is not executed is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON”, the function “SUBC:SCH_MEM_NTA:TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” is executed, and the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the halberd part late notice lottery result NO_NK branch table at the time of non-winning of the hooked object “N”T. Branch based on.

When "0: initial position" is set in the "Hatch position information work area for scheduler" "SCH_MEM_NTA", the second half drop notice of the second half fall notice of the second half drop notice is displayed in the "Hakuyoke latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". The runtime motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored.

When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected in the undecided half-finished product trailer drop notice result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". It In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored. After that, the value of the scheduler hull position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" is overwritten on "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is terminated.

On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the first half drop of the blade post in the "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" table Preliminary notice/second half fall notice When not winning, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is selected.

In the case of the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” when the first half fall notice execution/second half fall notice non-winning, the weight process “NOP:120” for 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed. In the weight process executed here, as will be described later, a waiting time for returning the intermediate product 5003 to the intermediate position when it is in the lower position. Here, since the barrel accessory 5003 is originally at the intermediate position, it waits for 4 seconds.

After the end of the weight process, the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP” is executed to return the hook member 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Furthermore, in order to secure the operating time of the hook-up object 5003, a weight process “NOP:120” of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored by the function “RET”.

In addition, when "1: Hakama latter half drop notice" is set in the work item latter half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", in the katemono latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", Motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of winning the trailing fall notice of the accessory. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “SUBC:SCH_MEM_NTA:TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” is executed, and the value of the siding position information work area for the scheduler “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the branch tool drop notice 2 branch call address table ‘NTBL_YK’ based on the knives drop notice 2 branch call address table ‘NBL_YK’. .

If "0: initial position" is set in the scheduler's blade position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the blade member first half drop notification is not made in the blade member second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN". Execution/second half fall notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” is selected.

In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 323), first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA_STA-END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hook member 5003 drops from the initial position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as when the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the hook member 5003 to the lower position. Further, a weight process for 240 frames (about 8 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:240”, and during this period, the hook-shaped object 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued at the timing when the board member 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the board member 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:90”, and effect drawing is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Then, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for performing the operation of returning the hook member 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

Then, the function "CALLSUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is called to restore the hook member 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored by the function “RET”.

On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the scheduler's blade position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the blade member first half drop in the blade member second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" Preliminary notice execution/second half fall notice When winning, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” is selected.

In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 323), first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA_MID-END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect in which the hook member 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as when the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the hook member 5003 to the lower position. Further, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:120”, and during this period, the hook-shaped object 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Then, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued at the timing when the board member 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the board member 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:90”, and effect drawing is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Here, in order to match the timing of starting the operation of returning the board member 5003 to the initial position with the case where the board member 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position, 120 frames (about Wait processing for 4 seconds) is executed. This time is the time until the hook member 5003 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position.

After that, as in the case of “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed, and the blade member 5003 is returned from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function "CALLSUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the hook member 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored by the function “RET”.

When the hook object 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the function “MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:0” is executed and the value of the hook position information work area for scheduler “SCH_MEM_NTA” is set to “0: initial position”. The scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is updated.

In the notice of the drop of the hook product, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the hook member 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to specify the position of the hook member 5003 by writing the position of the hook member 5003 using the function “MEMW” in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the latter half. .. Thereby, the movement amount of the motor can be determined for each position of the hook-shaped object 5003, and by calling the corresponding scheduler data, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the operation result of the effect button.

Further, even in the returning operation to the initial position after the operation of the hook member 5003, the common scheduler data is called when moving from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

The function “MEMW” can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area at the time of executing scheduler data and referencing it at the time of executing other scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to specify a value that indicates the state that changes due to the execution of multiple scheduler data when each scheduler data is executed. It is possible to complete the process only by defining the scheduler data without creating scheduler data in. This makes it possible to minimize the required number even for scheduler data that requires different processing depending on the state, making it possible to efficiently create and debug the scheduler data and facilitate management. Further, in the present embodiment, a function for writing a fixed value is used, but by specifying a work name in place of a fixed value by a parameter of the function, data is passed from the program side and processing based on command information is performed. Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. The peculiar feature of the function "MEMW" is that even if the information including the function "MEMW" is not determined at the start of execution of the scheduler data, the processing can be performed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables effective time control and interactive control.

[17-10. Configuration example of scheduler data (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing the series of notice effects has been described above. The execution contents of such a series of notice effects are drawn based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the specific effect contents are drawn for each notice effect.

Hereinafter, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, a procedure for controlling the execution of a series of notice effects, and a basic effect related to the series of notice effects and the variation pattern (regardless of lottery other than notice effect The configuration of the scheduler data for executing a background effect and an effect related to the pattern effect which are rendered one-to-one with the variation pattern will be described.

In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop of the fluctuation is managed in block units (production sections) divided into predetermined constituent units. The block is, for example, from the start of the symbol fluctuation until the reach occurs, or until the symbol stops if the reach does not occur (first half variation), from the reach occurrence until the symbol stops (second half variation). ), from the stop of the symbol to the end of the fluctuation. In addition, a time corresponding to the variation pattern is assigned to each block, and the execution timing and the execution time of the notice effect within the assigned time are defined. The data corresponding to the time corresponding to each block and the basic effect to be executed are collectively referred to as block data.

In addition, the rule of block division is that, when comparing basic effects related to fluctuations in a plurality of fluctuation patterns, the same basic effect part is used as common block data, and parts with different basic effect of liquid crystal display are divided as block data. To do. Referring to FIG. 324, in the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variable pattern that stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variable pattern command in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern “10H01H” is the normal fluctuation 6 seconds. It is a loss, and a normal variation is performed for 6 seconds, and then a design effect of the loss is performed. Since the normal fluctuation 6-second effect and the loss stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, the normal fluctuation 6-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) and the loss-stop liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) are divided.

The fluctuation pattern "10H02H" is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the pattern effect of the deviation is performed. Since the normal fluctuation 12-second effect is also used for other fluctuation patterns, it is divided as the normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK), and the lost symbol effect is exactly the same as the fluctuation pattern "10H01H". As the liquid crystal effect block data for stop of loss, the liquid crystal effect block data for stop of stop (LCD02_BLK), which is divided into liquid crystal display blocks in the variation pattern “10H01H”, is used in common. Regarding other fluctuation patterns as well, similarly, the parts that have already been converted into block data regarding the basic effect are commonly used, and the parts that differ are newly converted into block data.

As described above, by performing block formation, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and basic effects such as all variation patterns and big hits other than fluctuations can be obtained by combining unique liquid crystal effect block data. It is possible to realize basic effects such as all fluctuation patterns and big hits other than fluctuations. Although it is important that the total amount of effect data to be created is significantly reduced, the biggest purpose of blocking is the liquid crystal effect that includes a specific basic effect when a specific basic effect is changed. The change is reflected in all fluctuation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, since the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is controlled, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data of the sound, lamp, and accessory in the present embodiment, but the basic data is different for each block data. The configuration in which the rendering scheduler data for rendering and the rendering scheduler data for preview rendering are combined has the same configuration as the sub rendering block data for controlling sounds, lamps, character objects, and the like. In addition, the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image/moving image material ID, display position information, enlargement/reduction information, rotation angle information, and color that are related to effects related to pictures and movies displayed on the background, and designs. It is composed of a function that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, such as information and alpha information, and the type and execution timing of the effect related to the notice effect that occurs in the block data. Information to show is embedded.

Further, in the present embodiment, the block data for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as the liquid crystal symbol block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variably displaying the identification pattern independent of the control of the other liquid crystal effects, and for example, even when the shape of the identification symbol is changed and variably displayed, a common notice effect is provided. It becomes possible to carry out with a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for displaying symbols has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for displaying liquid crystal. Further, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for notice effect relating to the symbol are combined for each block data is the same as the sub effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for the symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the variable display mode of the identification symbol is embedded.

FIG. 324 is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, which stores a combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variable pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 325 is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal pattern block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern that stores a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 326 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores a combination of sub effect block data corresponding to a change pattern command in the present embodiment.

The liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern is a table that holds information indicating a combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, with respect to the variation pattern number, a unique number that identifies the liquid crystal effect block data to be configured is held in chronological order. For example, when the fluctuation pattern number is “10H03H”, the first half fluctuation includes “LCD03_BLK” that indicates normal fluctuation for 12 seconds, the second half fluctuation indicates that “LCD04_BLK” indicates normal short reach, and “LCD02_BLK” indicates that the deviation has stopped. To be done. At this time, “LCD03_BLK”, “LCD04_BLK”, and “LCD02_BLK” are stored in this order. In this way, the configurations of the basic effect and the notice effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 324, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used for all the same effect sections. For example, when the first-half fluctuation is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the notice effect that is actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal effect block data can be realized with a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal effect block data can be uniquely specified for each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 325, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table for each variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating a combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. .. In addition, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination, the same effect time) that corresponds to the liquid crystal effect block data of the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Further, as shown in FIG. 326, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), like the variation pattern-based liquid crystal effect block data combination number table, shows information indicating a combination of block data for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination, the same effect time) that corresponds to the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data of the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Next, a procedure for executing the notice effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, an outline of a procedure for performing effect control based on liquid crystal effect block data, effect control based on liquid crystal symbol block data, and effect control based on sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 327 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation of 12 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the command analysis module 5200 analyzes the received command to specify the variation pattern number “10H03H”, and the effect control unit 5020 tells the production control unit 5020. Notice.

As described in FIG. 300, production control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and based on the determined block number, changes pattern number to “10H03H”. The corresponding block data number is acquired from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern, and the sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern. To do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to the respective rendering devices to the same number, it becomes possible to execute all the rendering of each rendering device in synchronization.

And the production control unit 5020 transmits the block data numbers for all the layers to the liquid crystal production block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub production block control unit 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is the sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 ( 5334), the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 is a normal fluctuation 12 second liquid crystal effect block data “LCD03_BLK” corresponding to the first half fluctuation, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332 is a normal fluctuation 12 second liquid crystal symbol block data “ZUG03_BLK”, The sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normal fluctuating 12-second sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK".

When the processing of the liquid crystal effect block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal effect 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data are activated to execute the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect content. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies a parameter according to the effect contents, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a DISPLAY list to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to draw on the liquid crystal display device.

When processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data according to the variable display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure of drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as the case of processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

On the other hand, when the processing of the sub effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub effect 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub effect block data are activated, and the scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes the effect data designation function for controlling the effect devices such as the lamp (“KPLAY”), the speaker (“SPLAY”), and the accessory (“MPLAY”). It is configured to execute the specified effect by sequentially executing the effect data specifying function in the defined order. The effect data designation function is transmitted to a module (a lamp module 5600, a sound module 5500, a driving device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and each module executes effects by various effect devices.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "REQ, REQF". It is possible to control various effect devices by executing the effect data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time. Furthermore, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", control by a command can be performed instead of a function. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data designating function for controlling the action of the accessory, the action of the accessory and the drawing are linked like the above-mentioned Haku auditors fall notice effect. It is possible to execute the effect.

Here, a procedure for executing the effect control using the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 328 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variation pattern-based sub effect block data control start processing relating to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

The effect block control unit 5040 selects the change pattern layer in the effect control unit 5020 based on the change pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the change pattern block data number corresponding to the change pattern. Control is started using the pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 326). The row position of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 326) is set to the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row index (step P7001). For example, in the case of the table shown in FIG. 326, if the variation pattern number is "10H01H", "0" is set in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row index, and the variation pattern number is "10H03H". For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table sequence index to “0” (step P7002). It starts from the sub effect block data corresponding to the first column of the designated row (variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row index). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 causes the scheduler execution unit 5060 to execute sub-effect block data control scheduler activation processing for each variation pattern (step P7003). As a result, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variation pattern-based sub effect block data control activation processing of the present embodiment.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 first obtains the number of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table from the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table based on the row and column index (step P7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to "0" (step P7012). As a result, the process is started from the first record of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table identified from the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data (step P7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table (FIG. 331(B)). Specifically, based on the sub effect block data number table row index, each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice (see FIG. 331)) is corresponded from the sub effect block data number table. Acquire sub effect block data. One or a plurality of scheduler data are registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background effect effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to a notice), and a scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data are made to correspond on the basis of the announcement lottery result or the like.

Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub effect block data number table row index when the activation of all the scheduler data defined in the sub effect block data is completed, and the sub effect block data number table row index changes pattern. It is determined whether the number of elements in the row of the different sub effect block data number table is exceeded (step P7014). When the number of elements in the row of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table is exceeded (the result of step P7014 is "YES"), the sub effect block data control start-up processing ends. On the other hand, if it does not exceed the number of row elements for each sub-pattern block data number table for each variation pattern (result of step P7014 is "NO"), the next sub-block data is processed.

FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variation pattern-based sub effect block data control update processing of the present embodiment. In the sub production block data control update processing for each variation pattern, in the sub production block data corresponding to each production (background sub production block data, sub production block data corresponding to a notice) that constitutes the sub production block data number table for each variation pattern This is a process for executing the next variation pattern-based sub effect block data when the execution of all the scheduler data is completed. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data control update processing is periodically executed to monitor the execution status of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 obtains the number of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table from the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table using the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row and column index. (Step P7021). As a result, the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) forming the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table is specified and defined in the sub effect block data. It is determined whether the scheduler being executed is being executed (whether the operation of all the schedulers is completed) (step P7022). If it is being executed (the result of step P7022 is “YES”), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub effect block data control update processing is ended.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all the schedulers of the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) defined by the variation pattern-based sub effect block data. Is completed (result of Step P7022 is “NO”), the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table column index is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is end data (“DATA_END”) Is determined (step P7023). If it is the end data (the result of Step P7023 is “YES”), a series of effects has been completed, and thus the variation pattern-based sub effect block data control update processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (result of Step P7023 is “NO”), the scheduler execution unit 5060 determines the variation pattern-based sub effect block data (next effect block data) corresponding to the next column data. In order to start the execution of (effect based on), the variation pattern-based sub effect data block control scheduler activation processing is executed (step P7024).

As described in FIGS. 324, 325, and 326, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By making the execution times of the respective block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the liquid crystal display scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, by performing blocking, if the same variation pattern, regardless of the combination of effects and the appearance of effects, the number of times of activation of the effect block and the scheduler defined by the effect block is always the same, Complexity can be reduced, and as a result, quality can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the effect control by one or a plurality of liquid crystal display schedulers and sub effect schedulers, it is possible to coordinate the operations of various effect devices, and a variety of comfortable feelings can be achieved. The production can be executed. Also, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, the scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices can be independently developed and checked for each rendering device and each block data. It is possible to improve the development efficiency.

FIG. 331 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of performing the basic effect of the variable display and the notice effect corresponding to the change pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and FIG. Execution time of notice production, (B) has shown the constitution of the sub production block data classified by fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data includes background sub effect block data and notice sub effect block data for executing the background effect and the notice effect. In FIG. 331(B), two types of sub-effect block data, background block data and notice block data, are combined, but the number of sub-effect block data can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 331, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern that constitutes the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” includes “SCH03_BLK” (normal variation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), and “SCH02_BLK” ( Loss stop). The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation until the left symbol and the right symbol stop. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK" corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol is stopped and the result of the variable display is definitely settled and the fixed symbol is displayed.

In the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 331(A), sub-effect block data related to the advance notice of step-up notice, BTN logo accessory fall notice, and symbol stop notice and background sub-effect Block data is defined. In the sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK”, sub effect block data for cut-in notice and group notice and sub effect block data related to the background are defined. Further, in the sub effect block “SCH02_BLK”, the notice effect sub effect block data is not defined, but the sub effect block data related to the background is defined. It should be noted that in the drawing, the execution of the notice effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of notice block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of notice effects are duplicated. The contents of each notice effect shown in FIG. 331 are as described above.

The effect control by each sub effect block data will be described below. As shown in FIG. 331(B), two types of sub effect block data in the variable display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” will be described.

In the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background, the normally fluctuating 12-second background sub-effect block data is defined. In the normal fluctuation 12 second background sub effect block data, the sub effect scheduler number and the sub effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12 second background are defined. The normal 12-second background sub effect block data is the scheduler data related to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is completed.

In the sub-effect scheduler data relating to the notice, the function "NOP", step-up notice sub-effect block data, BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data, and symbol stop notice sub-effect block data are defined. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined for performing sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the step-up notice sub effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the BTN logo bonus fall notice sub effect block data, the sub effect scheduler number and the sub effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo accessory drop announcement are defined. The BTN logo bonus fall notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the BTN logo bonus effect drop notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the symbol stop notice sub effect block data, the sub effect scheduler number and the sub effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notification are defined. The symbol stop notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notification liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is configured by executing the sub effect block data in combination.

By executing the above sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, effects by the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data are executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. Will be done.

At this time, during the period from the start of fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice), the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal notice effect from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect Until the start of, and from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the final liquid crystal notice effect (symbol stop notice) until the end of the execution of the variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub-effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the fluctuation pattern-based scheduler block by the function “NOP”, the scheduler is sequentially executed at the execution timing of each notice effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effect of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal notice effect at the designated timing. Further, the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data may be omitted.

A common time is defined for each notice effect as the execution time of the notice effect set by the scheduler data that controls the effect device such as the lamp, the sound, and the accessory. As a result, the time from the start of control by the sub effect block data to the execution of each notice effect is uniquely determined, so that the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

In addition, the time information at the time of executing the variation pattern-based sub effect block data is managed not by the start of the change but by a relative value from the start of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data execution. With this, when the same variation pattern-based sub effect block data is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data for each variation pattern has the effect start time from the start of the variation. Although different, the time value is relatively managed in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data, so that the processing can be performed without any problem. In the case of the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern, similarly, the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern is managed by the relative value from the start of execution, and similarly for the liquid crystal pattern block data for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal pattern block for each variation pattern It is managed as a relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” corresponds to normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the normal short reach background sub effect block data, the sub effect scheduler number and the sub effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. Since the normal short reach background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the variation pattern sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” is completed.

The function "NOP", cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and group notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data relating to the notice. The function "NOP" is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined for executing the sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice are defined. The cut-in notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. The group announcement sub effect block data defines a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the group announcement. The group notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the group notice liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" is configured by executing the sub effect block data in combination.

By executing the sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data for each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

Further, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" has the same number of sub effect block data strings as the variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK", but the number of sub effect block data strings does not increase or decrease. no problem.

Finally, in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK”, since no effect related to the notice is performed, only the loss stop background sub effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the loss stop background sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normally fluctuating 12-second background are defined. Since the loss stop background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” is completed.

FIG. 332 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data according to the variation pattern and the liquid crystal pattern block data according to the variation pattern of the present embodiment. As for the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal pattern block data for each variation pattern, the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is only different from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

Next, the configuration of the sub effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described in FIG. 301 as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal effect scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 333 is a diagram showing an image of creating a drawing data file in a step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to effect 4) by the video composition/motion creation graphic tool for the liquid crystal display step-up notice of the present embodiment. is there.

The drawing data file is created in step-up effect units and is composed of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. Also, as shown in FIG. 333, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the present embodiment in step-up effect units.

The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal notice production (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up 1 production is changed, there are four types of step-up notices as in the present embodiment. If it is feasible, it is necessary to change four drawing data files. Considering the work time required for changes and the risk of omission of correction, create a unique number of drawing data files for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the notice by combining them.

FIG. 334 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment. (A) shows the configuration of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of the step-up notice sub effect block data. As described above, although four types of step-up notices can be executed in the present embodiment, step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In the step-up notices 3 and 4, the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are executed at predetermined timings.

Explaining the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, first, based on the step-up notice lottery result value acquired at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined which of the step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed. It If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is non-winning, the process ends without executing the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, so the step-up notice is not executed and drawing is not performed on the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of step-up notice is step-up notice 2, Step-up notice The step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the next data to be executed is “DATA_END”, so the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 ends.

Further, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02, the weight for the time designated by the parameter is performed, and then the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed. Step up 2 After the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is completed, since the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is completed.

As described above, a plurality of variations of a single advance notice can be realized by combining the advance notice presentation scheduler data in the minimum configuration unit.

Next, the step-up notice sub effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 334(B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured to correspond to the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data in a one-to-one correspondence with each other in block configuration and execution time. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the effect devices even with respect to the combination of the variation pattern and the preliminary announcement lottery result, and it is possible to realize an effect with a sense of unity.

The step-up notice sub effect block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub effect scheduler data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub production block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the variation pattern-based sub production block data combination table “SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO”. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub effect block data in accordance with the data access order, it is possible to execute the basic effect and the preliminary effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. ..

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data to be executed at the same timing is defined to have the same execution time. The effects can be synchronized. Furthermore, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, thereafter, a predetermined operation is performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, simply by executing the corresponding block data based on the information that specifies the effect contents such as the variation pattern, the scheduler data that is hierarchically defined is automatically acquired and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to do.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be activated and the scheduler data can be independently executed by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, which leads to a leap in development efficiency. Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler analyzes the scheduler data described in a predetermined format and controls the rendering device. Therefore, even when the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic unit included therein) is updated, a common scheduler can be provided by installing a scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. The data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common scheduler data on different platforms, and it is possible to utilize software assets related to production control of the gaming machine for a long term.

The scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is implemented by software, the scheduler started at the time of executing the scheduler data may be stopped after use, and the memory use area may be released. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, it may be released when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the scheduler data is completed, or when the gaming machine is in a customer waiting state, it may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler.

[17-11. Modification of production block]
As described above, as a flow of executing the effect in the present embodiment, the main command is received from the main control board 1310, and the input command analysis unit 5010 analyzes the main command. Then, based on the analysis result, the effect control unit 5020 acquires block data numbers for all layers from the layer data table, and transmits the block data numbers to the effect block control unit 5040 as block control information.

As described above, the production block control unit 5040 is configured by the liquid crystal production block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub production block control unit 5320, and outputs the sound, lights the lamp, operates the accessory, and the like. The sub effect is controlled by the sub effect block control unit 5320. Further, the notice effect is executed along with the liquid crystal effect executed on the liquid crystal display device, and is controlled so that the sub effect is executed at a predetermined timing in the liquid crystal effect.

The effect block control unit 5040 identifies effect block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053) based on the block control information. In the production block data described so far, the scheduler data to be executed and the execution start timing of each scheduler data are specified. As shown in FIG. 334, when the processing of the production block data is started, the scheduler data is generated. Wait by the NOP function until the start of execution.

On the other hand, a modified example in which the effect control is performed by the scheduler data without including the function in the effect block data will be described. FIG. 335 is a diagram illustrating an example of effect control based on effect block data according to the modified example of the present embodiment. (A) illustrates an example of effect block data, and (B) illustrates an execution timing of each scheduler data. It is a figure. The target production in FIG. 335 is a battle advance notice production in which two robots fight, and the development robot and the chance production are executed according to the progress of the production by the robot on the player side, which is either preemptive or late.

Referring to FIG. 335(A), scheduler data, a scheduler for executing the scheduler data, and an execution start timing of the scheduler data are designated in the effect block data of the present modification. The data within the dotted line in FIG. 335(A) corresponds to the contents of the effect block data, and the item names in the upper row are described for easy understanding. In addition, for "implementation" on the left side, "⊚" indicates the scheduler data that is executed, and "-" indicates the scheduler data that is not executed.

Explaining each item of the effect block data, the “effect mode flag address” is information indicating whether or not the effect can be executed, and specifically, information indicating that the effect (scheduler data) corresponding to each line is executed (effect mode). This is the address of the area in which the flag) is stored. For example, when "00H" is set in the BTL_SEN area, the scheduler data of the same bank is not executed, and when "01H (effect mode flag)" is set, the scheduler data of the same bank is executed. .. In FIG. 335(A), “01H” (effect mode flag) is set when “execution” is “⊚” and “00H” is set when “execution” is “−”. When it is determined to "execute" after determining the consistency of the command analyzed by the command analysis module 5200, lottery of the production corresponding to the received command is performed, and the lottery result is set to a corresponding value (production mode flag). ) Is stored in the area specified by the “effect mode flag address” such as BTL_SEN corresponding to the effect.

The "start frame position" is the execution start timing of the scheduler data, and the "end frame position" is the execution start timing of the scheduler data, which is set in accordance with the frame position in the liquid crystal effect corresponding to the effect block data. The values of "start frame position" and "end frame position" are the start timing ("0 It is the relative time of the frame ").

"Scheduler" is the identification information of the scheduler to be executed. The “scheduler data” is identification information of the “scheduler data” executed by the “scheduler”, and may be an address or the like indicating a storage location instead of a name.

Explaining the effect control of the battle notice effect, first, the effect (scheduler data) to be executed is selected based on the variation pattern and the effect mode flag is set in a predetermined area. In the effect block data shown in FIG. 335(A), first, "battle first effect" or "post-battle offensive effect" is selected and either one is executed, and then "battle development effect" is executed. Whether or not to execute the "battle development effect" is determined. Finally, "battle chance production" is executed. There are multiple types of "battle chance effects", and it is determined whether any of the effects are executed or not executed at all.

When the effect (scheduler data) to be executed is selected, the scheduler data is executed by activating the scheduler corresponding to the effect to be executed. With each scheduler data, the effect is started at the timing specified by the "start frame position" and is continued until the timing specified by the "end frame position". In this modification, the start timing of the scheduler data is as shown in FIG. 335(B) in which the background is shaded while the effect is actually executed, and the background is white during the waiting time until the execution is started. There is. The effect block control unit 5040 manages the frame time from the start of the effect block data on a block-by-block basis on a frame-by-frame basis, and in the row in which “◎” is set for “execution” (effect mode flag is set). When the frame corresponding to the "start frame position" is reached, the scheduler to be executed is activated and the specified scheduler data is executed.

Explaining the flow of the battle announcement effect, first, at the same time as the processing of the effect block data of the battle announcement effect is started, the scheduler data whose "start frame position" is 0 (0f * "f" indicates a frame) is executed. Whether to accept or reject is determined. In the example of FIG. 335, the “start frame position” of the “battle first production” (BTL_SEN) and the “battle after attack production” (BTL_KOU) is 0, and the “execution” is “◎” (production. The scheduler corresponding to the "battle pre-production" (in which the mode flag is set) is activated, and the scheduler data is executed by the scheduler. At this time, the scheduler data of the “post-battle offensive production” for which the production mode flag is not set is not executed and ignored. The "battle-first production" includes a production by a lamp and a production by sound output. Note that the “battle pre-production” includes liquid crystal production, but the description thereof is omitted here, and only the control of the sub production will be described. The same applies hereafter.

In the lamp production of "battle pre-production," the scheduler "LMP_SCH01" executes the scheduler data "battle_pre-production 01". Similarly, in the production by outputting the sound of "battle preemption production", the scheduler data "battle_preemption 02" is executed by the scheduler "SND_SCH01". These scheduler data are executed in parallel on each scheduler.

When the time further elapses, the production block control unit 5040 determines whether or not the “battle development production” (BTL_HTN) on the 5th to 7th lines can be executed at the timing when the timer for measuring the time managed in the frame unit becomes “211f”. To judge. Since the effect mode flag is set in the area corresponding to BTL_HTN, the designated scheduler is activated and the corresponding scheduler data is executed.

The "battle development effect" includes an effect by a movable body (motor) in addition to an effect by a lamp and an effect by outputting a sound. In the production of the “battle development production” with the lamp, the scheduler data “battle_development 01” is executed by the scheduler “LMP_SCH02”. In the production by outputting the sound, the scheduler data “Battle_development 02” is executed by the scheduler “SND_SCH02”. In the effect by the movable body (motor), the scheduler data “Battle_development 03” is executed by the scheduler “MOT_SCH01”. The "battle development effect" is executed in parallel with the "battle preemptive effect".

Subsequently, the production block control unit 5040 stops the activated scheduler in order to end the scheduler data executed to perform the “battle development production” at the timing when the timer for measuring time becomes “251f”. Further, when the timer for time measurement reaches "360f", the activated scheduler is stopped in order to end the scheduler data executed to perform the "battle pre-production".

Note that the stop of the running scheduler does not have to be specified by the production block control unit 5040 as long as it is specified by each scheduler data. If not specified, the value of the end frame position does not have to be set in the effect block data, and the data structure can be simplified. However, in order to prevent a problem from occurring because the scheduler data has an error and the scheduler that should be originally stopped is running even if it is the start frame of another effect, the effect block control unit 5040 is used. It is desirable to have a double stop configuration. Further, when the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed for a predefined period, it is not configured to specify the stop of the execution in the scheduler data, and therefore the effect block control unit 5040 is set in the effect block data. It is necessary to forcibly stop when the end frame position is reached. In this way, the production block control unit 5040 stops the execution of the scheduler data, so that it is possible to use the same scheduler data even when productions of different periods are executed according to a variation pattern or the like. Development efficiency can be improved.

Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 determines whether or not the "battle chance effect" (BTL_CUP1, BTL_CUP2) on the 8th to 12th lines can be executed at the timing when the timer for measuring time becomes "361f". Here, since the effect mode flag is set in the area corresponding to BTL_CUP2, the designated scheduler is activated and the corresponding scheduler data is executed.

The “battle chance production 2” includes production by a lamp, production by output of sound, and production by a movable body (motor). In the production by the lamp of “Battle Chance Rendering 2”, the scheduler data “Battle Chance 21” is executed by the scheduler “LMP_SCH03”. In the effect produced by outputting the sound, the scheduler data “Battle_Chance 22” is executed by the scheduler “SND_SCH03”. In the effect by the movable body (motor), the scheduler data “Battle_Chance 23” is executed by the scheduler “MOT_SCH02”. After that, the processing is executed up to the end frame and the processing defined by the effect block data is ended.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 335(B), the production block control unit 5040 uses the timer for time measurement to start the scheduler for executing the scheduler data at the timing designated based on the start time of the production block data processing. And execute each scheduler data. As a result, the NOP function for adjusting the execution start timing of each scheduler data can be omitted, and the structure of effect block data can be simplified.

Further, by controlling the corresponding scheduler data to be executed in a predetermined frame in the liquid crystal effect, it is possible to omit the NOP function for adjusting the execution start timing of each scheduler data and the timer for time measurement. As a result, the liquid crystal production and the sub production cooperate more closely, the productions by the respective production devices are integrated, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[18. LCD production scheduler data production control]
Next, the details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data forming the liquid crystal effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data is composed of a combination of functions for controlling the effect target, like the sub effect block data. In the sub effect block data, the output of sound, the lighting of the lamp, the operation of the drive device, and the like are control targets, but the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is controlled by drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

[18-1. LCD production scheduler function]
First, a function (liquid crystal effect scheduler function) that constitutes the liquid crystal effect scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function is an instruction (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data that constitutes the above-described liquid crystal effect block data, and a command is sent to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a by the liquid crystal effect scheduler function. Send and execute the performance. Further, when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect, it is possible to change the attribute (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) of the object to be displayed by specifying the parameter.

[18-1-1. LCD production scheduler function]
FIG. 336 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect of the present embodiment. The outline of each liquid crystal effect scheduler function will be described below.

Each liquid crystal effect scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub scheduler setting.

First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is to set the liquid crystal display target by designating the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, for example. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display target.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ” set the display position of the liquid crystal display target by designating the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively.

The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX” specifies the X-axis coordinate position and the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY” specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target.

Next, a group to which a function for performing scaling (scale setting) of a display target (still image or moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling refers to, for example, setting the center of a display area that is designated to be enlarged or reduced when displayed on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or a moving image stored in CGROM, or converting the unit of coordinates. It is to be. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, the liquid crystal display target can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” belong to the scale setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target by designating the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values.

Next, a group to which a function for setting an angle when the liquid crystal display target is rotated and displayed is included will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and designating and displaying the angle, it is not necessary to store a plurality of rotated liquid crystal display objects, and an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. it can.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” rotates the liquid crystal display target by designating the X-axis value, the Y-axis value, and the Z-axis value.

Next, other functions will be described. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA” is an α setting process, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display target. The α value is a numerical value indicating the transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that completely does not pass the background color.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME" is a frame setting process, and specifically, sets a frame value which is a drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display target. The frame value is a numerical value indicating the interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a layer for displaying a liquid crystal display target object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display target object is displayed on the front side or moved to the rear side on the screen. For example, when the liquid crystal display target is the background, the Z index is set so as to be drawn on the back.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information on effect SW. The effect SW, which will be described in detail later, is information incorporated in control information for performing drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back to switch effect contents. , Perform another performance. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW" sets the effect SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM or the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets the frame effect SW information in the entire liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" sets SW information that defines special control information, which will be described later, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH” is a function for calling the sub scheduler. By defining a highly versatile process as a sub-scheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify the process and improve the development efficiency.

[18-1-2. LCD function scheduler function parameters]
Heretofore, an example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described. Next, the parameters specified when the liquid crystal effect scheduler function is executed will be described with examples. 337 and 338 are diagrams showing an example of the parameters for the liquid crystal effect scheduler function in the present embodiment.

The parameters of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function are managed for each group similarly to the liquid crystal effect scheduler function. The LCD function scheduler function group and the parameter group are divided into different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, and sub effect scheduler function.

Sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_ASC_ADALE" , Etc. are included. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

"AAD_FRAME" is a parameter for designating a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for designating the X-axis coordinate position and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS2” is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

“AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for designating the α value which is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. “AAD_ANGLE” is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display target, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY_B” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and is two parameters divided into a length of 8 bits.

“AAD_SKIP” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SKIP_B” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

“AAD_SCALE” is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area has one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter for designating the size of the liquid crystal display target on the XY 2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameter of the production SW includes “AAD_LCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_LCDSW”, “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM”, “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_KICKLCDSW”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” and the like.

“AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered production SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW” is a parameter for designating the number of the effect SW, and designates two numerical values each having a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

“AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_KICKLCDSW” is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit numerical values. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of footage setting parameters includes “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY”, “AAD_SEQFOOT”, and the like. “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter that specifies the index number of the still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter for designating a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_SUBENTRY" and "AAD_SUB" are included in the parameter group of the sub-effect scheduler function. “AAD_SUBENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the number of sub-scheduler function parameters and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SUB” is a parameter that specifies the sub-scheduler function number and has a length of 16 bits.

[19. Communication with various boards when executing the setting function]
As described above, in the gaming machine having the setting function, the setting function (confirmation of setting information (“setting confirmation”) and change (“setting change”)) can be executed when a specific operation unit is operated. The starting method of the setting function and the like are as described above, but the processing on the main control board side when the power is turned on and the timer interrupt processing will be described with another example.

In this embodiment, main control recognition information that is information for recognizing the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the ball information control board (payout control board 951) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and when the setting information is changed. .. The main control recognition information includes, for example, the chip ID number of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, the ball information control board determines whether the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310) installed in the gaming machine is legitimate, and if it is not determined to be legitimate, the ball information control is performed. The board can stop the operation related to the prize ball, prevent the tampering of the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310) and the like, and change the setting information on the main control board 1310. Can be reflected at an appropriate timing.

[19-1. Initialization process]
First, the initialization process (another example 5) in the present embodiment will be described. 339 and 340 are flowcharts illustrating the initialization process of the fifth example. In the initialization processing of the other example 5, processing related to the setting function is added to the initialization processing described in FIGS. 21 and 22 and processing related to the accessory ratio calculation is omitted. It is not necessary to omit the processing related to the accessory ratio calculation, and is omitted for simplification.

When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs a power-on process. Specifically, first, the stack pointer is set (step P10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In Step P10, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first. The power-on process corresponds to the process of steps P10 to P52.

Subsequent to step P10, the main control MPU 1311 performs wait timer processing 1 (step P12) and determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step P14). It should be noted that the voltage does not increase immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply suddenly stops temporarily), the voltage drops, and if it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. It is output and input to the main control MPU. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board.

Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step P12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step P14 is performed based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board. After the power is turned on, if the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is not output and the process proceeds to step P16.

When proceeding to Step P16, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch (FIG. 76) is operated (Step P16). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated.

When it is determined in step P16 that the RAM clear switch is operated, the main control MPU 1311 sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 (step P18), and the process proceeds to step P30, while the RAM is cleared in step P16. When it is determined that the clear switch has not been operated, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 0 (step P19), and the process proceeds to step P20.

This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a game relating to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1311. It is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the information, and is set to a value 1 when the game information is erased and a value 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps P18 and P19 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

When proceeding to Step P20, the main control MPU 1311 executes combination authentication processing for determining whether or not the combination of the main control MPU 1311 and the MPU of the sphere information control board is proper. The frame maker identification information output from the ball information control board is stored in the frame maker identification information storage unit of the main control MPU 1311 to authenticate whether or not the proper frame maker identification information is output. If the authentication is properly performed, the process proceeds to step P30. If it is determined that the authentication is not appropriate, the abnormality is notified using a speaker, a liquid crystal display device, or the like.

When the main control MPU proceeds to step P30, it performs wait timer processing 2 (step P30). In the wait timer processing 2, the system for controlling the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the liquid crystal control unit of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

When the wait timer process 2 (step P30) is completed, the main control MPU 1311 in the present embodiment determines whether or not there is an operation to change the setting information (step P3031). The operation for changing the setting information is not an operation for confirming the setting information, but an operation for changing the setting information.

When there is an operation for changing the setting information (the result of step P3031 is “YES”), the main control MPU 1311 advances the game after power-on based on the new setting information, and thus the storage area In order to clear the game information, the process after step P44 is executed.

On the other hand, when there is no operation to change the setting information (result of step P3031 is “NO”), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, and clears the RAM. The process branches based on the value of the notification flag RCL_FLG (step P32). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When it is determined in step P32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step P34). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Subsequent to Step P34, the main control MPU 1311 determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the later-described power-off processing (power-off). It is determined whether or not there is (step P36). If they match, it is determined whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step P38). Whether or not this backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, a checksum value (sum value) and backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing described later. Is set to a value of 1 when the power-off processing is normally completed, and is set to a value of 0 when the power-off processing is not normally completed.

When the backup flag determination process (step P38) is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is an operation for confirming the setting information (step P3038). If there is an operation to confirm the setting information (the result of step P3038 is "YES"), the setting confirmation information indicating that the setting information is being confirmed is set (step P3039). In order to prevent the game from continuing when the setting information is being confirmed, it is possible to control so that the processing relating to the game or the prize ball is not executed by setting the setting confirmation information. If there is no operation to confirm the setting information (result of step P3039 is "NO") or after setting confirmation information is set (step P3039), the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set for power recovery. (Step P40). In this setting, the value 0 is set in the backup flag BK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power recovery" means that, in addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, the high frequency is detected and reset, It also includes the state of returning after that.

Subsequent to Step P40, the main control MPU 1311 performs power-on command creation processing (Step P42). In the power-on command creation processing, the game information is read from the backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step P32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the game information is deleted, or in step P36, the checksum value (sum value) matches. If not, or if it is determined in step P38 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), that is, if the power-off process is not normally completed, the main control MPU 1311 has a built-in main control. The entire area of RAM is cleared (step P44). Specifically, the value "00h" is written in the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). In addition, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number, when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase the game information, when the thumb value does not match, or the power supply When the disconnection process is not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number based on the taken out ID code is fixed. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the numerical range is executed, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated (RAM clear operation, the result of step P32 is “NO”), the information is not normally stored in the RAM (RAM abnormality, the result of step P36 is “NO”, step If the result of P38 is "NO") and the setting is being changed (result of step P3031 is "YES"), the entire area of the main control internal RAM is cleared (step P44). Specifically, the value "00h" is written in the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). In addition, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number, when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase the game information, when the thumb value does not match, or the power supply When the disconnection process is not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number based on the taken out ID code is fixed. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the numerical range is executed, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

The area to be cleared in the RAM with built-in main control may not be the entire area, but the area to be cleared may be different according to each situation. For example, at the time of RAM clear operation, it clears all but the work area related to the set value and setting (including a part of RAM area related to game processing), clears all the area in RAM when RAM is abnormal, and changes the setting, You may make it clear only some RAM areas which are related to a game process. That is, all areas are cleared when the RAM is abnormal, but in other cases, the corresponding areas are cleared according to the operation content. For example, the work area related to the set value and the setting process is cleared unless it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. Try not to.

Further, in order to clear the area, other than setting "00h" in each area, an initial value which does not cause a disadvantage to the player or the game hall (hall) may be set. For example, if the setting value is "00h" and the setting is the most advantageous to the player (high setting), 00h is set when the RAM is cleared and the game starts from the high setting, which is advantageous to the player. However, since it is disadvantageous to the hole, the minimum setting (for example, "05h") is set when clearing the work area of the set value.

When the process of step P42 or step P48 ends, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there is a setting process, that is, whether there is a setting confirmation or a setting change (step P3048). If there is no setting process (the result of step P3048 is "NO"), the main control recognition information is notified to the ball information control board (step P3049). If there is a setting process (the result of step P3048 is "YES"), the process of step P50 and thereafter is executed without performing the setting for notifying the sphere information control board of the main control recognition information. In this case, in the timer interrupt process, the setting for notifying the sphere information control board of the main control recognition information is performed after the setting confirmation or the setting change is completed.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the storage area for storing the information to be transmitted to the ball information control board when setting the notification of the main control recognition information. For example, if the area for storing the untransmitted information is in the ring buffer format, the read counter and the write counter indicating the read position and the write position in the buffer are initialized (both are set to 0), and further, for SIO communication. Also clear the buffer. If information remains in these buffers, the first remaining information will be sent when the power is restored, so be sure to send the main control recognition information to the sphere information control board first after turning on the power. It is configured in this way. Upon receiving the main control recognition information from the main control board 1310, the ball information control board executes the corresponding process and transmits a response signal to the main control board 1310. From the setting of the notification of the main control recognition information to the reception of the response signal, the main control board 1310 is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state. When the response signal of the main control recognition information is received, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is released.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the interrupt-related processing (steps P50 and P52) to permit execution of the timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, when the setting for notifying the sphere information control board of the main control recognition information is set, the processing for performing the normal game is not executed until the response signal is received from the sphere information control board. It For example, it is determined by a timer interrupt process described later whether or not a response signal is received, and if not received, the process is skipped. With this configuration, it becomes possible to start the game after ensuring the activation of the ball information control board.

When the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main loop process. Specifically, first, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P54). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in order.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the power failure notice signal is input (step P56). As described above, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when the power is interrupted or the power is stopped momentarily, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board as the power failure warning. To be done. The determination in step P56 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When no power failure notice signal is input in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 performs a non-winning random number updating process (step P58). In this non-win/win random number updating process, for example, a reach determination random number, a variable display pattern random number, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number, a small hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning/judging determination (big hit determination) are updated. The random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, the random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, the random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-win/win random number updating process.

After step P58, the process returns to step P54 again, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and it is determined in step P56 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and the power failure warning signal must be input. For example, the non-winning random number updating process is performed in step P58, and steps P54 to P58 are repeated. The process of steps P54 to P58 corresponds to the "main loop process".

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is input in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 performs interrupt disable setting (step P60). By this setting, the timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Subsequent to Step P60, the main control MPU 1311, the starting opening solenoid 2550, the special winning opening solenoid (attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556), special symbol display ( 1st special symbol display device, 2nd special symbol display device) 1185, special symbol memory display device, normal symbol display device 1189, normal symbol memory display device, game status display device, drive signal output to the round display device, etc. Is stopped (step P62).

Subsequent to Step P62, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (Step P64). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total thereof.

Following step P64, the main control MPU 1311 sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step P66). This completes the storage of backup information.

Subsequent to Step P66, the main control MPU 1311 sets the watchdog timer for clearing (Step P68). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Following Step P68, the main control MPU 1311 enters a loop process of repeating a state in which nothing is executed. Note that the processing and loop processing of steps P60 to P68 are referred to as "power-off processing". In this loop processing, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not set to be cleared. Therefore, the watchdog timer times out and outputs a time-out signal, the time-out signal resets the main control MPU, and then the main control MPU performs the power-on process again from the beginning.

The gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 1311) is reset at the time of a power failure or momentary power failure, and performs power-on processing by subsequent power recovery.

In step P36, it is checked whether or not the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step P38, it is checked whether or not the power-off processing is normally ended. There is. In this way, by double checking the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the backup information is stored by fraud.

[19-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing (other example 5) in the main control board 1310 will be described.
FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the other example 5. The timer interrupt process of the other example 5 is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the power-on process shown in FIG. 339. In the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment, processing for confirming and changing the setting information is added.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not it is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (step P3070). As described above, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is a state of waiting until the response signal output from the ball information control board is received after the notification of the main control recognition information is set. When in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (result in step P3070 is “YES”), the main control MPU 1311 skips subsequent processes and ends the timer interrupt process. In the process of step P3070, not only it is determined whether or not the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is set, but also a process of communicating with the ball information control board may be executed. For example, when various signals transmitted from the ball information control board in the process of step P3070 are received and the response signal of the main control recognition information is included, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is released, and other In the case of the signal of, the process corresponding to the received signal may be executed. When the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is released, the launch permission signal is input to the ball information control board, and the ball can be launched from the hitting ball launching device so that the game can be started.

When the main control MPU 1311 is not in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (result of step P3070 is “NO”), the main control MPU 1311 sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P70). At this time, the value B set after the value A set in step P54 of the main loop processing is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Following step P70, the main control MPU 1311 clears the interrupt flag (step P72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from its initial value.

Subsequent to Step P72, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing (Step P74). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I/O port 1314 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

Subsequent to Step P74, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer subtraction processing (Step P76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) 1185 is turned on according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later. In addition to the time, the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric auditors product control process described later, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). When determining whether or not the sphere information main ACK signal indicating that the sphere information control board has normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes the value 0, whereby the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Subsequent to Step P76, the main control MPU 1311 performs a winning random number update process (Step P78). In this winning random number update process, the above-described big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and the small hit symbol initials, which are updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step P58 in the initialization process (main loop process) shown in FIG. 339. The random number for value determination is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small hit symbol initial value determination random numbers are respectively updated in the main loop process and this timer interrupt process to further enhance randomness. On the other hand, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), so each time the winning random number updating process is performed, each counter Will count up. For example, the counter that updates the big hit determination random number is an initial value update type counter, as described above, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value. The value is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination is counted up from the minimum value (value 0). When the counter for updating the big hit judging random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judging random number, the big hit judging initial value determining random number is updated by the hit random number updating process. At this time, the updated value is always the same from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that fetches the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU and updates the big hit determination random number based on the fetched ID code. The initial value derivation process for deriving the fixed value of is executed, and the derived fixed value is set as the initial value. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In addition, the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by this winning random number update process. Ordinary symbol hit determination random numbers and the like are the same as the above-described big hit determination random numbers updating method, and description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning random number update process of step P78 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the process related to the setting information (setting process) is being executed (step P3080). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting information is being changed or confirmed. For example, it may be determined whether or not the setting confirmation information is set.

When the process relating to the setting information is not being executed (the result of step P3080 is “NO”), the main control MPU 1311 performs the prize ball control process (step P80). In this award ball control processing, the award ball command for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and transmitting it to the sphere information control board based on this input information, or the main control board 1310 and the sphere information control is generated. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the ball information control board as main ball information serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening, a prize ball command representing 15 balls as the number of prize balls is created and transmitted to the ball information control board, or the ball information control board transmits this prize ball command. When the ball information main ACK signal indicating that the reception is normally completed is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board is created to control the ball information. Or send it to the board.

Subsequent to Step P80, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (Step P82). The sphere information control board transmits various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) which are divided into status indications. In the frame command reception process of step P82, when these various commands are normally received as the sphere information main serial data, the information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM as output information. To do. Further, the command normally received as the sphere information main serial data is shaped into a 2-byte (16-bit) command and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following Step P82, the main control MPU 1311 performs fraud detection processing (Step P84). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch is input when the jackpot is not in the gaming state (when the game ball enters the special winning opening), etc. A winning abnormality display command classified into notification display is created as a state, and is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step P84, the main control MPU 1311 performs special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (step P86). In this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for jackpot determination is taken out and coincides with the jackpot determination value stored in the main control internal ROM (big hit). Judgment whether to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter that updates the big hit symbol random number, and the probability variation hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control ROM. It is determined whether or not they match (determination as to whether or not a probability change occurs). Here, the “probability change” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than in a normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) described above, and are read from the normal time determination table, while the value 32438 is set in the high probability. A value 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation time determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing of step P86, whether the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value stored in the main control ROM beforehand match or not. When determining whether or not, the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first starting opening sensor 2104, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect are created, and when the lottery result is based on the second starting opening sensor 2511, the special drawing is performed. Figure 2 Create various commands related to tuning effect, and store it in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and to the special symbol display device 1185 to turn on the special symbol display device 1185 according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related items are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening/closing member is opened/closed. When the output of the drive signal to the winning opening solenoid is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) the special winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, the round indicator The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round display lamp is set so as to turn on the 2-round display lamp, and is stored in the output information storage area as the output information, or when the round is 15 times, the 15-round display of the round indicator is displayed. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp to turn on the lamp, and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or to the gaming state display to turn on or off the occurrence of probability fluctuation in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step P86, the main control MPU 1311 performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step P88). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol judgment is extracted and the gate information is stored in the gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Remember.

On the other hand, when the process related to the setting information is being executed (the result of step P3080 is “YES”), the main control MPU 1311 skips the prize ball control process (step P80) and the like to advance the game. Stop. Then, the setting change/confirmation process for changing or confirming the setting information is executed (step P3082). In the setting change/confirmation processing, the setting information is displayed on the touch panel or the liquid crystal display device 1600, or the setting information is changed from an input device such as a touch panel.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting process (setting change/confirmation process) is completed (step P3083). When the setting process is not completed (result of Step P3083 is “NO”), the subsequent processes are executed. On the other hand, when the setting change/confirmation processing is completed (the result of step P3083 is “YES”), the main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board (step P3084), and the processing of step P92 and thereafter is executed. At this time, the storage area (work area) temporarily used for executing the setting processing is initialized, and thereafter the setting processing is set to be not executed, such as canceling the setting confirmation information. After that, until the main control recognition information response signal is received from the ball information control board, the main control board 1310 is in a main control recognition information response signal reception standby state.

As described above, when changing or confirming the setting information, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board after the setting process is completed, while when the setting information is not changed or confirmed, the power-on process is performed. And transmits the main control recognition information to the sphere information control board (step P3039). As described above, in this embodiment, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board only once when the power is turned on. When the setting process is executed, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board only once after the completion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the process related to the setting information from being unnecessarily executed a plurality of times in the ball information control board, and to reduce the load at the time of starting the gaming machine, so that the starting can be completed quickly. In addition, until the main control recognition information response signal is received from the ball information control board, the main control board 1310 is in a standby state for receiving the main control recognition information response signal (step P3070). After that, it becomes possible to execute the processing on the main control board side.

Here, in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 341, the processing from step P80 to step P90 was skipped during the setting processing, but the switch input processing (step P74), the timer subtraction processing (step P76), and the winning random number update You may make it skip a process (step P78). Further, the port output process (step P90) may be skipped. Since the processing for the normal game is not executed during the execution of the setting processing, there is no problem in the subsequent game even if these processings are not executed. Therefore, the load on the gaming machine during the setting process may be reduced by skipping the process related to the random number, or the process related to the random number may be performed while the setting process is being executed by the employee of the game arcade. The random number may be updated so that the randomness of the random number becomes higher. Also, regarding the switch input processing and port output processing, the processing load may be reduced by skipping the processing during the setting change, or by continuing the processing during the setting change, The result of the switch input received during the setting change may be reflected immediately after the restoration, or the port output may be continuously performed so that the processing at the output destination is not delayed.

When the process of step P88 or step P3084 ends, the main control MPU 1311 performs a port output process (step P90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I/O port 1314, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, based on the output information, when various commands from the ball information control board are normally received from the output terminal of the main control I/O port 1314, the main ball information ACK signal is output to the ball information control board, or a big hit. In the game state, in addition to outputting a drive signal to the special winning opening solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the special winning opening, and outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the movable piece, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability variation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output information, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. It outputs various information (game information) signals relating to the ball information control board.

Subsequent to Step P90, the main control MPU 1311 performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (Step P92). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the transmission information is read from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified by special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified by special figure 2 tuning effect related, and various kinds classified by jackpot, which are created by the timer interruption process of this routine. Commands, various commands classified for power-on, various commands classified for general figure tuning performance, various commands classified for normal electric figure performance, various commands classified for notification display, classified for status display Various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as other are stored. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes.

Specifically, the main serial data is a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission. The processing of steps P74 to P92 will be referred to as "game control processing".

Following step P92, the main control MPU 1311 sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step P94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step P70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

Following step P94, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register (step P96), and ends this routine. Here, when the timer interrupt process of this routine is started, the main control MPU 1311 stacks the contents of the general-purpose registers on a hardware basis and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the initialization process from being destroyed. In Step P96, the contents saved in the stack are read out and written in the original register. The main control MPU 1311 sets the interrupt permission after the return in step P96.

[19-3. Data transmission to sphere information control board]
In the gaming machine described above, the transmission of data (main sphere information serial data) from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board is executed by the port output processing of the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the main ball information serial data includes information on prize balls (prize ball command) and information for confirming the connection state (self-check command), and also includes main control recognition information in the present embodiment. Be done.

Since the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms, the main ball information serial data is frequently transmitted to the ball information control board, but the total number of prize balls is not incorrect, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. It is not always necessary to pay out the prize balls in the order in which the winning holes are generated. When a plurality of types of winning holes have been won in a short period of time, for example, after the winning holes having the number of winning balls set to "4" have been won, the winning holes having the number of winning balls of "15" have been set. Even if a winning occurs in the (big winning opening), there is no problem in processing in the order of the number of prize balls “15” and the number of prize balls “4”. Therefore, if a situation in which prize ball commands are frequently created, such as a big hit game state, the load may be temporarily increased.

Here, in the present embodiment, the interval at which data is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board is set to be longer than the execution interval (4 ms) of timer interrupt processing (for example, 100 ms), and the number of times of communication is set. The reduction reduces the load of transmitting data from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board. Further, instead of generating a prize ball command for each winning, collecting the prize ball information for each communication cycle to the ball information control board reduces the amount of data to be communicated to further reduce the load. Try. Hereinafter, a configuration example of prize sphere data transmitted to the sphere information control board will be described.

FIG. 342 is a diagram illustrating an example of winning information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 342, the number of winnings for each winning opening including a gate is counted and stored as winning information. Then, each time the communication cycle arrives, the stored winning information is transmitted to the ball information control board. At this time, if the number of winning prizes is 0, it may not be transmitted.

When the winning information is received from the main control board 1310, the ball information control board calculates the number of prize balls by collating with the prize ball number table shown in FIG. 343. In the example shown in FIGS. 342 and 343, the number of winnings at the gate is 1, the number of winnings at the upper starting opening is 2, the number of winnings at the general winning opening 1 is 1, and the number of winnings at the general winning opening 2 is 1, The prize ball at the gate is 1×0=1, the prize ball at the upper starting opening is 2×3=6, the prize ball at the general winning opening 1 is 1×1=1, and the prize ball at the general winning opening 2 is 1×1= The total number of prize balls is 1, which is 0+6+1+1=8.

Further, the ball information control board may transmit the winning information including the number of prize balls without holding the prize ball number table. Further, even if the prize balls are arranged in a plurality of game areas like a general winning opening, the prize balls may be aggregated. FIG. 344 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the number of prize balls is included in the prize information, (A) is a case where the number of prizes is aggregated for each general prize hole, and (B) is a combination of the general prize holes. This is the case of counting the numbers. Thereby, it is not necessary to hold the prize ball number table on the ball information control board, and the main control board 1310 can centrally manage the prize ball number table.

In the example described with reference to FIGS. 342 to 344, the winning information is created by ignoring the winning order within the communication cycle. However, conventionally, the winning order can be grasped by sequentially generating commands during winning. It was Here, FIG. 345 shows an example in which the winning information is transmitted collectively for each communication cycle and the information regarding the winning order is added. FIG. 345 is a diagram showing an example in which the winning information is stored in the winning order.

In the example shown in FIG. 345, each time a game ball wins a winning opening, the order counter is incremented by 1, and a record composed of an order, a winning type (winning opening), the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls is generated. The number of prize balls may be omitted if it is held by the ball information control board. Also, since the number of winning prizes is usually one, it may be omitted. However, if winnings occur continuously with the same winning opening, the number of winning prizes may be added by the number of consecutive winnings.

In the example shown in FIGS. 342 to 344, 1 is added to the winning number for each winning and the winning information for transmission is created at the timing of transmitting the winning information to the ball information control board. However, the example shown in FIG. 345 Then, each record of prize information is generated for each prize, and the prize information generated for each communication cycle is transmitted. In any case, the transmitted winning information is discarded, and in the example shown in FIGS. 342 to 344, the winning number is cleared to 0. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 345, the transmitted record may be deleted.

As in the example shown in FIG. 342 to FIG. 344, by ignoring the winning order and counting only the winning number, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of winning. On the other hand, like the example shown in FIG. 345, it is possible to maintain the winning order by creating the winning information at the time of winning, and it is not necessary to create the winning information again at the time of transmitting the winning information. Since the winning information may be transmitted as it is, the load at the time of transmitting the winning information can be reduced. In addition, the number of records of winning information can be reduced by adding the number of winning prizes when consecutively winning the same winning prize. Normally, if it is a big hit game state, shoot a game ball aiming at a big winning opening, and if there is a winning opening that can be won only in a specific playing state (for example, probability variation state), a specific playing state If so, the game ball is shot aiming at this winning opening, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of winning information, especially when the number of winnings is large.

The configuration for transmitting winning information from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board has been described above. The information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board includes not only winning information (prize sphere information, prize sphere command) but also a game state signal and connection between the main control board 1310 and the sphere information control board. A self-check command for confirming the state is transmitted, and further, in the present embodiment, main control recognition information is transmitted at power-on and at the time of setting processing (setting change/confirmation).

Here, it is necessary to transmit the game state signal to the ball information control board at least every time the game state changes. Therefore, the same process is performed in the communication cycle for transmitting the prize information, the prize information, the game status signal, and the other information to be transmitted to the ball information control board are aggregated as game information in a common format to make the transmission process common, The control can be simplified.

FIG. 346 is a diagram showing an example of the game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board, (A) is an example of winning information, and (B) is an example of main control recognition information. In the example shown in FIG. 346, in order to distinguish the type of data to be transmitted, “data type” as a large classification and “type 1” and “type 2” as a small classification are defined. The items for distinguishing the types of data may be changed as necessary. For example, by defining the data types in detail, other types may be excluded, and further detailed classifications can be set. You may increase the number of items. Note that in FIG. 346, the names for the items for distinguishing the data types are shown as they are for easy understanding, but in reality, coded information is set. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 346, two types of data can be stored, and the size of each data is 1 byte.

FIG. 346(A) shows data corresponding to winning information, and the data type is set to "winning" (may be "winning ball") indicating that it is winning information (prize ball data). Further, the type 1 is set with the type of winning opening, and the type 2 is set with information for identifying the winning opening. At this time, one item may be left blank as long as only the information for identifying the winning opening is set. In the example shown in FIG. 346, two types of data can be set, and in the example shown in (A), the number of prize balls and the number of winning coins can be set. Note that the number of prize balls and the number of prizes won't actually exceed 100. Therefore, the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits and the number of prizes is set in the lower 4 bits. May be set. Further, if there is no winning, data indicating that there is no winning and that the number of prize balls is 0 may be transmitted.

FIG. 346(A) shows a case where five types of prize ball information (prize ball command) are transmitted in one data (command) transmission cycle, but more than one type (prize ball command) is transmitted in one cycle (for example, The 10 types of prize ball information may be collectively transmitted. On the other hand, if the number of data (commands) to be transmitted becomes too large, such as when a large number of prize balls are generated, the unit time for the transmitting side (main control board 1310) and the receiving side (ball information control board 110) of the data (command) is increased. Since the load per hit becomes high, an upper limit may be set so that data is transmitted in one cycle. In this case, the data (command) for the amount that cannot be transmitted in one cycle (the amount exceeding the upper limit) is transmitted in the next cycle. In addition, when a large number of prize balls are generated, such as during a big hit, a time lag may occur between the addition of the actual prize and the prize balls, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. Since the data (command) transmission cycle is about 100 ms for 600 ms, even if the upper limit number is temporarily exceeded, it immediately becomes less than the upper limit number, and the possibility that the player feels uncomfortable is reduced. ing. Also, although the firing cycle (600 ms) is fixed, the command transmission cycle can be set arbitrarily, so the data (command) to be transmitted is set as the data (command) transmission cycle is set shorter than the firing cycle. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag when the number exceeds the upper limit number.

FIG. 346(B) is an example in the case of transmitting the chip ID for identifying the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 included in the main control recognition information. Here, the data length of the chip ID is 4 bytes, and data for two records is stored. The chip ID is recorded in the main control MPU 1311, is defined by a specific register, and can be read from the program. In the present embodiment, it is possible to transmit data (commands) of a plurality of types of data in one cycle, but if the upper limit number of data (commands) that can be transmitted in one cycle is exceeded, Alternatively, a priority may be set for each data type, and data (command) having a high priority may be preferentially transmitted. For example, as described above, the award ball information is more likely to be transmitted in a larger amount than other data, but as described above, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable even if some time lag occurs. Therefore, data (command) of another data type may be preferentially transmitted. Note that the upper limit number may be transmitted in the order of data (command) generation regardless of the data type.

In the example shown in FIG. 346, since the size of the data is fixed, there is a problem that the number of records becomes large when transmitting a large amount of data. For example, if the chip ID included in the main control recognition information shown in FIG. 346(B) is 9 bytes, it is necessary to transmit data for 5 records, and all information such as data type is set in each record. There is a need. Therefore, a data length is set for each record, and the data is made variable in length so that it can be applied to data of many kinds of modes. FIG. 347 is a diagram showing another example of the game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board.

In the example shown in FIG. 347, an item indicating the data length is added, and the item indicating the data can store data of any size within the allowable range. In the example shown in FIG. 347, since it is not necessary to divide the data, the item indicating the detailed classification is reduced from 2 to 1. Since the data to be transmitted has a variable length and may have a large capacity, a check item such as a checksum may be added.

Next, communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board will be described. FIG. 348 is a diagram illustrating communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board when the game machine is started. In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the power is turned on and the main control board 1310 is activated, main control recognition information is notified to the ball information control board by initialization processing or timer interrupt processing (main control recognition information notification). ). The main control recognition information is information for identifying the main control board 1310 as described above, and the sphere information control board determines whether the received main control recognition information is normal or not. When the main control recognition information notification is not normal, for example, when the main control board 1310 is not an authorized one and an unauthorized MPU is mounted, the main control board 1310 is notified that it is abnormal.

Further, even when the time from the power-on to the transmission of the main control recognition information notification exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and the abnormality is notified. At this time, the activation of the main control board 1310 may be continued as it is, and if the activation process is completed during the abnormality notification, the alarm output may be stopped at that point, or the notification may be continued as it is. Good. In the case of continuing the notification as it is, an employee or the like of the game arcade may check the situation and determine whether or not to use the game machine as it is.

Upon receiving the main control recognition information notification from the main control board 1310, the ball information control board transmits a response signal (main control recognition information response notification) to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 receives the main control recognition information response notification from the ball information control board, the main control board 1310 enters a state in which the normal game can be started.

After that, the main control board 1310 periodically transmits game information to the ball information control board (game information notification). The transmission interval of the game information is 100 milliseconds as described above. Specific examples of the game information include prize ball information (prize ball command). Upon receiving the game information from the main control board 1310, the ball information control board transmits a response signal (game information response notification) to the main control board 1310. Thus, in response to the game information notification from the main control board 1310, it is possible to ensure that the communication is normally performed by transmitting the response signal from the ball information control board. When the sphere information control board notifies the main control board 1310, a response signal is similarly transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board.

Next, a case where an abnormality occurs in communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram illustrating a case where there is no response from the ball information control board to the notification from the main control board 1310 in the communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board of the gaming machine.

In the example shown in FIG. 349, the main control board 1310 notifies the ball information control board of the game information at a predetermined communication cycle, and an abnormality occurs when the response from the ball information control board has not been repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, the communication is cut off and the abnormality is notified. Here, the predetermined number of times is set to eight, and the game information having the same content is notified up to eight times. Even after the communication from the main control board 1310 is cut off, if the response signal is received from the ball information control board, it is considered that the normal state is restored, the communication cutoff is released, and the processing is restarted. To do. In the example shown in the figure, when the response signal is not received within one communication cycle, the notification is given again. However, the notification of the next cycle is stopped, the response is waited, and the end of the next cycle is ended. If the response signal cannot be received later, it may be determined that one communication has failed. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid missing the response signal.

Further, when there is no response from the ball information control board, the game information does not reach the ball information control board from the main control board 1310, and the game information is sent from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. The response signal may not reach the main control board 1310 from the sphere information control board even though it has arrived. Here, when the game information is prize ball information (prize ball command), in the latter case, there is a possibility that prize balls will be continuously paid out based on the same prize ball information. There is a risk of discrepancies in the number of prize balls issued. Therefore, in order to avoid such a problem, an example of transmitting the next game information without retransmitting the game information even when the response signal cannot be normally received will be described.

FIG. 350 is a diagram showing another example of a case where there is no response from the ball information control board to the notification from the main control board 1310 in the communication between the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine and the ball information control board. Here, similar to the example shown in FIG. 349, the game information is transmitted for each communication cycle, and the next game information is transmitted even when the response signal cannot be received. Then, when the response signal for the maximum number of transmissions (e.g., 8 times) cannot be continuously received, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the communication is cut off, and the abnormality is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of prize balls will be different when the game information is prize ball information.

Also, by retransmitting the same game information, there is a possibility that game information newly generated in the course of progress of the game will remain in the buffer and cannot be held, but this can be prevented. It should be noted that the following information is transmitted without re-sending only in the case of prize ball information in which a large amount of data may be created, while other information with a relatively small amount of created data is shown in FIG. The processing may be changed depending on the data type, such as retransmission as shown. In this case, the number of times the response signal cannot be continuously received (the number of transmission failures) is counted, and when the predetermined number of times is reached, the communication is cut off and an abnormality is reported.

[20. Edge buffer for fraud determination]
The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured so that a predetermined game value (prize ball) can be obtained by winning a game medium in the winning device. The winning of the game medium is detected by a sensor or a switch provided in the winning device, and the detection result is input at a predetermined interval and stored in a predetermined storage area.

Further, the winning of the game medium is provided with an effective period such as a period during which the winning device can be accepted. On the other hand, in order to detect failures and fraudulent activities, the number of winnings outside the effective period is also counted, and if the number of winnings outside the effective period reaches or exceeds a predetermined value, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a security signal is output to the outside. Or, it was reporting an abnormality.

As described above, when paying out the prize balls, it is necessary to detect only the winning within the valid period, while when detecting the abnormality, it is necessary to detect the winning of the game medium regardless of the valid period. Therefore, the input determination process for various signals input by the sensor or the switch may be complicated.

In the present embodiment, a buffer 1 (first storage area) that constantly counts and stores various signals input by a sensor, a switch, and the like, and whether or not the signal is within the valid period (or outside the valid period) And a buffer 2 (second storage area, fraud determination edge buffer) for counting and storing various input signals. As a result, most of the processing involved in the input determination can be made common by simply switching the location that specifies the area to be referred to according to the state when executing the input determination processing, and the overall processing associated with the winning determination can be simplified. Is possible.

[20-1. Buffer structure]
First, the structure of a buffer that temporarily stores information for executing various processes will be described. This buffer is assigned as an input information storage area to the RAM (main control internal RAM) incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. The input information storage area may be allocated to the RAM provided outside the main control MPU 1310a. The input information storage area stores various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a. In the main control built-in RAM, in addition to the input information storage area, backup flag and checksum information for determining whether the RAM contents are normal when the power is turned on, random value for various lottery, peripheral control board An area for storing a command to be transmitted to the 1510, the payout control board 951, and the like is allocated.

FIG. 351 is a diagram showing an example of a storage area assigned to the main control internal RAM in the game control by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each storage area includes a backup flag area, a checksum area, an input level data area, an input edge data area, a prize ball determination area, and the like, and also stores various random number values used for lottery, It contains an area for storing commands to be sent. In addition, each area is divided in units of 1 byte, and is an area of 1 byte or a plurality of bytes.

Next, the configuration of the input information storage area will be described. Here, the configuration of the input information storage area for storing the input information indicating the detection of the winning of the game ball to the winning opening, specifically, the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) will be described. To do. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing an example of a data area included in the input information storage area of the present embodiment, where (A) is the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), and (B) is the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). Show.

The input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) is composed of 1 byte (8 bits) as shown in (A), and the input information of the switch (sensor) corresponding to each Bit is stored. Specifically, Bit 0 is a first starting opening sensor 2104 that detects a ball entering the first starting opening 2002, Bit 1 is a second starting opening sensor 2511 that detects entering a second starting opening 2004, Bit 2 and Bit 3 are generally General winning a prize sensor 3015 which detects the entrance of winning a prize mouth 2001,201, Bit4 the count switch which detects the entrance of the big winning a prize 2005 (large winning a prize sensor), Bit5 is unused, Bit6 enters the exit The information is input by a sensor that detects a sphere. The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a probability variation area (V area of V-AT) in addition to the start winning opening and the special winning opening, and Bit 7 is a sensor for detecting passage of the gaming ball through the probability variation area. It is the input information by. The probability variation area sensor is a sensor that detects only passage to the V area and is not a sensor that accompanies a prize ball unlike other sensors. Further, the arrangement of bits may be any arrangement, for example, the bit 0 corresponds to the second starting opening 2004 and the bit 1 corresponds to the special winning opening 2005, and the sensors to be determined whether or not they are within the effective period are continuous. You may arrange so.

Further, as shown in (B), the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) is composed of 1 byte (8 bits) like the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), and the switch ( The input information of the sensor is stored. Each bit of the prize ball determination area corresponds to each bit of the input edge data 1 area, but the second starting opening (Bit1), the special winning opening (Bit4), and the probability variation area (Bit7) are valid. It is set to "1" (ON) only when the sensor detects it. That is, the input information from each sensor is set as it is in each bit of the input edge data 1 area, but among the bits in the prize ball determination area, a winning device in which an effective period is set for accepting a game ball (winning prize) The bit corresponding to (area) is set to "1" only when detected by the sensor within the valid period.

In addition, during the effective period of the second starting port 2004, the ordinary electric accessory is opened by the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, and the second starting port 2004 becomes a state in which the game ball can be received. In addition to the period until the accessory is closed (ordinary electric accessory opening time), an effective determination period considering the time during which the game ball stays inside the second starting opening 2004 after the ordinary electric accessory is closed (OFF delay, for example, 1000 msec) is set. Further, the valid period of the special winning opening 2005 is the same as the second starting opening 2004, in addition to the time for opening the special winning opening 2005 (the special winning opening opening time), it stays inside the special winning opening 2005 and the count sensor The effective determination period (OFF delay, for example, 1994 msec) is set in consideration of the time lag until the detection. On the other hand, in the probability variation area (V area of V-AT), the probability variation area valid period is set at the timing of opening the V attacker (big winning opening), and the validity determination period after the end of the probability variation area validity period is not set. ing.

[20-2. Switch input processing]
Next, a procedure for setting data in the above-mentioned buffer will be described. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a switch input process for acquiring information detected by the sensor and the like provided in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The switch input process is executed by the process of step S74 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

The procedure shown in FIG. 353 is an excerpt of the procedure of storing the winning information for the starting winning opening and the large winning opening in the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1, buffer 1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR, buffer 2). The same can be applied to the case of storing information such as the detection signal of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951. Also, in the switch processing shown in FIG. 353, an example of processing data for one port (1 byte) of the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the input port of the switch is 2 bytes or more, the processing for the corresponding number of bytes is executed.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the change from OFF to ON corresponding to each switch from the switch input port and generates switch edge information (step P6001). Further, the generated switch edge information is stored in the input edge data 1 area (step P6002), and the number of winning effectiveness determinations is set (step P6003). The switch edge information is data in which individual input information (switch input information) corresponding to each switch is collected in byte units. Further, the number of times of winning effectiveness determination may correspond to the number of switch input information included in the switch edge information, or may be the number of bits of the switch edge information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the switch corresponding to the winning determination is within the valid period (step P6004), and clears the update of the switch input information outside the valid period. Specifically, if the switch corresponding to the winning determination is not within the valid period (the result of step P6004 is "no"), the switch edge information corresponding to the winning determination of the input edge data 1 area is cleared (step P6005). ).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a changes the switch input information to be determined after clearing the update of the switch input information outside the valid period or when it is within the valid period (result in step P6004 is “yes”). In order to do so, the winning effectiveness determination count is updated by -1 (step P6006). Further, the valid period of the switch corresponding to the winning determination is updated by -1 (step P6007). For the switch for which the valid period is not set, the processing from step P6006 is executed without clearing the switch input information. In this case, the determination of the valid period may be performed by unconditionally skipping the process if the switch input information has no valid period set. It may be within the period.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the number of times of winning effectiveness determination has become 0, that is, whether or not the winning effectiveness determination of all the switch input information included in the switch edge information has ended (step P6008). .. If the winning validity determination of all the switch input information has not been completed (result of step P6008 is "no"), the process is executed again from step P6004. In this process, the timer that determines the valid period is updated after determining whether it is within the valid period. However, it is updated together with other timers by various timer update processes executed for each timer interrupt. You may do it.

The main control MPU 1310a has completed the winning effect determination of the switch input information for which the effective period is set among the switch input information included in the switch edge information, and when the number of winning effect determinations becomes 0 (step P6008). The result is "yes"), and the switch edge information reflecting whether or not the switch input information for which the valid period is set is within the valid period is stored in the prize ball determination area (step P6009).

As described above, by storing the switch input information in the input edge data 1 area as it is and by storing the switch input information in the prize ball determination area in consideration of the effective period, the area corresponding to the processing is referred to. The processing can be simplified. For example, in the prize ball control process (step S80 of the timer interruption process (FIG. 23)) executed when paying out the prize ball, when the presence/absence of the prize ball is determined, a sensor that gives a prize ball only within the valid period is used. When paying out a prize ball, the information in the prize ball determination area is referred to without the need for processing such as determining whether or not the prize ball is executed and determining whether or not to execute the prize ball depending on whether it is the validity period. The prize balls can be paid out only by this, and the prize ball payout process can be simplified. In addition, in the case of counting the number of game balls entering outside the valid period for the sensor that does not win outside the valid period by the injustice detection process (step S84 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23)), the input edge By referring to the information in the data 1 area, it is possible to detect the illegal prize by counting the number of prizes won outside the valid period (the number of prizes considered to be illegal prizes). In addition, it is possible to count illegal wins based on the difference between the number of wins detected by the input edge data 1 area and the number of wins detected by the prize ball determination area.

[20-3. Special winning opening process]
Subsequently, a special winning opening opening process for controlling the special winning opening 2005 which is opened by winning the lottery will be described. In the special winning opening opening process, when a game ball wins the special winning opening 2005, it is detected by a count switch (special winning opening sensor), and the number of game balls entered in the special winning opening 2005 is counted by the above-described switch input processing. It FIG. 354 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special winning opening opening process of the present embodiment. The special winning opening opening process is called from the special symbol/special electric auditors product control process (step S86) in the timer interrupt process. In addition, the special symbol/special electric auditors product control process, after each starting opening passage process is executed, the process corresponding to the special symbol/electrical auditors product operation number including the special winning opening opening process is called. In the special winning opening opening process, the number of game balls entered in the special winning opening is counted based on the information of the special winning opening (count) switch generated in the switch input processing.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the special winning opening winning number from the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) (step P6011). Specifically, the number of the special winning opening count switches is set as the number of loops, and 1 bit of the special winning opening count switch is set as the determination bit value. Whether or not there is a winning is judged from the value of the special winning opening count switch in the prize ball judging area and the judgment bit value by the number of loops, and the number of large winning openings is counted. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of special winning openings is less than the maximum number of maximum winning openings (step P6012). The maximum winning opening maximum winning number is a prescribed winning number for closing and then closing the large winning opening 2005 in one round. Even if a maximum of the number of winning game balls is not won, the winning hole 2005 will be closed after a predetermined period of time.

In the process of step P 6011, the number of special winning opening prizes is counted by looping by the number of the count switches of the special winning opening 2005. At this time, when the count switch is single, 1 is set as the number of loops, and the number of big winning openings in the prize ball determination area is counted only once. Further, in a configuration including a plurality of special winning openings, the number of loops is set by the number of count switches, and the number of special winning openings in the prize ball determination area is counted by the number of loops. In the case of a single count switch, the number of special winning opening prizes may be counted only once without setting as the number of loops, but the number of count switches of the special winning opening 2005 differs depending on the game machine. Therefore, it is necessary to provide two types of special winning opening opening processing for one count switch and a plurality of counting switches, so that the special winning opening opening processing can be commonly executed without affecting the number of special winning opening switches. In order to achieve the above, the number of loops is set to 1 even in the single case.

Regarding over-winning during big hits (beyond the maximum number of big winning openings and winning game balls in the big winning opening 2005), the value of the prize ball determination area is because the big winning opening 2005 is within the valid period. (Note that it is also possible to make a determination based on the value of the input edge data 1 area). On the other hand, an illegal prize other than a big hit (illegal prize to the special winning opening 2005) cannot be counted by the value in the prize ball determination area, and thus the illegal prize is determined by the value in the input edge data 1 area.

The main control MPU 1310a, when the number of big winning openings is equal to or more than the maximum number of big winning openings (the result of step P6012 is "no"), the big winning opening is over-winning, so the big winning opening is over winning. The flag is set to the large winning opening overexistence flag (step P6013). It should be noted that although the number of big winning awards is obtained from the buffer 2 (award ball determination area) and over-winning is determined, the number of big winning awards is counted in the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) to win the over-winning. May be determined. In addition, the number of big winning awards is continuously counted even when the big winning a prize 2005 is closed. Winning prize over Set the winning flag. After that, the main control MPU 1310a sets "00H" to the special winning opening opening state number, and then closes the special winning opening 2005 (step P6015).

On the other hand, the main control MPU 1310a refers to the value of the timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening when the number of special winning openings is less than the maximum number of special winning openings (the result of step P6012 is “yes”). , It is determined whether the opening time of the special winning opening has ended (step P6014). If the opening time of the special winning opening has not ended (the result of step P6014 is “no”), this processing is ended, and the acceptance of the game ball to the special winning opening 2005 is continued.

When the opening time of the special winning opening 2005 is over (the result of step P6014 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1310a makes a setting for closing the open special winning opening 2005 (step P6015). In the process of Step P6015, the data necessary for closing the special winning opening 2005 is set.

When the process of step P6015 ends, the main control MPU 1310a sets the operation of the special winning opening 2005 (step 6016). Specifically, the special winning opening opening/closing time data is acquired from the selected special winning opening opening pattern, and is set in the special electric signal in-operation signal output timer. A time (valid period) for determining whether or not the special winning opening switch is valid is set in the special power operating signal output timer. The valid period is the interval time between the opening of the special winning openings (the closing time of the special winning openings)-α. When the valid period is longer than the special winning opening closing time, a time longer than the closing period is set, so that a new value is set by opening the special winning opening 2005 before the timer becomes 0. Is set. At the start of opening the special winning opening 2005, the opening time corresponding to the special winning opening opening pattern is set in the special electric signal operating signal output timer. For example, when the opening pattern of the special winning opening 2005 is 1 to 7 rounds, 9 to 16 rounds is 29 seconds, and 8 rounds is 5 seconds, the special electric signal in-operation signal output timer is 1 to 7 rounds and 9 to 16 rounds. Will be set to 29 seconds before the start of, and 5 seconds will be set before the start of 8 rounds.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not to continue to open the special winning opening 2005, that is, whether or not it is the final round (step P6017). When the opening of the special winning opening 2005 is continued (not the final round) (the result of step P6017 is “yes”), this processing is ended. When the special winning opening 2005 is not continuously opened (the final round) (the result of step P6017 is "no"), the processing after the big hit is executed such as setting an ending command for setting at the time of ending. (Step P6018). In the processing after the big hit ends, the validity determination period (OFF delay period) corresponding to the ending time when the detection of the game ball by the count switch is valid after the special winning opening 2005 is closed is set. The validity determination period corresponding to the ending time may be the same as the time for each special winning opening opening interval, but may be a different time (for example, a time corresponding to the ending period).

[20-4. Timing chart (big prize hole)]
Next, the process of detecting the winning of the game ball of the special winning opening 2005 will be described in chronological order. FIG. 355 is a timing chart illustrating processing of each component when a game ball wins the special winning opening 2005 in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Note that the numerical information, time value, and the like described on the timing chart are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these values.

In the example shown in FIG. 355, as described above, the effective time is set at the start of the big hit. The valid time is, for example, the special winning opening opening time when opened, and the closing interval period-4 msec when closed. The fraudulent count value is set to a value (L) corresponding to the type of big hit, the initial value is subtracted sequentially when the entrance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2005 is detected regardless of whether it is within the valid period or not, and reaches 0. If it does, fraud occurs. The initial value of the fraudulent count value is, for example, 16×(10+3)=208 when the big hit of 16 rounds and 10 counts is 4, and 4×(9+3)=48 when the big hit of 9 rounds and 9 counts is 2. To do. In addition, in the case of a big hit 3 of 12 rounds (actually 2 rounds 5 counts), 2×(5+3) is set, and at most 10 rounds are won (10×1). The timing chart will be described below.

First, at time t1, there is a winning in the special winning opening 2005 during the valid period (winning sensor (count switch) OFF→ON), and the corresponding bit (big winning opening in the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1))). The count switch) is set to “1”, and similarly, the corresponding bit (big winning opening count switch) of the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR)) is also set to 1. At this time, based on the value of the buffer 2, "1" is added to the special winning opening winning number N. Further, the incorrect count is decremented by "1" based on the value of the buffer 1 (M-1). Further, the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted with a special winning opening winning command such as a special winning opening winning command, and the payout control board 951 is sent with a prize ball number command for the winning of the large winning opening.

At time t2, as in the case of time t1, winning at the special winning opening occurs during the valid period, and "1" is set to the corresponding bit (special winning opening count switch) of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2. Further, "1" is added to the number of big winning awards based on the value of the buffer 2 (N+2), and the incorrect count is subtracted from "1" based on the value of the buffer 1 (M-2). Furthermore, the command corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951 is transmitted.

At time t3, the big hit game ends, and the initial value (15) of the fraudulent count value is set. As described above, the effective time of the special winning opening 2005 is the time during which the winning detection is allowed in addition to the opening time of the special winning opening. The initial value of the fraudulent count may be set at the end timing of the big hit ending, for example, a special symbol variation waiting process (not shown) in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process.

After that, from time t4 to t6, an illegal prize occurs in which the game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 in a state other than the big hit (large winning opening not activated), and the buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data 1 area corresponds. "1" (valid, ON) is set to the bit (special winning hole count switch), while "0" (invalid, invalid, to the corresponding bit (special winning hole count switch) of the buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball determination area. OFF) is set. Then, the incorrect count is decremented by "1" based on the value of the buffer 1. The production command and the prize ball command are transmitted based on the value of the buffer 2, but at this time, since the value of the buffer 2 is “0” (invalid, OFF), if the winning is not proper as described above, Will not send these commands.

At time t8, an illegal prize is further generated, and the illegal count reaches “0” by subtracting 1 from the illegal count. Thereby, the output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (30 seconds output). Further, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start the illegality notification. Also in this case, the prize ball command is not transmitted. Note that either the injustice notification or the security signal may be output.

Further, at time t9, the incorrect count number is set to 1. As a result, even when the illegal prize is continuously generated, it is possible to continuously output the security signal (external output signal) and inform the illegality. The time t8 and the time t9 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

At time t10, an illegal prize is further generated, and the illegal count is decremented by "1". Since the incorrect count is set to "1" at time t9, the incorrect count becomes "0" again, and the re-output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (30 seconds output). Further, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start the false notification again. If an illegal prize is detected again while the security signal is being output, the output time is reset (extended) while the security signal is being output. Subsequently, at time t11, the incorrect count number is set to "1" again. The processes at time t10 and time t11 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

After that, at time t12, the result of the lottery is a big hit, and the valid time and the fraudulent count number during the big hit are set to the initial value (L). At time t13, as in the case of time t2, the winning of the special winning opening occurs during the valid period, and “1” is set to the corresponding bit (big winning opening count switch) of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2. Then, "1" is added to the number of big winning awards based on the value of the buffer 2 (1), and the incorrect count is subtracted "1" based on the value of the buffer 1 (L-1). Furthermore, a prize ball command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and a production command is sent to the payout control board 951.

In the gaming machine as described above, a big winning hole that pays out a prize ball according to the result of variable display of symbols by lottery based on the fact that the game ball (game medium) is received (passed) in the starting port (starting region) 2005 (game medium receiving means) becomes able to receive the game ball (game value giving means). The game ball received by the count switch (special winning hole sensor, game medium detecting means) provided in the special winning opening 2005 is detected and stored in the input information storage area (game medium detecting information storing means). In the input information storage area, a buffer 1 (first storage means) that always stores input information (game medium detection information) when a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2005, and a result of variable display of symbols (lottery result) The buffer 2 (second storage means) for storing the input information (game medium detection information) when the game ball is received during the valid period (predetermined period) based on (1) is assigned. With this configuration, it is possible to refer to the buffer 2 when paying out the award ball, detect the illegal prize (abnormality occurrence) by referring to the buffer 1 (and the buffer 2), and count the number of illegal prizes. Becomes

[20-5. Timing chart (second starting port)]
The case where the game ball wins the big winning opening 2005 has been described above. Next, a process of detecting a winning of a game ball of the second starting opening 2004 provided with an ordinary electric accessory will be described in chronological order. FIG. 356 is a timing chart illustrating processing of each component when a game ball wins a second starting opening 2004 provided with an ordinary electric accessory in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Note that the numerical information, time value, and the like described on the timing chart are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, the effective time is set with the start of the opening of the ordinary electric accessory. The effective time is, for example, the operating time (=opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory. Also, an initial value of the fraud count (for example, "15") is set. The initial value of the fraudulent count is, for example, the maximum prize number +α when the normal electric auditors product is activated.

At time t2, a prize is generated in the second starting opening 2004 during the valid period, and the corresponding bit (second starting opening switch) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) is generated. Set “1”. Further, “1” is added to the number N of reserved memories based on the value of the buffer 2, and the incorrect count is subtracted “1” based on the value of the buffer 1. Then, the lottery based on the occurrence of the winning is executed, and based on the lottery result and the increase in the number of holdings, various effect commands (for example, a prefetch command and a command to increase the number of holdings) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, the prize ball command corresponding to the winning of the second starting opening 2004 is transmitted to the payout control board 951. At time t3 as well, a prize is given to the second starting opening 2004 during the valid period, so that a normal prize is processed in the same manner as at time t2.

At time t4, the valid time for accepting the game ball through the second starting opening 2004 has passed (finished), and the initial value of the fraud count value (fraud determination number: “10”) is set. As described above, the valid time for accepting the game ball in the second starting port 2004 is, in addition to the operating time of the ordinary electric auditors, the time during which the ordinary electric auditors are allowed to detect the winning after the ordinary electric auditors are closed. There is. Although the number of fraud determinations is set to different values when the ordinary electric auditors are opened and after it is closed, they may be the same, or when the ordinary electric auditors are opened, a larger value than that after the closure is set. You may set it. In addition, when there are a plurality of opening times for the ordinary electric auditors, the number of illegal prizes may be switched according to the opening time. For example, the number of fraudulent prizes is set to 3 for short opening and 15 for long opening (or opening a plurality of times).

After that, at times t5 to t8, the corresponding ball (second starting opening switch) of the buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data 1 area is caused by an illegal prize in which the game ball wins the second starting opening 2004 when the normal electric accessory is not operated. ) Is set to "1" (valid, ON), and the corresponding bit (second starting opening switch) of the buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball determination area is set to "0" (invalid, OFF). Then, the incorrect count is subtracted by "1" based on the buffer 1. At this time, since the injustice is determined based on the value of the buffer 1, the effect command and the prize ball command are not transmitted when the winning is not proper. That is, when the winning in the second starting opening 2004 is determined to be valid, the process is executed based on the value of the buffer 2, and when the fraud is determined (the fraud count is counted), the value of the buffer 1 is determined. The process is executed based on.

As described above, when the winning (normal winning) to the second starting opening 2004 occurs within the valid period, the value of the corresponding bit (second starting opening switch) of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 is “1”. The various commands are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951. In addition, when a winning in the second starting opening 2004 occurs outside the valid period, only the corresponding bit value of the buffer 1 is set to “1”, and various commands transmitted in the normal case are transmitted. Without updating the fraud count. Instead of updating the incorrect count when setting the value of each buffer, the incorrect count may be updated based on the value of each buffer after updating the value of each buffer. As a result, the module that updates the value of each buffer and the module that updates the incorrect count can be made independent, and the processing from the switch input to the setting of the corresponding buffer value can be made common. The incorrect count update based on the value of each buffer may be performed, for example, except when the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are both “1”, or the corresponding bit value of the buffer 1 is It may be performed when “1” and the value of the corresponding bit in the buffer 2 is “0”.

At time t9, an illegal prize is further generated, and the illegal count reaches “0” by subtracting “1” from the illegal count. Thereby, the output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (30 seconds output). Further, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start the illegality notification. Also in this case, the prize ball command is not transmitted. Note that either the injustice notification or the security signal may be output.

Further, at time t10, the incorrect count number is set to "1". As a result, even if the illegal prize is continuously generated, the security signal (external output signal) can be output and the notification can be made immediately when the illegal prize is generated. It is not always necessary to set the fraud count number to “1”, but it is desirable to set a value smaller than the initial value (“15”) so that it can be recognized that fraudulent winning continues. In addition, a value larger than "1" may be set in order to prevent frequent fraud notifications even though the fraud is not fraudulent due to false detection of noise or the like. The time t9 and the time t10 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

At time t11, a fraudulent prize is further generated, and the fraud count is decremented by "1". Since the illegal count is set to "1" at time t10, the illegal count becomes "0" again, and the re-output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (30 seconds output). Further, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to start the false notification again. If an illegal prize is detected again while the security signal is being output, the output time is reset while the security signal is being output. Then, at time t12, the fraud count number is set to "1" again. The processes at time t11 and time t12 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

After that, at time t13, the valid time is set with the opening of the ordinary electric accessory, as at time t1. The effective time is, for example, the operating time (=opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory. Also, an initial value of the fraud count (for example, "15") is set.

At time t14, as in the case of time t2, the winning to the second starting opening 2004 occurs during the valid period, and the corresponding bit (second starting opening switch) of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 is set to “1”. “1” is added to the number N of reserved storages based on the value of the buffer 2, and “1” is subtracted from the incorrect count based on the value of the buffer 1. Then, various effect commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as the number of holdings increases. Furthermore, the prize ball command corresponding to the winning of the second starting opening 2004 is transmitted to the payout control board 951. At time t15, similarly to time t4, the valid time in which the game ball in the second starting opening 2004 can be accepted has elapsed, and the initial value (“10”) of the incorrect count value is set.

Since the first starting port 2003 can always accept the game ball, when the game ball is won, "1" is directly set to the bit0 of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area). It is sufficient to set it, and it is not necessary to count the fraud count. That is, a winning opening having a valid period, such as a starting opening or a big winning opening, is set in the buffer 2 depending on whether or not it is an illegal winning, and a winning opening that can always be accepted is stored in the buffer 1. The contents may be set in the buffer 2 as they are, or the buffer 1 may be referred to as a reference destination.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when a game ball (game medium) enters the starting opening, a lottery is executed based on the occurrence of a prize. The lottery may be executed only when a winning occurs within the valid period (in the case of normal winning), but regardless of whether the winning is within the valid period or outside the valid period, the buffer 1 and the buffer Whether or not to execute the lottery may be determined based on the value of the corresponding bit of 2. That is, after setting the corresponding bit value of each buffer, the lottery is executed by referring to the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 without determining whether or not the winning is within the valid period. .. Hereinafter, a modified example in which the lottery is executed based on the value set in each buffer will be described.

First, when the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different from each other, a lottery is not performed as an invalid winning due to occurrence of some abnormality (the abnormality is likely to occur) A dedicated command may be transmitted to the control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives this dedicated command, it can notify that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the winning. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the occurrence of injustice is notified when multiple winnings occur outside the effective period, when the injustice count reaches “0”, a command different from this dedicated command May be transmitted to clearly notify the occurrence of abnormality. Further, the dedicated command may include the value of the fraud count. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the fraud count is “0”, and when the fraud count is “0”, It is sufficient to clearly notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, one of the buffers may be prioritized, and the lottery may be executed when the corresponding bit value of the prioritized buffer is set to "1". For example, importance is placed on the effectiveness of winning, and the lottery is executed based on the value of the buffer 2 (priority is given to the value of the buffer 2). On the other hand, the fact that the game ball has won the winning opening may be emphasized, and the lottery may be executed based on the value of the buffer 1 (priority to the value of the buffer 1). At this time, a dedicated command indicating that the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Abnormality may be notified that an abnormality has occurred when the dedicated command is continuously received a predetermined number of times or more, or when the dedicated command is received a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period.

Also, the buffer to be prioritized may be determined at the time of executing the lottery process by a parameter or the like. For example, a table containing information designating a priority buffer is held in advance, the table is referred to when the lottery process is executed, and the priority buffer is specified. As a result, by changing the data value of the table, it is possible to switch the priority buffer without modifying the program code. With this configuration, it is possible to use a common program code even when different types of buffers have different priorities, thereby increasing the versatility of the program and improving the development efficiency. ..

Further, the procedure for designating the priority buffer will be described. At the start of execution of the lottery process, the head address of the table storing the data value indicating the priority buffer is stored in a predetermined register. The table is specified from the address stored in the predetermined register, necessary information is fetched, and the priority buffer is specified. The information stored in the table stores the address of the buffer 1 when the lottery is executed based on the value of the buffer 1, and the address of the buffer 2 when the lottery is executed based on the value of the buffer 2. When the lottery process is executed, the address of the buffer specified in the table will be referenced, so it is possible to switch the reference destination simply by changing the data value stored in the table, and configure it as a common process. You can It is also possible to switch the reference destination depending on the game state and the like. For example, in the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004, the game ball is likely to be effective because the game ball is likely to be effective. Buffer 1 may be prioritized with an emphasis on the fact that a prize has been won, and in a game state in which a game ball cannot be received in the second starting opening 2004, buffer 2 may be prioritized with importance placed on the effectiveness of winning.

Further, when the lottery is executed in a state where the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different, a command (variation pattern command, symbol type command, etc.) based on the result of the lottery is transmitted at the start of normal variation. (The same as the command) is transmitted, and a dedicated command indicating the difference is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Regarding the transmission order of the command based on the lottery result and the dedicated command, the command based on the lottery result may be transmitted first or the dedicated command may be transmitted first. Further, instead of transmitting the dedicated command, information indicating that the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different may be added to the command based on the lottery result. At this time, information indicating that the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different may be added to all commands of the commands based on the lottery result, or any one (partial) It may be added only to the command (for example, the command to be transmitted first). The addition of information indicating that the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different is abnormal (difference) when, for example, the variation pattern command at the time of normal (match) is set to “3001h” to “30FFh”. Time variation pattern commands are "B001h" to "B0FFh". Specifically, by changing the leading bit of the variation pattern command, the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern command is changed from "30h" ("00110000b") to "B0h" ("1010000b").

If "1" (valid) is set in the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2, the valid period is not used without using the (corresponding) information stored in the buffer 1. The lottery is executed based on the (corresponding) information stored in the buffer 2 set when the player wins. As a result, the lottery can be executed based on the information whose effectiveness is guaranteed. On the other hand, the lottery may be performed based on (corresponding) information stored in the buffer 1 instead of the (corresponding) information stored in the buffer 2. In this case, since the buffer 2 needs to hold only the minimum information related to the switch input, the required storage capacity can be reduced.

In the gaming machine as described above, the lottery is executed based on the fact that the game ball (game medium) is received (passed) in the starting opening (starting region), and the variable display of the symbols is started (lottery executing means). , The state shifts to a state (special game state) in which a game value can be given to the player such as paying out prize balls according to the result of the lottery. The game ball received by the starting opening switch (game medium detecting means) provided in the starting opening is detected and stored in the input information storage area (game medium detecting information storage means). In the input information storage area, a buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area, first storage means) for always storing input information (game medium detection information) when a game ball is received in the starting opening, and a second starting opening 2004 A buffer 2 (award ball) that stores input information (game medium detection information) within a period (valid period) during which the game ball can be received only when the ordinary electric auditors are opened (when the condition for accepting the game ball is satisfied). The determination area and the second storage means) are assigned. With such a configuration, the lottery is executed based on the input information stored in the buffer 2, and the illegal prize (abnormality occurrence) is detected by referring to the buffer 1 (and the buffer 2), and the number of illegal prizes is calculated. It becomes possible to count.

[20-6. Timing chart (probability change area switch)]
The case where the game ball wins the second starting opening 2004 has been described above. Next, a process of detecting a winning of a game ball in a probability variation area that shifts to a probability variation state after the completion of the jackpot will be described in chronological order when a prize is won at a specific timing (specific round) during the jackpot game. FIG. 357 is a timing chart illustrating processing of each component when a game ball wins a probability variation area (V-AT area) in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Note that the numerical information, time value, and the like described on the timing chart are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, passage of the probability variation area switch of the game ball is detected. As a result, the probability variation area switch is turned from OFF to ON. At this time, since it is a specific round (V passable round) (valid period), "1" is set to the corresponding bit (probability variation area switch) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1)). , "1" is also set to the corresponding bit (probability variation area switch) of the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR)), and if the corresponding bit is set to 1 on the basis of the value of the buffer 2, it is probable variation. Set the judgment flag. After the jackpot, if the probability variation determination flag is set, the probability variation state is entered. The probability variation determination flag may be set when the same value is set in the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of the buffer 2. At this time, an AND value (logical product) may be calculated from the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of the buffer 2, and when the value is 1, the probability variation determination flag may be set. Since it is determined to be normal at time t1, an effect command related to the V passage effect is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The specific round (V passable round) ends at time t2, but a plurality of specific rounds may occur in one big hit game.

Then, at time t3, similarly to time t1, the passage of the probability variation area switch of the game ball is detected. At this time, since it is not within the specific round (within the valid period), "1" is set to the corresponding bit (probability variation area switch) of the buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data 1 area to correspond to the prize ball determination area. "0" (invalid, OFF) is set to the corresponding bit (probability variation area switch) of the buffer 2. Since the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of the buffer 2 have different values, it is determined that there is an abnormality, that is, V passage in a period other than the specific round, and the high probability (advantageous state) does not occur after the big hit. As a V-pass abnormality notification, a security signal is output until time t4, and a V-pass abnormality notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The security signal may be the same as the signal at the time of abnormality in the special winning opening 2005 or the second starting opening 2004, or may be a different external output. Further, the output time may be a predetermined time and does not have to be the same time as the special winning opening winning abnormality or the like. Furthermore, either the V passage abnormality notification or the security signal may be output.

If the probability variation area switch is detected after passing the probability variation area switch in the specific round, and only if the probability variation area switch is detected in other times than the specific round, only the abnormality notification is executed (the abnormality notification command is transmitted) at the time of passing other than the specific round. However, it is possible to shift to a high probability (advantageous state) after a big hit (the value of the probability variation determination flag is maintained), or not to shift to a high probability (an advantageous state) after a big hit (the value of the probability variation determination flag is cleared). May be set). Further, even when the passage of the probability variation area switch is detected in a period other than the specific round, the abnormality notification command is transmitted, but the security signal is not output, and the abnormality notification on the peripheral control board 1510 side such as a lamp or a voice is output. Only the notification command may be transmitted, or the peripheral control board 1510 may not notify the abnormality of the command although the notification command is transmitted.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 357, the abnormality is determined by determining whether or not the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 match, but like the case of determining the winning abnormality of the special winning opening, A method of presetting the count number may be used. For example, the fraud determination counter is set to “2” at the start of the specific round, and the fraud determination counter is subtracted based on the information in the buffer 1. Further, it may be set to “1” at the end of the specific round, and if the result is 0 after subtracting the fraud count, it may be determined as fraud. It should be noted that the initial value of the fraud count set at the start of the specific round does not have to be limited to "2" because it may be set to a value that does not normally occur, and there are two or more game balls passing through. If not obtained, 2 may be set. In addition, since it is necessary to determine that the game ball is illegal even if only one game ball has passed in other than the specific round, "1" is set at the end of the specific round and the subtraction result becomes "0", and "1" is reported after the irregularity is reported. Set to.

In the gaming machine described here, the game ball shifts to the probability changing state under the condition that the game ball wins the probability changing region at a predetermined timing (during a specific round) during the big hit game. If the probability variation area is not in a state capable of accepting the game ball, it is difficult (or impossible) to win the game ball, and if the game ball is accepted in the probability variation area in such a state, it is illegal. It is judged to be a prize. Therefore, as described above, the bit corresponding to the probability variation area switch is provided in the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area), and is set in the buffer 1 regardless of whether it is valid or invalid. Set in buffer 2 only if valid. As a result, in the process of shifting to the probability changing state, it is sufficient to refer to the buffer 2 without determining an unauthorized winning, so that the process can be simplified. On the other hand, by referring to the buffer 1 and the buffer 2, it becomes possible to judge the illegal prize and to count the number of illegal prizes.

[20-7. Summary/Modifications]
As described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment detects acceptance of the game ball (game medium) at the special winning opening, the starting opening, or the like by the detection sensor (switch) (detects that the game medium has passed a predetermined area). ) A game medium detection information storage means is provided with a game medium detection means and a game medium detection information storage means (input information storage area) capable of storing detection information (game medium detection information) of these game balls (game media). The means stores the game medium detection information within a valid period (when a predetermined condition is satisfied) and a buffer 1 (first storage means, fraud determination edge buffer, input edge data 1 area) capable of always storing the game medium detection information. It has a buffer 2 (second storage means, prize ball determination area) for storing, and for example, when a game ball wins within the valid period and pays out a prize ball (a process based on establishment of a predetermined condition is executed. In the case of doing), the processing is executed by referring to the game medium detection information stored in the prize ball determination area (second storage means).

In addition, when the valid period is set for the acceptance of the game ball in the winning opening or the probability variation area, the number of times the switch input information (game medium detection information) is stored only in the buffer 1 (the number of illegal prizes) is counted. By doing so, the abnormality determination can be performed. The number of illegal prizes may be subtracted by 1 each time an illegal prize occurs with a threshold value for abnormality determination as an initial value, and may be determined to be abnormal when 0 is reached. You may make it add and it may be judged as abnormal, if the threshold for abnormality determination is reached.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the processing involved in the input determination can be made common by switching the area to be referred to when executing the input determination processing, and the entire processing can be simplified. As described above, it is possible to pay out a prize ball based on the information detected within the valid period, or to perform an abnormality determination by counting the number of game balls won outside the valid period. The development efficiency of can be improved. For example, in the case of determining the winning of the special winning opening 2005, the determination is made based on the value of the award ball determination area in the above-described embodiment, but regarding the number of winnings to the big winning opening 2005 in the big hit state, The value of the input edge data area 1 may be used for the determination, and the value of the prize ball determination area may be referred to only for the prize determination associated with the prize ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration having two types of buffers, that is, the buffer 1 for always storing the input and the buffer 2 for storing the input within the valid period has been described, but two or more types such as having a buffer for each gaming state are provided. It may be configured to have a buffer.

Further, in the embodiment described up to this point, the winning opening in which the valid period is set at the time of winning is described, but the first starting opening 2002 that can always accept the game ball determines the valid period when the game ball wins. Without doing so, "1" (valid) is set to the corresponding bit (first starting opening switch) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area). Therefore, for the first starting opening 2002, the prize ball may be performed based on the value of the buffer 1, or like the second starting opening 2004, the prize ball may be performed based on the value of the buffer 2. Further, since the value of the buffer 1 and the value of the buffer 2 are the same and the result of the valid period determination process in the second starting port 2004 is always normal, for example, a prize ball when winning in the first starting port 2002. The process of 1 may be common to the process of the prize ball of the second starting port 2004.

The buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are included in the input information storage area assigned to the RAM (RAM with built-in main control), but these buffers may be arranged in continuous areas or in distant areas. May be. When allocating buffer 1 and buffer 2 to consecutive areas, when storing values in each buffer, it is possible to set to each buffer simply by executing the INC instruction/DEC instruction, which simplifies the processing. it can. On the other hand, when the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are allocated to separate areas, the buffers can be freely arranged, so that the degree of freedom in designing the storage area is increased and the development efficiency can be improved.

[21. Bit transfer instruction]
In recent years, game machines are required to have complicated game control in order to further enhance the interest of the game. On the other hand, in the game control device that actually controls the game, certain restrictions are added to ensure fairness of the game and to prevent excessive aspiration, so that the game is played within a predetermined framework. ing.

Therefore, there is a possibility that a problem may occur such as a problem that the structure of the program is complicated to realize complicated game control. Therefore, the program was simplified by converting the game control into data. For example, the structure of the program is simplified by the program sequentially processing the data in which the control contents are defined, and the specification can be easily accommodated by changing the data.

On the other hand, due to the data conversion of the game control, the dependence on the data becomes high, and the specification of the game machine becomes complicated, resulting in an increase in the data capacity. Further, since the capacity for storing data for controlling the gaming machine is limited, it is necessary to suppress the increase in data capacity.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity by compressing and storing the data in order to suppress an increase in the data capacity used in the gaming machine. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that

According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, by compressing the data, it is possible to hold more data, and it is possible to provide a game with complicated specifications, which enhances the enjoyment of the game. Is possible. Further, by further advancing the data of the game control, it becomes possible to further simplify the program, suppress the complication of the game control, and reduce the probability of occurrence of a defect. Further, it becomes easy to respond to the specification change of the gaming machine, and by replacing some data, it becomes possible to easily provide various variations of the gaming machine.

Specifically, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, by improving the command for reading the game data, the degree of freedom of the structure of the table that holds the game data is improved, and the process of reading the game data is simplified. By this, the capacity of the game data is compressed, and the game control accompanied with the reading of the data is simplified. The configuration and procedure for reading data in this embodiment will be described below.

[21-1. Bit transfer procedure overview]
First, the outline of the configuration and procedure for reading data in the present embodiment will be described. In the data transfer procedure according to the present embodiment, it is possible to read the data in bit units from the designated bit position in the table, instead of reading the data in byte units from the designated address.

FIG. 358 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the bit transfer procedure of this embodiment. The bit transfer procedure according to the present embodiment is configured to specify a position (address) at which data is read based on an index (index information) that specifies a data read source, and read the specified number of bits of data. There is. When this procedure is executed, the index, the extraction designation information corresponding to the number of bits of the read data, and the storage destination of the read data are designated as parameters. For the index, a register in which index information is stored may be designated, or a value may be designated directly.

The index in this embodiment is composed of 2 bytes (16 bits). The upper 13 bits store information indicating the start address of the data table (position information of the table), and the lower 3 bits indicate information indicating the position of reading data from the specified data table (data relative position information). ing. In the present embodiment, the address of the designated data table is specified by correcting the designated index, and the data read position of the data table is acquired. Specifically, the high-order 13 bits of the pre-correction index is set to the low-order 13 bits, and "000" is added to the high-order to make 2 bytes (16 bits), thereby creating the post-correction index.

Next, the reference address (N) of the data acquired by adding the corrected index to the value set in “TP (register)” indicating the reference address of the data storage position (table layout) Is calculated and the storage position (address) of the table is specified. Further, the read position (read start bit position) of the data of the reference address (N) is specified from the value of the lower 3 bits of the index before correction. In the example shown in FIG. 358, the value of the lower 3 bits of the uncorrected index (the lower left hatching portion) is the read start bit position of the reference address (N), and for example, the value of the lower 3 bits is " When 100" is set, the read start bit position of the reference address (N) is the 4th bit ("100").

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value set in the TP register can be added to the index value to specify the address of the area in which the data is stored. Therefore, the lower address of the data storage position may be specified. The area for storing the high-order address can be used for other purposes. Specifically, it is used as an area (lower 3 bits of the corrected index) for designating a data read start bit position. With this configuration, in the present embodiment, the address of the data storage area and the data read start bit position can be specified by the 2-byte index. That is, it is possible to specify the data storage position in bit units and read the data without increasing the capacity as compared with the case of reading the data by designating the address like the conventional load instruction. Is becoming

Further, in the bit transfer procedure according to the present embodiment, extraction designation information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be read is designated as a parameter at the time of execution. A value of the number of bits of the data to be acquired minus 1 is set in the extraction designation information. In the example shown in FIG. 358, 6-bit data (in the case of extraction designation information=5) of the fifth bit of the table indicated by the reference destination address (N address) is read and stored in the designated storage destination.

In this embodiment, a value obtained by adding the index after correction to the value of the head address (reference address) of the data area set in advance in the TP register is the address where the data is actually stored. Further, when the CPU is reset when the power is turned on, the value set in the TP register is set to the start address of the data area as a default value (initial value). Furthermore, the TP register can be rewritten to any value by a program. With this configuration, it is possible to change the reference destination of the data without changing the program code by properly rewriting the value of the TP register according to the game state, simplifying the program code, and playing the game. The development efficiency of the machine can be improved. The details of the bit transfer procedure will be described later with reference to FIG.

The TP register is a dedicated register for designating an index serving as a reference address among the registers of the CPU. A general-purpose register used in arithmetic operations and the like is composed of two or more banks, but the TP register does not have the bank structure like the flag register, but is composed as one register. Note that a TP register may be provided for each bank like a general-purpose register, and the TP register of one bank may be used every time the bank is switched, similarly to the general-purpose register. For example, when bank 0 is used in the initialization process and the general-purpose register of bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt process, the TP register used in the initialization process is the one set as bank 0 and the timer interrupt process is used. The TP register used in step 1 will use the one set as bank 1. As a result, the value of the TP register can be switched according to the processing, and for example, the data reference destination can be switched for each processing. Even if the TP register is provided for each bank, it can be rewritten by a program as in the case where it is not provided for each bank, and a default value is set at the time of reset. Further, the default value may be a common value regardless of the bank, or a different value may be set for each bank.

[21-2. Bit transfer instruction types]
Next, an instruction code (command) for executing the above procedure (bit transfer instruction) will be described. In this embodiment, the case where the bit transfer instruction is executed by the assembler (mnemonic) will be described, but the same applies to other development languages. FIG. 359 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an instruction code for executing the bit transfer instruction in the present embodiment.

The bit transfer instruction is composed of an instruction code “RBT” and parameters. The parameter is a storage destination of the data to be referred to, an index indicating the reference destination address, and extraction designation information corresponding to the number of bits of the extracted data. In this embodiment, the storage destination of the data to be referred to is a register, but it may be directly written in the storage area on the RAM. As in the example shown in FIG. 358, the index value specifies the address of the table storing the read data and the position of the read data.

Next, an example of actually using the instruction code will be described. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing an example of the types of bit transfer instructions of this embodiment. As described above, the instruction code is “RBT”, and the acquired data is stored in the register r. As the register r, for example, a W register, an A register, a B register, a C register, a D register, an H register, and an L register which are general-purpose registers are designated. If the data to be read is 2 bytes, a pair register such as a WA register, BC register, and DE register may be designated.

The parameters (the storage destination of the data to be referred to, the reference destination address, and the extraction designation information) may be designated by directly designating the value mm of the index (address) or by designating the register rr for address designation. .. When the register rr is designated, the value stored in the register is read and processed. Since a 2-byte value is stored in the address register rr, it corresponds to a DE register, an HL register, an index register (IX register, IY register), or the like. Hereinafter, an example of the bit transfer instruction code shown in FIG. 360 will be described.

“RBT r, (mm).n” directly specifies the address mm of the table for storing the data, reads the data for the number of bits based on the extraction specification information n, and stores it in the register r. The extraction designation information n directly designates a number in the range of 0 to 7 or 0 to 15, or designates the register A. When the register A is designated, the data corresponding to the number stored in the register A is read.

Further, the specific operation (procedure) of “RBT r, (mm).n” will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 358, the address of the table specified by the upper 13 bits of the 16-bit index mm is used. Therefore, mm/8 corresponds to the corrected index. The value set in the above-mentioned TP register is added to the corrected index to calculate the actual address of the table to be referenced. Further, the lower 3 bits of the index mm are extracted (mm∧07H), and the bit position at which the data is read out is specified from the table to be referenced. Then, the extraction designation information n+1-bit data is extracted from the specified position and stored in the register r. At this time, the cycle for processing the instruction is 11, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 5 bytes. Further, the J flag and the Z flag of the flag register are zero even after the instruction is executed, and the other values retain the values before the instruction is executed. The change of the flag register is the same for the instruction codes described below.

“RBT r,(rr).n” designates the register rr storing the address of the table, reads the data for the number of bits based on the extraction designation information n from the table, and stores it in the register r. Other parameters are the same as the parameters of "RBT r, (mm).n". Specifically, the address of the table to be referred to is stored in the HL register, and when the read data is stored in the A register, it becomes “RBT A, (HL).n”. The specific operation of “RBT r,(rr).n” is the same as the case where the address mm of “RBT r,(mm).n” is replaced with the value stored in the register rr. Although omitted, the detailed procedure will be described later with reference to FIG. At this time, the cycle for processing the instruction is 9, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 3 bytes. If the read target is larger than 8 bits (1 byte), the capacity is 1 byte in order to specify a register such as DE register, HL register, index register (IX register, IY register) as a storage destination. It will increase by 4 bytes. The detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction in this case will be described later with reference to FIG.

"RBT r,(rr+).n" is executed by the same operation as "RBT r,(rr).n", and then adds n+1 to the value of the address stored in the register rr. At this time, the number of cycles for processing the instruction is 10, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 3 bytes. As a result, it becomes possible to continuously read the designated area. For example, by executing "RBT A, (HL+).n" and then executing "RBT W, (HL).m", from the specified position of the table of the address initially stored in the HL register. After reading n-bit data and storing it in the A register, m-bit data can be read from the next area and stored in the W register. In this way, by continuously executing "RBT r,(rr+).n", it is possible to read a plurality of data from a continuous area, and to read only the required amount of data having the same number of bits, It is possible to simplify the processing when reading a record (data group) configured by data having the number of bits. The detailed procedure for reading a plurality of data from a continuous area will be described later with reference to FIG.

“RBT r,(rr+d).n” reads data from the position where the value d is added to the address of the table stored in the register rr. As a result, it becomes possible to specify any data in the specified table and read the data. At this time, the cycle for processing the instruction is 10, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 4 bytes.

“RBT r,(rr+W).n” reads data from the position where the value stored in the register W is added to the address of the table stored in the register rr. As a result, it becomes possible to specify any data in the specified table and read the data. Further, by updating the value of the register W, it is possible to read the data from the position continuously designated by the common code. “RBT r,(rr+A).n” can be processed in the same manner only by changing the register W to the register A. The cycle for processing these instructions is 10, and the capacity for storing the instructions is 3 bytes.

[21-3. Program example]
Next, an application example of the above-mentioned bit transfer instruction "RBT" will be described. FIG. 361 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of processing using the bit transfer instruction “RBT” in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 362 is a diagram showing an example of a program corresponding to the flowchart (FIG. 361) of the process using the bit transfer instruction “RBT” in the present embodiment. The steps of the corresponding flowchart are described as program comments. The processing shown in FIGS. 361 and 362 is processing for reading data from the table in 6-bit units. This processing is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first sets, as an initial value of the reference address, a value obtained by subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the reference table as an index value (step P8001). Specifically, as shown in the program of FIG. 362, the address of the table to be referenced is stored in the HL register (“LD HL, table_Top”). The address of the table to refer to is specified by the label "table_Top", and the contents of the table are defined at the end of the program. In this table, the number of bits assigned to one data (total number of bits of basic constituent blocks) is 6, and four data (“25, 48, 32, 63”) are stored. As for the start address of the data area, since the "start address of the data area" is set in the TP register as a default value every time a reset signal is input when the power is restored, etc., if the TP register is not rewritten, that is, When the start address of the data area remains stored, the value of the TP register may be subtracted instead of the value of the start address of the data area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 extracts pointer information (pointa_a) of the data to be referenced from the reference table (step P8002). As shown in the program, the address of the pointer information is stored in the A register (“LD A, (pointa_a)”).

The main control MPU 1311 multiplies the extracted pointer information by the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the reference table (step P8003). The basic configuration block indicates an area for storing one unit of data (record) stored in the reference table. The total number of basic constituent blocks is the number of bits in the area for storing data, and corresponds to the data capacity in record units. For example, in a table that stores an integer value in the range of 0 to 30, an area for 5 bits is required to store each data, so the total number of basic configuration blocks is 5. In this embodiment, the total number of bits of the basic configuration block is 6. The result of the multiplication is stored in the A register as shown in the program ("MUL A, 6").

The main control MPU 1311 divides the multiplied value by the basic unit number (step P8004). The basic unit number of data handled by the arithmetic unit (main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310) of the gaming machine of this embodiment is 8 (the number of bits of 1 byte). The calculation result is stored in the WA register as shown in the program (“LD C,8→DIV WA,C”). When the "DIV" instruction is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the W register.

The main control MPU 1311 adds the quotient of the division result calculated in the process of step P8004 to the index value (step P8005). As shown in the program, the index value is stored in the HL register, and the values stored in the WA register are added (“ADD HL, WA”). In addition, referring to the program, the WA register is saved in the stack area by executing "PUSH WA" before adding the value stored in the WA register to the value stored in the HL register. This is because the value of the W register in which the remainder is stored is cleared (“XOR W”), and then the value of the remainder is used as a calculated value (“POP WA→LD A, W→... ”).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 multiplies the calculation result of the process of step P8005 by N (8 in this embodiment) (step P8006). On the program, the value of the HL register is multiplied by 8 by performing left shift (SLA HL) three times (shifting by 3 bits).

The main control MPU 1311 adds the remainder value of the division of step P8005 to the calculation result of the process of step P8006 and sets it as reference destination address information (step P8006). The remainder value stored in the W register is the start bit position for reading the reference data from the start address of the reference table. On the program, the remainder value is calculated (“POP WA”→“LD A, W”→“XOR W”), and the remainder value (value stored in the WA register) is stored in the HL register that stores the index value. It is adding ("ADD HL, WA"). By these processes, the index (index before correction) shown in FIG. 358 can be created.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the extraction designation information based on the number of pieces of information to be acquired (the number of bits of data to be referred to, 6 in the present embodiment), and stores the reference data from the reference address information by a bit transfer instruction. It is set first (step P8009). In the program, the value stored in the HL register is used as the pre-correction index, and the data for the number of bits (6 bits) corresponding to the extraction designation information n is stored in the A register (“RBT A, (HL).n”). ).

[21-4. Modification]
As described above, the procedure for executing the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment is (1) designation of data to be referred to, (2) creation of index (pre-correction index), and (3) data read/storing. ing. Here, a modified example will be described in which a process that can be executed without depending on the process of executing the bit transfer instruction is made independent as a subroutine to simplify the structure of the program.

(1) The designation of the data to be referred to is to set information for identifying the data (reference data) necessary for the process being executed, and corresponds to the table referred to in step P8001 in the flowchart of FIG. 361. This corresponds to the process of designating the information and designating the information corresponding to the data read position in Step P8002. These processes are specialized for the contents being executed (caller) and are individually specified when various functions are executed. (3) The same applies to the process of reading/storing data, which is executed in the subsequent process based on the acquired data.

On the other hand, in (2) creation of an index (pre-correction index), the total number of bits of the basic configuration block is specified in addition to the address of the reference table specified in (1) and pointer information of the reference position of the data. As a result, the index before correction can be created independently of the process being executed. Therefore, (2) the index creation process can be made into a subroutine.

FIG. 363 is an example of a flowchart in which the index creation processing in this embodiment is made into a subroutine, (A) is the processing of the caller of the index creation processing, and (B) is the subroutine-made index creation processing. The flowchart shown in FIG. 363(A) executes the same processing as in FIG. 361. The flowchart of the index creation process of FIG. 363(B) is a subroutine of the processes of steps P8003 to P8008 of FIG. 361. In this way, by making the index creation process into a subroutine, it is possible to simplify the process of the caller and improve the development efficiency.

The input parameters of the index creation process are the "index value" that is the start address of the reference table, the "pointer information" of the data to be referenced, and the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block" of the stored data. In this embodiment, the result obtained by subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the reference table is set as the “index value” in the HL register (step P8001), and the “pointer information” is set in the A register (step P8002). ). Further, the "total number of bits of basic configuration block" is set as a parameter (step P8013). Therefore, when setting the "index value" and "pointer information" as the input parameters of the index creation process, it is done by setting (designating) the register to be treated as the "index value" "pointer value" in the index creation process. .. As for the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block", a numerical value itself may be designated or may be set (designated) in a register treated as "the total number of bits of the basic configuration block".

[21-5. Compressed data]
In the conventional data read command, since data storage is managed in a predetermined basic unit (byte unit), it is necessary to read data from the table in this unit. In the conventional table structure that is managed in units of 1 byte (8 bits) like the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even if the data does not require a capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), the data can be stored in units of bytes. Had to store. For example, in the case of a numerical value in the range of 0 to 63, it is necessary to secure a capacity of 6 bits for each data, but it is necessary to allocate and hold a capacity of 1 byte for each data.

On the other hand, with the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, it is possible to read the data of the specified number of bits from the specified position of the table to be referenced. Therefore, it is only necessary to allocate a data area as needed, and the data can be compressed and held. A structure for compressing and holding data will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 364 is a diagram for explaining an example of the table structure in this embodiment. The table shown in FIG. 364 holds four records (data) “25, 48, 32, 63”. When these data are converted into hexadecimal numbers, they become “19h, 30h, 20h, 3Fh”, and when converted into binary numbers (bit conversion), they become “00011001b, 00110000b, 0010000b, 00111111b”. Since the number of basic units of data handled by the arithmetic unit of the gaming machine is eight, conventionally, the table structure holds data in 8-bit units such as the area 4771 shown by the dotted line, and the upper 2 of each record. The bit was "0".

In the above-described bit transfer instruction, data can be read from any bit of the specified address, so in the present embodiment, 6-bit data of each record, that is, data included in the area 4772 is continuously stored. By doing so, it becomes possible to arrange the data as shown in the area 4773. As a result, "19h, 0Ch, FEh" is stored.

As described above, the conventional table structure requires a capacity of 4 bytes (32 bits), but by reading data by the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, unnecessary bits are deleted and 3 bytes (24 bits) are added. Table structure compressed into bits). As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to minimize the area for holding data and save the storage capacity. As a result, more data can be managed, and more detailed game control can be performed.

[21-6. Detailed procedure of bit transfer instruction]
Next, typical patterns of the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment will be described. Here, when reading the specified single data (RBT A, (HL).5), when continuously reading data from the table ([1]RBT A, (HL+).5→[2]RBT B, (HL).5) A case of reading data having a capacity larger than 1 byte (RBT DE, (HL).9) will be described. In the example described below, the value of the TP register is set to "8000h" which is the start address of the data area.

[21-6-1. Single data read]
FIG. 365 is a diagram for explaining the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the case of reading individual data from the referenced table. The referenced table is the same as the table shown in FIG. The bit transfer instruction to be executed is "RBT A, (HL).5".

As shown in FIG. 365, the pre-correction index “4C6E” is stored in the HL register. The address of the table to be referred to is “898Dh”, and the example described here shows a case where the second stored data (30h) of the table to be referred to is transferred. As described above, the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the referenced table is 6, and the basic unit is 8 bits (1 byte). By executing the index creation process (FIG. 363(B)) based on these pieces of information, the pre-correction index “4C6E” can be calculated.

When the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL).5" is executed, first, the reference address for reading the data is specified. Specifically, the reference address (“898Dh”) can be calculated by dividing the pre-correction index “4C6E” by the basic unit number (8) (“098Dh”) and adding TP “8000h”. ..

Further, the lower 3 bits (“110b”) are obtained by calculating the logical product of the pre-correction indexes “4C6E” and “07h”, and the read start position (bit) of the reference address is specified. In the example shown in FIG. 365, it is the 6th (=“110b”) bit of the reference address. Then, "110000b" (=48 ("30h")) can be acquired by extracting data for 6(n+1) bits from the 6th bit of the reference address "898Dh". According to the basic unit number (8), the acquired value is complemented with “00” in the upper 2 bits and stored in the A register.

[21-6-2. Continuous reading of data]
FIG. 366 is a diagram illustrating a detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction according to the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where data is continuously read from the referenced table. The table to be referred to is the table shown in FIG. 364, as in the case of FIG. 365. A case will be described in which the bit transfer instruction [1] “RBT A, (HL+).5” is executed and then [2] “RBT B, (HL).5” is executed. Note that [1] and [2] correspond to the execution order of each bit transfer instruction, and correspond to the arrow of the reference address in FIG. 366.

The execution process of the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL+).5" is the same as that of "RBT A, (HL).5" (FIG. 365) until the data to be transferred is stored in the A register. In the bit transfer instruction “RBT A, (HL+).5”, after the acquired data is stored in the A register, the value of the extraction designation information n+1(5+1) is added to the index value “4C6Eh” stored in the HL register. To do. It should be noted that the value stored in the HL register (index before correction) does not change from the value set before execution of the bit transfer instruction even after execution of the bit transfer instruction (after reading data). It has become. By executing the index update process for updating the index value to the storage position of the next data in this way, the storage position of the data next to the read data can be specified. In the example shown in FIG. 366, it is “4C74h”.

After that, the reference destination address and the read start position (bit) are specified as in the case of reading the single data described in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 366, 6-bit data is read from the 4th (=“100b”) bit of the reference address “898Eh” and stored in the B register.

In this way, when continuously reading data from the specified table, the index value should be calculated by first executing the index creation process, and then added to the index value for the number of bits of the read data. The index value can be sequentially updated by.

Also, when each record in the table is composed of a combination of data with different numbers of bits, data can be acquired for each record by specifying the extraction designation information according to the number of bits that make up the record. It will be possible. For example, when a record is composed of 4-bit, 6-bit, and 10-bit data, one record's worth of data is obtained by sequentially executing bit transfer instructions by specifying 4, 6, and 10 as extraction designation information. can do. At this time, when the data is composed of 4 bits, 6 bits, and 10 bits, the total number (bit number) of basic configuration blocks is 20 (=4+6+10). In this case, for example, the program configuration is such that the bit transfer instructions are executed in the order of "RBT A, (HL+).4", "RBT B, (HL+).6", "RBT DE, (HL).10". As a result, it is possible to acquire each data that constitutes the record. With the above configuration, it is not necessary to acquire data while creating index values individually, so that the program for acquiring data in record units can be simplified and the execution time can be shortened.

[Reading data with a capacity larger than 21-6-3.1 bytes]
FIG. 367 is a diagram illustrating a bit transfer instruction for data having a size larger than 1 byte according to the present embodiment, FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating a reference table, and FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating a procedure. is there.

The table shown in FIG. 367(A) stores values from 0 to 1000, and holds three records (data) “55,258,942” as an example. When these data are converted into hexadecimal numbers, they are "37h, 102h, 3AEh", and when converted into binary numbers (bit conversion), they are "0000110111b, 0100000010b, 1110101110b".

However, the table shown in FIG. 367(A) has an upper limit of 1000, and thus can be stored in 10 bits. As described above, since the number of basic units of data handled by the arithmetic unit of the gaming machine is 8, it is necessary to store the data in units of 8 bits (1 byte), and 16 bits are required to actually store the data. Needed a minute capacity. Therefore, conventionally, a table structure like 4801 shown by a dotted line is used, and "0" is assigned to the upper 6 bits of each unused record. Therefore, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 364, the data of 10 bits of each record, that is, the data of the area 4802 is continuously stored to arrange the data as shown by 4803. As a result, "37h, 08h, E4h, 3Ah" are stored. In this way, data having a capacity of more than 8 bits (1 byte) can be similarly compressed and held.

The total number of basic constituent blocks may be the maximum number of bits of the constituent data. For example, if the upper limit of the configured data is 1000 (3E8h) as in the above-described example, the bit number of 10 is the total number of basic configuration blocks. If the total number of basic configuration blocks is 10, the range of values that can be stored is 0h to 3FFh (1023). Further, as described above, when each record in the table is composed of a combination of data having different numbers of bits (for example, first data, second data, third data), the maximum value of the first data The number of bits, the number of bits of the maximum value of the second data, and the number of bits of the maximum value of the third data are the total number of basic configuration blocks of the first data, the total number of basic configuration blocks of the second data, and the basic configuration of the third data, respectively. It is the total number of blocks.

As described above, FIG. 367(B) is a diagram for explaining the procedure of executing the bit transfer instruction for data having a size larger than 1 byte, and executes the bit transfer instruction “RBT DE, (HL).9”. To do. The uncorrected index “4C72h” is stored in the HL register. The start address of the table to be referenced is "898Dh", and an example of transferring the second data of the table to be referenced is shown. Also, the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the referenced table is 10, and the basic unit is 8. By executing the index creation process (FIG. 363(B)) based on these pieces of information, the pre-correction index “4C72h” can be calculated.

The reference address is specified in the same manner as the procedure shown in FIG. 365, and “898Eh” is calculated. Further, the read start position (“010b”) of the reference address is specified by the same procedure. Then, “0100000010b” (=258 (“102h”)) is acquired by extracting 10 (n+1)-bit data from the 2nd (“010b”)-th bit, which is the read start position of the reference address “898Eh”. be able to. Since the acquired value exceeds the basic unit number (8), the upper 2 bits (“01b”) of the acquired value are extracted and the upper 6 bits of the extracted value are complemented with “000000”. (“00000001b”) and store it in the D register. Further, the remaining lower 8 bits (“00000010b”) are stored in the E register.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, even data that requires a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can be compressed and held, and the data can be read by a simple procedure. It will be possible.

[21-7. Application example]
Next, an example of applying the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment in game control will be described. Here, a process of extracting a random number and selecting a variation pattern of variable display (dynamic display) of symbols in game control based on the extracted random number will be described as an example. In this process, the extracted random number is sequentially compared with the threshold value acquired from the variation pattern table, and when the extracted random number is equal to or larger than the threshold value, the variation pattern number corresponding to this threshold value is selected as the lottery result. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to FIGS. 368 to 370.

[21-7-1. Structure of fluctuation pattern table]
First, the fluctuation pattern table in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram for explaining an application example of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, (A) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the variation pattern and the corresponding range, (B) is a program code showing a variation pattern table, (C) is a figure explaining an example of the structure of the table before compression and the table after compression about the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to (B).

In the present embodiment, the range of the extracted random numbers is from 0 to 63 (integer value), and as shown in FIG. 368(A), when the extracted random numbers are included in the range corresponding to each variation pattern. The variation pattern number corresponding to is selected. In the present embodiment, the variation patterns from pattern 1 (PT1) to pattern 5 (PT5) are defined. When the random number value is 0 to 32, the pattern 1 is used, and when 33 to 45 is used, the pattern 2 and 46 to 54 are used. The case is pattern 3, 55-60 is pattern 4, and the cases 61-63 are pattern 5. In addition, the larger the pattern number, the higher the expectation that the player will shift to a more advantageous state (the lottery result will be a big hit). It should be noted that the higher the pattern number, the higher the degree of expectation may not be arranged, and the lower the pattern number, the higher the degree of expectation may be. Further, the pattern number is set based on a criterion other than the degree of expectation in management. You may do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 368(B), the variation pattern table (hp_table) is defined as a set of a random number threshold value and a pattern number and one record. The random number threshold and the fluctuation pattern number are continuously stored in the same table.

As described above, the range of the random numbers to be extracted is 0 to 63, and the threshold value requires a maximum capacity of 6 bits. Similarly, since the fluctuation pattern number is defined in the range of 1 to 5, a maximum capacity of 3 bits (0 to 7) is required. When storing data by the conventional method, the gaming machine of this embodiment requires a capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) to store one data, and therefore is shown on the left side of FIG. 368(C). As described above, if the number of records configured by the random number threshold value and the variation pattern number is 5, a total capacity of 10 bytes is used. On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 368(C), by adopting the data compression technique of the present embodiment, it is sufficient to secure a capacity of 6 bits for the threshold value and 3 bits for the fluctuation pattern number, and these data can be continuously stored. Since the number of records is 5, the data can be stored in a total capacity of 45 bits (6 bytes), and the capacity can be reduced by 40% or more.

Note that the table shown in FIG. 368 is an example, and the compression rate of the table changes according to the threshold value of random numbers, the range of fluctuation pattern numbers, and the like. For example, if the capacity of the random number threshold value is in units of bytes (8 bits), data cannot be compressed, but if the capacity of the random number threshold value is not in units of bytes, that is, if there is a fraction of 1 to 7 bits In addition, the capacity can be reduced from 8 bits by a fractional bit. In particular, when the data capacity is 1 bit for fractional bits such as 9 bits or 17 bits, it is possible to reduce the capacity for 7 bits by one data, and the maximum effect can be obtained.

[21-7-2. Procedure for selecting fluctuation pattern]
Next, an outline of a procedure for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment will be described. Incidentally. When a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are defined, the variation pattern table is selected in advance according to the game state or the like.

First, a random number value in the range of 0 to 63 is extracted as the random number for the variation pattern lottery. Next, a random number threshold value and a fluctuation pattern number are sequentially acquired from the fluctuation pattern table in record units from the head of the table. Furthermore, the threshold value of the acquired random number is compared with the extracted random number, and when the value of the random number is equal to or larger than the acquired threshold value, the corresponding variation pattern is selected as the lottery result. On the other hand, when the value of the random number is less than the acquired threshold value, the next record is acquired from the fluctuation pattern table, and the fluctuation pattern is selected by comparing with the threshold value in the same procedure. Thus, the threshold corresponds to the lower limit of the range of random numbers for selecting the corresponding variation pattern. Further, since the threshold value of the last record in the variation pattern table is 0, the variation pattern is always selected in the last record. As a numerical example of the variation pattern selection procedure, if the extracted random number is “48”, it is less than the threshold value when first compared with the threshold value “60” corresponding to the first record in the table. And the threshold value “54” of Similarly, when compared with the threshold value “45” of the next record, the extracted random number “45” becomes equal to or larger than the threshold value, and therefore the corresponding end right side same pattern “PT3” (variation pattern number 3) is selected.

Here, the procedure (variation pattern selection process) of acquiring the variation pattern number from the variation pattern table will be specifically described. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment. FIG. 370 is a diagram showing an example of a program for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment. The flowchart of FIG. 369 corresponds to the program of FIG. 370. This processing is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The basic procedure of the fluctuation pattern selection process is to first specify a fluctuation pattern table for selecting a fluctuation pattern (number). Next, an index is created from the identified fluctuation pattern table in order to acquire data by the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment. Then, a random number for selecting the variation pattern is extracted. Finally, the threshold value of the random number and the corresponding variation pattern number are acquired from the variation pattern table using the bit transfer instruction, and the variation pattern number is selected by comparing the random number threshold value and the random number.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first acquires the address (Hp_no_table) of the fluctuation pattern table (step P8021). In the present embodiment, one fluctuation pattern table is defined, but when a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables are defined according to the game state, the fluctuation pattern table is specified at this timing.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a parameter for index creation for executing the bit transfer instruction RBT of this embodiment (step P8022). The procedure for creating the index is the procedure described with reference to FIGS. 361 and 362.

More specifically, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the value obtained by subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the fluctuation pattern table specified in the process of Step P8021 as the index initial value in the HL register. (“LD HL, Hp_no_table-9000h” and “9000h” correspond to “TP” in the program code shown in FIG. 362 and are values stored in the TP register).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets parameters for index creation (step P8022). Specifically, first, the pointer information of the data to be referred (record of the fluctuation pattern table) is extracted and set as a parameter. Here, since the data is acquired from the beginning of the fluctuation pattern table, the pointer information of the data becomes zero. Further, the total number of basic constituent blocks is set as a parameter. As described above, the total number of basic constituent blocks corresponds to the data capacity of the area for storing one unit of data (record) stored in the reference table. In this application example, since the threshold value of the random number is 6 bits and the variation pattern number is 3 bits, a capacity of 9 bits is required to store one record, and the total number of basic configuration blocks is 9.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an index creating process for creating an index for executing the bit transfer instruction RBT based on the set parameters (step P8023). In the index creation process, first, the total number of bits (9) of the basic configuration block is multiplied by the pointer information (0) of the data to be referred to (variation pattern table). The result of multiplication is 0, which is stored in the A register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register (stores 0) and divides the value of the WA register by the basic unit number (8). At this time, the quotient is stored in the A register (0) and the remainder is stored in the W register (0). Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register and adds the value of the WA register to the HL register. As described above, the value before clearing the W register is saved in the stack area in advance for use in the subsequent calculation. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shifts the value of the HL register by 3 bits to the left (multiplies by 8). Further, the saved value of the W register is added to the HL register, and the index creation is completed.

When the creation of the index is completed and the preparation for acquiring the fluctuation pattern number from the fluctuation pattern table is completed, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for randomly selecting the fluctuation pattern (step P8024). As described above, the extracted random number is a 6-bit integer from 0 to 63 and is stored in the D register (LD D, (Rnd)).

Subsequently, the extracted random number value is compared with the threshold value stored in the fluctuation pattern table to specify the fluctuation pattern number. The main control MPU 1311 first acquires a random number threshold value from the variation pattern table based on the index created in the process of Step P8023 by the bit transfer instruction (Step P8025). Specifically, 6-bit data is acquired from the position designated by the index and stored in the A register (RBT A, (HL+).5). Further, the variable pattern numbers stored in the continuous areas are acquired by the bit transfer instruction (step P8026). The fluctuation pattern number is 3 bits and is stored in the W register (RBT W, (HL+).2).

Next, when the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number threshold value and the fluctuation pattern number from the fluctuation pattern table, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the threshold value is 0 (step P8027). In the present embodiment, the threshold value of the final record of the variation pattern table is set to 0, and thus it is determined whether the threshold value is 0 or not (AND A, FFh). → JR Z, hp_select_2). When the threshold is 0 (result in step P8027 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 ends the present process with the variation pattern number acquired in the process of step P8026 as the lottery result (step P8029).

On the other hand, when the random number threshold value is not 0 (result of step P8027 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the random number threshold value is smaller than the variation pattern selection random number (step P8028). When the threshold value of the random number is larger than the random number for fluctuation pattern selection (the result of step P8028 is “yes”), the process of step P8025 is performed to select the next record and acquire the threshold value and the corresponding fluctuation pattern number. Return to.

If the threshold value of the random number is equal to or smaller than the random number for changing pattern selection (result of step P8028 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 ends the present process with the changing pattern number acquired in the process of step P8026 as the lottery result. (Step P8029).

In the variation pattern selection processing of this embodiment, the processing from step P8025 to step P8028 is looped to sequentially compare the threshold values of the first record to the last record of the variation pattern table with the acquired random number values to determine the variation pattern. It is configured so that the loop is exited when the fluctuation pattern is specified. On the program, as shown in FIG. 370, the processing from the tag “hp_select_1” to the tag “hp_select_2” corresponds to this loop.

Further, in the variation pattern selection processing of the present embodiment, an index is created with the head address of the table as the data read start position, and the bit transfer instructions “RBT A, (HL+).5” and “RBT W, (HL+). 2" are sequentially executed. As a result, the reading of data is started from the beginning of the table, and the next data can be read continuously without recalculating the index. In this way, even when continuously acquiring data, the data can be acquired without resetting the parameters, so that the program can be simplified.

[21-8. Other application examples]
Here, the application example shown in FIG. 368 uses the bit transfer instruction in the present embodiment for the table for selecting the variation pattern, but the application need not be limited to this, and other It can also be applied to the purpose table. For example, it is a table for specifying input information from various ports of the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310, and is composed of a port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, a data area address, etc. for each port. It is also applicable to existing ones. At this time, the effect of the data transfer instruction in this embodiment can be obtained unless all the data forming the table is in byte units.

Further, as another example, the invention can be applied to data for creating a command to be transmitted to various boards, for example, data for specifying a parameter of the command to be transmitted. Specifically, if the command is to specify the number of award balls of the award ball command for instructing the number of award balls to be paid out, if the number of award balls is 1 to 15, it can be specified by the capacity of 4 bits. At this time, a capacity of 5 bits may be secured in order to be able to specify the number of prize balls of 16 or more, or the head bit is fixed to “1” to specify the number of prize balls. The number of prize balls may be designated by the lower 4 bits.

As still another example, it can be applied to a table for specifying an area for storing various data. Specifically, it is a table composed of records including information for specifying data (information for identifying data) and information for specifying an address of an area for storing the data. The information for specifying the address of the area to store the data does not store the address itself, but stores the reference address in another area in advance, and stores the difference value (difference address) from the reference address in the table. You may do so. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity for storing the address. Further, it is possible to flexibly cope with the case where the number of data or the data volume is large or the data volume changes.

Further, as another example of the table for specifying the area for storing various data, the address (2 bytes) of the area for storing the data is specified by combining the upper address (1 byte) and the lower address (1 byte). It may be configured to do so. In this case, the upper address may be stored in advance in another area as reference address information, and only the lower address may be stored in the table. The data capacity can be reduced by making it possible to store the lower address in an area smaller than 1 byte. Moreover, since the address for storing the data can be specified without performing the operation (or by a simple operation), the process for specifying the address can be simplified. Furthermore, since the address at which the data is actually stored can be easily specified by referring to the table, maintenance can be facilitated when reviewing the address at which the data is stored.

Further, as described above, the data compression technique according to the present embodiment makes it possible to acquire data having a designated number of bits, and therefore, the data compression technique can be applied even when data of different sizes are continuously stored. However, when data of different sizes are stored consecutively, it is necessary to specify the size of each data, and it is not possible to efficiently reduce the data capacity by holding the size of each data individually. there is a possibility. Therefore, by securing an area for the data capacity corresponding to the maximum value of a series of data and storing each data, it is possible to acquire the data without specifying the size of each data, and simplify the entire process. be able to. As described above, when storing a plurality of types of data as one record in the table, first, the size of each data forming the record is specified, and then the table size is determined based on the specified size of the data. By acquiring each record, it is possible to achieve both reduction of data capacity and simplification of processing.

Further, if the tables have the same configuration, it is possible to obtain the data compressed by the common processing, and therefore it is preferable that the similar tables have the same structure. For example, when a plurality of the fluctuation pattern tables described above are defined according to the game state, it is possible to reduce the amount of data for each table due to the small number of kinds of fluctuation patterns, etc., but a common structure By doing so, it becomes possible to acquire data from the variation pattern table by common processing without depending on the game state, and the entire processing can be simplified.

[21-9. Effect, etc.]
As described above, by reading the data by the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, it is possible to delete unnecessary bits and form a compressed table structure, so that it is possible to minimize the area for holding the data. It will be possible. As a result, more data can be managed, and more detailed game control can be performed.

Further, since it is possible to make the process of creating an index for executing the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment independent, it is possible to prevent the original game control from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in data capacity while suppressing complication of conventional game control.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to read a plurality of data from consecutive areas by successively executing bit transfer instructions while incrementing the index. It is possible to simplify the processing when only reading only or when reading a record (data group) configured by data of plural kinds of bit numbers.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even data that requires a capacity of more than 8 bits (1 byte) can be compressed and held, and the data is read out in the same procedure as the data of less than 8 bits. This makes it possible to provide a highly versatile data reading means.

The data structure that can be read by the bit transfer instruction according to the present embodiment is effective when the size of data is not in byte units, and more capacity is saved as the number of data is increased. Therefore, it is particularly useful when there are many types of data defined such as data used for processing related to special symbols or ordinary symbols, such as variation patterns. If the data is composed of byte units, it is more efficient to use a normal load instruction (“LD”) or the like. On the other hand, in the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, the procedure for reading the data is larger than that of the load instruction, so that it is necessary to quickly perform routine processing such as power-on processing or power failure processing, or data to be handled. If the number of bits is small, the load instruction may be preferentially used instead of the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment. In this way, when controlling the game based on a variety of data such as the control related to the variable display of special symbols and ordinary symbols, the data capacity using the bit transfer instruction that can acquire the data in bit units Can be reduced. On the other hand, if you need to process routine procedures quickly, you can simplify the process by using load instructions that allow you to access data stored at directly specified addresses without the need to create an index. Alternatively, the speed may be increased.

[22. Improvement of instruction to call processing]
The means for reducing the capacity by compressing the area for storing data has been described above. Next, by reducing the word length of the instructions (commands) that make up the program, the procedure (clock number, step number) processed by the arithmetic means (main control MPU 1311) is reduced to speed up the processing or to combine frequently. Means for simplifying the program by collectively executing the instructions to be executed will be described. Here, particularly, an instruction obtained by improving the instruction (INV instruction) for executing the predefined processing will be described. Since the execution frequency of the INV instruction is very high, it is possible to speed up the entire game control processing by speeding up the execution of the INV instruction. In addition, the program can be simplified by implementing an instruction that integrates the processes that are executed in combination when the INV instruction is executed.

[22-1. INV command]
First, an outline of a normal INV instruction will be described. The word length of the INV instruction differs depending on the type of MPU (processor), but is 4 bytes in the main control MPU 1311 mounted on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine in this embodiment.

The INV instruction specifies the address where the process to be executed is stored. At this time, a return address, which is a return destination for returning to the process of the calling source after the execution of the called process is completed, is stored in the stack area. As a result, by executing the return instruction in the called process, the value of the program counter is rewritten to the return address stored in the stack area to return to the calling source, and the process is continued from the instruction next to the executed INV instruction. be able to.

Further, since the INV instruction can specify all the addresses in the storage area, it is possible to call all the processes stored in the memory. Therefore, the arrangement of programs and data can be freely set. On the other hand, the procedure (calling number of clocks) for calling the process may increase due to the high degree of freedom, which may cause overhead. Therefore, it is desirable to reduce the load of the entire process by reducing the overhead.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in order to reduce the load for calling a process that is frequently executed, a table that stores the address of the process to be called is defined in advance, and the process placement is based on the table. A prior art has been proposed in which it is possible to call a process while reducing the load for specifying (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-174833). The outline of the INVD instruction having a function similar to that of the prior art will be described below.

[22-2. INVD command]
In the INVD instruction, as described above, the processing address table including the address in which the frequently executed processing is stored is created in advance, and the processing to be called when the INVD instruction is executed is specified based on the processing address table. The processing address table is assigned an index (1 byte) for each processing, and it is possible to call a specific processing by specifying the index (1 byte) without directly specifying the address (2 bytes). Become. As a result, the word length of the instruction can be shortened to speed up the processing, and the program structure can be simplified. Further, even if the arrangement of the program in the memory (the storage destination of the processing) is changed, the data defined in the processing address table only needs to be changed. Can be flexibly dealt with, and the efficiency of program development can be improved.

Here, the configuration of the storage area for storing the processing address table will be described. FIG. 371 is a diagram showing an example of an address map showing the configuration of the storage area of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The storage area is provided by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313.

Areas accessed by game control on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment include a RAM area (0000h to 03FFh), an internal function register area (1300h to 13DFh, 1400h to 14DFh), and a ROM area (8000h to C12Fh). ) And an expansion ROM area (C130h to FDFFh). Areas other than these are unused areas (outside the used area), and access by the game control program is basically prohibited.

Explaining each area, the RAM area is an area for temporarily storing data to be read and written during program execution. Further, the internal function register area stores set values of various registers for controlling internal functions. In the present embodiment, the internal function register area is arranged at two places, but it may be one area or may be divided into three or more areas. The internal function register area is similar to the RAM area in that it stores information, but unlike the RAM area, the value is not stored in the process of arithmetic operation of the main control MPU 1311 and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. It specifies the function for. That is, once the value of the internal function register area is set at the timing when the power is turned on, the set information is not changed unlike the information stored in the RAM area.

The ROM area includes a program/data area (8000h to BFFFh), a ROM comment area (C000h to C07Fh), a processing address table area (C080h to C0FFh), and an HW parameter area (C100h to C12Fh). The program/data area stores read-only data and programs. Data such as the title and version of the program is set in the ROM comment area. The processing address table area stores data regarding a processing (subroutine) called when a specific processing calling instruction (for example, an INVD instruction described later) is executed. In the HW parameter area, hardware-related parameters for executing the internal functions of the main control board 1310 are set.

The expansion ROM area (C130h to FDFFh) is allocated an unused (access prohibited) area in a normal (mass production) gaming machine, while a program/data area is allocated in a development gaming machine.

Next, the structure of the processing address table will be described. FIG. 372 is a diagram illustrating a program implementation example of a processing address table in which processing (subroutine) addresses are stored. In the implementation example shown in FIG. 372, in addition to the INVD instruction processing address table in which the addresses of the processing executed by the INVD instruction are stored, an interrupt processing address table in which the addresses of the processing executed when various interrupts occur is also included. May be In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the “processing address table” refers to the INVD instruction processing address table used in the INVD instruction.

The processing address table stores the addresses of commonly used processings that are frequently executed. The frequently executed process is, for example, a process executed in the main loop process of the timer interrupt process or the initialization process in the main control board. Further, the processing used for general purpose, which will be specifically described later, is processing for reading a signal from a designated port, processing for performing a predetermined calculation on a designated numerical value, and the like. In order not to impair versatility, these processes are very simplified (for example, program capacity) compared with processes specialized for game control (for example, big hit determination process or variation pattern selection process). There are few processes and processes with short processing time).

Further, the processing address table is stored in an area different from the area in which the program is stored, as shown in FIG. As described above, the process called by the INVD instruction has high versatility, and thus may be used as a common process in the development of another gaming machine. By arranging the regions separately in this manner, it becomes possible to manage them separately from the program of the processing depending on the model, and it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the game control program. Further, since the ROM comment area is arranged between the area for storing the processing address table and the area for storing the program, processing may exceed the program/data area due to the occurrence of a problem during program execution. Even if executed, the ROM comment area stores data that does not match the program code such as the program title, so that unexpected processing is executed without reaching the area stored in the processing address table. Can be prevented.

In the example shown in FIG. 372, 16 types of processing of INVD0 to INVD15 are defined, and for example, INVD0 includes port reading processing (PORT_RD) and INVD1 includes data setting processing (DAT_SET). When executing the INVD instruction, the number (processing index) corresponding to the processing to be called may be designated.

Here, the processing index will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of a program code defining an index for identifying a process stored at an address stored in the process address table. In the program code shown in FIG. 373, a processing index that can be called by the INVD instruction is defined in advance. In the program, it is sufficient to specify the variable corresponding to the processing name (function name), not the numerical value directly. For example, when executing the port reading process (PORT_RD), the constant “0” may be specified by the label (_PORT_RD) instead of being specified directly. As a result, the readability of the program is improved, and the development efficiency of the game control program can be improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned prior art (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-174833), the upper address is set in advance and the lower address is designated, and the number (processing index) is designated as in the present embodiment. Not something to do. Therefore, when the address of the process is changed, the instruction for executing the process needs to be modified each time, so that the development efficiency cannot be improved as compared with the case where the number is designated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the processing index is 0 to 15 and the number of processings defined in the processing address table is 16, the capacity of the index is 4 bits. As a result, the storage capacity required to specify the process to be executed by the INVD instruction can be reduced as compared with the case of designating the (lower) address. Further, since the instruction part (opcode) of the INVD instruction is composed of 4 bits, it can be composed of a total of 8 bits (1 byte) together with the capacity of the index (operand). Therefore, the word length of the INVD instruction becomes 1 byte, and the number of clocks for the main control MPU 1311 to call the processing specified by the INVD instruction is reduced compared to the case where the processing is called by the normal calling instruction (INV instruction). It is also possible to reduce the program capacity.

Further, in the present embodiment, the INVD instruction is frequently used in the processing executed when the power is turned on and the processing during the game continuation (main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.), while it is used in the power-off processing. The frequency is decreasing. This is to prevent an increase in overhead at the time of calling a process by increasing the number of reference points in the memory while the power is cut off, and to suppress power consumption as much as possible. Further, the power-off process is less frequently executed than the process during game continuation, the specifications are not changed frequently, and the number of processes that can be called by the INVD instruction is limited. The processing called at the time of power-off is configured not to be executed by the INVD instruction except for general-purpose processing. As described above, in the power-off processing, the control load is simplified and the processing execution load is reduced rather than using the INVD instruction to reduce the program capacity.

Subsequently, a procedure for executing the process by the INVD instruction will be described. FIG. 374 is a diagram for explaining the operation when executing the INVD instruction in the present embodiment. FIG. 374 illustrates changes in the program counter and the stack pointer when the INVD instruction stored in the address “80A4h” is executed.

When the INVD instruction is executed, first, the address that is the return destination after the processing executed by the INVD instruction is completed is saved in the stack. In the example of FIG. 374, the INVD instruction stored in the address “80A4h” is executed, and the word length of the INVD instruction is 1 byte, so the value saved in the stack is “80A5h”.

Next, the 2-byte length data (callee address) corresponding to the number (operand, processing index) specified by the INVD instruction is fetched from the processing address table. The fetched 2-byte data (callee address) is set in the program counter, and the specified process is called. Here, the procedure for calling the designated processing will be described with reference to FIG. 375.

FIG. 375 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for specifying the process to be called by the INVD instruction in this embodiment. Here, a procedure for executing the port reading process (PORT_RD) will be described. As shown in FIG. 372, the port read processing (PORT_RD) is defined at the beginning (0th) of the processing address table.

The number specified by the INVD instruction shown in FIG. 375 is "_PORT_RD", and referring to the INVD instruction processing address number definition, the actual value of "_PORT_RD" is "0". Then, the processing address table is referenced to identify the instruction corresponding to the designated number. Specifically, "PORT_RD" is specified. The left column of the processing address table in FIG. 375 corresponds to the number of rows and is added for the sake of explanation. As shown in FIG. 372, it is not included in the actual processing address table. The INVD instruction specifies the instruction corresponding to the designated number. “PORT_RD” is a label indicating the processing address (“80D4h”).

When the address of the process designated by the INVD instruction is specified, the program counter is updated to the address of the designated process. Returning to the explanation of FIG. 374, when the INVD instruction is executed, the program counter is updated to “80D4h” which is the start address of the port reading process “PORT_RD”. At this time, the value of the stack pointer is moved by 2 bytes and updated from "01F8h" to "01F6h" because the address at the time of processing return of the calling source is stored in the stack area.

After that, the process of the callee (port read process “PORT_RD”) is executed, and the instructions are sequentially executed from the callee address (“80D4h”). After that, in order to return to the calling source with a return instruction, the return address saved in the stack area is returned to the program counter, and the subsequent processing is executed sequentially. At this time, the value of the program counter is updated from the address "80E8h" of the return instruction to the address "80A5h" saved in the stack area. Further, by changing the stack pointer from “01F6h” to “01F8h”, the area where the return destination address of the stack area is stored can be used again. After returning to the processing of the calling source, the processing is sequentially executed from the address “80A5h”.

As described above, the INVD instruction according to the present embodiment can call a process with a smaller number of clocks than a normal process call instruction, that is, at a high speed, and further reduce the program capacity. In particular, as described above, by arranging that frequently called processing can be called by the INVD instruction, it is possible to speed up the entire control processing. In this embodiment, 16 types of processing are defined as defined in the processing address table (FIG. 372). Specifically, port reading processing (PORT_RD), data setting processing (DAT_SET), work area setting processing 1 (WORK_AD), work area setting processing 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL), 2-byte data search processing (LD_HLA_HL), command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1), command storage processing (COM_SET), output determination common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1), output determination common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2), output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET), fluctuation information number search processing (TI_SRCH), unauthorized notification These are a setting process (ILG_OUTSET), a data search process (HLA_SRCH), a multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL), and an SPI 2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA).

Hereinafter, each process executed by the INVD instruction in this embodiment will be described. 376 to 389 show examples of programs (modules) for each processing. An input register, an output register, a protection register, and a caller are described in the comment at the beginning of each program. The input register is a register that stores a value set by the calling module. The called module is executed using the value set in the input register. The output register is a register that stores the value set by the module to be called. The execution result of the process is stored. The protection register is a register whose use is restricted in the called module. It may be used if the values at the start and end of execution of the called module are the same. For example, when the relevant register is destroyed (used), it is temporarily stored in a stack etc. and then restored after use. If so, it can be used. The caller is a module that calls the module. If the number of modules described here is large, it can be recognized that the module is frequently used. Since the actual number of executions depends on the calling frequency of the calling source module itself, the usage frequency is not necessarily low even if the number of modules is small.

FIG. 376 is a diagram showing a program example of the port read processing (PORT_RD) of the present embodiment. The port reading process is a process of reading an input signal of a designated port. Specifically, the port reading process (PORT_RD) reads the input signal of the port corresponding to the port address specified in the W register (input register) and outputs the port data to the A register (output register). At this time, the input signal of the port is read a plurality of times, and a predetermined flag (for example, J flag, Z flag) included in PSW (processor status word, status register; output register) is set depending on whether the acquired signals match. Update. This makes it possible not only to read the input signal from the designated port, but also to determine whether or not the signal is normally input.

FIG. 377 is a diagram showing a program example of the data setting process (DAT_SET) of the present embodiment. The data setting process is a process of collectively setting a series of data defined in the table specified by the setting data address set in the HL register in the work area (for example, the DE register). In addition, the number of data settings (the number of data items in the table) is defined in the top data (record) of the table specified in the data setting process, and the subsequent data (records) are (lower) of the work area that stores the setting values. It is composed of an address and a set value stored in the work area. The set values are sequentially read by calling a work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL) described later with an INVD instruction. As described above, when the data setting process is started, the data setting number stored in the address specified in the input register is first acquired, and then the data (record) for the data setting number is acquired It is possible to acquire a series of data regardless of the number.

FIG. 378 is a diagram showing a program example of the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD) of the present embodiment. The work area setting process 1 is a process of setting a work area temporarily used when the program is executed. In this embodiment, the address of the work area is stored in the DE register. The address of the work area is determined by the data in the table specified by the address stored in the HL register. The work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD) is also called from a process executed by another INVD instruction. As described above, the processing executed by the INVD instruction is composed of a very short program that realizes a general-purpose function, and can be called multiple times. As a result, by combining the processing called by the INVD command, it is possible to realize the speedup of the entire game control. Moreover, since the duplication of the program code can be avoided, the program capacity can be compressed.

FIG. 379 is a diagram illustrating a program example of the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL) of the present embodiment. In the work area setting process 2, after the work area setting process 1 is executed, by setting the designated setting data address to the next address, it is possible to simplify the process of continuously setting the work area. Become.

Here, regarding an example of using the data setting processing, the work area setting processing 1 and the work area setting processing 2, according to the program of the data setting processing shown in FIG. A process of acquiring data from a table composed of set values to be stored and storing it in the work area will be described.

In the data setting processing, the number of records stored in the first row of the table specified by the setting data address is acquired, and the work area is set by the work area setting processing 2 by the number of records and the data of the work area is set. Repeat settings (loop processing). In the loop processing, first, the setting data address is updated (incremented) to move to the next line, and then the work area setting processing 2 is called by the INVD instruction.

In the work area setting process 2, the work area is set by the address specified by the setting data address in the work area setting process 1. Then, the setting data address is updated (incremented) to be updated to the address of the data storage area. After that, the process returns from the work area setting process 2 to the data setting process, and the data specified by the set data address (value set in the HL register) is stored in the work area (value set in the DE register). When data corresponding to the number of records in the table is set in the corresponding work area, the process exits from the loop process and the data setting process ends.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the structure of the program can be simplified and the program capacity can be reduced by hierarchically calling the data setting process, the work area setting process 2, and the work area setting process by the INVD command.

FIG. 380 is a diagram showing a program example of the 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL) of the present embodiment. The 2-byte data search process is a process of selecting an address set in the data table specified by the HL register (input register) and setting it in the HL register. Since the address value is 2 bytes, the address of the target data table is specified by doubling (adding 2) the A register (input register), which is the selected value, and this address is stored in the HL register (output register). Reset the setting. For example, when shifting to various processes in the special symbol/special electric auditors product control process, it is used when executing a process of selecting a shift destination address based on a job number (selection value) based on a jump table.

FIG. 381 is a diagram illustrating a program example of the big hit information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET), the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and the command storing process (COM_SET) of the present embodiment. Normally, in a process called by an INVD instruction or the like, a return (BK) instruction or the like is arranged at the end, and the processing of the calling source is returned. In the big hit information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) and the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) shown in FIG. 381, there is no instruction for returning to the calling source process, so after the big hit information command setting process ends. The command buffer setting process 1 is subsequently executed, and the command storing process is further executed. Then, by the return instruction arranged at the end of the command storing process, the process returns to the calling source process.

When the command buffer setting process 1 is called by the INVD instruction in the big hit information command setting process, as described with reference to FIG. 374, it is necessary to store the return destination address in the stack area. By sequentially arranging these, these processes can be omitted and the program capacity can be reduced. Further, since the stack area is not used, it is possible to obtain the effect of reducing the memory usage.

The big hit information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) is a process of setting a big hit information command that specifies an operation when a big hit occurs. Set the corresponding big hit information command according to the situation such as opening and closing of the special winning opening in the big hit state. After that, the command buffer setting process 1 and the command storing process that are continuously executed are transmitted from the transmission buffer to the destination.

The command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) specifies the command to be actually transmitted by the reference command data (MODE value) and the command addition data for concretely specifying the command, and the command storage process described below stores the command in the transmission buffer. Store. The command stored in the transmission buffer is appropriately transmitted to the destination. The “reference command data” is composed of 2 bytes. For example, in the case of the variation pattern of Toku-zu 1, “1001h” (upper 1 byte: variation pattern type, lower 1 byte: command reference value (start from 01h) ). When the fluctuation pattern 5 (05h) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1, the result of adding the value (05h) of the fluctuation pattern 5 to the lower 8 bits of the above-mentioned reference command "1001h" ("1006h" ) Is the command to be sent.

The command storage process (COM_SET) is a process of storing a command or the like in the transmission buffer. As a specific procedure, first, the state of the transmission buffer is determined to determine whether or not there is a space equal to or larger than a predetermined number of bytes. If there is no space in the transmission buffer, the process is terminated, while if there is space in the transmission buffer, the status and mode forming the command stored in the HL register are set in the transmission buffer. Further, the sum value obtained by adding the value of the H register and the value of the L register is set in the transmission buffer. In the case of the command “1006h” in which the variation pattern 5 (05h) is selected as the variation pattern of the above-mentioned special figure 1, “10h”+“06h”=“16h” is the sum value. The sum value does not necessarily have to be set in the transmission buffer.

The command stored in the send buffer consists of 2 bytes (excluding the sum value), and the 1st byte indicates the type of command to be sent (variation pattern, symbol stop, pending storage, big hit, etc.) 2 bytes The eye indicates a specific operation for the type (specific variation pattern number if the variation pattern type).

The transmission buffer is a FIFO memory for serial communication built in the main control MPU 1311, and is a memory different from the RAM 1312. The transmission buffer is configured to store a plurality of bytes of information (there is a capacity of 64 bytes). The commands stored in the transmission buffer are serially output by the hardware to the transmission destination in the order in which they are stored first.

FIG. 382 is a diagram showing a program example of the output determination common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1) of the present embodiment. The output determination common process 1 acquires data from the information determination output data (value indicated by the HL register) and determines whether or not a flag is set in the work area (lower address) set in the information determination output data. If the flag is set, the information set corresponding to the flag (work area) is set in the A register (port output calculation value). The value output to the port is stored in the A register by looping the above work the number of times set in the information determination output data. For example, when the information determination output data is “solenoid information determination output data”, 3 is set as the number of loops, the content of the special winning opening 1 solenoid flag (DSOL1_FG) is first determined, and DSOL1_FG is set to 1 (flag value ) Is set, _TDSOL1_PB (special winning opening solenoid 1-bit data) set corresponding to DSOL1_FG is set as an output value (the special winning opening solenoid 1 is output by outputting this value). It is turned on). Such processing is repeated for the number of times set in the solenoid information determination output data (three times).

FIG. 383 is a diagram showing a program example of the output determination common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2) of the present embodiment. The output determination common processing 2 acquires data from the state determination output data and processes the port output value of the LED and the like. The state determination output data has a table structure like the information determination output data, and acquires the number of records in the table and processes the data for the number of records.

FIG. 384 is a diagram showing a program example of the output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) of the present embodiment. The output port data setting process is a process for setting the information of the I/O area in the output port or the internal register, and the output destination (output port, internal register) is set to the output destination set in the table (setting data address). ) Output the set value set corresponding to.

FIG. 385 is a diagram showing a program example of the variable information number search processing (TI_SRCH) of the present embodiment. The variable information number search process is a process of searching the predetermined data area for an information number that matches the designated comparison value, and is used when selecting the variable pattern information based on the random number of the variable pattern. For example, the comparison value is stored in the W register, the address of the data area is stored in the HL register, and the search result is written in the A register. Specifically, the contents of the W register (random number value, etc.) and the information set in the table specified by the HL register (value to be compared with the random number (judgment value)) are compared, and the condition (for example, random number value< The processing is repeated until the judgment value is satisfied, and when the condition is satisfied, the information (search result (for example, variation pattern number) etc.) set corresponding to the judgment value is stored in the A register and the caller is returned to.

FIG. 386 is a diagram showing a program example of the injustice notification setting processing (ILG_OUTSET) of the present embodiment. The fraud notification setting process is a process for making a notification when an abnormality occurs. Specifically, the designated abnormality display command is set by the command storing process, and the time for performing the injustice notification is set.

FIG. 387 is a diagram showing a program example of the data search process (HLA_SRCH) of the present embodiment. The data search process is a process for searching the specified data from the specified search data. In the data search process, first, data matching the comparison value is searched from the area (address) storing the specified search data. At this time, the data to be searched is the address of the area to be searched next. Furthermore, the area of the searched address is searched based on the specified selection value. The data search process is executed by combining a plurality of search processes, and the subsequent search process is executed based on the search result of the preceding search process. In this embodiment, the first search is performed by the 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL), and the next search is performed by the variable information number search process (TI_SRCH). As a result, it is possible to specify a plurality of tables defined in accordance with the game state and the like in the first search and acquire a specific variation information number in the next search. By implementing in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of multi-step search, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data by holding the data stepwise.

As described above, in the present embodiment, one process is configured by combining a plurality of processes that can be called by the INVD instruction having a shorter word length than other calling instructions. By calling the processing configured in this way with the INVD instruction, it is possible to speed up the entire processing while reducing the program capacity. Further, as long as it is a process executed in multiple stages, it is applicable not only to the data search process, but, for example, if a plurality of operation processes that can be called by the INVD instruction are defined, these can be combined to make a more complicated operation. The processing can be realized.

FIG. 388 is a diagram showing a program example of the multiplication value addition address acquisition processing (MUL_WA_HL) of the present embodiment. The multiplication value addition address acquisition process is a process of multiplying the specified base value by the multiplication value and adding it to the specified base address value. It is a collection of routine operations that are frequently executed, and the program can be simplified.

FIG. 389 is a diagram showing a program example of the multiplication value addition address acquisition processing SPI2 byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA) of the present embodiment. The SPI 2-byte output process is a process for setting output data to the SPI port when outputting 2-byte data by SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication. SPI communication is used when transmitting data to a light emitter such as an LED or a driver such as a motor or solenoid.

As described above, the process called by the INVD instruction according to the present embodiment is composed of a short process of several to several tens of bytes, so that the versatility is enhanced, and the process can be called with the word length of 1 byte by the INVD instruction. Therefore, it is possible to realize the speedup of the entire game control program and reduce the program capacity.

[22-3. INVS command]
In the INVD instruction, the procedure for calling the process (subroutine) is made efficient by storing the address in the process address table in advance. However, since only predefined processes can be called, when adding or changing a process to be called newly, the contents of the processing address table and the definition information of the processing address table number must be updated. It was Moreover, the word length is set to 1 byte by limiting the number of processes that can be called by the INVD instruction to 1 byte, but if it is applied to 17 or more types of processes, the processing speed will be deteriorated. There was a possibility that the effect of using the product would be impaired.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, an INVS instruction having a higher degree of freedom than the INVD instruction is proposed while having a word length smaller than that of the normal INV instruction. By storing the process (subroutine) in a specific area, the INVS instruction can reduce the overhead (procedure, number of clocks) for calling the process, and realize the same process with a word length smaller than that of the INV instruction. .. Further, if the process is stored in the specific area, an arbitrary number of processes (subroutines) can be defined, so that the degree of freedom can be made higher than that of the INVD instruction. The specific area is included in the program/data area of the ROM area described in FIG.

Next, the INVS instruction will be further described. FIG. 390 is a diagram showing an excerpt of a program for calling a process according to the INVS command of the present embodiment. (A) is a program excerpting a part for calling a solenoid drive process and a motor drive process. Solenoid drive processing program examples (part), (C) show motor drive processing program examples (part). The program example shown in FIG. 390 is composed of “address”, “program”, “mnemonic”, and “comment”. "Address" is the location where the program is stored. The “program” is a so-called machine language (machine language), and is an instruction that the main control MPU 1311 can directly interpret and execute. A "mnemonic" is a shorthand memory symbol that makes it easy to program a machine language (a sequence of numbers) for executing a program. The value of “program” corresponds to the value of “mnemonic”. The "comment" is a description for making the program easier to read, and is ignored when the processing is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 390, the solenoid drive process (“89A6h”) and the motor drive process (“89CCh”) are called by the INVS command. In the INVS instruction, the upper 4 bits (“Ch”) form an instruction to access the first area (8000h to 8BFFh) in the specific area, and the lower 12 bits indicate the address of the process to be called. Specifically, the lower 12 bits (“9A6h”) of the program “C9A6” that calls the solenoid drive processing specify the address for storing the solenoid drive processing, and the upper 4 bits of the first area are fixed. 8**h”, the address of the storage location of the solenoid drive processing in combination with the lower 12 bits of the program is “89A6h” as shown in FIG. 390(B). Similarly, in the motor driving process, the lower 12 bits are "9CCh", so the address of the storage location is "89CCh". As described above, in the present embodiment, the process (procedure, number of clocks) until the process to be called is specified by storing the process in the specific region is reduced, and the instruction is stored in the first region with a 2-byte length. It is possible to execute processing.

In addition, although the second area (8C00h to 93FFh) of the specific area can be accessed, in that case, unlike the case of accessing the first area, the upper 1 byte becomes the operation code of the INVS instruction and the lower 2 Since the byte is the callee address, the instruction has a length of 3 bytes.

The game control program is designed with the start address at 8000h, and the frequency of accessing the first area is much higher than the frequency of accessing the second area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity by shortening the word length when accessing a frequently used area, and to reduce the processing time (clock number) for the instruction.

On the other hand, in the INV instruction that executes the processing stored in any area in the memory, the upper 2 bytes are the code information (opcode) of the INV instruction, and the lower 2 bytes are the callee address (operand). It is a byte length instruction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by using the INVS instruction for executing the processing stored in the specific area, the processing with a smaller word length is performed as compared with the INV instruction for executing the processing stored in any area in the memory. Can be executed.

In the present embodiment, a process (subroutine) having a high calling frequency is arranged in a specific region (particularly, the first region), and a process having a low calling frequency (for example, an error process or a test signal is provided in a region other than the specific region). It is possible to speed up the whole process by arranging the output process) and data. If the capacity of the program code is limited by rules or the like, the program is arranged with priority given to the first area. If the capacity of the program code is smaller than the capacity of the first area, if possible, all the processes called by the INVS instruction are stored in the first area. Further, all the processes (programs) called by the INVS instruction may be configured to be stored in the first area, and the programs may not be stored in the second area. By clearly defining the area for storing the program, the configuration can be simplified and the management can be facilitated.

Further, at least the processing directly related to the game control is arranged in the first area, and the error processing and the display of the winning ratio monitor (base monitor) which are not directly related to the game control are arranged in the second area. As described above, by arranging the frequently called processing in the first area, it is possible to speed up the entire game control processing, but by collecting related processing, the readability of the entire program is improved and developed. It may be arranged to increase efficiency. Since the process that can be called by the INVS command can be freely arranged in a specific area, for example, when there are multiple specifications for the same model, control common to each specification is aggregated in a predetermined area, and each specification is specified. Processes with different controls (depending on specifications) are collectively arranged in another area. Specifically, the special figure related process, the special electric auditors product related process, the universal figure related process, the normal electric auditors product related process, etc. are not arranged in a distributed manner, but related processes (for example, fluctuation start process, fluctuation Special processing related processing such as middle processing, symbol determination processing, and fluctuation stop processing) are collectively arranged. Further, the programs may be arranged in an order arranged in accordance with the execution timing even in the collectively arranged area, for example, according to the control executed in the normal game. Specifically, in the special figure-related processing, it may be arranged in an order according to the timing such as at the time of winning a start, at the start of variation, and at the end of variation.

On the other hand, even game machines of different models can be used universally, and error processing not affected by game specifications and display processing of the ratio monitor (base monitor) are collectively arranged. Since these processes may be used by multiple types of models, it is convenient to manage them separately. For example, if there is a team that develops multiple types of models in parallel, while the processes that depend on the game specifications described above are shared within the team, the processes common to these models can be shared between the teams. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the entire game machine development. In addition, the processing depending on the game specifications may differ depending on the model even if the upper limit of the capacity is fixed. By arranging in two areas, the address can be made common even when the process is called from the game control programs of different models.

As described above, in the INVS instruction, it is possible to arrange a program (module) in a specific area in accordance with development efficiency and management efficiency (maintenance efficiency). As a result, in the INVD instruction, general-purpose processes such as port reading and data reading were preferentially defined in order to limit the number of processes that can be defined, but the processes depending on the game content are arranged collectively. This makes it possible to facilitate management such as consolidating processing for each function, and improve development efficiency.

It is also possible to execute the process by the INVD command in the module called by the INVS command. With this configuration, it is possible to further speed up the processing called by the INVS instruction and reduce the program capacity. Further, it is possible to speed up the entire game control program and reduce the program capacity. Becomes It is also possible to call the module with the INVS instruction within the module called with the INVD instruction. Since the number of processes that can be defined in the processing address table is limited, highly versatile processing that could not be defined in the processing address table can be called by the INVS instruction. As described above, the processes can be mutually called within the modules called from the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction.

Further, even if a process that is executed at a predetermined interval like the timer interrupt process and is executed very frequently is placed in the specific area (first area), even if it can be called from the timer interrupt process like the setting operation process, Processes that are rarely actually called may be placed outside the specific area. With this configuration, the capacity of the specific area can be secured without reducing the processing speed.

Further, the program may be arranged only in the first area where the speed-up effect by the INVS instruction is more exerted, and the second area may not be accessed by the INVS instruction. This makes it possible to simplify the management of the storage area such as the arrangement of programs. For example, by allocating a program that defines a process that can be shared by different models to the outside of the second area, which is less restricted, the degree of freedom in arranging the program is increased, and the program can be shared when the program is shared. It is possible to reduce restrictions caused by differences in capacity. Further, even if the specification of the INVS instruction is changed due to the change of the specification of the main control MPU 1311, if the area accessible by the INVS instruction is single, it becomes easy to cope with the basic configuration of the game control program. Since there is no need to make large changes, existing programs and data can be used, and development efficiency can be improved.

[22-4. INVI command]
Up to this point, the mode for accelerating the instruction for calling the process has been described, but a means for simplifying the program by implementing the command that integrates the processes that are frequently combined and executed will be described.

When a specific program is executed when executing the game control, if the information in the memory is rewritten by another process executed in parallel, the progress of the game may be hindered. Therefore, in order to prevent the information stored in the area commonly accessed by a plurality of processes from being rewritten, a means for prohibiting interruption until the processing is completed is generally used. In particular, a procedure of prohibiting an interrupt when a specific process is executed and canceling the interrupt prohibition after the specific process is completed is frequently performed.

In game control, procedures such as interrupt prohibition, process calling, and interrupt prohibition cancellation are frequently executed. However, since the size of the program area is limited, common steps are omitted and the program size is reduced. It was desired to make it smaller. Therefore, the present embodiment proposes an INVI instruction that extends the INV instruction that calls a process and that prohibits interrupts before calling the process.

Since the INVI instruction specifies and executes the processing to be called, the execution procedure is the same as the INV instruction. However, as the internal processing when executing the INVI instruction, necessary data is stored in the stack area and the interrupt is prohibited before the program counter is moved to the designated address. Then, the called processing is executed. At the end of the called processing, a BKI instruction that returns to the calling processing while returning to the interrupt state before calling the processing is executed. That is, if the interrupt state of the INVI instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is maintained as it is, and if the interrupt state of the INVI instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state is released. Hereinafter, a series of procedures of the INVI instruction will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 391 is a diagram for explaining the procedure of the INVI instruction in this embodiment. The procedure at the time of executing the INVI instruction stored in the address “8200h” will be described.

Since the storage destination of the process designated by the INVI instruction is "A800h", the value of the program counter changes from "8200h" to "A800h". At this time, the address “8202h” (the address next to the calling source, the return address after the processing of the called destination is finished) and the PSW (Program Status Word) at the time of calling the processing are stored in the stack area, which indicates the position where the processing returns. To do. Therefore, the stack pointer changes from "01F8h" to "01F5h". In the example of FIG. 391, the return address is stored in “01F6h” and “01F7h”, and the PSW is stored in “01F8h”.

The PSW is a control word (status register) for controlling the order in which the instructions are executed in the main control MPU 1311, and for indicating and holding the state of the computer system related to a specific program. The status of the control MPU 1311 is also included. Further, the contents of the flag register, the interrupt status, etc. are collectively stored in one byte. The PSW will be described with reference to FIG. 392.

392 is a figure which shows an example of PSW of this embodiment, (A) is a structure of PSW, (B) is description of each structure. PSW is a jump status flag (JF), zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), overflow flag (VF), register bank flag (RES), interrupt master enable. It is composed of a flag (IMF).

The jump status flag (JF) is a flag used to determine the operating conditions of jump instructions and subroutine instructions. ZF or CF is set according to the executed instruction.

The zero flag (ZF) is set to 1 when the operation result or the transfer data is "00H (0000H)", and is cleared to 0 otherwise. Further, in the bit/flag operation instruction, 1 is set when the designated bit is 0, and cleared to 0 when the designated bit is 1.

The carry flag (CF) sets carry/borrow at the time of carry flag calculation. Further, in the shift/rotate instruction or the bit/flag operation instruction, the instruction execution content is set. The half carry flag (HF) sets the carry/borrow of the 4th bit in the case of 8-bit operation.

The sine flag (SF) is set to 1 when the MSB (maximum valid bit number) of the operation result is 1, and is cleared to 0 otherwise. When the most significant bit indicates a positive or negative sign, the sign can identify the sign. The overflow flag (VF) is set to 1 when overflow occurs in the operation result, and cleared to 0 otherwise.

The register bank flag (RES) indicates the bank selected by the general-purpose register. In case of bank 0, 0 is set, and in case of bank 1, 1 is set.

The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) disables interrupts when IMF=0 and enables interrupts when IMF=1. When a DI (disable interrupt) instruction is executed, IMF=0 and interrupts are prohibited. Further, when the EI (enable interrupt) instruction is executed, IMF=1 and the interrupt is permitted. An interrupt that can inhibit/enable the generation of an interrupt is called a maskable interrupt.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 391. When the INVI instruction is executed, the value of IMF included in PSW is set to "0" and the interrupt is prohibited. At this time, the interrupt is prohibited along with the execution of the INVI instruction without executing the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). Further, the value of the program counter is set to "A800h", and the processes are sequentially executed from the address "A800h". When the processing is executed up to the address "A80Eh", the BKI instruction for returning to the calling source is executed. In the BKI instruction, the return destination address stored in the stack area is set to the value of the program counter, and the contents of PSW are restored to the contents of PSW saved in the stack area. Specifically, the value of the program counter is set from "A800h" to "8202h" which is the return destination address. Further, since the content of PSW is returned to the content of PSW before the execution of the INVI instruction, if the value of IMF (interrupt master enable flag) before the execution of the INVI instruction is 1 (interruption enabled), the interrupt inhibition is released. Since the value stored in the stack area is erased when the INVI instruction is executed, the value of the stack pointer is set from "01F5h" to "01F8h".

As described above, when the processing is executed by the INVI instruction, the interrupt can be prohibited until the execution of the designated processing is completed without explicitly executing the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). Further, by returning to the calling source by executing the BKI instruction, if the interrupt is in the enabled state before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupt prohibition canceling instruction (EI instruction) is not explicitly executed, and the interrupt is released. It becomes possible to release the inhibition, and if the interrupt is in the enabled state before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupt disabled state is maintained. The present invention can be used not only for executing the INVI instruction but also for returning to the original processing after executing the processing in the state where the interrupt is prohibited by the DI instruction or the like. Further, the BKI instruction is not an instruction to directly release the interrupt prohibition, but only returns the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) to the value before the execution of the INVI instruction by returning the PSW to the state before the execution of the INVI instruction. If it is in the interrupt enabled state before the instruction is executed, it is returned from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state, while if it is the interrupt disabled state before the execution of the INVI instruction, the interrupt disabled state is continued after the return. Further, since it is not necessary to execute the interrupt prohibition instruction and the interrupt prohibition cancellation instruction, the control can be simplified and the program capacity can be compressed. As a result, the processing can be executed without the data being changed by other processing.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the area in which the program can be mounted (usage area, game area) is defined in advance, and basically it is prohibited to execute the program outside the usage area. However, some processing such as test signal processing is not directly related to game control, so execution outside the usage area is permitted. Further, since the ratio monitor (base monitor) and the process related to the error are not directly related to the game control, the execution outside the use area is allowed. When such processing is executed, it is possible to suppress the influence on other processing by prohibiting the interrupt by the INVI instruction and saving and executing the PSW (status register).

Further, when calling a process stored in an area outside the used area by the INVI instruction, it is possible to specify the storage destination by using the processing address table like the INVD instruction described above. There is a risk of inconvenience because the process is called by directly specifying an address outside the area. Therefore, it is possible to set a temporary area which is always passed for executing the INVI instruction. In this case, the process called from the INVI instruction is defined in the limited temporary area (for example, the range of “A800h” to “A8FFh”). However, since it is not possible to define all the processing within this limited range, the address of the temporary area is specified from the processing of the caller, but the processing actually stored outside the used area is specified from that address. Run. Specifically, it moves from the designated address within the use area to the address where the process designated by the jump instruction or the like is stored. FIG. 393 shows a specific example.

FIG. 393 is a diagram showing a program example for explaining the arrangement of the process called by the INVI instruction of the present embodiment, (A) is a program example of the area from which the process is read, and (B) is the substance of the process. An example program is shown below. Here, the area up to the address “A8FFh” is the used area, and the area after the address “A900h” is outside the area.

As shown in FIG. 393(A), the process called by the INVI command is defined by a set of a label indicating the process and a jump command (JP). For example, when the performance display monitor process is called by the INVI command, it is described as "INVI_EX_MONITOR_OUT". The label “_EX_MONITOR_OUT” is predefined in another area. The value of “_EX_MONITOR_OUT” is “A900h”.

When the instruction “INVI_EX_MONITOR_OUT” is executed, the value of the program counter is updated to the address “A800h” corresponding to the defined label, and the PSW is saved in the stack area. Further, the value of IMF (interruption master enable flag) of PSW is set to 0 (interruption disabled). After that, the performance display monitor process (“EX_MONITOR_OUT”) defined at the address “A900h” which is the jump destination set in the operand of the jump instruction is executed.

Since the performance display monitor processing is processing outside the used area, the contents of the registers are saved so as not to affect the processing within the used area (register saving processing within the used area). After that, the performance display monitor processing main body is executed. Finally, the saved contents of the register are restored, the process of the calling source is restored by the BKI instruction, and the interrupt state before the execution of the process is restored.

With the above configuration, the processing outside the used area can be easily separated, and the management of the program can be facilitated. Further, since interrupts are prohibited during execution of the INVI instruction, interrupts are prohibited while processing outside the use area is executed, ensuring independence from the processing stored in the use area, and safety is ensured. Can be secured. In the example described with reference to FIG. 393, the area in which the process called by the INVI instruction is stored is limited, but the area is not limited to this. This makes it possible to simplify calling of a process stored in an arbitrary area and executed in a state where interrupts are prohibited.

[22-5. Application example of improved call instruction]
A specific application example of various instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction, INVI instruction) for calling the above-described processing (subroutine) will be described. Here, it is applied to timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. A specific application example of the process call instruction will be described together with the program code regarding the game stop process included in the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing using various calling instructions of this embodiment. The basic function of the timer interrupt process is the same as the contents described so far.

The main control MPU 1311 first specifies the register bank 1 (step P101). As described above, the main control MPU 1311 is provided with two types of register groups, bank 0 and bank 1, and switches between banks to use either one. Bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt process, and bank 0 is used in the main control side main process. Note that it is not always necessary to switch banks in the timer interrupt processing, and for example, the register value may be saved in the stack area and restored after the processing is completed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step P102). In the switch input process, as described above, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a set value confirmation process for determining whether the value of the set state management area is within the normal range (step P103).

When the setting value confirmation process ends, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming machine is in the game-enabled state (step P104). When the game is not in a playable state (result of step P104 is “NO”), that is, when the setting operation is performed (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the setting operation time process is executed (step P105).

In the setting operation process, a process for changing or confirming the settings of the gaming machine is executed. Load the setting data for the setting operation and set it to the corresponding output port. Specifically, the power failure clear signal is output OFF and the ACK output port is cleared. Further, the LED common port and the LED cathode port are turned off, the motor port and the solenoid port are cleared, and a security signal is output. After that, the setting display process and the setting confirmation/change process are executed.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine is in the game-enabled state (result of step P104 is “YES”), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is a game stop factor (step P106). When there is a game stop factor (result of step P106 is "YES"), game stop processing is executed (step P107). In the game stop processing, processing necessary for stopping the game machine is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 395.

Further, when there is no game stop factor (result of step P106 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the game possible process to advance the game (step P108). The game possible process is a process for playing a normal game. Specifically, switch input special processing, timer update processing, prize ball control processing, frame command reception processing, fraud detection processing, switch output command output processing, performance display monitor processing, special symbol/special electric auditors product control processing , Solenoid drive processing, motor drive processing, output data setting processing, and the like. Each process is as described above.

When the game possible process or the game stopped process ends, the main control MPU 1311 executes a display LED output process (step P109). Further, after the display LED output process or the setting operation process is completed, the test signal output process is executed (step P110). In the test signal output process, a process for outputting a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the gaming machine is performed. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes processing such as setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step P111) and returning the register bank to 0. , Terminate the timer interrupt processing.

The outline of the timer interrupt processing has been described above. Next, processing using various calling instructions will be described. As described above, the game stop processing of the timer interrupt processing will be extracted and described. First, the procedure of the game stop processing will be described, and an application example of various calling instructions will be appropriately described with reference to the program code.

FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing a procedure of game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. FIG. 396 is a program code of the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. The game stop process is a process for stopping the game when an abnormality such as a magnetic abnormality or a vibration abnormality is detected or when the setting is changed. In addition to magnetic and vibration abnormalities, there are cases where the door/main unit frame is open, radio wave abnormalities, and prize winning abnormalities. Depending on the type of gaming machine, only error notification may be given, or the game may be stopped. In particular, in a type in which a big hit can be obtained by passing through a specific area (V area) in the accessory, the big hit can be obtained by a fraudulent prize. Therefore, when an abnormality is detected, the game is stopped as a cheating act. It

When the game stop processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets a game stop command (step P121). The game stop command is a command that notifies the outside that the game machine will be stopped. Referring to the program code, in setting the game stop command, first, the command addition value (game stop factor; PLAY_STOP_NO) is set in the A register when it is determined whether or not there is a game stop factor in the process of step P106 described above. In this state, the reference command data (_ILG_MAG2_CM-1) is set in the HL register, and then the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) is executed.

The command buffer setting process 1 is a process called by the INVD instruction. The variable "_CMBF_SET1" designated by the INVD instruction is a number corresponding to the address of the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) defined in the process address table, and is "4" (INVD4) in this embodiment. There is. When the number of the processing address table is designated by the INVD instruction, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the processing address table and executes the processing corresponding to the designated number. As a result, the processing can be executed without directly designating the address, so that it is possible to speed up the calling of the processing and reduce the program capacity.

In the command buffer setting process 1, as described above, the game stop command is specified based on the reference command data (the value of the HL register) and the command addition data (the value of the A register, the value corresponding to the game stop factor), It is stored in the transmission buffer by the command storing process and the game stop command is output.

After storing the game stop command in the transmission buffer, the main control MPU 1311 executes external output processing (GAIB_OUT) for outputting external output information (step P123). The external output information includes, for example, symbol determination data, starting opening data, special winning opening winning data, main winning ball data, security data, and the like.

The external output process (GAIB_OUT) is executed by the INVS instruction. In the INVS instruction, as described above, by storing the process in the specific area, the process can be called up more quickly than when the process is stored in an arbitrary address. The external output process (GAIB_OUT) is stored in a specific area because it is frequently executed, such as being called from the output data setting process (PORT_SET) during the game (when the game is available). In the output data setting process (PORT_SET), in addition to the external output process (GAIB_OUT), the output determination common process 1 (OHAN_SUB1), the output determination common process 2 (OHAN_SUB2), etc. are performed in order to speed up the entire process. A large number of processes called by the INVD command defined in the process address table and by the INVS command stored in the specific area are called.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes SPI communication processing for outputting various signals to be transmitted to a driving body such as a solenoid or the outside by SPI communication (step P124). In the SPI communication process, the data to be output to the WA register is set, the address to which the data set in the WA register is output is set to the E register, and then the SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) is executed. The SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) is a process called by the INVD instruction, like the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and the variable “_SPI_TX__WA” designated by the INVD instruction becomes “14” (INVD14). There is.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets game stop data for stopping the game (step P125). Further, an output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) for setting the set game stop data to the output port is executed (step P126). The game stop data is, for example, data for turning off the power failure clear signal, the LED common port, the LED cathode port, etc., and clearing the motor port, the ACK output port, etc.

The output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) is a process called by the INVD instruction, like the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and the variable “_PORT_DAT_SET” designated by the INVD instruction becomes “10” (INVD10). ing.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes a performance display monitor process of displaying various kinds of information regarding the game on the performance display monitor (step P126). The performance display monitor process only displays various kinds of information, the process directly related to game control is not executed, and the performance display monitor itself is not intended for the player to refer to. Therefore, the performance display monitor process of the present embodiment is stored outside the use area, and interrupts are prohibited while the process of displaying the performance information on the performance display monitor by the INVI command is executed, which is independent of the game control process. Can be executed. At the end of the performance display monitor process, the BKI instruction returns to the interrupt state before the process call and then returns to the caller. Therefore, even if the interrupt state before the process call is the interrupt enable state, the caller It is not necessary to release the interrupt disable with.

Also, the test signal output process in the timer interrupt process is not a normal game but a process that is called at the time of a test and outputs game information, and is therefore stored outside the used area. Initialization processing and backup processing for executing power-off processing and processing outside the used area may be stored outside the used area.

Note that when executing interrupt processing such as timer interrupt processing, it may be possible to disable interrupts to prevent multiple interrupts, but by designing so that there is no problem even if multiple interrupts occur, the timer The interrupt enable state may be set in the interrupt process. Since the INVI instruction of the present embodiment returns to the interrupt state before execution of processing, it can be used without problems in any case regardless of whether multiple interrupts are allowed or not.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by improving the existing instruction for calling the defined processing, it is possible to speed up the entire game control processing and reduce the program capacity. In addition, it is possible to simplify the program by implementing an instruction that integrates the processing that is executed in combination when the processing is called.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one mainly applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the pachi-slot machine, a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, etc. The same operational effect can be achieved in this case as well.

1 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power supply board box 951 Discharge control board (sphere information control means)
1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1311 Main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
13121 Operation circuit 1313 ROM
1314 Main control I/O port 1317 Characteristic ratio display (base display)
1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 First start port 2004 Second start port 4000 Slot machine (game machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol variation display device 4301 Reel 4341 Reel drive motor 4500 Image display body 4600 Main board (game control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 4910 ROM area 4920 RAM area 4930 I/O area 4940 Parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
The game control means comprises a computing means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
The program is configured to include various instructions for performing a predetermined operation and data necessary for executing the instructions,
The various instructions include a specific process execution instruction for executing a specific process among the processes defined by the program,
The arithmetic means automatically disables interrupts when executing the specific processing by the specific processing execution instruction, maintains an interrupt disabled state from the start to the end of the specific processing, and ends the specific processing at the end of the specific processing. A game machine characterized by automatically returning to a state before execution of an execution instruction.